Operation Guide For RTN Ne Management: Imanager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01
Operation Guide for RTN NE Management

Issue Date 02 2010-09-24
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Operation Guide for RTN NE Management
About This Document
About This Document

Related Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document. Product Name iManager U2000 Version V100R002C01
Intended Audience
This document describes the operations, such as how to configure the communication, clock and service of the RTN equipment on the U2000. This document also provides the glossary and the acronyms and abbreviations. This document guides the user to understand basic operations of the U2000. This document is intended for: l l l l Network Monitoring Engineer Data Configuration Engineer NMS Administrators System Maintenance Engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
iii
About This Document
Symbol
Description
CAUTION
TIP
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
NOTE
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }* Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
iv
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
About This Document
Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Based on Product Version V100R002C01

The second release of the iManager U2000 V100R002C01. Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.
Updates in Issue 01 (2010-08-16) Based on Product Version V100R002C01

The first release of the iManager U2000 V100R002C01.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Creating NEs, Links, and Topology Subnets........................................................................1-1
1.1 Creating NEs...................................................................................................................................................1-2 1.1.1 Creating NEs in Batches........................................................................................................................1-2 1.1.2 Creating a Single NE..............................................................................................................................1-4 1.2 Configuring the NE Data.................................................................................................................................1-5 1.2.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually.......................................................................................................1-6 1.2.2 Replicating the NE Data.........................................................................................................................1-7 1.2.3 Uploading the NE Data..........................................................................................................................1-8 1.3 Checking Board Parameters............................................................................................................................1-8 1.4 Creating Links...............................................................................................................................................1-13 1.4.1 Creating Fibers Automatically.............................................................................................................1-13 1.4.2 Automatically Creating Radio Links....................................................................................................1-15 1.4.3 Manually Creating Radio Links...........................................................................................................1-16 1.5 Creating a Topology Subnet..........................................................................................................................1-16
2 DCN Management.....................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 DCN Overview................................................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.1 Background of DCN...............................................................................................................................2-4 2.1.2 DCN Solutions.......................................................................................................................................2-5 2.1.3 HWECC Features and Functions...........................................................................................................2-5 2.1.4 HWECC Application..............................................................................................................................2-6 2.1.5 Basic Concepts of IP over DCC.............................................................................................................2-7 2.1.6 Features and Functions of IP over DCC.................................................................................................2-8 2.1.7 Application of IP over DCC...................................................................................................................2-8 2.1.8 Basic Concepts of OSI over DCC........................................................................................................2-12 2.1.9 Features and Functions of OSI over DCC............................................................................................2-13 2.1.10 Application of OSI over DCC............................................................................................................2-13 2.2 DCN Management Flow...............................................................................................................................2-15 2.3 Configuring ECC Communication................................................................................................................2-16 2.3.1 Modifying the NE ID...........................................................................................................................2-17 2.3.2 Configuring an Extended ECC Communication..................................................................................2-18 2.3.3 Viewing the ECC Route for an NE......................................................................................................2-19 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
Contents
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Operation Guide for RTN NE Management 2.3.4 Adding the Manual ECC Route for an NE...........................................................................................2-20 2.3.5 Customizing Communication Channels Between NEs........................................................................2-20 2.3.6 Configuring Communication for Third-Party Equipment Interconnection..........................................2-21
2.4 Configuring IP Over DCC Communication..................................................................................................2-21 2.4.1 Modifying the NE ID...........................................................................................................................2-22 2.4.2 Setting NE Communication Parameters...............................................................................................2-23 2.4.3 Configuring the IP Static Route for an NE..........................................................................................2-23 2.4.4 Customizing Communication Channels Between NEs........................................................................2-24 2.4.5 Viewing the Communication Status of DCC Channel.........................................................................2-24 2.4.6 Querying the OSPF Protocol Status.....................................................................................................2-25 2.4.7 Configuring Proxy ARP.......................................................................................................................2-25 2.5 Configuring OSI Over DCC Communication...............................................................................................2-25 2.5.1 Modifying the NE ID...........................................................................................................................2-26 2.5.2 Setting the NSAP Address for an NE...................................................................................................2-27 2.5.3 Configuring the Node Type for an NE.................................................................................................2-28 2.5.4 Configuring the Communication Protocol Stack and LAPD Role for an Optical Port........................2-29 2.5.5 Configuring OSI Tunnel.......................................................................................................................2-29 2.5.6 Customizing Communication Channels Between NEs........................................................................2-30 2.5.7 Querying the Route Information of a Node.........................................................................................2-30 2.5.8 Creating an OSI GNE...........................................................................................................................2-31 2.6 Configuring DCC Transparent Transmission...............................................................................................2-31 2.6.1 Configuring Communication for Third-Party Equipment Interconnection..........................................2-32 2.6.2 Configuring DCC Transparent Transmission Through External Clock Interfaces..............................2-33 2.6.3 Configuring DCC Transparent Transmission Through F1 Data Interfaces.........................................2-35 2.7 Modifying GNE Parameters..........................................................................................................................2-35 2.8 Changing the GNE for NEs...........................................................................................................................2-36 2.9 Configuring Standby GNEs for NEs.............................................................................................................2-37 2.10 Changing a GNE to a Normal NE...............................................................................................................2-38 2.11 Changing a Normal NE to a GNE...............................................................................................................2-39 2.12 Checking GNE Switching Status................................................................................................................2-39 2.13 Testing the Communication Between the U2000 and the GNE..................................................................2-39 2.14 Checking the Network Communication Status...........................................................................................2-40 2.14.1 Overview of the Inband DCN............................................................................................................2-41 2.14.2 Basic Concepts...................................................................................................................................2-42 2.14.3 Application of the Inband DCN.........................................................................................................2-43 2.14.4 Configuring an Inband DCN..............................................................................................................2-43 2.14.4.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters..........................................................................................2-44 2.14.4.2 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN....................................................2-45 2.14.4.3 Setting the U2000 Access Parameters.............................................................................................2-45 2.14.4.4 Enabling the Port DCN...................................................................................................................2-46 2.14.4.5 Enabling the Tunnel DCN...............................................................................................................2-47
3 Configuring Clocks....................................................................................................................3-1
viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Contents
3.1 Clock Configuration Process...........................................................................................................................3-3 3.2 Clock Synchronization Scheme...................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.3 Basic Concepts................................................................................................................................................3-8 3.3.1 Clock Synchronization...........................................................................................................................3-9 3.3.2 SSM Protocol and Clock ID.................................................................................................................3-10 3.3.3 Clock Subnet........................................................................................................................................3-13 3.3.4 Clock Protection...................................................................................................................................3-13 3.4 Viewing Clock Synchronization Status.........................................................................................................3-14 3.5 Viewing the Clock Tracing Status................................................................................................................3-14 3.6 Configuring the Clock Sources.....................................................................................................................3-15 3.7 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources ...................................................................................................3-17 3.8 Configuring Switching Conditions for Clock Sources..................................................................................3-20 3.9 Configuring the Clock Source Reversion......................................................................................................3-20 3.10 Modifying the Parameters of the External Clock Output............................................................................3-21 3.11 Setting the Clock Source Quality................................................................................................................3-22 3.12 Configuring the SSM Output......................................................................................................................3-23 3.13 Configuring the Ethernet Clock Source......................................................................................................3-24 3.14 Viewing the Clock Tracing Status..............................................................................................................3-24 3.15 Checking the Clock Switching Status.........................................................................................................3-25 3.16 Switching a Clock Source...........................................................................................................................3-25
4 Configuring PTP Clock.............................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Introduction to the PTP Clock.........................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 Basic Information............................................................................................................................................4-3 4.3 Application of the PTP Clock......................................................................................................................... 4-6 4.4 Configuration Flow for the PTP Clock...........................................................................................................4-7 4.5 Configuring the PTP Clock.............................................................................................................................4-9 4.5.1 Setting the Frequency Selection Mode.................................................................................................4-10 4.5.2 Setting the PTP System Time...............................................................................................................4-11 4.5.3 Setting the PTP Clock Subnet..............................................................................................................4-11 4.5.4 Setting the Attributes of the External Time Interface..........................................................................4-12 4.5.5 Setting the PTP NE Attributes.............................................................................................................4-13 4.5.6 Creating the PTP Clock Port................................................................................................................4-14 4.5.7 Creating the PTP Clock Service...........................................................................................................4-14 4.5.8 Setting the PTP Packet Period..............................................................................................................4-16 4.5.9 Setting the PTP Clock Port Status........................................................................................................4-17 4.5.10 Setting the Cable Transmitting Wrap.................................................................................................4-18 4.5.11 Setting the Wait-to-Restore Time for the PTP Clock Source............................................................4-19 4.5.12 Setting the PTP Clock Source Priority...............................................................................................4-19
5 Configuring Orderwire.............................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Configuring Orderwire....................................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Configuring F1 Data Port Services................................................................................................................. 5-2 5.2.1 F1 Data Port Services.............................................................................................................................5-2 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix
Contents
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Operation Guide for RTN NE Management 5.2.2 Configuring F1 Data Port Services........................................................................................................5-3
5.3 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services......................................................................................................5-4 5.3.1 Asynchronous Data Services..................................................................................................................5-5 5.3.2 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services.............................................................................................5-5 5.4 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services RTN 600)....................................................................5-6 5.4.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................5-7 5.4.2 Service Planning.....................................................................................................................................5-7 5.4.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................5-9 5.5 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services RTN 600)...............................................................5-10 5.5.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................5-11 5.5.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................5-11 5.5.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................5-13
6 Configuring Environment Monitor Interfaces.....................................................................6-1

6.1 Configuring External Alarms..........................................................................................................................6-2 6.2 Configuration Example (External Alarms RTN 600).....................................................................................6-3 6.2.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................6-3 6.2.2 Service Planning.....................................................................................................................................6-4 6.2.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................6-5
7 Configuring Interfaces (RTN 600)...........................................................................................7-1

7.1 Checking Board Parameters............................................................................................................................7-2 7.2 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports ................................................................................................7-6 7.2.1 Configuring the Parameters of SDH Interfaces .....................................................................................7-6 7.2.2 Configuring the Parameters of PDH Interfaces .....................................................................................7-8 7.2.3 Setting the Parameters of IF Ports........................................................................................................7-11 7.2.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports...................................................................................................7-17 7.3 Configuring Ethernet Ports............................................................................................................................7-20 7.3.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports....................................................................................................7-20 7.3.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board............................................................................7-29 7.3.3 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames........................................................................................7-36 7.3.4 Modifying the Type Field of QinQ Frames.........................................................................................7-37 7.3.5 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK Bandwidth........................................................7-38 7.4 Disabling an Ethernet Port............................................................................................................................7-39 7.5 Configuring a Service Load Indication.........................................................................................................7-40
8 Configuring Interfaces (RTN 900)...........................................................................................8-1

8.1 Configuring SDH Interfaces............................................................................................................................8-3 8.1.1 Setting the General Attributes of SDH Interfaces..................................................................................8-3 8.1.2 Setting the Advanced Attributes of SDH Interfaces..............................................................................8-4 8.1.3 Querying the Running Status of PPP.....................................................................................................8-4 8.1.4 Resetting the PPP...................................................................................................................................8-5 8.2 Configuring PDH Interfaces............................................................................................................................8-5 8.2.1 Setting General Attributes of PDH Interfaces........................................................................................8-7 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Contents
8.2.2 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of PDH Interfaces..................................................................................8-8 8.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of PDH Interfaces.............................................................................. 8-8 8.2.4 Querying the Running Status of PPP..................................................................................................... 8-9 8.2.5 Resetting the PPP...................................................................................................................................8-9 8.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces....................................................................................................................8-10 8.3.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces..........................................................................8-11 8.3.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces...........................................................................8-11 8.3.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of an Ethernet Interface........................................................................8-12 8.3.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces.......................................................................8-13 8.3.5 Configuring Flow Control....................................................................................................................8-13 8.4 Configuring Microwave Interfaces...............................................................................................................8-14 8.4.1 Setting the General Attributes of Microwave Interfaces......................................................................8-16 8.4.2 Setting the IF Attributes of Microwave Interfaces...............................................................................8-17 8.4.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Microwave Interfaces......................................................................8-17 8.4.4 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Microwave Interfaces......................................................................8-18 8.4.5 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Microwave Interfaces..................................................................8-19 8.4.6 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports(RTN900V1R1)........................................................................8-19 8.4.7 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports(RTN900V1R2)........................................................................8-21 8.5 Configuring Serial Interfaces........................................................................................................................8-24 8.5.1 Creating Serial Interfaces.....................................................................................................................8-24 8.5.2 Setting the General Attributes of a Serial Interface.............................................................................8-25 8.5.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Serial Interfaces...............................................................................8-25 8.5.4 Querying the Running Status of PPP...................................................................................................8-26 8.5.5 Resetting the PPP.................................................................................................................................8-26 8.6 Configuring ML-PPP....................................................................................................................................8-27 8.6.1 Overview of the ML-PPP.....................................................................................................................8-29 8.6.2 Basic Concepts.....................................................................................................................................8-29 8.6.3 ML-PPP Application............................................................................................................................8-30 8.6.4 Creating MP Groups.............................................................................................................................8-31 8.6.5 Configuring Member Interfaces of MP Groups...................................................................................8-31 8.7 Configuring an Ethernet Virtual Interface.....................................................................................................8-32 8.7.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces..............................................................8-32 8.7.2 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces..............................................................8-33 8.8 Configuring an IMA Group...........................................................................................................................8-33 8.8.1 Configuring Bound Channels in an ATM IMA Group........................................................................8-35 8.8.2 Configuring Attributes of an ATM IMA Group..................................................................................8-36 8.8.3 Configuring ATM Interface Attributes................................................................................................8-36 8.8.4 Querying IMA Group States................................................................................................................8-37 8.8.5 Querying IMA Link States...................................................................................................................8-37 8.8.6 Resetting an IMA Group......................................................................................................................8-38 8.8.7 Modifying an IMA Group....................................................................................................................8-38 8.8.8 Deleting an IMA Group.......................................................................................................................8-39 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi
Contents
9 Configuring Radio Links..........................................................................................................9-1

9.1 Radio Link.......................................................................................................................................................9-2 9.2 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link...................................................................................9-2 9.3 Configuring the ATPC Function.....................................................................................................................9-8 9.4 Creating an XPIC Workgroup.......................................................................................................................9-11 9.5 Configuring the Hybrid/AM Attribute..........................................................................................................9-13 9.6 Hop Management..........................................................................................................................................9-13 9.6.1 Introduction to the Hop Management..................................................................................................9-14 9.6.2 Starting HOP Management..................................................................................................................9-14
10 Configuring Board 1+1 Protection......................................................................................10-1

10.1 Querying Board 1+1 Protection Group.......................................................................................................10-2 10.2 Verifying the Board 1+1 Protection Switching...........................................................................................10-2
11 Configuring the IF 1+1 Protection...................................................................................... 11-1

11.1 1+1 HSB......................................................................................................................................................11-2 11.1.1 Feature Description............................................................................................................................11-2 11.1.2 Availability.........................................................................................................................................11-2 11.1.3 Relation with Other Features..............................................................................................................11-3 11.1.4 Realization Principle..........................................................................................................................11-3 11.1.4.1 SDH/PDH Microwave.....................................................................................................................11-4 11.1.4.2 Hybrid Microwave..........................................................................................................................11-6 11.1.5 Planning Guide...................................................................................................................................11-9 11.2 1+1 FD.........................................................................................................................................................11-9 11.2.1 Feature Description..........................................................................................................................11-10 11.2.2 Availability.......................................................................................................................................11-10 11.2.3 Relation with Other Features............................................................................................................11-11 11.2.4 Realization Principle........................................................................................................................11-11 11.2.4.1 SDH/PDH Microwave...................................................................................................................11-11 11.2.4.2 Hybrid Microwave........................................................................................................................11-14 11.2.5 Planning Guide.................................................................................................................................11-17 11.3 1+1 SD.......................................................................................................................................................11-18 11.3.1 Feature Description..........................................................................................................................11-18 11.3.2 Availability.......................................................................................................................................11-19 11.3.3 Relation with Other Features............................................................................................................11-19 11.3.4 Realization Principle........................................................................................................................11-20 11.3.4.1 SDH/PDH Microwave...................................................................................................................11-20 11.3.4.2 Hybrid Microwave........................................................................................................................11-22 11.3.5 Planning Guide.................................................................................................................................11-26 11.4 Creating IF 1+1 Protection........................................................................................................................11-27 11.5 Modifying the Parameters of IF 1+1 Protection........................................................................................11-28
12 Configuring Network Level Protection.............................................................................12-1

12.1 Basic Concept..............................................................................................................................................12-3 xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Contents
12.1.1 Multiplex Section...............................................................................................................................12-3 12.1.2 MSP Protection Switching Priority....................................................................................................12-4 12.1.3 SNCP Protection................................................................................................................................12-6 12.1.4 N+1 Protection...................................................................................................................................12-9 12.2 Configuring N+1 Protection......................................................................................................................12-10 12.2.1 Feature Description..........................................................................................................................12-11 12.2.2 Availability.......................................................................................................................................12-13 12.2.3 Realization Principle........................................................................................................................12-13 12.2.3.1 2+1 Protection Configuration........................................................................................................12-13 12.2.3.2 3+1 Protection Configuration........................................................................................................12-15 12.2.4 Configuration Guide.........................................................................................................................12-17 12.2.4.1 Configuration Flow.......................................................................................................................12-17 12.2.4.2 Creating REGs...............................................................................................................................12-18 12.2.4.3 Creating an N+1 Protection Group................................................................................................12-21 12.2.4.4 Enabling the N+1 Protection Control Protocol.............................................................................12-23 12.2.4.5 Verifying the N+1 Protection Switching.......................................................................................12-24 12.3 Configuring Linear Multiplex Section Protection.....................................................................................12-25 12.3.1 Feature Description..........................................................................................................................12-25 12.3.1.1 Protection Type.............................................................................................................................12-27 12.3.2 Availability.......................................................................................................................................12-28 12.3.3 Realization Principle........................................................................................................................12-29 12.3.3.1 1+1 Linear MSP............................................................................................................................12-29 12.3.3.2 1:N Linear MSP............................................................................................................................12-31 12.3.4 Configuration Guide.........................................................................................................................12-32 12.3.4.1 Creating Linear MSP.....................................................................................................................12-32 12.3.4.2 Verifying Linear MSP Switching..................................................................................................12-36 12.3.4.3 Setting an MS Node Number........................................................................................................12-37 12.4 Configuring Two-Fiber Bidirectional Ring MSP......................................................................................12-38 12.4.1 Feature Description..........................................................................................................................12-38 12.4.2 Availability.......................................................................................................................................12-40 12.4.3 Realization Principle........................................................................................................................12-40 12.4.3.1 Configuring the Ring MSP............................................................................................................12-42 12.5 Configuring Sub-Network Connection Protection....................................................................................12-45 12.5.1 Feature Description..........................................................................................................................12-45 12.5.2 Availability.......................................................................................................................................12-47 12.5.3 Realization Principle........................................................................................................................12-47 12.5.4 Configuration Guide.........................................................................................................................12-48 12.5.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services..........................................................................12-49 12.5.4.2 Setting SNCP Service Control Attributes.....................................................................................12-53 12.5.4.3 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services..................................................12-54 12.5.4.4 Verifying the SNCP Service Switching........................................................................................12-55 12.5.4.5 Converting Non-Protection Services into SNCP Services............................................................12-56 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii
Contents
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Operation Guide for RTN NE Management 12.5.4.6 Converting SNCP Services into Non-Protection Services............................................................12-60
12.6 Configuring MPLS Tunnel Protection......................................................................................................12-60 12.6.1 Introduction to MPLS APS..............................................................................................................12-61 12.6.2 Basic Concepts.................................................................................................................................12-64 12.6.3 MPLS APS Application...................................................................................................................12-65 12.6.4 Creating an MPLS Tunnel Protection Group...................................................................................12-67 12.6.5 Perform MPLS Tunnel Protection Switching..................................................................................12-69 12.6.6 Deleting an MPLS Tunnel Protection Group...................................................................................12-70 12.7 Ethernet Ring Protection...........................................................................................................................12-70 12.7.1 Introduction to Ethernet Ring Protection.........................................................................................12-71 12.7.2 Basic Concepts.................................................................................................................................12-71 12.7.3 Availability.......................................................................................................................................12-74 12.7.4 Function Implementation.................................................................................................................12-74 12.7.5 Application of Ethernet Ring Protection..........................................................................................12-78 12.7.6 Configuring Ethernet Ring Protection..............................................................................................12-79 12.7.6.1 Configuration Rules......................................................................................................................12-80 12.7.6.2 Creating Ethernet Ring Protection................................................................................................12-80 12.7.6.3 Modifying Parameters of Ethernet Ring Protection......................................................................12-80 12.8 Configuring Link Aggregation..................................................................................................................12-81 12.8.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................................12-81 12.8.2 Availability.......................................................................................................................................12-83 12.8.3 Principle...........................................................................................................................................12-84 12.8.4 Configuration Guide.........................................................................................................................12-85 12.8.4.1 Creating an LAG...........................................................................................................................12-86 12.8.4.2 Modifying LAG Parameters..........................................................................................................12-87 12.8.4.3 Querying Port LACP Packet Statistics..........................................................................................12-87 12.8.4.4 Querying Detailed LAG Information............................................................................................12-88
13 Configuring SDH/PDH Services.........................................................................................13-1

13.1 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots ...................................................................................................13-3 13.2 Configuring E1 Services............................................................................................................................. 13-4 13.3 Configuring Cross-Connections..................................................................................................................13-6 13.3.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services....................................................................13-8 13.3.2 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services............................................................................... 13-9 13.3.3 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services.....................................................13-14 13.3.4 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Point-to-Point Service...........................................................13-15 13.3.5 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Service...................................................................................13-16 13.4 Configuring SNCP Services......................................................................................................................13-17 13.5 Converting Between SNCP and Non-Protection Services........................................................................13-20 13.5.1 Converting Non-Protection Services into SNCP Services...............................................................13-20 13.5.2 Converting SNCP Services into Non-Protection Services...............................................................13-24 13.6 Configuring Overhead Bytes.....................................................................................................................13-24 13.6.1 Configuring RSOHs.........................................................................................................................13-25 xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Contents
13.6.2 Configuring VC-4 POHs..................................................................................................................13-26 13.6.3 Configuring VC-3 POHs..................................................................................................................13-30 13.6.4 Configuring VC-12 POHs................................................................................................................13-32 13.7 Configuration Example (Hop Between Two IDU 620s)...........................................................................13-34 13.7.1 Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................13-35 13.7.2 Service Planning...............................................................................................................................13-36 13.7.3 Configuring NE1..............................................................................................................................13-45 13.7.4 Configuring NE2..............................................................................................................................13-49 13.7.5 Configuring NE3..............................................................................................................................13-57 13.7.6 Configuring NE4 .............................................................................................................................13-61 13.7.7 Configuring NE5..............................................................................................................................13-64 13.8 Configuration Example (Hop Between Two IDU 605s)...........................................................................13-64 13.8.1 Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................13-65 13.8.2 Service Planning...............................................................................................................................13-65 13.8.3 Configuring NE1..............................................................................................................................13-69 13.8.4 Configuring NE2..............................................................................................................................13-72 13.9 Configuration Example (Hop between the IDU 605 and the IDU 620)....................................................13-76 13.9.1 Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................13-76 13.9.2 Service Planning...............................................................................................................................13-77 13.9.3 Configuring NE1 to NE4 .................................................................................................................13-80 13.9.4 Configuring NE5..............................................................................................................................13-80
14 Ethernet Feature(RTN 600)...................................................................................................14-1

14.1 Creating Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................................14-2 14.1.1 Basic Concepts...................................................................................................................................14-3 14.1.1.1 Formats of Ethernet Frames............................................................................................................14-3 14.1.1.2 Internal Ports and External Ports.....................................................................................................14-6 14.1.1.3 Auto-Negotiation.............................................................................................................................14-6 14.1.1.4 Flow Control...................................................................................................................................14-8 14.1.1.5 Encapsulation and Mapping Protocol...........................................................................................14-10 14.1.1.6 Virtual Concatenation...................................................................................................................14-10 14.1.1.7 Tag Attributes................................................................................................................................14-12 14.1.1.8 Bridge............................................................................................................................................14-13 14.1.2 Configuring the Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services................................................................14-17 14.1.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services........................................................................14-17 14.1.2.2 Deleting the Cross-Connections of an Ethernet Service...............................................................14-17 14.1.3 Configuring EPL Services................................................................................................................14-18 14.1.3.1 EPL Service Configuration Process..............................................................................................14-19 14.1.3.2 Setting Port Attributes and Bound Paths for an Ethernet Board...................................................14-20 14.1.3.3 Creating Ethernet Line Service.....................................................................................................14-20 14.1.3.4 Testing Ethernet Services..............................................................................................................14-25 14.1.3.5 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line Service....................................................................................14-26 14.1.4 Configuring Ethernet LAN Services................................................................................................14-27 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv
Contents
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Operation Guide for RTN NE Management 14.1.4.1 Ethernet LAN Service Configuration Process..............................................................................14-27 14.1.4.2 Setting Port Attributes and Bound Paths for an Ethernet Board...................................................14-28 14.1.4.3 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service...............................................................................................14-29 14.1.4.4 Creating the EVPLAN Services That Are Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge............................14-33 14.1.4.5 Creating the VLAN Filter Table...................................................................................................14-37 14.1.4.6 Testing Ethernet Services..............................................................................................................14-39 14.1.4.7 Deleting an Ethernet LAN Service................................................................................................14-40 14.1.5 Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services................................................................................................14-41 14.1.5.1 EVPL(QinQ) Service Configuration Process................................................................................14-41 14.1.5.2 Setting Port Attributes and Bound Paths for an Ethernet Board...................................................14-42 14.1.5.3 Modifying the Type Field of QinQ Frames..................................................................................14-43 14.1.5.4 Creating QinQ Line Services........................................................................................................14-43 14.1.5.5 Testing Ethernet Services..............................................................................................................14-48 14.1.6 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point EPL Services)...................................................................14-49 14.1.6.1 Networking Diagram.....................................................................................................................14-49 14.1.6.2 Service Planning............................................................................................................................14-50 14.1.6.3 Configuring NE1...........................................................................................................................14-52 14.1.6.4 Configuring NE2...........................................................................................................................14-55 14.1.7 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Services)................................................................14-56 14.1.7.1 Networking Diagram.....................................................................................................................14-56 14.1.7.2 Service Planning............................................................................................................................14-57 14.1.7.3 Configuring NE1...........................................................................................................................14-59 14.1.7.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3............................................................................................................14-65 14.1.8 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services).......................................................14-65 14.1.8.1 Networking Diagram.....................................................................................................................14-65 14.1.8.2 Service Planning............................................................................................................................14-66 14.1.8.3 Configuring NE1...........................................................................................................................14-69 14.1.8.4 Configuring NE2...........................................................................................................................14-73 14.1.9 Configuration Example (802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services)..................................................14-73 14.1.9.1 Networking Diagram.....................................................................................................................14-74 14.1.9.2 Service Planning............................................................................................................................14-74 14.1.9.3 Configuring NE1...........................................................................................................................14-77 14.1.9.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3............................................................................................................14-82 14.1.10 Configuration Example (802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services).............................................14-83 14.1.10.1 Networking Diagram...................................................................................................................14-83 14.1.10.2 Service Planning..........................................................................................................................14-84 14.1.10.3 Configuring NE1.........................................................................................................................14-88 14.1.10.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3..........................................................................................................14-96 14.1.11 Configuration Example (EVPL Services Based on QinQ)............................................................14-96 14.1.12 Configuration Example (EVPLAN Services Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge).......................14-98 14.1.13 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave.................................................................14-99 14.1.13.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................14-100
xvi
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Contents
14.1.13.2 Service Planning (Microwave Services)...................................................................................14-101 14.1.13.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board).............................14-106 14.1.13.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)...............................14-110 14.1.13.5 Configuring NE1 (Microwave Services)...................................................................................14-112 14.1.13.6 Configuring NE1 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board).............................14-116 14.1.13.7 Configuring NE2 (Microwave Services)...................................................................................14-125 14.1.13.8 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board).............................14-132 14.1.13.9 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)..............................14-141 14.1.13.10 Configuring NE3 (Ethernet Services).....................................................................................14-142 14.2 Configuring QinQ...................................................................................................................................14-145 14.2.1 Feature Description........................................................................................................................14-146 14.2.2 Basic Concepts...............................................................................................................................14-146 14.2.2.1 Frame Format..............................................................................................................................14-147 14.2.2.2 Network Attributes......................................................................................................................14-148 14.2.2.3 Application of the QinQ Technology in Line Services...............................................................14-149 14.2.2.4 Application of the QinQ Technology in LAN Services..............................................................14-151 14.2.3 Availability.....................................................................................................................................14-154 14.2.4 Relation with Other Features..........................................................................................................14-154 14.2.5 Realization Principle......................................................................................................................14-154 14.2.6 Planning Guide...............................................................................................................................14-156 14.2.6.1 EVPL Services Based on QinQ...................................................................................................14-156 14.2.6.2 EVPLAN Services Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge..............................................................14-158 14.2.7 Configuration Guide.......................................................................................................................14-159 14.2.7.1 Configuration Flow (EVPL Services Based on QinQ)...............................................................14-160 14.2.7.2 Configuration Flow (EVPLAN Services Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge)..........................14-161 14.2.7.3 Modifying the Type Field of QinQ Frames................................................................................14-163 14.2.7.4 Creating QinQ Line Services......................................................................................................14-164 14.2.7.5 Creating the EVPLAN Services That Are Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge..........................14-168 14.3 Configuring Features of Ethernet Ports...................................................................................................14-172 14.3.1 Feature Description........................................................................................................................14-173 14.3.2 Basic Concepts...............................................................................................................................14-173 14.3.2.1 Auto-Negotiation Function.........................................................................................................14-174 14.3.2.2 Jumbo Frames.............................................................................................................................14-176 14.3.2.3 Flow Control Function................................................................................................................14-176 14.3.3 Availability.....................................................................................................................................14-177 14.3.4 Relation with Other Features..........................................................................................................14-178 14.3.5 Realization Principle......................................................................................................................14-178 14.3.5.1 Auto-Negotiation Function.........................................................................................................14-178 14.3.5.2 Flow Control Function................................................................................................................14-179 14.3.6 Planning Guide...............................................................................................................................14-180 14.3.7 Configuration Guide.......................................................................................................................14-181 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports...........................................................................................14-181 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii
Contents
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Operation Guide for RTN NE Management 14.3.7.2 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames...............................................................................14-190
14.4 Configuring Encapsulation and Mapping of Ethernet Services..............................................................14-190 14.4.1 Feature Description........................................................................................................................14-191 14.4.2 Basic Concepts...............................................................................................................................14-192 14.4.2.1 Encapsulation and Mapping Protocols........................................................................................14-192 14.4.2.2 Virtual Concatenation.................................................................................................................14-193 14.4.2.3 LCAS...........................................................................................................................................14-194 14.4.3 Availability.....................................................................................................................................14-194 14.4.4 Relation with Other Features..........................................................................................................14-195 14.4.5 Realization Principle......................................................................................................................14-195 14.4.5.1 Encapsulation and Mapping........................................................................................................14-195 14.4.5.2 Virtual Concatenation.................................................................................................................14-199 14.4.5.3 LCAS...........................................................................................................................................14-200 14.4.6 Planning Guide...............................................................................................................................14-204 14.4.7 Configuring Guide..........................................................................................................................14-205 14.4.7.1 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board...................................................................14-205 14.4.7.2 Configuring LCAS......................................................................................................................14-213 14.5 Configuring VLAN.................................................................................................................................14-214 14.5.1 Feature Description........................................................................................................................14-215 14.5.2 Basic Concepts...............................................................................................................................14-216 14.5.2.1 Frame Format..............................................................................................................................14-216 14.5.2.2 TAG Attribute.............................................................................................................................14-217 14.5.2.3 Application..................................................................................................................................14-218 14.5.3 Availability.....................................................................................................................................14-219 14.5.4 Relation with Other Features..........................................................................................................14-219 14.5.5 Realization Principle......................................................................................................................14-219 14.5.6 Planning Guide...............................................................................................................................14-220 14.5.7 Configuration Guide.......................................................................................................................14-221 14.5.7.1 Configuration Flow.....................................................................................................................14-221 14.5.7.2 Creating Ethernet Line Service...................................................................................................14-223 14.5.8 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Service)................................................................14-228 14.5.9 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Service).......................................................14-229 14.6 Configuring Layer 2 Switching...............................................................................................................14-230 14.6.1 Feature Description........................................................................................................................14-232 14.6.2 Basic Concepts...............................................................................................................................14-232 14.6.2.1 Bridge..........................................................................................................................................14-233 14.6.2.2 STP/RSTP...................................................................................................................................14-236 14.6.2.3 IGMP Snooping...........................................................................................................................14-237 14.6.2.4 Broadcast Packet Suppression.....................................................................................................14-239 14.6.3 Availability.....................................................................................................................................14-240 14.6.4 Relation with Other Features..........................................................................................................14-240 14.6.5 Realization Principle......................................................................................................................14-240 xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Contents
14.6.5.1 Bridge..........................................................................................................................................14-241 14.6.5.2 STP/RSTP...................................................................................................................................14-241 14.6.5.3 IGMP Snooping...........................................................................................................................14-246 14.6.6 Planning Guide...............................................................................................................................14-248 14.6.7 Configuration Guide.......................................................................................................................14-249 14.6.8 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service................................................................................................14-249 14.6.9 Modifying the Mounted Port of a Bridge.......................................................................................14-254 14.6.10 Creating the VLAN Filter Table..................................................................................................14-257 14.6.11 Creating the Entry of a MAC Address Table Manually ..............................................................14-259 14.6.12 Modifying the Aging Time of the MAC Address Table Entry....................................................14-260 14.6.13 Querying the Actual Capacity of the MAC Address Table and the Dynamic Entry...................14-261 14.6.14 Configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol ....................................................................................14-262 14.6.15 Querying the Running Information About the Spanning Tree Protocol......................................14-267 14.6.16 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol...................................................................................14-267 14.6.17 Querying the Running Information About the IGMP Snooping Protocol ..................................14-269 14.6.18 Modifying the Aging Time of the Multicast Table Item..............................................................14-270 14.6.19 Querying the Multicast Router Port.............................................................................................14-271 14.6.20 Configuring the Static Multicast Table Item................................................................................14-271 14.6.21 Querying the Multicast Table Item..............................................................................................14-272 14.7 Configuring QoS.....................................................................................................................................14-272 14.7.1 Feature Description........................................................................................................................14-273 14.7.2 Basic Concepts...............................................................................................................................14-274 14.7.2.1 Flow Classification......................................................................................................................14-275 14.7.2.2 CAR.............................................................................................................................................14-275 14.7.2.3 CoS..............................................................................................................................................14-276 14.7.2.4 Traffic Shaping............................................................................................................................14-277 14.7.3 Availability.....................................................................................................................................14-278 14.7.4 Relation with Other Features..........................................................................................................14-279 14.7.5 Realization Principle......................................................................................................................14-279 14.7.5.1 CAR.............................................................................................................................................14-279 14.7.5.2 Traffic Shaping............................................................................................................................14-281 14.7.5.3 Egress Queue Scheduling............................................................................................................14-282 14.7.6 Planning Guide...............................................................................................................................14-284 14.7.7 Configuration Guide.......................................................................................................................14-285 14.7.7.1 Creating a Flow...........................................................................................................................14-286 14.7.7.2 Creating the CAR........................................................................................................................14-289 14.7.7.3 Creating the CoS.........................................................................................................................14-292 14.7.7.4 Binding the CAR/CoS.................................................................................................................14-294 14.7.7.5 Configuring the Traffic Shaping.................................................................................................14-295 14.7.7.6 Configuring the CoS of the IFH2 Board.....................................................................................14-297 14.7.7.7 Setting the Queue Scheduling Mode...........................................................................................14-298 14.7.7.8 Creating a Flow by Using a Template.........................................................................................14-299 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xix
Contents
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Operation Guide for RTN NE Management 14.7.7.9 Modifying CAR Parameters........................................................................................................14-300 14.7.7.10 Modifying CoS Parameters.......................................................................................................14-300 14.7.8 Configuring the Clock Sources......................................................................................................14-301 14.7.9 Configuring the Ethernet Clock Source.........................................................................................14-303
15 Ethernet Feature(RTN 900)...................................................................................................15-1

15.1 Configuring the QoS Policy........................................................................................................................15-2 15.1.1 Overview of the QoS..........................................................................................................................15-2 15.1.2 Basic Concepts...................................................................................................................................15-3 15.1.2.1 DiffServ...........................................................................................................................................15-4 15.1.2.2 HQoS...............................................................................................................................................15-6 15.1.3 Application of the QoS.......................................................................................................................15-7 15.1.3.1 Tunnel-Based QoS..........................................................................................................................15-7 15.1.3.2 QoS Policy.......................................................................................................................................15-7 15.1.4 Configuring the DiffServ Domain......................................................................................................15-8 15.1.4.1 Creating a DiffServ Domain...........................................................................................................15-8 15.1.4.2 Modifying a DiffServ Domain......................................................................................................15-10 15.1.4.3 Deleting a DiffServ Domain.........................................................................................................15-11 15.1.5 Configuring the Port Policy..............................................................................................................15-11 15.1.5.1 Creating the Port Policy................................................................................................................15-11 15.1.5.2 Modifying the Port Policy.............................................................................................................15-12 15.1.5.3 Deleting the Port Policy................................................................................................................15-13 15.1.6 Creating the CAR Policy..................................................................................................................15-13 15.1.7 Configuring the V-UNI Ingress Policy............................................................................................15-14 15.1.7.1 Creating the WFQ Scheduling Policy...........................................................................................15-15 15.1.7.2 Creating the V-UNI Ingress Policy...............................................................................................15-16 15.1.7.3 Modifying the V-UNI Ingress Policy............................................................................................15-17 15.1.7.4 Querying the V-UNI Ingress Policy-Applied Object....................................................................15-17 15.1.7.5 Deleting the V-UNI Ingress Policy...............................................................................................15-18 15.1.8 Configuring the ATM CoS Mapping...............................................................................................15-18 15.1.9 Configuring the ATM Policy...........................................................................................................15-19 15.1.9.1 Creating the ATM Policy..............................................................................................................15-20 15.1.9.2 Modifying the ATM Policy...........................................................................................................15-21 15.1.9.3 Querying the ATM Policy-Applied Object...................................................................................15-21 15.1.9.4 Deleting the ATM Policy..............................................................................................................15-22 15.2 Configuring an Ethernet Service...............................................................................................................15-22 15.2.1 Basic Concepts.................................................................................................................................15-23 15.2.1.1 E-Line Service...............................................................................................................................15-23 15.2.1.2 E-LAN Service..............................................................................................................................15-27 15.2.1.3 E-AGGR Service...........................................................................................................................15-27 15.2.2 Configuring an E-Line Service(RTN 900 V100R001)....................................................................15-28 15.2.2.1 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Service...................................................................................15-29 15.2.2.2 Creating a UNI-UNI E-Line Service.............................................................................................15-32 xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Contents
15.2.2.3 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a Port................................................................15-33 15.2.2.4 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a PW.................................................................15-33 15.2.2.5 Creating a QinQ Link....................................................................................................................15-34 15.2.2.6 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the QinQ Link..................................................15-35 15.2.2.7 Modifying an E-Line Service........................................................................................................15-36 15.2.2.8 Deleting an E-Line Service...........................................................................................................15-37 15.2.3 Configuring an E-Line Service (RTN 900 V100R002)...................................................................15-37 15.2.3.1 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Service...................................................................................15-38 15.2.3.2 Creating a UNI-UNI E-Line Service.............................................................................................15-39 15.2.3.3 Creating a QinQ Link....................................................................................................................15-40 15.2.3.4 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the QinQ Link..................................................15-41 15.2.3.5 Modifying an E-Line Service........................................................................................................15-41 15.2.3.6 Deleting an E-Line Service...........................................................................................................15-42 15.2.4 Configuring an E-LAN Service........................................................................................................15-42 15.2.4.1 Configuration Flow for E-LAN Service........................................................................................15-43 15.2.4.2 Creating a QinQ Link....................................................................................................................15-45 15.2.4.3 Creating an E-LAN Service..........................................................................................................15-45 15.2.4.4 Managing the Blacklist..................................................................................................................15-47 15.2.4.5 Setting the Broadcast Storm Suppression.....................................................................................15-48 15.2.4.6 Modifying E-LAN Service............................................................................................................15-49 15.2.4.7 Deleting E-LAN Service...............................................................................................................15-49 15.2.5 Configuring an E-AGGR Service....................................................................................................15-50 15.2.5.1 Configuration Flow for the E-AGGR Service...............................................................................15-50 15.2.5.2 Creating an E-AGGR Service.......................................................................................................15-52 15.2.5.3 Modifying an E-AGGR Service....................................................................................................15-53 15.2.5.4 Deleting an E-AGGR Service.......................................................................................................15-53 15.3 Configuring Port Mirroring.......................................................................................................................15-54
16 Configuring Cross-Polarization Interference Cancellation...........................................16-1

16.1 Feature Description.....................................................................................................................................16-2 16.2 Availability..................................................................................................................................................16-2 16.3 Realization Principle...................................................................................................................................16-3 16.4 Creating an XPIC Workgroup.....................................................................................................................16-3
17 Configuring Automatic Transmit Power Control Function...........................................17-1

17.1 Feature Description.....................................................................................................................................17-2 17.2 Availability..................................................................................................................................................17-3 17.3 Realization Principle...................................................................................................................................17-3 17.4 Configuring the ATPC Function.................................................................................................................17-5
18 Configuring Hybrid Microwave.........................................................................................18-1

18.1 Feature Description.....................................................................................................................................18-2 18.2 Basic Concepts............................................................................................................................................18-2 18.2.1 Service Transmission Mode...............................................................................................................18-3 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxi
Contents
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Operation Guide for RTN NE Management 18.2.2 AM..................................................................................................................................................... 18-3 18.2.3 Working Mode...................................................................................................................................18-5 18.2.4 QoS Control for Ethernet Services.....................................................................................................18-6
18.3 Availability..................................................................................................................................................18-7 18.4 Realization Principle...................................................................................................................................18-7 18.5 Configuration Guide....................................................................................................................................18-9
19 Configuring the MSTP..........................................................................................................19-1

19.1 Overview of the MSTP...............................................................................................................................19-3 19.2 Basic Concepts............................................................................................................................................19-6 19.3 MSTP Application.......................................................................................................................................19-8 19.4 Configuring a Port Group............................................................................................................................19-9 19.5 Configuring Bridge Parameters...................................................................................................................19-9 19.6 Configuring CIST and MSTI Parameters..................................................................................................19-10 19.7 Querying the CIST Running Information.................................................................................................19-11 19.8 Configuring Protocol Transfer for Ports...................................................................................................19-11
20 Configuring the Control Plane............................................................................................20-1

20.1 Basic Concepts............................................................................................................................................20-3 20.1.1 IGP-ISIS Protocol..............................................................................................................................20-3 20.1.2 MPLS-LDP Protocol..........................................................................................................................20-4 20.1.3 MPLS-RSVP Protocol........................................................................................................................20-6 20.1.4 ARP Protocol......................................................................................................................................20-7 20.2 Configuring the IGP-ISIS Protocol...........................................................................................................20-10 20.2.1 Setting Node Attributes....................................................................................................................20-10 20.2.2 Setting Port Attributes......................................................................................................................20-11 20.2.3 Configuring Parameters of Route Importing....................................................................................20-11 20.2.4 Querying the Link TE Information..................................................................................................20-12 20.3 Configuring the MPLS-LDP Protocol.......................................................................................................20-12 20.3.1 Creating MPLS-LDP Peer Entities..................................................................................................20-12 20.3.2 Configuring the MPLS-LDP Protocol..............................................................................................20-13 20.4 Configuring the MPLS-RSVP Protocol....................................................................................................20-13 20.5 Configuring the OSPF Protocol................................................................................................................20-14 20.5.1 Setting Node Attributes....................................................................................................................20-14 20.5.2 Setting Port Attributes......................................................................................................................20-15 20.5.3 Configuring Parameters of Route Importing....................................................................................20-16 20.5.4 Querying the Link TE Information..................................................................................................20-16 20.6 Configuring the MP-BGP..........................................................................................................................20-17 20.7 Configuring Static Routes.........................................................................................................................20-17 20.8 Configuring the Address Parse..................................................................................................................20-18
21 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.............................................................................................21-1

21.1 Basic Concepts............................................................................................................................................21-2 21.1.1 MPLS and MPLS Tunnel...................................................................................................................21-2 xxii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Contents
21.1.2 Application of the MPLS Tunnel.......................................................................................................21-2 21.2 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.....................................................................................................................21-4 21.2.1 Configuring Basic Attributes of the MPLS........................................................................................21-4 21.2.2 Creating an MPLS Tunnel..................................................................................................................21-5 21.2.3 Deleting an MPLS Tunnel..................................................................................................................21-6 21.3 Querying the Tunnel Label Information.....................................................................................................21-6
22 Configuring an IP Tunnel....................................................................................................22-1
22.1 IP Tunnel.....................................................................................................................................................22-2 22.2 Configuring a UDP PW Port.......................................................................................................................22-2 22.3 Creating IP Tunnels.....................................................................................................................................22-3 22.4 Deleting IP Tunnels.....................................................................................................................................22-3
23 Configuring a GRE Tunnel..................................................................................................23-1

23.1 GRE Tunnel.................................................................................................................................................23-2 23.2 Creating GRE Tunnels................................................................................................................................23-2 23.3 Deleting GRE Tunnels................................................................................................................................23-3
24 Configuring an MPLS PW....................................................................................................24-1

24.1 Querying an MPLS PW...............................................................................................................................24-2 24.2 Querying QoS-Related Parameters of an MPLS PW..................................................................................24-2 24.3 Querying the PW Label Information...........................................................................................................24-2
25 Configuring CES Services....................................................................................................25-1

25.1 CES Service Type.......................................................................................................................................25-2 25.2 Configuration Flow of CES Services..........................................................................................................25-5 25.3 Configuring a CES Service.........................................................................................................................25-7 25.3.1 Creating a UNI-UNI CES Service.....................................................................................................25-8 25.3.2 Creating a UNI-NNI CES Service.....................................................................................................25-8 25.3.3 Deleting a CES Service....................................................................................................................25-10
26 Configuring an ATM Service...............................................................................................26-1

26.1 Basic Concepts............................................................................................................................................26-2 26.1.1 IMA....................................................................................................................................................26-2 26.1.2 Application of the IMA......................................................................................................................26-3 26.1.3 ATM Service......................................................................................................................................26-4 26.1.4 ATM Traffic.......................................................................................................................................26-5 26.2 ATM Service Configuration Flow..............................................................................................................26-7 26.3 Configuring an IMA Group.......................................................................................................................26-12 26.3.1 Configuring Bound Channels in an ATM IMA Group....................................................................26-14 26.3.2 Configuring Attributes of an ATM IMA Group..............................................................................26-15 26.3.3 Configuring ATM Interface Attributes............................................................................................26-15 26.3.4 Querying IMA Group States............................................................................................................26-16 26.3.5 Querying IMA Link States...............................................................................................................26-16 26.3.6 Resetting an IMA Group..................................................................................................................26-17 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxiii
Contents
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Operation Guide for RTN NE Management 26.3.7 Modifying an IMA Group................................................................................................................26-17 26.3.8 Deleting an IMA Group................................................................................................................... 26-18
26.4 Configuring the ATM Service...................................................................................................................26-18 26.4.1 Creating ATM Services....................................................................................................................26-19 26.4.2 Modifying ATM Services................................................................................................................ 26-22 26.4.3 Deleting ATM Services....................................................................................................................26-22
27 Configuring the BFD.............................................................................................................27-1

27.1 Overview of the BFD..................................................................................................................................27-2 27.2 Basic Concepts............................................................................................................................................27-2 27.3 Creating a BFD Session..............................................................................................................................27-3 27.4 Configuring Parameters of the BFD Session..............................................................................................27-3 27.5 Querying the BFD Session Information......................................................................................................27-4 27.6 Deleting a BFD Session..............................................................................................................................27-4
28 Configuring the IGMP Snooping.......................................................................................28-1

28.1 Overview of the IGMP Snooping................................................................................................................28-3 28.2 Basic Concepts............................................................................................................................................28-4 28.3 Application of the IGMP Snooping............................................................................................................28-6 28.4 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Parameters.............................................................................................28-7 28.5 Configuring the Router Management..........................................................................................................28-8 28.6 Configuring the Route Member Port Management.....................................................................................28-8 28.7 Configuring the Packet Statistics................................................................................................................28-9
29 OAM Management................................................................................................................29-1
29.1 Configuring ETH OAM..............................................................................................................................29-2 29.1.1 Feature Introduction...........................................................................................................................29-2 29.1.2 Basic Concept.....................................................................................................................................29-3 29.1.2.1 IEEE 802.1ag OAM Management..................................................................................................29-4 29.1.2.2 IEEE 802.1ag OAM Operation.......................................................................................................29-7 29.1.2.3 IEEE 802.3ah OAM Operations......................................................................................................29-8 29.1.3 Availability.........................................................................................................................................29-9 29.1.4 Function Implementation................................................................................................................. 29-10 29.1.4.1 802.1ag OAM................................................................................................................................29-10 29.1.4.2 802.3ah OAM................................................................................................................................29-14 29.1.5 Using the IEEE 802.1ag OAM.........................................................................................................29-23 29.1.5.1 Creating MDs................................................................................................................................29-24 29.1.5.2 Creating MAs................................................................................................................................29-25 29.1.5.3 Creating MPs.................................................................................................................................29-26 29.1.5.4 Performing a Continuity Check.....................................................................................................29-27 29.1.5.5 Performing a Loopback Check......................................................................................................29-28 29.1.5.6 Performing a Link Trace Check....................................................................................................29-29 29.1.5.7 Activating the AIS(RTN 600).......................................................................................................29-31 29.1.5.8 Performing a Ping Test(RTN 600)................................................................................................29-31 xxiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Contents
29.1.5.9 Performing Performance Detection(RTN 600).............................................................................29-32 29.1.6 Using the IEEE 802.3ah OAM.........................................................................................................29-33 29.1.6.1 Enabling the Auto-Discovery Function of OAM..........................................................................29-33 29.1.6.2 Enabling the Link Event Notification...........................................................................................29-34 29.1.6.3 Modifying the Parameters of the OAM Error Frame Monitoring Threshold................................29-35 29.1.6.4 Performing the Remote Loopback................................................................................................29-37 29.1.6.5 Enabling the Self-Loop Detection (RTN 600)..............................................................................29-38 29.2 Configuring the MPLS OAM....................................................................................................................29-38 29.2.1 Overview of the MPLS OAM..........................................................................................................29-39 29.2.2 Basic Concepts.................................................................................................................................29-39 29.2.3 Application of the MPLS OAM.......................................................................................................29-41 29.2.4 Enabling the MPLS OAM of a Tunnel............................................................................................29-42 29.2.5 Setting the MPLS OAM Parameters of a Tunnel.............................................................................29-42 29.2.6 Starting the CV/FFD for a Tunnel....................................................................................................29-43 29.2.7 Performing an LSP Ping Test...........................................................................................................29-44 29.2.8 Performing an LSP Traceroute Test.................................................................................................29-45 29.3 Configuring the PW OAM........................................................................................................................29-46 29.3.1 Overview of the PW OAM...............................................................................................................29-46 29.3.2 Basic Concepts.................................................................................................................................29-46 29.3.3 Application of the PW OAM...........................................................................................................29-47 29.3.4 Performing the PW Ping Test...........................................................................................................29-47 29.4 Configuring ATM OAM...........................................................................................................................29-48 29.4.1 Overview of the ATM OAM............................................................................................................29-49 29.4.2 Basic Concepts.................................................................................................................................29-49 29.4.3 Application of the ATM OAM.........................................................................................................29-50 29.4.4 Setting Segment End Attribute.........................................................................................................29-51 29.4.5 Setting the CC Activation Status......................................................................................................29-52 29.4.6 Setting Remote Loopback Test........................................................................................................29-53 29.4.7 Setting Local Loopback ID..............................................................................................................29-53
30 Configuring Link State Pass Through...............................................................................30-1

30.1 Feature Description.....................................................................................................................................30-2 30.2 Availability..................................................................................................................................................30-4 30.3 Realization Principle...................................................................................................................................30-4 30.3.1 Point-to-Point Service(RTN 600).......................................................................................................30-4 30.3.2 Point-to-Multipoint Service(RTN 600)..............................................................................................30-6 30.4 LPT Configuration....................................................................................................................................30-10
31 Configuring Remote Monitoring Feature.........................................................................31-1

31.1 Feature Description.....................................................................................................................................31-2 31.2 Basic Concepts............................................................................................................................................31-2 31.2.1 SNMP.................................................................................................................................................31-2 31.2.2 RMON Management Groups.............................................................................................................31-3 31.2.3 List of RMON Alarm Entries and RMON Performance Entries.......................................................31-5 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxv
Contents
31.3 Availability..................................................................................................................................................31-7 31.4 Realization Principle...................................................................................................................................31-8 31.5 Configuration Guide....................................................................................................................................31-9 31.5.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of an Ethernet Port...................................31-10 31.5.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for an Ethernet Port.......................................................................... 31-10 31.5.3 Configuring a History Control Group..............................................................................................31-11 31.5.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the History Group of an Ethernet Port.....................................31-11 31.5.5 Setting Performance Monitoring Status for an Ethernet Port.......................................................... 31-12
32 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet....................................................................................32-1

32.1 Feature Description.....................................................................................................................................32-2 32.2 Availability..................................................................................................................................................32-2 32.3 Realization Principle...................................................................................................................................32-3 32.4 Configuration Guide....................................................................................................................................32-4
33 Modifying the Configuration Data.....................................................................................33-1

33.1 Modifying NE Attributes............................................................................................................................33-2 33.1.1 Modifying the NE ID.........................................................................................................................33-2 33.1.2 Modifying the NE Name....................................................................................................................33-3 33.1.3 Deleting NEs......................................................................................................................................33-3 33.1.4 Modifying GNE Parameters...............................................................................................................33-4 33.1.5 Changing the GNE for NEs................................................................................................................33-5 33.2 Modifying the Board Configuration Data...................................................................................................33-6 33.2.1 Adding Boards....................................................................................................................................33-6 33.2.2 Deleting Boards..................................................................................................................................33-7 33.2.3 Modifying Board Configuration Parameters......................................................................................33-8 33.3 Modifying the Fiber Configuration Data....................................................................................................33-8 33.3.1 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information...................................................................................................33-9 33.3.2 Deleting Fibers...................................................................................................................................33-9 33.3.3 Deleting DCN Communication Cables............................................................................................33-10 33.4 Modifying the Service Configuration Data...............................................................................................33-10 33.4.1 Modifying SDH Services.................................................................................................................33-11 33.4.2 Deleting SDH Services.....................................................................................................................33-12 33.4.3 Deleting EPL Services..................................................................................................................... 33-13 33.4.4 Deleting EVPL Services...................................................................................................................33-13 33.4.5 Deleting EPLAN Services................................................................................................................33-14 33.4.6 Converting a Normal Service to an SNCP Service..........................................................................33-15 33.4.7 Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal Service..........................................................................33-16
34 Common Maintenance Operations.....................................................................................34-1

34.1 Checking the Network Communication Status...........................................................................................34-3 34.2 Turning On and Off a Laser........................................................................................................................34-3 34.3 Setting a Scheduled Task............................................................................................................................34-4 34.4 Checking Networkwide Maintenance Status..............................................................................................34-5 xxvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Contents
34.4.1 Checking Path Loopback Status.........................................................................................................34-6 34.4.2 Checking Port Laser Status................................................................................................................34-6 34.4.3 Checking Path Loading Status...........................................................................................................34-7 34.4.4 Checking Path Alarm Reversion Status.............................................................................................34-8 34.4.5 Checking Path Alarm Suppression Status..........................................................................................34-9 34.4.6 Checking the DCC Enabling Status.................................................................................................34-10 34.5 Checking Protection Switching Status......................................................................................................34-10 34.5.1 Checking the SNCP Service Switching Status.................................................................................34-11 34.5.2 Checking Linear MSP Switching Status..........................................................................................34-11 34.5.3 Checking 1+1 Board Switching Status.............................................................................................34-12 34.5.4 Checking the Switching Status of 1+1 Intermediate Frequency Protection.....................................34-12 34.5.5 Check the Switching Status of the N+1 Protection..........................................................................34-13 34.5.6 Checking GNE Switching Status.....................................................................................................34-13 34.5.7 Checking the Clock Switching Status..............................................................................................34-14 34.6 Resetting Boards.......................................................................................................................................34-14 34.6.1 Reset.................................................................................................................................................34-15 34.6.2 Resetting the SCC Board..................................................................................................................34-15 34.6.3 Resetting a Non-SCC Board............................................................................................................34-15 34.6.4 Resetting a Board.............................................................................................................................34-16 34.7 Performing a Loopback.............................................................................................................................34-16 34.7.1 Setting a Loopback for an SDH Interface........................................................................................34-17 34.7.2 Setting a Loopback for a PDH Interface..........................................................................................34-19 34.7.3 Setting a Loopback for an Ethernet Interface...................................................................................34-20 34.7.4 Setting a Loopback for an IF Interface.............................................................................................34-21 34.7.5 Setting a Loopback for an ODU Interface........................................................................................34-23 34.7.6 Setting a Loopback for a Digital Interface.......................................................................................34-24 34.7.7 Setting a Loopback for a VC4 Path..................................................................................................34-25 34.7.8 Setting a Loopback for a VC3 Path..................................................................................................34-27 34.8 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown...........................................................................................................34-28 34.9 Disabling Service-Affecting Settings Automatically................................................................................34-29 34.10 Performing a PRBS Test.........................................................................................................................34-29 34.11 Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol Faults.......................................................................................................34-30 34.12 Checking the Network Communication Status.......................................................................................34-31
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
xxvii
Figures
Figures
Figure 2-1 DCN network......................................................................................................................................2-3 Figure 2-2 Positions of DCC bytes in SDH overheads........................................................................................2-5 Figure 2-3 Networking that involves only Huawei equipment............................................................................2-6 Figure 2-4 Networking that involves Huawei equipment and third-party equipment..........................................2-7 Figure 2-5 Gateway NE mode..............................................................................................................................2-8 Figure 2-6 Gateway NE mode (by default gateway)............................................................................................2-9 Figure 2-7 Direct connection mode (by static routes)........................................................................................2-10 Figure 2-8 Direct connection mode through a router (by static routes).............................................................2-11 Figure 2-9 Format of a simple NSAP address....................................................................................................2-12 Figure 2-10 Format of a complicated NSAP address.........................................................................................2-12 Figure 2-11 Third-party equipment forwarding OAM information of Huawei equipment...............................2-14 Figure 2-12 Huawei equipment forwarding OAM information of third-party equipment.................................2-15 Figure 2-13 DCN management flow..................................................................................................................2-16 Figure 2-14 External clock interfaces used to transparently transmit DCC information (example)..................2-33 Figure 2-15 External clock interfaces used to transparently transmit DCC information (example)..................2-34 Figure 2-16 Inband DCN networking mode.......................................................................................................2-41 Figure 2-17 Inband networking scheme.............................................................................................................2-42 Figure 2-18 Outband networking scheme..........................................................................................................2-43 Figure 3-1 Configuration flow when SSM protocol is disabled..........................................................................3-3 Figure 3-2 Configuration flow when standard SSM protocol is enabled.............................................................3-3 Figure 3-3 Configuration flow when extended SSM protocol is enabled............................................................3-3 Figure 3-4 Clock synchronization scheme for a chain network...........................................................................3-4 Figure 3-5 Clock synchronization scheme for a tree network..............................................................................3-5 Figure 3-6 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (the entire ring network line is an SDH line) ...............................................................................................................................................................................3-6 Figure 3-7 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (not the entire ring network line is an SDH line) ...............................................................................................................................................................................3-7 Figure 3-8 Clock synchronization scheme for networking with convergence at tributary ports.........................3-8 Figure 3-9 Clock synchronization......................................................................................................................3-10 Figure 4-1 Architecture of the IEEE 1588V2 clock.............................................................................................4-4 Figure 4-2 Master-slave synchronization process................................................................................................4-5 Figure 4-3 Networking diagram for typical application of the PTP clock...........................................................4-7 Figure 4-4 Configuration flow for the PTP clock................................................................................................4-8 Figure 5-1 Configuring the F1 data port service..................................................................................................5-3 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxix
Figures
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Operation Guide for RTN NE Management Figure 5-2 Networking diagram...........................................................................................................................5-7 Figure 5-3 Timeslot allocation of synchronous data services..............................................................................5-8
Figure 5-4 Networking diagram.........................................................................................................................5-11 Figure 5-5 Timeslot allocation diagram ............................................................................................................5-12 Figure 6-1 Networking diagram...........................................................................................................................6-3 Figure 8-1 Procedure for configuring a PDH interface........................................................................................8-6 Figure 8-2 Procedure for configuring an microwave interface..........................................................................8-15 Figure 8-3 Procedure for configuring an MP group...........................................................................................8-28 Figure 8-4 ML-PPP packet format.....................................................................................................................8-30 Figure 8-5 ML-PPP application scenario...........................................................................................................8-31 Figure 8-6 IMA group configuration flow.........................................................................................................8-34 Figure 9-1 Classification of Radio Stations.........................................................................................................9-2 Figure 9-2 Radio link.........................................................................................................................................9-14 Figure 11-1 1+1 HSB protection........................................................................................................................11-2 Figure 11-2 1+1 HSB realization principle (before the switching, in the transmit direction)...........................11-4 Figure 11-3 1+1 HSB realization principle (before the switching, in the receive direction).............................11-4 Figure 11-4 1+1 HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)................................11-5 Figure 11-5 1+1 HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the transmit direction)..............................11-5 Figure 11-6 1+1 HSB realization principle (before the switching, in the transmit direction)...........................11-6 Figure 11-7 1+1 HSB realization principle (before the switching, in the receive direction).............................11-7 Figure 11-8 1+1 HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)................................11-8 Figure 11-9 1+1 HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the transmit direction)..............................11-8 Figure 11-10 1+1 FD protection.......................................................................................................................11-10 Figure 11-11 1+1 FD realization principle (before the switching, in the transmit direction)..........................11-12 Figure 11-12 1+1 FD realization principle (before the switching, in the receive direction)............................11-12 Figure 11-13 1+1 FD HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)......................11-13 Figure 11-14 1+1 FD HSM realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction).....................11-13 Figure 11-15 1+1 FD realization principle (before the switching, in the transmit direction)..........................11-14 Figure 11-16 1+1 FD realization principle (before the switching, in the receive direction)............................11-15 Figure 11-17 1+1 HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the transmit direction)..........................11-16 Figure 11-18 1+1 FD HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)......................11-16 Figure 11-19 1+1 FD HSM realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction).....................11-17 Figure 11-20 1+1 SD protection.......................................................................................................................11-18 Figure 11-21 1+1 SD realization principle (before the switching, in the transmit direction)..........................11-20 Figure 11-22 1+1 SD realization principle (before the switching, in the receive direction)............................11-21 Figure 11-23 1+1 SD HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)......................11-21 Figure 11-24 1+1 SD HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the transmit direction)....................11-22 Figure 11-25 1+1 SD HSM realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction).....................11-22 Figure 11-26 1+1 SD realization principle (before the switching, in the transmit direction)..........................11-23 Figure 11-27 1+1 SD realization principle (before the switching, in the receive direction)............................11-24 Figure 11-28 1+1 SD HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)......................11-25 Figure 11-29 1+1 SD HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the transmit direction)....................11-25 xxx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figures
Figure 11-30 1+1 SD HSM realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction).....................11-26 Figure 12-1 Multiplex section schematic diagram.............................................................................................12-4 Figure 12-2 SNCP service pair...........................................................................................................................12-7 Figure 12-3 SNCP service..................................................................................................................................12-7 Figure 12-4 N+1 protection .............................................................................................................................12-11 Figure 12-5 Realization principle of 2+1 protection (before the switching)....................................................12-14 Figure 12-6 Realization principle of 2+1 protection (after the switching).......................................................12-14 Figure 12-7 Realization principle of the 3+1 protection (before the switching)..............................................12-15 Figure 12-8 Realization principle of the 3+1 protection (after the switching).................................................12-16 Figure 12-9 Configuration flow for the N+1 protection mode.........................................................................12-18 Figure 12-10 1+1 linear MSP ..........................................................................................................................12-26 Figure 12-11 1:N linear MSP ..........................................................................................................................12-27 Figure 12-12 Realization principle of 1+1 linear MSP (before the switching)................................................12-29 Figure 12-13 Realization principle of 1+1 linear MSP (after the switching, in the single-ended mode)........ 12-30 Figure 12-14 Realization principle of 1+1 linear MSP (after the switching, in the dual-ended mode)...........12-30 Figure 12-15 Realization principle of 1:1 linear MSP (before the switching).................................................12-31 Figure 12-16 Realization principle of 1:1 linear MSP (after the switching)....................................................12-31 Figure 12-17 Two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.............................................................................................. 12-39 Figure 12-18 Realization principle of the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP (before the switching)...............12-40 Figure 12-19 Realization principle of the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP (after the switching)..................12-41 Figure 12-20 Sub-Network Connection Protection..........................................................................................12-46 Figure 12-21 SNCP service pair.......................................................................................................................12-47 Figure 12-22 SNCP realization principle (before the switching).....................................................................12-48 Figure 12-23 SNCP realization principle (after the switching)........................................................................12-48 Figure 12-24 MPLS APS 1+1 protection.........................................................................................................12-62 Figure 12-25 MPLS APS 1:1 protection..........................................................................................................12-63 Figure 12-26 MPLS APS 1+1 protection.........................................................................................................12-66 Figure 12-27 MPLS APS 1:1 protection..........................................................................................................12-66 Figure 12-28 R-APS format.............................................................................................................................12-72 Figure 12-29 ERPS switching process (upon a fault not on the RPL link)......................................................12-76 Figure 12-30 ERPS switching process (upon a fault on the RPL link)............................................................12-77 Figure 12-31 Ethernet ring protection switching............................................................................................. 12-79 Figure 12-32 Link aggregation group.............................................................................................................. 12-82 Figure 12-33 Application of the LACP protocol..............................................................................................12-84 Figure 12-34 Application of the link aggregation group..................................................................................12-85 Figure 13-1 Numbering VC-12 timeslots by order............................................................................................13-3 Figure 13-2 Numbering VC-12 timeslots in the interleaved scheme ................................................................13-4 Figure 13-3 Chain network.................................................................................................................................13-7 Figure 13-4 SNCP ring with unprotected chain...............................................................................................13-19 Figure 13-5 Networking diagram.....................................................................................................................13-35 Figure 13-6 Planning the radio link..................................................................................................................13-37 Figure 13-7 IDU board configuration (NE1)....................................................................................................13-38 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxi
Figures
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Operation Guide for RTN NE Management Figure 13-8 IDU board configuration (NE2)....................................................................................................13-38 Figure 13-9 IDU board configuration (NE3)....................................................................................................13-38 Figure 13-10 IDU board configuration (NE4)..................................................................................................13-38 Figure 13-11 IDU board configuration (NE5)..................................................................................................13-38 Figure 13-12 Timeslot allocation diagram.......................................................................................................13-42
Figure 13-13 Clock Synchronization Scheme..................................................................................................13-44 Figure 13-14 Networking diagram...................................................................................................................13-65 Figure 13-15 Planning the radio link................................................................................................................13-66 Figure 13-16 IDU board configuration (NE1 and NE2)..................................................................................13-67 Figure 13-17 Networking diagram...................................................................................................................13-77 Figure 13-18 Planning the radio link................................................................................................................13-78 Figure 13-19 IDU board configuration (NE5)..................................................................................................13-78 Figure 14-1 Ethernet frame format.....................................................................................................................14-4 Figure 14-2 Positions of the TPID and TCI in the frame structure....................................................................14-4 Figure 14-3 TCI structure of the C-TAG...........................................................................................................14-5 Figure 14-4 TCI structure of the S-TAG ...........................................................................................................14-5 Figure 14-5 External ports and internal ports on Ethernet boards......................................................................14-6 Figure 14-6 Waveform of a single FLP..............................................................................................................14-7 Figure 14-7 Consecutive FLP and NLP bursts ..................................................................................................14-8 Figure 14-8 Structure of the PAUSE frame.......................................................................................................14-9 Figure 14-9 VC-3-Xv/VC-4-Xv multiframe and sequence indicator...............................................................14-12 Figure 14-10 Relation between VB, LP, external port, and VCTRUNK port.................................................14-14 Figure 14-11 Transparent bridge and virtual bridge.........................................................................................14-15 Figure 14-12 EPL service configuration process.............................................................................................14-19 Figure 14-13 Ethernet test................................................................................................................................14-26 Figure 14-14 Ethernet LAN service configuration process..............................................................................14-28 Figure 14-15 Ethernet test................................................................................................................................14-40 Figure 14-16 EVPL(QinQ) service configuration process...............................................................................14-42 Figure 14-17 Ethernet test................................................................................................................................14-48 Figure 14-18 Networking diagram...................................................................................................................14-50 Figure 14-19 IDU board configuration ...........................................................................................................14-50 Figure 14-20 Configuring Ethernet services....................................................................................................14-50 Figure 14-21 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services.....................................................................................14-51 Figure 14-22 Networking diagram...................................................................................................................14-56 Figure 14-23 IDU board configuration (NE1)..................................................................................................14-57 Figure 14-24 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)..................................................................................14-57 Figure 14-25 Configuring Ethernet services....................................................................................................14-57 Figure 14-26 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services.....................................................................................14-59 Figure 14-27 Networking diagram...................................................................................................................14-66 Figure 14-28 IDU board configuration (NE1 and NE2)..................................................................................14-66 Figure 14-29 Configuring Ethernet services....................................................................................................14-67 Figure 14-30 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services.....................................................................................14-68 xxxii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figures
Figure 14-31 Networking diagram...................................................................................................................14-74 Figure 14-32 IDU board configuration (NE1)..................................................................................................14-75 Figure 14-33 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)..................................................................................14-75 Figure 14-34 Configuring Ethernet services....................................................................................................14-75 Figure 14-35 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services.....................................................................................14-77 Figure 14-36 Networking diagram...................................................................................................................14-84 Figure 14-37 IDU board configuration (NE1)..................................................................................................14-84 Figure 14-38 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)..................................................................................14-85 Figure 14-39 Configuring Ethernet services....................................................................................................14-85 Figure 14-40 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services.....................................................................................14-87 Figure 14-41 Networking diagram.................................................................................................................14-101 Figure 14-42 Link planning diagram .............................................................................................................14-102 Figure 14-43 Board layout of the IDU (NE1)................................................................................................14-104 Figure 14-44 Board layout of the IDU (NE2)................................................................................................14-104 Figure 14-45 Board layout of the IDU (NE3)................................................................................................14-104 Figure 14-46 Timeslot allocation diagram.....................................................................................................14-105 Figure 14-47 Clock synchronization scheme.................................................................................................14-106 Figure 14-48 Configuration information of Ethernet parameters...................................................................14-107 Figure 14-49 Configuration diagram of the Ethernet services between NE2 and NE3.................................14-111 Figure 14-50 Format of the Ethernet frame with only a C-TAG...................................................................14-147 Figure 14-51 Format of the Ethernet frame with a C-TAG and an S-TAG...................................................14-148 Figure 14-52 Format of the Ethernet frame with only an S-TAG..................................................................14-148 Figure 14-53 EVPL (QinQ) Services.............................................................................................................14-154 Figure 14-54 Example of the EVPLAN (802.1ad bridge) service.................................................................14-155 Figure 14-55 Ports used by the QinQ line services........................................................................................14-157 Figure 14-56 Configuration flow for the QinQ line service...........................................................................14-160 Figure 14-57 Configuration flow for the EVPLAN service that is based on the 802.1ad bridge..................14-162 Figure 14-58 Waveform of a single FLP........................................................................................................14-179 Figure 14-59 Consecutive FLP bursts and NLPs ..........................................................................................14-179 Figure 14-60 Structure of the PAUSE frame.................................................................................................14-180 Figure 14-61 Internal port of the Ethernet service board...............................................................................14-191 Figure 14-62 Structure of the GFP frame ......................................................................................................14-196 Figure 14-63 GFP type field format...............................................................................................................14-197 Figure 14-64 VC-3-Xv/VC-4-Xv multiframe and sequence indicator ..........................................................14-200 Figure 14-65 Capacity adjustment process (addition of a member) ..............................................................14-202 Figure 14-66 Capacity adjustment process (deletion of a member) ..............................................................14-203 Figure 14-67 Capacity adjustment process (one member link restored after a failure).................................14-203 Figure 14-68 Tagged frame format................................................................................................................14-216 Figure 14-69 PORT-shared EVPL service.....................................................................................................14-218 Figure 14-70 VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service............................................................................................14-219 Figure 14-71 Configuration flow of the EPL service that uses the VLAN feature (PORT-shared or VCTRUNKshared EVPL service) .....................................................................................................................................14-221 Figure 14-72 Relations among the VB, LP, external port, and VCTRUNK port..........................................14-233 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxiii
Figures
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Operation Guide for RTN NE Management Figure 14-73 802.1d bridge and 802.1q bridge..............................................................................................14-234 Figure 14-74 802.1ad Bridge..........................................................................................................................14-234 Figure 14-75 Transmission of the multicast packet (with IGMP Snooping disabled)...................................14-238 Figure 14-76 Transmission of the multicast packet (with IGMP Snooping enabled)....................................14-239 Figure 14-77 FIFO queue...............................................................................................................................14-273 Figure 14-78 SP queue...................................................................................................................................14-274 Figure 14-79 Basic principle of the token bucket algorithm..........................................................................14-279 Figure 14-80 Basic principle of the algorithm that is used by the CAR........................................................14-280
Figure 14-81 Basic principle of the algorithm that is used by the traffic shaping......................................... 14-281 Figure 14-82 SP queue...................................................................................................................................14-282 Figure 14-83 WRR scheduling algorithm......................................................................................................14-283 Figure 14-84 SP+WRR scheduling algorithm................................................................................................14-284 Figure 15-1 Networking diagram for the DiffServ model..................................................................................15-4 Figure 15-2 HQoS function points and corresponding QoS processing............................................................15-7 Figure 15-3 UNI-UNI E-Line service..............................................................................................................15-24 Figure 15-4 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports....................................................................................15-24 Figure 15-5 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW...................................................................................15-25 Figure 15-6 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a QinQ link.........................................................................15-26 Figure 15-7 NNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a QinQ link.........................................................................15-27 Figure 15-8 E-AGGR service...........................................................................................................................15-28 Figure 15-9 Flow diagram for configuring the E-LAN service.......................................................................15-44 Figure 15-10 Configuration flow for the E-AGGR service..............................................................................15-51 Figure 16-1 Channel configuration in ACAP mode (without the application of the XPIC technology)...........16-2 Figure 16-2 Channel configuration in CCDP mode (with the application of the XPIC technology)................16-2 Figure 16-3 Realization principle of XPIC........................................................................................................16-3 Figure 17-1 ATPC realization principle.............................................................................................................17-4 Figure 18-1 Application of the Hybrid microwave feature................................................................................18-2 Figure 18-2 Multiplexing E1 services and Ethernet services into the Hybrid microwave frame......................18-3 Figure 18-3 Working principle of the Hybrid microwave .................................................................................18-4 Figure 18-4 AM switching (before the switching).............................................................................................18-8 Figure 18-5 AM switching (after the switching)................................................................................................18-9 Figure 19-1 STP/RSTP.......................................................................................................................................19-3 Figure 19-2 Limitations of the STP/RSTP.........................................................................................................19-4 Figure 19-3 MSTI in an MST region.................................................................................................................19-5 Figure 19-4 Example of the MSTP....................................................................................................................19-6 Figure 19-5 Example of the MST region...........................................................................................................19-7 Figure 20-1 LSP tunnel created by using the MPLS-RSVP..............................................................................20-7 Figure 20-2 ARP frame format..........................................................................................................................20-8 Figure 20-3 ARP address resolution..................................................................................................................20-9 Figure 21-1 MPLS tunnel in the MPLS network...............................................................................................21-2 Figure 21-2 Transparent transmission of point-to-point data packets................................................................21-3 Figure 21-3 Protection principle for unicast tunnels..........................................................................................21-4 xxxiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figures
Figure 22-1 ATM PWE3 over IP tunnel............................................................................................................22-2 Figure 23-1 ATM PWE3 over GRE tunnel........................................................................................................23-2 Figure 25-1 CES service networking sample.....................................................................................................25-3 Figure 25-2 External Clock synchronization of CES service clock...................................................................25-4 Figure 25-3 UNI-UNI CES service configuration flow.....................................................................................25-5 Figure 25-4 UNI-NNI CES service configuration flow.....................................................................................25-6 Figure 26-1 ATM IMA group............................................................................................................................26-2 Figure 26-2 IMA networking diagram 1............................................................................................................26-3 Figure 26-3 IMA networking diagram 2............................................................................................................26-3 Figure 26-4 IMA networking diagram...............................................................................................................26-4 Figure 26-5 ATM connection convergence sample...........................................................................................26-4 Figure 26-6 Configuration flow of the UNI-UNI ATM service.........................................................................26-8 Figure 26-7 Configuration flow of the UNIs-NNI ATM service.......................................................................26-9 Figure 26-8 IMA group configuration flow.....................................................................................................26-13 Figure 28-1 Application of the IGMP Snooping-Supported Equipment in the Network..................................28-3 Figure 28-2 Multicast forwarding......................................................................................................................28-6 Figure 29-1 Ethernet OAM solution..................................................................................................................29-3 Figure 29-2 Logical diagram of maintenance domain layers.............................................................................29-6 Figure 29-3 IEEE 802.1ag OAMPDU.............................................................................................................29-11 Figure 29-4 Continuity check diagram.............................................................................................................29-12 Figure 29-5 Loopback test diagram..................................................................................................................29-13 Figure 29-6 Link trace test diagram.................................................................................................................29-14 Figure 29-7 IEEE 802.3ah OAMPDU.............................................................................................................29-15 Figure 29-8 Packet format of the information OAMPDU...............................................................................29-17 Figure 29-9 Packet format of event notification OAMPDU............................................................................29-21 Figure 29-10 Packet format of the loopback control OAMPDU.....................................................................29-22 Figure 29-11 Connectivity check of the MPLS OAM.....................................................................................29-40 Figure 29-12 Application scenarios of MPLS OAM.......................................................................................29-41 Figure 29-13 Application scenario of the PW OAM.......................................................................................29-47 Figure 30-1 Point-to-Point LPT networking diagram........................................................................................30-2 Figure 30-2 Point-to-Multipoint LPT networking diagram...............................................................................30-3 Figure 32-1 Application of the synchronous Ethernet in the wireless access network......................................32-2 Figure 32-2 Realization principle of the synchronous Ethernet.........................................................................32-4 Figure 34-1 Outloop.........................................................................................................................................34-18 Figure 34-2 Inloop............................................................................................................................................34-18 Figure 34-3 Outloop.........................................................................................................................................34-19 Figure 34-4 Inloop............................................................................................................................................34-20 Figure 34-5 Inloop............................................................................................................................................34-21 Figure 34-6 Outloop.........................................................................................................................................34-22 Figure 34-7 Inloop............................................................................................................................................34-22 Figure 34-8 Outloop.........................................................................................................................................34-23 Figure 34-9 Inloop............................................................................................................................................34-23 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxv
Figures
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Operation Guide for RTN NE Management Figure 34-10 Outloop.......................................................................................................................................34-24
Figure 34-11 Inloop..........................................................................................................................................34-25 Figure 34-12 Outloop.......................................................................................................................................34-26 Figure 34-13 Inloop..........................................................................................................................................34-26 Figure 34-14 Outloop.......................................................................................................................................34-27 Figure 34-15 Inloop..........................................................................................................................................34-28
xxxvi
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 SDH board parameters.........................................................................................................................1-9 Table 1-2 PDH board parameters.......................................................................................................................1-10 Table 1-3 RTN board parameters.......................................................................................................................1-10 Table 1-4 Data board parameters........................................................................................................................1-11 Table 3-1 SSM allocation...................................................................................................................................3-11 Table 3-2 Methods of selecting clock sources in different modes.....................................................................3-12 Table 5-1 Configuration of the synchronous data port.........................................................................................5-8 Table 5-2 Configuration of the synchronous data port.........................................................................................5-8 Table 5-3 Configuration of the asynchronous data services...............................................................................5-11 Table 5-4 Configuration of the asynchronous data services...............................................................................5-12 Table 6-1 Configuration of the external alarms....................................................................................................6-4 Table 6-2 Configuration of the external alarms....................................................................................................6-4 Table 7-1 SDH board parameters.........................................................................................................................7-2 Table 7-2 PDH board parameters.........................................................................................................................7-3 Table 7-3 RTN board parameters.........................................................................................................................7-3 Table 7-4 Data board parameters..........................................................................................................................7-4 Table 7-5 Methods used by ports to process data frames...................................................................................7-28 Table 7-6 Methods used by ports to process data frames...................................................................................7-35 Table 8-1 Application scenario of PDH interfaces...............................................................................................8-5 Table 8-2 Application scenario of Ethernet interfaces.......................................................................................8-10 Table 8-3 Application scenario of microwave interfaces...................................................................................8-14 Table 11-1 Availability of the 1+1 HSB feature................................................................................................11-3 Table 11-2 Availability of the 1+1 HSB feature................................................................................................11-3 Table 11-3 Availability of the 1+1 FD feature.................................................................................................11-10 Table 11-4 Availability of the 1+1 FD feature.................................................................................................11-10 Table 11-5 Availability of the 1+1 SD feature.................................................................................................11-19 Table 11-6 Availability of the 1+1 SD feature.................................................................................................11-19 Table 12-1 MSP type..........................................................................................................................................12-4 Table 12-2 Preemptible relation of priorities of MSP protection switching......................................................12-5 Table 12-3 SNCP parameters.............................................................................................................................12-8 Table 12-4 Availability of the N+1 protection feature.....................................................................................12-13 Table 12-5 Availability of the N+1 protection feature.....................................................................................12-13 Table 12-6 Description of the configuration flow of the N+1 protection mode...............................................12-18 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxvii
Tables
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Operation Guide for RTN NE Management Table 12-7 Availability of the linear MSP solution.........................................................................................12-29 Table 12-8 Availability of the linear MSP solution.........................................................................................12-29 Table 12-9 Availability of the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP.....................................................................12-40 Table 12-10 Availability of the SNCP solution................................................................................................12-47 Table 12-11 Availability of the SNCP solution................................................................................................12-47 Table 12-12 Parameters for MPLS APS 1+1 protection..................................................................................12-62 Table 12-13 Parameters for MPLS APS 1:1 protection...................................................................................12-63 Table 12-14 Description of each filed in R-APS specific information............................................................12-72 Table 12-15 Boards and equipment versions of the OptiX RTN 910, OptiX RTN 950, OptiX RTN 620 and NMS versions that support the ERPS protection........................................................................................................12-74 Table 12-16 Availability of the LAG feature...................................................................................................12-83 Table 12-17 Availability of the LAG feature...................................................................................................12-83 Table 13-1 Service requirements......................................................................................................................13-36 Table 13-2 Planning information of the radio link...........................................................................................13-37 Table 13-3 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection ................................................................................................13-39 Table 13-4 Information of IF ports (NE1 and NE2).........................................................................................13-39 Table 13-5 Information of IF ports (NE3, NE4, and NE5)..............................................................................13-40 Table 13-6 Information of ODU ports (NE1 and NE2)....................................................................................13-40 Table 13-7 Information of ODU ports (NE3, NE4, and NE5).........................................................................13-41 Table 13-8 Clock information..........................................................................................................................13-44 Table 13-9 Orderwire information...................................................................................................................13-44 Table 13-10 Planning information of the radio link.........................................................................................13-66 Table 13-11 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection...............................................................................................13-67 Table 13-12 Information of IF ports.................................................................................................................13-67 Table 13-13 Information of ODU ports............................................................................................................13-68 Table 13-14 PDH service configuration...........................................................................................................13-68 Table 13-15 Orderwire information.................................................................................................................13-68 Table 13-16 Planning information of the radio link between NE3 and NE5...................................................13-78 Table 13-17 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection (NE5)....................................................................................13-79 Table 13-18 Information of ODU ports (NE5).................................................................................................13-79 Table 13-19 PDH service configuration (NE5)................................................................................................13-80 Table 13-20 Orderwire information.................................................................................................................13-80 Table 14-1 Tag types defined by using the TPID...............................................................................................14-5 Table 14-2 Processing mode of data frames at ports with different tags..........................................................14-13 Table 14-3 Transparent bridge and virtual bridge............................................................................................14-15 Table 14-4 Types of bridges supported by the Ethernet boards.......................................................................14-16 Table 14-5 Parameters of external Ethernet ports............................................................................................14-51 Table 14-6 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports.............................................................................................14-51 Table 14-7 Parameters of external Ethernet ports............................................................................................14-58 Table 14-8 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports.............................................................................................14-58 Table 14-9 Parameters of EPL services............................................................................................................14-58 Table 14-10 Parameters of external Ethernet ports..........................................................................................14-67 Table 14-11 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports...........................................................................................14-67
xxxviii
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Tables
Table 14-12 Parameters of EPL services..........................................................................................................14-68 Table 14-13 Parameters of external Ethernet ports..........................................................................................14-76 Table 14-14 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports...........................................................................................14-76 Table 14-15 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services..........................................................................................14-76 Table 14-16 Parameters of external Ethernet ports..........................................................................................14-85 Table 14-17 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports...........................................................................................14-86 Table 14-18 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services..........................................................................................14-87 Table 14-19 Link capacity..............................................................................................................................14-102 Table 14-20 Information for planning a radio link.........................................................................................14-103 Table 14-21 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection.............................................................................................14-104 Table 14-22 Clock information...................................................................................................................... 14-106 Table 14-23 Orderwire information............................................................................................................... 14-106 Table 14-24 Parameters of external ports of the EMS6 board....................................................................... 14-107 Table 14-25 Parameters of external ports of the IFH2 board.........................................................................14-108 Table 14-26 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE1)...................................................................14-108 Table 14-27 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE2)...................................................................14-108 Table 14-28 Flow configuration.....................................................................................................................14-109 Table 14-29 Parameters of the CARa.............................................................................................................14-109 Table 14-30 Parameters of the CoS................................................................................................................14-110 Table 14-31 Parameters of the link aggregation group.................................................................................. 14-110 Table 14-32 Parameters of external Ethernet ports........................................................................................ 14-111 Table 14-33 Parameters of the CoS of the IFH2 board (NE2).......................................................................14-111 Table 14-34 Parameters of Ethernet services (NE3)...................................................................................... 14-111 Table 14-35 Line services between C-aware ports.........................................................................................14-149 Table 14-36 Line services between a C-aware port and an S-aware port...................................................... 14-150 Table 14-37 Line services between S-aware ports.........................................................................................14-151 Table 14-38 Characteristics of the IEEE 802.1ad bridge...............................................................................14-151 Table 14-39 LAN services that enter and exit the IEEE 802.1ad bridge through the C-aware port..............14-152 Table 14-40 LAN services that enter and exit the IEEE 802.1ad bridge through the S-aware port...............14-153 Table 14-41 Availability of the QinQ feature................................................................................................ 14-154 Table 14-42 Description of the configuration flow of the QinQ line service.................................................14-160 Table 14-43 Description of the configuration flow of the EVPLAN service that is based on the 802.1ad bridge .........................................................................................................................................................................14-162 Table 14-44 Auto-negotiation rules of FE electrical ports (when the local port adopts the auto-negotiation mode) .........................................................................................................................................................................14-174 Table 14-45 Auto-negotiation rules of GE electrical ports (when the local port adopts the auto-negotiation mode) .........................................................................................................................................................................14-175 Table 14-46 Availability of the Ethernet port feature.................................................................................... 14-177 Table 14-47 Methods used by ports to process data frames...........................................................................14-189 Table 14-48 Availability of the Ethernet encapsulation and mapping feature...............................................14-194 Table 14-49 UPI values of the client management frame.............................................................................. 14-198 Table 14-50 LCAS CTRL words ...................................................................................................................14-201 Table 14-51 Methods used by ports to process data frames...........................................................................14-212 Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxix
Tables
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Operation Guide for RTN NE Management Table 14-52 Data frame processing method of the switch port......................................................................14-217 Table 14-53 Availability of the VLAN..........................................................................................................14-219 Table 14-54 Configuration flow of the EVPL service that uses the VLAN feature (PORT-shared EVPL service) .........................................................................................................................................................................14-222 Table 14-55 Configuration flow of the EVPL service that uses the VLAN feature (VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service)............................................................................................................................................................14-222 Table 14-56 Three Types of Bridges Supported by the Ethernet Switching Board.......................................14-234 Table 14-57 Availability of Layer 2 Switching..............................................................................................14-240 Table 14-58 CoS Type....................................................................................................................................14-277 Table 14-59 Availability of the QoS Feature.................................................................................................14-278 Table 15-1 Scheduling and application..............................................................................................................15-6 Table 15-2 Table for mapping relations between the RTN equipment and the supported QoS policies...........15-8 Table 15-3 PHB service level and mapping PHB service quality......................................................................15-9 Table 15-4 Mapping relation between the ATM service type and PHB service class.....................................15-19 Table 15-5 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI E-Line service......................................................................15-29 Table 15-6 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI E-Line service carried by a port...........................................15-30 Table 15-7 Tasks for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by PWs.............................................15-30 Table 15-8 Tasks for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link...................................15-31 Table 15-9 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI E-Line service......................................................................15-38 Table 15-10 Tasks for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link.................................15-39 Table 16-1 Availability of the XPIC feature......................................................................................................16-2 Table 17-1 ATPC performance..........................................................................................................................17-2 Table 17-2 Availability of the ATPC feature.....................................................................................................17-3 Table 17-3 Availability of the ATPC feature.....................................................................................................17-3 Table 18-1 Radio work modes in the case of hybrid microwave frames...........................................................18-5 Table 18-2 Availability of the Hybrid microwave feature.................................................................................18-7 Table 18-3 Availability of the Hybrid microwave feature.................................................................................18-7 Table 25-1 CES service clock type.....................................................................................................................25-4 Table 25-2 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI CES service............................................................................25-5 Table 25-3 Tasks for configuring the UNIs-NNI CES service..........................................................................25-6 Table 26-1 ATM service type and traffic...........................................................................................................26-5 Table 26-2 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI ATM service...........................................................................26-8 Table 26-3 Tasks for configuring the UNIs-NNI ATM service.........................................................................26-9 Table 26-4 ATM Interface................................................................................................................................26-11 Table 29-1 Availability of the ETH-OAM Feature..........................................................................................29-10 Table 29-2 Availability of the ETH-OAM Feature..........................................................................................29-10 Table 29-3 Mapping relation between values and OMA packet types (non-standard MP).............................29-11 Table 29-4 Mapping relation between code values and OAM packet types....................................................29-15 Table 29-5 Details of OAM configuration bytes..............................................................................................29-18 Table 29-6 Mapping relation between OAM working modes and OAM functions.........................................29-20 Table 29-7 Application scenarios of MPLS OAM detection methods.............................................................29-41 Table 29-8 Classification of the OAM function layers....................................................................................29-49 Table 29-9 Application scenarios of ATM OAM detection methods..............................................................29-51
xl
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Tables
Table 30-1 Availability of the LPT feature(RTN600)........................................................................................30-4 Table 30-2 Availability of the LPT feature(RTN900)........................................................................................30-4 Table 30-3 Parameter of the Point-to-Point LPT(RTN600).............................................................................30-13 Table 30-4 Parameter of the Point-to-Multipoint LPT(RTN600)....................................................................30-14 Table 30-5 Parameter of the LPT(RTN900).....................................................................................................30-14 Table 31-1 List of RMON alarm entries............................................................................................................31-5 Table 31-2 List of RMON performance entries.................................................................................................31-5 Table 31-3 Availability of the RMON Feature..................................................................................................31-7 Table 31-4 Availability of the RMON Feature..................................................................................................31-8 Table 32-1 Availability of the synchronous Ethernet feature.............................................................................32-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
xli
1 Creating NEs, Links, and Topology Subnets
Creating NEs, Links, and Topology Subnets
About This Chapter

On the U2000, you can create NEs , Links, and Topology Subnets to perform management through the U2000. 1.1 Creating NEs Each set of the equipment is represented as an NE on the U2000. Before the U2000 manages the actual equipment, you need to create the corresponding NEs on the U2000. There are two ways of creating NEs: creating a single NE (manually) and creating NEs in batches (through search). When you add an NE or certain NEs to a large network, for example, during deployment, it is recommended to create NEs in batches through search. In other scenarios, it is recommended to create a single NE manually. 1.2 Configuring the NE Data Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first so that the U2000 can manage and operate the NE. 1.3 Checking Board Parameters To learn about board parameter status, you can check board parameters. Before actual configuration operations in networking, you need to check board parameters, to make sure that the board parameter status meets the requirements of actual networking. 1.4 Creating Links You need to create fibers before managing services on the U2000 in the end-to-end manner. 1.5 Creating a Topology Subnet The subnet created here is based on a topological concept to facilitate management. In the case of topology objects in the same network area or with similar attributes, you can allocate them in one topology subnet.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
1-1
1.1 Creating NEs

Each set of the equipment is represented as an NE on the U2000. Before the U2000 manages the actual equipment, you need to create the corresponding NEs on the U2000. There are two ways of creating NEs: creating a single NE (manually) and creating NEs in batches (through search). When you add an NE or certain NEs to a large network, for example, during deployment, it is recommended to create NEs in batches through search. In other scenarios, it is recommended to create a single NE manually. 1.1.1 Creating NEs in Batches When the U2000 communicates properly with the GNE, you can create NEs in batches by searching for all NEs that communicate with the GNE, by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment to which the IP address is associated, or by using the NSAP address of the NE. This method is quicker and more accurate than manual creation. 1.1.2 Creating a Single NE After the NE is created, you can use the U2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a single NE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless of whether the data is configured on the NE or not.
1.1.1 Creating NEs in Batches

When the U2000 communicates properly with the GNE, you can create NEs in batches by searching for all NEs that communicate with the GNE, by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment to which the IP address is associated, or by using the NSAP address of the NE. This method is quicker and more accurate than manual creation.
Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher. The U2000 must communicate properly with the GNE. The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Discovery > NE from the main menu. The Auto Discovery window is displayed. Step 2 Click the Transport NE Search tab. Step 3 Optional: Enter the network segment or IP addresses NEs to search for the NEs. 1. 2. Click Add and the Input Search Domain dialog box is displayed. Set Address type to IP Address Range of GNE, IP Address of GNE or NSAP Address, and enter the information of the search address. Click OK.
1-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
You can repeat Steps 2 through 3 to add more search fields. You can delete the system default search field. l If you use IP address to search for NEs, and the IP address of the U2000 computer and that of the GNE are within the same network segment, you can select IP Address Range of GNE or IP Address of GNE. l If the IP addresses are not within the same network segment, select only IP Address of GNE. l If you use NSAP address, you can only select NSAP address.
Step 4 Optional: If you fail to enter a network segment correctly, enable IP auto discovery and enter the User Name and Password of the NEs.
NOTE
After enabling IP auto discovery, you can obtain the IP address of the GNE and search out all the NEs related to the GNE.
Step 5 In the Search for NE area, perform the following operations: l l Select Search for NE. All NEs in the selected domain are searched out. Select Create device after search, enter the NE User and Password.
NOTE
l The default NE user is root. l The default password is password.
Select Upload after create. The data related to the NEs are uploaded to the U2000 after the NEs are created.
NOTE
You can select all options in the Search for NE area to search for NEs, create NEs, and upload the NE data at a time.
Step 6 Click Next and the Result area is displayed.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-3
Step 7 When the search ends or if you click Stop, select the uncreated NEs in the Result list and click Create. The Create dialog box is displayed. Step 8 Enter the NE user name and password.
NOTE
l The default NE user is root. l The default password is password.
Step 9 Click OK. ----End
Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows: l l The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user. The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.
1.1.2 Creating a Single NE

After the NE is created, you can use the U2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a single NE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless of whether the data is configured on the NE or not.
Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher. The license must be installed and the license must support creating the NE of the type. The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.
Context
First create a GNE, and then create a non-gateway NE. If the NE is not created properly or the communication between the NE and the U2000 is abnormal, the NE is displayed in gray color.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Create > NE from the main menu. The Create NE dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select the NE type from the Object Type tree. Step 3 Complete the following information: ID, Extended ID, Name and Remarks. Step 4 To create a GNE, proceed to Step 5. To create a non-gateway NE, proceed to Step 6. Step 5 Choose Gateway Type, Protocol and set the IP address or serial port number and serial port rate. 1. 2.
1-4
Select Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list. Select the Protocol type.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
If the U2000 communicates with NEs through IP protocol
Do...
Select IP from the Protocol drop-down list. Enter the IP Address and use the default value for the Port number of the GNE. Select OSI from the Protocol drop-down list. Enter the NSAP Address of the GNE.
OSI protocol
NOTE
The domain address that contains a maximum of 13 bytes is entered by the user. NSEL is the port number of the network-level protocol, with a fixed value of 1d (one byte).
Step 6 Select Non-Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list. Select the GNE to which the NE is associated to from the Affiliated Gateway drop-down list. Step 7 Enter the NE User and Password.
NOTE
The default NE user is root, and the default password is password.
Step 8 Click OK. Click in the blank space of the Main Topology and the NE icon appears in the position where you clicked. ----End
Result
After an NE is successfully created, the system automatically saves the information, such as the IP address, NSAP address, subnet mask, and NE ID to the U2000 database.
Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows: l l l The communication between the U2000 and the NE is abnormal. Check the settings of communication parameters, such as the IP address of the NE and NE ID. The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user. The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.
1.2 Configuring the NE Data

Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first so that the U2000 can manage and operate the NE. 1.2.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually You need to manually configure the NE data during initialization. The operation clears original service data from NEs and then deliver the new configuration data to NEs. 1.2.2 Replicating the NE Data
You can replicate the data of an existing NE to a new NE, if the existing NE is already configuration and if the existing NE is of the same NE type and the same NE version as the new NE. 1.2.3 Uploading the NE Data By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network management system directly.
1.2.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually

You need to manually configure the NE data during initialization. The operation clears original service data from NEs and then deliver the new configuration data to NEs.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The NE must be created successfully.
Background Information
When you manually configure the NE data, the original service data is cleared from the NEs. Therefore, the communications between the NEs and the U2000 may be interrupted and the subsequent procedures of manually configuring the NE data cannot be performed. In the case of the RTN NEs, this operation is used for configuring gateway NEs for the first time.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE whose data you want to configure. Double-click the unconfigured NE on the Main Topology. The NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Choose Manual Configuration and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that manual configuration clears the data on the NE side. Step 3 Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that manual configuration interrupts the service on the NE. Step 4 Click OK. The Set NE Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Set NE Name, Equipment Type, NE Remarks and Subrack Type and then click Next. The NE slot window is displayed. Step 6 Optional: Click Query Logical Information to query the logical boards of the NE. Step 7 Optional: Click Query Physical Information to query the physical boards of the NE.
NOTE
The Query Logical Information and Query Physical Information operations cannot be performed for a preconfigured NE.
Step 8 Right-click on the slot to add a board. Click Next to display the Send Configuration window. Step 9 Choose Verify and Run as required and click Finish.
NOTE
Verification is to run the verification command. Click Finish to deliver the configuration to NEs and the basic configuration of the NEs is complete. After the successful verification, the NEs start to work normally.
----End
1-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
1.2.2 Replicating the NE Data

You can replicate the data of an existing NE to a new NE, if the existing NE is already configuration and if the existing NE is of the same NE type and the same NE version as the new NE.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The NE must be created successfully. The type and NE software version of the source NE must be consistent with the type and software version of the replicated NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE whose data you need to replicate. NE to Be Configured RTN equipment Operation Double-click the unconfigured NE on the Main Topology. Then, the NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select Copy NE Data and click Next. The NE Replication dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Select the NE from the drop-down list and click Start. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the replication operation copies all the data of the source NE to overwrite all the data of the selected NE.
NOTE
After the NE data is replicated, only the data on the U2000 side is changed, but the data on the equipment side is not changed. Data coping between the NEs of different equipment type is not recommended.
Step 4 Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the replication operation results in the loss of the original data of the NE to which the data is copied. Step 5 Click OK to start the replication. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed after a few seconds.
Step 6 Click Close. ----End
1.2.3 Uploading the NE Data

By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network management system directly.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The NE must be created successfully.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE whose data you need to Replicate. NE to Be Configured RTN equipment Operation Double-click the unconfigured NE on the Main Topology. The NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select Upload and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the upload may take a long time. Step 3 Click OK to start the upload. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed when the uploading is complete. Step 4 Click Close. ----End
1.3 Checking Board Parameters

To learn about board parameter status, you can check board parameters. Before actual configuration operations in networking, you need to check board parameters, to make sure that the board parameter status meets the requirements of actual networking.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding navigation path and check the related board parameters. 1. Check SDH board parameters. For the SDH board parameters, see Table 1-1.
1-8
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Table 1-1 SDH board parameters Board Type SDH Parameter Laser Switch Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select a board. b. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (channel) and select Port from the drop-down list. Application Scenario When configuring services on an optical interface of a board, enable this parameter. l Non-loopback: It is a normal state. When the equipment runs normally, set this parameter to non-loopback. l Inloop: The loop is performed toward the local NE. l Outloop: The loop is performed toward the opposite NE. Inloop and outloop of an optical interface affect services. They are used to locate faults. 2. Check PDH board parameters. For the PDH board parameters, see Table 1-2.
Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopback
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
1-9
Table 1-2 PDH board parameters Boar d Type Paramet er Tributary Loopback Navigation Path Application Scenario l Non-loopback: It is a normal state. When the equipment runs normally, set this parameter to non-loopback. l Inloop: When input service signals reach the tributary board of the target NE, the signals revert to the original trail. This function is used to locate faults of each service path. l Outloop: When input service signals reach the tributary board through the input port of the local NE, the signals are looped back directly to the service output end. l Non-loaded: The service path does not process the services that are carried, to suppress alarms in non-loaded service paths. l Load: The service path processes the services that are carried. In the case of a tributary board that has services, set this parameter to Load. Normal, Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock, Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock Default: Normal Sets the retiming mode of the board. The default value is usually selected.
PDH
Service Load Indication
Retiming Mode
a. In the NE Explorer, select a board. b. Choose Configuratio n > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (channel) and select Port from the drop-down list.
3.
Check RTN board parameters. For the RTN board parameters, see Table 1-3. Table 1-3 RTN board parameters Boar d Type Paramet er Radio Work Mode RTN Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select a board. b. Choose Configuratio n > IF Interface from the Application Scenario Specifies the microwave working mode. Its formats are service capacity, working bandwidth and modulation mode. The transmit end and the receive end must have the same settings of the microwave working mode. Radio Link ID: 1 to 4094
Radio Link ID
1-10
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Boar d Type
Paramet er IF Port Loopback
Navigation Path Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (channel) and select Port from the drop-down list.
Application Scenario Sets the loopback status of an intermediate frequency interface on the equipment. Non-Loopback refers to the normal status. It is not required to set loopback during normal equipment operation. Outloop means that the input signal passes through the ingress port and reaches the intermediate frequency board at the local NE and then is directly loopbacked to the service egress end. Inloop means that the input signal returns from the intermediate frequency board of the destination NE along the original trail. This function is usually used to locate faults for various IF interfaces. Performing loopback on an intermediate frequency interface is a diagnosis function which may affect services of related ports. Exercise caution before performing this function.
2M Wayside Enable Status ATPC Enable Status
Enables or disables a 2 Mbit/s bypath service. This parameter is available only when you set Radio Work Mode to STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM. When the ATPC is enabled, according to the current receive power of the ODU and the set ATPC thresholds, the ATPC module inserts the ATPC overhead. According to the ATPC overhead, the opposite ODU adjusts the transmit power. When the ATPC is disabled, the ATPC module does not insert any ATPC overhead.
4.
Check data board parameters. For the data board parameters, see Table 1-4. Table 1-4 Data board parameters Boar d Type Ethern et Parame ter Enabled/ Disabled Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select a board. b. Choose Configuration > Application Scenario
When configuring Ethernet board port services, set the port to Enabled.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
1-11
Boar d Type
Parame ter Working Mode Maximu m Frame Length
Navigation Path Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click External Port. d. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
Application Scenario Set the working mode of Ethernet ports according to networking configuration requirements. When a packet exceeds the maximum frame length that is set, the packet is discarded. Alternatively, the packet length is minimized to satisfy the specified frame length. By default, the value is set to 1522, unless otherwise specified. l Non-loopback: It is a normal state. When the equipment runs normally, set this parameter to non-loopback. l Inloop: Inside the equipment, services from the cross-connect side are looped back to the cross-connect side. This operation affects services configured on ports and is used to locate faults.
MAC Loopbac k
PHY Loopbac k
l Non-loopback: It is a normal state. When the equipment runs normally, set this parameter to non-loopback. l Inloop: Inside the equipment, services from the cross-connect side are looped back to the cross-connect side. This operation affects services configured on ports and is used to locate faults.
TAG a. In the NE Explorer, select a board. b. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click External Port. d. Click the TAG Attributes tab.
l Tag Aware: If the client-side equipment sends tag packets, set the TAG attribute of external ports to Tag Aware. l Access: If the client-side equipment sends untag packets, set the TAG attribute of external ports to Access. l Hybrid: If the client-side equipment sends tag and untag packets, set the TAG attribute of external ports to Hybrid. This parameter is used to identify tags in data packets. During the configuration of VLAN services, set this parameter to Enabled.
Entry Detectio n
1-12
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Step 2 Modify board parameters according to service planning and actual board configurations. ----End
1.4 Creating Links

You need to create fibers before managing services on the U2000 in the end-to-end manner. 1.4.1 Creating Fibers Automatically Fiber links are often created through search. By using the fiber search function, you can obtain the information about the fiber link to which the specified optical interface is connected. Then, the radio link to which the optical interface is connected can be created on the Fiber links are often created through search. By using the fiber search function, you can obtain the information about the fiber link to which the specified optical interface is connected. Then, the radio link to which the optical interface is connected can be created on the in the fast manner. In a new network, after you configure the boards of the NEs on the , you need to search all optical interface to create the fiber links networkwide. Then, you can easily monitor the actual working status of each fiber link. This method is often used to create fiber links. in the fast manner. In a new network, after you configure the boards of the NEs on the U2000 1.4.2 Automatically Creating Radio Links Using the fiber/cable search function, you can know whether any radio links are connected at a specified IF interface. This helps you quickly create radio links at the IF interface. For a newly created network, you can search for all the IF interfaces networkwide to create radio links after you complete the board configuration on the U2000. In this way, you can monitor the actual working state of each radio link. 1.4.3 Manually Creating Radio Links After you manually fill in the table, the U2000 can create radio links according to the configuration information about the links. This operation is often used when actual radio link is not formed.
1.4.1 Creating Fibers Automatically

Fiber links are often created through search. By using the fiber search function, you can obtain the information about the fiber link to which the specified optical interface is connected. Then, the radio link to which the optical interface is connected can be created on the Fiber links are often created through search. By using the fiber search function, you can obtain the information about the fiber link to which the specified optical interface is connected. Then, the radio link to which the optical interface is connected can be created on the in the fast manner. In a new network, after you configure the boards of the NEs on the , you need to search all optical interface to create the fiber links networkwide. Then, you can easily monitor the actual working status of each fiber link. This method is often used to create fiber links. in the fast manner. In a new network, after you configure the boards of the NEs on the U2000
Prerequisite
l l l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. The optical interfaces of every NE must be connected using fibers. The boards of every NE must be created on the U2000.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-13
Context
l l If conflicting fibers are found during the creation, delete the conflicting fibers on the U2000 before you start creating fibers. When a fiber between two SDH NEs passes through a WDM NE, if the normal fiber between an SDH NE and a WDM NE has been created on the U2000, the fiber found by the trail search function is created as a virtual fiber. If the WDM NE is not created on the U2000, the fiber is created as a normal fiber. When a fiber is created, it is usually bidirectional. But when the fiber is connected to the ports of the REG functions or the SDH and WDM equipment, the fiber is unidirectional.
CAUTION
Fiber/Cable search may interrupt services. Exercise caution when performing this operation.
Procedure
Step 1 CChoose File > Discovery > Fiber from the main menu. The Search for Fiber/Cable window is displayed. Step 2 In the left pane select some ports from one or more NEs and click Search to search for the fibers or cables. A progress bar is displayed showing the progress of the search.
NOTE
l If you check the Do not search the ports with Fiber/Cable created on NMS check box, the system only searches for the ports that do not have fibers. l To check if the created fiber is consistent with the actual fiber connection, leave the check box unchecked. l If you check the Do not search the ports with Fiber/Cable created on NMS check box, and if all the selected ports have fibers created, the system displays a message indicating that the search field is null.
Step 3 A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Step 4 To create fibers, select one or more fibers from the Physical Fiber/Cable Link List list and click Create Fiber/Cable.
NOTE
l When one or more fibers are selected in the Physical Fiber/Cable Link List list, fibers that conflict with the selected fibers, are shown in the Logical Fiber/Cable Link List list. If there is any conflicting fiber, proceed to Step 5 and delete it before creating fibers. l During fiber creation, if all the selected fibers are in the Already created state, the system displays the message as follows: No fiber to create.
Step 5 To delete the conflicting fibers, from the Logical Fiber/Cable Link List list select one or more fibers whose values are Yes for the Conflict with logical link (Y/N) parameter in the Misconnected Fiber list. Click Delete Fiber/Cable. ----End
Subsequent Handling
When the information about the fiber that is created through search is incomplete, you can supplement the information about the fiber by modifying the fiber/cable information.
1.4.2 Automatically Creating Radio Links

Using the fiber/cable search function, you can know whether any radio links are connected at a specified IF interface. This helps you quickly create radio links at the IF interface. For a newly created network, you can search for all the IF interfaces networkwide to create radio links after you complete the board configuration on the U2000. In this way, you can monitor the actual working state of each radio link.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. The IF board for each NE must be created on the U2000.
Context
The radio frequency wireless signals within the frequency range of 300 MHz to 300 GHz are called radio signals. The links that transmit radio signals are called radio links.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Discovery > Fiber from the main menu. Step 2 In the left-hand pane, select IF interfaces for one or multiple radio NEs. Click Search. A progress bar is displayed.
NOTE
l If you check the Do not search the ports with Fiber/Cable created on NMS check box, the system does not search for the ports at which radio links are already created. l If you need to check consistency between the created radio links and the actual radio links, do not check this check box. l If you check this check box and if all the selected ports radio links are created, a dialog box is displayed after the search is complete, telling that the search domain is empty.
Step 3 After the search is complete, a dialog box is displayed, telling that the operation was successful. Click Close. Step 4 In the Physical Fiber/Cable Link List list, select one or multiple radio links. Click Create Fiber/Cable.
NOTE
l When you select one or multiple radio links in the Physical Fiber/Cable Link List list, the radio links that conflict with the selected ones are automatically displayed in the Logical Fiber/Cable Link List list. In this case, refer to Step 5 to delete the conflicting radio links before the creation. l During the creation of radio links, if the selected links are all in the Already created state, the system prompts No fiber to create.
Step 5 In the Logical Fiber/Cable Link List list, select one or multiple conflicting radio links (the Conflict with logical link (Y/N) value of which in the Misconnected Fiber list is displayed as Yes), Click Delete Fiber/Cable. ----End
Subsequent Handling
When the information about the radio link that is created through search is incomplete, you can supplement the information about the radio link by modifying the fiber/cable information.
1.4.3 Manually Creating Radio Links

After you manually fill in the table, the U2000 can create radio links according to the configuration information about the links. This operation is often used when actual radio link is not formed.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. The boards to be connected with radio links must be created.
Context
Usually, the radio frequency wireless signal within the frequency range of 300 MHz to 300 GHz is called a radio signal. The link that transmits radio signals is called a radio link.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the to a + sign. shortcut icon on the toolbar of the U2000 Main Topology and the cursor changes
Step 2 Click the source NE of the radio link on the U2000 Main Topology. Step 3 Select the source board and port in the Select Fiber/Cable Source dialog box. Step 4 Click OK and the cursor changes to a + sign. Step 5 Click the sink NE of the radio link on the U2000 Main Topology. Step 6 Select the sink board and port in the Select Fiber/Cable Sink dialog box.
TIP
When selecting the wrong source or sink NE, right-click and click OK in the Object Selection dialog box to exit.
Step 7 Click OK. Enter the information of the fiber or cable in the Create Link dialog box. Step 8 Click OK. The created radio link appears between the source and sink NEs on the U2000 Main Topology. ----End
1.5 Creating a Topology Subnet

The subnet created here is based on a topological concept to facilitate management. In the case of topology objects in the same network area or with similar attributes, you can allocate them in one topology subnet.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.
A topology subnet is created only to simplify the user interface and has no impact on the NEs.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the U2000 Main Topology and choose New > Subnet from the shortcut menu. Step 2 On the subnet tree of the displayed dialog box, select the type of subnet to be created. Step 3 Click the Property tab. Enter the attributes of the subnet. Step 4 Click the Select Objects tab. Select the created NEs or subnet from the Available Objects pane and click to add the NEs or subnet to the Select Objects pane.
NOTE
In the case of a similar dialog box for selecting objects, l l indicates that objects on the left pane are selected one by one to the right pane. indicates that all objects are selcted from the left pane to the right pane.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
1-17
2 DCN Management
2
About This Chapter
DCN Management
The U2000 communicates with NEs, and manages and maintains network nodes through a DCN. In the DCN, the U2000 and NEs are considered as nodes, which are connected by using the Ethernet or DCC physical channels. In practice, the U2000 and NEs may be located at different floors of the same building, different buildings or different cities. Hence, U2000 and NEs are connected through a DCN, which consists of switches and routers. The DCN between the NEs is referred to as an internal DCN. 2.1 DCN Overview The element management system (EMS) sets up communication with NEs through a data communication network (DCN), to manage and maintain these NEs. 2.2 DCN Management Flow This section describes operation tasks of creating and maintaining the DCN by using the U2000. It also describes the relation between the operation tasks. 2.3 Configuring ECC Communication ECC configuration is simple. By default, all Huawei equipment support the ECC protocol and the physical transmission channel is D1-D3 bytes. When the NE ID is set and fibers are connected, the ECC communication is established without any configurations. If you want to modify the ECC communication parameters, locally modify them. Do not remotely modify the parameters because ECC communication may be interrupted and cannot be recovered. If you have to remotely modify the parameters, start from the farthest end. 2.4 Configuring IP Over DCC Communication The IP over DCC communication transmits DCC data by the using IP data packets. The IP over DCC directly operates and maintains remote NEs by using standard TCP/IP protocol. In addition, it realizes the application functions, such as FTP, Telnet, and SNMP. As essential parts of the IP over DCC communication, the dynamic and static routing protocols are used to create route information. 2.5 Configuring OSI Over DCC Communication The OSI protocol is a widely used communication protocol in a network. By using the OSI over DCC communication, a network that consists of equipment from multiple vendors transparently transmits management information at the network layer. Hence, the interconnection with the equipment that supports OSI protocol from the third party is realized.
2 DCN Management
2.6 Configuring DCC Transparent Transmission In the case of hybrid networking composed by equipment from Huawei and other vendors, the service channel can be used to transparently transmit the DCC information to the third-party network. The DCC information enters the service channel through the external clock interface or the F1 data interface, and then reaches the third-party network over the related service channel. In this way, the DCC information is transparently transmitted. 2.7 Modifying GNE Parameters During the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or modify the communication address. 2.8 Changing the GNE for NEs When the GNE that the non-gateway NE belongs to is changed and this non-gateway NE does not belong to another GNE, you need to change the GNE to maintain the communication between the NEs and the U2000. When the number of NEs managed by a certain GNE exceeds a certain number (It is recommended that the number of non-gateway NEs that a GNE manages be no more than 50 or 60 at most.), change the GNE for certain NEs so that the communication between the U2000 and the NEs is not affected. 2.9 Configuring Standby GNEs for NEs You can configure standby GNEs for NEs, to avoid service interruption due to GNE failure. When the GNE for NEs fails, after an automatic switching to the standby GNE, the NEs are connected to the U2000 through the standby GNE. During the switching of GNEs for NEs, the communication may be interrupted transiently. But, this does not affect the services. You can configure up to three standby GNEs for an NE. 2.10 Changing a GNE to a Normal NE When you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change the GNE to a normal NE. 2.11 Changing a Normal NE to a GNE When you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change a normal NE to a GNE. 2.12 Checking GNE Switching Status If the active GNE of an NE fails, and the NE has a standby GNE, the NE automatically communicates with the U2000 through the standby GNE. To detect the GNE communication failure in time, you need to check the GNE switching status to ensure that the NEs communicate correctly with the U2000 through the GNE. 2.13 Testing the Communication Between the U2000 and the GNE When the network communication fails, you can view the communication between the GNE and the U2000. 2.14 Checking the Network Communication Status On some occasions, the U2000 cannot manage some NEs during the running of the network. By checking the communication status of the network, you can learn the communication status between the U2000 and NEs.
2-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2 DCN Management
2.1 DCN Overview

The element management system (EMS) sets up communication with NEs through a data communication network (DCN), to manage and maintain these NEs. In a DCN, the EMS and NEs are both regarded as network nodes, which can be connected through Ethernet or physical data communication channels (DCCs). In practical networking, the EMS and NEs can be located on different floors in a building, in different buildings, or even in different cities. Therefore, the connection between the EMS and NEs usually requires an external DCN that is composed of equipment such as LAN switch and routers. On the other hand, the DCN among NEs is referred to as an internal DCN. This section describes the internal DCN composed of SDH NEs. See Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 DCN network
U2000
IP/OSI DCN
External DCN
HW ECC or IP/OSI over DCC
Internal DCN
OptiX NE LAN switch
2.1.1 Background of DCN With the development of network scale, OAM of a network becomes more and more difficult. A stable and robust DCN management network helps lower the OAM cost. 2.1.2 DCN Solutions The OptiX series equipment of Huawei provide multiple DCN solutions. 2.1.3 HWECC Features and Functions To help the U2000 to manage NEs in a network, the embedded control channel (ECC) transmits operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) information by using the D bytes.
2 DCN Management
2.1.4 HWECC Application The ECC that Huawei implements provides a more flexible networking mode. The NEs can be connected through an optical port or the Ethernet port for ECC communication. In some special conditions, the Huawei equipment can transparently transmit the OAM information from the third-party equipment. 2.1.5 Basic Concepts of IP over DCC This section introduces the basic concept of IP over DCC. 2.1.6 Features and Functions of IP over DCC IP over DCC has the functions and features that are different from the traditional DCC. 2.1.7 Application of IP over DCC An Ethernet port is used to connect the U2000 and NEs. The NEs are connected to each other through fibers or Ethernet. 2.1.8 Basic Concepts of OSI over DCC This section introduces the basic concept of OSI over DCC. 2.1.9 Features and Functions of OSI over DCC When a transmission network consists of equipment from multiple vendors, the OSI over DCC transparently transmits the management information at the network layer, thereby offering greater flexibility in networking. A user can use the existing DCC resources to uniformly manage the equipment from multiple vendors without creating extra DCN channels. 2.1.10 Application of OSI over DCC According to different network situations, OSI over DCC has two major applications.
2.1.1 Background of DCN

With the development of network scale, OAM of a network becomes more and more difficult. A stable and robust DCN management network helps lower the OAM cost. In a DCN, the DCC bytes in SDH overheads are used as physical channels for DCN management. The customer does not need to set up private DCN channels so that the network construction cost is greatly lowered. For a DCN, the SDH provides the following bandwidth: l l l By using the D1-D3 bytes in SDH regenerator section overheads (RSOH), the SDH provides a 192 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN. By using the D4-D12 bytes in SDH multiplex section overheads (MSOH), the SDH provides a 576 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN. By using the D1-D12 bytes in SDH section overheads, the SDH provides a 768 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
Figure 2-2 shows the positions of DCC bytes in SDH overheads.
2-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2 DCN Management
Figure 2-2 Positions of DCC bytes in SDH overheads

A1 B1 D1 A1 A1 A2 E1 D2 AU PTR B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 B2 B2 K1 D5 D8 D11 M1 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 MSOH A2 A2 J0 F1 D3 RSOH
2.1.2 DCN Solutions

The OptiX series equipment of Huawei provide multiple DCN solutions. The OptiX series equipment support the DCN networking by using the following three protocols: l l l HWECC TCP/IP (IP over DCC) OSI (OSI over DCC)
The HWECC protocol is a private protocol developed by Huawei to support the DCN networking of OptiX equipment. The HWECC protocol features easy configuration and application. As it is private, the HWECC protocol does not meet the management requirements for hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors. The TCP/IP and OSI protocols are standard communication protocols that solve the management issue in the case of hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors. These two protocols can also be used in a network that is composed of only Huawei equipment.
NOTE
When OptiX equipment is interconnected with other vendors' equipment that does not support the TCP/IP and OSI standard communication protocols, Huawei provides the transparent transmission function for DCC bytes, and provides relevant Ethernet service channels to transparently transmit the OAM information.
2.1.3 HWECC Features and Functions

To help the U2000 to manage NEs in a network, the embedded control channel (ECC) transmits operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) information by using the D bytes. The HWECC protocol is mainly applied to transmit OAM information between Huawei optical equipment. The HWECC protocol stake itself does not recognize the OAM information of the third-party equipment. When the networking involves third-party equipment, the OAM information cannot be interconnected but Huawei optical equipment can transparently transmit
2 DCN Management
the OAM information of the third-party equipment. Hence, customers can use the current DCC resources to manage all equipment.
2.1.4 HWECC Application

The ECC that Huawei implements provides a more flexible networking mode. The NEs can be connected through an optical port or the Ethernet port for ECC communication. In some special conditions, the Huawei equipment can transparently transmit the OAM information from the third-party equipment. There are two typical applications of the HWECC protocol for networking schemes.
Application 1 Networking That Involves Only Huawei Equipment

Figure 2-3 shows the networking that involves only Huawei equipment. Figure 2-3 Networking that involves only Huawei equipment
NM computer
HUB1
GNE1
NE NE6 6
HUB2
NE7
NE12
NE2
NE5
NE8
NE11
Network cable Fiber
NE3
NE4 Subnet 1
NE9
NE10 Subnet 2
Such networking requires that one gateway NE (GNE) be present for the communication between other NEs and the U2000 through the Ethernet interface. The NEs communicate with each other through an optical port or Ethernet interfaces. The subnetworks in Figure 2-3 perform the extended ECC communication through Ethernet interfaces, such as NE6 and NE7.
NOTE
Extended ECC means the ECC communication by using the Ethernet when there is no connected optical path between two or more NEs.
Application 2 Networking That Involves Huawei Equipment and Third-Party Equipment

Figure 2-4 shows the networking that involves Huawei equipment and third-party equipment.
2-6
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2 DCN Management
Figure 2-4 Networking that involves Huawei equipment and third-party equipment
Third-party NM
HUB
NE
NE
NE
NE Third-party equipment NE Huawei equipment NE NE
NE
NE
NE
For such networking, the OAM information of the third-party equipment should travel through Huawei equipment, which provides the function to transparently transmit the DCC. During the transmission, Huawei equipment does not analyze the data. For the DCC transparent transmission, perform the corresponding configuration at each NE along the data transmitting trail.
2.1.5 Basic Concepts of IP over DCC

This section introduces the basic concept of IP over DCC.
IP over DCC
The IP over DCC protocol follows the TCP/IP protocol and is applied to control remote NEs through the Internet. For the IP over DCC protocol, the D bytes (D1-D3 by default) of the overhead are used for communication. Huawei optical equipment supports dynamic and static routing.
OSPF
The open shortest path first (OSPF) protocol is a dynamic routing protocol based on the link state. The NEs update the route table of each NE dynamically by using the OSPF protocol. The OSPF protocol divides an autonomous domain into different areas so that routes are updated within an area or between areas. Normally, the gateway NE (GNE) and all the non-gateway NEs (non-GNEs) managed by it must be within the same OSPF area.
Remote Access
l Gateway NE mode: The ECC protocol is used. U2000 logs in to the GNE that is connected to the computer. Then other NEs can be accessed through the NE ID. After the IP over DCC feature is added, this mode can still be used to access remote NEs. Direct connection mode: The IP over DCC feature is used, and the remote NE can be connected directly through the IP address. You just need to enter the destination IP address
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2 DCN Management
in the login interface. For this mode, however, you need to add in advance the static route or default gateway in the U2000 and the NE that needs to be accessed directly.
2.1.6 Features and Functions of IP over DCC

IP over DCC has the functions and features that are different from the traditional DCC. The DCC is used to transmit the OAM (operation, maintenance, and administration) data between NEs. The protocol stacks used by different vendors are not compatible with each other. Thus, extra overhead bytes or service resources need to be allocated to transmit DCC data transparently in a network composed of multi-vendor products. The IP over DCC meets most of the networking requirements in existing networks without occupying extra overhead bytes or service resources. The IP over DCC simplifies the network structure, saves network resources, and meets the networking requirements quickly. The IP over DCC supports the following features: l Adopting the standard TCP/IP protocol, which makes it be compatible with other vendor's equipment and simplifies the network management l Adopting the forwarding function of the third layer in the protocol stack, which requires extra overhead bytes or service paths l Bringing flexible networking models l Bringing simple upgrade modes and great compatibility. It is easy for IP over DCC to work with new forwarding or multi-protocol features on the application layer
2.1.7 Application of IP over DCC

An Ethernet port is used to connect the U2000 and NEs. The NEs are connected to each other through fibers or Ethernet.
Application 1: Gateway NE Mode

If the U2000 and the GNE connect to the same Ethernet (the U2000 and the GNE need to be in the same subnet), and other NEs are accessed in the gateway NE mode, you need not to add any static routes. As shown in Figure 2-5, the U2000 with the IP address of 129.9.0.100 uses the nearby NE1 as the GNE to access other NEs. You need not to add static routes on the U2000 or NEs. Figure 2-5 Gateway NE mode
NM computer IP address 129.9.0.100 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
NE4 133.168.0.4 255.255.255.0
NE1 129.9.0.2 255.255.255.0
NE3 133.168.0.3 255.255.255.0
NE name IP address Subnet mask
NE2 133.168.0.2 255.255.255.0
2-8
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2 DCN Management
Application 2: Gateway NE Mode (by Default Gateway)

If the U2000 is connected to the GNE through a router and other NEs are accessed in the gateway NE mode, you need to add a default gateway on the U2000 and on the GNE. As shown in Figure 2-6, the U2000 with the IP address of 10.100.11.12 connects with the GNE (NE1) through a router and accesses other NEs in the gateway NE mode. In this case, you need to set a default gateway on both the U2000 and NE1. Set the default gateway on the U2000 to 10.100.11.1, and that on NE1 to 129.9.0.254. Figure 2-6 Gateway NE mode (by default gateway)
NM computer IP address 10.100.11.12 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 Default gateway 10.100.11.1
10.100.11.1 255.255.255.0 Router 129.9.0.254 255.255.255.0 NE1 129.9.0.2 255.255.255.0 129.9.0.254 NE2 133.168.0.2 255.255.255.0 NE4 133.168.0.4 255.255.255.0 NE3 133.168.0.3 255.255.255.0
NE name IP address Subnet mask Default gateway
Application 3: Direct Connection Mode (by Static Routes)

If the U2000 and the GNE connect to the same Ethernet and other NEs are accessed in the direct connection mode, you need to set on the U2000 the default gateway to the IP address of the NE that is connected to the U2000 directly. Or you need to add the static route to the non-GNEs, with the forwarding address as the IP address of the GNE. As shown in Figure 2-7, if the U2000 with the IP address of 129.9.0.100 needs to access NE3 directly, you need to add the static route to 133.168.0.0/24 on the U2000.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2-9
2 DCN Management
Figure 2-7 Direct connection mode (by static routes)

NM computer 129.9.0.100 IP address 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask Default gateway 129.9.0.2 Static routes Destination: 133.168.0.0 Mask: 255.255.255.0
NE4 133.168.0.4 255.255.255.0
NE1 129.9.0.2 255.255.255.0 NE name IP address Subnet mask Default gateway Static routes NE2 133.168.0.2 255.255.255.0
NE3 133.168.0.3 255.255.255.0
Application 4: Direct Connection Mode through a Router (by Static Routes)

The U2000 connects to the Ethernet port of a certain NE through a router and accesses other NEs in the direct connection mode. You need to perform the following operations. l l l On the U2000, set the static route to the GNE and non-GNEs. On the GNE, set the default route to the U2000. Add static routes to the U2000 on the destination station and the intermediate station.
As shown in Figure 2-8, the U2000 with the IP address of 10.100.11.12 connects to NE1 through a router and accesses NE3 in the direct connection mode. Suppose the IP address of the U2000 is 10.100.11.0 (subnet mask 255.255.255.0). Perform the listed operations: l l l l Add the static route on the U2000 to the gateway 129.9.0.2. Set the default gateway on NE1 to 129.9.0.254. Add the static route on NE2 to 10.100.11.0, with the next hop address as 129.9.0.2. Add the static route on NE3 to 10.100.11.0, with the next hop address as 133.168.0.2.
2-10
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2 DCN Management
Figure 2-8 Direct connection mode through a router (by static routes)
NM computer IP address 10.100.11.12 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 Default gateway 10.100.11.1 Static routes Destination:129.9.0.2 Mask:255.255.255.0 Destination:133.168.0.0 Mask:255.255.255.0
10.100.11.1 255.255.255.0 Router 129.9.0.254 255.255.255.0
NE4 133.168.0.4 255.255.255.0 NE1 129.9.0.2 255.255.255.0 129.9.0.254 NE2 133.168.0.2 255.255.255.0 Static routes Destination:10.100.11.0 Mask: 255.255.255.0 Next hop:129.9.0.2
NE3 133.168.0.3 255.255.255.0 Static routes Destination:10.100.11.0 Mask: 255.255.255.0 Next hop:133.168.0.2
NE name IP address Subnet mask Default gateway Static routes
Configuration Requirements
If NEs communicate with each other through IP over DCC, note the following rules for setting the network scale. It is recommended that the number of non-gateway NEs (including the extended ECC) that a GNE manages be no more than 50 or 60 at most. If NEs communicate with each other through IP over DCC, note the following rules for setting the IP address. l l l l If NEs communicate through IP addresses on the network layer, each NE need to have a unique IP address to avoid routing error due to conflict. NEs support standard A, B, C types of IP addresses, that is, the IP address ranges from 1.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254. The 127.x.x.x, a loopback address, cannot be used. The IP address must be used with the subnet mask. The subnet mask supports consecutive masks in addition to natural masks, for example, 255.255.224.0. When the IP over DCC communication is used between a GNE and a non-GNE, the IP addresses can be of different network sections.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2 DCN Management
l l l l l
The GNE and non-GNEs cannot be in the same IP subnet. The NEs managed through the same GNE can be in different IP subnets. Do not configure one GNE and one non-GNE into the same IP subnet. The Ethernets in the network must belong to different subnets. Otherwise, a routing error will occur in the whole network. This is not allowed. The subnet masks of the NEs must be the same. The priority of static routes is higher than that of dynamic routes. If there is a conflict, static routes take priority.
2.1.8 Basic Concepts of OSI over DCC

This section introduces the basic concept of OSI over DCC.
NSAP
The OSI protocol takes the network service access point (NSAP) address as the protocol identification for nodes. The format of a simple NSAP address is shown in Figure 2-9. Figure 2-9 Format of a simple NSAP address
AREA ID 1-13 bytes SYS ID 6 bytes NSEL 1 byte
AREA ID: The length is adjustable and ranges from 1 to 13 bytes. The AREA ID is used for L2 routing addressing within a domain. The values should be the same in the L1 route domain and be different in the L2 route domain. SYS ID: The length is fixed to six bytes. The SYS ID is used for route addressing within a domain. For Huawei optical equipment, the former three bytes are fixed to 0x08003E and the latter three bytes are the same with the NE ID. NSEL: The NSEL value is fixed to 0x1D. The AREA ID of Huawei optical equipment is 47000400060001. The ISO8348/AD2 defines a complicated format of the NSAP address, as shown in Figure 2-10. Figure 2-10 Format of a complicated NSAP address
IDP Higher-Order DSP AFI IDI+pad DFI ORG RES RD AREA SYS ID 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
NSEL
DSP
Area Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
20
2-12
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2 DCN Management
This manual does not cover the naming details and functions of each character in the NSAP address format. For the OSI protocol, only the simple NSAP address format needs to be noticed. Huawei equipment applies the simple NSAP address format, which does not affect the interconnection between Huawei equipment and third-party equipment. The configuration of the NSAP address requires that the AREA ID in the same domain should be the same. l l l l l l l l l AFI: 47 IDI: 0005 DFI: 80 ORG: 000000 RES: 0000 RD: 0001 AREA: 0001 SYS ID: 00206005FA68 NSEL: 1D
When a networking involves Huawei equipment and third-party equipment within the same domain, set the AREA ID to 4700058000000000000001 0001.
TP4
The TP4 protocol locates at the transport layer of the OSI protocol stake. The TP4 protocol is applied to create a reliable communication connection. The TP4 protocol can handle the problems as data packet loss, repetition and falsification, which are caused by network faults.
2.1.9 Features and Functions of OSI over DCC

When a transmission network consists of equipment from multiple vendors, the OSI over DCC transparently transmits the management information at the network layer, thereby offering greater flexibility in networking. A user can use the existing DCC resources to uniformly manage the equipment from multiple vendors without creating extra DCN channels. The OSI protocol supports the following three types of network nodes: ES (End System), L1IS (Level 1 Intermediate Systems) and L2-IS (Level 2 Intermediate Systems). The ES only supports limited routing functions. To communicate with other network nodes, an ES can only forward data packets to them by L1-IS or L2-IS that is directly connected to the ES and has the routing function. As a result, only the nodes at the tips of a network rather than the nodes amid a network are allowed to be set to ES. Because of the limited routing function that may be an obstacle in network expansion, it is recommended not to set an NE to an ES during the networking. The networking system of Huawei acts as an ES network node. L1-IS is the default node type of Huawei optical network equipment. It only supports the routing within an area, also known as Level 1 Routing. If a piece of equipment requires the routing across multiple areas, also known as Level 2 Routing, you need to set the node type of the equipment to L2-IS. An L2-IS-type node is in charge of two routing tables, one for intra-area routing and the other one for inter-area routing.
2.1.10 Application of OSI over DCC

According to different network situations, OSI over DCC has two major applications.
2 DCN Management
Application 1 Third-Party Equipment Forwarding OAM Information of Huawei Equipment

As shown in Figure 2-11, Huawei equipment locates at the edge of the network and third-party equipment locates at the core. The third-party equipment forwards the OAM information between Huawei equipment and the Huawei U2000. In this case, at least one GNE should be configured in the subnet of the Huawei equipment. Figure 2-11 Third-party equipment forwarding OAM information of Huawei equipment
Huawei NM ES OSI LAN OSI DCN Third-party NM
Level 2 Routing Area
GNE
Legacy Network GNE New Network Third-party NE
Huawei NE
Application 2 Huawei Equipment Forwarding OAM Information of Third-Party Equipment

As shown in Figure 2-12, Huawei equipment locates at the core of the network while third-party equipment at the edge. Huawei equipment forwards the OAM information between the thirdparty NM and equipment.
2-14
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2 DCN Management
Figure 2-12 Huawei equipment forwarding OAM information of third-party equipment

Huawei NM ES OSI LAN OSI DCN Third-party NM
Level 2 Routing Area
GNE
Legacy Network GNE New Network Third-party NE
Huawei NE
2.2 DCN Management Flow

This section describes operation tasks of creating and maintaining the DCN by using the U2000. It also describes the relation between the operation tasks. To configure and maintain the DCN, see the flow chart in Figure 2-13. During network deployment, set up the communication between NEs according to the planned communication mode. You can perform adjustment during the maintenance according to network situations.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2-15
2 DCN Management
Figure 2-13 DCN management flow

Required Optional
Configuring ECC Communication
Configuring IP Over DCC Communication
Configuring OSI Over DCC Communication
Common Maintenance Operations
Modifying the NE ID
Modifying the NE ID
Modifying the NE ID
Modifying GNE Parameters
Configuring an Extended ECC Communication Viewing the ECC Route for an NE
Setting NE Communication Parameters Configuring the IP Static Route for an NE Customizing Communication Channels Between NEs Viewing the Communication Status of DCC Channel Querying the OSPF Protocol Status
Setting the NSAP Address for an NE
Changing the GNE for NEs
Configuring the Node Type for an NE Configuring the Communication Protocol Stack and LAPD Role for an Optical Port
Configuring Standby GNEs for NEs
Adding the Manual ECC Route for an NE
Changing a GNE to a Normal NE
Customizing Communication Channels Between NEs
Changing a Normal NE to a GNE
Configuring OSI Tunnel
Configuring Communication for Third-Party Equipment Interconnection Configuring Overhead Services
Checking GNE Switching Status
Customizing Communication Channels Between NEs
Configuring Proxy ARP Querying the Route Information of a Node
Testing the Communication Between the NMS and the GNE
Creating an OSI GNE
Checking the Network Communication Status
2.3 Configuring ECC Communication

ECC configuration is simple. By default, all Huawei equipment support the ECC protocol and the physical transmission channel is D1-D3 bytes. When the NE ID is set and fibers are connected, the ECC communication is established without any configurations. If you want to modify the ECC communication parameters, locally modify them. Do not remotely modify the parameters because ECC communication may be interrupted and cannot be recovered. If you have to remotely modify the parameters, start from the farthest end. 2.3.1 Modifying the NE ID The ECC protocol uses the NE ID as the unique identifier of an NE. Hence, you need to assign a unique NE ID to each NE when planning a network. If an NE ID conflicts with another NE ID, it causes an ECC route conflict and the U2000 cannot manage certain NEs. During the commissioning or expansion process, when you need to adjust the original network planning and change NE IDs, you can use the U2000 to change NE IDs.
2 DCN Management
2.3.2 Configuring an Extended ECC Communication You can establish an extended ECC communication between two shelves without fiber connections through an Ethernet line. In this way, the U2000 manages the equipment in a centralized manner. 2.3.3 Viewing the ECC Route for an NE You can check whether the ECC route is correct. If the ECC route is incorrect, you need to reconfigure it. 2.3.4 Adding the Manual ECC Route for an NE If the ECC route of an NE is inconsistent with the planned route, you can modify the ECC route by manually adding it. 2.3.5 Customizing Communication Channels Between NEs NEs communicate with each other through data communications channel (DCC). To meet the requirements of the network management in a complex network, you can configure D1-D3, D4D12, D1-D12 as DCC and multirate DCC. When configuring the DCC, you need to set the DCC rate and allocate DCC resources according to DCC channel types. 2.3.6 Configuring Communication for Third-Party Equipment Interconnection In the case of multi-vendor networking, you need to allocate the DCC bytes of Huawei's equipment to ensure that the bytes are transmitted transparently.
2.3.1 Modifying the NE ID

The ECC protocol uses the NE ID as the unique identifier of an NE. Hence, you need to assign a unique NE ID to each NE when planning a network. If an NE ID conflicts with another NE ID, it causes an ECC route conflict and the U2000 cannot manage certain NEs. During the commissioning or expansion process, when you need to adjust the original network planning and change NE IDs, you can use the U2000 to change NE IDs.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The NE must be created.
Precautions
CAUTION
Modifying the NE ID may interrupt NE communication and reset the NE.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Modify NE ID, and the Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Enter the New ID and the New Extended ID. Click OK.
2 DCN Management
Step 4 Click OK in the Warning dialog box. ----End
2.3.2 Configuring an Extended ECC Communication

You can establish an extended ECC communication between two shelves without fiber connections through an Ethernet line. In this way, the U2000 manages the equipment in a centralized manner.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. NEs are properly connected with crossover cables.
Context
CAUTION
This operation may restore the settings of communication, and may interrupt services.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > ECC Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the ECC Extended Mode.
If you set ECC Extended Mode to Then Auto mode You need not set other parameters.
2-18
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2 DCN Management
If you set ECC Extended Mode to Then Specified mode If the NE serves as the server, set Port in the Set Server. If the NE serves as the client, set Opposite IP and Port in the Set Client area.
NOTE l Some NEs can be set as the server and client at the same time. l If you need to set the NE as the server and client at the same time, the port number when the NE serves as the server cannot be duplicate with the port number when the NE serves as the client.
NOTE
l Auto mode: Establish an extended ECC connection automatically. Though this mode is convenient, extra connections will be established and the resource availability is low. It is recommended when there are less than four NEs. No extended ECC can be established automatically unless both the NEs between which an extended ECC is to be established are set to the automatic mode. l Specified mode: Specifies that an extended ECC is to be established between the server and the client. The connection is highly reliable and the bandwidth availability is high. This mode is usually used to establish an extended ECC connection. l For an NE, the two modes cannot be used at the same time to extend ECC.
Step 3 Click Apply and the Warning dialog box is displayed. Click OK. ----End
Postrequisite
After you complete the settings for one NE, you need to configure the settings for the opposite NE to enable the extended ECC communication. Note the following points: l l If you set ECC Extended Mode to Auto mode for an NE, configure the same settings for the opposite NE. If you set ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode for an NE, configure the same settings for the opposite NE. In addition, the roles of the two NEs must be different. That is, if an NE serves as the server, the opposite NE must be the client.
2.3.3 Viewing the ECC Route for an NE

You can check whether the ECC route is correct. If the ECC route is incorrect, you need to reconfigure it.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2-19
2 DCN Management
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Refresh and the ECC route for an NE is displayed in the NE ECC Link Management Table. ----End
2.3.4 Adding the Manual ECC Route for an NE

If the ECC route of an NE is inconsistent with the planned route, you can modify the ECC route by manually adding it.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Add Manual Route and the Add Manual Route dialog box is displayed. Set Destination NE, Transfer NE, Distance and Level. Step 3 Click OK. and then click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
2.3.5 Customizing Communication Channels Between NEs

NEs communicate with each other through data communications channel (DCC). To meet the requirements of the network management in a complex network, you can configure D1-D3, D4D12, D1-D12 as DCC and multirate DCC. When configuring the DCC, you need to set the DCC rate and allocate DCC resources according to DCC channel types.
Prerequisite
Context
The NE uses D1-D3 as the DCC by default to communicate through the DCC.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab, click New. Set Port, Channel Type and Protocol Type in the dialog box that is displayed. Step 3 Click OK and then click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
2 DCN Management
2.3.6 Configuring Communication for Third-Party Equipment Interconnection

In the case of multi-vendor networking, you need to allocate the DCC bytes of Huawei's equipment to ensure that the bytes are transmitted transparently.
Prerequisite
Context
In the case of multi-vendor networking, the DCC bytes of the equipment from other vendors are transmitted transparently. You can allocate the DCC bytes of Huawei's equipment through the idle DCC bytes of the third-party's equipment so that the bytes are transmitted transparently. This may occur in one of the following three ways: l Huawei's equipment is in the network center, while a third party's equipment is at the edge of the network. The Huawei equipment and third-party equipment are managed by their respective network management systems by using the D1 to D3 bytes. In this case, Huawei's equipment transparently transmits the third party's DCC bytes through three consecutive bytes between D4 and D12. Huawei's equipment is at the edge of the network, while a third party's equipment is in the network center. The Huawei equipment and third-party equipment are managed by their respective network management systems by using the D1 to D3 bytes. In this case, Huawei's equipment adjusts its own D1-D3 bytes to three consecutive bytes between D4 and D12. Hence, Huawei's equipment transparently transmits the network management information through the third-party's equipment. Huawei's equipment also transparently transmits the other overhead bytes, for example, E2, F1, or X1-X4, through the idle D bytes.
For the DCC transparent transmission, perform the corresponding configuration at each NE along the data transmitting trail.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree. Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab. Step 2 Click Create and the Create DCC Transparent Transmission Byte dialog box is displayed. Select the source and the sink timeslot, port and overhead bytes. Step 3 Click OK. and then click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
2.4 Configuring IP Over DCC Communication

The IP over DCC communication transmits DCC data by the using IP data packets. The IP over DCC directly operates and maintains remote NEs by using standard TCP/IP protocol. In addition, it realizes the application functions, such as FTP, Telnet, and SNMP. As essential parts of the IP over DCC communication, the dynamic and static routing protocols are used to create route information.
2 DCN Management
2.4.1 Modifying the NE ID In the commissioning or expansion process, when you need to adjust the original planning and change the NE ID, you can use the U2000 to achieve it. 2.4.2 Setting NE Communication Parameters When configuring the IP Over DCC communication, you need to set the parameters including IP, Subnet Mask, Gateway IP, Extended ID, and Connection Mode for the NE. 2.4.3 Configuring the IP Static Route for an NE A static route forwards the data between NEs, or between a router and the computer where the U2000 is installed. 2.4.4 Customizing Communication Channels Between NEs NEs communicate with each other through data communications channel (DCC). To meet the requirements of the network management in a complex network, you can configure D1-D3, D4D12, D1-D12 as DCC and multirate DCC. When configuring the DCC, you need to set the DCC rate and allocate DCC resources according to DCC channel types. 2.4.5 Viewing the Communication Status of DCC Channel You can view the communication status of DCC channel. 2.4.6 Querying the OSPF Protocol Status You can query the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol status. 2.4.7 Configuring Proxy ARP The address resolution protocol (ARP) helps you to query the MAC address of the destination equipment using its IP address. If you enable proxy ARP for a GNE, the GNE can answer ARP requests for other non-gateway NEs, so that you can set IP addresses of NEs of the same network in the same network segment.

In the commissioning or expansion process, when you need to adjust the original planning and change the NE ID, you can use the U2000 to achieve it.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
Modifying the NE ID may interrupt NE communication.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Modify NE ID, and the Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.
2 DCN Management
Step 3 Enter the New ID and the New Extended ID. Click OK. Step 4 Click OK in the Warning dialog box. ----End
2.4.2 Setting NE Communication Parameters

When configuring the IP Over DCC communication, you need to set the parameters including IP, Subnet Mask, Gateway IP, Extended ID, and Connection Mode for the NE.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. The IP GNE must be created.
Context
CAUTION
The operation of modifying the NE communication parameters interrupts the communication and affects the services.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the NE communication parameters, including IP, Subnet Mask, Gateway IP, Extended ID, NSAP Address. Step 3 Click Apply and then click OK in the Warning dialog box that appears twice. in the Warning dialog box that appears twice. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
2.4.3 Configuring the IP Static Route for an NE

A static route forwards the data between NEs, or between a router and the computer where the U2000 is installed.
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the IP Route Management tab. Step 2 Click New and the Create an IP Route dialog box is displayed. Set the Destination Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway.
2 DCN Management
Step 3 Click OK. and then click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End

Prerequisite
Context
Procedure
2.4.5 Viewing the Communication Status of DCC Channel

You can view the communication status of DCC channel.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree. Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab. Step 2 Click Query, and view the communication status of DCC channel. ----End
2 DCN Management
2.4.6 Querying the OSPF Protocol Status

You can query the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol status.
Prerequisite
Context
OSPF is a link-state, hierarchical IGP routing algorithm . OSPF features include least-cost routing, multipath routing, and load balancing. OSPF was derived from an early version of the IS-IS protocol.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab. Step 2 Click Query to check if the OSPF protocol status is normal. ----End
2.4.7 Configuring Proxy ARP

The address resolution protocol (ARP) helps you to query the MAC address of the destination equipment using its IP address. If you enable proxy ARP for a GNE, the GNE can answer ARP requests for other non-gateway NEs, so that you can set IP addresses of NEs of the same network in the same network segment.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the Proxy ARP tab. Step 2 Optional: Click Query. Step 3 Set Value to Disabled or Enabled from the drop-down list. Step 4 Click Apply. ----End
Postrequisite
After you enable proxy ARP, you need to create a static route for each NE.
2.5 Configuring OSI Over DCC Communication

The OSI protocol is a widely used communication protocol in a network. By using the OSI over DCC communication, a network that consists of equipment from multiple vendors transparently
2 DCN Management
transmits management information at the network layer. Hence, the interconnection with the equipment that supports OSI protocol from the third party is realized. 2.5.1 Modifying the NE ID In the commissioning or expansion process, when you need to adjust the original planning and change the NE ID, you can use the U2000 to achieve it. 2.5.2 Setting the NSAP Address for an NE If the U2000 sets up a TP4 connection with an NE, after you modify the NSAP address range that was previously set according to network planning, the communication between the U2000 and the GNE is interrupted, so you need to re-create the communication. You can use the U2000 to create a TCP connection with an NE, set the NSAP address range for the NE, and then modify the connection mode between the U2000 and the NE to TP4. 2.5.3 Configuring the Node Type for an NE Based on the network planning, you can set the node type to ES, L1 IS or L2 IS for an NE. For easy expansion of the network, avoid the ES type. 2.5.4 Configuring the Communication Protocol Stack and LAPD Role for an Optical Port The default protocol stack enabled for optical ports on an NE depends on products. If the current protocol stack enabled for an optical port differs from the planned one, you can configure it on the U2000. If an optical port uses the OSI protocol stack, the link access procedure on the D channel (LAPD) role of all optical ports is User by default. You can set the LAPD role for each optical port based on network planning. The local LAPD role depends on the remote LAPD role. Ensure that the two LAPD roles are different. 2.5.5 Configuring OSI Tunnel When the OSI-protocol-based third-party equipment needs to transfer information through an IP network that consists of Huawei equipment, you can create a virtual OSI tunnel to transparently transmit the information. 2.5.6 Customizing Communication Channels Between NEs NEs communicate with each other through data communications channel (DCC). To meet the requirements of the network management in a complex network, you can configure D1-D3, D4D12, D1-D12 as DCC and multirate DCC. When configuring the DCC, you need to set the DCC rate and allocate DCC resources according to DCC channel types. 2.5.7 Querying the Route Information of a Node After you finish configuring and connecting the fibers, you can check whether the route information of each node is correct. If the route information is correct, it means that the nodes can normally communicate with each other. 2.5.8 Creating an OSI GNE After you configure the NSAP address of an NE, you can create an OSI GNE in the TP4 connection mode.

In the commissioning or expansion process, when you need to adjust the original planning and change the NE ID, you can use the U2000 to achieve it.
Prerequisite
l l
2-26
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The NE must be created.
2 DCN Management
Context
CAUTION
Modifying the NE ID may interrupt NE communication.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Modify NE ID, and the Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Enter the New ID and the New Extended ID. Click OK. Step 4 Click OK in the Warning dialog box. ----End
2.5.2 Setting the NSAP Address for an NE

If the U2000 sets up a TP4 connection with an NE, after you modify the NSAP address range that was previously set according to network planning, the communication between the U2000 and the GNE is interrupted, so you need to re-create the communication. You can use the U2000 to create a TCP connection with an NE, set the NSAP address range for the NE, and then modify the connection mode between the U2000 and the NE to TP4.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the NSAP Address. Step 3 Click Apply. Step 4 Choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. Click the GNE tab. Step 5 Right-click a GNE and choose Modify GNE from the shortcut menu. Step 6 In the Modify GNE dialog box, select OSI Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list, and enter the NSAP Address.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2-27
2 DCN Management
Step 7 Click OK and then click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
2.5.3 Configuring the Node Type for an NE

Based on the network planning, you can set the node type to ES, L1 IS or L2 IS for an NE. For easy expansion of the network, avoid the ES type.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
Setting the Configuration Role of an NE may cause service interruption.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree. Click the Network Layer Parameters tab. Step 2 Double-click the Configuration Role and select a node type from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click Apply and click OK in the Confirm dialog box. dialog box. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
2 DCN Management
2.5.4 Configuring the Communication Protocol Stack and LAPD Role for an Optical Port
The default protocol stack enabled for optical ports on an NE depends on products. If the current protocol stack enabled for an optical port differs from the planned one, you can configure it on the U2000. If an optical port uses the OSI protocol stack, the link access procedure on the D channel (LAPD) role of all optical ports is User by default. You can set the LAPD role for each optical port based on network planning. The local LAPD role depends on the remote LAPD role. Ensure that the two LAPD roles are different.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree. Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab. Step 2 Optional: Click Query. Step 3 Select the optical port you want to set and click Delete. Step 4 Click New and set parameters in the Create dialog box.
2.5.5 Configuring OSI Tunnel

When the OSI-protocol-based third-party equipment needs to transfer information through an IP network that consists of Huawei equipment, you can create a virtual OSI tunnel to transparently transmit the information.
Prerequisite
Context
As OSI tunnel is an end-to-end function, you must configure this function at both ends of a tunnel.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2-29
2 DCN Management
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree. Click the OSI Tunnel tab. Step 2 Click New. In the Create OSI Tunnel window, set Remote IP Address and LAPD Actor.
NOTE
LAPD Actor refers to the LAPD role at an end. When setting this parameter, you must configure different roles for the two ends of a tunnel.
Step 3 Click OK and then click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. Step 4 Set the parameters in the LAPD Parameter pane.
NOTE
Set the same parameter settings for both ends of a tunnel.
Step 5 Click Apply and then click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End

Prerequisite
Context
Procedure
2.5.7 Querying the Route Information of a Node

After you finish configuring and connecting the fibers, you can check whether the route information of each node is correct. If the route information is correct, it means that the nodes can normally communicate with each other.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher.
2 DCN Management
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree. Click the Routing Table tab. Step 2 Optional: Click Refresh to query the route information on the NE. Step 3 View the information in the Link Adjacency Table and ensure that the information is correct. Step 4 Click the L1 Routing and the L2 Routing tabs to check if the respective route information is correct. ----End
2.5.8 Creating an OSI GNE

After you configure the NSAP address of an NE, you can create an OSI GNE in the TP4 connection mode.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Create > NE from the main menu. Step 2 In the Add Object dialog box, select the NE type from the Object Type tree. Enter the ID, Extended ID, Name and Remarks. Step 3 Select Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list. Step 4 Select OSI from the Protocol drop-down list. Step 5 Enter the NSAP Address of the GNE.
NOTE
The NSAP address consists of hexadecimal digits of up to 20 bytes, and its format is: domain address +08003e+NE ID+NSEL. The domain address is composed of 13 bytes and is entered by the user. The NSEL is the port number of the network-layer protocol, with a fixed value of 1d (one byte).
Step 6 Enter the NE user and password.

NOTE
The default NE user of the U2000 must be root, and the default password is password.
Step 7 Click OK. Click on the Main Topology and the NE icon is displayed in the position where you click.
NOTE
If the NE is not created properly or the communication between the NE and the U2000 is abnormal, the NE is displayed in gray.
----End
2.6 Configuring DCC Transparent Transmission

In the case of hybrid networking composed by equipment from Huawei and other vendors, the service channel can be used to transparently transmit the DCC information to the third-party
2 DCN Management
network. The DCC information enters the service channel through the external clock interface or the F1 data interface, and then reaches the third-party network over the related service channel. In this way, the DCC information is transparently transmitted. 2.6.1 Configuring Communication for Third-Party Equipment Interconnection In the case of multi-vendor networking, you need to allocate the DCC bytes of Huawei's equipment to ensure that the bytes are transmitted transparently. 2.6.2 Configuring DCC Transparent Transmission Through External Clock Interfaces If a third-party network exists between networks composed of Huawei equipment, the external clock interfaces can be used to transparently transmit the DCC information. In this way, the U2000 can uniformly manage the networks composed of Huawei equipment. 2.6.3 Configuring DCC Transparent Transmission Through F1 Data Interfaces You can configure the F1 data interface on the SCC board, to transparently transmit the data communication channel (DCC) information between back-to-back NEs.
2.6.1 Configuring Communication for Third-Party Equipment Interconnection

In the case of multi-vendor networking, you need to allocate the DCC bytes of Huawei's equipment to ensure that the bytes are transmitted transparently.
Prerequisite
Context
In the case of multi-vendor networking, the DCC bytes of the equipment from other vendors are transmitted transparently. You can allocate the DCC bytes of Huawei's equipment through the idle DCC bytes of the third-party's equipment so that the bytes are transmitted transparently. This may occur in one of the following three ways: l Huawei's equipment is in the network center, while a third party's equipment is at the edge of the network. The Huawei equipment and third-party equipment are managed by their respective network management systems by using the D1 to D3 bytes. In this case, Huawei's equipment transparently transmits the third party's DCC bytes through three consecutive bytes between D4 and D12. Huawei's equipment is at the edge of the network, while a third party's equipment is in the network center. The Huawei equipment and third-party equipment are managed by their respective network management systems by using the D1 to D3 bytes. In this case, Huawei's equipment adjusts its own D1-D3 bytes to three consecutive bytes between D4 and D12. Hence, Huawei's equipment transparently transmits the network management information through the third-party's equipment. Huawei's equipment also transparently transmits the other overhead bytes, for example, E2, F1, or X1-X4, through the idle D bytes.
For the DCC transparent transmission, perform the corresponding configuration at each NE along the data transmitting trail.
2-32
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2 DCN Management
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree. Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab. Step 2 Click Create and the Create DCC Transparent Transmission Byte dialog box is displayed. Select the source and the sink timeslot, port and overhead bytes. Step 3 Click OK. and then click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
2.6.2 Configuring DCC Transparent Transmission Through External Clock Interfaces

If a third-party network exists between networks composed of Huawei equipment, the external clock interfaces can be used to transparently transmit the DCC information. In this way, the U2000 can uniformly manage the networks composed of Huawei equipment.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The 2M external clock interface signals must be accessed to the E1 tributary board through a cable.
Context
As shown in Figure 2-14, when a third-party network exists, external clock interfaces can be used to transmit DCC information. In this way, the U2000 can configure and manage ring 2. Figure 2-14 External clock interfaces used to transparently transmit DCC information (example)
NMS
NE1 Ring 1 Third Party Transport network DCC
NE2 Ring 2
DCC
NOTE
If the third-party network does not exist, you can use a cable to connect the external clock interfaces of NE1 and NE2 to transparently transmit the DCC information.
Figure 2-15 shows how to connect NE1 and NE2. Through the third-party network, NE1 and NE2 can exchange E1 (DCC) signals.
2 DCN Management
Figure 2-15 External clock interfaces used to transparently transmit DCC information (example)
NE1 SDH processing board Third-party network External clock interface
E1(DCC)
SDH processing board
NE2
PDH processing board
External clock interface

E1(DCC)
PDH processing board
The network planning is as follows:

NOTE
l The external clock interfaces of NE1 and NE2 are connected to the first interface of the tributary board. l Configure a bidirectional cross-connection between the first VC-12 timeslot of the tributary board and the first VC-12 timeslot in the first VC-4 of the line board. l The RTN equipment can be connected to the third-party network by using the line board or intermediate frequency (IF) board.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the DCC transparent transmission through the external clock interface of NE 1. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree. Click DCC Rate Configuration. Click Create. In the Create dialog box displayed, select an external clock interface and set the parameters such as the channel type and protocol type. Click OK. Then, in the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. Select the external clock interface and set its enabling status to Enabled. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Click Close.
3. 4.
Step 2 Configure a bidirectional cross-connection between the tributary board and the line board. Step 3 Disable the DCC communication of the line board interconnected with the third-party network. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the port of the corresponding line board, click Enable Status, and select Disable. The Warning dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Click Apply. The Confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation was successful.
Step 4 Follow Steps 1 to 3 to perform the configuration on NE2. ----End
2-34
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2 DCN Management
2.6.3 Configuring DCC Transparent Transmission Through F1 Data Interfaces

You can configure the F1 data interface on the SCC board, to transparently transmit the data communication channel (DCC) information between back-to-back NEs.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the F1 tab. Step 3 In the Available Data Channel area, select two data channels and click Step 4 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close. ----End .
2.7 Modifying GNE Parameters

During the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or modify the communication address.
Prerequisite
Precautions
CAUTION
This operation is risky, because it may interrupt the communication.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. Click the GNE tab. Step 2 Select the GNE to be modified, right-click and choose Modify GNE from the shortcut menu. Step 3 In the Modify GNE dialog box displayed, set Gateway Type. l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
When Gateway Type is set to IP Gateway, modify IP Address.

2 DCN Management
When Gateway Type is set to OSI Gateway, modify NSAP Address.
NOTE
l Do not modify the Port No.. l Make sure that the IP address of the GNE is in the same network segment as the IP address of the U2000. If they are not in the same network segment, set the corresponding network ports, to make sure that the U2000 can log in to the GNE.
Step 4 Click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close. ----End
2.8 Changing the GNE for NEs

When the GNE that the non-gateway NE belongs to is changed and this non-gateway NE does not belong to another GNE, you need to change the GNE to maintain the communication between the NEs and the U2000. When the number of NEs managed by a certain GNE exceeds a certain number (It is recommended that the number of non-gateway NEs that a GNE manages be no more than 50 or 60 at most.), change the GNE for certain NEs so that the communication between the U2000 and the NEs is not affected.
Prerequisite
2 DCN Management
Precautions
CAUTION
This operation may interrupt the NE communication.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. Step 2 Click the NE tab. Step 3 Select an NE. Double-click the Primary GNE1 field and select a GNE from the drop-down list.
Step 4 Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. Step 5 Click Refresh. Test the modification with reference to Checking the Network Communication Status. ----End
2.9 Configuring Standby GNEs for NEs

You can configure standby GNEs for NEs, to avoid service interruption due to GNE failure. When the GNE for NEs fails, after an automatic switching to the standby GNE, the NEs are connected to the U2000 through the standby GNE. During the switching of GNEs for NEs, the communication may be interrupted transiently. But, this does not affect the services. You can configure up to three standby GNEs for an NE.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. Click the NE tab. Step 2 Select an NE. Double-click GNE2 and select a GNE from the drop-down list.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2-37
2 DCN Management
l To configure multiple standby GNEs, select a GNE from the GNE3 and GNE4 drop-down lists. l When the active GNE and standby GNEs fail one by one, the switching sequence is Primary GNE1, GNE2, GNE23, and GNE4. l You can select multiple lines at a time to set standby NEs in batches. Step 3 Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
2.10 Changing a GNE to a Normal NE

When you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change the GNE to a normal NE.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
This operation may interrupt the service.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. Click the GNE tab. Step 2 Right-click the GNE that you want to change and choose Delete GNE from the shortcut menu. Click OK in the Confirm and Reconfirm dialog box. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
Postrequisite
After changing the GNE to a normal NE, modify the attributes of the NE that uses the GNE and select another GNE.
2 DCN Management
2.11 Changing a Normal NE to a GNE

When you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change a normal NE to a GNE.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. Click the NE tab. Step 2 Right-click a normal NE and choose Change to GNE from the shortcut menu. Step 3 Click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
NOTE
The NE is now changed to a GNE and appears in the GNE tab.
----End
2.12 Checking GNE Switching Status

If the active GNE of an NE fails, and the NE has a standby GNE, the NE automatically communicates with the U2000 through the standby GNE. To detect the GNE communication failure in time, you need to check the GNE switching status to ensure that the NEs communicate correctly with the U2000 through the GNE.
Prerequisite
The active and standby GNEs must be created for an NE. You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. Step 2 Click the NE tab. Step 3 Click Refresh to query the GNE switching status. ----End
2.13 Testing the Communication Between the U2000 and the GNE
When the network communication fails, you can view the communication between the GNE and the U2000.
2 DCN Management
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. Click the GNE tab. Step 2 Right-click the GNE to be tested and choose Test GNE from the shortcut menu. Step 3 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
2.14 Checking the Network Communication Status

On some occasions, the U2000 cannot manage some NEs during the running of the network. By checking the communication status of the network, you can learn the communication status between the U2000 and NEs.
Prerequisite
Context
l When an NE uses IP over DCC, to check the NE communication status by using the ping function, you can right-click the NE on the Main Topology and choose Ping from the shortcut menu. You can use the ping function after installing the OSI software on the NE that uses OSI over DCC and the computer where the U2000 resides.
Procedure
l Check the communication status between the U2000 and a non-gateway NE. 1. 2. 3. 4. l Choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. Click the NE tab. Click Refresh to view the communication status of all NEs. Select an NE. Right-click in the Communication Status column and choose Test NE from the shortcut menu. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating the test result of the nongateway NE. Choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. Click the GNE tab. Click Refresh to view the communication status of the GNE. Right-click an NE and choose Test GNE from the shortcut menu. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating the test result of the GNE.
Check the communication status between the U2000 and the GNE. 1. 2. 3. 4.
----End 2.14.1 Overview of the Inband DCN

2 DCN Management
Inband DCN refers to the networking mode that uses service paths provided by the managed equipment to realize the management of network equipment. In this mode, the network management information is transmitted over service paths of the equipment. 2.14.2 Basic Concepts The DCN contains two networking modes, which are inband networking and outband networking. 2.14.3 Application of the Inband DCN When no special DCN is available for transmitting network management information, you can perform the networking in the inband DCN mode. 2.14.4 Configuring an Inband DCN This section describes how to configure an inband DCN.
2.14.1 Overview of the Inband DCN

Inband DCN refers to the networking mode that uses service paths provided by the managed equipment to realize the management of network equipment. In this mode, the network management information is transmitted over service paths of the equipment.
Objectives and Benefits

A characteristic of the inband DCN mode is the convenient and flexible networking that does not require additional equipment. In this mode, you need not separately provide a network for the DCN and thus save the operation cost.
Realization Principle
As shown in Figure 2-16, in the inband DCN mode, the DCN information and service information share the same path for transmission. Figure 2-16 Inband DCN networking mode
NMS
Ethernet Link
Ethernet Link
Service DCN information
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2-41
2 DCN Management
2.14.2 Basic Concepts

The DCN contains two networking modes, which are inband networking and outband networking.
Inband DCN Scheme

The inband DCN networking involves using the service channels provided by the managed devices to manage the devices in the network. In this mode, the network management information is transmitted through the service channels of the devices. The inband DCN networking is flexible and does not require additional devices. Figure 2-17 shows the networking diagram. Figure 2-17 Inband networking scheme
Managed network Firewall
NOTE
l The devices managed by the U2000 are connected to the IP core network. The NMS center only needs to be connected to the nearby IP devices in the IP core network. You can manage all the devices in the network by configuring the route. l The mode of connection between the NMS center and the IP core network is based on the location of the IP devices near the NMS center. If the U2000 and the nearby IP device are in the same equipment room, you can adopt the LAN networking mode. In the case of the long distance transmission, the networking is realized through private line services.
Outband Networking Scheme

The outband networking scheme involves using other channels except service channels to transmit the network management information and thus realizing the network management. Compared with the inband networking, the outband working scheme provides more reliable management channels. When faults occur on the service channels, you can obtain the network management information in time and perform the real-time monitoring. In the outband mode, you need provide a dedicated communication channel as the maintenance channel that is unrelated to the service channel. In the outband networking scheme, the NMS center can set up the DCN network with the equipment managed in various ways, such as the E1 private line or Ethernet. The U2000 manages the equipment within the management range through the DCN network. Figure 2-18 shows the networking diagram.
2 DCN Management
Figure 2-18 Outband networking scheme
DCN Firewall
Managed network
NOTE
The U2000 uses the dedicated communication channels to transmit the management information to the managed networks.
2.14.3 Application of the Inband DCN

When no special DCN is available for transmitting network management information, you can perform the networking in the inband DCN mode. When network management information is transmitted through Ethernet ports, the NE distinguishes between network management information and service information by special VLAN ID. When network management information is transmitted through E1 ports, the NE distinguishes between network management information and service information by special MPLS tag.
2.14.4 Configuring an Inband DCN

This section describes how to configure an inband DCN.
Context
The configuration of an inband DCN includes the following contents: 2.14.4.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters When configuring the IP Over DCC communication, you need to set the parameters including IP, Subnet Mask, Gateway IP, Extended ID, and Connection Mode for the NE. 2.14.4.2 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN
2 DCN Management
The RTN equipment communicates with the U2000 in inband DCN mode. The network management information is transmitted with the service information, and the equipment marks the management information with a default VLAN ID. You can adjust the bandwidth of an inband DCN. 2.14.4.3 Setting the U2000 Access Parameters In the case of the traditional DCN network, the equipment accesses to the U2000 through the SCC board. The RTN equipment can also access to the U2000 through the network interface of the Ethernet board. When the RTN equipment accesses to the U2000 by using the network interface of the Ethernet board, set the access parameters of the Ethernet board for the equipment to communicate with the U2000. 2.14.4.4 Enabling the Port DCN The NM information can be transported in the inband DCN only when the DCN access function is enabled for the ports at two ends of the link. 2.14.4.5 Enabling the Tunnel DCN The NM information can be transported in the IP/GRE Tunnel only when the DCN access function is enabled for the IP/GRE tunnel.
2.14.4.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters

When configuring the IP Over DCC communication, you need to set the parameters including IP, Subnet Mask, Gateway IP, Extended ID, and Connection Mode for the NE.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. The IP GNE must be created.
Context
CAUTION
The operation of modifying the NE communication parameters interrupts the communication and affects the services.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the NE communication parameters, including IP, Subnet Mask, Gateway IP, Extended ID, NSAP Address. Step 3 Click Apply and then click OK in the Warning dialog box that appears twice. in the Warning dialog box that appears twice. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
2-44
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2 DCN Management
2.14.4.2 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN

The RTN equipment communicates with the U2000 in inband DCN mode. The network management information is transmitted with the service information, and the equipment marks the management information with a default VLAN ID. You can adjust the bandwidth of an inband DCN.
Prerequisite
Context
l If the default VLAN ID of the DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID used by the service, manually modify the VLAN ID of the DCN to ensure that the networkwide DCN uses the same VLAN ID. If the DCN packets do not use all the available bandwidth, the idle bandwidth can be shared with the service packets. It is recommended to perform the modification on non-gateway NEs and then the gateway NE, to prevent the non-gateway NEs from being unreachable to the U2000.
l l
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Bandwidth Management tab, and enter parameters.
NOTE
When setting the parameters, note the following points: l Click Default to adopt the default value. l Generally, use the default VLAN ID. When the VLAN ID used by a service conflicts with that used by a DCN channel, you can define another VLAN ID. Make sure that the networkwide VLAN ID is consistent.
Step 3 Click Apply. ----End
2.14.4.3 Setting the U2000 Access Parameters

In the case of the traditional DCN network, the equipment accesses to the U2000 through the SCC board. The RTN equipment can also access to the U2000 through the network interface of the Ethernet board. When the RTN equipment accesses to the U2000 by using the network interface of the Ethernet board, set the access parameters of the Ethernet board for the equipment to communicate with the U2000.
Prerequisite
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2-45
2 DCN Management
Context
NOTE
l You need to set the parameters only when the U2000 accesses the equipment by using an Ethernet service board. l By default, the Enabled Status is Disabled.
CAUTION
In the case of the OptiX RTN equipment, when the DCN port is interconnected to the U2000, the IP address of the U2000 and the IP address of the NNI should not be set to the same subnet. This operation may affect the communication between the U2000 and NEs.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Access Control tab, and enter parameters. Step 3 Click Apply. ----End
2.14.4.4 Enabling the Port DCN

The NM information can be transported in the inband DCN only when the DCN access function is enabled for the ports at two ends of the link.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Port Settings tab. Step 3 Select different interface types, and set the corresponding attributes.
NOTE
Take the following precautions when enabling the DCN: l When you configure an Ethernet service that exclusively uses a port, disable the DCN function of the port. l When an E1 port accesses the CES and IMA services, disable the DCN function of the port. l After you enable DCN for an port, the VLAN IDs of other services configured for the port cannot be the same as the VLAN IDs of DCN packets.

2 DCN Management
2.14.4.5 Enabling the Tunnel DCN

The NM information can be transported in the IP/GRE Tunnel only when the DCN access function is enabled for the IP/GRE tunnel.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Tunnel Settings tab. Step 3 Select different tunnel types, and set the corresponding attributes. Step 4 Click Apply. ----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2-47
3 Configuring Clocks
3
About This Chapter
Configuring Clocks
A clock is the basis for the normal running of NEs. You must configure clocks for all NEs prior to configuring services. In addition, you need to configure clock protection for complex networks. 3.1 Clock Configuration Process This section describes the process of clock configuration based on a flow chart. 3.2 Clock Synchronization Scheme This section describes the clock synchronization schemes. You need choose the clock synchronization scheme according to the actual networking architecture. 3.3 Basic Concepts Before clock configuration, you need to master the basic concepts. 3.4 Viewing Clock Synchronization Status If the clocks between NEs in the network are not synchronous, the pointer justification, bit error, even service interruption may occur on NE. Using the U2000, you can learn and monitor the synchronization status of the NE clocks. 3.5 Viewing the Clock Tracing Status Correct clock tracing relationships are critical to ensure the clock synchronization within the entire network. Using the U2000, you can monitor the clock trace status of each NE. 3.6 Configuring the Clock Sources This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned the clock synchronization scheme, thus ensuring that all the NEs in a network trace the same clock. 3.7 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources This section describes how to configure protection for clock sources. In the case of simple networks such as chain networks, you need not configure protection for the clock sources. The clock sources are protected according to the clock source priority table. In the case of complex clock networks such as ring networks or tangent rings and intersecting rings deriving from ring networks, protection for the clock sources need to be implemented through the standard SSM protocol or extended SSM protocol. 3.8 Configuring Switching Conditions for Clock Sources
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3-1
If the traceable clock source of an NE is line clock, you can customize switching conditions for the clock source, so that the NE switches to other clocks when the clock source fails. In this manner, services are less affected. 3.9 Configuring the Clock Source Reversion When there are multiple clock sources for an NE, set the clock sources to automatic reversion mode, so that the deteriorated clock source automatically becomes the traceable timing reference after it recovers. 3.10 Modifying the Parameters of the External Clock Output The NE outputs the 2 Mbit/s external clock regardless of the clock quality. 3.11 Setting the Clock Source Quality In a complex clock network, there may be some unknown clock sources. You can uniformly define these clock sources as unavailable clocks so that NEs do not trace wrong clock sources. The NE obtains their quality information automatically for clock sources that are allocated to an NE. You should define the quality level of clock sources only during test and maintenance. 3.12 Configuring the SSM Output If the standard SSM or extended SSM protocol is enabled, the clock signals carry SSM messages automatically. You can prevent clock sources from sending SSM messages to other clock subnets. This helps you to ensure that the equipment of different clock subnets do not affect each other at the edge of clock networks. 3.13 Configuring the Ethernet Clock Source Configure the Ethernet clock source of the IDU 605 1F/2F according to the planned clock synchronization strategy to ensure that all the NEs in the network trace the same clock. 3.5 Viewing the Clock Tracing Status Correct clock tracing relationships are critical to ensure the clock synchronization within the entire network. Using the U2000, you can monitor the clock trace status of each NE. 3.15 Checking the Clock Switching Status Clock failure may interrupt services. To detect failure of the clock source in time, you need to check the clock switching status. 3.16 Switching a Clock Source When the traceable clock source in a network deteriorates, NEs may not be able to execute a switch on the clock source. You need to manually switch the clock source to prevent clock deterioration from affecting the normal running of NEs.
3-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3.1 Clock Configuration Process

This section describes the process of clock configuration based on a flow chart. The details of the clock configuration flow varies with the situation. See Figure 3-1, Figure 3-2, and Figure 3-3. Figure 3-1 Configuration flow when SSM protocol is disabled
Required Optional Set switching conditions for clock sources
Set the clock source priority
Set the clock source reversion
View the clock synchronization status
Switch a clock source
Figure 3-2 Configuration flow when standard SSM protocol is enabled

Required Optional
Set the clock source protection
Set switching conditions for clock sources
Set the clock source quality
Set the phase-locked source for external clock output
Enable the standard SSM protocol
Set the affiliated clock subnet for the NE
Figure 3-3 Configuration flow when extended SSM protocol is enabled

Required Optional
Set the clock source protection
Set switching conditions for clock sources
Set the clock source quality
Set the phase-locked source for external clock output
Enable the extended SSM protocol Set the affiliated clock subnet for the NE
Set the ID for clock
NOTE
l The horizontal direction of the figure shows the three stages when you use the U2000 to configure clocks. l The vertical direction of the figure shows the relations between operation tasks at each stage.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3-3
3.2 Clock Synchronization Scheme

This section describes the clock synchronization schemes. You need choose the clock synchronization scheme according to the actual networking architecture.
Clock Synchronization Scheme for a Chain/Tree Network

The clock synchronization schemes for chain/tree networks are as follows: l l l If the main (first) node accesses a clock source (external clock or line clock), configure this clock source for this node. Configure the clock source of the higher-level radio link for other nodes. When the higher-level radio link adopts 1+1 protection, configure two clock sources for the corresponding node. Note that the clock source priority of the main radio link should be higher than the clock source priority of the standby radio link. When multiple higher-level radio links exist, (for example, when the radio link is configured with XPIC or N+1 protection), the node configures a microwave clock source for each radio link and allocates different clock priority levels based on the situation of each radio link. Do not configure the synchronization status message (SSM) or extended SSM protection.
Figure 3-4 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a chain network. l The PXC board in slot 1 on the main node NE1 accesses the external clock source. Hence, the clock source priority levels are external clock source 1 and internal clock source in the descending order. The IF1A boards in slots 5 and 7 on NE2 form an IF 1+1 protection group (the board in slot 5 is the main board) and provide the radio link from NE1 to NE2. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1, 7-IF1A-1, and internal clock source in the descending order. The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2 provides the radio link from NE3 to NE2. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending order. The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE4 provides the radio link from NE4 to NE3. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending order. Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection.
Figure 3-4 Clock synchronization scheme for a chain network

NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4
External 1/ Internal Master clock
5-IF1A-1/ 7-IF1A-1/ Internal
5-IF1A-1/ Internal
5-IF1A-1/ Internal
3-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 3-5 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a tree network. l l The SL1 board in slot 4 on NE1 accesses the line clock source. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 4-SL1-1 and internal clock source in the descending order. The IFX boards in slots 5 and 7 on NE2 form an XPIC workgroup (the IFX board in slot 5 works on polarization V and the IFX board in slot 7 is works on polarization H) and provide the radio link from NE1 to NE2. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1, 7-IF1A-1, and internal clock source in the descending order. The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE3 provides the radio link from NE3 to NE2. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending order. The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE4 provides the radio link from NE4 to NE3. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending order. Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection.
Figure 3-5 Clock synchronization scheme for a tree network

NE3
NE1
NE2 5-IF1A-1/ Internal
NE4 4-SL1-1/ Internal 5-IFX-1/ 7-IFX-1/ Internal
Master clock
5-IF1A-1/ Internal
Clock Synchronization Scheme for a Ring Network

The clock synchronization schemes for a ring network formed by the OptiX RTN equipment only or formed by the OptiX RTN equipment and other OptiX equipment are as follows: l When the entire ring network line is an SDH line, set the SSM or extended SSM according to the clock synchronization schemes of an optical transmission network.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3-5
When a PDH section exists on the line of the ring network, divide the ring network into two chains and set the synchronization according to the clock synchronization schemes of a chain network.
Figure 3-6 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a ring network of which the entire ring network line is an SDH line. l l The SSM or extended SSM protection is enabled on all the nodes in the ring network. The PXC board in slot 1 on the main node NE1 accesses the external clock source. Hence, the clock source priority levels are external clock source 1 and internal clock source in the descending order. The clock source priority levels of other nodes are the west clock source, east clock source, and internal clock source in the descending order.
Figure 3-6 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (the entire ring network line is an SDH line)
NE2 NE1 West/ East/ Internal West/ East/ Internal NE6
External 1/ Internal
West/ East/ Internal NE3 Master clock NE4 West/ East/ Internal NE5
West/ East/ Internal
Figure 3-7 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a ring network of which not the entire ring network line is an SDH line. l l l l l This ring network is formed by PDH microwave. Hence, divide the ring network at the main node NE1 into two chains: from NE1 to NE2 and from NE3 to NE4. The SL1 board in slot 4 on NE1 accesses the line clock source. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 4-SL1-1 and internal clock source in the descending order. NE2 traces the clock of the main node. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are the west clock source and internal clock source in the descending order. NE4 traces the clock of the main node. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are the east clock source and internal clock source in the descending order. NE3 traces the clock of NE4. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are the east clock source and internal clock source in the descending order.
3-6
Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection.
Figure 3-7 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (not the entire ring network line is an SDH line)
NE1
NE2 4-SL1-1/ Internal
NE4
West/ Internal
NE3
East/ Internal
Master clock
East/ Internal
Clock Synchronization Scheme for Networking with Convergence at Tributary Ports

Networking with convergence at tributary ports indicates that several OptiX RTN 600 NEs are converged to the higher-level OptiX RTN NE through the E1/E3 cable. The clock synchronization schemes for networking with convergence at tributary ports are as follows: l l l The higher-level NE accesses the clock source (external clock source or line clock source). The lower-level NEs trace the tributary clock sources (port 1 and port 5 of the PO1/PH1/ PD1 board can be used as the tributary clock sources). When a lower-level NE is connected to multiple hops of radio links, abnormal pointer adjustments may occur if the lower-level NE traces the tributary clock. Therefore, the lower-level NEs should trace the external clock output by the higher-level NE. Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection.
Figure 3-8shows the clock synchronization scheme for networking with convergence at tributary ports. l The PXC board in slot 1 on the main node NE1 accesses the external clock source. Hence, the clock source priority levels are external clock source 1 and internal clock source in the descending order. The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2 provides the radio link from NE3 to NE2. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending order.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3-7
NE3 converges services TO NE2 through ports 1-4 of the PO1 board in slot 4. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 4-PO1-1 and internal clock source in the descending order. Multiple microwave hops exist in the downstream of NE4. In this case, the downstream nodes will report point adjustments if NE4 adopts the tributary clock source. Hence, NE4 adopts the external clock output from NE2 as the external clock input to the PXC board in slot 1. Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection.
Figure 3-8 Clock synchronization scheme for networking with convergence at tributary ports
NE3
NE1
NE2
4-PO1-1/ Internal NE4
External 1/ Internal
5-IF1A-1/ Internal
External/ Internal Master clock E1 External clock
Precautions for Making the Clock Synchronization Scheme

The precautions for making the clock synchronization scheme are as follows: l The number of the NEs on the long clock chain must not exceed 20. It is recommended that the long clock chain contains less than 10 NEs. If the long clock chain contains too many NEs, new clock sources need be added to the chain for use compensation. Use SDH interface boards to converge services at the convergence node. Thus, the clock signals can be passed over SDH signals not over PDH signals, which ensures the high quality of the clock.
3.3 Basic Concepts

Before clock configuration, you need to master the basic concepts. 3.3.1 Clock Synchronization
By keeping the clock synchronization of each NE in the network, you can avoid pointer justification events, jitters, and bit errors thus caused when the clocks are not synchronous. All NEs trace the same PRC through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the networkwide synchronization. 3.3.2 SSM Protocol and Clock ID The synchronization status message (SSM) protocol and clock ID are used for clock protection. 3.3.3 Clock Subnet The nodes that have clock tracing relations between each other comprise a clock subnet. 3.3.4 Clock Protection Clock protection ensures that each node traces the correct clock source even when a fault occurs in a network.
3.3.1 Clock Synchronization

By keeping the clock synchronization of each NE in the network, you can avoid pointer justification events, jitters, and bit errors thus caused when the clocks are not synchronous. All NEs trace the same PRC through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the networkwide synchronization.
Working Modes and Timing Methods of the Clock

Currently, the communication network adopts the master-slave synchronization mode. That is, the master clock that is with high precision and stability transfers clock signals to slave clocks of each level through the clock network. Each slave clock is synchronous with the clock signal that is from the upper level. Thus, the networkwide synchronization is realized. In this mode, the slave clock usually has the following three working modes: l l Tracing mode: It is the normal working mode. In this mode, the local clock is synchronized with the input reference clock signals. Holdover mode: When all timing reference signals are lost, the slave clock enters into the holdover mode. In this mode, the slave clock takes timing reference from the last frequency information saved before the loss of timing reference signals. This mode can be used to cope with an interruption of external timing signals lasting many days. Free-run mode: When all timing reference signals are lost and the slave clock losses the saved configuration data about the timing reference or the slave clock fails to enter the holdover mode, the internal oscillator of the slave clock enters the free-run mode from the holdover mode.
The clock source has the following four timing methods: l l l l External clock source: 2M timing signals from the external clock interface of an NE Line clock source: timing signals extracted from optical signals that the line board receives Tributary clock source: timing signals extracted from optical signals that the tributary board receives Internal clock source: The internal timing source is available for each NE. When the external source is lost, the NE can use the internal timing source.
Clock Synchronization
Generally, an NE can obtain the PRC through several paths. In Figure 3-9, NE4 can trace the clock from NE3 and the clock from NE5. These two clock sources are from the same PRC.
Figure 3-9 Clock synchronization

BITS
NE1
NE2
NE6
NE3
NE5
NE4 Clock Signal Flow
3.3.2 SSM Protocol and Clock ID

The synchronization status message (SSM) protocol and clock ID are used for clock protection.
S1 Byte
The S1 byte is located in row 9 and column 1 in the multiplex section overhead in an SDH frame structure. The lower four bits (bit 5-bit 8) of the S1 byte are allocated to transport a synchronization status of an NE, which is referred to as the synchronization status message byte (SSMB). Table 3-1 shows the meaning of clock quality that the SSMB stands for. The smaller the SSMB value, the higher the quality of the clock source that the SSMB represents. In a clock network, the node that is connected to an external clock extracts a reference timing source from the BITS equipment, writes an SSMB to bit 5-bit 8 of S1 byte, and transports the SSMB to downstream nodes. In this way, the SSMB is output. A downstream node extracts the timing source from a line signal, and obtains the clock quality level from bit 5-bit 8 of S1 byte. In this way, the downstream node often determines whether the current clock source is effective and transmits back 0xf to the upstream node through bit 5-bit 8 of S1 byte. 0xf means the returned
clock source is unavailable. This prevents two nodes from tracing the timing source mutually. Each node obtains the quality of all clock sources from the S1 byte, and choose to trace a clock source according to the preset priority level. Table 3-1 SSM allocation Bit 5-bit 8 of S1 byte 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 SDH Synchronization Quality Level The synchronization quality is unknown (the existing synchronous network). Retained G.811 clock signal Retained SSU-ANote 1 Retained Retained Retained SSU-BNote 1 Retained Retained Synchronous equipment timing source (SETS) signal Retained Retained Retained Not used for synchronization
Note 1: The "G.812 Transit Exchange" and "G.812 Local Clock" terms are used in the previous version of ITU-T Recommendations. In the new version of ITU-T G.812, the clock definition is changed to synchronization supply unit (SSU). The SSU has A and B types. The SSU-A corresponds to the "G.812 Transit Exchange" and the SSU-B corresponds to the "G.812 Local Clock" that are previously used.
SSM Protocol
The standard SSM protocol is mechanism of network synchronization management. It uses bit 5-bit 8 of S1 byte to exchange the quality information of clock sources between nodes. This ensures that the equipment automatically selects the clock source of the highest quality and priority levels, to prevent an interlock of clocks. The standard SSM protocol improves the performance of a synchronous network, and realizes synchronization of different network
structures in an easy manner. The standard SSM protocol applies to the interconnection of equipment from different vendors. In the case that the S1 byte is enabled for clock protection, the concept of clock ID is introduced. That is, clock protection is extended based on the original SSM protocol. In this manner, the extended SSM protocol is developed. In the case of the extended SSM protocol, Huawei introduces the concept of clock ID based on the standard SSM protocol. The extended SSM protocol uses b1 through b4 of S1 byte as the unique ID of a clock source and transports the clock ID with an SSM. After a node receives the S1 byte, the node verifies the clock ID (bit 1-bit 4) to determine whether the clock is locally output. If the clock is locally output, the node regards the clock as unavailable. This prevents a timing loop. The extended SSM protocol is mainly used to realize the interconnection of transmission equipment from Huawei. When an NE works in different clock protection modes, the method of selecting a clock source during automatic clock switching is changed accordingly, as shown in Table 3-2. Table 3-2 Methods of selecting clock sources in different modes Working Mode Non-SSM protocol mode Clock Source Selection The NE selects a clock source with the highest priority according to the clock source priority list. If the clock source with the highest priority is lost, the NE selects and trace the clock source with the second highest priority. The NE selects a clock source according to the priority and quality of the clock source. The clock source with highest quality is preferred. If the clock sources are of the same quality, the NE selects the clock with the highest priority. The NE selects a clock source according to the priority, quality, and clock source ID. Specifically, the NE selects and traces the clock source that is with the highest quality and priority but not transmitted from the NE itself.
Standard SSM protocol mode
Extended SSM protocol mode
Clock ID
A clock ID use bit 1-bit 4 of S1 byte, and the value range is 0x0 to 0xf. Basically, a clock ID is used to distinguish the clock information between local and other nodes, to prevent a node from tracing the clock signal that is locally transmitted and comes from the negative direction. Hence, a timing loop is prevented. A value of 0 indicates that a clock ID is invalid. Hence, the default value of a clock ID is 0 when an ID is not set for a clock source. When enabling the extended SSM protocol, an NE does not select the clock source whose ID is 0 as the current clock source.
A clock ID is a tag set for a reference timing source. The clock sources at the same quality level that carry different IDs mean different timing signals and are not different in priority levels and other aspects. Set the clock ID according to the following principles: l l l l Allocate a clock ID to each external BITS. Allocate a clock ID to the internal clock source of each node that has an external BITS. Allocate a clock ID to the internal clock source of each node that enters into another ring network from one chain or ring network. Allocate a clock ID to the line clock source of the node that enters into another ring network from one chain or ring network, when the line clock source exists.
3.3.3 Clock Subnet

The nodes that have clock tracing relations between each other comprise a clock subnet. During the configuration of a clock subnet, pay attention to the following points: l l l All the NEs that trace the same clock source should be divided to the same clock subnet. To make sure that the clock tracing chain is not too long, configure at most 20 NEs to prevent the clock precision from being degraded. You must divide the NEs that have the SSM clock protection to clock subnets. Otherwise, SSM is not enabled for the NEs that are not divided to the clock subnets. This results in incorrect traced clock switching.
3.3.4 Clock Protection

Clock protection ensures that each node traces the correct clock source even when a fault occurs in a network. Clock protection refers to the process during which a timing source selects a new route so that the entire network continues to trace the PRC, when services are switched and select a standby route to realize protection because an optical path is interrupted or a node fails. In other words, clock protection is a process during which, when one PRC fails in the network, a new route is selected to trace another PRC networkwide. In Figure 3-9, NE4 traces the clock that is from NE3. If this clock is lost, NE4 can automatically switches to trace the clock that is from NE5. When automatic protection switching occurs in a clock, the new clock source may trace the same PRC as the original clock source or another PRC with worse quality, such as another standby BITS. The clock protection switching is performed based on the following principles: l If the clock source priority is set, the NE selects the clock source of the highest quality level as the synchronization source and sends the synchronization status message bit (SSMB) to downstream NEs. If multiple clock sources of the same quality level exist, the NE selects the clock source of the highest priority level as the synchronization source and sends the SSMB to downstream NEs. If NE B traces the clock source that is output from NE A, the clock of NE B is an unavailable source for NE A. If the extended SSM protocol is enabled, the NE does not select the clock that has the same ID as the local clock, or the clock whose ID is 0, as the clock source.
l l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3.4 Viewing Clock Synchronization Status

If the clocks between NEs in the network are not synchronous, the pointer justification, bit error, even service interruption may occur on NE. Using the U2000, you can learn and monitor the synchronization status of the NE clocks.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Synchronization Status from the Function Tree.
NOTE
To view the clock synchronization status of NEs in batches, Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Batch Clock Operation from the main menu. Then, click the Clock Synchronization Status tab. In the Object Tree, select the desired NEs and click .
Step 2 Click Query. You can view the information about the clock synchronization status queried from the NE side.
----End
3.5 Viewing the Clock Tracing Status

Correct clock tracing relationships are critical to ensure the clock synchronization within the entire network. Using the U2000, you can monitor the clock trace status of each NE.
Prerequisite
Context
When the clock tracing relationships are changed, the U2000 refreshes the tracing status in the Clock View automatically.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology window, selectClock View from the Current View drop-down list. Step 2 Select the NE to be queried or configured from the object tree. In the Clock View, right-click and choose Search Clock Link from the shortcut menu. Step 3 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. ----End
3.6 Configuring the Clock Sources

This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned the clock synchronization scheme, thus ensuring that all the NEs in a network trace the same clock.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The PXC boards and input/output clock source boards must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Select the clock sources.
TIP
By pressing the Ctrl key, you can select multiple clock sources at one time.
Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 Optional: Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to add other clock sources. Step 6 Optional: Select a clock source and click this clock source. or to adjust the priority level of
The clock priority levels are arranged in the descending order from the first row to the last row. The internal clock source is fixed with the lowest priority. Step 7 Optional: Set External Clock Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte for the external clock sources.
Parameters
Parameter Clock Source Value Range Default Value Description l External clock source 1 indicates the external clock source at the port of the PXC board in slot 1. External clock source 2 indicates the external clock source at the port of the PXC board in slot 3. l IFH2-1(SDH) indicates the microwave clock source. l IFH2-2(ETH) indicates the clock source of the synchronous Ethernet. l The internal clock source is fixed with the lowest priority and indicates that the NE works in the free-run mode. l Determine the clock sources and the corresponding clock source priority levels according to the clock synchronization schemes. External Clock Source Mode 2 Mbit/s, 2 MHz 2 Mbit/s l This parameter indicates the type of the external clock source signal. l Set this parameter depending on the external clock signal. Generally, the external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal. Synchronization Status Byte SA4-SA8 SA4 l This parameter is valid only when External Clock Source Mode is set to 2 Mbit/s. l This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the external clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. l This parameter need to be set only when the SSM or extended SSM is enabled. Generally, the external clock sources use the SA4 to pass the SSM.
3-16
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3.7 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources

This section describes how to configure protection for clock sources. In the case of simple networks such as chain networks, you need not configure protection for the clock sources. The clock sources are protected according to the clock source priority table. In the case of complex clock networks such as ring networks or tangent rings and intersecting rings deriving from ring networks, protection for the clock sources need to be implemented through the standard SSM protocol or extended SSM protocol.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The clock source priority table must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Enable the clock protection protocol. 1. 2. Click the Clock Subnet tab. Enable the clock protection protocol and set the protocol parameters.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 3 Set the SSM output port. 1. 2. Click the SSM Output Control tab. Set the SSM output port.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3-17
3. 1. 2.
Click Apply. Click the Clock ID Status tab. Set the clock ID output port.
Step 4 Optional: Set the clock ID output port.
3.
Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Parameter Protection Status Value Range Start Extended SSM Protocol, Start Standard SSM Protocol, Stop SSM Protocol Default Value Stop SSM Protocol Description l The SSM protocol is a scheme used for synchronous management in an SDH network and indicates that the SSM is passed by the lower four bits of the S1 byte and can be exchanged between the nodes. The SSM protocol ensures that the equipment automatically select the clock source with the highest quality and highest priority, thus preventing clock mutual tracing. l The extended SSM protocol is the extension of the standard SSM protocol. It defines the unique ID for each clock source and uses the higher four bits of the S1 byte to pass the ID. The extended SSM protocol can be used to prevent the NEs from tracing their own clocks. l If third-party equipment exists in the ring network, enable the SSM protocol. If only OptiX equipment exists in the ring network and clock mutual tracing can be prevented through certain configurations of the clock sources, the SSM protocol can also be enabled. l If only OptiX equipment exists in the ring network, it is recommended that the extended SSM protocol is used.
3-18
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Affiliated Subnet
Value Range 0-255
Default Value 0
Description l This parameter is used when the clock subnet need to be created on the NMS. l The NEs that trace the same clock source should be allocated with the same clock subnet ID.
Clock Source ID
(None), 0-15
(None)
l This parameter is valid only when the SSM protocol is enabled. l Allocate the clock source ID for the following clock sources only: External clock sources Internal clock source of the node that accesses the external clock sources Internal clock source of the joint node of a ring and a chain or the joint node of two rings Line clock source that enters the ring when the intra-ring line clock source is configured at the joint node of a ring and a chain or the joint node of two rings
Control Status
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter is valid only when the SSM protocol or the extended SSM protocol is enabled. l This parameter indicates whether the SSM is output at the line port. l When the line port is connected to an NE in the same clock subnet, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled.
Enable Status
Enabled, Disabled.
Enabled
l This parameter is valid only when the SSM protocol is enabled. l This parameter indicates whether the clock source ID is output at the line port. l When the line port is connected to an NE in the same clock subnet and the extended SSM protocol is enabled at the remote NE, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3-19
3.8 Configuring Switching Conditions for Clock Sources

If the traceable clock source of an NE is line clock, you can customize switching conditions for the clock source, so that the NE switches to other clocks when the clock source fails. In this manner, services are less affected.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree. Click the Clock Source Switching Condition tab. Step 2 Click Query to query the existing parameter settings. Step 3 Double-click the parameter column and set the alarms and performance events that are to be used as the clock source switching conditions to Yes.
Step 4 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. ----End
3.9 Configuring the Clock Source Reversion

When there are multiple clock sources for an NE, set the clock sources to automatic reversion mode, so that the deteriorated clock source automatically becomes the traceable timing reference after it recovers.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree. Click the Clock Source Reversion Parameter tab.
NOTE
To set the clock source reversion for multiple NEs in batches, Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Batch Clock Operation from the main menu. . Click the Clock Source Reversion Parameter tab. In the Object Tree, select the desired NEs and click .
Step 2 Double-click and set the reversion mode and the WTR time.
3-20
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
Do not set Clock Source WTR Time(min) to 0 to avoid repeated switching when the clock is unstable.
3.10 Modifying the Parameters of the External Clock Output

The NE outputs the 2 Mbit/s external clock regardless of the clock quality.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The PXC board must be configured.
Precautions
In the OptiX RTN 600, external clock source 1 indicates the external clock on the PXC board in slot 1 and external clock source 2 indicates the external clock on the PXC board in slot 3.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock from the Function Tree. Step 2 Modify the clock output parameters.
Parameters
Parameter External Clock Output Mode Value Range 2 Mbit/s, 2 MHz Default Value 2 Mbit/s Description l This parameter indicates the mode of the output clock. l Set this parameter according to the requirements of the interconnected equipment. Generally, the output clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3-21
Parameter External Clock Output Timeslot
Value Range SA4-SA8, ALL
Default Value ALL
Description l This parameter is valid only when External Clock Output Mode is set to 2 Mbit/s. l This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the external clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. l When this parameter is set to ALL, it indicates that each bit can transmit the SSM. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
External Clock Output Threshold
Threshold Disabled, Not Inferior to G. 813 SETS Signal, Not Inferior to G. 812 Local Clock Signal, Not Inferior to G.812 Transit Clock Signal, Not Inferior to G.811 Clock Signal No Failure Condition, AIS, LOF, AIS OR LOF
Threshold Disabled
l This parameter indicates the lowest clock quality of the output clock. When the clock quality is lower than the parameter value, the signal is not output. l When this parameter is set to Threshold Disabled, it indicates that the clock signal is continuously output. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Condition
No Failure Condition
l This parameter indicates the conditions when the 2M phase-locked clock source fails. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Action
Shut Down Output, 2M Output S1 Byte Unavailable, Send AIS
Shut Down Output
l This parameter is valid only when 2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Condition is No Failure Condition. l This parameter indicates the action of the 2M phase-locked loop when 2M PhaseLocked Source Fail Condition is met. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
3.11 Setting the Clock Source Quality

In a complex clock network, there may be some unknown clock sources. You can uniformly define these clock sources as unavailable clocks so that NEs do not trace wrong clock sources. The NE obtains their quality information automatically for clock sources that are allocated to an NE. You should define the quality level of clock sources only during test and maintenance.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Clock Quality tab. Step 2 Click Query to query the existing parameter settings. Step 3 Click the Clock Source Quality tab and set Configuration Quality to a desired level.
NOTE
Generally, use the default Automatic Extraction.
Step 4 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. Step 5 If the quality level of a clock source is zero, you can specify the level manually. Click the Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level tab and set Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level to a desired level.
NOTE
To set the clock source quality for multiple NEs in batches, Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Batch Clock Operation from the main menu. Click the Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level tab. In the Object Tree, select the desired NEs and click .
3.12 Configuring the SSM Output

If the standard SSM or extended SSM protocol is enabled, the clock signals carry SSM messages automatically. You can prevent clock sources from sending SSM messages to other clock subnets. This helps you to ensure that the equipment of different clock subnets do not affect each other at the edge of clock networks.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the SSM Output Control tab. Step 2 Set the Control Status of the clock source.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3-23
3.13 Configuring the Ethernet Clock Source

Configure the Ethernet clock source of the IDU 605 1F/2F according to the planned clock synchronization strategy to ensure that all the NEs in the network trace the same clock.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set Use the clock source of the data port. Step 3 Click Apply. ----End
Parameters
Parameter Use the clock source of the data port Value Range Yes, No Default Value No Description When this parameter is set to Yes, the IDU 605 1F/2F traces the clock source that is recovered from the signal flow on the Ethernet PORT.
3.14 Viewing the Clock Tracing Status

Correct clock tracing relationships are critical to ensure the clock synchronization within the entire network. Using the U2000, you can monitor the clock trace status of each NE.
Prerequisite
Context
When the clock tracing relationships are changed, the U2000 refreshes the tracing status in the Clock View automatically.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology window, selectClock View from the Current View drop-down list. Step 2 Select the NE to be queried or configured from the object tree. In the Clock View, right-click and choose Search Clock Link from the shortcut menu. Step 3 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. ----End
3.15 Checking the Clock Switching Status

Clock failure may interrupt services. To detect failure of the clock source in time, you need to check the clock switching status.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. The reference clock source must be set.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Clock Source Switching tab, and click Query to query the current switching status of the current clock source.
Step 3 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. ----End
3.16 Switching a Clock Source

When the traceable clock source in a network deteriorates, NEs may not be able to execute a switch on the clock source. You need to manually switch the clock source to prevent clock deterioration from affecting the normal running of NEs.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The clock source has been created.
Context
CAUTION
Performing clock source switching may cause signal jitter and bit errors.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree. Click the Clock Source Switching tab. Step 2 Click Query to query the current switching status of a clock source. Step 3 Optional: If the Lock Status is Lock, right-click and choose Release Lockout. Step 4 Right-click the clock source that you want to switch and choose a switching operation.
NOTE
Before switching the clock source, make sure that the new clock source that is not locked and that is of a good quality is created in the priority table.
Step 5 Optional: To restore the automatic clock source selection mode, right-click the switched clock source and choose Clear Switching. ----End
3-26
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
4 Configuring PTP Clock
4
About This Chapter
Configuring PTP Clock
The equipment complies with the IEEE 1588V2 protocol and can achieve frequency synchronization and time synchronization. 4.1 Introduction to the PTP Clock The precision time protocol (PTP) clock complies with the IEEE 1588V2 protocol and achieves nanosecond-level precision, which meets the requirements of 3G and Long Term Evolution (LTE). 4.2 Basic Information Before configuring the IEEE 1588V2 clock, you should be familiar with the BMC algorithm, clock architecture, master-slave synchronization, and IEEE 1588V2 protocol packets and their functions. 4.3 Application of the PTP Clock By using the IEEE 1588V2 protocol, the OptiX RTN equipment can transfer the precise time information to achieve clock synchronization and time synchronization for equipment in the network. This meets the requirement of the telecommunications network for precise time. The equipment with the PTP clock can achieve networkwide frequency synchronization and time synchronization in the packet switching network (PSN). The telecommunications network carry various services. Certain services require precise time synchronization, such as the network voting and charging services. In such a scenario, the IEEE 1588V2 clock is applicable and ensures precise time synchronization. 4.4 Configuration Flow for the PTP Clock This section describes the flow of configuring the PTP clock in different modes. 4.5 Configuring the PTP Clock To achieve time synchronization and clock synchronization between NEs, configure the PTP clock.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
4-1
4.1 Introduction to the PTP Clock

The precision time protocol (PTP) clock complies with the IEEE 1588V2 protocol and achieves nanosecond-level precision, which meets the requirements of 3G and Long Term Evolution (LTE).
Objective and Benefit

As the rate at which the Ethernet data is transmitted is increased to the gigabit-per-second level, the synchronization of the Ethernet fails to meet the requirements. To solve the synchronization problem, the network time protocol (NTP) is presented, which helps achieve the precision of clock synchronization at 200 us. The precision, however, fails to meet the precision requirements of the test instruments and industrial control. To improve the synchronization precision, in 2002, the IEEE committee presented the IEEE 1588 clock protocol. Then, the protocol evolved to the current IEEE 1588V2 protocol, which helps achieve nanosecond-level precision. There are two synchronization modes, that is, clock (frequency) synchronization and time (phase) synchronization. Time (phase) synchronization is applicable to the networks where the absolute networkwide time should be of certain precision, such as the power system network and 3G network. Though the GPS at every node can also solve the precision problem, the high cost limits the application scope of this solution. The traditional clock protocols can achieve only frequency synchronization. The IEEE 1588V2 protocol is the clock protocol that can achieve both frequency synchronization and phase synchronization. The IEEE 1588V2 protocol is applicable for time synchronization at every node in the distributed network that requires precise synchronization. The hardware and software synchronize the system clock of the network equipment (client) with the primary clock in the network at a nanosecond precision level. In the Ethernet where the IEEE 1588V2 protocol is not enabled, there is a 1000 us delay. In the Ethernet where the IEEE 1588V2 protocol is enabled, the timing synchronization is improved to a great extent. The approach of adopting the IEEE 1588V2 protocol to achieve clock synchronization and time synchronization marks a technical innovation for the transformation of the carrier-class IP network. The IEEE 1588V2 protocol helps achieve clock synchronization and time synchronization that meet the requirements of Node B and RNC in a 3G network.
NOTE
l Clock synchronization refers to frequency synchronization. l Time synchronization refers to phase synchronization, which requires that both the time and frequency should be synchronous.
Standards and Protocols Compliance

The IEEE 1588V2 clock complies with 1588 IEEE Standard for a Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked Measurement and Control Systems, IEEE, 2002.
4-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
4.2 Basic Information

Before configuring the IEEE 1588V2 clock, you should be familiar with the BMC algorithm, clock architecture, master-slave synchronization, and IEEE 1588V2 protocol packets and their functions.
BMC Algorithm
In a PTP clock network, the equipment computes the best clock source according to the BMC algorithm. The BMC algorithm compares the descriptive data of two clocks and detects the better one, which is selected as the clock source. The BMC algorithm includes the following algorithms: l Data set comparison algorithm: The NE selects the clock of better quality as the clock source. If an NE receives two or more channels of clock signals from the same grandmaster clock (GMC), the NE selects one channel of the clock signals that traverses the least nodes as the clock source. State decision algorithm: The result of data set comparison determines the next state of the port.
Clock Architecture
Figure 4-1 shows the architecture of the IEEE 1588V2 clock.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
4-3
Figure 4-1 Architecture of the IEEE 1588V2 clock
BITS
OC
GMC Master
TC
BC
Slave Master Master
BC Slave Master
TC+OC
OC
Slave
OC
Slave
NOTE
l Master: A master port provides a time source for the downstream equipment. l Slave: A slave port receives the clock signals from the upstream port.
The OptiX RTN equipment supports four architectures of the IEEE 1588V2 clock. l Ordinary clock (OC): The OC equipment provides only one port to extract the IEEE 1588 packets. The OC equipment can work as a slave clock equipment and maintains synchronization with the upstream clock. The equipment extracts the clock packets from the port that supports the IEEE 1588 packets and recovers the clock. The equipment can also work as a master clock equipment, which inputs the external time from the external time interface, and outputs the clock signals to the downstream through the port that supports the IEEE 1588 packets. Boundary clock (BC): When used as a BC, the equipment provides multiple ports to extract the IEEE 1588 packets. The BC can work as either master clock equipment or slave clock equipment. The BC equipment can distribute the clock packets to the downstream through multiple ports, but the OC equipment can distribute the clock packets to the downstream through only one port. Transparent clock (TC): The TC equipment transparently transmits the IEEE 1588 packets and records the period when the packets stay on the equipment. During the period, the TC
4-4
equipment transports the packets to the slave clock equipment for processing. The TC equipment only transparently transmits the clock, and does not recover the clock. End-to-end TC: The TC equipment adopts the end-to-end delay measurement mechanism between the master and slave clocks. Peer-to-peer TC: The TC adopts the point-to-point delay measurement mechanism. l TC+OC: The TC+OC equipment corrects and transparently transmits the time stamps for the IEEE 1588V2 packets, and achieves clock synchronization. By adopting the BMC algorithm, the TC+OC equipment selects the clock source, which is then sent to the system clock module. If necessary, the clock source can be used as the system clock of the equipment.
NOTE
The end-to-end TC and peer-to-peer TC adopt different mechanisms to realize delay transmission, and cannot operate in the same communication channel alternatively. That is, the adjacent TC equipment along one time channel adopts either the end-to-end TC or peer-to-peer TC, but not both at the same time.
Master-Slave Synchronization
In the case of master-slave synchronization, each slave clock maintains synchronization with the master clock by exchanging the synchronization packets with the master clock. Figure 4-2 shows the master-slave synchronization process of the equipment. Figure 4-2 Master-slave synchronization process
Master clock
Time stamp at slave clock Slave clock
t1
Sync packets t2 t1t2
Delay_Req packets t3 t4 t1t2t3
Delay_Resp packets
t1t2t3t4
l l l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
At time point t1, the master clock sends the Sync packets that contain time stamp t1 to the slave clock. At time point t2, the slave clock receives the Sync packets and obtains time stamp t1. At time point t3, the slave clock sends the Delay_Req packets to the master clock.
At time point t4, the master clock receives the Delay_Req packets. Then, the master clock sends the Delay_Resp packets that contain time stamp t4 to the slave clock.
NOTE
A time stamp (TS) is used to transmit the time information. The Sync packets, Delay_Req packets, and Delay_Resp packets are used to generate or communicate the time information. The OC equipment and BC equipment maintain synchronization by processing related time information.
The slave clock computes the delay and offset from the master clock according to time stamps t1, t2, t3, and t4. Then, the slave clock corrects the time according to the delay and offset. l l Delay = [(t4-t1)-(t3-t2)]/2 Offset = [(t2-t1)+(t3-t4)]/2
Protocol Packets and Their Functions

The IEEE 1588 protocol defines the Event messages and General messages. The Event messages are timing messages. To transmit and receive the Event messages, the equipment should generate the precise time stamp. To transmit and receive the General messages, the equipment does not need to generate the precise time stamp. The Event messages include the following packets: l l l l Sync Delay_Req Pdelay_Req Pdelay_Resp
The General messages include the following packets: l l l l Announce Delay_Resp Management Signaling
The Sync, Delay_Req, and Delay_Resp packets are used to generate or transport the timing information. The OC and BC maintains synchronization by using the timing information and adopting the delay request-response mechanism. The Pdelay_Req and Pdelay_Resp packets are used to measure the link delay between two clock ports that support the Pdelay mechanism. The link delay is used to correct the timing information contained in the Sync packets in the P2P TC system. The OC and BC maintain synchronization according to the link delay and the timing information contained in the Sync messages.
NOTE
The Pdelay mechanism is intended to measure the point-to-point transmission time between two communication ports that support the Pdelay mechanism. The point-to-point transmission time is the link delay. The P2P TC has to compute the link delay by adopting the Pdelay mechanism.
The Announce messages are used to set up the synchronization system.
4.3 Application of the PTP Clock

By using the IEEE 1588V2 protocol, the OptiX RTN equipment can transfer the precise time information to achieve clock synchronization and time synchronization for equipment in the
network. This meets the requirement of the telecommunications network for precise time. The equipment with the PTP clock can achieve networkwide frequency synchronization and time synchronization in the packet switching network (PSN). The telecommunications network carry various services. Certain services require precise time synchronization, such as the network voting and charging services. In such a scenario, the IEEE 1588V2 clock is applicable and ensures precise time synchronization. Figure 4-3 shows the scenario where the PTP clock is applicable. Figure 4-3 Networking diagram for typical application of the PTP clock
Node B
NE E GPS NE B NE A OC RTN 910
BC NE C
RNC
BC NE D BC NE F OC RTN 910 RTN 950 External time signals Node B PTP time signals RTN 910
BC
As shown in Figure 4-3, BITS sends clock signals to NE A and RNC. NE A works as BC equipment and sends the PTP packets to two ports. NE E and NE F, which are connected to Node B, work as the OC equipment, recover the PTP clock, and send the clock to Node B through the external time interface.
4.4 Configuration Flow for the PTP Clock

This section describes the flow of configuring the PTP clock in different modes. Figure 4-4 shows the flow for configuring the PTP clock.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
4-7
Figure 4-4 Configuration flow for the PTP clock
Required Optional
Start Setting the Frequency Selection Mode Setting the PTP System Time Setting the PTP Clock Subnet
Setting the Attributes of the External Time Interface Setting the PTP NE Attributes
Creating the PTP Clock Port Creating the PTP Clock Service
Setting the PTP Packet Period
Setting the PTP Clock Port Status Setting the Cable Transmitting Wrap Setting the WTR Time for the PTP Clock Sourc Setting the PTP Clock Source Priority End
The PTP priority service needs to be configured only when the PTP clock works in the TC or TC+OC mode. The PTP clock source priority needs to be configured only when the PTP clock works in the TC +OC mode.
4.5 Configuring the PTP Clock

To achieve time synchronization and clock synchronization between NEs, configure the PTP clock. 4.5.1 Setting the Frequency Selection Mode The OptiX RTN equipment supports two synchronization modes, that is, physical synchronization mode and PTP synchronization mode. The frequency source selection mode is used to set the clock synchronization mode of the NE. Before configuring the IEEE 1588 clock, you should set the frequency source selection mode to the PTP synchronization mode. 4.5.2 Setting the PTP System Time If the OptiX RTN equipment is used as the grandmaster clock in the PTP clock network, you should set the PTP system time on the OptiX RTN equipment. Hence, the downstream OptiX RTN equipment can trace the clock. 4.5.3 Setting the PTP Clock Subnet According to the actual networking, the networking planner plans the clock network and divides the entire network into clock domains. In each clock domain, the clock and time of the equipment are synchronized. Each BC, OC or TC+OC equipment can be configured with only one clock domain. The equipment selects the source in only one clock domain, and discards the clock packets from other clock domains. 4.5.4 Setting the Attributes of the External Time Interface If the equipment uses the external time interface to input or output time signals, you should set the corresponding interface attributes. The external time interface attributes include the basic attribute, BMC, and cable transmitting distance. The cable transmitting distance is used to compensate the time for the equipment. 4.5.5 Setting the PTP NE Attributes The NE attributes include Work Mode, Transmitting Message Multi-cast Mode, and Time Adjusting. 4.5.6 Creating the PTP Clock Port When a PTP clock port is created, the PTP clock port can access the PTP packets. You can set the clock reference source number on the PTP clock port created in the BC or OC mode. 4.5.7 Creating the PTP Clock Service When the NE works in the TC or TC+OC mode, you need to create a PTP clock service on the NE so that the NE transparently transmits the PTP clock packets. 4.5.8 Setting the PTP Packet Period When setting the PTP packet period, you can set the periods of the ANNOUNCE, SYNC, DELAY, and PDELAY packets. 4.5.9 Setting the PTP Clock Port Status In the scenario where the OptiX RTN equipment is connected to the client equipment, properly set the status of the PTP clock port. For example, if the PTP packets should contain VLAN ID
or the PTP packets from the client side should be forwarded (Layer 2 or Layer 3), set the status of the PTP clock port accordingly. By default, the equipment performs Layer 2 forwarding for the PTP packets. 4.5.10 Setting the Cable Transmitting Wrap The cable transmitting distance wrap indicates the transmitting time difference of the cables between two sets of equipment in the transmit and receive directions. During deployment, you can use the GPS to compute the transmitting time difference between the two directions. Set the cable transmitting wrap, and thus the equipment performs the clock compensation. The wrap modes includes the length wrap and time wrap. The equipment can choose only one mode. 4.5.11 Setting the Wait-to-Restore Time for the PTP Clock Source When a clock port recovers from a failure, the system acknowledges the validity of the port a certain period later. This period is referred to as the wait-to-restore (WTR) time. During the WTR time, the system considers the clock signals as unavailable and the clock signals are not involved in the clock source selection. 4.5.12 Setting the PTP Clock Source Priority If the NE works in the TC+OC mode, you need to set the priorities for the clock sources traced by the OC. Normally, the OC traces the PTP clock source of the highest priority. If the PTP clock source of the highest priority fails, the OC traces the PTP clock source of the second highest priority. The priority table is configured with a source ID. When a local port receives a clock source in the priority table, the port checks whether the domain that the clock source belongs to is consistent with the domain configured at the local end.
4.5.1 Setting the Frequency Selection Mode

The OptiX RTN equipment supports two synchronization modes, that is, physical synchronization mode and PTP synchronization mode. The frequency source selection mode is used to set the clock synchronization mode of the NE. Before configuring the IEEE 1588 clock, you should set the frequency source selection mode to the PTP synchronization mode.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Clock > Frequency Selection Mode from the Function Tree. Step 2 In Frequency Selection Mode, you can select one of the clock synchronization mode.
CAUTION
l When the external time interface is set to the external time input interface, the NE can run in only the physical synchronization mode. That is, the frequency selection mode of the equipment that accesses the external clock must be set to the physical synchronization mode. l When the NE is running in the PTP synchronization mode, the external interface cannot be set to the external time input interface.
4-10
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
4.5.2 Setting the PTP System Time

If the OptiX RTN equipment is used as the grandmaster clock in the PTP clock network, you should set the PTP system time on the OptiX RTN equipment. Hence, the downstream OptiX RTN equipment can trace the clock.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The PTP system time can be set only when the current time of the NE traces the local clock.
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > Clock Synchronization Attribute. Step 2 In PTP System Time, click to set the system time.
NOTE
Move the cursor to the time bar. To increase the value, click or right-click the time bar. To decrease the value, hold the Shift key, and click or right-click the time bar.
4.5.3 Setting the PTP Clock Subnet

According to the actual networking, the networking planner plans the clock network and divides the entire network into clock domains. In each clock domain, the clock and time of the equipment are synchronized. Each BC, OC or TC+OC equipment can be configured with only one clock domain. The equipment selects the source in only one clock domain, and discards the clock packets from other clock domains.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The working mode of the equipment clock should not be TC.
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the Clock Subnet tab to set the clock subnet number. Step 3 Click Apply. Step 4 Click the BMC tab to set the parameters related to the BMC in the clock subnet. Step 5 Click Apply. ----End
4.5.4 Setting the Attributes of the External Time Interface

If the equipment uses the external time interface to input or output time signals, you should set the corresponding interface attributes. The external time interface attributes include the basic attribute, BMC, and cable transmitting distance. The cable transmitting distance is used to compensate the time for the equipment.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > External Time Interface. Step 2 Click the Basic Attribute tab. Step 3 Set Interface Mode of the external time interface. Step 4 Optional: If Interface Mode is set to External Time Interface, you can set Direction, Interface Protocol Type, and Interface Eletricity.
NOTE
l OptiX RTN 910 and 950: Interface Protocol Type is set according to the type of the external time protocol. Interface Protocol Type can be set to DCLS or 1PPS+TIME. l OptiX RTN 910 and 950: Interface Level is set according to the setting of the external time interface. Interface Level can be set to RS422.
Step 5 Click the BMC tab to set the BMC-related parameters.

NOTE
The BMC-related parameters can be set only the working mode is set to BC or OC, and when the Interface Mode of the External Time Interface is set to External Time Interface.
Step 6 Click Apply.

Step 7 Click the Cable Transmitting Distance tab to set the cable parameters for the clock compensation such as Transmitting Distance Mode, Transmitting Length(m), and Transmitting Time(ns).
NOTE
Transmitting Distance Mode can be set to Time or Length. l When Transmitting Distance Mode is set to Time, the transmitting time ranges from 0 ns to 1350 ns. l When Transmitting Distance Mode is set to Length, the length range is 0-300 m. l 1 m is equivalent to 4.5 ns.
4.5.5 Setting the PTP NE Attributes

The NE attributes include Work Mode, Transmitting Message Multi-cast Mode, and Time Adjusting.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > Clock Synchronization Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set Work Mode, SLAVE_ONLY, Time Adjusting, and Transmitting Packet Multi-cast Mode. Step 3 According to the working mode of the NE in the network, set Work Mode.
NOTE
The PTP standard defines four working modes, that is, BC, OC, TC, and TC+OC. When the NE working mode is TC or TC+OC, if the PTP clock service or the clock source priority table is already configured, you cannot modify the working mode.
Step 4 When Work Mode is set to OC, SLAVE_ONLY can be set to SLAVE_ONLY or NON_SLAVE_ONLY.
NOTE
l SLAVE_ONLY indicates that the NE in the OC mode can only trace other PTP clocks. l NON_SLAVE_ONLY indicates that in the OC mode the NE can function as the standy clock to trace other PTP clocks and the NE can also function as the primary clock. Whether the NE functions as the standby clock or primary clock depends on the quality of the PTP clock.
Step 5 When Work Mode is set to BC or OC, Time Adjusting is configurable.

NOTE
If the NE requires time synchronized, Time Adjusting needs to be set to Enabled.
Step 6 When Work Mode is set to BC or OC, Transmitting Packet Multi-cast Mode is configurable.
NOTE
If the mode is set to Entire Multi-cast, the equipment multicasts all the PTP packets. If the mode is set to Part Multi-cast, the equipment unicasts the DELAY packets.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
4-13
Step 7 When Work Mode is set to BC or OC, Protocol Packet Format is configurable.
NOTE
The Protocol Packet Format can be set to NMEA or UBX. The default parameter value is NMEA. This parameter is valid only when Interface Protocol Type of the external time interface is set to 1PPS +Time. When Interface Protocol Type of the external time interface is set to DCLS, the parameter can still be set but the parameter value is invalid.
----End
4.5.6 Creating the PTP Clock Port

When a PTP clock port is created, the PTP clock port can access the PTP packets. You can set the clock reference source number on the PTP clock port created in the BC or OC mode.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > Clock Synchronization Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Port Status tab, and then click New to display the Create PTP Clock Port dialog box. Step 3 Select the corresponding board, and then select the corresponding port from Available Port. Click Step 4 Click OK. ----End .
4.5.7 Creating the PTP Clock Service

When the NE works in the TC or TC+OC mode, you need to create a PTP clock service on the NE so that the NE transparently transmits the PTP clock packets.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > Clock Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New to display the New Clock Service dialog box. Step 3 Set Service ID and Service Name. Step 4 In the dialog box, click the UNI tab. Then, click Configuration to display the Configure Port dialog box.
Step 5 Select the port from the Available Port list, and then click Selected Port list.
NOTE
to add the port to the
l When the PTP packets contain VLAN tags, you need to set a VLAN tag for the port. The OptiX RTN equipment supports the setting of only one VLAN tag. l When two TC services share a port, set a VALN tag for the port if the port is a UNI port. l If the port is Layer 3 port, the port can be used only as a UNI port for the TC service. The encapsulation mode should be ETH and no VLAN tag can be set.
Step 6 Click OK, and thus the UNI configuration is complete. Step 7 Optional: If the PTP packets need to be carried by the MPLS tunnel, you can set the related NNI parameters. 1. 2. In the dialog box, click the NNI tab. Then, click New to display the New PW dialog box. Click the General Attributes tab to set PW ID, PW Type, PW Ingress Label, and PW Egress Label.
3.
Click to display Resource Selection Window. Select the tunnel that carries the PW, and then click OK.
NOTE
Select the static MPLS tunnel, because the dynamic MPLS tunnel cannot carry the PTP packets.
4.
Optional: Click the Advanced Attributes tab to set the corresponding parameters.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
4-15
5.
Click OK in the New PW dialog box to finish the PW configuration on the NNI side.
Step 8 Click OK in the New Clock Service dialog box to complete the configuration of the clock service. ----End
4.5.8 Setting the PTP Packet Period

When setting the PTP packet period, you can set the periods of the ANNOUNCE, SYNC, DELAY, and PDELAY packets.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. A PTP clock port must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > Clock Synchronization Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Port Message tab to set P/E Mode and the corresponding packet periods.
NOTE
In P2P mode, the TC equipment transmits only the PDELAY packets. You can set the period for the TC equipment to transmit the PDELAY packets.

4.5.9 Setting the PTP Clock Port Status

In the scenario where the OptiX RTN equipment is connected to the client equipment, properly set the status of the PTP clock port. For example, if the PTP packets should contain VLAN ID or the PTP packets from the client side should be forwarded (Layer 2 or Layer 3), set the status of the PTP clock port accordingly. By default, the equipment performs Layer 2 forwarding for the PTP packets.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. A PTP clock port must be created. The working mode of the NE must be set to BC or OC.
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > Clock Synchronization Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Port Status tab and set PTP Message Format.
NOTE
If the port is configured with a clock service, do not change the PTP message format of the port.
Step 3 Optional: If the working mode of the NE is set to BC or OC, and the PTP packets contain VLAN IDs, set PTP Message VLAN to a proper VLAN value accordingly.
NOTE
In the case of interconnection with the client equipment, if the client equipment forwards the PTP packets according to VLAN IDs, the PTP packets should contain VLAN IDs.
Step 4 Optional: If the working mode of the NE is set to BC or OC, set Port Status accordingly.
NOTE
l Set Port Status to MASTER+SLAVE, MASTER, or SLAVE. l When the Port Status is MASTER, Actual Port Status should not be SLAVE. l When the Port Status is SLAVE, Actual Port Status should not be MASTER. l If the NE is set to SLAVE_ONLY in the synchronization attributes, set Port Status only to SLAVE.
Step 5 Optional: If the working mode of the NE is set to BC or OC, double-click the blank line below Selected Clock Source to display the Clock Source Coding Configuration dialog box. Step 6 Optional: Set the parameters related to the clock source and click OK.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
4-17
CAUTION
The clock sources at the local port should be numbered in the same manner as the clock sources at the upstream port, or the clock sources do not need to be numbered. Otherwise, clock tracing fails if the working mode of the NE is set to BC or OC.
NOTE
When one PTP clock port receives multiple channels of clock signals, number the clock sources so that the NE selects one clock source. For example, multiple TC clock services from the upstream equipment are converged onto one clock port on the local equipment and then are transmitted to the downstream equipment. As a result, the port on the downstream equipment connected to the upstream equipment receives the multiple TC clock services. In this case, you need to number the clock sources at the port on the downstream equipment.
4.5.10 Setting the Cable Transmitting Wrap

The cable transmitting distance wrap indicates the transmitting time difference of the cables between two sets of equipment in the transmit and receive directions. During deployment, you can use the GPS to compute the transmitting time difference between the two directions. Set the cable transmitting wrap, and thus the equipment performs the clock compensation. The wrap modes includes the length wrap and time wrap. The equipment can choose only one mode.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > Clock Synchronization Attribute. Step 2 Click the Cable Transmitting Wrap tab. Step 3 Set Wrap Direction. Positive direction indicates that the transmitting distance or transmitting time of the clock receive end is longer than the transmitting distance or transmitting time at the clock transmit end. Negative direction indicates that the transmitting distance or transmitting time of the clock transmit end is longer than the transmitting distance or transmitting time at the clock receive end. Step 4 Wrap Mode can be set to Length or Time. Step 5 According to Wrap Mode, set Wrap Length(m) or Wrap Time(ns).
NOTE
l The range of Wrap Length(m) is 0-14562 m. l The range of Wrap Time(ns) is 0-65529 ns. l 1 m is equivalent to 4.5 ns.

4.5.11 Setting the Wait-to-Restore Time for the PTP Clock Source
When a clock port recovers from a failure, the system acknowledges the validity of the port a certain period later. This period is referred to as the wait-to-restore (WTR) time. During the WTR time, the system considers the clock signals as unavailable and the clock signals are not involved in the clock source selection.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. A PTP clock port must be created. The working mode of the NE must be set to BC, OC or TC+OC.
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > Clock Source Priority Table from the NE Explorer. Step 2 Click the Clock Source Reversion Parameter tab and set Clock Source WTR Time(min.).
NOTE
Set Clock Source WTR Time(min.) within the range of 0 minutes to 12 minutes at a spacing of 1 minute. By default, the WTR time is 5 minutes.
4.5.12 Setting the PTP Clock Source Priority

If the NE works in the TC+OC mode, you need to set the priorities for the clock sources traced by the OC. Normally, the OC traces the PTP clock source of the highest priority. If the PTP clock source of the highest priority fails, the OC traces the PTP clock source of the second highest priority. The priority table is configured with a source ID. When a local port receives a clock source in the priority table, the port checks whether the domain that the clock source belongs to is consistent with the domain configured at the local end.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The working mode of the NE must be set to TC+OC.
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > Clock Source Priority Table from the NE Explorer. Step 2 Click the Clock Source Priority Table tab and click New to create a clock source. You can change the working mode of NE only after you delete the PTP clock source priority. Step 3 Select a clock source and click
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
or
to adjust the priority of the clock source.

4-19
4-20
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
5 Configuring Orderwire
5
About This Chapter
Configuring Orderwire
You can configure orderwire for NEs by using the U2000. 5.1 Configuring Orderwire To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you can configure orderwire for NEs. 5.2 Configuring F1 Data Port Services You can use the U2000 to configure F1 Data port services. 5.3 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services You can configure Asynchronous data services by using the U2000. 5.4 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services RTN 600) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the synchronous data service requirements. 5.5 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services RTN 600) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point asynchronous data service requirements.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
5-1
5.1 Configuring Orderwire

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you can configure orderwire for NEs.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the General tab. Step 2 Click Query to query information from the NE. Step 3 Set Call Waiting Time(s), Telephone No. and orderwire ports.
NOTE
l Call Waiting Time(s) should be set to the same value for all NEs with orderwire communication. When the number of NEs is smaller than 30, set the value to 5 seconds. Otherwise, set it to 9 seconds. l The telephone number must be unique in an orderwire subnet. l Set the length of the telephone number according to the actual requirements. The maximum length is eight digits and the minimum length is three digits. In the same orderwire subnet, the number length must be the same.
5.2 Configuring F1 Data Port Services

You can use the U2000 to configure F1 Data port services. 5.2.1 F1 Data Port Services The F1 Data Port Services is a point-to-point (P2P) service that is transparently transmitted by using the F1 byte. 5.2.2 Configuring F1 Data Port Services The F1 Data Port Services uses the F1 byte (section user channel byte) to transparently transmit services. If a maintenance engineer requires extra overhead bytes to temporarily set up orderwire connections, the engineer can create F1 data port services. The transmission rate is 64 kbit/s, that is, E0 level.
5.2.1 F1 Data Port Services

The F1 Data Port Services is a point-to-point (P2P) service that is transparently transmitted by using the F1 byte. The F1 data port is a transparent data port that transports codirectional P2P services at the rate of 64 kbit/s. It does not support data broadcast. Hence, only the P2P services can be turned up at an F1 data port. When you use the F1 data port, you only need to configure routes for the 64 kbit/s data, that is, whether the data is added to, dropped from or passes through the port. If you manually configure the port, you need to use the U2000 to configure each node along the communication channel. After the configurations take effect, the data can be transmitted.
Example for Configuring the F1 Data Port Services

Figure 5-1 shows how a F1 Data Port Services is configured. Figure 5-1 Configuring the F1 data port service
F1 Data Port F1 Data Port
Node A
Node B
Node C
Node A and node C transmit data through the F1 data port. You can use the U2000 to configure each node as follows: l Configure added or dropped services at node A. Select the F1 data port and a port on the intermediate frequency (IF) board as two data channel ports. In this case, the F1 data port service from the client side is added or dropped from the F1 data port of the orderwire board, and is transmitted through the a port on the intermediate frequency (IF) board. Configure pass-through services at node B. Select two a port on the intermediate frequency (IF) board as the data channel ports. In this case, the F1 data port service passes through the two a port on the intermediate frequency (IF) board at this node. Configure added or dropped services at node C. Select the F1 data port and a port on the intermediate frequency (IF) board as two data channel ports. In this case, the F1 data port service is cross-connected from the a port on the intermediate frequency (IF) board to the orderwire board, and then added or dropped from the F1 data port of the orderwire board.
5.2.2 Configuring F1 Data Port Services

The F1 Data Port Services uses the F1 byte (section user channel byte) to transparently transmit services. If a maintenance engineer requires extra overhead bytes to temporarily set up orderwire connections, the engineer can create F1 data port services. The transmission rate is 64 kbit/s, that is, E0 level.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The boards that are related to the synchronous data services must be configured.
Context
In the case of the RTN 610/620, the synchronous data services are transmitted over the F1 overhead bytes in the SDH/PDH radio frame or STM-N frame.In the case of the RTN 605, the synchronous data services are transmitted over the F1 overhead bytes in the radio frame.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the F1 Data Port tab. Step 3 Press the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Click .
NOTE
Data Channel 1 and Data Channel 2: Depending on the board configuration, the following ports can be selected. l SDH optical/electrical port: When the SDH optical/electrical line port is selected, the F1 byte in the SDH frame of this port is used. l IF port: When the IF port is selected, the self-defined F1 byte in the radio frame of this port is used. l F1 port: When the F1 port is selected, the F1 synchronous data port on the SCC board is used. The F1 port conforms to the G.703 and the rate is 64 kbit/s. l external clock port of the PXC board: When the PXC-1 is selected, the external clock port of the PXC board is used. In this case, the external clock port is used as the output port of the overhead bytes. When the F1 data channel of the RTN 605 transmits the synchronous data services, the F1 data channel is bound with the working channel in most cases.
5.3 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services

You can configure Asynchronous data services by using the U2000. 5.3.1 Asynchronous Data Services The asynchronous data interfaces of the RTN equipment uses RS232 to implement universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) full-duplex communication. The data is transmitted transparently, and it is not required to configure interface rate or transmission control protocols by using the U2000. The maximum bit rate is 19.2 kbit/s. You can connect an NE to the data terminal equipment through this asynchronous data interface, and configure the communication mode as point to point. 5.3.2 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services To configure the asynchronous data services, you need to set the broadcast data port of the RTN equipment. In the case of the RTN 610/620, the Serial byte in the SDH/PDH radio overheads or
any of the bytes Serial1-Serial4 in the normal SDH overheads is used to transparently transmit the asynchronous data services. In the case of the RTN 605, the Serial byte in the PDH radio overheads is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. The asynchronous data services need to not be configured, but are automatically activated.
5.3.1 Asynchronous Data Services

The asynchronous data interfaces of the RTN equipment uses RS232 to implement universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) full-duplex communication. The data is transmitted transparently, and it is not required to configure interface rate or transmission control protocols by using the U2000. The maximum bit rate is 19.2 kbit/s. You can connect an NE to the data terminal equipment through this asynchronous data interface, and configure the communication mode as point to point. Asynchronous data services use the overhead bytes (serial) in the SDH or PDH microwave or any one byte (serial1 through serial4) in the ordinary SDH overhead as the broadcast data communication channel.
5.3.2 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services

To configure the asynchronous data services, you need to set the broadcast data port of the RTN equipment. In the case of the RTN 610/620, the Serial byte in the SDH/PDH radio overheads or any of the bytes Serial1-Serial4 in the normal SDH overheads is used to transparently transmit the asynchronous data services. In the case of the RTN 605, the Serial byte in the PDH radio overheads is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. The asynchronous data services need to not be configured, but are automatically activated.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The boards that are related to the asynchronous data services must be configured.
Context
The asynchronous data port of the OptiX RTN 600 is an RS-232 port and can implement the universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) full-duplex communication. The service transmission is required to be point-to-point transparent transmission. Therefore, the port rate and transmission control protocol need not be configured and the maximum communication rate is 19.2 kbit/s. Hence, the asynchronous data port is also considered as the transparent data port.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. Step 3 Set the parameters of the broadcast data port.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
5-5
NOTE
l Overhead Byte: SERIAL1-SERIAL4, and default value is SERIAL1. l In the case of an SDH optical/electrical line, the preset overhead byte is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. l In the case of a radio link, a self-defined Serial overhead byte in the radio frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. l Broadcast Data Source/Broadcast Data Sink: Depending on the board configuration, the following values can be selected. l SERIAL1-SERIAL4: When this parameter is set so that it is the same as the SERIAL byte corresponding to the Overhead Byte, the asynchronous data port on the SCC board is used. l SDH optical/electrical port: When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line port, the Overhead Byte of this port is used. l IF port: When this parameter is set to IF port, the self-defined Serial byte in the radio frame of this port is used. l external clock port of the PXC board: When this parameter is set to the external clock port on the PXC board, the external clock port on the PXC board is used. In this case, the external clock port is used as the output port of overhead bytes.
5.4 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services RTN 600)

This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the synchronous data service requirements. 5.4.1 Networking Diagram
The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 5.4.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. 5.4.3 Configuration Process You can configure the synchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
5.4.1 Networking Diagram

The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. As shown in Figure 5-2, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU 620. The new service requirements are as follows: the data communication equipment between NE1 and NE3 must communicate with each other, and the required bandwidth must be 64 kbit/s. Figure 5-2 Networking diagram
NE 1 NE 2 NE 3
64kbit/s
64kbit/s
5.4.2 Service Planning

According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs.
Board Configuration Information

The SCC boards of NE1 and NE3 need to provide the F1 synchronous data ports. In the case of the OptiX RTN 600, the SL61SCC VER.C provides the F1 synchronous data port whereas the SL61SCC VER.B does not provide the F1 synchronous data port.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
5-7
Configuring the Synchronous Data Port

Table 5-1 Configuration of the synchronous data port Parameter Data Channel 1 Data Channel 2 NE1 6-SL1 F1 NE2 5-IF1A 6-SL1 NE3 5-IF1A F1
Table 5-2 Configuration of the synchronous data port Parameter Data Channel 1 Data Channel 2 NE1 6-SL1 F1 NE2 5-IF0A 6-SL1 NE3 8-IF0-1 F1
Timeslot Allocation Information

Figure 5-3 Timeslot allocation of synchronous data services
Station Timeslot NE1 6-SL1-1 F1 2-SCC: F1 Add/Frop Forward NE2 6-SL1-1 5-IF1A-1 F1 2-SCC: F1 NE3 5-IF1A-1
Station Timeslot
NE1 6-SL1-1 F1 2-SCC: F1 Add/Frop Forward
NE2 6-SL1-1 5-IF0A-1 F1
NE3 8-IF0-1
2-SCC: F1
l l l
The F1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE1 and F1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE3 are used to add/drop the synchronous data services. The F1 overhead byte on the SDH line between the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE1 and the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE2 is used to transmit the synchronous data services. The F1 overhead byte on the radio link between the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2 and the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE3 is used to transmit the synchronous data services.
5-8
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
l l l l l
The synchronous data services are passed through between the SL1 board in slot 6 and the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2. The F1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE1 and F1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE3 are used to add/drop the synchronous data services. The F1 overhead byte on the SDH line between the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE1 and the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE2 is used to transmit the synchronous data services. The F1 overhead byte on the radio link between the IF0A board in slot 5 of NE2 and the IF board in logical slot 8 of NE3 is used to transmit the synchronous data services. The synchronous data services are passed through between the SL1 board in slot 6 and the IF0A board in slot 5 of NE2.
5.4.3 Configuration Process

You can configure the synchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. All the required boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 5.2.2 Configuring F1 Data Port Services. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the F1 Data Port tab. Hold down the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Then, click Apply. Parameter Data Channel 1 Data Channel 2 Value Range 6-SL1-1 F1 Description When the 6-SL1-1 port is selected, the F1 byte in the SDH frame of this port is used. When the F1 port is selected, the F1 synchronous data port on the SCC board is used. The F1 port complies with ITU-T G.703 and the rate is 64 kbit/ s.
Step 2 5.2.2 Configuring F1 Data Port Services. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the F1 Data Port tab. Hold down the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Then, click Apply.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Data Channel 1 Data Channel 2
Value Range 6-SL1-1 5-IF1A-1
Description When the 6-SL1-1 port is selected, the F1 byte in the SDH frame of this port is used. When the 5-IF1A-1 port is selected, the selfdefined F1 byte in the radio frame of this port is used.
Step 3 5.2.2 Configuring F1 Data Port Services. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the F1 Data Port tab. Hold down the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Then, click Apply. Parameter Data Channel 1 Value Range 5-IF1A-1 Description When the 5-IF1A-1 port is selected, the selfdefined F1 byte in the radio frame of this port is used. When the F1 port is selected, the F1 synchronous data port on the SCC board is used. The F1 port complies with ITU-T G.703 and the rate is 64 kbit/ s.
Data Channel 2
F1
----End
5.5 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services RTN 600)

This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point asynchronous data service requirements. 5.5.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 5.5.2 Service Planning The timeslot allocation can be planned for the asynchronous data services based on the networking diagram. 5.5.3 Configuration Process You can configure the asynchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
5-10
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. As shown in Figure 5-4, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU 620. Asynchronous data services need to be activated between NE1 and NE3. The service requirements are as follows: l l l l NE1 must be connected to the monitor server. NE3 must be connected to the environment monitor. Point-to-point communication must exist between the monitor server and the environment monitor, through services at the asynchronous data ports. The requirements for the environment monitor are as follows: The level of the port must be RS-232. Logic "1" stands for -5 V to -15 V, and logic "0" stands for +5 V to +15 V. When no data is transmitted, the port must be of high RS-232 level (about -9 V). Figure 5-4 Networking diagram
NE 1 NE 2 NE 3
RS-232
RS-232

The timeslot allocation can be planned for the asynchronous data services based on the networking diagram.
Configuration of the Asynchronous Data Services

Table 5-3 Configuration of the asynchronous data services Parameter Overhead Byte Broadcast Data Source Broadcast Data Sink NE1 SERIAL1 6-SL1-1 S1 NE2 SERIAL1 5-IF1A-1 6-SL1-1 NE3 SERIAL1 5-IF1A-1 S1
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
5-11
Table 5-4 Configuration of the asynchronous data services Parameter Overhead Byte Broadcast Data Source Broadcast Data Sink NE1 SERIAL1 6-SL1-1 S1 NE2 SERIAL1 5-IF0A-1 6-SL1-1 NE3 SERIAL 8-IF0-1 S1

Figure 5-5 Timeslot allocation diagram
Station Timeslot NE1 6-SL1-1 Serial1 2-SCC: S1 Add/Frop Forward Station Timeslot NE1 6-SL1-1 Serial1 2-SCC: S1 Add/Frop Forward NE2 6-SL1-1 5-IF0A-1 Serial 2-SCC: S1 NE3 8-IF0-1 NE2 6-SL1-1 5-IF1A-1 Serial1 2-SCC: S1 NE3 5-IF1A-1
As shown in the timeslot allocation diagram, the asynchronous data services are as follows: l l l l l l l The S1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE1 and S1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE3 are used to add and drop the asynchronous data services. The S1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE1 and S1 port of NE3 are used to add and drop the asynchronous data services. The SERIAL1 overhead byte on the SDH optical line between the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE1 and the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE2 is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. The self-defined SERIAL byte on the radio link between the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2 and the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE3 to transmit the asynchronous data services. The self-defined SERIAL byte on the radio link between the IF0A board in slot 5 of NE2 and the IF0 board in logical slot 8 of NE3 to transmit the asynchronous data services. The asynchronous data services are passed through between port 1 of the SL1 board in slot 6 and port 1 of the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2. The asynchronous data services are passed through between port 1 of the SL1 board in slot 6 and port 1 of the IF0A board in slot 5 of NE2.
5-12

You can configure the asynchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 5.3.2 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Overhead Byte Value Range SERIAL1 Description l In this example, Overhead Byte is set to SERIAL1. l In the case of a radio link, a self-defined SERIAL overhead byte in the radio frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. Broadcast Data Source 6-SL1-1 l In this example, Broadcast Data Source is set to 6-SL1-1. l When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line port, Overhead Byte of this port is used. Selected Broadcast Data Sink S1 l In this example, Broadcast Data Sink is set to S1. l When this parameter is set so that it is the same as Overhead Byte, the asynchronous data port on the SCC board is used.
Step 2 5.3.2 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
5-13
Parameter Overhead Byte
Value Range SERIAL1
Description l In this example, Overhead Byte is set to SERIAL1. l In the case of a radio link, a self-defined SERIAL overhead byte in the radio frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services.
Broadcast Data Source
6-SL1-1
l In this example, Broadcast Data Source is set to 6-SL1-1. l When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line port, Overhead Byte of this port is used.
Selected Broadcast Data Sink
5-IF1A-1
l In this example, Selected Broadcast Data Sink is set to 5-IF1A-1. l When this parameter is set to IF port, the selfdefined SERIAL byte in the radio frame of this port is used.
Step 3 5.3.2 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Overhead Byte Value Range SERIAL1 Description l In this example, Overhead Byte is set to SERIAL1. l In the case of a radio link, a self-defined SERIAL overhead byte in the radio frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. Broadcast Data Source 5-IF1A-1 l In this example, Broadcast Data Source is set to 5-IF1A-1. l When this parameter is set to IF port, the selfdefined SERIAL byte in the radio frame of this port is used. Selected Broadcast Data Sink S1 l In this example, Selected Broadcast Data Sink is set to S1. l When this parameter is set so that it is the same as Overhead Byte, the asynchronous data port on the SCC board is used.
----End
5-14
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
6 Configuring Environment Monitor Interfaces
Configuring Environment Monitor Interfaces
About This Chapter

6.1 Configuring External Alarms To configure external alarms, you need to configure the environment monitor port. After the outputting of external alarms is configured, the alarm information of the OptiX RTN can be output to other equipment. After the inputting of external alarms is configured, the alarm information of other equipment can be input to the OptiX RTN and then to the processing equipment at the remote end. 6.2 Configuration Example (External Alarms RTN 600) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the parameters of the external alarms and complete the data configuration according to the external alarm requirements.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
6-1
6.1 Configuring External Alarms

To configure external alarms, you need to configure the environment monitor port. After the outputting of external alarms is configured, the alarm information of the OptiX RTN can be output to other equipment. After the inputting of external alarms is configured, the alarm information of other equipment can be input to the OptiX RTN and then to the processing equipment at the remote end.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Apply to the EOW, AUX and CXP boards.
Context
The external alarms are also considered as housekeeping alarms. The external alarm port is a relay port. This port can be either in the "on" state or in the "off" state. The alarm input ports report the RELAY_ALARM alarm (the alarm parameter indicates the port number of the input alarm) after the external alarm is triggered. To ensure that the external alarm port works normally, the external alarm cables must be correctly connected.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the case of RTN 600 NEs: 1. Configure the input alarm. a. b. Select Input Relay from the drop-down list. Set the parameters of the input alarm.
c. 2.
Click Apply.
Configure the output alarm. a. b. Select Output Relay from the drop-down list. Set the parameters of the output alarm.
6-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
c. 1. 2. 3.
Click Apply.
Step 3 In the case of RTN 900 NEs: Select the attributes you want to configure from the drop-down list. Click Query to query parameter values. Double-click a field to select or enter a value. click Apply.
----End
6.2 Configuration Example (External Alarms RTN 600)

This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the parameters of the external alarms and complete the data configuration according to the external alarm requirements. 6.2.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. This topic describes the external alarm requirements. 6.2.2 Service Planning The engineering design department plans the external alarm setting based on the networking diagram. 6.2.3 Configuration Process You can configure the external alarm services based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.

The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. This topic describes the external alarm requirements. An OptiX RTN 600 NE must meet the following external alarm requirements: l Outputs two external alarmsone external alarm, and reports a critical alarm and a major alarmreports a critical alarm. The alarm modes are the same, that is,mode is as follows: the port enters the "off" state when an alarm is generated. Inputs three external alarms. The alarm modes are the same, that is, an alarm is generated when the port enters the "on" state.
Figure 6-1 Networking diagram
Alarm In1 Alarm In2 Alarm In3 Alarm Out
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
6-3
Alarm In1 Alarm In2 Alarm In3 Alarm Out1 Alarm Out2

The engineering design department plans the external alarm setting based on the networking diagram. Table 6-1 Configuration of the external alarms Port No. Alarm output port 1 Alarm Mode An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns Off and Low Level is Caused An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns Off and Low Level is Caused An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns On and High Level is Caused An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns On and High Level is Caused An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns On and High Level is Caused Alarm Trigger Condition Critical Alarm Auto Trigger
Alarm output port 2
Major Alarm Auto Trigger
Alarm input port 1
Alarm input port 2
Alarm input port 3
Table 6-2 Configuration of the external alarms Port No. Alarm output port Alarm Mode An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns Off and Low Level is Caused An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns On and High Level is Caused Alarm Trigger Condition Critical Alarm Auto Trigger
Alarm input port 1
6-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Port No. Alarm input port 2
Alarm Mode An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns On and High Level is Caused An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns On and High Level is Caused
Alarm Trigger Condition -
Alarm input port 3

You can configure the external alarm services based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
You must be logged in to the NE. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure external alarms. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the EOW board and then choose Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function Tree. Configure the input alarm. Select Input Relay from the drop-down list. Click Apply. Paramet er Using Status Alarm Mode Value Range EOW-1 Used EOW-2 EOW-3 In this example, Using Status of the alarm interface is set to Used. The alarm is generated when the relay is on. Description
An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns On and High Level is Caused
3.
Configure the output alarm. Select Output Relay from the drop-down list. Click Apply. Parameter Value Range EOW-1 Use or Not Working Mode Used Automatic In this example, Use or Not of the alarm interface is set to Used. Changing the status of the output relay according to Alarm Trigger Conditions and Alarm Mode.
6-5
Description
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter
Value Range EOW-1
Description
Alarm Trigger Conditions Alarm Mode
Critical Alarm Auto Trigger An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns Off and Low Level is Caused
The status of the output relay is changed automatically according to the preset value. The alarm is generated when the relay is off.
Parameter
Value Range EOW-1 EOW-2
Description
Use or Not Working Mode Alarm Trigger Conditions Alarm Mode
Used Automatic
In this example, Use or Not of the alarm interface is set to Used. Changing the status of the output relay according to Alarm Trigger Conditions and Alarm Mode. Major Alarm Auto Trigger The status of the output relay is changed automatically according to the preset value. The alarm is generated when the relay is off.
Critical Alarm Auto Trigger
An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns Off and Low Level is Caused
----End
6-6
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7 Configuring Interfaces (RTN 600)
Configuring Interfaces (RTN 600)
About This Chapter

This section describes how to set the interface attributes of the boards. 7.1 Checking Board Parameters To learn about board parameter status, you can check board parameters. Before actual configuration operations in networking, you need to check board parameters, to make sure that the board parameter status meets the requirements of actual networking. 7.2 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports This topic describes how to set the parameters of various ports. Normally, the default values of the parameters are adopted to meet the relevant requirements. In certain cases, however, the parameters of the ports need to be modified. 7.3 Configuring Ethernet Ports The Ethernet ports contain the internal Ethernet ports and external Ethernet ports. The external Ethernet ports are the physical ports that are used to connect the Ethernet equipment. The internal Ethernet ports (VCTRUNKs) are internal paths that implement Ethernet over SDH. 7.4 Disabling an Ethernet Port It is recommended that you disable an unused Ethernet port to suppress the reporting of the alarms related to the port. 7.5 Configuring a Service Load Indication There are two service load indications, which are Non-Loaded and Load. If a path is configured with services and carries real services, set Service Load Indication to Load. If a path is configured with services but does not carry real services, set Service Load Indication to NonLoaded to suppress the reporting of certain alarms.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-1
7.1 Checking Board Parameters

To learn about board parameter status, you can check board parameters. Before actual configuration operations in networking, you need to check board parameters, to make sure that the board parameter status meets the requirements of actual networking.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding navigation path and check the related board parameters. 1. Check SDH board parameters. For the SDH board parameters, see Table 7-1. Table 7-1 SDH board parameters Board Type SDH Parameter Laser Switch Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select a board. b. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (channel) and select Port from the drop-down list. Application Scenario When configuring services on an optical interface of a board, enable this parameter. l Non-loopback: It is a normal state. When the equipment runs normally, set this parameter to non-loopback. l Inloop: The loop is performed toward the local NE. l Outloop: The loop is performed toward the opposite NE. Inloop and outloop of an optical interface affect services. They are used to locate faults. 2. Check PDH board parameters. For the PDH board parameters, see Table 7-2.
Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopback
7-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Table 7-2 PDH board parameters Boar d Type Paramet er Tributary Loopback Navigation Path Application Scenario l Non-loopback: It is a normal state. When the equipment runs normally, set this parameter to non-loopback. l Inloop: When input service signals reach the tributary board of the target NE, the signals revert to the original trail. This function is used to locate faults of each service path. l Outloop: When input service signals reach the tributary board through the input port of the local NE, the signals are looped back directly to the service output end. l Non-loaded: The service path does not process the services that are carried, to suppress alarms in non-loaded service paths. l Load: The service path processes the services that are carried. In the case of a tributary board that has services, set this parameter to Load. Normal, Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock, Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock Default: Normal Sets the retiming mode of the board. The default value is usually selected.
PDH
Service Load Indication
Retiming Mode
a. In the NE Explorer, select a board. b. Choose Configuratio n > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (channel) and select Port from the drop-down list.
3.
Check RTN board parameters. For the RTN board parameters, see Table 7-3. Table 7-3 RTN board parameters Boar d Type Paramet er Radio Work Mode RTN Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select a board. b. Choose Configuratio n > IF Interface from the Application Scenario Specifies the microwave working mode. Its formats are service capacity, working bandwidth and modulation mode. The transmit end and the receive end must have the same settings of the microwave working mode. Radio Link ID: 1 to 4094
Radio Link ID
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-3
Boar d Type
Paramet er IF Port Loopback
Navigation Path Function Tree. c. Click By Board/Port (channel) and select Port from the drop-down list.
Application Scenario Sets the loopback status of an intermediate frequency interface on the equipment. Non-Loopback refers to the normal status. It is not required to set loopback during normal equipment operation. Outloop means that the input signal passes through the ingress port and reaches the intermediate frequency board at the local NE and then is directly loopbacked to the service egress end. Inloop means that the input signal returns from the intermediate frequency board of the destination NE along the original trail. This function is usually used to locate faults for various IF interfaces. Performing loopback on an intermediate frequency interface is a diagnosis function which may affect services of related ports. Exercise caution before performing this function.
2M Wayside Enable Status ATPC Enable Status
Enables or disables a 2 Mbit/s bypath service. This parameter is available only when you set Radio Work Mode to STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM. When the ATPC is enabled, according to the current receive power of the ODU and the set ATPC thresholds, the ATPC module inserts the ATPC overhead. According to the ATPC overhead, the opposite ODU adjusts the transmit power. When the ATPC is disabled, the ATPC module does not insert any ATPC overhead.
4.
Check data board parameters. For the data board parameters, see Table 7-4. Table 7-4 Data board parameters Boar d Type Ethern et Parame ter Enabled/ Disabled Navigation Path a. In the NE Explorer, select a board. b. Choose Configuration > Application Scenario
When configuring Ethernet board port services, set the port to Enabled.
7-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Boar d Type
Parame ter Working Mode Maximu m Frame Length
Navigation Path Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click External Port. d. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
Application Scenario Set the working mode of Ethernet ports according to networking configuration requirements. When a packet exceeds the maximum frame length that is set, the packet is discarded. Alternatively, the packet length is minimized to satisfy the specified frame length. By default, the value is set to 1522, unless otherwise specified. l Non-loopback: It is a normal state. When the equipment runs normally, set this parameter to non-loopback. l Inloop: Inside the equipment, services from the cross-connect side are looped back to the cross-connect side. This operation affects services configured on ports and is used to locate faults.
MAC Loopbac k
PHY Loopbac k
l Non-loopback: It is a normal state. When the equipment runs normally, set this parameter to non-loopback. l Inloop: Inside the equipment, services from the cross-connect side are looped back to the cross-connect side. This operation affects services configured on ports and is used to locate faults.
TAG a. In the NE Explorer, select a board. b. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. c. Click External Port. d. Click the TAG Attributes tab.
l Tag Aware: If the client-side equipment sends tag packets, set the TAG attribute of external ports to Tag Aware. l Access: If the client-side equipment sends untag packets, set the TAG attribute of external ports to Access. l Hybrid: If the client-side equipment sends tag and untag packets, set the TAG attribute of external ports to Hybrid. This parameter is used to identify tags in data packets. During the configuration of VLAN services, set this parameter to Enabled.
Entry Detectio n
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-5
Step 2 Modify board parameters according to service planning and actual board configurations. ----End
7.2 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports

This topic describes how to set the parameters of various ports. Normally, the default values of the parameters are adopted to meet the relevant requirements. In certain cases, however, the parameters of the ports need to be modified. 7.2.1 Configuring the Parameters of SDH Interfaces This section describes how to set the parameters of SDH interfaces, including loopback of the SDH interface board and the enabling/disabling of the lasers at the SDH optical ports. 7.2.2 Configuring the Parameters of PDH Interfaces When the IDU 610/620 is used, you can set the loopback status and service loading indication of the tributary boards, by performing the operations. In the case of the E1 interface board, you can also set the tributary retiming function. In the case of the E3/T3 interface board, you can also set the service type and signal equalization. When the IDU 605 is used, you can set the path usage status, tributary loopback status, and path impedance, by performing the operations. 7.2.3 Setting the Parameters of IF Ports This topic describes how to configure the parameters of IF ports, including the IF attributes and ATPC attributes of the IF boards. 7.2.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports This section describes how to set the parameters of ODU ports, including the RF attributes, power attributes, and advanced attributes of the ODU.
7.2.1 Configuring the Parameters of SDH Interfaces

This section describes how to set the parameters of SDH interfaces, including loopback of the SDH interface board and the enabling/disabling of the lasers at the SDH optical ports.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The required SDH interface boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Channel) (default option of the system). Step 3 Select Port from the dropdown list and set the parameters of the SDH interface board.
7-6
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Step 4 Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed and click OK. Step 5 Select VC4 Channel from the dropdown list. Step 6 Configure VC-4 path loopback.
Step 7 Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed and click OK. ----End
Parameters
Parameter Laser Switcha Value Open, Close Default Value Open Description l This parameter indicates whether the laser is enabled to receive/transmit optical signals. l Normally, this parameter takes the default value. Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Non-Loopback l Optical (electrical) inloop indicates that loopback occurs in the SDH optical (electrical) signals to be transmitted to the opposite end. l Optical (electrical) outloop indicates that loopback occurs in the SDH optical (electrical) signals to be received. l Normally, this parameter takes the default value.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-7
Parameter VC4 Loopback
Value Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop
Default Value Non-Loopback
Description l VC-4 path inloop indicates that loopback occurs in the VC-4 signals to be transmitted to the opposite end. l VC-4 path outloop indicates that loopback occurs in the VC-4 signals to be received. l Normally, this parameter takes the default value.
NOTE
a: Only SDH optical interface boards support this parameter.
7.2.2 Configuring the Parameters of PDH Interfaces

When the IDU 610/620 is used, you can set the loopback status and service loading indication of the tributary boards, by performing the operations. In the case of the E1 interface board, you can also set the tributary retiming function. In the case of the E3/T3 interface board, you can also set the service type and signal equalization. When the IDU 605 is used, you can set the path usage status, tributary loopback status, and path impedance, by performing the operations.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The required PDH interface boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the PDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Channel) (default value). Step 3 Select Port from the drop-down list, Set the parameters of the PDH interface.
Step 4 Select Port from the drop-down list, Set the parameters of the PDH interfaces according to the types of the PDH interfaces. l Set the parameters of the PDH interfaces on the E1 interface board.
l Set the parameters of the PDH interface on the E3/T3 interface board.
Step 5 Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed and click OK. ----End
Parameters
Parameter Tributary Loopback Value Range Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default Value Non-Loopback Description l Tributary inloop indicates that loopback occurs in the tributary signals to be transmitted to the remote end. l Tributary outloop indicates that loopback occurs in the tributary signals to be received. l Generally, this parameter takes the default value. Path Impedance Service Load Indication 75 ohms, 120 ohms Load, Non-Loaded 75 ohms Load Generally, this parameter takes the default value. l This parameter is valid for the tributary ports that are configured with services. l When this parameter is set to Load, the board detects whether alarms exist in this path. l When this parameter is set to NonLoaded, the board does not detect whether alarms exist in this path. l Generally, this parameter takes the default value.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-9
Parameter Retiming Modea
Value Range Normal, Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock, Retiming Mode of CrossConnect Clock
Default Value Normal
Description l By using the retiming function, the retiming reference signal from the SDH network and the service data signal are combined and then sent to the client equipment, thus decreasing the output jitter in the signal. In this way, the retiming function ensures that the service code flow can normally transfer the retiming reference signal. l When this parameter is set to Normal, the retiming function is not used. l When this parameter is set to Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming function is used with the clock of the upstream tributary unit traced. l When this parameter is set to Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock, the retiming function is used with the clock of the cross-connect unit traced. l It is recommended that the external clock, instead of the retiming function, is used to provide an external clock for the client equipment. l If the retiming function is required, it is recommended that you adopt Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock.
Port Service Typeb
E3, T3
E3
l This parameter indicates the type of the services the tributary board processes. l Set this parameter according to the type of the accessed services.
Input Signal Equalizationb
Unequalized, Equalized
Unequalized
l This parameter is valid only when Service Type is set to T3. l This parameter indicates whether the input signals are equalized. l If the trunk cable exceeds 70 m, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Equalized. Otherwise, adopt the default value.
7-10
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Output Signal Equalizationb
Value Range Unequalized, Equalized
Default Value Unequalized
Description l This parameter is valid only when Service Type is set to T3. l This parameter indicates whether the output signals are equalized. l If the trunk cable exceeds 70 m, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Equalized. Otherwise, adopt the default value.
NOTE
l a: Only E1 interface boards support this parameter. l b: Only E3/T3 interface boards support the parameters.
7.2.3 Setting the Parameters of IF Ports

This topic describes how to configure the parameters of IF ports, including the IF attributes and ATPC attributes of the IF boards.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The required IF boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the IF board from the Object Tree. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF Attributes tab. Step 3 Set each parameter for the IF attributes.
NOTE
The IFH1 board of the IDU 605 1F/2F does not support the setting of the Radio Work Mode. The IFH2 board of the IDU 620 does not support the setting of the Radio Work Mode.
Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click the ATPC Attributes tab. Step 6 Set each parameter for the ATPC attributes.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-11

NOTE
The IF0 board of the IDU 605 1A/1B/2B does not support the ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status.
7-12
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameters
Parameter Radio Work Mode Value Range l In the case of the IDU 610/620, the value range is as follows: 1,4E1,7MHz,QP SK 2,4E1,3.5MHz, 16QAM 3,8E1,14MHz,Q PSK 4,8E1,7MHz, 16QAM 5,16E1,28MHz, QPSK 6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 7,STM-1,28MH z,128QAM 8,E3,28MHz,QP SK 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM 10,22E1,14MHz ,32QAM 11,26E1,14MHz ,64QAM 12,32E1,14MHz ,128QAM 13,35E1,28MHz ,16QAM 14,44E1,28MHz ,32QAM 15,53E1,28MHz ,64QAM 16,5E1,7MHz,Q PSK 17,10E1,14MHz ,QPSK 18,2E1,3.5MHz, QPSK l In the case of the IDU 605 1A/1B/ 2B, the value
Default Value 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK (IF1A/B) 5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK (IF0A/B) 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM (IFX) 5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK (IF0)
Description l This parameter indicates the radio work mode in "work mode, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format. l The IF1A/B board supports radio work modes 1 to 15. The IF0A/B board supports radio work modes 5, 16, 17, and 18. The IFX board supports radio work mode 7 only. l The IFH1 board of the IDU 605 1F/2F does not support the setting of the Radio Work Mode. l The IFH2 board of the IDU 620 does not support the setting of the Radio Work Mode. l Set this parameter according to the network planning. The radio work modes of the IF boards at both the radio link must be the same.
Parameter
Value Range range is as follows: 5,16E1,28MHz, QPSK 16,5E1,7MHz,Q PSK 17,10E1,14MHz ,QPSK 18,2E1,3.5MHz, QPSK
Default Value
Description
Radio Link ID
1 to 4094
l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to avoid misconnection of radio links between sites. l If this parameter is different from Received Link ID, the NE reports the MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS into the downstream. l Set this parameter according to the planning. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique Link ID, and the Link IDs at both the ends of a radio link should be the same.
IF Port Loopbacka
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop
Non-Loopback
l IF port inloop indicates that loopback occurs in the IF signals to be transmitted to the remote end. l IF port outloop indicates that loopback occurs in the IF signals to be received. l Generally, this parameter takes the default value.
7-14
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter 2M Wayside Enable Statusb
Value Range Enabled, Disabled
Default Value Disabled
Description l In the case of the IFX board, this parameter is valid only when Radio Work Mode is set to 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM. l In the case of the IF1A/B board, this parameter is valid only when Radio Work Mode is set to 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,16QAM. l This parameter indicates whether the radio link transmits the wayside E1 service. l The wayside E1 service is a 2.048 kbit/s service that is transmitted by the microwave frame overhead. The IDU 610/620 accesses the wayside E1 service through the external clock interface on the PXC board.
2M Wayside Input Boardb
1, 3
l This parameter is valid only when 2M Wayside Enable Status is set to Enabled. l This parameter indicates the slot in which the PXC board accesses the wayside E1 service through the external clock port.
XPIC Enablec
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates whether the XPIC function is enabled. l If the IF board does not use the XPIC function, set this parameter to Disabled. In this case, use the XPIC cable to perform self-loop at the XPIC port.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-15
Parameter ATPC Enable Statusd
Description l This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the TX power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the RX level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled in areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission. l To ensure that the TX power does not change during the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled. After the commissioning is complete, you can set this parameter to another value.
ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm)d ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm)d
-20 dBm to -75 dBm -35 dBm to -90 dBm
-45 dBm -70dBm
l Set the central value of the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold so that the central value is equal to the required value of the receive power. l Ensure that the difference between values of the automatic ATPC upper threshold and the automatic ATPC lower threshold is not less than 5 dB. l This parameter sets whether to enable the ATPC. The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range. l When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATP upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board. l When the function is disabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are used. l The IF0 board of the IDU 605 1A/1B/2B does not support the ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status.
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
7-16
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
l a: The IFH2 and IFX boards do not support the loopback on the IF ports. l b: The IFH2 and IF0A/B boards do not support wayside E1 services. l c: The IFH2, IF0A/B, and IF1A/B boards do not support the XPIC function. l d: The ATPC attributes need to be set to the same values at both ends of a radio link.
7.2.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports

This section describes how to set the parameters of ODU ports, including the RF attributes, power attributes, and advanced attributes of the ODU.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The required IF boards must be added. The corresponding ODU must be added in the slot layout diagram.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab. Step 3 Configure the TX frequency and T/R spacing.
Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click the Power Attributes tab. Step 6 Configure the transmit power and receive power of the ODU.
Step 7 Click Apply. Step 8 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 9 Set Configure Transmission Status.

Parameters
Parameter Transmit Frequency (MHz) Value Range Default Value Description l The parameter specifies the channel center frequency. l This parameter cannot be set to a value that is less than the minimum Transmit frequency supported by the ODU + 50% channel spacing or more than the maximum Transmit frequency supported by the ODU - 50% channel spacing. l The difference between the Transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link is a T/R spacing. l Set this parameter according to the planning. Maximum Transmit Power (dBm) l This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the rated power range supported by the ODU. l Set this parameter to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset value. The maximum transmit power adjusted by ATPC should not exceed this value. l Set this parameter according to the planning. Transmit Power (dBm) l This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range supported by the ODU. l The Transmit power of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link. l Set this parameter according to the planning.
7-18
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Receive Power (dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU exceeds the range of receive power3 dB, the ODU LED of the IF board connected to the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l Set this parameter according to the planning.
T/R Spacing (MHz)
0-4294967.295
l This parameter indicates the spacing between the TX power and receive power of the ODU. If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the TX power is one T/R spacing higher than the receive power. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the TX power is one T/R spacing lower than the receive power. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.
Configure Transmission Status
mute, unmute
unmute
l When this parameter is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but the ODU can normally receive microwave signals. l When this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU can normally receive and transmit microwave signals. l Generally, this parameter takes the default value.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-19
7.3 Configuring Ethernet Ports

The Ethernet ports contain the internal Ethernet ports and external Ethernet ports. The external Ethernet ports are the physical ports that are used to connect the Ethernet equipment. The internal Ethernet ports (VCTRUNKs) are internal paths that implement Ethernet over SDH. 7.3.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports When an NE uses the external ports (that is, PORTs) of the Ethernet boards to access Ethernet services, the attributes of the external ports need to be configured so that the external ports can work with the data communication equipment on the client side to provide the normal access to the Ethernet services. 7.3.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board When an NE transmits Ethernet services to a line through an internal port (that is, VCTRUNK) of an Ethernet board, the attributes of the internal port need to be set. Thus, the Ethernet board works with the Ethernet board on the opposite side to realize the transmission of the Ethernet services in the network. 7.3.3 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames By default, the type field of Jumbo frames processed by Ethernet boards is set to "0x8700". 7.3.4 Modifying the Type Field of QinQ Frames By default, the type field (that is, the TPID in an S-TAG) of QinQ frames processed by Ethernet switching boards is set to "0x8100". 7.3.5 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK Bandwidth When the LCAS function is enabled on an NE, you can dynamically increase or decrease the VCTRUNK-bound paths to increase or decrease the bandwidth. The operation does not affect services.
7.3.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports

When an NE uses the external ports (that is, PORTs) of the Ethernet boards to access Ethernet services, the attributes of the external ports need to be configured so that the external ports can work with the data communication equipment on the client side to provide the normal access to the Ethernet services.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet board must be included in the NE Panel.
Precautions
l The IDU 610 supports the Ethernet board EFT4. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet boards EFT4 and EMS6. Ethernet ports FE1-FE4 of an EFT4 board correspond to PORT1-PORT4 respectively. The EFT4 board does not support the setting of TAG attributes, network attributes, and advanced attributes. Ethernet ports FE1-FE4 of an EMS6 board correspond to PORT1-PORT4 respectively. Ports GE1 and GE2 of an EMS6 board correspond to PORT5 and PORT6 respectively.
The IDU 605 IF/2F supports the Ethernet board EMS4 (a logical board). Ethernet ports FE1-FE3 of an EMS4 board (a logical board) correspond to PORT1PORT3 respectively. Port FE4/GE1 of an EMS4 board corresponds to PORT4. Ethernet ports FE1-FE2 of an EM4T board correspond to PORT1-PORT2 respectively. Ports GE1 and GE2 of an EM4T board corresponds to PORT3 and PORT4 respectively.
The following procedures describe how to configure the external port of an EMS6 board. The EFT4 board does not support the configuration of the TAG attributes, network attributes, and advanced attributes. The Hybrid IF board (IFH2) provides the GE port for accessing Ethernet services and it supports certain Ethernet service access functions. The procedure for configuring the Ethernet port of the IFH2 board is similar to the procedure for configuring the external Ethernet port. The IFH2 board, however, supports the configuration of only the basic attributes and flow control function.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port.
NOTE
If you need to configure the attributes of the Ethernet port on the IFH2 board, select the IFH2 board in the NE Explorer.
Step 2 Set the basic attributes of the port. 1. 2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set the basic attributes of the port.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 3 Set the flow control mode of the port. 1. 2. Click the Flow Control tab. Set the flow control mode of the port.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 4 Optional: Set the TAG attributes of the port. 1. 2. Click the TAG Attributes tab. Set the TAG attributes of the port.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-21
3. 1. 2.
Click Apply. Click the Network Attributes tab. Set the network attributes of the port.
Step 5 Optional: Set the network attributes of the port.
3. 1. 2.
Click Apply. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Set the advanced attributes of the port.
Step 6 Optional: Set the advanced attributes of the port.
3.
Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Parameter Enabled/Disabled Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled Description l In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled. In the case of other ports, set this parameter to Disabled. l If this parameter is set to Enabled for the port that does not access services, an ETH_LOS alarm may be generated.
7-22
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Working Mode
Value Range 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation (EFT4) 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M FullDuplex, AutoNegotiation (EMS6) Auto-Negotiation, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex (IFH2) 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation (a logical board EMS4, PORT1-PORT3) 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M FullDuplex, AutoNegotiation (a logical board EMS4, PORT4)
Default Value Auto-Negotiation
Description l The Ethernet ports of different types support different working modes. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in the auto-negotiation mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to Auto-Negotiation. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in the full-duplex mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, or 1000M Full-Duplex depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in the half-duplex mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Half-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, or Auto-Negotiation depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l The GE optical interface on the EMS6 board supports the 1000M full-duplex mode only.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-23
Parameter Maximum Frame Length
Value Range 1518-1535 (EFT4) 1518-9600 (EMS6) 1522/1632 (a logical board EMS4)
Default Value 1522
Description The value of this parameter should be greater than the maximum length of a frame among all the data frames to be transported. In the case of the EFT4 board, this parameter is invalid for Jumbo frames. In the case of the EMS6 board, this parameter has a restriction on Jumbo frames. If Jumbo frames are not considered and the accessed services are ordinary Ethernet frames that use VLAN tags or do not have VLAN tags, it is recommended that you use the default value. If the access services include services that use double tags such as QinQ services, it is recommended that you set this parameter to 1526. In the case of the IDU 605 1F/2F, set Maximum Frame Length of all the ports on the logical EMS4 board to the same value.
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop
Non-Loopback
l When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet frame signals that are to be sent to the remote end are looped back. l In normal cases, use the default value.
PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback
l When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet physical signals that are to be sent to the remote end are looped back. l In normal cases, use the default value.
7-24
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode
Value Range Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only (EFT4 and EMS6) Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control (IFH2) Disabled, Enable (a logical board EMS4)
Description l This parameter is used when Working Mode is not set to Auto-Negotiation. l When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric Flow Control, the port can send PAUSE frames and process received PAUSE frames. l When this parameter is set to Send Only, the port can send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process received PAUSE frames. l When this parameter is set to Receive Only, the port can process received PAUSE frames but cannot send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion. l When this parameter is set to Enable for the logical EMS4 board, the port can send PAUSE frames and process received PAUSE frames. l The non-autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the local side must match the non-autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-25
Parameter Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
Value Range Disabled, Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control (EFT4 and EMS6) Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control (IFH2) Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control (a logical board EMS4)
Description l This parameter is used when Working Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation. l When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric Flow Control, the port can send and process PAUSE frames. l When this parameter is set to Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port can send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process received PAUSE frames. l When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port can perform as follows: Sends and processes PAUSE frames. Sends but does not process PAUSE frames. Processes but does not send PAUSE frames. l The autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the local side must match the autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side.
Entry Detection
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter specifies whether to check the incoming packets from the port according to the TAG attributes. l Set this parameter according to actual situations.
TAG
Access, Tag Aware, Hybrid
Tag Aware
l When ports are configured with TAG flags, the ports process frames by using the methods provided in Table 7-5. l If all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set this parameter to Tag Aware. l If all the accessed services are frames that do not have the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set this parameter to Access. l When the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set this parameter to Hybrid.
7-26
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Default VLAN ID
Value Range 1 to 4095
Default Value 1
Description l This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l For using this parameter, see Table 7-5. l Set this parameter according to actual situations.
VLAN Priority
0 to 7
l This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l For using this parameter, see Table 7-5. l When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, set this parameter according to actual situations. Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Port Attributes
UNI, C-Aware, SAware
UNI
l When this parameter is set to UNI, the port processes data frames according to the tag attributes. l When this parameter is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the port does not process data frames according to the tag attributes but processes the data frames according to the way of processing QinQ services. l In the case of QinQ services, set this parameter to the default value because the NE automatically sets network attributes according to the operation type that is set when the QinQ services are created.
Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to restrict the traffic of broadcast packets according to the ratio of the broadcast packets to the total packets. When a broadcast storm may occur in the equipment on the opposite side, set this parameter to Enabled. The port discards the received broadcast packets when the ratio of the received broadcast packets to the total packets exceeds the value of this parameter. The value of this parameter should be greater than the ratio of the broadcast packets to the total packets when the broadcast storm does not occur. Generally, set this parameter to 30% or a greater value.
Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
10% to 100%
30%
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-27
Parameter Loop Detection
Value Range Disabled, Enabled
Description Sets whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists at the port. Sets whether to enable the loop port shutdown function. After the loop port shutdown function is enabled, the port is automatically shut down when a self-loop is detected. It is recommended that this parameter adopts the default value.
Loop Port Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Enabled
Table 7-5 Methods used by ports to process data frames Direction Type of Data Frame Tagged frame Untagged frame How to Process Tag aware The port receives the frame. The port discards the frame. Access The port discards the frame. The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame, and receives the frame. The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. Hybrida The port receives the frame. The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame, and receives the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is Default VLAN ID, the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is not Default VLAN ID, the port directly transmits the frame.
Ingress
Egress
Tagged frame
The port transmits the frame.
7-28
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
a: When the TAG attribute of a port on the EMS4 board (a logical board) that is supported by the IDU 605 1F/2F is set to Hybrid, the packet that is forwarded by this port remains the same as the packet that enters the bridge.
7.3.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board

When an NE transmits Ethernet services to a line through an internal port (that is, VCTRUNK) of an Ethernet board, the attributes of the internal port need to be set. Thus, the Ethernet board works with the Ethernet board on the opposite side to realize the transmission of the Ethernet services in the network.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet board must be included in the slot layout.
Precautions
The IDU 610 supports the Ethernet board EFT4. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet boards EFT4 and EMS6. l l The EFT4 board supports VCTRUNKs 1-4, which are bound with PORTs 1-4 respectively. The EFT4 board does not support the setting of TAG attributes and network attributes. The EMS6 board supports VCTRUNKs 1-8. VCTRUNKs 1-8 determine the services to be transmitted depending on information of the created Ethernet services.
The following procedures describe how to configure the internal port of an EMS6 board. The EFT4 board does not support the configuration of the TAG attributes and network attributes.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Choose Internal Port. Step 2 Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port. 1. 2. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters.
3. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Click Apply. Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration. The system displays the Bound Path Configuration dialog box. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the port to be configured. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths.
Step 3 Set the VC paths to be bound with the port.
5. 6. 7.
Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click Optional: Repeat Step 3.5 and bind other VCTRUNKs. Click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 4 Configure the LCAS function for the port. 1. 2. Click the LCAS tab. Set the Enabling LCAS parameter and other LCAS parameters.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 5 Optional: Set the TAG attributes of the port. 1. 2. Click the TAG Attributes tab. Set the TAG attributes of the port.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 6 Optional: Set the network attributes of the port. 1. 2.

7-30
Click the Network Attributes tab. Set the network attributes of the port.
3.
Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Parameter Mapping Protocol Scramble Value Range GFP, LAPS, HDLC Unscrambled, Scrambling Mode [X43+1], Scrambling Mode [X48+1] Yes, No Default Value GFP Scrambling Mode [X43+1] Description It is recommended that you use the default value. l This parameter specifies the scrambling polynomial used by the mapping protocol. l It is recommended that you use the default value. Yes l This parameter is valid only when Mapping Protocol is set to LAPS or HDLC. l When this parameter is set to Yes, the FCS is the result after you perform a negation operation for the CRC. l When this parameter is set to No, the FCS is the CRC. Check Field Length FCS32, FCS16, No FCS32 l When this parameter is set to FCS32, a 32-bit FCS is used. l When this parameter is set to FCS16, a 16-bit FCS is used. l When the Ethernet board uses the GFP mapping protocol, this parameter can be set to FCS32, FCS16, or No. l When the Ethernet board uses the HDLC mapping protocol, this parameter can be set to FCS32 or FCS16. l When the Ethernet board uses the LAPS mapping protocol, this parameter can be set to FCS32 or FCS16. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Set Inverse Value for CRC
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-31
Parameter FCS Calculated Bit Sequence
Value Range Big endian, Little endian
Default Value l Big endian (GFP) l Little endian (LAPS or HDLC)
Description l When this parameter is set to Big endian, the least significant byte of the FCS is placed first and the most significant byte is placed last. l When this parameter is set to Little endian, the most significant byte of the FCS is placed first and the least significant byte is placed last. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Extension Header Option
No, Yes
No
l This parameter specifies whether the GFP payload header contains the extension header and eHEC. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Configurable Ports Available Bound Paths
VCTRUNKs -
VCTRUNK 1 -
This parameter specifies the VCTRUNK whose VC paths are to be configured. Adhere to the following principles to plan and set this parameter: l The capacity of VCTRUNKs should be determined by the actual bandwidth required by services. l Bind only the paths in a VC-4 for a VCTRUNK if possible. If the paths in several VC-4s need to be bound, the VC-4s that have the same transmission path take priority. l Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can have only VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths. Hence, when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths, select VC-3 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-3 paths are already bound. When a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-12 paths, select VC-12 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-12 paths are already bound. l Give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1 if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths because the VC-4-1s of the EFT4 board and EMS6 board support only VC-3 paths whereas the VC-4-2s support both VC-12 paths and VC-3 paths. l Generally, bidirectional paths are bound.
7-32
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Enabling LCAS
Description l This parameter specifies whether the LCAS function is enabled. l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.
LCAS Mode
Huawei Mode, Standard Mode
Huawei Mode
l This parameter specifies the sequence in which the LCAS sink sends the MST control packet and Rs-Ack control packet. l When this parameter is set to Huawei Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the RsAck and then sends the MST. l When this parameter is set to Standard Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the MST and then sends the Rs-Ack. l If the equipment on the opposite side is the third-party equipment and does not support the Huawei mode, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Standard Mode. Otherwise, set this parameter to Huawei Mode.
Hold Off Time (ms)
0, any integer that ranges from 2000 to 10000 and has a step of 100
2000
l When a member link is faulty, the LCAS performs switching after a delay of time to prevent the situation where an NE simultaneously performs a protection switching such as SNCP and performs an LCAS switching. This parameter specifies the duration of the delay. l If the paths of the VCTRUNK are configured with protection, it is recommended that you set this parameter to 2000 ms. Otherwise, set this parameter to 0.
WTR Time(s)
0 to 720
300
l When the time after a member link is restored to normal reaches the set value of this parameter, the VCG uses the restored member link. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-33
Parameter TSD
Description l This parameter specifies whether the TSD is used as a condition for determining whether a member link is faulty. In the case of the VC-12, the TSD refers to the BIP_SD. In the case of the VC-3, the TSD refers to the B3_SD_VC3. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Entry Detection
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
TAG
Tag Aware
Default VLAN ID
1 to 4095
l This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l For using this parameter, see Table 7-6. l Set this parameter according to actual situations.
VLAN Priority
0 to 7
7-34
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Port Attributes
Value Range UNI, C-Aware, SAware
Default Value UNI
Description l When this parameter is set to UNI, the port processes data frames according to the tag attributes. l When this parameter is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the port does not process data frames according to the tag attributes but processes the data frames according to the way of processing QinQ services. l In the case of QinQ services, set this parameter to the default value because the NE automatically sets network attributes according to the operation type that is set when the QinQ services are created.
Activation Status
Activated, Inactivated
Displays whether the VCTRUNK is activated.
NOTE
l The Mapping Protocol and protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at one end of a transmission line must be the same as the Mapping Protocol and protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at the other end of the transmission line. l The Enabling LCAS and LCAS protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at one end of a transmission line must be the same as the Enabling LCAS and LCAS protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at the other end of the transmission line. l The timeslots to which the paths bound with a VCTRUNK correspond must be the same at both ends of a transmission line.
Table 7-6 Methods used by ports to process data frames Direction Type of Data Frame Tagged frame Untagged frame How to Process Tag Aware The port receives the frame. The port discards the frame. Access The port discards the frame. The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame, and receives the frame. Hybrid The port receives the frame. The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame, and receives the frame.
Ingress
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-35
Direction
Type of Data Frame Tagged frame
How to Process Tag Aware The port transmits the frame. Access The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. Hybrid l If the VLAN ID in the frame is Default VLAN ID, the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is not Default VLAN ID, the port directly transmits the frame.
Egress
7.3.3 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames

By default, the type field of Jumbo frames processed by Ethernet boards is set to "0x8700".
Prerequisite
Precautions
The EMS6 board supports the modification of the type field of Jumbo frames.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Jumbo Frame from the Function Tree. Step 2 Modify the type field of Jumbo frames.

Parameters
Parameter Jumbo Frame Value Range 00 00 to FF FF Default Value 88 70 Description This parameter specifies the type field of Jumbo frames. Set this parameter according to the type field of the accessed Jumbo frames.
7.3.4 Modifying the Type Field of QinQ Frames

By default, the type field (that is, the TPID in an S-TAG) of QinQ frames processed by Ethernet switching boards is set to "0x8100".
Prerequisite
Precautions
The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Advanced Attributes > QinQ Type Area Settings from the Function Tree. Step 2 Modify the type field of QinQ frames.
Parameters
Parameter QinQ Type Area (Hexadecimal) Value Range 81 00, 98 A8, 91 00 Default Value 81 00 Description This parameter specifies the type field of QinQ frames. Set this parameter according to the type field of the accessed QinQ frames.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-37
7.3.5 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK Bandwidth

When the LCAS function is enabled on an NE, you can dynamically increase or decrease the VCTRUNK-bound paths to increase or decrease the bandwidth. The operation does not affect services.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal Port. Step 2 Click the Bound Path tab. Step 3 Click Configuration. The system displays the Bound Path Configuration dialog box. Step 4 Optional: Dynamically increase the VCTRUNK bandwidth. 1. 2. 3. 4. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. Select desired items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click Optional: Repeat Step 4.3 and bind other VC paths. .
Step 5 Optional: Dynamically decrease the VCTRUNK bandwidth. 1. 2.

7-38
Do not select the Display in Combination check box. Select the VC paths to be deleted in Selected Bound Paths and click
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3.
Optional: Repeat Step 5.2 to delete other VC paths.
Parameters
For specific parameters, see 7.3.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board.
7.4 Disabling an Ethernet Port

It is recommended that you disable an unused Ethernet port to suppress the reporting of the alarms related to the port.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. There must be no service at the Ethernet port to be disabled.
Context
CAUTION
Disabling an Ethernet port may interrupt services.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the External Port option button. Step 3 Click the Basic Attributes tab. Double-click Enabled/Disabled of the port to be disabled and select Disabled.
Step 4 Click Apply. In the Prompt dialog box, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. ----End
7.5 Configuring a Service Load Indication

There are two service load indications, which are Non-Loaded and Load. If a path is configured with services and carries real services, set Service Load Indication to Load. If a path is configured with services but does not carry real services, set Service Load Indication to NonLoaded to suppress the reporting of certain alarms.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
If you set the service load indication to Non-Loaded, the services may be interrupted or you may fail to log in to certain NEs.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Panel, select a board, right-click, and choose Service Load Indication from the shortcut menu. Step 2 Double-click Service Load Indication of the corresponding path, and select Load or NonLoaded. Step 3 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
NOTE
If you select Non-Loaded, you need not click OK in the Confirm dialog box.
----End
Postrequisite
In the case of a path that is configured with services but does not carry real services, if you set Service Load Indication to Non-Loaded, you need to change the value of Service Load Indication to Load at both ends of the services after the path carries real services in the future.
7-40
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Configuring Interfaces (RTN 900)
About This Chapter

This section describes how to set the interface attributes of the boards. 8.1 Configuring SDH Interfaces This section describes how to set the attributes of SDH interfaces. The attributes of SDH interfaces include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes and advanced attributes. 8.2 Configuring PDH Interfaces This section describes how to set the attributes of PDH interfaces. In a PSN network, the PDH interfaces can be used to carry TDM signals, IMA signals, or tunnels, depending on different settings of the interface attributes. The attributes of a PDH interface include the general attributes, layer 2 attributes, layer 3 attributes and advanced attributes. 8.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces This section describes how to set the attributes of Ethernet interfaces. In a PSN network, the Ethernet interfaces can be used to carry Ethernet packets or tunnels, depending on different settings of the interface attributes. The attributes of the Ethernet interface include the general attributes, Layer 3 attributes, advanced attributes and flow control. 8.4 Configuring Microwave Interfaces This section describes how to configure the IF 1+1 protection of the IF board, the IF/ODU information of the radio link, microwave interface attributes, and ODU interface parameters. 8.5 Configuring Serial Interfaces This topic describes how to set the attributes of serial interfaces. 8.6 Configuring ML-PPP This section describes how to configure Multilink PPP (MP) group. MP is a technology used to bind multiple PPP links to increase the bandwidth. MP is applied to the interface that supports PPP. MP supports fragmented packets. The fragmented packets are transmitted on multiple PPP links in the MP group to the same destination. 8.7 Configuring an Ethernet Virtual Interface This section describes how to configure an Ethernet virtual interface. After you configure the Ethernet virtual interface, the NE can process ATM AAL5-encapsulated or VLAN-encapsulated
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
8-1
Ethernet packets. The Ethernet virtual interface attributes include general attributes and layer 3 attributes. 8.8 Configuring an IMA Group When the RTN equipment accesses IMA services, configure an ATM IMA group at the access node.
8-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
8.1 Configuring SDH Interfaces

This section describes how to set the attributes of SDH interfaces. The attributes of SDH interfaces include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes and advanced attributes. 8.1.1 Setting the General Attributes of SDH Interfaces The general attributes of an SDH interface define the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum data packet length. 8.1.2 Setting the Advanced Attributes of SDH Interfaces The routine maintenance parameters can be set by setting the advanced attributes of SDH interfaces. 8.1.3 Querying the Running Status of PPP In the case of a network failure, you can query the running status of the PPP to analyze the cause of the failure. 8.1.4 Resetting the PPP In the case of a network failure, you can reset the PPP to enable the PPP ports on the two ends of a link to re-negotiate.
8.1.1 Setting the General Attributes of SDH Interfaces

The general attributes of an SDH interface define the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum data packet length.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the desired board. Step 3 Set the parameters as required.
NOTE
Note the following issues during parameter settings: l When Port Mode is set to Layer 1, Encapsulation Type does not support the settings. In this case, channelized STM-N services can be accessed. l When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type supports ATM only. In this case, ATM services can be accessed. l If you set Port Mode to Layer 3, select Null or PPP for Encapsulation Type. If you select Null, the interface does not enable the PPP, and thus the equipment bears less load. If you select PPP, the interface can access the MPLS or IP service. l In the case an NNI interface,Max Data Packet Size(byte) must be larger than 960. A DCN packet contains a maximum of 960 bytes. If Max Data Packet Size(byte) is smaller than 960, the DCN packets in the receive direction may be lost.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
8-3
Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End
8.1.2 Setting the Advanced Attributes of SDH Interfaces

The routine maintenance parameters can be set by setting the advanced attributes of SDH interfaces.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the board to be configured and set the parameters as required. Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End
8.1.3 Querying the Running Status of PPP

In the case of a network failure, you can query the running status of the PPP to analyze the cause of the failure.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The encapsulation type of the created SDH interface must be PPP.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select Port, right-click, and choose Query PPP Running Status from the shortcut menu. The PPP Running Status dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click Close. ----End
8.1.4 Resetting the PPP

In the case of a network failure, you can reset the PPP to enable the PPP ports on the two ends of a link to re-negotiate.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The encapsulation type of the created SDH interface must be PPP.
Context
CAUTION
Resetting the PPP will interrupt services.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Right-click Port, and choose Reset PPP from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation will interrupt the services. Step 3 Click Yes. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation was successful. Step 4 Click Close. ----End
8.2 Configuring PDH Interfaces

This section describes how to set the attributes of PDH interfaces. In a PSN network, the PDH interfaces can be used to carry TDM signals, IMA signals, or tunnels, depending on different settings of the interface attributes. The attributes of a PDH interface include the general attributes, layer 2 attributes, layer 3 attributes and advanced attributes.
Context
The application scenario of a PDH interface depends on the setting of the interface attributes. For details, refer to Table 8-1. Table 8-1 Application scenario of PDH interfaces Application Scenario Carrying the CES service Interface Type E1 interface Required Interface Attribute General attributes, Advanced attributes
8-5
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Application Scenario Carrying the ATM service Carrying the tunnel
Interface Type E1 interface E1 interface
Required Interface Attribute General attributes, Layer 2 attributes General attributes, Layer 3 attributes
NOTE
When the E1 interface is used to carry the CES service, set the general attributes and an advanced attribute, that is, frame format, to ensure that the frame format is the same as the service encapsulation format. When the emulation mode of a CES service is CESoPSN, it is recommended that you set the frame format at the interface to CRC-4 multiframe. When the emulation mode of a CES service is SAToP, the frame format at the interface should be set to non-framing. When the E1 interface is used to carry the ATM service, the Layer 2 attributes should be set. In addition, the IMA group should be created. When setting the layer 2 attributes of the E1 interface, set Port Mode to Layer 2 in 8.2.1 Setting General Attributes of PDH Interfaces. When the E1 interface is used to carry the tunnels, the Layer 3 attributes should be set. In addition, create the ML-PPP group, and configure the interface as an ML-PPP member.
Follow the procedure shown in Figure 8-1 to configure a PDH interface. Figure 8-1 Procedure for configuring a PDH interface
Carry CES service Carry ATM service Carry Tunnel
Start
Start
Start
Configure general attributes
Configure advanced attributes
Configure layer 3 attributes
End
End
End
Required
Optional
8.2.1 Setting General Attributes of PDH Interfaces

Before you create services, you need to set the general attributes of the corresponding PDH interfaces. The general attributes of a PDH interface define the related information of the physical layer. 8.2.2 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of PDH Interfaces Before you run PPP on a PDH interface, you need to set the layer 3 attributes of the PDH interface. The layer 3 attributes of a PDH interface define the related attributes of the network layer. 8.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of PDH Interfaces The advanced attributes of PDH interfaces include frame format, line encoding format and loopback mode. 8.2.4 Querying the Running Status of PPP In the case of a network failure, you can query the running status of the PPP to analyze the cause of the failure. 8.2.5 Resetting the PPP In the case of a network failure, you can reset the PPP to enable the PPP ports on the two ends of a link to re-negotiate.
8.2.1 Setting General Attributes of PDH Interfaces

Before you create services, you need to set the general attributes of the corresponding PDH interfaces. The general attributes of a PDH interface define the related information of the physical layer.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the desired board. Step 3 Set the parameters as required.
NOTE
Note the following issues during parameter settings: l When Port Mode is set to Layer 1, Encapsulation Type does not support the settings. In this case, TDM services can be accessed. l When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type supports ATM only. In this case, ATM services can be accessed. l If the PDH interface is used for the inband DCN, the Port Mode cannot be set to Layer 1 or Layer 2. l If you set Port Mode to Layer 3, select Null or PPP for Encapsulation Type. If you select Null, the interface does not enable the PPP protocol, and thus the equipment bears less load. If you select PPP, the interface can carry the MPLS. l In the case an NNI interface,Max Data Packet Size(byte) must be larger than 960. A DCN packet contains a maximum of 960 bytes. If Max Data Packet Size(byte) is smaller than 960, the DCN packets in the receive direction may be lost.
Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
8.2.2 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of PDH Interfaces

Before you run PPP on a PDH interface, you need to set the layer 3 attributes of the PDH interface. The layer 3 attributes of a PDH interface define the related attributes of the network layer.
Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. In General Attributes, Port Mode must be set to Layer 3. In General Attributes, Encapsulation Type must be set to PPP.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required.
NOTE
Note the following issues during parameter settings:
8.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of PDH Interfaces

The advanced attributes of PDH interfaces include frame format, line encoding format and loopback mode.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the board to be configured and set the parameters as required.
8-8
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN , Frame Mode of the packets at the PDH interface can be set to 30 or 31. In hybrid networking, make sure that the frame modes of the local port and opposite port should be the same. l 30: In the E1 frame format, timeslots 1-15 and 17-31 are used to transport service data. l 31: In the E1 frame format, timeslots 1-31 are used to transport service data.

Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The encapsulation type of the created PDH interface must be PPP.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select Port, right-click, and choose Query PPP Running Status from the shortcut menu. The PPP Running Status dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click Close. ----End

Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The encapsulation type of the created PDH interface must be PPP.
Context
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Right-click Port, and choose Reset PPP from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation will interrupt the services. Step 3 Click Yes. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation was successful. Step 4 Click Close. ----End
8.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces

This section describes how to set the attributes of Ethernet interfaces. In a PSN network, the Ethernet interfaces can be used to carry Ethernet packets or tunnels, depending on different settings of the interface attributes. The attributes of the Ethernet interface include the general attributes, Layer 3 attributes, advanced attributes and flow control.
Context
The application scenario of an Ethernet interface depends on the setting of the interface attributes. For details, refer to Table 8-2. Table 8-2 Application scenario of Ethernet interfaces Application Scenario Accessing the Ethernet service Carrying the tunnel Interface Type Ethernet interface Ethernet interface Required Interface Attribute General attributes General attributes, Layer 3 attributes
Follow the procedure shown in to configure an Ethernet interface. 8.3.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces Before you configure the layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet interface, you need to configure the general attributes of the corresponding Ethernet interface. The general attributes of an Ethernet interface define the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame length. 8.3.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces After the layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet interface are set, the interface can be used for connecting to the client-side equipment at the edge of a PSN network or for forwarding Ethernet packets within the PSN network. The Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet interface define the related information of the data link layer. 8.3.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of an Ethernet Interface
When an Ethernet interface is used to carry a tunnel, you need to configure the layer 3 attributes of the Ethernet interface. The layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet interface define the related attributes of the network layer. 8.3.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces The routine maintenance parameters can be set through setting the advanced attributes of Ethernet interfaces. 8.3.5 Configuring Flow Control In the case that the flow control function is enabled, if congestion occurs on the link, the Ethernet interface sends a PAUSE frame to the opposite end, and then the opposite end stops transmitting Ethernet packets. As a result, congestion is avoided.
8.3.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces

Before you configure the layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet interface, you need to configure the general attributes of the corresponding Ethernet interface. The general attributes of an Ethernet interface define the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame length.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the General Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required.
NOTE
l When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, the Encapsulation Type support Null. l When Port Mode is set to Layer 3, the Encapsulation Type support 802.1Q, and then the interface can be used by tunnel. l When Port Mode is set to Layer Mix, the port can carry layer 2 services and layer 3 services. To create a VLAN sub-interface, set the port mode to Layer Mix. l Before changing Layer 3 to Layer Mix, make sure that route protocols, such as IGP-ISIS not enabled on the port. Before changing Layer Mix to Layer 3, make sure that no VLAN tag is added to the port and no Layer 2 service is configured on the port. l In the case an NNI interface,Max Data Packet Size(byte) must be larger than 960. A DCN packet contains a maximum of 960 bytes. If Max Data Packet Size(byte) is smaller than 960, the DCN packets in the receive direction may be lost.
8.3.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces

After the layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet interface are set, the interface can be used for connecting to the client-side equipment at the edge of a PSN network or for forwarding Ethernet packets
within the PSN network. The Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet interface define the related information of the data link layer.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. In General Attributes, Port Mode must be set to Layer 2.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required.
NOTE
Note the following issues during parameter settings: l QinQ Type Domain can be set only when Encapsulation Type is QinQ. l TAG can be set only when Encapsulation Type is 802.1Q. l Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority are valid when TAG is access or hybrid.
Step 4 Click Apply. Click OK, The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End
8.3.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of an Ethernet Interface

When an Ethernet interface is used to carry a tunnel, you need to configure the layer 3 attributes of the Ethernet interface. The layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet interface define the related attributes of the network layer.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. In General Attributes, Port Mode must be set to Layer 3.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required.
8-12
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
Note the following issues during parameter settings: l Max Reserved Bandwidth indicates the bandwidth used by tunnels. The total maximum reserved bandwidth of the tunnels carried by port cannot exceed the physical bandwidth of the port. l When modifying the IP address of the interface, make sure that the IP address of this interface and the IP addresses of other interfaces configured with services are not in the same subnet.
8.3.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces

The routine maintenance parameters can be set through setting the advanced attributes of Ethernet interfaces.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the board to be configured and set the parameters as required. Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End
8.3.5 Configuring Flow Control

In the case that the flow control function is enabled, if congestion occurs on the link, the Ethernet interface sends a PAUSE frame to the opposite end, and then the opposite end stops transmitting Ethernet packets. As a result, congestion is avoided.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Flow Control tab.
Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required. Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End
8.4 Configuring Microwave Interfaces

This section describes how to configure the IF 1+1 protection of the IF board, the IF/ODU information of the radio link, microwave interface attributes, and ODU interface parameters.
Context
The application scenario of an microwave interface depends on the setting of the interface attributes. For details, refer to Table 8-3. Table 8-3 Application scenario of microwave interfaces Interface Attributes Layer 2 attributes Layer 3 attributes Signal to Carry Ethernet packets Tunnels Functioning Location UNI side or NNI side NNI side
NOTE
When the microwave interface is used to carry the QinQ Link, the configuration procedure is similar to the configuration procedure when the microwave interface is used to carry the Ethernet service. In this case, however, the encapsulation types are different. For details, see 8.4.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Microwave Interfaces.
Follow the procedure shown in Figure 8-2 to configure an microwave interface.
8-14
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 8-2 Procedure for configuring an microwave interface

Carry Ethernet Packets Carry Tunnel
Start
Start
Creating IF 1+1 Protection
Creating IF 1+1 Protection
Configuring the IF/ ODU Information of a Radio Link
Configuring the IF/ ODU Information of a Radio Link
Setting the General Attributes
Setting the General Attributes
Setting the IF Attributes
Setting the IF Attributes
Setting the Layer 2 Attributes
Setting the Layer 3 Attributes
Setting the Advanced Attributes
Setting the Advanced Attributes
Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports
Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports
End
End
Required Optional
8.4.1 Setting the General Attributes of Microwave Interfaces Before you configure the layer 2 and layer 3 attributes of an microwave interface, you need to configure the general attributes of the corresponding microwave interface. The general attributes of an microwave interface define the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame length. 8.4.2 Setting the IF Attributes of Microwave Interfaces The IF information of the microwave interface specifies the relevant information of the IF board, including the AM attribute and ATPC attribute.
8.4.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Microwave Interfaces After the layer 2 attributes of an microwave interface are set, the interface can be used for connecting to the client-side equipment at the edge of a PSN network or for forwarding Ethernet packets within the PSN network. The Layer 2 attributes of an microwave interface define the related information of the data link layer. 8.4.4 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Microwave Interfaces The layer 3 attributes of an microwave interface define the related attributes of the network layer. 8.4.5 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Microwave Interfaces The routine maintenance parameters can be set through setting the advanced attributes of microwave interfaces. 8.4.6 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports(RTN900V1R1) This section describes how to set the parameters of ODU ports, including the RF attributes, power attributes, and advanced attributes of the ODU. 8.4.7 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports(RTN900V1R2) This section describes how to set the parameters of ODU ports, including the RF attributes, power attributes, and advanced attributes of the ODU.
8.4.1 Setting the General Attributes of Microwave Interfaces

Before you configure the layer 2 and layer 3 attributes of an microwave interface, you need to configure the general attributes of the corresponding microwave interface. The general attributes of an microwave interface define the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame length.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The IF board and the ODU that connects to the IF board must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the General Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required.
NOTE
l When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, the Encapsulation Type support Null, 802.1Q and QinQ. l When Port Mode is set to Layer 3, the Encapsulation Type support 802.1Q, and then the interface can be used by tunnel. l In the case an NNI interface, MTU(byte), which indicates the maximum data packet length, must be set to a value larger than 960. A DCN packet contains a maximum of 960 bytes. If MTU(byte) is smaller than 960, the DCN packets in the receive direction may be lost.
8.4.2 Setting the IF Attributes of Microwave Interfaces

The IF information of the microwave interface specifies the relevant information of the IF board, including the AM attribute and ATPC attribute.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required.
NOTE
l When you set Assured Capacity Modulation and Full Capacity Modulation, note the following points: This parameter is valid only when Enable AM is set to Enable. l When you set Manually Specified Modulation, note the following points: This parameter is valid only when Enable AM is set to Disable. l When you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm), note the following points: Generally, ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) should be 20 dB to 30 dB higher than ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm), and must not be less than 15 dB. If the difference between the upper threshold and the lower threshold is big, the number of ATPC adjustments is reduced and the system load is also reduced. If the difference between the upper threshold and the lower threshold is small, the transmit power is adjusted in a timely manner and the interference to adjacent systems is reduced. l When you set ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm), note the following points: Generally, set this parameter to a value of 10 dB or greater than the receiver sensitivity to prevent sudden fast fading because sudden fast fading makes the RSL value lower than the receiver sensitivity.
8.4.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Microwave Interfaces

After the layer 2 attributes of an microwave interface are set, the interface can be used for connecting to the client-side equipment at the edge of a PSN network or for forwarding Ethernet packets within the PSN network. The Layer 2 attributes of an microwave interface define the related information of the data link layer.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required.
NOTE
When you set QinQ Type Domain, note the following points: QinQ Type Domain can be set only when Encapsulation Type is QinQ.
8.4.4 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Microwave Interfaces

The layer 3 attributes of an microwave interface define the related attributes of the network layer.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required.
NOTE
Note the following issues during parameter settings: l Max Reserved Bandwidth indicates the bandwidth used by tunnels. The total maximum reserved bandwidth of the tunnel that is carried by a port cannot exceed the physical bandwidth of the port. l Modifying the IP address can cause the equipment to re-establish the link. As a result, the services are interrupted. l When modifying the IP address of the interface, make sure that the IP address of this interface and the IP addresses of other interfaces configured with services are not in the same subnet.
8.4.5 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Microwave Interfaces

The routine maintenance parameters can be set through setting the advanced attributes of microwave interfaces.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required.
NOTE
When you set Radio Link ID, note the following points: l If this parameter is different from Received Link ID, the NE reports the MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS into the downstream. l Set this parameter according to the planning. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique Link ID, and the Link IDs at both the ends of a radio link should be the same. l Before performing the loopback operation for the IF board, disable the AM function at the two ends of a link.
8.4.6 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports(RTN900V1R1)

Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
Step 3 Configure the TX frequency and T/R spacing.

NOTE
l When you set Transmission Frequency (MHz), note the following points: l The parameter specifies the channel center frequency. l This parameter cannot be set to a value that is less than the minimum TX frequency supported by the ODU + 50% channel spacing or more than the maximum TX frequency supported by the ODU - 50% channel spacing. l The difference between the TX frequencies of both the ends of a radio link is a T/R spacing. l Set this parameter according to the planning. l When you set T/R Spacing (MHz), note the following points: l This parameter indicates the spacing between the TX power and receive power of the ODU. If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the TX power is one T/R spacing higher than the receive power. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the TX power is one T/R spacing lower than the receive power. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.
Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click the Power Attributes tab. Step 6 Configure the TX power of the ODU.
NOTE
Note the following when setting the Transmit Power(dBm) parameters. l This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range supported by the ODU. l The TX power of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link. l Set this parameter according to the planning. Note the following when setting the TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low Threshold(dBm) parameters. l When the actual launched power of the ODU is higher than TX High Threshold(dBm), the system records the time when the actual launched power is higher than TX High Threshold(dBm) and the time when the actual launched power is higher than TX Low Threshold(dBm) as performance events. l When the actual launched power of the ODU is within the range from TX Low Threshold(dBm) to TX High Threshold(dBm), the system records the time when the actual launched power of the ODU is higher than TX Low Threshold(dBm) as a performance event. l When the actual launched power of the ODU is lower than TX Low Threshold(dBm), no record is saved. l The TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low Threshold(dBm) parameters are valid only when the ATPC function is enabled. Note the following when setting the RX High Threshold(dBm) and RX Low Threshold(dBm). l When the actual received power of the ODU is lower than RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system records the time when the actual received power is lower than RX High Threshold(dBm) and the time when the actual received power is lower than RX Low Threshold(dBm) as performance events. l When the actual received power of the ODU is within the range from RX Low Threshold(dBm) to RX High Threshold(dBm), the system records the time when the actual received power of the ODU is higher than RX Low Threshold(dBm) as a performance event. l When the actual received power of the ODU is higher than RX Low Threshold(dBm), no record is saved.
Step 7 Click Apply.

Step 8 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 9 Set Configure Transmission Status. Step 10 Click Apply. ----End
8.4.7 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports(RTN900V1R2)

Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab. Step 3 Configure the TX frequency and T/R spacing.
Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click the Power Attributes tab. Step 6 Configure the transmit power and receive power of the ODU.
Step 7 Click Apply. Step 8 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 9 Set Configure Transmission Status.

Parameters
Parameter Transmit Frequency (MHz) Value Range Default Value Description l The parameter specifies the channel center frequency. l This parameter cannot be set to a value that is less than the minimum Transmit frequency supported by the ODU + 50% channel spacing or more than the maximum Transmit frequency supported by the ODU - 50% channel spacing. l The difference between the Transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link is a T/R spacing. l Set this parameter according to the planning. Maximum Transmit Power (dBm) l This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the rated power range supported by the ODU. l Set this parameter to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset value. The maximum transmit power adjusted by ATPC should not exceed this value. l Set this parameter according to the planning. Transmit Power (dBm) l This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range supported by the ODU. l The Transmit power of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link. l Set this parameter according to the planning.
8-22
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Receive Power (dBm)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU exceeds the range of receive power3 dB, the ODU LED of the IF board connected to the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l Set this parameter according to the planning.
T/R Spacing (MHz)
0-4294967.295
l This parameter indicates the spacing between the TX power and receive power of the ODU. If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the TX power is one T/R spacing higher than the receive power. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the TX power is one T/R spacing lower than the receive power. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.
Configure Transmission Status
mute, unmute
unmute
l When this parameter is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but the ODU can normally receive microwave signals. l When this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU can normally receive and transmit microwave signals. l Generally, this parameter takes the default value.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
8-23
8.5 Configuring Serial Interfaces

This topic describes how to set the attributes of serial interfaces. 8.5.1 Creating Serial Interfaces You can create a serial interface at the VC12 level or 64 kbit/s timeslot level. 8.5.2 Setting the General Attributes of a Serial Interface Before you set the layer 3 attributes of a serial interface, you need to set the general attributes of the serial interface. The general attributes of a serial interface define the related information of the physical layer. 8.5.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Serial Interfaces In a PSN network, the serial interfaces are used to transport the PPP-encapsulated packet data. The layer 3 attributes of a serial interface define the related attributes of the network layer. 8.5.4 Querying the Running Status of PPP In the case of a network failure, you can query the running status of the PPP to analyze the cause of the failure. 8.5.5 Resetting the PPP In the case of a network failure, you can reset the PPP to enable the PPP ports on the two ends of a link to re-negotiate.
8.5.1 Creating Serial Interfaces

You can create a serial interface at the VC12 level or 64 kbit/s timeslot level.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New in the General Attributes tab and the New Serial Interface dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the parameters as required.
NOTE
l In the case of the serial interface at the VC12 level, currently a serial interface can be bound to only one timeslot. l In the case of the serial interface at the 64 kbit/s level, when the E1 frame mode is 30, timeslots 0 and 16 are unavailable. When the E1 frame mode is 31, timeslot 0 is unavailable.
8.5.2 Setting the General Attributes of a Serial Interface

Before you set the layer 3 attributes of a serial interface, you need to set the general attributes of the serial interface. The general attributes of a serial interface define the related information of the physical layer.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. A serial interface must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the parameters as required.
NOTE
When you set Port Mode to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type is ATM. The serial interface supports IMA binding. When you set Port Mode to Layer 3, you can set Encapsulation Type to PPP or Null. When you set Encapsulation Type to PPP, you can add the serial interface to an MP group. The serial interfaces that are bound to the same MP group have the same E1 frame mode. When Encapsulation Type is Null, Port Mode can be changed to Layer 2. In the case an NNI interface,Max Data Packet Size (byte) must be larger than 960. A DCN packet contains a maximum of 960 bytes. If Max Data Packet Size (byte) is smaller than 960, the DCN packets in the receive direction may be lost.
Step 3 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Step 4 Click Close. ----End
8.5.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Serial Interfaces

In a PSN network, the serial interfaces are used to transport the PPP-encapsulated packet data. The layer 3 attributes of a serial interface define the related attributes of the network layer.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. In General Attributes, Encapsulation Type must be set to PPP.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab and set the parameters as required.

NOTE
Note the following issues during parameter settings: l Max Reserved Bandwidth indicates the bandwidth used by tunnels. The total maximum reserved bandwidth of the tunnels carried by port should be not more than the physical bandwidth of the port. l Modifying the IP address can cause the equipment to re-establish the link. As a result, the services are interrupted. l When changing Specify IP Address from Manually to Unnumbered IP, manually specify the invalid IP address (255.255.255.255) and invalid IP mask (255.255.255.255) to release the IP address manually specified. l When modifying the IP address of the interface, make sure that the IP address of this interface and the IP addresses of other interfaces configured with services are not in the same subnet.
Step 3 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Step 4 Click Close. ----End

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The encapsulation type of the created serial interface must be PPP.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select Port, right-click, and choose Query PPP Running Status from the shortcut menu. The PPP Running Status dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click Close. ----End

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The encapsulation type of the created serial interface must be PPP.
Context
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Right-click Port, and choose Reset PPP from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation will interrupt the services. Step 3 Click Yes. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation was successful. Step 4 Click Close. ----End
8.6 Configuring ML-PPP

This section describes how to configure Multilink PPP (MP) group. MP is a technology used to bind multiple PPP links to increase the bandwidth. MP is applied to the interface that supports PPP. MP supports fragmented packets. The fragmented packets are transmitted on multiple PPP links in the MP group to the same destination.
Context
Follow the procedure shown in Figure 8-3 to configure an MP group.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
8-27
Figure 8-3 Procedure for configuring an MP group

Start
Enable the PPP at the interface
Create MP group
Configure members to an MP group
End
Required
Optional
8.6.1 Overview of the ML-PPP The Multilink PPP, also ML-PPP or MP, indicates that multiple point-to-point protocol (PPP) links are bundled and used. In this document, the Multilink PPP is referred to as ML-PPP. 8.6.2 Basic Concepts Before configuring the ML-PPP, you need to know the basic concepts, such as the packet format of the ML-PPP. 8.6.3 ML-PPP Application In the case of the ML-PPP, several ports that adopt the PPP encapsulation are bundled into one logical port to increase the transmission bandwidth. The ML-PPP allows that packets be divided into fragments, which are transported over several PPP links to the same destination. The MLPPP is applicable to the PPP-supported ports, such as the E1 interface. 8.6.4 Creating MP Groups You can bind E1 interfaces on which PPP is enabled by creating an MP group, so that the bound E1 interfaces are used as a logical port to carry tunnels. 8.6.5 Configuring Member Interfaces of MP Groups To modify the bandwidth of the MP group, add or delete the member interfaces into or from the MP group.
8-28
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
8.6.1 Overview of the ML-PPP

The Multilink PPP, also ML-PPP or MP, indicates that multiple point-to-point protocol (PPP) links are bundled and used. In this document, the Multilink PPP is referred to as ML-PPP. The ML-PPP function benefits the network in the following aspects: l l l Bandwidth increased. Load shared and backed up. Delay shortened by fragments.
The ML-PPP complies with RFC1990 (PPP multilink protocol). The ML-PPP protocol focuses on the transmission of fragments of data packets over multiple data links, reassembly and sequence of these fragments.

Before configuring the ML-PPP, you need to know the basic concepts, such as the packet format of the ML-PPP.
ML-PPP Packet Format

The ML-PPP packets have the following formats, shown as Figure 8-4: l l Long sequence number fragment format (LSNFF): The sequence number field has 24 bits. This format is the default format. Short sequence number fragment format (SSNFF): The sequence number field has 12 bits.
The fragment format of transmitted packets can be different from that of received packets on the condition of mutual negotiation. If the negotiation does not allow that the received packets are of the LSNFF format, the MP packets of the SSNFF format should be transmitted.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
8-29
Figure 8-4 ML-PPP packet format

Adress PPP Header Protocol 0x003d 0x003d 0xFF 0xFF Control 0x03
B ML-PPP Header
sequence number
sequence number
fragment data ....
PPP FCS
FCS
Long Sequence Number Fragment Format
Adress PPP Header
0xFF 0xFF
Control
0x03
Protocol
0x003d 0x003d
ML-PPP Header
sequence number
fragment data ....
PPP FCS
FCS
Short Sequence Number Fragment Format
8.6.3 ML-PPP Application

In the case of the ML-PPP, several ports that adopt the PPP encapsulation are bundled into one logical port to increase the transmission bandwidth. The ML-PPP allows that packets be divided into fragments, which are transported over several PPP links to the same destination. The MLPPP is applicable to the PPP-supported ports, such as the E1 interface. As shown in Figure 8-5, the ML-PPP bundles several PPP links into one logical port.
8-30
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 8-5 ML-PPP application scenario

NE1 PPP link PPP link PPP link ML-PPP NE2
8.6.4 Creating MP Groups

You can bind E1 interfaces on which PPP is enabled by creating an MP group, so that the bound E1 interfaces are used as a logical port to carry tunnels.
Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. E1 interfaces on which PPP is enabled must be created. The E1 Frame Format of the local MP group and the opposite MP group should be consistent.
Context
NOTE
The MP group can be bound only with the E1 interfaces of the same board.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > MP Group Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New in the General Attributes tab and the New MP Group dialogue box is displayed. Step 3 Set the parameters as required. Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End
8.6.5 Configuring Member Interfaces of MP Groups

To modify the bandwidth of the MP group, add or delete the member interfaces into or from the MP group.
Prerequisite
l l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. An MP group must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > MP Group Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select an MP group and click Configuration. The Config Member Interface dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the parameters as required. Step 4 Click Apply. The Warning dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation may interrupt the services.
NOTE
Deleting the member interface of the MP group may damage the service. The member interface in the same MP group must have the same frame mode. That is, the values of Frame Mode are all 30 or 31. for the parameters of Frame Mode, to see E1 Frame Format.
Step 5 Click Yes. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Step 6 Click Close. ----End
8.7 Configuring an Ethernet Virtual Interface

This section describes how to configure an Ethernet virtual interface. After you configure the Ethernet virtual interface, the NE can process ATM AAL5-encapsulated or VLAN-encapsulated Ethernet packets. The Ethernet virtual interface attributes include general attributes and layer 3 attributes. 8.7.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces The general attributes of an Ethernet virtual interface define the related information of the ATM adaptation layer (AAL) or VLAN. Before you configure an Ethernet virtual interface, you need to configure the general attributes of the Ethernet virtual interface. 8.7.2 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces The Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet virtual interface include the IP address and tunnel enabling status. You can create a tunnel after setting the Layer 3 attributes.
8.7.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces

The general attributes of an Ethernet virtual interface define the related information of the ATM adaptation layer (AAL) or VLAN. Before you configure an Ethernet virtual interface, you need to configure the general attributes of the Ethernet virtual interface.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Virtual Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 3 Click Close. The general attributes of an Ethernet virtual interface are displayed in the field. Step 4 Specify the port name as required. Step 5 Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. ----End
8.7.2 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces

The Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet virtual interface include the IP address and tunnel enabling status. You can create a tunnel after setting the Layer 3 attributes.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. The general attributes of Ethernet virtual interface must be set.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Virtual Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab, set the Specify IP to Manually and set the IP Address and IP Mask for the port. Step 3 Double-click the Enable Tunnel field, and select Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. ----End
8.8 Configuring an IMA Group

When the RTN equipment accesses IMA services, configure an ATM IMA group at the access node.
Context
Figure 8-6 shows the flow for configuring an IMA group.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
8-33
Figure 8-6 IMA group configuration flow

Start
Configure bound paths for an ATM IMA group
Configure IMA group attributes
Configure ATM interface attributes
Query the IMA group states
Query the states of the link of an IMA group
Reset an IMA group
Modify an IMA group
Delete an IMA group
End
Required
Optional
8.8.1 Configuring Bound Channels in an ATM IMA Group When the RTN equipment accesses IMA services, configure bound channels in an ATM IMA group at the access node. One ATM IMA group corresponds to one ATM trunk port. Bind channels with the ATM trunk port and then enable the IMA group. The ATM trunk port can be bound with one or several E1 or Fractional E1 ports. 8.8.2 Configuring Attributes of an ATM IMA Group After configuring the channels bound with the IMA group, enable the IMA protocol and configure attributes of the IMA group to make the IMA group meet the service requirements. 8.8.3 Configuring ATM Interface Attributes This section describes methods of configuring the ATM interface parameters. 8.8.4 Querying IMA Group States In the case of routine maintenance and troubleshooting, the operator need query information on states of an IMA group to check whether the IMA group is normal. 8.8.5 Querying IMA Link States In the case of routine maintenance and troubleshooting, the operator need query information on states of an IMA link to check whether the IMA link is normal. 8.8.6 Resetting an IMA Group In the case of deployment and troubleshooting, the operator can reset an IMA group to re-enable the IMA group protocol.
8.8.7 Modifying an IMA Group When attributes of an IMA group displayed on the U2000 are not consistent with those in the network, modify attributes of this IMA group. If any service is configured and activated at the ATM Trunk port for an IMA group, modification of the IMA group may interrupt services. 8.8.8 Deleting an IMA Group Delete the redundant or idle IMA groups to release the resources. If any service is configured and activated at the ATM Trunk port for an IMA group, deleting the IMA group may interrupt the services.
8.8.1 Configuring Bound Channels in an ATM IMA Group

When the RTN equipment accesses IMA services, configure bound channels in an ATM IMA group at the access node. One ATM IMA group corresponds to one ATM trunk port. Bind channels with the ATM trunk port and then enable the IMA group. The ATM trunk port can be bound with one or several E1 or Fractional E1 ports.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. When the MLPPP or CES services is configured or the DCN is enabled on the VCTRUNK, the VCTRUNK resources are occupied and thus the IMA group cannot be created. When an E1or Fractional E1 port is bound with an IMA group, Port Mode should be set to Layer 2.
Context
NOTE
Only the E1 ports on the same processing board can be bound.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Binding tab and click Configuration. The Bound Path dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Configure boards and VCTRUNK ports in Available Boards and Configurable Ports respectively. Step 4 Select E1, Fractional E1 for Level. Step 5 Select a port in Available Resources. Click to bind the port to the VCTRUNK. Click
to cancel binding of the port to the VCTRUNK.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
8-35
CAUTION
The VCTRUNK that is first added into the IMA group should be deleted at last. The ports that are bound to the same VCTRUNK must have the same E1 frame mode or VC12 frame mode. When the member links of an IMA group are at the serial ports of the 64K level, there are the following restrictions: l One serial port should be bound with a minimum of three 64K timeslots. l The number of bound 64K timeslots should be the same for different serial ports. l In one E1, only one serial port can be used as a member link of an IMA group. Step 6 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeds. Click Close. ----End
8.8.2 Configuring Attributes of an ATM IMA Group

After configuring the channels bound with the IMA group, enable the IMA protocol and configure attributes of the IMA group to make the IMA group meet the service requirements.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Click the NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IMA Group Management tab, enable the IMA protocol, and configure attributes of the IMA group. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeds. Click Close.
NOTE
Take the following precautions when setting parameters. l You can enable or disable the IMA Protocol Enable Status of the IMA group only after configuring the bound path of the corresponding VCTRUNK of the IMA group. l IMA Transmit Frame Length: The optional values are 32, 64, 128 and 256. l When IMA Symmetry Mode be set to Symmetric Mode and Symmetric Operation, Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links should be consistent with Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links. l Maximum Delay Between Links: This parameter indicates the maximum delay variance among different links in one IMA group. The value ranges from 1 ms to 120 ms, with 1 ms spacing. l If the IMA protocol is enabled, only Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links, Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links and Maximum Delay Between Links can be set. l You can modify the IMA Protocol Version, IMA Transmit Frame Length and IMA Symmetry Mode only after you disable the IMA Protocol Enable Status.
----End
8.8.3 Configuring ATM Interface Attributes

This section describes methods of configuring the ATM interface parameters.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree. Click the ATM Interface Management tab. Step 2 Optional: Click Query to query the current attributes of each interface. Step 3 Set relevant attributes of the interfaces bound with the IMA group as required. Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End
8.8.4 Querying IMA Group States

In the case of routine maintenance and troubleshooting, the operator need query information on states of an IMA group to check whether the IMA group is normal.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. You must complete the configuration of an IMA group.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IMA Group States tab and select the IMA group for query. Click Query. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeds. Click Close. ----End
8.8.5 Querying IMA Link States

In the case of routine maintenance and troubleshooting, the operator need query information on states of an IMA link to check whether the IMA link is normal.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. You must complete the configuration of an IMA link.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the IMA Link States tab and select the IMA link for query. Click Query. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeds. Click Close. ----End
8.8.6 Resetting an IMA Group

In the case of deployment and troubleshooting, the operator can reset an IMA group to re-enable the IMA group protocol.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of the IMA group.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IMA Group Management tab and select the IMA group. Click Reset. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeds. Click Close. ----End
8.8.7 Modifying an IMA Group

When attributes of an IMA group displayed on the U2000 are not consistent with those in the network, modify attributes of this IMA group. If any service is configured and activated at the ATM Trunk port for an IMA group, modification of the IMA group may interrupt services.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
If any service is configured and activated at the ATM Trunk port for the IMA group, modification of the IMA group may interrupt services. Exercise caution for this.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IMA Group Management tab and modify related attributes of the IMA group. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeds. Click Close. ----End
8.8.8 Deleting an IMA Group

Delete the redundant or idle IMA groups to release the resources. If any service is configured and activated at the ATM Trunk port for an IMA group, deleting the IMA group may interrupt the services.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The IMA Protocol Enable Status of the IMA group must be Disabled.
Context
CAUTION
If any service is configured and activated at the ATM Trunk port for the IMA group, deleting the IMA group may interrupt the services. Exercise caution for this.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Banding tab and select an IMA group. Click Delete. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation may interrupt the services. Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. ----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
8-39
9 Configuring Radio Links
9
About This Chapter
Configuring Radio Links
Before creating a radio link between two radio sites, you must configure the corresponding radio link information. 9.1 Radio Link A radio link is the channel that is used to transmit the information between stations. This chapter describes basic concepts of the radio link. 9.2 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link You can set the IF/ODU information that is frequently used by the radio link based on each radio link. 9.3 Configuring the ATPC Function To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board. 9.4 Creating an XPIC Workgroup When two IF boards that form an XPIC workgroup are installed on an IDU, you can create an XPIC workgroup to ensure that the XPIC workgroup is configured with the same work mode, transmission frequency, TX power, and ATPC attributes. 9.5 Configuring the Hybrid/AM Attribute The Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 services and Ethernet services and supports the adaptive modulation (AM) function. Hence, the Hybrid microwave ensures the reliable transmission of the E1 services and flexible transmission of the Ethernet services whose bandwidth is large and changes dynamically. 9.6 Hop Management The Hop management is based on per link and the equipment at the two ends of a link is managed at the same time.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
9-1
9.1 Radio Link

A radio link is the channel that is used to transmit the information between stations. This chapter describes basic concepts of the radio link. The radio frequency signal whose frequency ranges from 300 MHz to 300 GHz is usually called to be the radio signal. The line that transmit the radio signal is the radio link.
NOTE
During the creation of a radio link, the link ID at local end must be consistent with that at the opposite end, to ensure the communication.
Refer to Figure 9-1. The communication channel between two radio stations is the radio link. The radio stations are classified by function as follows: Figure 9-1 Classification of Radio Stations
Relay Station
Terminal Station
Add/Drop Station Terminal Station
Pivotal Station Terminal Station
l l l l
Terminal station: A station located at either end of the link or at the endpoint of a tributary link. Relay station: A station located in the middle of the link without adding or dropping voice channels. Pivotal station: A station located in the backbone link to communicate with other stations in various directions. Add/drop station: A station located in the middle of the link to add/drop tributaries and realize the communication in two directions of the backbone link.
9.2 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link

You can set the IF/ODU information that is frequently used by the radio link based on each radio link.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The IF board and the ODU that connects to the IF board or IF port must be added.
Precautions
l l In 1+1 HSB/SD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In this case, you need configure only the IF/ODU information of the main equipment. In 1+1 FD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In this case, you need configure the IF/ODU information of the main equipment and the ODU information of the standby equipment. In the case of XPIC radio links, one XPIC workgroup corresponds to two radio links. The IF/ODU information of the radio links should be configured in the XPIC workgroup. In the case of N+1 radio links, one N+1 protection group corresponds to N+1 radio links and the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links should be set respectively.
NOTE
l l
In the example in the preceding figure: l l l 1+1HSB: indicates that the IF 1+1 HSB protection is configured for the NE. 3-IFX2: indicates the IF card that is being configured. 4-IFX2: S indicates the standby IF card of the 1+1 protection.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 and RTN 900 V100R002 NEs, select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 V100R001 NEs, select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Microwave Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 3 Click IF/ODU Configuration. Step 4 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon. Then, the system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF board belongs. Step 5 Set the corresponding IF information of the radio link.
Step 6 Click Apply. Step 7 Set the corresponding ODU information of the radio link.
Step 8 Click Apply.

NOTE
Click Apply after you set the IF information of the radio link and after you set the ODU information of the radio link.
----End
Parameters
Parameter Work Mode Value Range l 1,4E1,7MHz,Q PSK l 2,4E1,3.5MHz, 16QAM l 3,8E1,14MHz, QPSK l 4,8E1,7MHz, 16QAM l 5,16E1,28MHz, QPSK l 6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM l 7,STM-1,28MH z,128QAM l 8,E3,28MHz,Q PSK l 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM l 10,22E1,14MH z,32QAM l 11,26E1,14MH z,64QAM l 12,32E1,14MH z,128QAM l 13,35E1,28MH z,16QAM l 14,44E1,28MH z,32QAM l 15,53E1,28MH z,64QAM l 16,5E1,7MHz, QPSK l 17,10E1,14MH z,QPSK l 18,2E1,3.5MHz ,QPSK
Default Value The default value varies with different IF boards.
Description l This parameter indicates the radio work mode in "work mode, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format. l The IFH1 board of the RTN 605 does not support the setting of the Work Mode. l The IF1A/IF1B board supports radio work modes 1-15 and the IF0A/IF0B board supports radio work modes 5 and 16-18. The IFX board supports radio work mode 7. l The IFH2 board of the RTN 620 does not support the setting of the Work Mode. l Set this parameter according to the planning. The radio work modes of the IF boards at both the radio link must be the same.
Parameter Link ID
Value Range 1-4094
Default Value 1
Description l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to avoid misconnection of radio links between sites. l If this parameter is different from Received Link ID, the NE reports the MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS into the downstream. l Set this parameter according to the planning. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique Link ID, and the Link IDs at both the ends of a radio link should be the same.
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the TX power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the RX level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled in areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission. l To ensure that the TX power does not change during the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled. After the commissioning is complete, you can set this parameter to another value.
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
l The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range. l When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board. l When the function is disabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are used.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
9-5
Parameter TX Frequency (MHz)
Value Range 0-4294967.295
Default Value 0.0
Description l The parameter specifies the channel center frequency. l This parameter cannot be set to a value that is less than the minimum TX frequency supported by the ODU + 50% channel spacing or more than the maximum TX frequency supported by the ODU - 50% channel spacing. l The difference between the TX frequencies of both the ends of a radio link is a T/R spacing. l Set this parameter according to the planning.
Range of Frequency (MHz) TX Power (dBm)
For example: 22017 to 23025 -10.0 to +35.0
-10.0
Sets the range of the transmit frequencies of an ODU board. l This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range supported by the ODU. l The TX power of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link. l Set this parameter according to the planning.
T/R Spacing (MHz)
0-4294967.295
0.0
l This parameter indicates the spacing between the TX frequency and receive frequency of the ODU. If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive power. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive power. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.
9-6
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter TX Status
Value Range mute, unmute
Default Value unmute
Description l When this parameter is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but the ODU can normally receive microwave signals. l When this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU can normally receive and transmit microwave signals. l Generally, this parameter takes the default value.
TX Power (dBm) TX High Threshold TX Low Threshold RX High Threshold RX Low Threshold Range of Power (dBm) Enable AM Channel Space Assured Capacity Modulation
-10.0 to 35.0 -10.0 to 35.0 -10.0 to 35.0 -90.0 to -20.0 -90.0 to -20.0 For example: 12 Enabled, Disabled 7M, 14M, 28M, 56M QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM
Disabled 7M QPSK
Sets the transmit power for a radio frequency port. Sets the higher threshold of the transmitted optical power. Sets the lower threshold of the transmitted optical power. Sets the higher threshold of the received optical power. Sets the lower threshold of the received optical power. Sets the range of the transmitted optical power of the ODU board. Sets the enable statue of AM. Sets the channel spacing of the corresponding radio links. This parameter specifies the lowest modulation scheme that the AM function supports. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid microwave must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. This parameter is valid only when Enable AM is set to Enabled.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
9-7
Parameter Full Capacity Modulation
Value Range QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM
Default Value QPSK
Description This parameter specifies the highest modulation scheme that the AM function supports. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid microwave and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. This parameter is valid only when Enable AM is set to Enabled.
Manually Specified Modulation
QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM
QPSK
This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for the transmission. This parameter is valid only when Enable AM is set to Disabled.
NOTE
The ATPC attributes at both the ends of a radio link should be set to the same.
9.3 Configuring the ATPC Function

To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The related IF board must be added.
Precautions
l l In the case of the IF boards that are configured with the 1+1 protection, set only the ATPC attributes of the main IF board. The following procedure describes the configuration of ATPC parameters in the IF interface configuration dialog box of the IF board. You can also set ATPC parameters in the following configuration dialog boxes: Create an XPIC working group IF/ODU configuration l l In the IF/ODU configuration dialog box, the ATPC adjustment thresholds cannot be modified. The transmit power of the two ODUs that are in an XPIC working group should be the same if possible. Hence, each of the ATPC parameters (ATPC enable status, ATPC upper threshold, ATPC lower threshold, and ATPC adjustment) should be set to the same value for the IF boards that are in an XPIC working group.
9-8
In the case of the Hybrid microwave, the AM switching is controlled through detection of the change in the ATPC information and returned microwave message.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 and RTN 900 V100R002 NEs. 1. 2. 3. Select the IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the ATPC Attributes tab. Set the ATPC attributes.
NOTE
The IF0 board of the RTN 605 does not support the ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status.
4.
Click Apply.
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 V1R1 NEs, see Configuring the IF Attributes of Microwave Interfaces to take the details of configuration. ----End
Parameters
Parameter ATPC Enable Status Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range. l In the case of areas where fast fading is severe, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
9-9
Parameter ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm)
Value Range -20 to -75
Default Value -45
Description l When the ATPC function is enabled, if the RSL at the receive end is higher than the preset ATPC upper threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease the transmit power according to the preset ATPC adjustment step at the transmit end until the RSL is lower than the ATPC upper threshold. l Generally, ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm) should be 20 dB to 30 dB higher than ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm), and must not be less than 15 dB. If the difference between the upper threshold and the lower threshold is big, the number of ATPC adjustments is reduced and the system load is also reduced. If the difference between the upper threshold and the lower threshold is small, the transmit power is adjusted in a timely manner and the interference to adjacent systems is reduced.
ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm)
-35 to -90
-70
l When the ATPC function is enabled, if the RSL at the receive end is lower than the preset ATPC lower threshold, the receiver notifies the transmitter to increase the transmit power according to the preset ATPC adjustment step at the transmit end until the RSL is higher than the ATPC lower threshold. l Generally, set this parameter to a value of 10 dB or greater than the receiver sensitivity to prevent sudden fast fading because sudden fast fading makes the RSL value lower than the receiver sensitivity.
9-10
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Default Value Enabled
Description l The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range. l When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board. l When the function is disabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are used. l The IF0 board of the RTN 605 does not support the ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status.
NOTE
l Set ATPC parameters consistent at the two sides of a hop of microwave link. l During commissioning, set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. l It is recommended that you disable the ATPC function for areas where fast fading is severe. l To prevent that the RSL is lower than the receiver sensitivity caused by sudden fast fading, set the ATPC lower threshold 10 dB or more higher than the receiver sensitivity. l Generally, the ATPC upper threshold should be 20 dB to 30 dB higher than the ATPC lower threshold, and must not be less than 15 dB. If the difference between the upper threshold and the lower threshold is big, the number of ATPC adjustments can be reduced and the system load can also be reduced. If the difference between the upper threshold and the lower threshold is small, the transmit power can be adjusted in a timely manner and the interference to adjacent systems can be reduced. l It is recommended that you set the ATPC adjustment step to 5 dB. l In the case of hybrid radio links, the automatic ATPC threshold is recommended. In the case of SDH/PDH radio links, the automatic ATPC threshold is recommended or you can make adjustment according to multipath fading situation.
9.4 Creating an XPIC Workgroup

When two IF boards that form an XPIC workgroup are installed on an IDU, you can create an XPIC workgroup to ensure that the XPIC workgroup is configured with the same work mode, transmission frequency, TX power, and ATPC attributes.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be created. The XPIC Enabled parameter must be set to Enabled for the IF boards.
Context
l Relation with the 1+1 Protection Configuration: The two IF boards in an XPIC working group cannot be configured into one 1+1 protection group, but the two IF boards in different XPIC working groups can be configured into one 1+1 protection group. Therefore, the four IF boards in two XPIC working groups can form two 1+1 protection groups. Relation with the N+1 Protection: Each member of an XPIC working group can work as the working channel or the protection channel of the N+1 protection. Relation with the ATPC Feature: The transmit power of the two ODUs that are in an XPIC working group should be the same if possible. Hence, each of the ATPC parameters (ATPC enable status, ATPC upper threshold, ATPC lower threshold, and ATPC adjustment) should be set to the same value for the IFX boards that are in an XPIC working group.
l l
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the XPIC tab. Step 3 Click New. Step 4 In the dialog displayed box, Set the parameters for the XPIC workgroup. For RTN 600 NEs:
NOTE
l When CCDP is applied to the STM-1 microwave links, the IFX/IFX2 boards must be installed and the XPIC function must be enabled. l An XPIC working group must be configured to ensure that the XPIC working group is configured with the same working mode, transmission frequency, transmit power, and ATPC attributes. l When the used ODUs support two T/R spacings, ensure that the two ODUs of an XPIC working group adopt the same T/R spacing.
9-12
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Postrequisite
Generally, you do not need to configure the IF/ODU information after you configure an XPIC workgroup. You, however, need to set the T/R spacing used by the ODU in the IF/ODU Configuration tab page if the used ODU supports two T/R spacings.
9.5 Configuring the Hybrid/AM Attribute

The Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 services and Ethernet services and supports the adaptive modulation (AM) function. Hence, the Hybrid microwave ensures the reliable transmission of the E1 services and flexible transmission of the Ethernet services whose bandwidth is large and changes dynamically.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the target Hybrid IF board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > Hybrid/ AM Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. Step 3 Set the parameters related to the Hybrid/AM function.
Step 4 Optional: In the case of a card that supports the function of enabling E1 priority, click the Advanced Attributes tab to set the minimum number of E1 services in different modulation modes and check the bandwidth of data services. Step 5 Click Apply. ----End
9.6 Hop Management

The Hop management is based on per link and the equipment at the two ends of a link is managed at the same time. 9.6.1 Introduction to the Hop Management Based on Hop management, the system can simultaneously display the information of the two ends of a link. Thus, you can view and set the information of a hop in an easy manner. The Hop management supports the functions such as the setting and query of the intermediate frequency (IF) and radio frequency (RF) information, and the configuration of services and protection. 9.6.2 Starting HOP Management Based on HOP management, the system can simultaneously display the information of the two ends of a link. By selecting an IF card, you can switch to the radio link in the corresponding
direction and search out the peer NE quickly. The HOP management integrates all functions in one GUI, in which a user can perform all maintenance operations.
9.6.1 Introduction to the Hop Management

Based on Hop management, the system can simultaneously display the information of the two ends of a link. Thus, you can view and set the information of a hop in an easy manner. The Hop management supports the functions such as the setting and query of the intermediate frequency (IF) and radio frequency (RF) information, and the configuration of services and protection. The Hop management function is used to view and set the information based on a pair of equipment, one of which transmits signals and the other receives signals. In the case of the radio equipment, the configuration parameters are complicated. You need to ensure the consistency of parameters between the equipment at the two ends of a radio link. By using the Hop management function, you can perform operations on the equipment at the two ends of a link at the same time. This facilitates the parameter configuration. In Figure 9-2, a radio link represents a hop. Figure 9-2 Radio link
The Hop management is based on per link and the equipment at the two ends of a link is managed at the same time. This ensures the consistency of configuration data between NEs at the two ends.
9.6.2 Starting HOP Management

Based on HOP management, the system can simultaneously display the information of the two ends of a link. By selecting an IF card, you can switch to the radio link in the corresponding direction and search out the peer NE quickly. The HOP management integrates all functions in one GUI, in which a user can perform all maintenance operations.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The radio link must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 and RTN 900 V1R2 NEs. 1. 2.
9-14
In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. 4.
Select the IF board, right-click, and choose HOP Management from the shortcut menu. In the HOP Management window, choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Then, click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Double click the NE on the main topology, select the IF board in the NE panel, right-click, and choose HOP Management from the shortcut menu. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Microwave Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 V1R1 NEs 1. 2.
Step 3 In the IF/ODU Configuration tab, set the related parameters.
CAUTION
Modifying the value of Transmit Frequency interrupts the link. Exercise caution when you perform this operation. Step 4 Click Apply. ----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
9-15
10 Configuring Board 1+1 Protection
10
Configuring Board 1+1 Protection
About This Chapter

BPS is a protection mode based on the board. BPS requires two boards: active and standby. When a link is down or a hardware failure is detected on the active board at any port, services are switched from the active board to the protection board. In this way, services are protected. 10.1 Querying Board 1+1 Protection Group After a redundant board is created, the equipment automatically configures a board 1+1 protection group. You can view the configuration information of the protection group. 10.2 Verifying the Board 1+1 Protection Switching By using the U2000, you can perform or clear protection switching for a board. During deployment and commissioning, you can perform switching to test whether the board protection switching works properly. In fault maintenance, you can perform this operation to locate faults.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
10-1
10.1 Querying Board 1+1 Protection Group

After a redundant board is created, the equipment automatically configures a board 1+1 protection group. You can view the configuration information of the protection group.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query to query the configuration of the board 1+1 protection group. ----End
10.2 Verifying the Board 1+1 Protection Switching

By using the U2000, you can perform or clear protection switching for a board. During deployment and commissioning, you can perform switching to test whether the board protection switching works properly. In fault maintenance, you can perform this operation to locate faults.
Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The 1+1 board protection group must be available. The protection board works properly.
Context
CAUTION
If the protection board is abnormal, services may be interrupted when you perform switching.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query to view the active board and the current working board. Step 3 Select a 1+1 protection group and click Working/Protection Switching. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click Close.
Step 6 Click Query to refresh the switching status of the 1+1 protection group.
NOTE
In the case of SCC protection pair, you can query standby status of the SCC board.
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
10-3
11 Configuring the IF 1+1 Protection
11
Configuring the IF 1+1 Protection
About This Chapter

The IF 1+1 protection includes the 1+1 HSB protection, 1+1 FD protection, and 1+1 SD protection. 11.1 1+1 HSB 1+1 HSB is a configuration mode of 1+1 protection. The equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at the two ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection by using the 1+1 HSB. 11.2 1+1 FD 1+1 FD is a configuration mode of 1+1 protection. In the 1+1 FD protection mode, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same service signal. The opposite end selects signals from the two received signals. With the 1+1 FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. 11.3 1+1 SD 1+1 SD is a configuration mode of 1+1 protection. In the 1+1 SD protection mode, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same RF signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With the 1+1 SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. 11.4 Creating IF 1+1 Protection If the microwave link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need to create the corresponding IF 1+1 protection group. 11.5 Modifying the Parameters of IF 1+1 Protection The working mode and other parameters of the protection group can be modified.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
11-1
11.1 1+1 HSB

1+1 HSB is a configuration mode of 1+1 protection. The equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at the two ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection by using the 1+1 HSB. 11.1.1 Feature Description This topic describes the 1+1 HSB protection through its application. 11.1.2 Availability The 1+1 HSB feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 11.1.3 Relation with Other Features The 1+1 HSB protection is related to the microwave work mode, 1+1 FD protection, 1+1 SD protection, XPIC feature, N+1 protection, SNCP, and Hybrid microwave. 11.1.4 Realization Principle The realization principle of the 1+1 HSB for the Hybrid microwave is different from the realization principle of the 1+1 HSB for the SDH/PDH microwave. 11.1.5 Planning Guide In the case of the radio links whose transmission performance is slightly affected by multipath fading, it is recommended that you adopt the 1+1 HSB protection configuration.
11.1.1 Feature Description

This topic describes the 1+1 HSB protection through its application. Figure 11-1 shows application of the 1+1 HSB protection. Figure 11-1 1+1 HSB protection
Main channel Main channel
MODEM Service MODEM
Transmitter
Transmitter
MODEM Service
Transmitter
Transmitter
MODEM
Standby channel
Standby channel
In the case of the 1+1 HSB protection configuration, the main channel of the transmit end transmits the RF signal to the opposite end. the main channel and standby channel of receive end received the same RF signal respectively. When the main channel if faulty, the service unit of receive end receives the signal from the standby channel. In this manner, the protection switching is realized.
11.1.2 Availability
The 1+1 HSB feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards.
Table 11-1 Availability of the 1+1 HSB feature Applicable Board IF0A/IF0B IF1A/IF1B IFX IFH2 RTN 620 Applicable Equipment RTN 605
Table 11-2 Availability of the 1+1 HSB feature Applicable Board IFE2 IF1 IFU2 IFX2 RTN 910/950 Applicable Equipment
11.1.3 Relation with Other Features

The 1+1 HSB protection is related to the microwave work mode, 1+1 FD protection, 1+1 SD protection, XPIC feature, N+1 protection, SNCP, and Hybrid microwave. l l The 18)2E1,3.5MHz,QPSK work mode does not support 1+1 HSB protection. The configuration mode of 1+1 protection in one direction can only be 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, or 1+1 SD. The configuration mode in one direction can be different from that in another direction. The two IF boards in an XPIC working group cannot be configured into one 1+1 HSB protection group, but the two IF boards in different XPIC working groups can be configured into one 1+1 HSB protection group. Therefore, the four IF boards in two XPIC working groups can form two 1+1 HSB protection groups. The IF boards in a 1+1 HSB protection group cannot be configured to provide the N+1 protection. The radio link with the 1+1 HSB configuration can work only as the service sink of an SNCP service pair, and cannot work as the working source or the protection source. The Hybrid microwave supports the 1+1 HSB protection.
l l l
11.1.4 Realization Principle

The realization principle of the 1+1 HSB for the Hybrid microwave is different from the realization principle of the 1+1 HSB for the SDH/PDH microwave.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
11-3
11.1.4.1 SDH/PDH Microwave This topic considers the configuration with one 1+1 HSB protection group as an example to describe the principle of the 1+1 HSB protection switching for the SDH/PDH microwave. 11.1.4.2 Hybrid Microwave This topic considers the configuration with one 1+1 HSB protection group as an example to describe the principle of the 1+1 HSB protection switching for the Hybrid microwave.
11.1.4.1 SDH/PDH Microwave

This topic considers the configuration with one 1+1 HSB protection group as an example to describe the principle of the 1+1 HSB protection switching for the SDH/PDH microwave.
Before the Switching

Figure 11-2 1+1 HSB realization principle (before the switching, in the transmit direction)
Main ODU Main Cross-connect IF board board Service board
Antenna
Hybrid coupler
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
In the transmit direction: 1. 2. 3. 4. The service board sends the received service signal to the cross-connect board. The cross-connect board transmits the service signal to both the main IF board and the standby IF board. The main IF board and the standby IF board send the processed analog IF signal to the main ODU and the standby ODU respectively. The main ODU transmits the RF signal to the hybrid coupler, which sends the RF signal to the antenna. The standby ODU mutes (that is, the standby ODU does not send the RF signal).
Figure 11-3 1+1 HSB realization principle (before the switching, in the receive direction)
Antenna
Hybrid coupler
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
11-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
In the receive direction: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The hybrid coupler splits the RF signal received from the antenna to two signals and sends them to both the main ODU and the standby ODU. The main ODU and the standby ODU send the processed analog IF signal to the main IF board and the standby IF board respectively. The main IF board and the standby IF board send the service signal to the cross-connect board. The cross-connect board selects the service signal from the main IF board and sends the signal to the service board. The service board sends the service signal to the equipment at the opposite end.
After the Switching

Figure 11-4 1+1 HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)
Antenna
Hybrid coupler
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
Figure 11-5 1+1 HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the transmit direction)
Antenna
Hybrid coupler
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
After a 1+1 HSB switching: l In the receive direction, the cross-connect board selects the service signal from the standby IF board.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
11-5
In the transmit direction, the standby ODU transmits the RF signal to the hybrid coupler, which sends the RF signal to the antenna. The main ODU mutes (that is, the main ODU does not send the RF signal).
NOTE
In the case of the RTN 605, the multiplexing sub-unit that is embedded in the IF unit replaces the cross-connect unit of the IDU 620 to realize the dual fed and selective receiving function.
11.1.4.2 Hybrid Microwave

This topic considers the configuration with one 1+1 HSB protection group as an example to describe the principle of the 1+1 HSB protection switching for the Hybrid microwave.

Figure 11-6 1+1 HSB realization principle (before the switching, in the transmit direction)
Main ODU Main IF board Cross-connect board Service board
Hybrid coupler Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
EMS6 board
In the transmit direction: 1. 2. 3. The service board multiplexes the received E1 service signal into the VC-4 and then sends the VC-4 to the cross-connect board. The cross-connect board transmits the E1 service signal tin the VC-4 o the main IF board and the standby IF board. The Ethernet service port of the main IF board is in LinkUp state, whereas the Ethernet service port of the standby IF board is in LinkDown state. The Ethernet board EMS6 transmits the Ethernet service to the Ethernet service port of the main IF board through the LAG function. The MUX unit of the main IF board multiplexes the E1 service signal and Ethernet service signal into the Hybrid microwave frame. The MUX unit of the standby IF board multiplexes the E1 service signal and Ethernet service signal into the non-standard Hybrid microwave frame. The IF processing units of the main IF board and the standby IF board receive the Hybrid microwave frame that is multiplexed by their corresponding IF board and modulate the Hybrid microwave frame into the analog IF signal. Then, the IF processing units of the
4.
5.
11-6
main IF board and the standby IF board send the analog IF signal to the main ODU and the standby ODU respectively. 6. The main ODU transmits the RF signal to the hybrid coupler, which sends the RF signal to the antenna. The standby ODU is muted (that is, the standby ODU does not transmit the RF signal).
Figure 11-7 1+1 HSB realization principle (before the switching, in the receive direction)
Main ODU Hybrid coupler Antenna Main IF board Cross-connect board Service board
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
EMS6 board
In the receive direction: 1. 2. 3. 4. The hybrid coupler splits the RF signal received from the antenna into two signals and sends them to the main ODU and the standby ODU. The main ODU and the standby ODU send the processed analog IF signal to the main IF board and the standby IF board respectively. The main IF board and the standby IF board demodulate the Hybrid frame from the IF signal. The MUX units of the main IF board and the standby IF board receive the Hybrid frame that is demultiplexed from their corresponding IF board and then separate the Hybrid frame into the E1 service signal and Ethernet service signal. The E1 service signal is transmitted to the cross-connect board after being multiplexed into the VC-4. The Ethernet service signal is transmitted to the Ethernet service port of the IF board. The cross-connect board receives the E1 service signal from the main IF board and crossconnects the service signal to the corresponding service board. The EMS6 board receives the Ethernet service signal from the main IF board because the Ethernet service port of the main IF board is in LinkUp state whereas the Ethernet service port of the standby IF board is in LinkDown state.
5.
6. 7.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
11-7
After the Switching

Figure 11-8 1+1 HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)
Main ODU Hybrid coupler Antenna Main IF board Cross-connect board Service board
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
EMS6 board
Main ODU Main IF board Cross-connect board Service board
Hybrid coupler Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
EMS6 board
After a 1+1 HSB switching: l In the receive direction: The analog IF signal received at the standby IF board is separated into the E1 service signal and Ethernet service signal by the MUX unit. The Ethernet service port of the main IF board is in LinkDown state and the Ethernet service port of the standby IF board is in LinkUp state. The cross-connect board and the EMS6 board receive the service signal from the standby IF board. l In the transmit direction: The Ethernet service port of the main IF board is in LinkDown state and the Ethernet service port of the standby IF board is in LinkUp state. The IF processing units of the main IF board and the standby IF board modulate the Hybrid microwave frame that is multiplexed by the MUX unit of their corresponding IF board into the analog IF signal. The main IF board and
the standby IF board send the analog IF signal to the main ODU and the standby ODU. The standby ODU transmits the RF signal to the hybrid coupler, which sends the RF signal to the antenna. The main ODU is muted (that is, the main ODU does not transmit the RF signal).
NOTE
l The two built-in IF units of theRTN 605 realize the functions of two IF boards of the RTN 620.
11.1.5 Planning Guide

In the case of the radio links whose transmission performance is slightly affected by multipath fading, it is recommended that you adopt the 1+1 HSB protection configuration.
Procedure
Step 1 Plan the parameters relevant to the protection configuration. l If the protection is in the revertive mode, set the WTR time to a value, which ranges from five minutes to twelve minutes. It is recommended that you set the value to ten minutes. l It is recommended that you enable the reverse switching. If reverse switching is enabled, and both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report a service alarm, a reverse switching occurs at the source end. l In the case of the RTN 620, although the 1+1 HSB protection has no restriction on the slot of the IF board, it is recommended that you install a pair of main and standby IF boards in slots 5 and 7 (the IF board in slot 5 is the main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IF board in slot 6 is the main board). ----End
11.2 1+1 FD
1+1 FD is a configuration mode of 1+1 protection. In the 1+1 FD protection mode, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same service signal. The opposite end selects signals from the two received signals. With the 1+1 FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. 11.2.1 Feature Description This topic describes the 1+1 FD protection through its application. 11.2.2 Availability The 1+1 FD feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 11.2.3 Relation with Other Features The 1+1 FD protection is related to the microwave work mode, 1+1 HSB protection, 1+1 SD protection, XPIC feature, N+1 protection, SNCP, and Hybrid microwave. 11.2.4 Realization Principle The realization principle of the 1+1 FD for the Hybrid microwave is different from the realization principle of the 1+1 FD for the SDH/PDH microwave. 11.2.5 Planning Guide If there are sufficient spectrum resources, it is recommended that you adopt the 1+1 FD protection configuration.

This topic describes the 1+1 FD protection through its application. Figure 11-10 shows the application of the 1+1 FD protection. Figure 11-10 1+1 FD protection
Main channel Main channel
MODEM
Transmitter F1 F1 F2
Transmitter
MODEM
Service MODEM Transmitter
F2
Service Transmitter MODEM
Standby channel
Standby channel
In the case of the 1+1 FD protection configuration, the main channel and the standby channel of the receive end receive RF signals of different frequencies which from the transmit end respectively. When the quality of the microwave signal received by the main antenna is degraded, bit errors occur in the service on the main channel. The service unit then receives the service signal from the standby channel to protect the service. In addition, the 1+1 FD protection supports the 1+1 HSB protection switching.
11.2.2 Availability
The 1+1 FD feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 11-3 Availability of the 1+1 FD feature Applicable Board IF0A/IF0B IF1A/IF1B IFX IFH2 RTN 620 Applicable Equipment RTN 605
Table 11-4 Availability of the 1+1 FD feature Applicable Board IFE2

11-10
Applicable Equipment RTN 910/950
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Applicable Board IF1 IFU2 IFX2
Applicable Equipment

The 1+1 FD protection is related to the microwave work mode, 1+1 HSB protection, 1+1 SD protection, XPIC feature, N+1 protection, SNCP, and Hybrid microwave. l l The 18)2E1,3.5MHz,QPSK work mode does not support 1+1 FD protection. The configuration mode of 1+1 protection in one direction can only be 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, or 1+1 SD. The configuration mode in one direction can be different from that in another direction. The two IF boards in an XPIC working group cannot be configured into one 1+1 FD protection group, but the two IF boards in different XPIC working groups can be configured into one 1+1 FD protection group. Therefore, the four IF boards in two XPIC working groups can form two 1+1 FD protection groups. The IF boards in a 1+1 FD protection group cannot be configured to provide the N+1 protection. The radio link with the 1+1 FD configuration can work only as the service sink of an SNCP service pair, and cannot work as the working source or the protection source. The Hybrid microwave supports the 1+1 FD protection.
l l l

The realization principle of the 1+1 FD for the Hybrid microwave is different from the realization principle of the 1+1 FD for the SDH/PDH microwave. 11.2.4.1 SDH/PDH Microwave This topic considers the configuration with one 1+1 FD protection group as an example to describe the principle of the 1+1 FD protection switching for the SDH/PDH microwave. 11.2.4.2 Hybrid Microwave This topic considers the IDU 620 that is configured with one 1+1 FD protection group as an example to describe the principle of the 1+1 FD protection switching for the Hybrid microwave.

This topic considers the configuration with one 1+1 FD protection group as an example to describe the principle of the 1+1 FD protection switching for the SDH/PDH microwave.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
11-11

Figure 11-11 1+1 FD realization principle (before the switching, in the transmit direction)
Antenna f1 Main ODU Main Cross-connect IF board board Service board
f2
Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
In the transmit direction: 1. 2. 3. 4. The service board sends the received service signal to the cross-connect board. The cross-connect board transmits the service signal to both the main IF board and the standby IF board. The main IF board and the standby IF board send the processed analog IF signal to the main ODU and the standby ODU respectively. The main ODU and the standby ODU transmit RF signals at different frequencies and send the signals to their respective antennas.
Figure 11-12 1+1 FD realization principle (before the switching, in the receive direction)
Antenna Main ODU Main IF board Cross-connect board Service board
Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
In the receive direction: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The antennas receive RF signals and send the signals to their respective ODUs. The main ODU and the standby ODU send the processed analog IF signal to the main IF board and the standby IF board respectively. The multiplex unit of the IF board sends the processed baseband signal to itself and to the multiplex unit of its paired board. The main IF board and the standby IF board select their own baseband signal. The cross-connect board selects the service signal from the main IF board and sends the signal to the service board.
11-12
6.
The service board sends the service signal to the equipment at the opposite end.
After the Switching

Figure 11-13 1+1 FD HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)
Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
After a 1+1 FD HSB switching: l l In the receive direction, the IF boards select their own service signal. The cross-connect board selects the signal from the standby IF board. In the transmit direction, no processing is required.
Figure 11-14 1+1 FD HSM realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)
Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
After a 1+1 FD HSM switching: l l In the receive direction, the IF boards select the baseband signal from their own paired IF board. In the transmit direction, no processing is required.
NOTE
l The two built-in IF units of the IDU 605 2B/2F realize the functions of two IF boards of the IDU 620. l The multiplexing sub-unit that is embedded in the IF unit of the IDU 605 2B/2F realizes the functions of the cross-connect board of the IDU 620.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
11-13

This topic considers the IDU 620 that is configured with one 1+1 FD protection group as an example to describe the principle of the 1+1 FD protection switching for the Hybrid microwave.

Figure 11-15 1+1 FD realization principle (before the switching, in the transmit direction)
Antenna f1 Main ODU Main IF board Cross-connect board Service board
f2 Antenna Standby ODU Standby IF board EMS6 board
In the transmit direction: 1. 2. 3. The service board multiplexes the received E1 service signal into the VC-4 and then sends the VC-4 to the cross-connect board. The cross-connect board transmits the E1 service signal in the VC-4 to the main IF board and the standby IF board. The Ethernet service port of the main IF board is in LinkUp state, whereas the Ethernet service port of the standby IF board is in LinkDown state. The Ethernet board EMS6 transmits the Ethernet service to the Ethernet service port of the main IF board through the LAG function. The MUX unit of the main IF board multiplexes the E1 service signal and Ethernet service signal into the Hybrid microwave frame. The MUX unit of the standby IF board multiplexes the E1 service signal and Ethernet service signal into the non-standard Hybrid microwave frame. The IF processing units of the main IF board and the standby IF board receive the Hybrid microwave frame that is multiplexed by the main IF board and modulate the Hybrid microwave frame into the analog IF signal. Then, the IF processing units of the main IF board and the standby IF board send the analog IF signal to the main ODU and the standby ODU respectively. The main ODU transmits the RF signal at frequency f1 to the main antenna. The standby ODU transmits the RF signal at frequency f2 to the standby antenna.
4.
5.
6.
11-14
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 11-16 1+1 FD realization principle (before the switching, in the receive direction)
Antenna
f2
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
EMS6 board
In the receive direction: 1. 2. 3. The antennas receive RF signals at different frequencies and send the signals to their corresponding main ODU and standby ODU. The main ODU and the standby ODU send the processed analog IF signal to the main IF board and the standby IF board respectively. The main IF board and the standby IF board demodulate the Hybrid frame from the IF signal. The Hybrid microwave frame of the standby IF board is transmitted to the main IF board through the protection bus. The MUX units of the main IF board and the standby IF board receive the Hybrid frame that is demultiplexed from their corresponding IF board and then separate the Hybrid frame into the E1 service signal and Ethernet service signal. The E1 service signal is transmitted to the cross-connect board after being multiplexed into the VC-4. The Ethernet service signal is transmitted to the Ethernet service port of the IF board. The cross-connect board receives the E1 service signal from the main IF board and crossconnects the service signal to the corresponding service board. The EMS6 board receives the Ethernet service signal from the main IF board because the Ethernet service port of the main IF board is in LinkUp state whereas the Ethernet service port of the standby IF board is in LinkDown state.
4.
5.
6. 7.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
11-15
After the Switching

f2 Antenna Standby ODU Standby IF board EMS6 board
Figure 11-18 1+1 FD HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)
Antenna
f2
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
EMS6 board
After a 1+1 FD HSB switching: l In the transmit direction: The Ethernet service port of the main IF board is in LinkDown state and the Ethernet service port of the standby IF board is in LinkUp state. The IF processing units of the main IF board and the standby IF board modulate the Hybrid microwave frame that is multiplexed by the MUX unit of their corresponding IF board into the analog IF signal. The main IF board and the standby IF board send the analog IF signal to the main ODU and the standby ODU respectively. The main ODU transmits the RF signal at frequency f1 to the main antenna and the standby ODU transmits the RF signal at frequency f2 to the standby antenna.
In the receive direction: The Hybrid microwave frame demultiplexed by the main IF board is transmitted to the standby IF board through the protection bus. The MUX unit of the main IF board receives the Hybrid microwave frame that is multiplexed by the main IF board and then separates the Hybrid microwave frame into the E1 service signal and Ethernet service signal. The MUX unit of the standby IF board receives the Hybrid microwave frame that is multiplexed by the standby board and then separates the Hybrid microwave frame into the E1 service signal and Ethernet service signal. The Ethernet service port of the main IF board is in LinkDown state and the Ethernet service port of the standby IF board is in LinkUp state. The cross-connect board and the EMS6 board receive the service signal from the standby IF board.
Figure 11-19 1+1 FD HSM realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)
Antenna
f2
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
EMS6 board
After a 1+1 FD HSM switching: l l In the transmit direction, no processing is required. In the receive direction: The MUX unit of the main IF board receives the demodulated Hybrid signal frame that is transmitted from the standby IF board through the protection bus and then separates the Hybrid microwave frame into the E1 service signal and Ethernet service signal. The crossconnect board and the EMS6 board receive the service signal from the main IF board.
NOTE
l The two built-in IF units of the IDU 605 2F realize the functions of two IF boards of the IDU 620.

If there are sufficient spectrum resources, it is recommended that you adopt the 1+1 FD protection configuration.
Procedure
Step 1 Plan the parameters relevant to the protection configuration.
l If the protection is in the revertive mode, set the WTR time to a value, which ranges from five minutes to twelve minutes. It is recommended that you set the value to ten minutes. l The spacing between the emission frequency of the main ODU and that of the standby ODU should be greater than 56 MHz to prevent adjacent-channel interference. l In the case of the RTN 620, a pair of main and standby IF boards must be installed in slots 5 and 7 (the IF board in slot 5 is the main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IF board in slot 6 is the main board). In the case of the RTN 605 , the active/standby relation of the IF unit is fixed. Hence, planning is not required. ----End
11.3 1+1 SD
1+1 SD is a configuration mode of 1+1 protection. In the 1+1 SD protection mode, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same RF signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With the 1+1 SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. 11.3.1 Feature Description This topic describes the 1+1 FD protection through its application. 11.3.2 Availability The 1+1 SD feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 11.3.3 Relation with Other Features The 1+1 SD protection is related to the microwave work mode, 1+1 HSB protection, 1+1 SD protection, XPIC feature, N+1 protection, SNCP, and Hybrid microwave. 11.3.4 Realization Principle The realization principle of the 1+1 SD for the Hybrid microwave is different from the realization principle of the 1+1 SD for the SDH/PDH microwave. 11.3.5 Planning Guide In the case of the radio links whose transmission performance is significantly affected by multipath fading, it is recommended that you adopt the 1+1 SD protection configuration.

This topic describes the 1+1 FD protection through its application. Figure 11-20 shows the application of the 1+1 SD protection. Figure 11-20 1+1 SD protection
Main channel
T1 T2 T1
Main channel
T2
MODEM Service MODEM
Transmitter
Transmitter
MODEM Service
Transmitter
T2 T1
Transmitter
MODEM
Standby channel
Standby channel
11-18
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
In the case of the 1+1 SD protection configuration, the two antennas at the receive end receive the same RF signals from the transmit end. When the quality of the microwave signal that is received by the main antenna is degraded, bit errors may occur in the service on the main channel. Due to the space diversity, the signal that is received by the standby antenna may not be degraded. In this case, the service unit receives the service from the standby receive channel to protect the service. In addition, the 1+1 SD protection supports the 1+1 HSB protection switching.
11.3.2 Availability
The 1+1 SD feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 11-5 Availability of the 1+1 SD feature Applicable Board IF0A/IF0B IF1A/IF1B IFX IFH2 RTN 620 Applicable Equipment RTN 605
Table 11-6 Availability of the 1+1 SD feature Applicable Board IFE2 IF1 IFU2 IFX2 RTN 910/950 Applicable Equipment

The 1+1 SD protection is related to the microwave work mode, 1+1 HSB protection, 1+1 SD protection, XPIC feature, N+1 protection, SNCP, and Hybrid microwave. l l The 18)2E1,3.5MHz,QPSK work mode does not support 1+1 SD protection. The configuration mode of 1+1 protection in one direction can only be 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, or 1+1 SD. The configuration mode in one direction can be different from that in another direction. The two IF boards in an XPIC working group cannot be configured into one 1+1 SD protection group, but the two IF boards in different XPIC working groups can be configured
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
into one 1+1 SD protection group. Therefore, the four IF boards in two XPIC working groups can form two 1+1 SD protection groups. l l l The IF boards in a 1+1 SD protection group cannot be configured to provide the N+1 protection. The radio link with the 1+1 SD configuration can work only as the service sink of an SNCP service pair, and cannot work as the working source or the protection source. The Hybrid microwave supports the 1+1 SD protection switching.

The realization principle of the 1+1 SD for the Hybrid microwave is different from the realization principle of the 1+1 SD for the SDH/PDH microwave. 11.3.4.1 SDH/PDH Microwave This topic considers the configuration with one 1+1 SD protection group as an example to describe the principle of the 1+1 SD protection switching for the SDH/PDH microwave. 11.3.4.2 Hybrid Microwave This topic considers the configuration with one 1+1 SD protection group as an example to describe the principle of the 1+1 SD protection switching for the Hybrid microwave.

This topic considers the configuration with one 1+1 SD protection group as an example to describe the principle of the 1+1 SD protection switching for the SDH/PDH microwave.

Figure 11-21 1+1 SD realization principle (before the switching, in the transmit direction)
Antenna Main ODU Main Cross-connect board IF board Service board
Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
In the transmit direction: 1. 2. 3. The service board sends the received service signal to the cross-connect board. The cross-connect board transmits the service signal to both the main IF board and the standby IF board. The main IF board and the standby IF board send the processed analog IF signal to the main ODU and the standby ODU respectively.
11-20
4.
The main ODU transmits the RF signal to the hybrid coupler, which sends the RF signal to the antenna. The standby ODU mutes (that is, the standby ODU does not send the RF signal).
Figure 11-22 1+1 SD realization principle (before the switching, in the receive direction)
Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
In the receive direction: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. The antennas receive RF signals and send the signals to their respective ODUs. The main ODU and the standby ODU send the processed analog IF signal to the main IF board and the standby IF board respectively. The multiplex unit of the IF board sends the processed baseband signal to itself and to the multiplex unit of its paired board. The main IF board and the standby IF board select their own baseband signal. The cross-connect board selects the service signal from the main IF board and sends the signal to the service board. The service board sends the service signal to the equipment at the opposite end.
After the Switching

Figure 11-23 1+1 SD HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)
Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
11-21
Figure 11-24 1+1 SD HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the transmit direction)
Antenna Main ODU Main Cross-connect IF board board Service board
Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
After a 1+1 SD HSB switching: l l In the receive direction, the IF boards select their own service signal. The cross-connect board selects the signal from the standby IF board. In the transmit direction, the standby ODU transmits the RF signal to the hybrid coupler, which sends the RF signal to the antenna. The main ODU mutes (that is, the main ODU does not send the RF signal).
Figure 11-25 1+1 SD HSM realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)
Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
After a 1+1 SD HSM switching: l l In the receive direction, the IF boards select the baseband signal from their own paired IF board. In the transmit direction, no processing is required.
NOTE
l The two built-in IF units of the IDU 605 2B/2F realize the functions of two IF boards of the IDU 620. l The multiplexing sub-unit that is embedded in the IF unit of the IDU 605 2B/2F realizes the functions of the cross-connect board of the IDU 620.

This topic considers the configuration with one 1+1 SD protection group as an example to describe the principle of the 1+1 SD protection switching for the Hybrid microwave.

Figure 11-26 1+1 SD realization principle (before the switching, in the transmit direction)
Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
EMS6 board
In the transmit direction: 1. 2. 3. The service board multiplexes the received E1 service signal into the VC-4 and then sends the VC-4 to the cross-connect board. The cross-connect board transmits the E1 service signal in the VC-4 to the main IF board and the standby IF board. The Ethernet service port of the main IF board is in LinkUp state, whereas the Ethernet service port of the standby IF board is in LinkDown state. The Ethernet board EMS6 transmits the Ethernet service to the Ethernet service port of the main IF board through the LAG function. The MUX unit of the main IF board multiplexes the E1 service signal and Ethernet service signal into the Hybrid microwave frame. The MUX unit of the standby IF board multiplexes the E1 service signal and Ethernet service signal into the non-standard Hybrid microwave frame. The IF processing units of the main IF board and the standby IF board receive the Hybrid microwave frame that is multiplexed by the main IF board and modulate the Hybrid microwave frame into the analog IF signal. Then, the IF processing units of the main IF board and the standby IF board send the analog IF signal to the main ODU and the standby ODU respectively. The main ODU transmits the RF signal to the antenna. The standby ODU is muted (that is, the standby ODU does not transmit the RF signal).
4.
5.
6.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
11-23
Figure 11-27 1+1 SD realization principle (before the switching, in the receive direction)
Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
EMS6 board
In the receive direction: 1. 2. 3. The antennas receive RF signals and transmit the signals to their corresponding main ODU and standby ODU. The main ODU and the standby ODU send the processed analog IF signal to the main IF board and the standby IF board respectively. The main IF board and the standby IF board demodulate the IF signal into the Hybrid microwave frame. The Hybrid microwave frame of the standby IF board is transmitted to the main IF board through the protection bus. The MUX units of the main IF board and the standby IF board receive the Hybrid frame that is demultiplexed from their corresponding IF board and then separate the Hybrid frame into the E1 service signal and Ethernet service signal. The E1 service signal is transmitted to the cross-connect board after being multiplexed into the VC-4. The Ethernet service signal is transmitted to the Ethernet service port of the IF board. The cross-connect board receives the E1 service signal from the main IF board and crossconnects the service signal to the corresponding service board. The EMS6 board receives the Ethernet service signal from the main IF board because the Ethernet service port of the main IF board is in LinkUp state whereas the Ethernet service port of the standby IF board is in LinkDown state.
4.
5.
6. 7.
11-24
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
After the Switching

Figure 11-28 1+1 SD HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)
Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
EMS6 board
Figure 11-29 1+1 SD HSB realization principle (after the switching, in the transmit direction)
Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
EMS6 board
After a 1+1 SD HSB switching: l In the receive direction: The MUX unit of the standby IF board receives the Hybrid microwave frame that is multiplexed by the standby IF board. The cross-connect board receives the E1 service signal that is demultiplexed from the Hybrid microwave frame received at the standby IF board and cross-connects the E1 service signal to the corresponding service board. The EMS6 board receives the Ethernet service signal from the standby IF board because the Ethernet service port of the main IF board is in LinkDown state and the Ethernet service port of the standby IF board is in LinkUp state.
In the transmit direction: The Ethernet service port of the main IF board is in LinkDown state. The Ethernet service port of the standby IF board is in LinkUp state. The main IF board and the standby IF board receive the Hybrid microwave frame that is multiplexed by the standby IF board and then transmit the modulated Hybrid microwave frame to the main ODU and the standby ODU respectively. The standby ODU transmits the RF signal to the antenna. The main ODU is muted (that is, the main ODU does not transmit the RF signal).
Figure 11-30 1+1 SD HSM realization principle (after the switching, in the receive direction)
Antenna
Standby ODU
Standby IF board
EMS6 board
After a 1+1 SD HSM switching: l l In the transmit direction, no processing is required. In the receive direction: The MUX unit of the main IF board receives the demodulated Hybrid signal frame that is transmitted from the standby IF board through the protection bus and then separates the Hybrid microwave frame into the E1 service signal and Ethernet service signal. The crossconnect board and the EMS6 board receive the service signal from the main IF board.
NOTE
The two built-in IF units of the IDU 605 2F realize the functions of two IF boards of the IDU 620.

In the case of the radio links whose transmission performance is significantly affected by multipath fading, it is recommended that you adopt the 1+1 SD protection configuration.
Procedure
Step 1 Plan the parameters relevant to the protection configuration. l There should be a height difference between the two antennas so that the dependence of the diversity-received microwave signals on the space is minimized. l If the protection is in the revertive mode, set the WTR time to a value, which ranges from five minutes to twelve minutes. It is recommended that you set the value to ten minutes.
l It is recommended that you enable the reverse switching. If reverse switching is enabled, and both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report a service alarm, a reverse switching occurs at the source end. l In the case of the IDU 620, a pair of main and standby IF boards must be installed in slots 5 and 7 (the IF board in slot 5 is the main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IF board in slot 6 is the main board). In the case of the IDU 605 2B/2F, the active/standby relation of the IF unit is fixed. Hence, planning is not required. ----End
11.4 Creating IF 1+1 Protection

If the microwave link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need to create the corresponding IF 1+1 protection group.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The IF boards and their corresponding ODUs that form the IF 1+1 protection must be included in the NE Panel.
When a 1+0 service is converted into a 1+1 service by configuring the 1+1 protection, the original services are not interrupted.
Precautions
The 18,2E1,3.5MHz,QPSK work mode does not support IF 1+1 protection.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 and RTN 900 V100R002/V100R001C02 NEs. 1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Click New. Set the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group in the displaying dialog box.
3. 1.
Click OK. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Microwave Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 V100R001C00 and RTN 900 V100R001C01 NEs.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2. 3. 4.
Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab. Click New. Set the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group in the displaying dialog box. Click OK.
----End
Postrequisite
l In the case of the 1+1 HSB protection and 1+1 SD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the active microwave link later. The standby microwave link automatically copies the related information of the active microwave link except the transmission status of the ODU. In the case of the 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the active microwave link and the information of the standby ODU later. The standby microwave link automatically copies the IF information of the active microwave link.
NOTE
The default TX Status of an ODU is Unmute. Hence, you do not need to configure the TX Status of the standby ODU after you create an IF 1+1 protection group.
11.5 Modifying the Parameters of IF 1+1 Protection

The working mode and other parameters of the protection group can be modified.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > IF 1 +1 Protection from the Function Tree. Step 2 Modify the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection.
11-28
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameters
Parameter Working Mode Value Range HSB, FD, SD Default Value HSB Description l In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at the two ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l In the 1+1 FD protection mode, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The opposite end selects signals from the two received signals. With the 1+1 FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l In the 1+1 SD protection mode, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With the 1+1 SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l The 1+1 FD protection mode and 1+1 SD protection mode are compatible with the 1+1 HSB switching function. l Set this parameter according to the planning information. Revertive Mode Revertive, NonRevertive Revertive l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
11-29
Parameter WTR Time(s)
Default Value -
Description l This parameter is valid only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Enable Reverse Switching
Enable, Disable
Enable
l When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When this parameter at the source end is set to Enable and the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
NOTE
Each of the following parameters should be set to the same value at the two ends of a microwave link: Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time (s), and Enable Reverse Switching.
Postrequisite
l In the case of the 1+1 HSB protection and 1+1 SD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the active microwave link later. The standby microwave link automatically copies the related information of the active microwave link except the transmission status of the ODU. In the case of the 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the active microwave link and the information of the standby ODU later. The standby microwave link automatically copies the IF information of the active microwave link.
NOTE
The default TX Status of an ODU is Unmute. Hence, you do not need to configure the TX Status of the standby ODU after you create an IF 1+1 protection group.
11-30
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12 Configuring Network Level Protection
12
Configuring Network Level Protection
About This Chapter

The network level protection includes the linear MSP, SNCP protection, MPLS tunnel protection and LAG. 12.1 Basic Concept To configure the network-level protection, you need to master basic concepts. 12.2 Configuring N+1 Protection The N+1 protection refers to the protection configuration in which N working channels in a microwave direction share one protection channel. 12.3 Configuring Linear Multiplex Section Protection The linear MSP is applicable to point-to-point physical networks. The linear MSP provides protection for the services between two nodes at the multiplex section level. 12.4 Configuring Two-Fiber Bidirectional Ring MSP The two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP scheme is applicable to an SDH ring network of the STM-4 or higher level formed by fibers, and provides protection at the MS level for services between the nodes of a ring network. 12.5 Configuring Sub-Network Connection Protection The sub-network connection protection (SNCP) scheme protects the services that are across subnets. The subnet can be a chain, a ring, or a more complicated network. 12.6 Configuring MPLS Tunnel Protection When you configure an MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis, you can configure 1+1 protection and 1:1 protection for the MPLS tunnel. You can also create an MPLS tunnel protection group, perform switching, and delete an MPLS tunnel protection group. 12.7 Ethernet Ring Protection Based on the traditional Ethernet mechanism, the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) uses the ETH-OAM function and the ring automatic protection switching (R-APS) protocol to achieve fast protection switching on the Ethernet ring network. 12.8 Configuring Link Aggregation
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-1
Link aggregation allows multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be aggregated to form a link aggregation group (LAG) so that the bandwidths and availability of the links increase. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical link.
12-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12.1 Basic Concept

To configure the network-level protection, you need to master basic concepts. 12.1.1 Multiplex Section Multiplex section protection (MSP) is a protection mode, which is commonly used to configure the protection. 12.1.2 MSP Protection Switching Priority MSP protection switching can be triggered by automatic switching conditions and external switching requests. Automatic switching is triggered by signal failure (SF) (for example, LOS, LOF, MS_AIS and B2OVER raised on the equipment) and signal degrade (SD) (for example, B2SD raised on the equipment). External switching is performed after you issue an external switching command, and thus brings a status change of the multiplex section. External switching requests include lockout, forced switching, manual switching, exercise switching, and clear of switching. 12.1.3 SNCP Protection Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) is a type of 1+1 protection that uses single-ended switching. SNCP is mainly used to protect services across subnets. This function is dual fed and selective receiving. 12.1.4 N+1 Protection The N+1 protection is to use a standby channel to protect the services on N (N3) active channels. When the services on the active channel are normal, the standby channel can transmit extra services. When the receive end detects that the signal is unavailable, the receive end checks whether the standby channel is available and whether the standby channel is already occupied by the services that are switched from another active channel for protection. The N+1 protection has two protection schemes: single-NE N+1 protection and dual-NE N+1 protection. This section describes the typical networking of the two schemes.
12.1.1 Multiplex Section

Multiplex section protection (MSP) is a protection mode, which is commonly used to configure the protection. The SDH transmission system can be divided into four layers on a functional basis. From the bottom to the top layer, there is a physical layer, section layer, path layer and circuit layer. Among the four layers, the section layer is used to ensure the integrity of the signals transmitted between the nodes within an SDH network. The section layer consists of the regenerator section and the multiplex section. The regenerator section refers to the section between the regenerator section terminals (RSTs) of two pieces of equipment. The equipment contains two RSTs and the fibers in between. The multiplex section refers to the section between the multiplex section terminals (MSTs) of two pieces of equipment. The equipment contains two MSTs and the fibers in between. See Figure 12-1.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-3
Figure 12-1 Multiplex section schematic diagram
...
MST
RST
SPI
... ...
RS MS
SPI
RST
MST
...
SPI: SDH Physical Interface
RST: Regenerator Section Termination
MST: Multiplex Section Termination
Table 12-1 describes the commonly used MSP types. Table 12-1 MSP type Type 1+1 linear MSP Capacity The maximum service capacity is STM-N. Description This is a linear networking mode that provides 1+1 protection based on the MSP protocol for the services. If a fault occurs on the transmission link, this networking mode enables the working service to switch to the other link according to the MSP protocol. In this way, the service is protected. This is a linear networking mode that provides 1:N protection based on the MSP protocol for the services. If a fault occurs on the transmission link, this networking mode enables the working service to switch to the other link according to the MSP protocol. In this way, the service is protected.
NOTE N is the number of working links.
1:N(N3) linear MSP
The maximum service capacity is (1+N) STM-N.
12.1.2 MSP Protection Switching Priority

MSP protection switching can be triggered by automatic switching conditions and external switching requests. Automatic switching is triggered by signal failure (SF) (for example, LOS, LOF, MS_AIS and B2OVER raised on the equipment) and signal degrade (SD) (for example,
B2SD raised on the equipment). External switching is performed after you issue an external switching command, and thus brings a status change of the multiplex section. External switching requests include lockout, forced switching, manual switching, exercise switching, and clear of switching. For MSP protection, the following switching requests can bring a status change of the multiplex section. For their switching (or preemption) priorities, refer to Table 12-2.
NOTE
l The following table lists the switching priorities in a descending order, that is, LP_S (SF_P) has the highest priority, and NR has the lowest. The requests of lockout, forced switching, manual switching and exercise switching can be cleared as required. l For LP_S (SF_P), the lockout of protection is available for only the span instead of the ring. LP_S and SF_P have the same priority, and perform the same action on both the protocol and service. LP_S is triggered by an external command, and SF_P is triggered by the protection channel failure in a four-fiber ring. l The span switching has a higher priority than the ring switching. l External commands are issued on the U2000. After a command is executed, the NE keeps this request until the command is cleared or is preempted by another command of a higher priority. If there is a switching request of a higher priority in the network, the external command cannot be executed, and thus the NE loses this external command request.
Table 12-2 Preemptible relation of priorities of MSP protection switching No. 1 Switching Request LP_S(SF_P) Description Span lockout Cause SF in the protection channel of a fourfiber ring or the issue of an external command Issue of an external command Issue of an external command SF in the working channel of a span on a four-fiber ring SF in the working channel of a fourfiber or two-fiber ring SD in the protection channel of a fourfiber or two-fiber ring SD in the working channel of a span on a four-fiber ring
12-5
2 3 4
FS_S FS_R SF_S
Forced switching of a span Forced switching of a ring SF of a span
SF_R
SF of a ring
SD_P
SD of the protection channel
SD_S
SD of a span
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
No. 8
Switching Request SD_R
Description SD of a ring
Cause SD in the working channel of a fourfiber or two-fiber ring Issue of an external command Issue of an external command Status request during a switching Issue of an external command Issue of an external command Reverse request during a switching Reverse request during a switching
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MS_S MS_R WTR EXER_S EXER_R RR_S RR_R NR
Manual switching of a span Manual switching of a ring Wait-to-restore Exercise switching of a span Exercise switching of a ring Reverse request of a span Reverse request of a ring No request
12.1.3 SNCP Protection

Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) is a type of 1+1 protection that uses single-ended switching. SNCP is mainly used to protect services across subnets. This function is dual fed and selective receiving.
Principle
The transmit end of an SNCP service transmits two service sources, and the receive end checks the service sources and selectively receives one. In this way, the service is protected. Hence, SNCP is dual fed and selective receiving, which is similar to path protection (PP). The difference between the SNCP and PP is about the specific implementation. When a service is selectively received at the receive end, in path protection, the tributary board verifies the selective receiving. In SNCP protection, the cross-connect board verifies the selective receiving. Hence, SNCP can protect services on the line, and PP protects only services on the local tributary board.
Subnet-Related Concepts
The definitions in ITU-T G.805 are as follows: l Subnetwork: A topological component used to effect routing of specific characteristic information.
12-6
l l
Subnetwork connection: A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork. Subnetwork connection protection: A protection type that is modeled by a sublayer that is generated by expanding the "subnetwork" "connection point".
Implementation Principle
l Service pair: SNCP service pair is the service structure that consists of a working source, a protection source, and a service sink. See Figure 12-2. Figure 12-2 SNCP service pair
Working source
Protection source
Service sink
SNCP service is from line to line. A service that is added to and dropped from the local tributary board is not an SNCP service and an SNCP service pair cannot be generated. See Figure 12-3. Figure 12-3 SNCP service
SCC Issue data/ Collect data Cross-connect board Intra-board communication Intra-board communication
Line board
Line board
Check point: In an SNCP service pair, the status of the sink node is not checked. The two source nodes are two check points of the protection group. The line board of the corresponding service source checks the status of a check point (SF, SD, or Normal). Check point migration: An SNCP service pair usually has two check points. When a network contains SNCP and MSP, several types of protection exists. Hence, some standby check points are added accordingly. The line board enables the standby check point
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
according to a command, and disables the original check point to realize migration of the check point. l SNCP service number: It uniquely identifies a service pair. The SNCP service number information is saved to the SCC, cross-connect board, and line board. The SNCP protection switching on the line board and cross-connect board handles according to SNCP service number. Hence, ensure that the SNCP service number on the line board is consistent with that on the cross-connect board. Condition of generating an SNCP service pair: The node attributes must contain or imply the SNCP attribute. The service must across rings. SCC board side: The SCC verifies the SNCP service, analyzes service route, and issues the configuration data. The tasks contain setting check points, issuing SNCP service attribute data, collecting the SNCP service status from the cross-connect board, and reporting the SNCP service status. Cross-connect board side: The cross-connect board collects the SNCP service status from the line board, realizes the switching process of the service source, and reports changes of the SNCP service status to the SCC. Line board side: The line board mainly monitors the SNCP service and periodically reports the service monitoring status to the cross-connect board. When the service status changes, the line board notifies the cross-connect board of the change in real time. Service flow: The flow of the SNCP service is the flow that the system configures the service. Because of the special dual fed and selective receiving attribute, SNCP attribute must be specified during service configuration.
l l
SNCP Protection Parameters

Table 12-3 lists the parameters of the SNCP protection. Table 12-3 SNCP parameters Protection Type Revertive Mode Switching Time Default WTR Time Switching Condition (Trigger by Any One Condition) R_LOS R_LOF AU_LOP TU_LOP MS_AIS TU_AIS HP_UNEQ HP_TIM B2_EXC B3_EXC B3_SD BIP_EXC BIP_SD
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
SNCP
Revertive Non-revertive
<= 50 ms <= 50 ms
600s -
12-8
12.1.4 N+1 Protection

The N+1 protection is to use a standby channel to protect the services on N (N3) active channels. When the services on the active channel are normal, the standby channel can transmit extra services. When the receive end detects that the signal is unavailable, the receive end checks whether the standby channel is available and whether the standby channel is already occupied by the services that are switched from another active channel for protection. The N+1 protection has two protection schemes: single-NE N+1 protection and dual-NE N+1 protection. This section describes the typical networking of the two schemes. l l You need to configure the line board whose rate is at the STM-1 for the N+1 protection. Protection schemes: Single-NE N+1 protection: When N is equal to or less than 2, an NE is required for the protection. Dual-NE N+1 protection: When N is equal to 3, two NEs are required for the protection.
NOTE
The single-NE N+1 protection and dual-NE N+1 protection shown are only schematic drawings. On the real equipment, a dual-polarized antenna has only two interfaces. When multiple ODUs are connected, every two ODUs are installed on a combiner and then the combiner is connected to the antenna.
Single-NE N+1 Protection

Take the 2+1 as an example.
Protect IF F A N SL1 PXC PXC IF IF SD1 SCC Add/Drop Services ODU ODU ODU ODU Dual-Polarized Antennas ODU F A N ODU Protect IF SL1 PXC PXC Add/Drop Services IF IF SD1 SCC
The realization principles of the 2+1 protection are as follows: l l l A standby channel is used to protect the services on two active channels. Line board: The rate level of the line board should be STM-1. Others: The SCC board and the integrated power, cross-connect and clock (PXC) board are required.
Dual-NE N+1 Protection

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-9
IF F A N IF PXC PXC SD1 SCC
ODU Secondary NE ODU Dual-Polarized Antennas
ODU ODU F A N PXC PXC
IF IF SD1 SCC
Fiber Interconnection SD1 F A N SD1 PXC PXC IF IF SD1 SCC ODU ODU
Fiber Interconnection ODU SD1 F A N SD1 PXC PXC IF IF SD1 SCC
Primary NE
ODU
Add/Drop Services
Add/Drop Services
The realization principles of the 3+1 protection are as follows: l A standby channel is used to protect the services on three active channels. The IF 3+1 protection needs two OptiX RTN 620. One is the primary NE and the other is the secondary NE. You need to configure the REG on the NEs and then create the IF 3+1 protection on the primary NE. Line board: The line board should support the interaction between the primary and secondary NEs. Slot 4 is the optimum location for the line board. Two more line boards are needed for adding and dropping services. Others: The SCC board and the integrated power, cross-connect and clock (PXC) board are required.
12.2 Configuring N+1 Protection

The N+1 protection refers to the protection configuration in which N working channels in a microwave direction share one protection channel. 12.2.1 Feature Description This topic considers the application of the N+1 protection as an example to describe the N+1 protection. 12.2.2 Availability The N+1 protection feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 12.2.3 Realization Principle The N+1 protection uses the N+1 protection protocol to realize the switching. The N+1 protection protocol is similar to the 1:N linear multiplex section protection protocol. 12.2.4 Configuration Guide This topic describes the configuration flow and the corresponding configuration tasks of the N +1 protection mode. An example is provided as additional information to help understand the configuration.
12-10
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

This topic considers the application of the N+1 protection as an example to describe the N+1 protection. The N+1 protection realizes protection for microwave channels. The IF board, ODU, and radio link on the working channel can be protected through the N+1 protection. The N+1 protection provides N working channels and one protection channel. When the working channel becomes faulty, the normal services on the working channel can be switched to the protection channel for transmission. When the working channel is restored to normal, the protection channel can transmit the extra services. Figure 12-4 shows the application of the N+1 protection. Figure 12-4 N+1 protection
Site A Normal service 1 Working channel 1 Site B Normal service1
...
Normal service N Extra service
Working channel N Protection channel
...
Protection switching Site A Normal service 1 Working channel 1 Site B Normal service1
...
...
l l
You need to configure the line board whose rate is at the STM-1 for the N+1 protection. Protection schemes: Single-NE N+1 protection: When N is equal to or less than 2, an NE is required for the protection. Dual-NE N+1 protection: When N is equal to 3, two NEs are required for the protection.
NOTE
The single-NE N+1 protection and dual-NE N+1 protection shown are only schematic drawings. On the real equipment, a dual-polarized antenna has only two interfaces. When multiple ODUs are connected, every two ODUs are installed on a combiner and then the combiner is connected to the antenna.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-11
Single-NE N+1 Protection

Protect IF F A N SL1 PXC PXC IF IF SD1 SCC Add/Drop Services ODU ODU ODU ODU Dual-Polarized Antennas ODU F A N ODU Protect IF SL1 PXC PXC Add/Drop Services IF IF SD1 SCC
The realization principles of the 2+1 protection are as follows: l l l A standby channel is used to protect the services on two active channels. Line board: The rate level of the line board should be STM-1. Others: The SCC board and the integrated power, cross-connect and clock (PXC) board are required.
Dual-NE N+1 Protection

IF F A N IF PXC PXC SD1 SCC ODU Dual-Polarized Antennas ODU Secondary NE ODU ODU F A N PXC PXC IF IF SD1 SCC
Fiber Interconnection SD1 F A N SD1 PXC PXC IF IF SD1 SCC ODU ODU
Fiber Interconnection ODU SD1 F A N SD1 PXC PXC IF IF SD1 SCC
Primary NE
ODU
Add/Drop Services
Add/Drop Services
The realization principles of the 3+1 protection are as follows: l A standby channel is used to protect the services on three active channels. The IF 3+1 protection needs two OptiX RTN 620. One is the primary NE and the other is the secondary NE. You need to configure the REG on the NEs and then create the IF 3+1 protection on the primary NE.
12-12
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Line board: The line board should support the interaction between the primary and secondary NEs. Slot 4 is the optimum location for the line board. Two more line boards are needed for adding and dropping services. Others: The SCC board and the integrated power, cross-connect and clock (PXC) board are required.
12.2.2 Availability
The N+1 protection feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 12-4 Availability of the N+1 protection feature Applicable Board IF1A/IF1B IFX Applicable Equipment RTN 620
Table 12-5 Availability of the N+1 protection feature Applicable Board IFU2 IFX2 Applicable Equipment RTN 910/950
NOTE
The Hybrid microwave does not support the N+1 protection.

The N+1 protection uses the N+1 protection protocol to realize the switching. The N+1 protection protocol is similar to the 1:N linear multiplex section protection protocol. 12.2.3.1 2+1 Protection Configuration In the case of 2+1 protection configuration, three IF boards form a 2+1 protection group to realize protection switching. 12.2.3.2 3+1 Protection Configuration In the case of the 3+1 protection configuration, the primary NE forms a 3+1 protection group to realize protection switching and the secondary NE forms two STM-1 REGs to realize transparent transmission of byte K.
12.2.3.1 2+1 Protection Configuration

In the case of 2+1 protection configuration, three IF boards form a 2+1 protection group to realize protection switching.
NOTE
The following describes the switching principle of the 2+1 protection as an example.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-13
Figure 12-5 Realization principle of 2+1 protection (before the switching)

PXC 4-SD1-1 5-IF1B-1 15-ODU
6-SL1-1
7-IF1B-1
17-ODU
4-SD1-2
8-IF1B-1
18-ODU
Working channel
Protection channel
Figure 12-6 Realization principle of 2+1 protection (after the switching)

PXC 4-SD1-1 5-IF1B-1 15-ODU
6-SL1-1
7-IF1B-1
17-ODU
4-SD1-2
8-IF1B-1
18-ODU
Working channel
Protection channel
In this example, port 1 of the IF1B board in slot 5, port 1 of the IF1B board in slot 7, and port 1 of the IF1B board in slot 8 form a 2+1 protection group. When a working channel fails, the switching principle of the 2+1 protection configuration is as follows: 1. 2. Before the switching, the NE sends and receives normal traffic signals on the working channel, and sends and receives extra traffic signals on the protection channel. On detecting that the signals on a working channel fail (for example, the IF1B board in slot 5 detects that an MW_LOF alarm is generated on port 1), the IF board notifies the SCC board. The SCC board controls the PXC board to realize the transmission of the working traffic signals (port 1 of the SD1 board in slot 4) on the protection channel (port 1 of the IF1B board in slot 8). The SCC board also interacts with the NE on the opposite side through byte K to enable the NE on the opposite side to perform synchronous switching.
3.
12-14
NOTE
The interaction of byte K between NEs complies with the N+1 protection protocol, which is similar to the MSP protocol. For details, see Realization Principle of 1:N Linear MSP.
12.2.3.2 3+1 Protection Configuration

In the case of the 3+1 protection configuration, the primary NE forms a 3+1 protection group to realize protection switching and the secondary NE forms two STM-1 REGs to realize transparent transmission of byte K.
NOTE
The following describes the switching principle of the 3+1 protection as an example.
Figure 12-7 Realization principle of the 3+1 protection (before the switching)
Primary NE PXC 6-SD1-1 5-IF1B-1 15-ODU
6-SD1-2
7-IF1B-1
17-ODU
8-SD1-1
4-SD1-1
8-SD1-2
4-SD1-2
Secondary NE PXC 4-SD1-1 5-IF1B-1 15-ODU
4-SD1-2
7-IF1B-1
17-ODU
Working channel
Protection channel
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-15
Figure 12-8 Realization principle of the 3+1 protection (after the switching)
Primary NE PXC 6-SD1-1 5-IF1B-1 15-ODU
6-SD1-2
7-IF1B-1
17-ODU
8-SD1-1
4-SD1-1
8-SD1-2
4-SD1-2
Secondary NE PXC 4-SD1-1 5-IF1B-1 15-ODU
4-SD1-2
7-IF1B-1
17-ODU
Working channel
Protection channel
In this example, port 1 of the IF1B board in slot 5 of the primary NE, port 1 of the IF1B board in slot 7 of the primary NE, and ports 1 and 2 of the SD1 board in slot 4 of the primary NE form a 3+1 protection group. An REG is established between port 1 of the IF1B board in slot 5 of the secondary NE and port 1 of the SD1 board in slot 4 of the secondary NE. Another REG is established between port 1 of the IF1B board in slot 7 of the secondary NE and port 2 of the SD1 board in slot 4 of the secondary NE. When a working channel fails, the switching principle of the 3+1 protection configuration is as follows: 1. Before the switching, the primary NE sends and receives normal traffic signals on the working channel, and sends and receives extra traffic signals on the protection channel. The secondary NE works as an REG to transparently transmit VC signals and multiplex section overheads. On detecting that the signals on a working channel fail (for example, the IF1B board in slot 5 detects that an MW_LOF alarm is generated on port 1), an IF board of the secondary NE inserts the MS_AIS alarm and transparently transmits the multiplex section overheads and VC signals to port 1 of the SD1 board in slot 4 of the primary NE through port 1 of the SD1 board in slot 4 of the secondary NE.
2.
12-16
3. 4.
On detecting the MS_AIS alarm, the SD1 board in slot 4 of the primary NE reports the alarm to the SCC board. The SCC board controls the PXC board to realize the transmission of the working traffic signals (port 1 of the SD1 board in slot 8) on the protection channel (port 2 of the SD1 board in slot 4). The SCC board also interacts with the NE on the opposite side through byte K to enable the NE on the opposite side to perform synchronous switching. When the primary NE exchanges byte K with the NE on the opposite side, the secondary NE always transparently transmits byte K because byte K belongs to the multiplex section overheads.
NOTE
l In this example, the working channels of the secondary NE fail. If the working channels of the primary NE fail, the IF board directly reports the alarm to the SCC board to trigger the protection switching. l The REG formed by the secondary NE is slightly different from an ordinary REG. The REG formed by the secondary NE does not insert an AU_AIS alarm but inserts an MS_AIS alarm to trigger the N+1 protection switching when an MW_LOF alarm or a regenerator section alarm (for example, R_LOS, R_LOC, and R_LOF) is generated. l The interaction of byte K between NEs complies with the N+1 protection protocol, which is similar to the MSP protocol. For details, see Realization Principle of 1:N Linear MSP.
12.2.4 Configuration Guide

This topic describes the configuration flow and the corresponding configuration tasks of the N +1 protection mode. An example is provided as additional information to help understand the configuration. 12.2.4.1 Configuration Flow This topic describes the configuration flow for the N+1 protection mode. 12.2.4.2 Creating REGs In the case of the 3+1 protection, you need to configure REGs for the secondary NE. 12.2.4.3 Creating an N+1 Protection Group When the OptiX RTN NE transmits two or three STM-1 microwave services in the point-topoint mode, you can adopt the N+1 protection configuration. 12.2.4.4 Enabling the N+1 Protection Control Protocol When the N+1 protection control protocol is in the disabled status, if you want to restore the normal protection function, you need to enable the N+1 protection control protocol. 12.2.4.5 Verifying the N+1 Protection Switching On the U2000, you can perform the external switching commands such as the clear switching, lockout of switching and forced switching, to meet the requirements in certain scenarios.
12.2.4.1 Configuration Flow

This topic describes the configuration flow for the N+1 protection mode.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-17
Figure 12-9 Configuration flow for the N+1 protection mode

Start 1
Create an N+1 protection group
Is the 3+1 protection mode used? Yes 2 Create REGs
No
End
Table 12-6 Description of the configuration flow of the N+1 protection mode Number 1 Description l In the case of the 3+1 protection, an N+1 protection group needs to be created only for the primary NE. l For the configuration process, see 12.2.4.3 Creating an N+1 Protection Group. 2 l Create REGs between two IF boards of the secondary NE and two ports of the SD1 board that is connected to the primary NE. l For the configuration process, see 12.2.4.2 Creating REGs.
Relation with other features

l l l The members of an N+1 protection group cannot be configured with the 1+1 protection. Each member of an XPIC working group can work as the working channel or the protection channel of the N+1 protection. The radio link with the N+1 protection configuration can work only as the service sink of an SNCP service pair, and cannot work as the working source or the protection source.
12.2.4.2 Creating REGs

In the case of the 3+1 protection, you need to configure REGs for the secondary NE.
12-18
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be created. The STM-1 optical/electrical interface board that is connected to the primary NE must be created. The IF boards must work in the STM-1 mode.
Context
In the case of the 3+1 protection, you need to two configure REGs for the secondary NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Protection Configuration > REG Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create. The system displays the Create REG dialog box. Step 3 Set the SD Enabled parameter. Step 4 Set the slot mapping relation. 1. 2. In Slot Mapping Direction, select West Line. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the west line corresponds and click . 3. 4. In Slot Mapping Direction, select East Line. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the east line corresponds and click .
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-19
Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Repeat Step 2 to Step 5, Create another REG.
----End
12-20
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameters
Parameter SD Enabled Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Enabled Description l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the REG inserts an MS-AIS alarm when a B2_SD alarm is generated. l It is recommended that you use the default value. Slot Mapping Relation It is recommended that you map the IF port as West Line and the port of the STM-1 optical/electrical interface board as East Line.
12.2.4.3 Creating an N+1 Protection Group

When the OptiX RTN NE transmits two or three STM-1 microwave services in the point-topoint mode, you can adopt the N+1 protection configuration.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be created. The STM-1 optical/electrical interface boards (only in the case of the primary NE that is to be configured with 3+1 protection) must be created. The IF boards must work in the STM-1 mode.
When an N+0 service is converted into an N+1 service by configuring the N+1 protection, the original services are not interrupted.
NOTE
It is recommended that you configure the channels in the ACAP mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Select a navigation path: l In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Function Tree and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the N+1 Protection tab. l In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Protection Configuration > N+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create. The system displays the Create an N+1 Protection Group dialog box. Step 3 Set the attributes of the N+1 protection group.
Step 4 Set the slot mapping relation. 1. 2. In Select Mapping direction, select Working Unit. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which a working channel corresponds and click 3. 4. 5. .
Repeat Step 4.2 to select the line ports to which other working channels correspond. In Select Mapping direction, select Protection Unit. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the protection channel corresponds and click .
NOTE
l Set the WTR time to a value, which ranges from five minutes to twelve minutes. It is recommended that you set the value to ten minutes. l It is recommended that you use SD as a switching condition.
Parameters
Parameter WTR Time(s) Value Range 300 to 720 Default Value 600 Description l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
12-22
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter SD enable
Description l When SD enable is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Slot Mapping Relation
l In the case of 2+1 protection, map two IF ports as Working Unit and map the remaining IF port as Protection Unit. l In the case of the 3+1 protection, it is recommended that you map the two IF ports and the first line port of the STM-1 optical/electrical interface board that is connected to the secondary NE as Working Unit, and map the other line port as Protection Unit.
NOTE
The N+1 protection groups of the equipment at both ends must have the same attributes.
12.2.4.4 Enabling the N+1 Protection Control Protocol

When the N+1 protection control protocol is in the disabled status, if you want to restore the normal protection function, you need to enable the N+1 protection control protocol.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Protocol Status of the N+1 protection must be Disabled.
Context
After maintaining the equipment, enable the N+1 protection control protocol, to restore the normal protection function of the equipment.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select Link Configuration from the Function Tree, click the N+1 Protection tab. Select the N+1 protection group and click Start Protocol. Step 2 A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click OK. Step 3 Click Query and the current protocol status is displayed. ----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-23
Postrequisite
NOTE
Before maintaining the equipment, disable the N+1 protection control protocol, to avoid the protection switching caused by the equipment maintenance.
l l l
In the NE Explorer, select Configuration > N+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Select the IF N+1 protection group and click Stop Protocol. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click OK. Click Query and the current protocol status is displayed.
12.2.4.5 Verifying the N+1 Protection Switching

On the U2000, you can perform the external switching commands such as the clear switching, lockout of switching and forced switching, to meet the requirements in certain scenarios.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The N+1 protection group must be created.
Context
The external switching commands are as follows: clear switching, lockout of protection, forced switching to protection, manual switching to protection, and exercise switching. l l Clear switching: This command can be used to clear the forced switching, manual switching, lockout of switching, and exercise switching. Lockout of protection: No service, including the normal and extra services, is allowed to be switched from the working channel to the protection channel. If the service is already switched to the protection channel, the command will force it back to the working channel even if the working channel is abnormal.
CAUTION
Therefore, if the protection switching already occurs, running this command will interrupt services. l Forced switching to protection: That means to forcibly switch the services from the working channel to protection channel regardless of the state of the protection channel. After the forced switching, the system will be always in the switching status, and will not be switched back to the working channel unless manual interference. Manual switching to protection: That means to switch the services from the working channel to protection channel. If the protection channel is normal, the switching will occur. If the protection channel fails or is satisfying a switching of higher priority, the manual switching will not occur. After the manual switching, the system will not be switched back to the working channel unless manual interference. Exercise switching: This command is used to test whether the switching protocol works normally. Actually, no switching occurs and the service will not be affected
12-24
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE to be queried. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. In the right pane, click the N+1 Protection tab. Step 2 In Slot Mapping Relation, right-click the working or protection unit and choose corresponding external switching command from the shortcut menu. Step 3 In the prompt displayed, click OK. Step 4 Click Query to query the switching status. ----End
12.3 Configuring Linear Multiplex Section Protection

The linear MSP is applicable to point-to-point physical networks. The linear MSP provides protection for the services between two nodes at the multiplex section level. The OptiX IDU 610 supports a maximum of two linear MSP groups for the STM-1 optical/ electrical line. The OptiX IDU 620 supports a maximum of five linear MSP groups, or a combination of three linear MSP groups for the optical/electrical line and one STM-4 linear MSP group. 12.3.1 Feature Description This topic considers the application of the linear MSP as an example to describe the linear MSP feature. 12.3.2 Availability The linear MSP solution requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 12.3.3 Realization Principle The 1+1 protection and the 1:N protection have different switching principles. 12.3.4 Configuration Guide

This topic considers the application of the linear MSP as an example to describe the linear MSP feature. The linear MSP is applicable to the point-to-point network. The OptiX RTN 600 supports the 1 +1 linear MSP and 1:N linear MSP. l 1+1 linear MSP To realize the 1+1 linear MSP, one working channel and one protection channel are required. When the working channel becomes unavailable, services are switched to the protection channel for transmission. Figure 12-10 shows the application of the 1+1 linear MSP.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-25
Figure 12-10 1+1 linear MSP

NE A Working channel NE B
Protection channel
Protection switching NE A Working channel NE B
Protection channel
1:N linear MSP To realize the 1:N linear MSP, N working channels and one protection channel are required. The working channels transmit normal services and the protection channel transmits extra services. When a working channel becomes unavailable, the services on this channel are switched to the protection channel for transmission. As a result, the extra services previously transmitted on this protection channel are interrupted. Figure 12-11 shows the application of the 1:N linear MSP.
12-26
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 12-11 1:N linear MSP

NE A Normal service 1 Working channel 1 NE B Normal service1
...
...
Protection switching NE A Normal service 1 Working channel 1 NE B Normal service1
...
...
12.3.1.1 Protection Type The linear MSP can be classified in terms of the protection mechanism, switching mode, and revertive mode.
12.3.1.1 Protection Type

The linear MSP can be classified in terms of the protection mechanism, switching mode, and revertive mode. In terms of the protection mechanism, the linear MSP is classified into the dedicated protection and the shared protection. l Dedicated protection Dedicated protection refers to the case that one working channel exclusively uses one protection channel. The dedicated protection channel cannot carry extra services. The 1+1 protection is the dedicated protection. l Shared protection Shared protection refers to the case that one or more working channels share one protection channel. The shared protection channel can carry extra services. The 1:N (including the 1:1) protection is the shared protection. In terms of the switching mode, the linear MSP is classified into the single-ended switching and the dual-ended switching. l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Single-ended switching
In the single-ended switching mode, the switching occurs only at one end and the state of the other end remains unchanged. l Dual-ended switching In the dual-ended switching mode, the switching occurs at both ends at the same time. In terms of the revertive mode, the linear MSP is classified into the revertive mode and the nonrevertive mode. l Revertive mode When an NE is in the switching state, the NE releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. The period from the time the former working channel is restored to normal to the time the NE releases the switching is called the wait to restore (WTR) time. To prevent frequent switching events due to an unstable working channel, it is recommended that you set the WTR time to five to twelve minutes. l Non-revertive mode When an NE is in the switching state, the NE keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. Hence, the linear MSP is classified into the following eight modes: l l l l l l l l 1+1 dual-ended revertive mode 1+1 dual-ended non-revertive mode 1+1 single-ended revertive mode 1+1 single-ended non-revertive mode 1:N dual-ended revertive mode 1:N dual-ended non-revertive mode 1:N single-ended revertive mode 1:N single-ended non-revertive mode
The OptiX RTN 600/900 supports the following five linear MSP modes: l l l l l 1+1 dual-ended revertive mode 1+1 dual-ended non-revertive mode 1+1 single-ended revertive mode 1+1 single-ended non-revertive mode 1:N (N3) dual-ended revertive mode
The 1:N dual-ended revertive mode is switched according to the MSP protocol of the linear MSP described in ITU-T G.841. The 1+1 dual-ended mode uses the protocol that is compatible with the 1:N mode. The switching in the 1+1 single-ended mode does not use protocols.
NOTE
Huawei realizes two multiplex section protocols, the new protocol and the restructure protocol. The new protocol is more mature and the restructure protocol is in better compliance with the standards.
12.3.2 Availability
The linear MSP solution requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards.
Table 12-7 Availability of the linear MSP solution Applicable Board SL4 SL1/SD1 SLE/SDE Applicable Equipment RTN 620 RTN 610/620
Table 12-8 Availability of the linear MSP solution Applicable Board SL1D Applicable Equipment RTN 910/950

The 1+1 protection and the 1:N protection have different switching principles. 12.3.3.1 1+1 Linear MSP The 1+1 linear MSP adopts the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism to realize the switching. 12.3.3.2 1:N Linear MSP The 1:N linear MSP adopts the automatic bridging mechanism to realize the switching.
12.3.3.1 1+1 Linear MSP

The 1+1 linear MSP adopts the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism to realize the switching.
NOTE
The following describes the switching principle of the 1+1 linear MSP. The switching triggered by the signal failure on the working channel is provided as an example.
Figure 12-12 Realization principle of 1+1 linear MSP (before the switching)
NE B Working NE A
Protection Working
Protection Normal service
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-29
Figure 12-13 Realization principle of 1+1 linear MSP (after the switching, in the single-ended mode)
NE B Working NE A
Protection Working
Figure 12-14 Realization principle of 1+1 linear MSP (after the switching, in the dual-ended mode)
NE B Working NE A
Protection Working
When the signal on the working channel fails, the switching principle in the single-ended mode is as follows: 1. 2. 3. Before the switching, the source sends traffic signals to both the working channel and the protection channel. The sink selects the traffic signals from the working channel. On detecting that the signal on the working channel fails, the line board at the sink in a certain direction (NE A) reports the event to the SCC board. After confirming that the signal on the working channel fails and that the signal on the protection channel is normal, the SCC board enables the cross-connect board to complete the cross-connection between the protection channel and the service sink.
When the signal on the working channel fails, the switching principle in the dual-ended mode is as follows:
1. 2.
Before the switching, the source sends traffic signals to both the working channel and the protection channel. The sink selects the traffic signals from the working channel. On detecting that the signal on the working channel fails, the sink in a certain direction (NE A) sends byte K to the source (NE B) on the protection channel (the request type is "signal fail"). NE B sends byte K to NE A also on the protection channel (the request type is "reverse request"). NE A receives the traffic signals from the protection channel. NE B also receives the traffic signals from the protection channel.
3. 4. 5.
12.3.3.2 1:N Linear MSP

The 1:N linear MSP adopts the automatic bridging mechanism to realize the switching.
NOTE
The following describes the switching principle of the 1:N linear MSP. The 1:1 linear MSP switching triggered by the signal failure on the working channel is provided as an example.
Figure 12-15 Realization principle of 1:1 linear MSP (before the switching)
NE B Working NE A
Protection Working
Protection Normal service Extra service
Figure 12-16 Realization principle of 1:1 linear MSP (after the switching)
NE B Working NE A
Protection Working
Protection Normal service Extra service
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-31
When the signal on the working channel fails, the switching principle in the 1:1 mode is as follows: 1. 2. Before the switching, both the source and the sink send and receive normal traffic signals on the working channel, and send and receive extra traffic signals on the protection channel. On detecting that the signal on the working channel fails, the sink in a certain direction (NE A) sends byte K to the source (NE B) on the protection channel (the request type is "signal fail"). NE B performs a bridge of the normal traffic signals onto the protection channel and sends byte K to NE A on the protection channel (the request type is "reverse request"). NE A receives the normal traffic signals from the protection channel and performs a bridge of the normal traffic signals onto the protection channel. NE B receives the normal traffic signals from the protection channel.
NOTE
3. 4. 5.
Actually, to speed up the switching, NE B does not perform a service bridge in Step 3 but performs it in Step 5.

12.3.4.1 Creating Linear MSP To protect the services carried by the optical fibers or STM-1e cables between two nodes, configure the linear MSP. 12.3.4.2 Verifying Linear MSP Switching During deployment and commissioning, you can perform switching to test whether the linear MSP switching works properly. In fault maintenance, you can perform this operation to locate faults. 12.3.4.3 Setting an MS Node Number Generally, when you create an MSP ring, the U2000 assigns an MS node number to each node automatically. In addition, you can also set the MS node number manually in the case of network expansion and reconstruction.
12.3.4.1 Creating Linear MSP

To protect the services carried by the optical fibers or STM-1e cables between two nodes, configure the linear MSP.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The boards where the working unit and the protection unit are located must be configured.
When an unprotected service is converted into a linear MSP service by configuring the linear MSP, the original services are not interrupted.
12-32
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
WARNING
l The line that is configured with the linear MSP can work only as the sink of an SNCP service pair, and cannot work as the working source or the protection source. l The line that is configured with the linear MSP cannot be configured to form an MSP ring.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Protection Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create. The system displays the Create a Linear Multiplex Section dialog box. Step 3 Set the attributes of the linear MSP group.
NOTE
When Protection Type is set to 1:N Protection. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the service that is configured in the protection timeslot is changed to an extra service.
Step 4 Set the slot mapping relation. 1. 2. In Select Mapping direction, select West Working Unit. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the working channel corresponds and click 3. 4. .
In Select Mapping direction, select West Protection Unit. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the protection channel corresponds and click .
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-33
NOTE
l It is recommended that you select the 1+1 single-ended non-revertive mode or the 1:1 dual-ended revertive mode, depending on the requirements. l In the 1+1 single-ended non-revertive mode, the realization is simple and the switching speed is high. In addition, the equipment at both sides need not be interconnected. l In the 1:N dual-ended revertive mode, extra services can be transmitted. l Plan the parameters relevant to the protection configuration. l The MS protocols used at both sides must be consistent. It is recommended that you adopt the new protocol when both sides use the OptiX equipment. l It is recommended that the working channel uses the line ports of one line board and the protection channel uses those of another line board to prevent the situation in which the failure of a line board causes the protection to fail. l If the protection is in the revertive mode, set the WTR time to a value, which ranges from five minutes to twelve minutes. It is recommended that you set the value to ten minutes. l It is recommended that you use SD as a switching condition.
12-34
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameters
Parameter Protection Type Switching Mode Value Range 1+1 Protection, 1:N Protection Default Value 1+1 Protection Description l In the single-ended mode, if the services on the working channels in a certain direction need to be switched, only the services on the working channels in the direction are switched to the protection channels. l In the dual-ended mode, the services on the working channels in two directions are switched to the protection channels. l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l When extra services need to be transmitted or several working channels exist, select 1:N protection. l In the case of other situations, it is recommended that you select the 1+1 single-ended and non-revertive mode. WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter is valid only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value. SD enable Enabled, Disabled Enabled l When SD enable is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
l Single-Ended l Single-Ended Switching, DualSwitching (1+1 Ended Switching protection) (1+1 protection) l Dual-Ended l Dual-Ended Switching (1:N Switching (1:N protection) protection) l Non-Revertive, Revertive (1+1 protection) l Revertive (1:N protection) l Non-Revertive (1+1 protection) l Revertive (1:N protection)
Revertive Mode
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-35
Parameter Protocol Type
Value Range New Protocol, Restructure Protocol
Default Value New Protocol
Description l The new protocol is more mature than the restructure protocol but the restructure protocol is in better compliance with the standards than the new protocol. l It is recommended that you select the new protocol. When the OptiX equipment is interconnected with the third-party equipment, select the restructure protocol if an interconnection problem occurs when the new protocol is adopted.
Slot Mapping Relation
l In the case of 1+1 protection, only one line port can be mapped as West Working Unit; in the case of 1:N protection, a maximum of three line ports can be mapped as West Working Unit. l Only one line port can be mapped as West Protection Unit. l Ensure that the line port that is mapped as West Protection Unit and the line port that is mapped as West Working Unit are not on the same board, if possible.
NOTE
Ensure that the MSP groups of the equipment at both ends of the linear multiplex section are set with the same attributes.
Postrequisite
l In the case of the 1:N linear MSP, you need to configure bidirectional cross-connections between the services and the working channels later. If extra services need to be transmitted, it is necessary to configure bidirectional cross-connections between the extra services and the protection channels. In the case of the 1+1 linear MSP, you need to configure unidirectional cross-connections between the services and the protection channels, in addition to configuring the bidirectional cross-connections between the services and the working channels.
12.3.4.2 Verifying Linear MSP Switching

During deployment and commissioning, you can perform switching to test whether the linear MSP switching works properly. In fault maintenance, you can perform this operation to locate faults.
12-36
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The linear MSP must be created.
Context
The external switching for MSP protection includes lockout, forced switching, manual switching, and exercise switching. l In the event of lockout of switching, the switching request for the port is denied, but the reversion of switching is allowed. Regardless of the status of the working and protection channels, the services are locked in the working channel. Forced switching has a higher priority than signal failure and signal degrade, on the protection section. This switching is performed regardless of the protection channel state, unless the protection channel is satisfying a higher priority bridging request. Manual switching has a lower priority than signal failure and signal degrade, on the protection section. The manual switching request is valid only when there is no signal failure or signal degrade on the protection section. The exercise switching is used to test the APS protocol. In fact services are not switched to the protection section, and only the calculation result of the protocol is displayed.
CAUTION
Switching other than the exercise switching may interrupt services.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Protection Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the slot mapping table, right-click a direction and choose a switching or lockout option from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
NOTE
The switching is performed only when the direction is not locked.
----End
12.3.4.3 Setting an MS Node Number

Generally, when you create an MSP ring, the U2000 assigns an MS node number to each node automatically. In addition, you can also set the MS node number manually in the case of network expansion and reconstruction.
Prerequisite
l l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. An MSP ring must be created.
Context
CAUTION
Setting an MS node number may affect the existing service.
Procedure
l l In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Protection Configuration > Ring MS from the Function Tree. Double-click Local Node, West Node, and East Node respectively and enter a new value.
NOTE
For the rules of setting an MS node number, see 12.4.3.1 Configuring the Ring MSP.
Click Apply. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
----End
12.4 Configuring Two-Fiber Bidirectional Ring MSP

The two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP scheme is applicable to an SDH ring network of the STM-4 or higher level formed by fibers, and provides protection at the MS level for services between the nodes of a ring network. The IDU 620 supports a maximum of one STM-4 two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. 12.4.1 Feature Description This topic considers the application of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring as an example to describe the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring feature. 12.4.2 Availability The two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP needs the support of the corresponding equipment and boards. 12.4.3 Realization Principle The two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP adopts the automatic bridging mechanism between working channels and protection channels to realize the switching.

This topic considers the application of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring as an example to describe the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring feature. On a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring, the first half of VC-4s on each STM-N line is allocated to the working channel, and the other half of VC-4s is allocated to the protection channel. In normal cases, services are transmitted on the working channel. The services transmitted on two fibers flow in inverse directions. When a fiber cut occurs and the working channel becomes unavailable, the services on the two ends of the faulty point are both switched from the working channel of the faulty fiber to the protection channel of the reverse directional fiber for transmission. Figure 12-17 shows the application of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.
Figure 12-17 Two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring

NE A East West
West NE B East STM-4 two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring
East NE D West
West NE C
East
Protection swicthing
NE A East West
East NE D West
West NE C
Service between NE A and NE C
East
The two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring is applicable to the ring on which the services are distributed. When the services are converged on the ring, the maximum service capacity of this ring is STM-N/2. When the services are evenly distributed on the ring, the maximum service capacity of this ring is M x STM-N/2, where M indicates the number of nodes on the ring.
Protection Type
The two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP has the following characteristics in terms of the protection type: l l l A ring network uses two fibers. One fiber is used to receive signals and the other fiber is used to transmit signals. Services are received and transmitted on the same route. The normal services between different nodes share the protection channel. The protection channel can be used to transfer extra services. In a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring, the
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
first half of the VC-4s are the working channels and the second half of the VC-4s are the protection channels. l The two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP adopts the revertive mode. That is, an NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. The period from the time the former working channel is restored to normal to the time the NE releases the switching is called the wait-to-restore (WTR) time. To prevent frequent switching events due to an unstable working channel, it is recommended that you set the WTR time to five to twelve minutes.
12.4.2 Availability
The two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP needs the support of the corresponding equipment and boards. Table 12-9 Availability of the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP Feature Two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP Applicable Board SL4 (all the versions) Applicable Equipment IDU 620

The two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP adopts the automatic bridging mechanism between working channels and protection channels to realize the switching.
NOTE
The following section describes the switching principle of the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP. The protection switching triggered by a unidirectional signal failure on a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring formed by four NEs is provided as an example.
Figure 12-18 Realization principle of the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP (before the switching)
NE A #1 VC-4 East West
East NE D West
West NE C
East Service between NE A and NE C
12-40
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 12-19 Realization principle of the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP (after the switching)
NE A East West
West NE B East
#3VC-4 STM-4 two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring #3 VC-4
East NE D West
#1 VC-4
West NE C
East
Service from NE A to NE C
When the signal on the working channel fails, the switching principle of the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP is as follows: 1. When the network is in the normal state, the service between NE A and NE C is transmitted in certain timeslots of the first VC-4 in the line. The service route is shown in Figure 12-18. On detecting that the signal on the working channel in the receive direction fails, the west line board of NE B sends byte K (the request type being SF_R and the state being MS-RDI) on the short path (NE B -> NE A) and also sends byte K (the request type being SF_R and the state being idle) on the long path (NE B -> NE C -> NE D -> NE A). After receiving byte K sent from NE B to NE A, NE C and NE D transparently transmit the received byte K. After receiving byte K on the short path, the east line board of NE A sends byte K (the request type being RR_R and the state being idle) on the short path (NE A -> NE B) and also sends byte K (the request type being SF_R and the state being idle) on the long path (NE A -> NE D -> NE C -> NE B). After receiving byte K on the long path, the west line board of NE A sends byte K (the request type being RR_R and the state being the bridging and switching) on the short path (NE A -> NE B) and also sends byte K (the request type being SF_R and the state being the bridging and switching) on the long path (NE A -> NE D -> NE C -> NE B). NE A enters the east switching state. That is, NE A receives the services that should be received from the east working channels in normal cases from the west protection channels, and transmits the services that should be transmitted to the east working channels in normal cases to the west protection channels. In the case of the service between NE A and NE C, NE A transmits the service to the first VC-4 path in the east direction in the normal state, but transmits the service to the third VC-4 path in the west direction in the east switching state. 6. After receiving byte K (the request type being SF_R and the state being the bridging and switching) sent from NE A to NE B, NE C and NE D enter the pass-through state. When NE C and NE D pass through byte K, NE C and NE D also pass through the information carried on the protection channels. After receiving byte K (the request type being SF_R and the state being the bridging and switching) sent from NE A, NE B sends byte K (the request type being SF_R and the state being the bridging and switching) on the long path (NE B -> NE C -> NE D -> NE A).
2.
3. 4.
5.
7.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NE B enters the west switching state. That is, NE A receives the services that should be received from the west working channels in normal cases from the east protection channels, and transmits the services that should be transmitted to the west working channels in normal cases to the east protection channels. In the case of the service between NE A and NE C, NE B receives the service from the first VC-4 path in the west direction and transmits the service to the first VC-4 in the east direction in the normal state, but receives the service from the third VC-4 path in the east direction and transmits the service to the first VC-4 path in the east direction in the west switching state.
12.4.3.1 Configuring the Ring MSP If a ring network formed by STM-4 fibers is used and the services are discrete services, you can configure the ring MSP.
12.4.3.1 Configuring the Ring MSP

If a ring network formed by STM-4 fibers is used and the services are discrete services, you can configure the ring MSP.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The boards where the working unit and the protection unit are located must be configured.
When an unprotected service is converted into a ring MSP service by configuring the ring MSP, the original services are not interrupted.
NOTE
l The line of a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring cannot be configured with the linear MSP. l The line of a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring can work only as the sink of an SNCP service pair, and cannot work as the working source or the protection source.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Protection Configuration > Ring MS from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the service that is configured in the protection timeslot is changed to an extra service. Step 3 Click OK. The system displays the Create a Ring Multiplex Section dialog box. Step 4 Set the attributes of the ring MSP protection group according to the networking plan. Step 5 Set the slot mapping relation. 1. 2.
12-42
Set Local Node, West Node, and East Node according to the networking plan. In Select Mapping Direction, select West Line 1.
3.
In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the working channel corresponds and click .
4. 5.
In Select Mapping Direction, select East Line 1. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the protection channel corresponds and click .
NOTE
l Allocate a node ID to each NE. l The number of NE nodes must not exceed 16. The value range of a node ID is from 0 to 15. l In the case of a newly-built ring network, it is recommended that you set the node ID of the central station in the network to 0 and allocate node IDs to the other NEs one by one counterclockwise, with the node ID of each NE being one more than the node ID of the previous NE. l If you add an NE in an existing ring network, it is recommended that you set the node ID of the new NE to the number that is one less than the maximum number of the nodes (including the new NE) in the ring network. l The MSP protocols used in a ring network must be consistent. It is recommended that you select the new protocol. l Set the WTR time to a value, which ranges from five minutes to twelve minutes. It is recommended that you set the value to ten minutes. l It is recommended that you use SD as a switching condition.

Parameters
Parameter Level Protection Type Local Node Value Range 0 to 15 Default Value 0 Description The value is always set to STM-4. The value is always set to 2-fiber Bidirectional Multiplex Section. l This parameter specifies the node ID allocated to the local NE. l The node ID of each NE must be unique. West Node 0 to 15 0 This parameter specifies the node ID that is allocated to the NE to which the west line board of the local NE is connected. This parameter specifies the node ID that is allocated to the NE to which the east line board of the local NE is connected. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set value of this parameter, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value. SD enable Enabled, Disabled Enabled l When SD enable is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. l It is recommended that you use the default value. Protocol Type New Protocol, Restructure Protocol New Protocol l The new protocol is more mature than the restructure protocol but the restructure protocol is in better compliance with the standards than the new protocol. l It is recommended that you select the new protocol. When the OptiX equipment is interconnected with the third-party equipment, select the restructure protocol if an interconnection problem occurs when the new protocol is adopted. Slot Mapping Relation It is recommended that you map the line port of the SL4 board in slot 6 as West Line 1 and map the line port of the SL4 board in slot 8 as East Line 1.
East Node
0 to 15
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
12-44
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Map as VC4
Value Range Selected, Not selected
Default Value Not selected
Description l If you select Map as VC4, the VC-4 is considered as the unit of the settings in the slot mapping relation. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
NOTE
The protection groups of the NEs that form a ring multiplex section must be set with the same attributes except Local Node, West Node, and East Node.
Postrequisite
In the case of a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring, you need to configure bidirectional crossconnections between the services and the timeslots of the working channel (the first half of the timeslots of the line port) later. If extra services need to be transmitted, you need to configure bidirectional cross-connections between the extra services and the timeslots of the protection channel (the second half of the timeslots of the line port).
12.5 Configuring Sub-Network Connection Protection

The sub-network connection protection (SNCP) scheme protects the services that are across subnets. The subnet can be a chain, a ring, or a more complicated network. The OptiX IDU 610 supports a maximum of 84 SNCP groups and the OptiX IDU 620 supports a maximum of 210 SNCP groups. 12.5.1 Feature Description This topic considers the application of the SNCP as an example to describe the SNCP feature. 12.5.2 Availability The SNCP solution requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 12.5.3 Realization Principle SNCP is realized based on the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism. 12.5.4 Configuration Guide This topic describes the configuration tasks related to SNCP services.

This topic considers the application of the SNCP as an example to describe the SNCP feature. The SNCP protection scheme, which requires one working subnetwork and one protection subnetwork, is to select one service from the dually transmitted services. The SNCP is applicable to the ring, intersecting rings, ring with a chain, or mesh network. Figure 12-20 shows the application of the SNCP.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-45
Figure 12-20 Sub-Network Connection Protection

Working SNC Trail source Trail sink
NE A Protection SNC
NE B
Protection switching
NE A Protection SNC
NE B
Protection Type
SNCP is classified into the revertive mode and the non-revertive mode. l Revertive mode When an NE is in the switching state, the NE releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. The period from the time the former working channel is restored to normal to the time the NE releases the switching is called the wait to restore (WTR) time. To prevent frequent switching events due to an unstable working channel, it is recommended that you set the WTR time to five to twelve minutes. l Non-revertive mode When an NE is in the switching state, the NE keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal.
SNCP Service Pair

An SNCP service pair is a basic unit of SNCP. It consists of a working source, a protection source, and a service sink.
12-46
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 12-21 SNCP service pair

Working source Protection source
Service sink
The working source and the protection source can be of the fiber line, STM-1e cable, or radio link, and can be of different line types. The service sink can be of any line or tributary type.
12.5.2 Availability
The SNCP solution requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 12-10 Availability of the SNCP solution Applicable Board IF1A/IF1B SL1/SD1 SLE/SDE IFX SL4 IDU 620 Applicable Equipment IDU 610/620
Table 12-11 Availability of the SNCP solution Applicable Board SL1D IF1 IFU2 IFX2 CSTA CSHC RTN 910 Applicable Equipment RTN 910/950

SNCP is realized based on the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism.
NOTE
The following describes the switching principle of SNCP. The switching triggered by the signal failure of the working SNC is provided as an example.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-47
Figure 12-22 SNCP realization principle (before the switching)

NE A Protection SNC
NE B
Figure 12-23 SNCP realization principle (after the switching)

NE A Protection SNC
NE B
When the working SNC fails, the SNCP switching principle is as follows: 1. 2. 3. Before the switching, the trail source of the SNC (NE A) sends normal service signals to the trail sink (NE B) through both the working SNC and the protection SNC. On detecting that the signal of the working SNC fails, the line board of NE B reports the event to the SCC board. After confirming that the signal of the working SNC fails and that the signal of the protection SNC is normal, the SCC board of NE B enables the cross-connect board to complete the cross-connection between the protection SNC and the service sink.

This topic describes the configuration tasks related to SNCP services. 12.5.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services The cross-connection of SNCP services is a cross-connection that a working source and a protection source correspond to a service sink. 12.5.4.2 Setting SNCP Service Control Attributes
When the control attributes that you set when creating an SNCP service are not applicable any more, you can modify the attributes. 12.5.4.3 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services In the case of the SNCP services at the VC-4 level, you can set certain alarms as the automatic switching conditions. 12.5.4.4 Verifying the SNCP Service Switching During deployment and commissioning, you can perform switching to test whether SNCP switching works properly. In fault maintenance, you can perform this operation to locate faults. 12.5.4.5 Converting Non-Protection Services into SNCP Services After converting the non-protection services into the SNCP services, you can convert the unidirectional cross-connection of the non-protection services into the unidirectional crossconnection in the receive direction of the SNCP services. 12.5.4.6 Converting SNCP Services into Non-Protection Services After converting the SNCP services into the non-protection services, you can convert the SNCP cross-connection in the receive direction into the unidirectional cross-connection of the nonprotection services.
12.5.4.1 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services

The cross-connection of SNCP services is a cross-connection that a working source and a protection source correspond to a service sink.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The boards where the source and the sink are must be configured.
Context
l l l l l The MSP line can work only as the service sink of an SNCP service pair and cannot work as the working source or the protection source. The radio link with the 1+1 protection configuration can work only as the service sink of an SNCP service pair, and cannot work as the working source or the protection source. The radio link with the N+1 protection configuration can work only as the service sink of an SNCP service pair, and cannot work as the working source or the protection source. The radio link with the XPIC configuration can work only as the service sink of an SNCP service pair, and cannot work as the working source or the protection source. The Hybrid radio link can work only as the service sink of an SNCP service pair, and cannot work as the working source or the protection source.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Options. Then, select Interleaved or Complete Service to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-connection. Step 3 Click Create SNCP.
The system displays the Create SNCP Service dialog box. Step 4 Set the attributes of the SNCP protection group and the slot mapping relation of the SNCP service.
NOTE
l Adhere to the following principles when planning the trails: l Do not overlap the working SNC and the protection SNC if possible. l The OptiX RTN 600 does not support the line with the MSP, 1+1 protection configuration or N+1 protection configuration as the working source or the protection source of SNCP. l It is recommended that the working SNC uses the line ports of one line board and the protection SNC uses those of another line board to prevent the situation in which the failure of a line board causes the protection to fail. l If the protection is in the revertive mode, set the WTR time to a value, which ranges from five minutes to twelve minutes. It is recommended that you set the value to ten minutes.
Step 5 Click OK.

NOTE
l When you create a cross-connection whose source or sink is the timeslots of an IF board, the creation may fail due to the limited number of licenses. l The calculation of the required number of licenses is based on the total number of service timeslots of all the IF boards that are involved in cross-connections. In the case of the cross-connections of VC-3 or VC-4 services, the VC-3 or VC-4 services need to be converted into E1 services that have the same capacity. For example, the cross-connections of one E3 service from a PL3 board to an IF board require the number of licenses that are used for 21xE1. One VC-3 pass-through service between two IF boards requires the number of licenses that are used for 42xE1. The 8xE1 SNCP services from two IF boards to one PO1 board require the number of licenses that are used for 16xE1.
----End
Parameters
Parameter Service Type Level Value Range SNCP VC12, VC3, VC4 Default Value SNCP VC12 Description l Specifies the level of the crossconnection to be created. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 paths, set this parameter to VC12. l If the service is an E3/T3 service or a data service that is bound with VC-3 paths, set this parameter to VC3. l If all the services in a VC-4 pass through the NE, set this parameter to VC4. Revertive Mode Non-Revertive, Revertive Non-Revertive l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. Direction Unidirectional, Bidirectional Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, only the crossconnections in the SNCP receive direction are created. l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, both the crossconnections in the SNCP receive direction and the cross-connections in the SNCP transmit direction are created. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-51
Parameter Hold-off Time (100ms)
Default Value 0
Description l When a line fault occurs, an NE can perform SNCP switching after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. This parameter specifies the duration of the delay. l It is recommended that you use the default value because the SNCP cannot co-exist with other protection switching modes in the OptiX RTN 600.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter is valid only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Source Slot Source VC4 Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Indicates the source slot of the service. Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the service source exists. l Specifies the timeslot range to which the service source corresponds. l You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l In the case of an IF board that works in the PDH mode, the first to the nth E1s/ E3s transmitted by microwaves correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively. Similarly, the first to the nth ports of an E1 interface board or an E3/T3 interface board correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively.
Sink Slot Sink VC4
Indicates the sink slot of the service. Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the service sink exists.
12-52
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l Specifies the timeslot range to which the service sink corresponds. l You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l In the case of an IF board that works in the PDH mode, the first to the nth E1s/ E3s transmitted by microwaves correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively. Similarly, the first to the nth ports of an E1 interface board or an E3/T3 interface board correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively.
Configure SNCP Tangent Ring
Checked, Unchecked
Unchecked
After you select the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring check box, you can configure the SNCP services on tangent points of SNCP rings in a fast manner. Generally, it is not recommended to select this check box.
Activate Immediately
Yes, No
Yes
Sets whether to immediately activate the cross-connection that is configured. If you need to immediately deliver the crossconnection that is configured to NEs, set the value of this parameter to Yes.
Postrequisite
If Direction is set to Unidirectional, the cross-connection only in the SNCP receive direction is created. Hence, you need to configure a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the working trail, and later, a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection trail.
12.5.4.2 Setting SNCP Service Control Attributes

When the control attributes that you set when creating an SNCP service are not applicable any more, you can modify the attributes.
Prerequisite
l l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The SNCP service must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click NE and choose Configuration > Protection Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Click Query. Step 3 In the Working Cross-Connections or Protection Cross-Connections pane, select the SNCP service for which you want to modify the control attributes. Step 4 Double click the parameter that you want to modify, select or input a new value, and click Apply. In the dialog box displayed, click OK according to the actual situation.
NOTE
l You can modify the WTR Time only when you set Revertive Mode to Revertive. l After you modify the initiation condition, you need to click OK.
Step 5 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
12.5.4.3 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services

In the case of the SNCP services at the VC-4 level, you can set certain alarms as the automatic switching conditions.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. An SNCP protection group at the VC-4 level must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Protection Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the SNCP protection group. Double-click Initiation Condition to which the working service corresponds. The system displays the Initiation Condition dialog box. Step 3 Select SD switching conditions. Then, click OK.
Step 4 Select the SNCP protection group. Double-click Initiation Condition to which the protection service corresponds. The system displays the Initiation Condition dialog box.
Step 5 Repeat Step 3. Step 6 Click Apply. The system displays a prompt box asking you whether to carry out the switching. Step 7 Click Yes. ----End
Parameters
Parameter UNEQ Value Range Selected, Not selected Default Value Not selected Description l When this item is selected, the SNCP service considers the HP_UNEQ alarm as an SD switching condition. l It is recommended that you use the default value. TIM Selected, Not selected Not selected l When this item is selected, the SNCP service considers the HP_TIM alarm as an SD switching condition. l It is recommended that you use the default value. SD Selected, Not selected Not selected l When this item is selected, the SNCP service considers the B3_SD alarm as an SD switching condition. l It is recommended that you use the default value. EXC Selected, Not selected Not selected l When this item is selected, the SNCP service considers the B3_EXC alarm as an SD switching condition. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
NOTE
It is recommended that you set Initiation Condition of the working service to be the same as Initiation Condition of the protection service.
12.5.4.4 Verifying the SNCP Service Switching

During deployment and commissioning, you can perform switching to test whether SNCP switching works properly. In fault maintenance, you can perform this operation to locate faults.
Prerequisite
l l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The SNCP services must be configured.
Context
The external switching for SNCP protection includes: lockout, forced switching and manual switching. l In the event of lockout of switching, the switching request for the port is denied, but the reversion of switching is allowed. Regardless of the status of the working and protection channels, the services are locked in the working channel. Forced switching has a higher priority than signal failure and signal degrade, on the protection section. This switching is performed regardless of the protection channel state, unless the protection channel is satisfying a higher priority bridging request. Manual switching has a lower priority than signal failure and signal degrade, on the protection section. The manual switching request is valid only when there is no signal failure or signal degrade on the protection section.
CAUTION
All switching may interrupt services.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Protection Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the Working Service pane, select a service that you want to switch, right-click the Current Status of the service, and choose the corresponding item from the shortcut menu to switch or lock the service.
NOTE
A service can be switched only when it is not locked.
Step 3 In the Confirm dialog box displayed, click OK. Step 4 Click Query to query the switching status. ----End
12.5.4.5 Converting Non-Protection Services into SNCP Services

After converting the non-protection services into the SNCP services, you can convert the unidirectional cross-connection of the non-protection services into the unidirectional crossconnection in the receive direction of the SNCP services.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The unidirectional cross-connection of non-protection services must be configured and the source of the cross-connection must be a line board.
12-56
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
When this task is performed to convert a non-protection service into an SNCP service, the original services are not interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Query the data. 1. Click Query. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting This operation will query service at the NE and update service data at the NM. Are you sure to continue?. 2. 3. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, prompting Operation Succeeded. Click Close.
Step 3 Select the bidirectional cross-connection of the non-protection service in Cross-connection. Then, right-click and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Select the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal service in Cross-connection. Then, right-click and choose Convert to SNCP from the shortcut menu. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting If the non-protection service is convert into a SNCP service, the service may be interrupted. Are you sure to continue?. Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Set the attributes of the SNCP protection group and the slot mapping relation of the SNCP service.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-57
Parameters
Parameter Revertive Mode Value Range Non-Revertive, Revertive Default Value Non-Revertive Description l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. Hold-off Time (100ms) 0 to 100 0 l When a line fault occurs, an NE can perform SNCP switching after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. This parameter specifies the duration of the delay. l It is recommended that you use the default value because the SNCP cannot co-exist with other protection switching modes in the OptiX RTN 600. WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter is valid only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value. Source Slot Source VC4 Indicates the source slot of the service. Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the service source exists.
12-58
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description l Specifies the timeslot range to which the service source corresponds. l You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l In the case of an IF board that works in the PDH mode, the first to the nth E1s/ E3s transmitted by microwaves correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively. Similarly, the first to the nth ports of an E1 interface board or an E3/T3 interface board correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively.
Sink Slot Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Indicates the sink slot of the service. Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the service sink exists. l Specifies the timeslot range to which the service sink corresponds. l You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l In the case of an IF board that works in the PDH mode, the first to the nth E1s/ E3s transmitted by microwaves correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively. Similarly, the first to the nth ports of an E1 interface board or an E3/T3 interface board correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively.
Postrequisite
The SNCP service after the conversion is the SNCP service only in the receive direction. Later, you need to configure a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the working trail, and a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection trail. The non-
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-59
protection service can be converted into the SNCP service both in the receive direction and the transmit direction only after the configuration.
12.5.4.6 Converting SNCP Services into Non-Protection Services

After converting the SNCP services into the non-protection services, you can convert the SNCP cross-connection in the receive direction into the unidirectional cross-connection of the nonprotection services.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The current service is transmitted in the working path. The SNCP cross-connection in the receive direction must be configured.
When this task is performed to convert an SNCP service into a non-protection service, the original services are not interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the Auto-Created Cross-Connection pane, select the cross-connection. Right-click and choose Convert to Non-Protection Service from the shortcut menu. Step 3 Choose Working or Protection from the displayed menu. Step 4 Then, the Prompt dialog box is displayed, prompting If the SNCP service is converted into a non-protection service, the service may be interrupted. Are you sure to continue?. Step 5 Click OK. ----End
Postrequisite
You need to delete the unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the working path or the unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection path. The SNCP service can be converted into the non-protection service both in the receive direction and the transmit direction only after the deletion.
12.6 Configuring MPLS Tunnel Protection

When you configure an MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis, you can configure 1+1 protection and 1:1 protection for the MPLS tunnel. You can also create an MPLS tunnel protection group, perform switching, and delete an MPLS tunnel protection group. 12.6.1 Introduction to MPLS APS MPLS APS is a network protection mechanism. In the case of MPLS APS, a protection tunnel is created to protect the working tunnel when the working tunnel fails.
12.6.2 Basic Concepts Basic concepts related to the MPLS APS protection include the switching mode, revertive mode, wait-to-restore (WTR) time, hold-off time, and protocol state. 12.6.3 MPLS APS Application To realize the MPLS APS function, you need to configure two different tunnels which the source and the sink is same but the route is different. When the working tunnel is faulty, services are switched to the protection tunnel that is previously created. 12.6.4 Creating an MPLS Tunnel Protection Group You can create an MPLS tunnel protection group to protect MPLS tunnels. You can configure 1+1 protection and 1:1 protection in an MPLS tunnel protection group. To create an MPLS tunnel protection group, the MPLS tunnel protection group must be configured at the source and sink NEs of the MPLS tunnel. 12.6.5 Perform MPLS Tunnel Protection Switching On the U2000, you can perform MPLS tunnel protection switching. The protection switching operations include forced switching, exercise switching, manual to working, and manual to protection. 12.6.6 Deleting an MPLS Tunnel Protection Group To delete an MPLS Tunnel protection group, the MPLS Tunnel protection groups must be deleted at the source NE and sink NE.
12.6.1 Introduction to MPLS APS

MPLS APS is a network protection mechanism. In the case of MPLS APS, a protection tunnel is created to protect the working tunnel when the working tunnel fails.
Purpose and Benefit

The purpose of adopting the MPLS APS mechanism is to protect certain important working tunnels in the network and thus preventing service interruption in the case of the tunnel failure. The APS mechanism can determine whether to perform switching based on detection at the physical layer and the link layer. l l At the physical layer, the loss of signal is detected in microseconds. At the link layer, the detection is conducted by MPLS OAM in 10 ms. Set Detection Packet Period to 3.3 ms so that the protection switching time is less than 50 ms.
In MPLS APS, detection at the link layer is performed by MPLS OAM. Thus, you must set the MPLS OAM parameters for relevant tunnels before configuring MPLS APS.
MPLS APS 1+1 Protection

In the case of the MPLS APS 1+1 protection, the transmit end dually feeds the service to the working and protection tunnels and the receive end selectively receives the service. When the equipment detects a fault of the working tunnel, the receive end receives the service from the protection tunnel. Figure 12-24 shows MPLS APS 1+1 protection supported by the equipment.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-61
Figure 12-24 MPLS APS 1+1 protection

Service detection point Working path Processing board Service detection point Subnetwork Processing board switching Access
Access
switching
Processing board
Protection path/ protocol path Subnetwork
Processing board
The APS protocol is transmitted through the protection tunnel to exchange the protocol state and the switching state. The equipment at the two ends performs service switching and selectively receives services according to the protocol state and switching state. Table 12-12 lists parameters for MPLS APS 1+1 protection. Table 12-12 Parameters for MPLS APS 1+1 protection Switching Mode Revertive Mode Switching Protocol Switching Time Switching Hold-off Time (100ms) 1+1 singleended switching 1+1 dualended switching 1+1 singleended switching 1+1 dualended switching Nonrevertive Nonrevertive Revertive APS protocol APS protocol APS protocol APS protocol 50 ms 0 to 100 (0 by default) 0 to 100 (0 by default) 0 to 100 (0 by default) 0 to 100 (0 by default) Default Recovery Time
50 ms
50 ms
5 minutes
Revertive
50 ms
5 minutes
Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l The board has a hardware or software failure. l A cold reset is performed on the board. l A switching command is manually issued. l MPLS OAM detects that the working tunnel is faulty at the link layer.
12-62
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
MPLS APS 1:1 Protection

In MPLS APS 1:1 protection, a protection tunnel is used to protect services transmitted on the working tunnel. When the working tunnel fails, the services are switched to the protection tunnel. The 1:1 protection adopts the single fed and single receiving mechanism. Figure 12-25 shows MPLS APS 1:1 protection supported by the equipment. Figure 12-25 MPLS APS 1:1 protection
Service detection point Working path Processing board Subnetwork Processing board Service detection point
Access
switching
switching
Access
Processing board Subnetwork Protocol path
Processing board Protection path
In MPLS APS 1:1 protection, services accessed are transmitted through the working tunnel. When the working tunnel fails, the services are switched to the protection tunnel. Then, the services are transmitted through the protection tunnel and the receive end receive the services from the protection tunnel. The APS protocol is transmitted through the protection tunnel to exchange the protocol state and the switching state. The equipment at the two ends performs service switching and selectively receives services according to the protocol state and switching state. Table 12-13 lists parameters for MPLS APS 1:1 protection. Table 12-13 Parameters for MPLS APS 1:1 protection Switching Mode Revertive Mode Switching Protocol Switching Time Switching Hold-off Time (100ms) 1:1 dualended switching 1:1 dualended switching Nonrevertive Revertive APS protocol APS protocol 50 ms 0 to 100 (0 by default) 0 to 100 (0 by default) Default Recovery Time
50 ms
5 minutes
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-63
Switching Mode
Revertive Mode
Switching Protocol
Switching Time
Switching Hold-off Time (100ms)
Default Recovery Time
Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l The board has a hardware or software failure. l A cold reset is performed on the board. l A switching command is manually issued. l MPLS OAM detects that the working tunnel is faulty at the link layer.
Compliant Standards and Protocols

MPLS APS complies with ITU-T Y.1720.

Basic concepts related to the MPLS APS protection include the switching mode, revertive mode, wait-to-restore (WTR) time, hold-off time, and protocol state.
APS
The automatic protection switching (APS) protocol is used to coordinate actions of the source and the sink in the case of bidirectional protection switching. By the APS protocol, the source and the sink cooperate with each other to perform functions such as protection switching, switching delay, and WTR function. According to ITU-T Y.1720, the source and the sink both need to select channels in the APS. In this case, the APS protocol is required for coordination. In the case of bidirectional protection switching, the APS protocol needs to be used regardless of the revertive mode. The APS protocol is always transmitted through the protection tunnel. Then, the equipment at either end knows that the tunnel from which the APS protocol is received is the protection tunnel of the opposite end and thus to determine whether the configuration about the working tunnel and the protection tunnel is consistent at the two ends. When the equipment cannot receive any APS packet, services should be always transmitted and received from the working tunnel.
Switching Mode
MPLS APS provides two switching modes, that is, single-ended switching and dual-ended switching. In the case of single-ended switching, when one end detects a fault, it only performs switching on the local end and does not instruct the opposite end to perform any switching. In the case of dual-ended switching, when one end detects a fault, it performs switching on the local end and also instructs the opposite end to perform switching. Single-ended switching does not require the APS protocol for negotiation and it features rapid and stable switching.
Dual-ended switching ensures that the services are transmitted in a consistent channel, which facilitates service management.
Revertive Mode
The MPLS APS function supports two revertive modes, that is, revertive mode and non-revertive mode. In the non-revertive mode, services are not switched from the protection tunnel to the working tunnel even the working tunnel is restored to the normal state. In the revertive mode, services are switched from the protection tunnel to the original working tunnel if the working tunnel is restored to the normal state within the WTR time.
WTR Time
The WTR time refers to the period from the time when the original working tunnel is restored to the time when the services are switched from the protection tunnel to the original working tunnel. In certain scenarios, the state of the working tunnel is unstable. In this case, setting the WTR time can prevent frequent switching of services between the working tunnel and the protection tunnel. By default, the WTR time of the equipment is 5 minutes.
Hold-off Time
The hold-off time refers to the period from the time when the equipment detects a fault to the time when the switching operation is performed. When the equipment is configured with the MPLS APS protection and other protection, setting the hold-off time can ensure that other protection switching operations are performed first. By default, the hold-off time of the equipment is 0s.
Protocol State
The protocol state indicates whether the APS protocol of the protection group is valid currently. In the case of configuring the MPLS APS protection, the protocol state is disabled by default. If you enable the APS protocol at the local NE first and then the opposite NE when configuring the MPLS APS protection, the opposite NE may has an anomaly in receiving services. After the MPLS APS protection group is configured at the two ends, start the protocol.
12.6.3 MPLS APS Application

To realize the MPLS APS function, you need to configure two different tunnels which the source and the sink is same but the route is different. When the working tunnel is faulty, services are switched to the protection tunnel that is previously created.
MPLS APS 1+1 Protection

In the case of MPLS APS 1+1 protection, a protection tunnel is used to protect the working tunnel. The 1+1 protection adopts the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism. The services are switched to the protection tunnel only when the working tunnel fails.
Figure 12-26 shows the MPLS APS 1+1 protection. Figure 12-26 MPLS APS 1+1 protection
Working Tunnel NE A NE B
Protection Tunnel
There are two MPLS tunnels as shown in the figure. Normally, services are transmitted through the working tunnel, and the protection tunnel is used to transmit the APS protocol. MPLS OAM performs the connectivity check for each unidirectional MPLS tunnel. The source sends connectivity check packets periodically and the sink performs the check. Set the OAM packet type to FFD and the sending period to 3.3 ms to ensure that the APS switching time is less than 50 ms. The switching mode of the MPLS APS 1+1 protection includes single-ended and dual-ended switching.
MPLS APS 1:1 Protection

In the case of MPLS APS 1:1 protection, a protection tunnel is used to protect the working tunnel. Normally, services are transmitted through the working tunnel. The services are switched to the protection tunnel only when the working tunnel fails. Figure 12-27 shows the MPLS APS 1:1 protection. Figure 12-27 MPLS APS 1:1 protection
Working Tunnel NE A NE B
Protection Tunnel
There are two MPLS tunnels as shown in the figure. The continuous line indicates the working tunnel and the dashed line indicates the protection tunnel. Normally, services are transmitted through the working tunnel, and the protection tunnel is used to transmit the APS protocol.
MPLS OAM performs the connectivity check for each unidirectional MPLS tunnel. The source sends connectivity check packets periodically and the sink performs the check. Set the OAM packet type to FFD and the sending period to 3.3 ms to ensure that the APS switching time is less than 50 ms. The switching mode of the MPLS APS 1:1 protection includes single-ended and dual-ended switching.
Guide to Configuring the MPLS APS Protection

Pay attention to the following when configuring the MPLS APS protection. l l l Enable MPLS OAM of the tunnels before configuring the APS protection. Set the MPLS OAM packet type to FFD and the sending period to 3.3 ms. Set the APS protocol to the enabled state after the nodes at both ends are configured with the APS protection group.
12.6.4 Creating an MPLS Tunnel Protection Group

You can create an MPLS tunnel protection group to protect MPLS tunnels. You can configure 1+1 protection and 1:1 protection in an MPLS tunnel protection group. To create an MPLS tunnel protection group, the MPLS tunnel protection group must be configured at the source and sink NEs of the MPLS tunnel.
Prerequisite
l l l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The working and protection tunnels of an MPLS tunnel must be created. You must have enabled the MPLS OAM state of each MPLS tunnel in the protection group. The OAM packet type must be set to FFD and transmission period to 3.3 ms.
WARNING
l The protection tunnel should not carry any extra service.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the source NE of the Tunnel in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The New Tunnel Protection Group dialog box is displayed.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-67
Step 3 Set parameters for the tunnel protection group. l Protection Type: You can select 1+1 or 1:1. l Switching Mode: You can select Single-Ended or Dual-Ended. When the protection type is 1:1, the switching mode must be dual-ended. l Revertive Mode: You can select Non-revertive or Revertive. l Hold-off Time(100ms): The unit is 100 millisecond. You can enter an integer from 0 to 100, that is, 0 to 10 seconds.
CAUTION
When creating an APS protection group, disable Protocol Status. Start the protocol only when the configuration of the APS protection group is complete at both nodes. Step 4 Click OK. The MPLS tunnel protection group is successfully configured.
NOTE
The bandwidth of the protection tunnel should exceed that of the working tunnel. To increase the bandwidth of the working tunnel after the protection group is created, increase the bandwidth of the protection tunnel first.
Step 5 Refer to Steps 1 through 4 to configure the protection group on the sink NE of the tunnel. Step 6 Start the protocol state of the MPLS APS protection group.
1. 2. 3.
Select the source NE of the Tunnel in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. Right-click a created APS protection group, and select Start Protocol. A dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Protocol Status of the APS protection group turns to Enabled.
----End
12.6.5 Perform MPLS Tunnel Protection Switching

On the U2000, you can perform MPLS tunnel protection switching. The protection switching operations include forced switching, exercise switching, manual to working, and manual to protection.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of the MPLS tunnel protection group and you must have enable the protocol status.
Context
CAUTION
When other switching operations, excluding the exercise switching, are performed, the services may be interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the source NE of the Tunnel in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select a protection group that you want to perform protection switching. Step 3 Click Function tab.
Step 4 Choose the switching operation to be performed from the displayed shortcut menu.
Step 5 Confirm in the confirmation dialog box. ----End
12.6.6 Deleting an MPLS Tunnel Protection Group

To delete an MPLS Tunnel protection group, the MPLS Tunnel protection groups must be deleted at the source NE and sink NE.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the source NE of the Tunnel in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select a protection group that you want to delete. Step 3 Click Delete. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. Step 4 Click Yes. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click Close. ----End
12.7 Ethernet Ring Protection

Based on the traditional Ethernet mechanism, the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) uses the ETH-OAM function and the ring automatic protection switching (R-APS) protocol to achieve fast protection switching on the Ethernet ring network. 12.7.1 Introduction to Ethernet Ring Protection Based on the traditional Ethernet mechanism, ERPS uses the R-APS protocol to achieve fast protection switching on the Ethernet ring network. 12.7.2 Basic Concepts This section describes the basic concepts of ERPS to help you better understand ERPS. 12.7.3 Availability This section describes the equipment type and software versions that support the ERPS protection. 12.7.4 Function Implementation Based on the traditional Ethernet mechanism, the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) uses the ETH-OAM function and the ring automatic protection switching (R-APS) protocol to achieve fast protection switching on the Ethernet ring network. 12.7.5 Application of Ethernet Ring Protection This section describes the application scenario of Ethernet ring protection. 12.7.6 Configuring Ethernet Ring Protection This section describes the configuration of Ethernet ring protection, including the creation and deletion of Ethernet ring protection, and the modification and description of parameters.
12.7.1 Introduction to Ethernet Ring Protection

Based on the traditional Ethernet mechanism, ERPS uses the R-APS protocol to achieve fast protection switching on the Ethernet ring network.
Definition
Based on the traditional Ethernet mechanism, ERPS uses the R-APS protocol to achieve fast protection switching on the Ethernet ring network.
Objective
The following are objectives of Ethernet ring protection: l l l l l To provide guaranteed network connectivity. To provide rapid service restoration (less than 50 ms). To provide protection at any physical or server layer for any type of client signals. To support flexible networking modes. To reduce operational expenditure (OpEx) and capital expenditure (CapEx) for vendors.

This section describes the basic concepts of ERPS to help you better understand ERPS.
Ethernet Ring
An Ethernet ring is a collection of Ethernet ring nodes forming a closed loop whereby each node is connected to two adjacent nodes through a full-duplex communication link.
RPL
The RPL is the ring link that is blocked at one end or both ends under normal conditions to prevent loops. One Ethernet ring has only one RPL.
RPL Owner
The RPL owner is an Ethernet ring node adjacent to the RPL. It is responsible for blocking and unblocking the RPL port. Under normal conditions, the RPL owner blocks the RPL port to prevent loops.
R-APS message
R-APS message is a protection switching protocol defined for the ERPS, which contains the messages, requests, or states required by the protection switching. Through the R-APS message between ring nodes, it is ensured that the nodes perform consistent operations to complete the protection switching. l l R-APS (NR, RB): A type of R-APS message that is sent by the RPL owner to indicate that the ring is in normal state and the RPL port is blocked. R-APS (SF): A type of R-APS message that is sent by the node detecting the link fault to indicate that an SF event occurs at the local node.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
R-APS (NR): A type of R-APS message that is sent by the node detecting the link recovery to indicate that the SF event at the local node is cleared.
Control VLAN
The ERPS uses an independent VLAN channel to carry the R-APS messages. The control VLAN ID cannot be the same as the service VLAN ID.
R-APS Format
R-APS information is carried in the R-APS protocol data unit (PDU), which is transmitted through R-APS messages. R-APS messages ensure that all nodes on the ring perform consistent operations. R-APS frame format is a type of ETH-OAM frame formats. See Figure 12-28. The default destination MAC address of R-APS message is 01-19-A7-00-00-01. In Figure 12-28, the gray part indicates the 32-byte R-APS specific information. Figure 12-28 R-APS format
Table 12-14 lists the description of each filed in R-APS specific information. Table 12-14 Description of each filed in R-APS specific information Field Request/State Length 4 bits Value 1011 0000 Others Resv1 Status RB (RPL Blocked) 4 bits 1 bit 0000 1 0 Description Indicates signal fail (SF). Indicates no request (NR). Reserved. Reserved. Indicates the RPL is blocked. l Indicates the RPL is not blocked. l In the case of a node other than the RPL owner, the value of RB should be set to 0.
Field DNF (Do Not Flush)
Length 1 bit
Value 1 0
Description Indicates that the ring node should not update the MAC address table. Indicates that the ring node should update the MAC address table. Reserved. Indicates the MAC address of a ring node. The MAC address is unique. Reserved.
Status Reserved Node ID Reserved
6 bits 6 bytes 24 bytes
All 0s
R-APS Timer
During the ERPS process, three timers are used, that is, guard timer, wait-to-restore (WTR) timer, and holdoff timer. l Guard Timer R-APS messages are periodically transmitted over the ring and the status of the ring nodes may change at any moment. This can result in an outdated and useless R-APS message being received by ring nodes. The reception or forwarding of the outdated messages may result in erroneous protection switching decisions. The guard timer is used to prevent ring nodes from receiving outdated R-APS messages. The period of the guard timer may be configured in 10 ms steps between 10 ms and 2s, with a default value of 500 ms. When the guard timer is running, the received R-APS message is discarded. When the guard timer expires, the received R-APS message is forwarded directly. l WTR Timer The period from the time when the original working channel is recovered to normal to the time when the NE releases the switching is called the wait-to-restore (WTR) time. When the original working channel is recovered to normal, the WTR timer on the RPL owner starts. While the timer is running, a WTR running signal is continuously generated. After the timer expires and no switching request of higher priority is received, the WTR timer stops generating the WTR running signal but starts to continuously generate the WTR expire signal. The period of the WTR timer may be configured in 1 minute steps between 5 minutes and 12 minutes, with a default value of 5 minutes. The WTR timer is used to prevent the frequent switching actions due to instability of the working channel. l Holdoff Timer When a new fault or more faults occur, the holdoff timer starts if the preset holdoff timer value is non-zero. When the holdoff timer is running, the fault is not reported to ERPS. When the holdoff timer expires, the link state is checked regardless of whether the defect persists. If there is a fault, the fault is reported to ERPS for protection switching. The reported fault need not be the same as the fault that starts the holdoff timer.
The period of the holdoff timer may be configured in 100 ms steps between 0s and 10s with an accuracy of 5 ms. The default value is 0s. The holdoff timer is used to coordinate protection switching time between ERPS and other existing protection schemes. Its purpose is to allow the protection switching at another layer or level (for example, the LAG protection at ports) to have a chance to fix the problem before ERPS switching.
12.7.3 Availability
This section describes the equipment type and software versions that support the ERPS protection. Table 12-15 Boards and equipment versions of the OptiX RTN 910, OptiX RTN 950, OptiX RTN 620 and NMS versions that support the ERPS protection Board Type EM6T Equipment Version OptiX RTN 910 V100R002 OptiX RTN 950 V100R002 EFP6 OptiX RTN 620
12.7.4 Function Implementation

Based on the traditional Ethernet mechanism, the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) uses the ETH-OAM function and the ring automatic protection switching (R-APS) protocol to achieve fast protection switching on the Ethernet ring network.
Trigger Condition
The automatic Ethernet ring protection switching can be triggered on any of the following conditions: l l Board fault: A key board is faulty (for example, the line board is powered off or offline). In the case of system-side ports, If link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) is not enabled, the trigger conditions are as follows: TU_LOP, AU_LOP, MS_AIS, AU_AIS, TU_AIS, B3_EXC, BIP_EXC, HP_UNEQ, LP_UNEQ, VCAT_SQM_VC4, VCAT_SQM_VC3, VCAT_LOM_VC4, VCAT_LOM_VC3, and VCAT_LOA. If LCAS is enabled, the trigger condition is the unavailability of all members in the virtual concatenation group (VCG). l In the case of Ethernet ports, the trigger conditions are R_LOS, LINK_ERR, and LSR_NO_FITED.
NOTE
If a VCG port is not bound with any VC, it indicates that the VCG port is normal and will not trigger ERPS switching.
12-74
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Switching Time
In the case of the LINK_LOS state at the ports on the client side, the switching time is less than 50 ms. In other cases, the switching time is 200 ms.
Switching Mode
Revertive means that the service is switched to the working channel after the working channel becomes normal. Non-Revertive means that the service is not switched to the working channel after the working channel becomes normal.
Switching State
The switching states are idle, wait-to-restore, automatic switching, idle (protection channel is active), and SF switching.
Working Principle
ERPS uses the R-APS protocol to achieve protection switching. Figure 12-29 and Figure 12-30 show the working principle of ERPS.
NOTE
In this document, R-APS (SF), R-APS (NR), and R-APS (NR, RB) messages are referred to as SF, NR, and NR, RB respectively.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
12-75
Figure 12-29 ERPS switching process (upon a fault not on the RPL link)
NE A NE B RPL NE C NE D
RPL Owner W Normal State E W E W E W E
1 2 3 4 5 6
SF SF Flush
NR, RB (DNF) Failure
NR, RB (DNF)
NR, RB (DNF)
NR, RB (DNF)
SF
Flush
SF Flush SF
SF Flush SF
SF
SF
Protection State
7 8
Recovery NR Guard timer NR NR NR WTR timer
NR
NR, RB (DNF) Normal State
NR, RB (DNF)
NR, RB (DNF)
Flush NR, RB (DNF)
10
Flush
NR, RB (DNF)
Flush
NR, RB (DNF)
Flush
NR, RB (DNF)
NR, RB (DNF)
As shown in Figure 12-29, the ERPS switching actions are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. In normal state, the RPL owner (NE D) blocks the east port and sends the NR, RB message at the east and west ports. The RPL link between NE A and NE B becomes faulty. NE A and NE B detect the SF condition. After the holdoff timer expires, NE A and NE B block the ports connecting to the faulty link and flush filtering database (FDB). NE A and NE B keep forwarding the SF message to the Ethernet ring periodically while the SF condition persists. The node receiving the SF message on the ring flushes FDB. When the RPL owner receives the SF message, it unblocks the blocked RPL port. The ERPS switching is complete and the ring enters stable state. The fault on the link between NE A and NE B is rectified. NE A and NE B detect that the SF condition is cleared. Then, NE A and NE B start the guard timer and initiate periodical transmission of the NR message at both ring ports. When the guard timer is running, the received R-APS message is discarded. After the guard timer expires, NE A and NE B accept the new R-APS message that they receive.
12-76
9.
When the RPL owner receives the NR message, it starts the WTR timer. At expiration of the WTR timer, the RPL owner blocks the RPL port, sends the NR, RB message, and flushes FDB.
10. When NE A and NE B receive the NR, RB message, they unblock the blocked ports and stop forwarding the NR message. In addition, NE A, NE B, and NE C flush FDB when receiving the NR, RB message. Then, the Ethernet ring returns to normal state. Figure 12-30 ERPS switching process (upon a fault on the RPL link)
NE A NE B RPL NE C NE D
RPL Owner W Normal State E W E W E W E
1 2 3 4 5 6
NR, RB (DNF)
NR, RB (DNF)
NR, RB (DNF)
NR, RB (DNF) Failure
SF (DNF)
SF (DNF)
SF (DNF)
SF (DNF) Recovery Guard timer
Protection State
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR WTR timer
NR, RB (DNF) Normal State
NR, RB (DNF)
NR, RB (DNF)
NR, RB (DNF)
8
NR, RB (DNF) NR, RB (DNF) NR, RB (DNF) NR, RB (DNF)
As shown in Figure 12-30, the ERPS switching actions are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. In normal state, the RPL owner (NE D) blocks the east port. The RPL link between NE A and NE D becomes faulty. NE A and NE D detect the SF condition. After the holdoff timer expires, NE A and NE D block the ports connecting to the faulty link. NE A and NE D keep forwarding the SF message to the Ethernet ring periodically while the SF condition persists. The SF message contains the Do Not Flush (DNF) indication, which prevents every node on the Ethernet ring from flushing FDB under any condition. The RPL owner receives the SF message with the DNF indication, but the SF message is ignored because there is a local higher priority request (local SF). When receiving the SF message with the DNF indication, the other NEs on the ring are informed of the RPL link fault. The other NEs, however, do not flush FDB under any condition. Then, the ring enters stable state. There is the SF message with the DNF indication on the ring.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
5. 6.
The fault on the link between NE A and NE D is rectified. NE A and NE D detect that the SF condition is cleared. Then, NE A and NE D start the guard timer and initiate periodical transmission of the NR message at both ring ports. The guard timer prevents NE A and NE D from receiving R-APS messages. After the guard timer expires, NE A and NE D accept the new R-APS message that they receive. When the RPL owner receives the NR message, it starts the WTR timer. At expiration of the WTR timer, the RPL owner blocks the RPL port, sends the NR, RB message with the DNF indication. This message prevents every node on the ring from flushing FDB under any condition. When NE A receives the NR, RB message, it unblock the blocked west port and stop forwarding the NR message. In addition, when receiving the NR, RB message, NE A, NE B, and NE C are informed of the RPL link recovery and are required not to flush FDB under any condition. Then, the Ethernet ring returns to normal state.
7.
8.
12.7.5 Application of Ethernet Ring Protection

This section describes the application scenario of Ethernet ring protection. As shown in Figure 12-31, project T is a ring network that consists of stations A, B, C, and D. The ring network is configured with the Ethernet ring protection. Figure 12-31 shows the situation when ERPS occurs. In this ring network, the RPL owner (NE D) blocks the east port on the RPL under normal conditions. That is, all services are transmitted through the west port. When a certain link or NE on the ring is faulty, NE D unblocks the blocked east RPL port so that the affected services can be transmitted through the east port.
12-78
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 12-31 Ethernet ring protection switching
VB NE A
RPL Owner VB
VB
NE B
VB
NE D
Normal State NE C
Protection switching
Failure
VB RPL Owner NE A
VB NE B
VB NE D Protection State NE C Ethernet service direction
VB
12.7.6 Configuring Ethernet Ring Protection

This section describes the configuration of Ethernet ring protection, including the creation and deletion of Ethernet ring protection, and the modification and description of parameters. 12.7.6.1 Configuration Rules This section describes the rules for configuring the Ethernet ring protection. 12.7.6.2 Creating Ethernet Ring Protection Ethernet ring protection is applicable to ring networks. It uses the R-APS protocol to achieve fast protection switching on an Ethernet ring network. 12.7.6.3 Modifying Parameters of Ethernet Ring Protection The parameters of the created Ethernet ring protection can be queried and modified by using the U2000.
12.7.6.1 Configuration Rules

This section describes the rules for configuring the Ethernet ring protection. The rules for configuring the Ethernet ring protection are as follows: l l l The Ethernet ring protection is applicable only to ring networks and supports the network consisting of only one ring currently. At least one EM6T board must be configured at each station. The revertive mode must be set to revertive.
12.7.6.2 Creating Ethernet Ring Protection

Ethernet ring protection is applicable to ring networks. It uses the R-APS protocol to achieve fast protection switching on an Ethernet ring network.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. Then, the Create Ethernet Ring Protection Protocol Instance dialog box is displayed. Step 3 The protection parameters should be set according to network planning.
NOTE
For one ring network, specify one NE as the RPL owner.
Step 4 Click OK. After the operation succeeds, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Step 5 Set Hold-Off Time(ms), Guard Time(ms), WTR Time(min), Packet Transmit Interval(s), and Entity Level according to network planning. Click Apply. Step 6 Display the NE Explorer of the other nodes on the ring in turn and repeat Steps 1 through 5 to create Ethernet ring protection at each node. Then, the creation of the protection ring is complete. Step 7 Optional: Select an instance and click Delete. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box displayed. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In this case, the instance is deleted. ----End
12.7.6.3 Modifying Parameters of Ethernet Ring Protection

The parameters of the created Ethernet ring protection can be queried and modified by using the U2000.
Prerequisite
12.7.6.2 Creating Ethernet Ring Protection must be complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. Then, the parameters of the current protection instance are displayed. Step 3 Optional: Double-click the required field or click the drop-down list and then you can modify the parameter value or choose a new value. In the case of Ethernet ring protection, the following parameters can be modified: Control VLAN, Hold-Off Time(ms), Guard Time(ms), WTR Time(min), Packet Transmit Interval(s), and Entity Level. Step 4 Click Apply to deliver the configuration. ----End
12.8 Configuring Link Aggregation

Link aggregation allows multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be aggregated to form a link aggregation group (LAG) so that the bandwidths and availability of the links increase. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical link. 12.8.1 Overview Link aggregation allows multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be aggregated to form a link aggregation group (LAG) so that the bandwidths and availability of the links increase. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical link. 12.8.2 Availability The LAG feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 12.8.3 Principle The LACP protocol is used to realize dynamic aggregation and de-aggregation of links. The LACP protocol is developed based on IEEE 802.3ad. 12.8.4 Configuration Guide You can bind multiple links that are connected to the same equipment by configuring an Ethernet link aggregation.
12.8.1 Overview
Link aggregation allows multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be aggregated to form a link aggregation group (LAG) so that the bandwidths and availability of the links increase. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical link. The LAG aggregates multiple physical links to form a logical link that is at a higher rate. Link aggregation functions between adjacent equipment. Hence, link aggregation is not related to the architecture of the entire network. Link aggregation is also called port aggregation because each link corresponds to a port in an Ethernet. As shown in Figure 12-32, link aggregation provides the following functions: l Increased bandwidth The LAG provides the telecom operators with a cost-effective method of increasing the link bandwidth. The telecom operators obtain data links with higher bandwidths by
combining multiple physical links into one logical link without upgrading the existing equipment. The bandwidth of the logical link is equal to the sum of the bandwidths of the physical links. The aggregation module distributes the traffic to different members by using the load sharing algorithm, thus realizing the load sharing function at the link level. l Increased availability The links in a LAG provide backup to each other dynamically. When a link fails, another link in the LAG quickly replaces the failed link. The process in which link aggregation starts the backup link relates only to the links in the same LAG and does not relate to the links that are not in the LAG. Figure 12-32 Link aggregation group
Link 1 Link 2 Ethernet packets Link 3 LAG Ethernet packets
Standard and protocol compliance The LAG feature complies with the IEEE 802.3ad Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications.
LAG Types
Types of Aggregation: Link aggregation is available in the following two types. l Manual aggregation A user manually creates a LAG. When a user adds or deletes a member port, the LACP protocol is disabled. A port can be in the up or down state. The system determines whether to perform aggregation depending on the physical status of a port (up or down). Manual aggregation is not as accurate or effective as static aggregation in controlling link aggregation. l Static aggregation A user manually creates a LAG. When a user adds or deletes a member port, the LACP protocol is enabled. A port can be in the selected, unselected, or standby state. The equipment exchanges aggregation information by using the LACP protocol to reach agreement on aggregation. Static aggregation is more accurate and more effective than manual aggregation in controlling link aggregation. Load Sharing Modes: The LAG supports the following load sharing modes. l Load sharing mode Each member link in a LAG carries traffic. That is, the member links in the LAG share the load. In load sharing mode, the bandwidth of the link increases. When a member in a LAG changes or a certain link fails, the traffic is re-allocated automatically.
Load non-sharing mode Only one member link in a LAG carries traffic and the other links in the LAG are in the standby state. This is equivalent to the hot standby mechanism. This is because when an active link in a LAG fails, the system selects a link among the standby links in the LAG as an active link to replace the failed link.
Port Types
NOTE
l The main port number cannot appear in the slave port number list. l A slave port can be added to an LAG only when no service is configured for the port. A main port can be added to an LAG even if you configure services for the port, and the services of the port are not affected. l You can modify or query the attributes of a main port. You cannot set the logical attributes of a slave port, but can query it. l FE port and GE port can not in the same LAG.
Main Port l The Main Port indicates the LAG member port available for creating services. Each LAG has only one main port. If the load sharing parameter is set to Non-Sharing, the main port carries the services. When the main port becomes faulty, the services are switched to and carried by the slave port. Every Ethernet port on the NE can be used as the main port.
Slave Port l The slave ports in a link aggregation group are fixed. Unless they are manually modified, the system does not automatically add them to or delete them from the link aggregation group. Add the relevant slave port to the link aggregation group as required.
12.8.2 Availability
The LAG feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 12-16 Availability of the LAG feature Applicable Board EMS6, EFP6 EM4T Applicable Equipment RTN 620 RTN 605
Table 12-17 Availability of the LAG feature Applicable Board IFU2 IFX2 EM6T
Applicable Board EM6F CSHA CSHB CSHC
Applicable Equipment
RTN 910
12.8.3 Principle
The LACP protocol is used to realize dynamic aggregation and de-aggregation of links. The LACP protocol is developed based on IEEE 802.3ad. The LACP protocol is developed based on IEEE 802.3ad and performs the following functions: l The LACP protocol provides the data switching equipment with a standard negotiation mode. Hence, the system automatically forms aggregation links according to its configuration and enables the aggregation links to transmit and receive data. After an aggregation link is formed, the LACP protocol maintains the status of the aggregation link. When the aggregation conditions change, the LACP protocol automatically adjusts or releases the LAG. Equipment A and equipment B exchange LACP packets through port 1, port 2, port 3, and port 4. Each LACP packet contains the system priority, system MAC address, port priority, port number, and operational key. The operational key reflects the aggregation capability of the port. The key value is determined by certain factors such as the physical characteristics of the port (for example, rate and duplex), configuration constraints set by the network administrator, characteristics of the port, and limitations of the port. After equipment B receives an LACP packet from equipment A, equipment B compares the information in the LACP packet with the information stored by the other ports and selects the ports that can be aggregated. After equipment A receives an LACP packet from equipment B, equipment A compares the information in the LACP packet with the information stored by the other ports and selects the ports that can be aggregated. Equipment A and equipment B reach agreement on the ports that can be added into a LAG, and then, form a LAG.
As shown in Figure 12-33, the LACP protocol aggregates links as follows: 1.
2.
3.
4.
Figure 12-33 Application of the LACP protocol

Equipment A Equipment B
PORT1 PORT2 PORT3 PORT4
PORT1 PORT2 PORT3 PORT4
12-84
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
The characteristics of the LACP protocol are as follows: l l The systems realize auto-negotiation by exchanging LACP packets. Each LACP packet contains the configuration and current status of the system that sends the LACP packet. The LACP packets are sent in any of the following modes: Event triggering mode A change in the local status or local configuration triggers the generation and sending of a new LACP packet. Periodical sending mode When an aggregation link works stably, the system periodically sends the current state to maintain the aggregation link. l The LACP packet is not numbered. Hence, both parties use the timer and periodical sending mechanism, instead of the detection and re-transmission of lost packets mechanism, to prevent loss of information. The number of LACP packets that are sent in one second does not exceed five.

You can bind multiple links that are connected to the same equipment by configuring an Ethernet link aggregation. The aggregated links can be regarded as a link, as shown in Figure 12-34. Figure 12-34 Application of the link aggregation group
LAG
Configure a link aggregation as follows: 12.8.4.1 Creating an LAG Link aggregation allows all the members in an LAG to share the incoming and outgoing service loads, thus increasing bandwidth. In addition, the members in the same LAG provide backup to each other dynamically. This increases the availability of the connection. 12.8.4.2 Modifying LAG Parameters After you create a link aggregation group (LAG), you can modify the port priority and system priority of the links as required. In the case of the static LAG, the port with highest priority is preferred to transmit services. 12.8.4.3 Querying Port LACP Packet Statistics By querying the port LACP packet statistics, you can determine the current link aggregation state. 12.8.4.4 Querying Detailed LAG Information
By querying the LAG details, you can obtain detailed information of the current LAG.
12.8.4.1 Creating an LAG

Link aggregation allows all the members in an LAG to share the incoming and outgoing service loads, thus increasing bandwidth. In addition, the members in the same LAG provide backup to each other dynamically. This increases the availability of the connection.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The physical network topology must be established. The Ethernet and IF boards that need to be aggregated must be created. When IF boards are used to create an LAG, the attributes of all member ports must be consistent.
Context
NOTE
In the case of RTN600V100R004 NEs, RTN900V100R002 NEs and the NEs after the versions, when the Load Sharing is Sharing, you can not set or query the Revertive Mode.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 NEs: 1. In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab. Click New and the Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters. Click OK. Optional: Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab. Set Port Priority and System Priority.
NOTE
2. 3. 4. 5.
l The port ID consists of Port and Port Priority. The port that has the smallest port ID in an LAG has the priority to be aggregated first. l The system ID consists of System Priority and System MAC Address. When the system negotiates with the remote system, the system with the smallest ID has the priority to choose the port. In this example, the system refers to the board, and the system MAC address refers to the MAC address of the board. The factory-set MAC address is globally unique and cannot be modified.
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 NEs: 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree. Click New and set the parameters in the dialog box displayed. l You can select an Ethernet port or multiple IF boards to create an LAG group.
l You can select the ports on different boards of the same type, but not of different types, to configure an LAG group. For example, you cannot select an Ethernet board and an IF board to configure an LAG group. 3. 4. Click OK. Optional: Click the Port Priority tab. Set Port Priority for ports.
----End
12.8.4.2 Modifying LAG Parameters

After you create a link aggregation group (LAG), you can modify the port priority and system priority of the links as required. In the case of the static LAG, the port with highest priority is preferred to transmit services.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The LAG must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 NEs: 1. In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
NOTE
2.
The LAG where the LACP protocol is not used, such as a manual LAG, the setting of the port priority does not take effect.
3. 1. 2. 3. 4.
You can set the System Priority of a LAG as required. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree. Click Modify and set the parameters in the dialog box displayed. Click OK. Optional: Click the Port Priority tab. You can modify Port Priority for ports as required.
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 NEs:
----End
12.8.4.3 Querying Port LACP Packet Statistics

By querying the port LACP packet statistics, you can determine the current link aggregation state.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. It is only applicable to LAGs of the static aggregation mode.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600: 1. In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
2.
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900: In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select an LAG of the static aggregation mode. Right-click the LAG and choose Link LACP Packet Statistics. You can view the statistics in the dialog box is displayed. ----End
12.8.4.4 Querying Detailed LAG Information

By querying the LAG details, you can obtain detailed information of the current LAG.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. It is only applicable to LAGs of the static aggregation mode.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600: 1. In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
2.
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900: In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select an LAG of the static aggregation mode. Right-click the LAG and choose Link Aggregation Group Details. You can view the information in the dialog box is displayed. ----End
12-88
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13 Configuring SDH/PDH Services
13
Configuring SDH/PDH Services
About This Chapter

The SDH/PDH services are classified into point-to-point services and SNCP services according to the cross-connection mode. 13.1 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots Two numbering schemes for VC-12 timeslots are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or SDH radio links. 13.2 Configuring E1 Services This topic describes how to configure the E1 services according to the service requirements. 13.3 Configuring Cross-Connections When you configure microwave services, you need to configure cross-connections for each station that the services pass through, according to the service direction. 13.4 Configuring SNCP Services SNCP services can be dual-fed and selectively received and are applicable for protecting services across subnets. When configuring microwave services on a per-NE basis, you can create SNCP services to protect services across subnets. 13.5 Converting Between SNCP and Non-Protection Services During network expansion or handover, you may need to change the type of a protection ring or the protection type of services. This function is used for quick conversion between SNCP services and non-protection services. 13.6 Configuring Overhead Bytes This topic describes how to configure overhead bytes. Normally, the default values of the overhead bytes to be received or transmitted are adopted to meet the relevant requirements. In certain cases, however, the overhead bytes to be received or transmitted need to be modified. 13.7 Configuration Example (Hop Between Two IDU 620s) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to SDH/PDH service requirements. This topic provides examples for configuring the OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 605) in the two common networking modes. 13.8 Configuration Example (Hop Between Two IDU 605s)
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-1
This section describes how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to E1 service requirements, through an example. 13.9 Configuration Example (Hop between the IDU 605 and the IDU 620) This section describes how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to E1 service requirements, through an example.
13-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13.1 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots

Two numbering schemes for VC-12 timeslots are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or SDH radio links.
VC-12 Timeslot Numbering

Two numbering schemes are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or SDH radio links when you create cross-connections. l By order This timeslot numbering scheme is also considered as timeslot scheme, where the numbering formula is as follows: VC-12 number = TUG-3 number + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + (TU-12 number -1) x 21. This scheme is the numbering scheme recommended by ITU-T G.707, which is the default scheme adopted by the OptiX equipment. l Interleaved scheme This timeslot numbering scheme is also considered as line scheme, where the numbering formula is as follows: VC-12 number = (TUG-3 number - 1) x 21 + (TUG-2 number -1) x 3 + TU-12 number. The OptiX equipment can adopt this scheme when it interconnects with the equipment that adopts the interleaved scheme or when specific timeslot numbering scheme is required. Figure 13-1 Numbering VC-12 timeslots by order
TUG-2 1 1 2 4 25 46 5 26 47 6 27 48 3 7 28 49 8 29 50 9 30 51 4 10 31 52 11 32 53 12 33 54 5 13 34 55 14 35 56 15 36 57 6 16 37 58 17 38 59 18 39 60 7 19 40 61 20 41 62 21 42 63 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 TU-12
TUG-3
{ { {
1 22 43 2 23 44 3 24 45
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-3
Figure 13-2 Numbering VC-12 timeslots in the interleaved scheme

1 2 4 5 6 25 26 27 46 47 48 3 7 8 9 28 29 30 49 50 51 TUG-2 4 10 11 12 31 32 33 52 53 54 5 13 14 15 34 35 36 55 56 57 6 16 17 18 37 38 39 58 59 60 7 19 20 21 40 41 42 61 62 63 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 TU-12
TUG-3
{ { {
1 2 3 22 23 24 43 44 45
VC-3 Timeslot Numbering

A VC-3 timeslot number corresponds to a TUG-3 number. If you need to configure VC-3 crossconnections and VC-12 cross-connections in a VC-4 path at the same time, note that the timeslots in the TUG-3 that are occupied by the VC-3 cross-connections cannot be configured for VC-12 cross-connections.
13.2 Configuring E1 Services

This topic describes how to configure the E1 services according to the service requirements.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Configuration > CrossConnection Configuration. Step 2 Select the used E1 port.
13-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameters
Parameter l E1-1 to E1-5 (IDU 605 1A) l E1-1 to E1-16 (IDU 605 1B/ 2B) l E1-1 to E1-16 (IDU 605 1F/2F) l The number of E1 ports is related to the Hybrid/AM attribute (IDU 605 1F/2F). Value Selected, Not Selected Default Value Selected Frequency of Recurrence l An E1 port corresponds to a microwave E1 timeslot, that is, E1-1 corresponds to the first E1 timeslot in the microwave and E1-2 corresponds to the second E1 timeslot. Hence, if the microwave capacity is 2xE1, 5xE1, or 10xE1, only the service over the first two E1 ports, the first five E1 ports, or the first ten E1 ports is transmitted over microwave. l The system does not monitor the E1 services of the ports that are not selected. The E1 services, however, are still transmitted over microwave. l Set the parameters according to the working mode of the radio link and the used E1 port. l In the case of the IDU 605 1F/2F, you can set the number of E1 ports to be the same as E1 Capacity.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-5
13.3 Configuring Cross-Connections

When you configure microwave services, you need to configure cross-connections for each station that the services pass through, according to the service direction.
For OptiX RTN 605 Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Click Query to query the cross-connection services from the NE. Step 3 Select the E1 ports of the service, click Apply. ----End
For OptiX RTN 6x0 Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Click Query to query the cross-connection services from the NE. Step 3 Click New and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the Level, the Direction, the source and the sink of the service. Step 5 Click OK. ----End
13-6
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Sample Configuration
In Figure 13-3, NE1, NE2, NE3 and NE4 comprise an unprotected chain. Services are transmitted by microwave between NE1 and NE2, and NE3 and NE4. Services are transmitted by fiber between NE2 and NE3. Figure 13-3 Chain network
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
Two point-to-point bidirectional E1 services are transmitted between NE1 and NE2. The services use the first and the second VC12 timeslot of a tributary board, and the first and the second VC12 timeslot of an intermediate frequency board. Two bidirectional E1 services are transmitted between NE1 and NE4. The services use the third and the fourth VC12 timeslots of the tributary board, the third and the fourth VC12 timeslots of the intermediate frequency board, and the third and the fourth VC12 timeslots in the first VC4 of a line board. The service flow of the E1 services between NE1 and NE2 is as follows: E1tributary board at NE1intermediate frequency board at NE1intermediate frequency board at NE2 tributary board at NE2 The service flow of the E1 services between NE1 and NE4 is as follows: E1tributary board at NE1intermediate frequency board at NE1intermediate frequency board at NE2 line board at NE2line board at NE3intermediate frequency board at NE3 intermediate frequency board at NE4tributary board at NE4 According to the service flow, you need to perform the configuration as follows: l Configure add or drop VC12 services for NE1. The source and the sink timeslots of the bidirectional services between the tributary board and the intermediate frequency board range from 1 to 4. Configure add or drop VC12 services for NE2. The source and the sink timeslots of the bidirectional services between the intermediate frequency board and the tributary board range from 1 to 2. Configure pass-through VC12 services for NE2. The source and the sink timeslots of the bidirectional services between the intermediate frequency board and the line board range from 3 to 4. Configure pass-through VC12 services for NE3. The source and the sink timeslots of the bidirectional services between the line board and the intermediate frequency board range from 3 to 4. Configure add or drop VC12 services for NE4. The source and the sink timeslots of the bidirectional services between the intermediate frequency board and the tributary board range from 3 to 4.
13.3.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services

In a cross-connection of point-to-point services, one service source corresponds to one service sink. 13.3.2 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services The cross-connection of SNCP services is a cross-connection that a working source and a protection source correspond to a service sink. 13.3.3 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services In the case of the SNCP services at the VC-4 level, you can set certain alarms as the automatic switching conditions. 13.3.4 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Point-to-Point Service When a point-to-point service is not used, you can delete the cross-connections of this service to release the corresponding resources. 13.3.5 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Service When a service is not used, you can delete the cross-connections of this service to release the corresponding resources.
13.3.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services

In a cross-connection of point-to-point services, one service source corresponds to one service sink.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The source and sink boards must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Click Options. Then, select Interleaved or Complete Service to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-connection. Step 3 Click Create. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Configure the cross-connections of the service.
13-8
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Step 5 Click OK.

NOTE
----End
13.3.2 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services

The cross-connection of SNCP services is a cross-connection that a working source and a protection source correspond to a service sink.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The boards where the source and the sink are must be configured.
Context
l l l l l The MSP line can work only as the service sink of an SNCP service pair and cannot work as the working source or the protection source. The radio link with the 1+1 protection configuration can work only as the service sink of an SNCP service pair, and cannot work as the working source or the protection source. The radio link with the N+1 protection configuration can work only as the service sink of an SNCP service pair, and cannot work as the working source or the protection source. The radio link with the XPIC configuration can work only as the service sink of an SNCP service pair, and cannot work as the working source or the protection source. The Hybrid radio link can work only as the service sink of an SNCP service pair, and cannot work as the working source or the protection source.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Options. Then, select Interleaved or Complete Service to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-connection. Step 3 Click Create SNCP. The system displays the Create SNCP Service dialog box. Step 4 Set the attributes of the SNCP protection group and the slot mapping relation of the SNCP service.
NOTE
l Adhere to the following principles when planning the trails: l Do not overlap the working SNC and the protection SNC if possible. l The OptiX RTN 600 does not support the line with the MSP, 1+1 protection configuration or N+1 protection configuration as the working source or the protection source of SNCP. l It is recommended that the working SNC uses the line ports of one line board and the protection SNC uses those of another line board to prevent the situation in which the failure of a line board causes the protection to fail. l If the protection is in the revertive mode, set the WTR time to a value, which ranges from five minutes to twelve minutes. It is recommended that you set the value to ten minutes.
Step 5 Click OK.
13-10
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
----End
Parameters
Parameter Service Type Level Value Range SNCP VC12, VC3, VC4 Default Value SNCP VC12 Description l Specifies the level of the crossconnection to be created. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 paths, set this parameter to VC12. l If the service is an E3/T3 service or a data service that is bound with VC-3 paths, set this parameter to VC3. l If all the services in a VC-4 pass through the NE, set this parameter to VC4. Revertive Mode Non-Revertive, Revertive Non-Revertive l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-11
Parameter Direction
Value Range Unidirectional, Bidirectional
Default Value Bidirectional
Description l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, only the crossconnections in the SNCP receive direction are created. l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, both the crossconnections in the SNCP receive direction and the cross-connections in the SNCP transmit direction are created. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Hold-off Time (100ms)
0 to 100
l When a line fault occurs, an NE can perform SNCP switching after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. This parameter specifies the duration of the delay. l It is recommended that you use the default value because the SNCP cannot co-exist with other protection switching modes in the OptiX RTN 600.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter is valid only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Source Slot Source VC4
Indicates the source slot of the service. Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the service source exists.
13-12
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Configure SNCP Tangent Ring
Checked, Unchecked
Unchecked
After you select the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring check box, you can configure the SNCP services on tangent points of SNCP rings in a fast manner. Generally, it is not recommended to select this check box.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-13
Parameter Activate Immediately
Value Range Yes, No
Default Value Yes
Description Sets whether to immediately activate the cross-connection that is configured. If you need to immediately deliver the crossconnection that is configured to NEs, set the value of this parameter to Yes.
Postrequisite
If Direction is set to Unidirectional, the cross-connection only in the SNCP receive direction is created. Hence, you need to configure a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the working trail, and later, a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection trail.
13.3.3 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services

In the case of the SNCP services at the VC-4 level, you can set certain alarms as the automatic switching conditions.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. An SNCP protection group at the VC-4 level must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Protection Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the SNCP protection group. Double-click Initiation Condition to which the working service corresponds. The system displays the Initiation Condition dialog box. Step 3 Select SD switching conditions. Then, click OK.
Step 4 Select the SNCP protection group. Double-click Initiation Condition to which the protection service corresponds. The system displays the Initiation Condition dialog box.
Step 5 Repeat Step 3. Step 6 Click Apply. The system displays a prompt box asking you whether to carry out the switching. Step 7 Click Yes. ----End
Parameters
Parameter UNEQ Value Range Selected, Not selected Default Value Not selected Description l When this item is selected, the SNCP service considers the HP_UNEQ alarm as an SD switching condition. l It is recommended that you use the default value. TIM Selected, Not selected Not selected l When this item is selected, the SNCP service considers the HP_TIM alarm as an SD switching condition. l It is recommended that you use the default value. SD Selected, Not selected Not selected l When this item is selected, the SNCP service considers the B3_SD alarm as an SD switching condition. l It is recommended that you use the default value. EXC Selected, Not selected Not selected l When this item is selected, the SNCP service considers the B3_EXC alarm as an SD switching condition. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
NOTE
It is recommended that you set Initiation Condition of the working service to be the same as Initiation Condition of the protection service.
13.3.4 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Point-to-Point Service

When a point-to-point service is not used, you can delete the cross-connections of this service to release the corresponding resources.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The cross-connections of the point-to-point service must be configured and the point-to-point service is not used.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Query the data. 1. Click Query. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting This operation will query service at the NE and update service date at the NM. Are you sure to continue?. 2. 3. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, prompting Operation succeeded. Click Close.
Step 3 Select the cross-connection of the point-to-point service that needs to be deleted in CrossConnection. Step 4 Deactivate the service. 1. Click Deactivate. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting Are you sure to deactivate all selected services (only for activated services)?. 2. 3. 4. Click OK. Another Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting This services of the NE will be cleared by this operation. Are you sure to continue?. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, prompting Operation succeeded. Click Close.
Step 5 Delete the service. 1. Click Delete. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting Are you sure to delete all the selected services (only for inactive services)?. 2. 3. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, prompting Operation succeeded. Click Close.
Step 6 Click Query. At this time, the cross-connection of the point-to-point service is already deleted. ----End
13.3.5 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Service

When a service is not used, you can delete the cross-connections of this service to release the corresponding resources.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The cross-connections of the service must be configured and the service is not be used.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Query the data. 1. Click Query. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting This operation will query service at the NE and update service date at the NM. Are you sure to continue?. 2. 3. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, prompting Operation succeeded. Click Close. Step 3 Select the cross-connection of the SNCP service that needs to be deleted in CrossConnection. Step 4 Deactivate the service. 1. Click Deactivate. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting Are you sure to deactivate all selected services (only for activated services?). 2. 3. 4. 1. Click OK. Another Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting This services of the NE will be cleared by this operation. Are you sure to continue?. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, prompting Operation succeeded. Click Close. Click Delete. Then, the OK dialog box is displayed, prompting Are you sure to delete all the selected services (only for inactive services)?. 2. 3. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, prompting Operation succeeded. Click Close. Step 6 Click Query. At this time, the cross-connection of the SNCP service is already deleted. ----End Step 5 Delete the service.
13.4 Configuring SNCP Services

SNCP services can be dual-fed and selectively received and are applicable for protecting services across subnets. When configuring microwave services on a per-NE basis, you can create SNCP services to protect services across subnets.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Optional: Click Query to query the cross-connection services from the NE. Step 3 Click Create SNCP and the Create SNCP Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the Service Type, Level, Revertive Mode, Direction, Hold-off Time and WTR Time. Set the Working Service and Protection Service of SNCP. Step 5 Click OK. ----End
Sample Configuration
In Figure 13-4, NE1, NE2, NE3 and NE4 comprise a unidirectional SNCP ring, and NE4 and NE5 comprise a unprotected chain. The SNCP ring transmits services by fiber, and the unprotected chain transmits services by microwave.
13-18
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 13-4 SNCP ring with unprotected chain

NE 1 West East
West NE 2 East STM-1 SNCP Ring
East NE 4 West NE 5
West NE 3
East
Four bidirectional E1 services are transmitted between NE1 and NE5. The services use the first through fourth VC12 timeslots of a tributary board, the first through fourth VC12 timeslots of an intermediate frequency board, and the first through fourth VC12 timeslots in the first VC4 of a line board. The E1 services are bidirectional. The service from NE1 to NE5 and the service from NE5 to NE1 use diverse routes. l When the network is normal, the service flow between NE1 and NE5 is as follows: E1 tributary board at NE1east line board at NE1west line board at NE2east line board at NE2west line board at NE3east line board at NE3west line board at NE4 intermediate frequency board at NE4intermediate frequency board at NE5tributary board at NE5 When the network is normal, the service flow between NE5 and NE1 is as follows: E1 tributary board at NE5intermediate frequency board at NE5intermediate frequency board at NE4east line board at NE4west line board at NE1tributary board at NE1
According to the service flow, you need to perform the configuration as follows: l Configure add or drop VC12 services for NE1. Configure a bidirectional SNCP service, and select a east line board as the source of Working Service, an west line board as the source of Protection Service, and a tributary board as the sink. The source and the sink timeslots range from 1 to 4. Configure pass-through VC12 services for NE2. Configure bidirectional services between the west and the east line boards. The source and the sink timeslots range from 1 to 4. Configure pass-through VC12 services for NE3. Configure bidirectional services between the west and the east line boards. The source and the sink timeslots range from 1 to 4. Configure add or drop VC12 services for NE4. Configure a bidirectional SNCP service, and select a west line board as the source of Working Service, an east line board as the source of Protection Service, and an intermediate frequency board as the sink. The source and the sink timeslots range from 1 to 4.
l l l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Configure add or drop VC12 services for NE5. The source and the sink timeslots of the bidirectional services between the intermediate frequency board and the tributary board range from 1 to 4.
13.5 Converting Between SNCP and Non-Protection Services

During network expansion or handover, you may need to change the type of a protection ring or the protection type of services. This function is used for quick conversion between SNCP services and non-protection services. 13.5.1 Converting Non-Protection Services into SNCP Services After converting the non-protection services into the SNCP services, you can convert the unidirectional cross-connection of the non-protection services into the unidirectional crossconnection in the receive direction of the SNCP services. 13.5.2 Converting SNCP Services into Non-Protection Services After converting the SNCP services into the non-protection services, you can convert the SNCP cross-connection in the receive direction into the unidirectional cross-connection of the nonprotection services.
13.5.1 Converting Non-Protection Services into SNCP Services

After converting the non-protection services into the SNCP services, you can convert the unidirectional cross-connection of the non-protection services into the unidirectional crossconnection in the receive direction of the SNCP services.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The unidirectional cross-connection of non-protection services must be configured and the source of the cross-connection must be a line board.
When this task is performed to convert a non-protection service into an SNCP service, the original services are not interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Query the data. 1. Click Query. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting This operation will query service at the NE and update service data at the NM. Are you sure to continue?. 2. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, prompting Operation Succeeded.
3.
Click Close.
Step 3 Select the bidirectional cross-connection of the non-protection service in Cross-connection. Then, right-click and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Select the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal service in Cross-connection. Then, right-click and choose Convert to SNCP from the shortcut menu. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting If the non-protection service is convert into a SNCP service, the service may be interrupted. Are you sure to continue?. Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Set the attributes of the SNCP protection group and the slot mapping relation of the SNCP service.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-21
Parameters
Parameter Revertive Mode Value Range Non-Revertive, Revertive Default Value Non-Revertive Description l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. Hold-off Time (100ms) 0 to 100 0 l When a line fault occurs, an NE can perform SNCP switching after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. This parameter specifies the duration of the delay. l It is recommended that you use the default value because the SNCP cannot co-exist with other protection switching modes in the OptiX RTN 600. WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter is valid only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value. Source Slot Source VC4 Indicates the source slot of the service. Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the service source exists.
13-22
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Postrequisite
The SNCP service after the conversion is the SNCP service only in the receive direction. Later, you need to configure a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the working trail, and a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection trail. The non-
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-23
protection service can be converted into the SNCP service both in the receive direction and the transmit direction only after the configuration.
13.5.2 Converting SNCP Services into Non-Protection Services

After converting the SNCP services into the non-protection services, you can convert the SNCP cross-connection in the receive direction into the unidirectional cross-connection of the nonprotection services.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The current service is transmitted in the working path. The SNCP cross-connection in the receive direction must be configured.
When this task is performed to convert an SNCP service into a non-protection service, the original services are not interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the Auto-Created Cross-Connection pane, select the cross-connection. Right-click and choose Convert to Non-Protection Service from the shortcut menu. Step 3 Choose Working or Protection from the displayed menu. Step 4 Then, the Prompt dialog box is displayed, prompting If the SNCP service is converted into a non-protection service, the service may be interrupted. Are you sure to continue?. Step 5 Click OK. ----End
Postrequisite
You need to delete the unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the working path or the unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection path. The SNCP service can be converted into the non-protection service both in the receive direction and the transmit direction only after the deletion.
13.6 Configuring Overhead Bytes

This topic describes how to configure overhead bytes. Normally, the default values of the overhead bytes to be received or transmitted are adopted to meet the relevant requirements. In certain cases, however, the overhead bytes to be received or transmitted need to be modified. 13.6.1 Configuring RSOHs This topic describes how to configure the J0 byte in the regenerator section overheads when the J0_MM alarm is reported at the local or remote NE.
13.6.2 Configuring VC-4 POHs This section describes how to configure the J1 byte or C2 byte in the VC-4 path overheads (POHs) when the HP_TIM or HP_SLM alarm is reported on the line board at the local or remote NE. 13.6.3 Configuring VC-3 POHs You need to configure the J1 or C2 byte in the VC-3 path overheads, when the E3/T3 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC3 or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm. 13.6.4 Configuring VC-12 POHs You need to configure the signal indicator of the J2 or V5 byte in the VC-12 path overheads, when the E1 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC12 or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm.
13.6.1 Configuring RSOHs

This topic describes how to configure the J0 byte in the regenerator section overheads when the J0_MM alarm is reported at the local or remote NE.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The required SDH interface boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the J0 byte. 1. 2. Double-click the parameter to be modified. Then, the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed. Set the overhead byte.
3.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Click OK.
Step 3 Click Apply. Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. Step 4 Click OK. ----End
Parameters
Parameter J0 to Be Sent ([Mode]Content) Value Range Default Value [16 Byte]HuaWei SBS Description l Two byte modes are supported: single byte mode and 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically). l If the remote NE reports the J0_MM alarm, set this parameter according to the J0 byte to be received at the remote NE. J0 to Be Received ([Mode]Content) Disable l Three byte modes are supported: single byte mode, 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically), and disable mode. l When this parameter is set to Disable Mode, the board does not detect the received J0 byte. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
13.6.2 Configuring VC-4 POHs

This section describes how to configure the J1 byte or C2 byte in the VC-4 path overheads (POHs) when the HP_TIM or HP_SLM alarm is reported on the line board at the local or remote NE.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The required line boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the line board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Set the J1 byte. 1. 2. 3.
13-26
Click the Trace Byte J1 tab. Double-click the parameter to be modified. Then, the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed. Set the overhead byte.
4. 5. 6.
Click OK. Click Apply. Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. Click OK.
Step 3 Optional: Set the C2 byte. 1. 2. Click the Signal Flag C2 tab. Set the C2 byte.
Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. 3. 4. Click OK. Click Apply.
Step 4 Optional: Set the termination mode of the VC-4 POHs. 1. 2. Click the Overhead Termination tab. Set the termination mode of the VC-4 POHs.
3. 4.
Click Apply. Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. Click OK.
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-27
Parameters
Parameter J1 to Be Sent ([Mode]Content) Value Range Default Value [16 Byte]HuaWei SBS Description l Three byte modes are supported: single byte mode, 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically), and 64-byte mode (synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A). l If the remote NE reports the HP_TIM alarm, set this parameter according to the J1 byte to be received at the remote NE. J1 to Be Received ([Mode]Content) Disable l Three byte modes are supported: 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically), 64-byte mode (synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A), and disable mode. l When this parameter is set to Disable Mode, the board does not detect the received J1 byte. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value. C2 to Be Sent (0x00)Unequipped, (0x01)Reserved, (0x02) TUG Structure, (0x03) Locked TU-n, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3, (0x05) Experimental Mapping, (0x12) 140M into C-4 asynchronization, (0x13)ATM Mapping, (0x14) MAN DQDB Mapping, (0x15) FDDI Mapping, (0x16)HDLC/PPP Mapping, (0x17) Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x18) HDLC/LAPS Mapping, (0x19) Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x1A) 10G Ethernet Frame, (0x1B)GFP Mapping, (0xCF) Reserved, (0xE1) Reserved, (0xFC) Reserved, (0xFE)O. (0x02) TUG Structure If the remote NE reports the HP_SLM alarm, set this parameter according to the C2 byte to be received at the remote NE.
13-28
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter C2 to Be Received
Value Range 181 Test Signal, (0xFF)VC-AIS
Default Value
Description If the local NE reports the HP_SLM alarm, set this parameter according to the C2 byte to be transmitted from the remote NE.
VC4 Overhead Termination
Auto, PassThrough, Termination
Auto
l When this parameter is set to PassThrough, the local NE detects the VC-4 overheads (the C2 byte is not detected) and then forwards the original overheads. l When this parameter is set to Termination, the local NE detects the VC-4 overheads (the C2 byte is not detected) and then generates new VC-4 overheads according to the board settings. l When this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4 overhead termination of VC-4 pass-through services is Pass-Through and the overhead termination of the VC-3/VC-12 services is Termination. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-29

You need to configure the J1 or C2 byte in the VC-3 path overheads, when the E3/T3 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC3 or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The corresponding E3/T3 interface board or Ethernet board must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the E3/T3 interface board or Ethernet board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC3 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Set the J1 byte. 1. 2. 3. Click the Trace Byte J1 tab. Double-click the parameter to be modified. Then, the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed. Set the overhead byte.
4. 5. 6. 1. 2.
Click OK. Click Apply. Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. Click OK. Click the Signal Flag C2 tab. Set the C2 byte.
Step 3 Optional: Set the C2 byte.
13-30
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. 3. 4. Click OK. Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Parameter J1 to Be Sent ([Mode]Content) Value Range Default Value [16 Byte]HuaWei SBS Description l Three byte modes are supported: single byte mode, 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically), and 64-byte mode (synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A). l If the remote NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm, set this parameter according to the J1 byte to be received at the remote NE. J1 to Be Received ([Mode]Content) Disable l Three byte modes are supported: 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically), 64-byte mode (synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A), and disable mode. l When this parameter is set to Disable Mode, the board does not detect the received J1 byte. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value. C2 to Be Sent (0x00)Unequipped, (0x01)Reserved, (0x02) TUG Structure, (0x03) Locked TU-n, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3, (0x05) Experimental Mapping, (0x12) 140M into C-4 asynchronization, (0x13)ATM Mapping, (0x14) MAN DQDB Mapping, (0x15) FDDI Mapping, (0x16)HDLC/PPP Mapping, (0x17) Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x18) HDLC/LAPS Mapping, (0x19) (0x04)34M/45M into C-3 (E3/T3 interface boards) (0x02) TUG Structure (Ethernet boards) If the remote NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm, set this parameter according to the C2 byte to be received at the remote NE.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-31
Parameter C2 to Be Received
Value Range Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x1A) 10G Ethernet Frame, (0x1B)GFP Mapping, (0xCF) Reserved, (0xE1) Reserved, (0xFC) Reserved, (0xFE)O. 181 Test Signal, (0xFF)VC-AIS
Default Value
Description If the local NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm, set this parameter according to the C2 byte to be transmitted from the remote NE.

You need to configure the signal indicator of the J2 or V5 byte in the VC-12 path overheads, when the E1 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC12 or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The corresponding E1 interface board or Ethernet board must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the E1 interface board or Ethernet board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Set the J2 byte. 1.
13-32
Click the Trace Byte J2 tab.

2. 3.
Double-click the parameter to be modified. Then, the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed. Set the overhead byte.
4. 5. 6. 1. 2.
Click OK. Click Apply. Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. Click OK. Click the Signal Flag tab. Set the signal flag in the V5 byte.
Step 3 Optional: Set the signal flag.
3. 4.
Click Apply. Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. Click OK.
----End
Parameters
Parameter J2 to Be Sent ([Mode]Content) Value Range Default Value [16 Byte]HuaWei SBS Description l Two byte modes are supported: single byte mode and 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically). l If the remote NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm, set this parameter according to the J1 byte to be received at the remote NE.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-33
Parameter J2 to Be Received ([Mode]Content)
Value Range -
Default Value Disable
Description l Three byte modes are supported: 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically), 64-byte mode (synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A), and disable mode. l When this parameter is set to Disable Mode, the board does not detect the received J2 byte. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
V5 to Be Transmitted
V5 to Be Received
(0x00)Unequipped or SupervisoryUnequipped, (0x01) Equipped-NonSpecific Payload, (0x02) Asynchronous, (0x03)Bit Synchronization, (0x04)Byte Synchronization, (0x05)Retained Signal Flag, (0x06) O.181 Test Signal, (0x07)VC_AIS
(0x02) Asynchronous
If the remote NE reports the LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, set this parameter according to the V5 byte to be received at the remote NE. If the local NE reports the LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, set this parameter according to the V5 byte to be transmitted from the remote NE.
13.7 Configuration Example (Hop Between Two IDU 620s)

This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to SDH/PDH service requirements. This topic provides examples for configuring the OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 605) in the two common networking modes. 13.7.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 13.7.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. 13.7.3 Configuring NE1 This topic describes how to configure the data of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 13.7.4 Configuring NE2
This topic describes how to configure the microwave service data of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 13.7.5 Configuring NE3 This topic describes how to configure the microwave service data of NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 13.7.6 Configuring NE4 This topic describes how to configure the microwave service data of NE4 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 13.7.7 Configuring NE5 NE5 is the OptiX RTN 600 that adopts the IDU 605. Therefore, the configuration of NE5 is not contained in this manual.

The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. Figure 13-5 shows a tree network. Basic information of this network is as follows: l l l l NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 that is configured with IDU 620. NE4 is the OptiX RTN 600 that is configured with IDU 610. NE5 is the OptiX RTN 600 that is configured with IDU 605 1B. The E1 services need to be converged from each NE to the STM-1 optical line board at the client side. Table 13-1 lists the service requirements.

NE1 NE2 NE4
SDH OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 620) OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 620) OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 610) NE3 NE5
OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 620)
OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 605 1B)
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-35
Table 13-1 Service requirements Source NE1 STM-1 optical line board at the client side 8xE1 NE2 8xE1 Sink NE3 8xE1 NE4 20xE1 NE5 2xE1

According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. In the following example, the engineering planning covers all the information required for configuring NE1-NE5.
NE Attributes
Parameter Equipment Type NE ID Extended ID NE1 IDU 620 101 9 (the same as the default value) 129.9.0.101 NE2 IDU 620 102 9 (the same as the default value) 129.9.0.102 NE3 IDU 620 103 9 (the same as the default value) 129.9.0.103 NE4 IDU 610 104 9 (the same as the default value) 129.9.0.104 NE5 IDU 605 105 9 (the same as the default value) 129.9.0.105
NE IP
Planning the Radio Link

All the ODUs adopted by the OptiX RTN 600 on the tree network work at subband A of the 15 GHz frequency band with the T/R spacing of 420 MHz, thus decreasing the types of the required spare parts.
13-36
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 13-6 Planning the radio link

NE4 (IDU 610)
NE1 (IDU 620)
V-polarization NE2 14547MHz (IDU 620) Tx Hi Tx Low 14967MHz Tx Hi 14930 MHz V-polarization 14510 MHz Tx Low Tx Low 14532 MHz 14952 MHz H-polarization Tx Hi 14510 MHz Tx Low NE3 (IDU 620) V-polarization NE5 (IDU 605)
Tx Hi 14930 MHz
Table 13-2 Planning information of the radio link Parameter TX High TX Low Transmit Frequency of TX High Station (MHz) Transmit Frequency of TX High Station (MHz) T/R Spacing (MHz) Radio Work Mode Link Protection Mode Polarization Directiona Link 1 NE1 NE2 14930 Link 2 NE3 NE2 14952 Link 3 NE4 NE2 14967 Link 4 NE3 NE5 14930
14510
14532
14547
14510
420 STM-1, 28MHz, 128QAM 1+1 V (vertical polarization)
420 16E1, 14MHz, 16QAM 1+0 H ((horizontal polarization)
420 22E1, 14MHz, 32QAM 1+0 V (vertical polarization)
420 2E1, 3.5MHz, QPSK 1+0 V (vertical polarization)
NOTE a: Information other than the polarization direction, which is not related to the link planning is not provided in this section.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-37

Figure 13-7 IDU board configuration (NE1)
EXT IF1A FAN FAN
Slot 20
Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1
EXT EXT SL1 EXT PO1 SCC SCC
EXT IF1A PXC PXC PXC PXC

EXT IF1A FAN FAN
Slot 20
IF1A EXT EXT IF1A EXT PO1 SCC SCC

EXT IF0A FAN FAN
Slot 20
EXT EXT EXT PO1 SCC SCC

PD1 PXC
Slot3 Slot1
IF1A SCC
Slot4 Slot2

PW
Slot 1
SCC
Slot 2
EOW
Slot 3
PF1
Slot 4
IF0
Slot 8
13-38
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
The ODU that is connected to the IF board in slot n occupies logical slot 10+n. The logical slot of the ODU is not displayed in the board configuration diagram. In the case of the IDU 620, n ranges from 5 to 8. In the case of the IDU 610, n is fixed to 4. In the case of the IDU 605, n can be 7 or 8.
Attributes of the IF 1+1 Protection

Table 13-3 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection Parameter Protection Group ID Protection Type Working Slot Protection Slot Revertive Mode WTR Time Enable Reverse Switching NE1 1 HSB (default value) Slot 5 Slot 7 Revertive (default value) 600s (default value) Enabled (default value) NE2 1 HSB (default value) Slot 5 Slot 7 Revertive (default value) 600s (default value) Enabled (default value)
Information of IF Ports
Table 13-4 Information of IF ports (NE1 and NE2) Parameter NE1 5-IF1A (7-IF1A) IF Attri butes Radio Work Mode Work Mode: 7 Service Capacity: STM-1 Signal Bandwidth: 28 MHz Modulation: 128QAM Radio Link ID Wayside Enable Status Wayside Input Board ATP C Enable Status 101 Enabled Slot 1 Enabled NE2 5-IF1A (7-IF1A) Work Mode: 7 Service Capacity: STM-1 Signal Bandwidth: 28 MHz Modulation: 128QAM 101 Enabled Slot 1 Enabled 6-IF1A Work Mode: 6 Service Capacity: 16xE1 Signal Bandwidth: 14 MHz Modulation: 16QAM 102 Not supported Enabled 8-IF1A Work Mode: 10 Service Capacity: 22xE1 Signal Bandwidth: 14 MHz Modulation: 32QAM 103 Not supported Enabled
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-39
Parameter
NE1 5-IF1A (7-IF1A)
NE2 5-IF1A (7-IF1A) Enabled 6-IF1A Enabled 8-IF1A Enabled
Enabled
Table 13-5 Information of IF ports (NE3, NE4, and NE5) Parameter NE3 5-IF1A IF Attri butes Radio Work Mode Work Mode: 6 Service Capacity: 16xE1 Signal Bandwidth: 14 MHz Modulation: 16QAM Radio Link ID Wayside Enable Status Wayside Input Board ATP C Enable Status ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status 102 Not supported Enabled Enabled 7-IF0A Work Mode: 18 Service Capacity: 2xE1 Signal Bandwidth: 3.5 MHz Modulation: QPSK 104 Not supported Enabled Enabled NE4 5-IF1A Work Mode: 10 Service Capacity: 22xE1 Signal Bandwidth: 14 MHz Modulation: 32QAM 103 Not supported Enabled Enabled NE5 8-IF0 Work Mode: 18 Service Capacity: 2xE1 Signal Bandwidth: 3.5 MHz Modulation: QPSK 104 Not supported Enabled Enabled
Information of ODU Ports

Table 13-6 Information of ODU ports (NE1 and NE2) Parameter NE1 15-ODU (17ODU) Radio Frequency Properties Transmission Frequency (MHz) 14930 NE2 15-ODU (17ODU) 14510 16-ODU 14532 18-ODU 14547
13-40
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter
NE1 15-ODU (17ODU) T/R Spacing (MHz) 420 10 TX High
NE2 15-ODU (17ODU) 420 10 TX Low 16-ODU 420 10 TX Low 18-ODU 420 10 TX Low
Power Attributes Equipment Attributes (The equipment attributes can be planned but cannot be set.)
Transmit Power (dBm) Station Type
NOTE
Note: The attributes of the main and standby ODUs on NE1 and NE2 are the same.
Table 13-7 Information of ODU ports (NE3, NE4, and NE5) Parameter NE3 15-ODU Radio Frequency Properties Transmission Frequency (MHz) T/R Spacing (MHz) Power Attributes Equipment Attributes (The equipment attributes can be planned but cannot be set.) Transmit Power (dBm) Station Type 14952 17-ODU 14930 NE4 15-ODU 14967 NE5 18-ODU 14510
420 10 TX High
420 10 TX High
420 10 TX High
420 10 TX Low
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-41

NE1 Station Timeslot VC4-1 VC12: 1-8 4-PO1:1-8 Links-1: NE1 - NE2 - NE3 -NE5 Station Timeslot NE1 NE2 NE3 NE5 8-IF0 NE1 6-SL1
6-SL1 5-IF1A 5-IF1A 6-IF1A 5-IF1A 7-IF0A VC12: 9-16 VC12: 9-16 4-PO1:1-8 VC12: 17-24 VC12: 17-24 VC12:1-8 4-SL1 VC12:25-26 4-SL1 VC12:25-26 4-PO1:1-8 VC12:9-10 VC12:1-2
VC4-1
4-PF1:1-2
Links-2: NE1 - NE2 - NE4 Station Timeslot VC4-1 NE1 6-SL1 5-IF1A VC12: 27-46 4-SL1 VC12: 27-46 NE2 5-IF1A 8-IF1A VC12: 1-20 4-PD1:1-20 NE4 5-IF1A
Add/Drop Foward
NOTE
On the radio links of NE3, NE4, and NE5, the E1 signals are directly mapped into the timeslots corresponding to the PDH radio frames. Figure 13-12 considers VC-12 timeslots as an example to illustrate how the timeslots are allocated.
Figure 13-12 shows the timeslot allocation for the services between the NEs. l E1 services of NE1: The services are added to/dropped from ports 1-8 of the PO1 board in slot 4 on NE1. The E1 services occupy VC-12 timeslots 1-8 on the optical line of the SL1 board in slot 6 on NE1. l E1 services of NE2: The services are added to/dropped from ports 1-8 of the PO1 board in slot 4 on NE2. The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 9-16 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE1 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2. The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the SL1 board in slot 6 on NE1. l
13-42
E1 services of NE3:
The services are added to/dropped from ports 1-8 of the PO1 board in slot 4 on NE3. The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 1-8 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 6 on NE2 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE3. The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the IF1A board in slot 6 on NE2. The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 17-24 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE1 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2. The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the SL1 board in slot 6 on NE1. l E1 services of NE4: The services are added to/dropped from ports 1-20 of the PD1 board in slot 4 on NE4. The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 1-20 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 8 on NE2 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE4. The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the IF1A board in slot 8 on NE2. The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 27-46 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE1 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2. The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the SL1 board in slot 6 on NE1. l E1 services of NE5: The services are added to/dropped from ports 1-2 of the PF1 board in slot 4 on NE5. The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 1-2 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 7 on NE3 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 8 on NE5. The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the IF1A board in slot 7 on NE3. The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 9-10 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 6 on NE2 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE3. The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the IF1A board in slot 6 on NE2. The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 25-26 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE1 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2. The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the SL1 board in slot 6 on NE1.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-43
Clock Information
Figure 13-13 Clock Synchronization Scheme
NE1 NE2 NE4
SDH
6-SL1/Internal
5-IF1A/7-IF1A/ Internal
5-IF1A/Internal NE3 NE5
Master clock
5-IF1A/Internal
8-IF0/Internal
Table 13-8 Clock information Parameter Cl oc k So ur ce First Clock Source Second Clock Source Third Clock Source NE1 6-SL1 NE2 5-IF1A NE3 5-IF1A NE4 5-IF1A NE5 8-IF0
Internal Clock Source -
7-IF1A
Internal Clock Source
Orderwire Information
Table 13-9 Orderwire information Parameter Telephone No. Call Waiting Time (s)
13-44
NE1 101 5
NE2 102 5
NE3 103 5
NE4 104 5
NE5 105 5
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Orderwire Port Orderwire Occupied Bytes
NE1 5-IF1A-1, 6SL1-1 E1
NE2 5-IF1A-1, 6IF1A-1, 8IF1A-1 E1
NE3 5-IF1A-1, 7SL1-1 E1
NE4 5-IF1A-1
NE5 8-IF0
E1
E1
13.7.3 Configuring NE1

This topic describes how to configure the data of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
You must be logged in to the NE. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. All the required boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Modify the NE ID. Set the parameters as follows: l New ID: 101 l New Extended ID: 9 Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE. Set the parameters as follows: l IP: 129.9.0.101 Step 3 Configure IF 1+1 protection. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab. Click New. Then, the Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Parameter Protection Group ID Value Range 1 Description If Protection Group ID is set to 1, it indicates the first protection group of the NE.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-45
Value Range HSB
Description In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state after the WTR time (when the former working channel is restored to normal) expires. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Revertive Mode
Revertive
WTR Time(s)
600
l After the working path is restored to normal and the normal state lasts for 600s, the switching restoration occurs. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Enable
l When the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Working Board Protection Board
5-IF1A-1 7-IF1A-1
In the 1+1 HSB mode, the IF boards can be installed in slots 5-8. It is recommended that you install two IF boards in a pair in slots 5 and 7 (the IF board in slot 5 is the main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IF board in slot 6 is the main board).
Step 4 Configure the IF/ODU information of a radio link. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Set the information about the 5-IF1A and 15-ODU on the radio link. After setting the information about the 5-IF1A or 15-ODU on the radio link, click Apply. Parameter Work Mode Link ID Value Range 7,STM-1,28MH z,128QAM 101 Description l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites. l In this example, the radio link ID is 101.
13-46
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter ATPC Enable Status
Value Range Enabled
Description This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning. In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz. The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning. l When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
TX Frequency (MHz) T/R Spacing (MHz) TX Power (dBm) TX Status
14930.0 420.0
10.0 unmute
Step 5 Configure the ATPC attributes. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the 5-IF1A and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the IF Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Value Range Enabled Description This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.
Enabled
Step 6 Create the cross-connections of point-to-point services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree. Click New. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
l Configure the cross-connections of the add/drop services as follows. Parameter Level Value Range VC12 Description l In this example, VC-12 data services are bound. l This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections. Direction Bidirectional l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) 6-SL1 1-8 In this example, the 6-SL1 is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 1-8.
4-PO1 1-8
In this example, the 4-PO1 is the service sink. In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-8.
l Configure the cross-connections of the pass-through services as follows. Parameter Level Value Range VC12 Description l In this example, VC-12 data services are bound. l This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections. Direction Bidirectional l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink 5-IF1A 9-46 In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 9-46.
6-SL1
In this example, the 6-SL1 is the service sink.
13-48
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
Value Range 9-46
Description In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 9-46.
Step 7 Configure the orderwire. Set the parameters as follows: l Phone 1: 101 l Orderwire Port: 5-IF1A-1, 6-SL1-1 Step 8 Configure the clock source. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree. Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Select the clock sources. Then, click OK. Parameter Clock Source Value Range 6-SL1-1 Description In this example, the 6-SL1-1 is the clock source.
3.
or to adjust the priority level of this Select a clock source and click clock source. Set Clock Source and Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest). Then, click Apply. Parameter Clock Source Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest) Value Range 6-SL1-1 Internal Clock Source 2 Description In this example, the 6-SL1-1 and internal clock source are set as the available clock sources. l This parameter specifies the priority level of a clock source. l The priority level of the 6-SL1-1 clock source is 1 and the priority level of the internal clock source is 2.
----End

This topic describes how to configure the microwave service data of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
You must be logged in to the NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Modify the NE ID. Set the parameters as follows: l New ID: 102 l New Extended ID: 9 Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE. Set the parameters as follows: l IP: 129.9.0.102 Step 3 Configure IF 1+1 protection. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab. Click New. Then, the Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Value Range 1 HSB Description If Protection Group ID is set to 1, it indicates the first protection group of the NE. In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state after the WTR time (when the former working channel is restored to normal) expires. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. WTR Time(s) 600 l After the working path is restored to normal and the normal state lasts for 600s, the switching restoration occurs. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Parameter Protection Group ID Working Mode
Revertive Mode
Revertive
13-50
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Enable Reverse Switching
Value Range Enable
Description l When the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
5-IF1A-1 7-IF1A-1
Step 4 Configure the IF/ODU information of a radio link. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Set the information about the 5-IF1A and 15-ODU on the first radio link, the information about the 6-IF1A and 16-ODU on the second radio link, and the information about the 8IF1A and 18-ODU on the third radio link. Then, click Apply. l Set the parameters of the 5-IF1A and 15-ODU as follows. Parameter Work Mode Link ID Value Range 7,STM-1,28MH z,128QAM 101 Description l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites. l In this example, the radio link ID is 101. ATPC Enable Status Enabled This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning. In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz. The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning.
TX Frequency (MHz) T/R Spacing (MHz) TX Power (dBm)
14510.0 420.0
10.0
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-51
Parameter TX Status
Value Range unmute
Description l When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
l Set the parameters of the 6-IF1A and 16-ODU as follows. Parameter Work Mode Link ID Value Range 6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 102 Description l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites. l In this example, the radio link ID is 102. ATPC Enable Status Enabled This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning. In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz. The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning. l When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. l Set the parameters of the 8-IF1A and 18-ODU as follows. Parameter Work Mode Value Range 10,22E1,14MH z,32QAM Description -
14532.0 420.0
10.0 unmute
13-52
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Link ID
Value Range 103
Description l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites. l In this example, the radio link ID is 103.
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning. In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz. The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning. l When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
14547.0 420.0
10.0 unmute
Step 5 Configure the ATPC attributes. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the 5-IF1A and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the IF Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter ATPC Enable Status Value Range Enabled Description This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.
Enabled
3.
Repeat Step 5.1 to Step 5.2 to set the ATPC parameters of the 6-IF1A and 8-IF1A to the same values. Click Apply.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Value Range Enabled
Description This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.
Enabled
Step 6 Create the cross-connections of point-to-point services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree. Click New. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK. l Configure the cross-connections of the add/drop services as follows. Parameter Level Value Range VC12 Description l In this example, VC-12 data services are bound. l This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections. Direction Bidirectional l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) 5-IF1A 9-16 In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 9-16.
4-PO1 1-8
l Configure the cross-connections of the services that pass through NE3 as follows.
Parameter Level
Value Range VC12
Description l In this example, VC-12 data services are bound. l This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections.
Direction
Bidirectional
l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
5-IF1A 17-26
In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-26.
6-IF1A 1-10
In this example, the 6-IF1A is the service sink. In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-10.
l Configure the cross-connections of the services that pass through NE4 as follows. Parameter Level Value Range VC12 Description l In this example, VC-12 data services are bound. l This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections. Direction Bidirectional l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink 5-IF1A 27-46 In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 27-46.
8-IF1A
In this example, the 8-IF1A is the service sink.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-55
Parameter Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
Value Range 1-20
Description In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-20.
Step 7 Configure the orderwire. Set the parameters as follows: l Phone 1: 102 l Orderwire Port: 5-IF1A-1, 6-IF1A-1, 8-IF1A-1 Step 8 Configure the clock source. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree. Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Select the clock sources. Then, click OK. Parameter Clock Source Value Range 5-IF1A-1 7-IF1A-1 Description In this example, the 5-IF1A-1 is the clock source. In this example, the 7-IF1A-1 is the clock source.
3.
or to adjust the priority level of this Select a clock source and click clock source. Set Clock Source and Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest). Then, click Apply. Paramet er Clock Source Value Range 5-IF1A-1 7-IF1A-1 Internal Clock Source 3 Description In this example, the 5-IF1A-1, 7IF1A-1, and internal clock source are set as the available clock sources. l This parameter specifies the priority level of a clock source. l The priority level of the 5IF1A-1 clock source is 1. The priority level of the 7-IF1A-1 clock source is 2. The priority level of the internal clock source is 3.
Clock Source Priority Sequence (1 is the highest)
----End
13-56
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Modify the NE ID. Set the parameters as follows: l New ID: 103 l New Extended ID: 9 Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE. Set the parameters as follows: l IP: 129.9.0.103 Step 3 Configure the IF/ODU information of a radio link. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Set the information about the 5-IF1A and 15-ODU on one radio link and the information about the 7-IF0A and 17-UDU on the other radio link. Then, click Apply. l Set the parameters of the 5-IF1A and 15-ODU as follows. Parameter Work Mode Link ID Value Range 6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 102 Description l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites. l In this example, the radio link ID is 102. ATPC Enable Status Enabled This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning.
13-57
TX Frequency (MHz)
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14952.0
Parameter T/R Spacing (MHz) TX Power (dBm) TX Status
Value Range 420.0
Description In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz. The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning. l When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
10.0 unmute
l Set the parameters of the 7-IF0A and 17-ODU as follows. Parameter Work Mode Link ID Value Range 18,2E1,3.5MHz ,QPSK 104 Description l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites. l In this example, the radio link ID is 104. ATPC Enable Status Enabled This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning. In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz. The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning. l When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
14930.0 420.0
10.0 unmute
Step 4 Configure the ATPC attributes.
13-58
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
1. 2.
In the NE Explorer, select the 5-IF1A and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the IF Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter ATPC Enable Status Value Range Enabled Description This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.
Enabled
3.
Repeat Step 4.1 to Step 4.2 to set the ATPC parameters of the 7-IF0A to the same values. Click Apply. Parameter ATPC Enable Status Value Range Enabled Description This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.
Enabled
Step 5 Create the cross-connections of point-to-point services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > Clock > CrossConnection Configuration from the Function Tree. Click New. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK. l Configure the cross-connections of the add/drop services as follows. Parameter Level Value Range VC12 Description l In this example, VC-12 data services are bound. l This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-59
Parameter Direction
Value Range Bidirectional
Description l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
5-IF1A 1-8
4-PO1 1-8
l Configure the cross-connections of the services that pass through NE5 as follows. Parameter Level Value Range VC12 Description l In this example, VC-12 data services are bound. l This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections. Direction Bidirectional l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) 5-IF1A 9-10 In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 9 and 10. In this example, the 7-IF0A is the service sink. In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1 and 2.
7-IF0A 1-2
13-60
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Step 6 Configure the orderwire. Set the parameters as follows: l Phone 1: 103 l Orderwire Port: 5-IF1A-1, 7-IF0A-1 Step 7 Configure the clock source. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree. Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Select the clock sources. Then, click OK. Parameter Clock Source Value Range 5-IF1A-1 Description In this example, the 5-IF1A-1 is the clock source.
3.
Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level of this clock source. Set Clock Source and Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest). Then, click Apply. Parameter Clock Source Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest) Value Range 5-IF1A-1 Internal Clock Source 2 Description In this example, the 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source are set as the clock sources. l This parameter specifies the priority level of a clock source. l The priority level of the 5-IF1A-1 clock source is 1 and the priority level of the internal clock source is 2.
----End

Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Modify the NE ID.
Set the parameters as follows: l New ID: 104 l New Extended ID: 9 Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE. Set the parameters as follows: l IP: 129.9.0.104 Step 3 Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select NE4 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Set the information about the 4-IF1A and 14-ODU on the radio link. Then, click Apply. Parameter Work Mode Link ID Value Range 10,22E1,14MHz ,32QAM 103 Description l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites. l In this example, the radio link ID is 103. ATPC Enable Status Enabled This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning. In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz. The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning. l When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
14967.0 420.0
10.0 unmute
Step 4 Configure the ATPC attributes. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the 5-IF1A and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
13-62
2.
Click the IF Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter ATPC Enable Status Value Range Enabled Description This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.
Enabled
Step 5 Create the cross-connections of point-to-point services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE4 and then choose Configuration > Cross- Connection Configuration from the Function Tree. Click New. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Configure the crossconnections of the add/drop services. Click OK. Parameter Level Value Range VC12 Description l In this example, VC-12 data services are bound. l This parameter indicates the level of the crossconnections. Direction Bidirectional l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range (e.g.1,3-6) Sink Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) 4-IF1A 1-20 In this example, the 4-IF1A is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 1-20. In this example, the 3-PD1 is the service sink. In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-20.
3-PD1 1-20
Step 6 Configure the orderwire. Set the parameters as follows:

l Phone 1: 104 l Orderwire Port: 4-IF1A-1 Step 7 Configure the clock source. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE4 and then choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree. Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Select the clock sources. Then, click OK. Parameter Clock Source Value Range 4-IF1A-1 Description In this example, the 4-IF1A-1 is selected as the clock source.
3.
Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level of this clock source. Set Clock Source and Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest). Then, click Apply. Parameter Clock Source Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest) Value Range 4-IF1A-1 Internal Clock Source 2 Description In this example, the 4-IF1A-1 and internal clock source are selected as the clock sources. l This parameter specifies the priority level of a clock source. l The priority level of the 4-IF1A-1 clock source is 1 and the priority level of the internal clock source is 2.
----End

NE5 is the OptiX RTN 600 that adopts the IDU 605. Therefore, the configuration of NE5 is not contained in this manual. For details, refer to the 13.9.4 Configuring NE5.
13.8 Configuration Example (Hop Between Two IDU 605s)

This section describes how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to E1 service requirements, through an example. 13.8.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 13.8.2 Service Planning
According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. 13.8.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the data of NE1 based on the parameters of the engineering planning, by using the NMS. 13.8.4 Configuring NE2 You can configure the data of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.

The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. Figure 13-14 shows a point to point network. The basic information of this network is as follows: l l NE1and NE2 are the OptiX RTN 600 that is configured with the IDU 605 2B. The service requirement between NE1 and NE2 is 12xE1.
NE1 (IDU 605 2B)
NE2 (IDU 605 2B)

According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. In the following example, the engineering planning covers all the information required for configuring NE1 and NE2.
NE Attributes
Parameter Equipment Type NE ID NE1 IDU 605 2B 101 NE2 IDU 605 2B 102
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-65
Parameter Extended ID NE IP
NE1 9 (the same as the default value) 129.9.0.101
NE2 9 (the same as the default value) 129.9.0.102

All the ODUs adopted by the OptiX RTN 600 on the tree network work at subband A of the 15 GHz frequency band with the T/R spacing of 420 MHz. Figure 13-15 Planning the radio link
NE1 (IDU 605 2B) Tx Hi V-polarization NE2 (IDU 605 2B)
14952 MHz 14532 MHz Tx Low
Table 13-10 Planning information of the radio link Parameter TX High Station TX Low Station Transmit Frequency of TX High Station (MHz) Transmit Frequency of TX Low Station (MHz) T/R Spacing (MHz) Work Mode Link Protection Mode Polarization Directiona Link NE1 NE2 14952 14532 420 16E1,28MHz,QPSK 1+1 HSB V (vertical polarization)
13-66
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Board Configuration
Figure 13-16 IDU board configuration (NE1 and NE2)
IDU 605 2B
PW
Slot 1
SCC
Slot 2
EOW
Slot 3
PH1
Slot 4
IF0
Slot 7
IF0
Slot 8
NOTE
The ODU that is connected to the IF board in slot n occupies logical slot 10+n. The logical slot of the ODU is not displayed in the board configuration diagram. In the case of the IDU 605, n can be 7 or 8.

Table 13-11 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection Parameter Protection group ID Protection Type Active board Protection board Revertive Mode Recovery time Enable Reverse Switching NE1 1 HSB (default value) Slot 8 Slot 7 Revertive (default value) 600s (default value) Enabled (default value) NE2 1 HSB (default value) Slot 8 Slot 7 Revertive (default value) 600s (default value) Enabled (default value)
Information of IF Ports
Table 13-12 Information of IF ports Parameter NE1 8-IF0 (7-IF0) IF Attributes Radio Work Mode Work Mode: 5 Service Capacity: 16E1 Signal Bandwidth: 28 MHz Modulation: QPSK Radio Link ID ATPC Enable status 101 Enabled
NE2 8-IF0 (7-IF0) Work Mode: 5 Service Capacity: 16E1 Signal Bandwidth: 28 MHz Modulation: QPSK 101 Enabled
13-67
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter
NE1 8-IF0 (7-IF0) ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm) ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm) -40 -60
NE2 8-IF0 (7-IF0) -40 -60

Table 13-13 Information of ODU ports Parameter NE1 18-ODU (17-ODU) Radio Frequency Properties Transmission Frequency (MHz) T/R Spacing (MHz) Power Properties Equipment Attributes (can be planned but cannot be set) Transmit Power (dBm) Station Type 14952 420 10 TX High NE2 18-ODU (17-ODU) 14532 420 10 TX Low
NOTE
Note: The attributes of the main and standby ODUs on NE1 and NE2 are the same.
PDH Service Configuration

Table 13-14 PDH service configuration Parameter E1 ports NE1 E1-1 to E1-12 NE2 E1-1 to E1-12
Table 13-15 Orderwire information Parameter Telephone No. Call waiting time
13-68
NE1 101 5 seconds
NE2 102 5 seconds

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

You can configure the data of NE1 based on the parameters of the engineering planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must be logged in to the NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Modify the NE ID. Set the parameters as follows: l New ID: 101 l New Extended ID: 9 Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE. Set the parameters as follows: l IP: 129.9.0.101 Step 3 Modify the IF 1+1 protection. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Working Mode Value Range HSB Description l In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at the two ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l You can set this parameter according to the network planning. Revertive Mode Revertive l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state after the WTR time (when the former working channel is restored to normal) expires. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-69
Parameter WTR Time(s)
Value Range 600
Description l This parameter is valid only when the Revertive Mode parameter is set to Revertive. l After the working path is restored to normal and the normal state lasts for 600s, the switching restoration occurs. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Enable
l If the main and standby IF boards of NE2 reports service alarms, the alarms are reported to the local equipment through the MWRDI overhead in the radio frame. When the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the local end. l This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 4 Configure the IF/ODU information of a radio link. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Set the information about the 8-IF0. Click Apply. Set the information about the 18-ODU. Click Apply. Parameter Work Mode Value Range 5,16E1,28MHz, QPSK Description l This parameter indicates the radio work mode in "work mode, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format. l This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning. Link ID 101 l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent misconnection of radio links between sites. l This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning.
13-70
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Value Range Enabled
Description l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. l This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning.
TX Frequency (MHz)
14952.0
l This parameter specifies the central frequency of a channel. l This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning.
T/R Spacing (MHz)
420.0
l This parameter indicates the spacing between the TX frequency and receive frequency of the ODU. l This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning.
TX Power (dBm) TX Status
10.0 unmute
This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning. l When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally. l Generally, this parameter should be set to unmute.
Step 5 Configure the ATPC attributes. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the 8-IF0 board and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the ATPC Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter ATPC Enable Status Value Range Enabled Description This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. l Set the central value of the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold so that the central value is equal to the required value of the receive power. l Ensure that the difference between values of the automatic ATPC upper threshold and the
ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm)
-40.0
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-71
Parameter ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm)
Value Range -60.0
Description automatic ATPC lower threshold is not less than 5 dB.
NOTE
The ATPC attributes should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.
Step 6 Configure E1 services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree. Select the used E1 port. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter E1-1 to E1-12 Value Range Selected Description l In this example, the E1-1 to E1-12 ports are selected. l One E1 port corresponds to one E1 in the microwave. That is, E1-1 corresponds to the first E1 in the microwave and E1-2 corresponds to the second E1 in the microwave.
Step 7 Configure the orderwire. Set the parameters as follows: l Phone 1: 101 l Call Waiting Time(s): 5 ----End

You can configure the data of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Modify the NE ID. Set the parameters as follows:
l New ID: 102 l New Extended ID: 9 Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE. Set the parameters as follows: l IP: 129.9.0.102 Step 3 Modify IF 1+1 protection. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Working Mode Value Range HSB Description l In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l Set this parameter according to the planning. Revertive Mode Revertive l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state after the WTR time (when the former working channel is restored to normal) expires. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. WTR Time(s) 600 l This parameter is valid only when the Revertive Mode parameter is set to Revertive. l After the working path is restored to normal and the normal state lasts fro 600s, the switching restoration occurs. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Enable Reverse Switching Enable l When both the main IF board and the standby IF board of NE2 report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 4 Configure the IF/ODU information of a radio link. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Set the information about the 8-IF0. Click Apply. Set the information about the 18-ODU. Click Apply. Parameter Work Mode Value Range 5,16E1,28MHz, QPSK Description l This parameter indicates the radio work mode in "work mode, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format. l This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning. Link ID 101 l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent misconnection of radio links between sites. l This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning. ATPC Enable Status Enabled l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. l This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning. TX Frequency (MHz) 14532.0 l This parameter specifies the central frequency of a channel. l This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning. T/R Spacing (MHz) 420.0 l This parameter indicates the spacing between the TX frequency and receive frequency of the ODU. l This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning. TX Power (dBm) TX Status 10.0 unmute This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning. l When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally. l Generally, this parameter should be set to unmute.
13-74
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Step 5 Set the ATPC attributes. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the 8-IF0 and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the ATPC Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter ATPC Enable Status Value Range Enabled Description This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. l Set the central value of the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold so that the central value is equal to the required value of the receive power. l Ensure that the difference between values of the automatic ATPC upper threshold and the automatic ATPC lower threshold is not less than 5 dB.
ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm) ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm)
-40.0
-60.0
NOTE
Each of the ATPC parameters must be set to the same value at the two ends of a radio link.
Step 6 Configure E1 services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree. Select the used E1 port. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter E1-1 to E1-12 Value Range Selected Description l In this example, the E1-1 to E1-12 ports are selected. l One E1 port corresponds to one E1 in the microwave. That is, E1-1 corresponds to the first E1 in the microwave and E1-2 corresponds to the second E1 in the microwave.
13.9 Configuration Example (Hop between the IDU 605 and the IDU 620)
This section describes how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to E1 service requirements, through an example. 13.9.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 13.9.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. 13.9.3 Configuring NE1 to NE4 You can configure the data of NE1 to NE4 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 13.9.4 Configuring NE5 You can configure the data of NE5 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.

The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. Figure 13-17 shows a tree network. Basic information of this network is as follows: l l l l NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 that is configured with IDU 620. NE4 is the OptiX RTN 600 that is configured with IDU 610. NE5 is the OptiX RTN 600 that is configured with IDU 605 1B. The E1 services need be converged from each NE to the STM-1 optical line board at the client side. The service requirement in NE5 is 2xE1.
13-76
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

NE1 NE2 NE4
SDH OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 620) OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 620) OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 610) NE3 NE5
OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 620)
OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 605 1B)

According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. In the following example, the engineering planning covers the information required for configuring NE5 only. For information required for configuring NE1-NE4, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide.
NE Attributes
Parameter Equipment Type NE ID Extended ID NE IP NE5 IDU 605 1A 105 9 (the same as the default value) 129.9.0.105

All the ODUs adopted by the OptiX RTN 600 on the tree network work at subband A of the 15 GHz frequency band with the T/R spacing of 420 MHz, thus decreasing the types of the required spare parts.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-77
Figure 13-18 Planning the radio link

NE4 (IDU 610)
NE1 (IDU 620)
V-polarization NE2 14547MHz (IDU 620) Tx Hi Tx Low 14967MHz Tx Hi 14930 MHz V-polarization 14510 MHz Tx Low Tx Low 14532 MHz 14952 MHz H-polarization Tx Hi 14510 MHz Tx Low NE3 (IDU 620) V-polarization NE5 (IDU 605)
Tx Hi 14930 MHz
Table 13-16 Planning information of the radio link between NE3 and NE5 Parameter TX High TX Low Transmit Frequency of TX High Station (MHz) Transmit Frequency of TX High Station (MHz) T/R Spacing (MHz) Work Mode Link Protection Mode Polarization Directiona Link 4 NE3 NE5 14930 14510 420 2E1,3.5MHz,QPSK 1+0 V (vertical polarization)
Board Configuration
PW
Slot 1
SCC
Slot 2
EOW
Slot 3
PF1
Slot 4
IF0
Slot 8
13-78
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
The ODU that is connected to the IF board in slot n occupies logical slot 10+n. The logical slot of the ODU is not displayed in the board configuration diagram.

Table 13-17 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection (NE5) Parameter NE5 8-IF0 IF Attributes Radio Work Mode Work Mode: 18 Service Capacity: 2xE1 Signal Bandwidth: 3.5 MHz Modulation: QPSK Radio Link ID ATPC Enable status ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm) ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm) 104 Enabled -45 -70

Table 13-18 Information of ODU ports (NE5) Parameter NE5 18-ODU Radio Frequency Properties Transmission Frequency (MHz) T/R Spacing (MHz) Power Properties Equipment Attributes (can be planned but cannot be set) Transmit Power (dBm) Station Type 14510 420 10 TX Low
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-79
PDH Service Configuration

Table 13-19 PDH service configuration (NE5) Parameter E1 ports NE5 E1-1 to E1-2
Table 13-20 Orderwire information Parameter Telephone No. Call waiting time NE5 105 5 seconds
13.9.3 Configuring NE1 to NE4

You can configure the data of NE1 to NE4 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. For the data configurations of NE1 to NE4, see OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide.

You can configure the data of NE5 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Modify the NE ID. Set the parameters as follows: l New ID: 105 l New Extended ID: 9 Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE. Set the parameters as follows: l IP: 129.9.0.105
Step 3 Configure the IF/ODU information of a radio link. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select NE5 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Set the information about the 8-IF0. Click Apply. Set the information about the 18-ODU. Click Apply. Parameter Work Mode Value Range 18,2E1,3.5MHz, QPSK Description l This parameter indicates the radio work mode in "work mode, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format. l This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning. Link ID 104 l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent misconnection of radio links between sites. l This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning. ATPC Enable Status Enabled l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range. l This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning. TX Frequency (MHz) 14510.0 l This parameter specifies the central frequency of a channel. l This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning. T/R Spacing (MHz) 420.0 l This parameter indicates the spacing between the TX frequency and receive frequency of the ODU. l This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning. TX Power (dBm) TX Status 10.0 unmute This parameter needs to be set according to the service planning. l When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally. l Generally, this parameter should be set to unmute.
Step 4 Configure E1 services.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
13-81
1. 2.
In the NE Explorer, select NE5 and then choose Configuration > Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Select the ports E1-1 and E1-2 and click Apply.
13-82
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14 Ethernet Feature(RTN 600)
14
About This Chapter
Ethernet Feature(RTN 600)
Displays the Ethernet feature of OptiX RTN 600 NEs. 14.1 Creating Ethernet Services The IDU 610 supports Ethernet private line services. The IDU 620 supports Ethernet private line services and Ethernet LAN services. The IDU 605 1F/2F supports Ethernet LAN services. 14.2 Configuring QinQ The Ethernet switching processing board supports the line services that are based on QinQ (802.1q in 802.1q). The function complies with IEEE 802.1q and IEEE 802.1ad. 14.3 Configuring Features of Ethernet Ports To effectively work with the data communication equipment at the client side, the Ethernet port supports the auto-negotiation function, Jumbo frames, and flow control function. 14.4 Configuring Encapsulation and Mapping of Ethernet Services To transparently transmit Ethernet frames through the optical transmission network and the radio transmission network, it is necessary to encapsulate the Ethernet frames and map them into VC containers at the access point. 14.5 Configuring VLAN The Ethernet switching processing board supports the virtual local area network (VLAN) function that complies with IEEE 802.1q. 14.6 Configuring Layer 2 Switching To realize the EPLAN service, the Ethernet switching and processing board can create one bridge or multiple bridges. Each bridge can realize the Layer 2 switching of packets among mounted ports and relevant features. 14.7 Configuring QoS In legacy IP networks, all packets are processed according to the first in first out (FIFO) and best effort strategies. This method cannot meet the requirement of the new service for the bandwidth, delay, and delay jitter. Hence, the QoS technology is developed.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-1
14.1 Creating Ethernet Services

The IDU 610 supports Ethernet private line services. The IDU 620 supports Ethernet private line services and Ethernet LAN services. The IDU 605 1F/2F supports Ethernet LAN services. 14.1.1 Basic Concepts Before you configure Ethernet boards with services, you need to learn the basic concepts including external port, internal port, logical port, and bridge so that you can understand the service configuration process and the signal flow when the boards process the services. 14.1.2 Configuring the Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services In the case of Ethernet over SDH, you need to configure the cross-connections of the Ethernet services. 14.1.3 Configuring EPL Services You can configure EPL services on a per-NE basis. 14.1.4 Configuring Ethernet LAN Services You can configure Ethernet LAN services on a per-NE basis by following the instructions below. 14.1.5 Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services You can configure EVPL (QinQ) services on a per-NE basis. 14.1.6 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point EPL Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point EPL service requirements. 14.1.7 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the PORT-shared EVPL service requirements. 14.1.8 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service requirements. 14.1.9 Configuration Example (802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services. 14.1.10 Configuration Example (802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services. 14.1.11 Configuration Example (EVPL Services Based on QinQ) This topic provides an example to describe how to configure QinQ line services. 14.1.12 Configuration Example (EVPLAN Services Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge) This topic considers an example to describe how to configure the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. 14.1.13 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave The Hybrid microwave that the OptiX RTN 600 supports can transmit E1 services and Ethernet services at the same time. When E1 services are transmitted over the Hybrid microwave, you
need to create the cross-connections. When Ethernet services are transmitted over the Hybrid microwave, you need not configure the encapsulation and mapping in the VCTRUNKs or the cross-connections between the VCTRUNKs and line timeslots.

Before you configure Ethernet boards with services, you need to learn the basic concepts including external port, internal port, logical port, and bridge so that you can understand the service configuration process and the signal flow when the boards process the services. 14.1.1.1 Formats of Ethernet Frames To implement the VLAN and QinQ functions, the IEEE 802.1q and IEEE 802.1ad protocols define different formats of the Ethernet frames, which contain different VLAN information. 14.1.1.2 Internal Ports and External Ports External ports on Ethernet boards are used to access the services on the user side. Internal ports on Ethernet boards are used to encapsulate and map the services to the transmission network for transparent transmission. 14.1.1.3 Auto-Negotiation The auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information of its supported working mode to the opposite end on the network and to receive the corresponding information that the opposite end may transfer. 14.1.1.4 Flow Control When the data processing/transferring capability of the equipment fails to handle the flow received at the port, congestion occurs on the line. To reduce the number of discarded packets due to buffer overflowing, proper flow control measures must be taken. 14.1.1.5 Encapsulation and Mapping Protocol To ensure that Ethernet frames can be transparently transmitted over the optical transmission network, the Ethernet frames need to be encapsulated and mapped into VC containers at the access point. encapsulation and mapping protocols used by the Ethernet service board include the high-level data link control (HDLC), link access procedure - SDH (LAPS), and generic framing procedure (GFP). 14.1.1.6 Virtual Concatenation The rate of the Ethernet service does not adapt to the rate of the standard VC container. Hence, if you directly map the Ethernet service data into a standard VC container, there is a great waste of the transmission bandwidth. To solve the problem, use the virtual concatenation technology to concatenate many standard VC containers to a large VC container that adapts to the rate of the Ethernet service. 14.1.1.7 Tag Attributes When data frames enter or exit a port on an Ethernet board, the processing mode of the data frames is determined by the tag attributes of this port. 14.1.1.8 Bridge The bridge is the functional unit used to implement the interconnection between two or more LANs.
14.1.1.1 Formats of Ethernet Frames

To implement the VLAN and QinQ functions, the IEEE 802.1q and IEEE 802.1ad protocols define different formats of the Ethernet frames, which contain different VLAN information.
To implement the VLAN function, the IEEE 802.1q protocol defines the Ethernet frame format that contains the VLAN information. Compared with the ordinary Ethernet frame, the frame with the format defined by the IEEE 802.1q protocol is added with a four-byte header. To implement VLAN mesting (QinQ), the IEEE 802.1ad protocol defines two VLAN tag types. See Figure 14-1. two VLAN tag types are defined to differentiate the services on the client side and the services on the supplier service side. l l The VLAN tag used on the client side is represented as C-VLAN, of which the frame format is the same as the frame format defined by the IEEE 802.1q protocol. The VLAN tag used on the supplier service side is represented as S-VLAN.
Figure 14-1 Ethernet frame format

802.1q frame format Destination Source MAC Address MAC Address 6 bytes 6 bytes VLAN 4 bytes Length/Type 2 bytes Data Variable length FCS Check Character 4 bytes
Format of the frame with one C-VLAN tag Destination Source MAC Address MAC Address 6 bytes 6 bytes C-VLAN 4 bytes Length/Type 2 bytes Data Variable length FCS Check Character 4 bytes
Format of the frame with one S-VLAN tag nested with one C-VLAN tag Destination Source MAC MAC Address Address 6 bytes 6 bytes S-VLAN 4 bytes C-VLAN 4 bytes Length/Type 2 bytes Data Variable length FCS Check Character 4 bytes
The length of the data field is variable. maximum length of the data field depends on the maximum frame length that the ports of the equipment support. The four-byte S-VLAN or C-VLAN field is divided into two sub-fields: the tag protocol ID (TPID) and the tag control Information (TCI). Both the TPID and TCI consist of two bytes. See Figure 14-2. Figure 14-2 Positions of the TPID and TCI in the frame structure
S-VLAN C-VLAN TPID TCI
Destination Source MAC TPID MAC Address Address

6 bytes
TCI
Length/Type
2 bytes
Data
Variable length
FCS Check Character

4 bytes
6 bytes 2 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2bytes
14-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
TPID structure
The TPID consists of two bytes and indicates the VLAN tag type. TPID of the C-VLAN is always 0x8100 whereas the TPID of the S-VLAN can be customized. Refer to Table 14-1. Table 14-1 Tag types defined by using the TPID Tag Type C-VLAN tag S-VLAN tag Name 802.1q tag protocol type 802.1q service tag Value 0x8100 Customizable
NOTE
The IEEE 802.1ad specifies the TPID of the S-VLAN to 0x88a8. In actual application, the setting of TPID for the S-VLAN tag varies according to the equipment manufacturer. To ensure compatibility between interconnected equipment, it is recommended that you set the TPIDs of the S-VLAN tags of the interconnected equipment to the same value within 0X600-FFFF.
TCI structure
The TCI structure of the S-TAG is basically the same as the TCI structure of the C-TAG. VLAN ID (VID) field consists of 12 bits and ranges from 0 to 4095. difference is that the TCI of the STAG contains the drop eligible (DE) indication and works with the priority code point (PCP) to indicate the priority of the S-TAG frame. The TCI structures of the C-TAG and S-TAG are shown in Figure 14-3 and Figure 14-4. Figure 14-3 TCI structure of the C-TAG
Octets: 1 PCP Bits: 8 6 CFI 5 4 VID 1 8 2 VID 1
The TCI length of the C-TAG is 2 byte, including the following: l l PCP: 3 bits CFI: 1 bit
Figure 14-4 TCI structure of the S-TAG

Octets: 1 PCP Bits: 8 6 DE 5 4 VID 1 8 2 VID 1
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-5
The TCI field of the S-TAG consists of the following bytes: l l l PCP: 3 bits DE: 1 bit VID: 12 bits
14.1.1.2 Internal Ports and External Ports

External ports on Ethernet boards are used to access the services on the user side. Internal ports on Ethernet boards are used to encapsulate and map the services to the transmission network for transparent transmission. External ports on Ethernet boards (that is, external physical ports) are also referred to as clientside ports or user-side ports, which are used to access the Ethernet services on the user side. Internal ports on Ethernet boards (that is, internal VCTRUNKs) are also referred to as systemside ports or backplane-side ports in certain cases, which are used to encapsulate and map the services to the SDH side. VCTRUNKs are VC-based transmission paths, which can be implemented by using the adjacent concatenation or virtual concatenation technology. On the U2000 window, paths are bound to specify the bandwidth of different granularities for a VCTRUNK port. Figure 14-5 External ports and internal ports on Ethernet boards
External port VCTRUNK port Backplane
Interface module
Service processing module
Encapsulation/ Mapping module
Interface conversion module
Crossconnect unit Crossconnect unit
Ethernet board
14.1.1.3 Auto-Negotiation
The auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information of its supported working mode to the opposite end on the network and to receive the corresponding information that the opposite end may transfer. The working modes of the interconnected ports on the equipment at both ends must be the same. Otherwise, the services are unavailable. If the working mode of the port on the opposite equipment is full duplex and if the working mode of the port on the local equipment is auto-negotiation, the local equipment works in the half-duplex mode. That is, the working modes of the interconnected ports at both ends are different, and thus packets may be lost. Hence, when the working mode of the port on the opposite equipment is full duplex, you need to set working mode of the port on the local equipment to full duplex.
NOTE
When the interconnected ports at both sides work in the auto-negotiation mode, the equipment at both sides can negotiate the flow control through the auto-negotiation function.
The auto-negotiation function uses fast link pulses (FLPs) and normal link pulses (NLPs) to transfer information of the working mode so that no packet or upper layer protocol overhead needs to be added.
NOTE
This topic considers FE electrical ports as an example to describe how to implement the auto-negotiation function.
The FLP is called the 100BASE-T link integrity test pulse sequence. Each set of equipment on the network must be capable of issuing FLP bursts in the case of power-on, issuing of management commands, or user interaction. FLP burst consists of a series of link integrity test pulses that form an alternating clock/data sequence. Extraction of the data bits from the FLP burst yields a link code word that identifies the working modes supported by the remote equipment and certain information used for the negotiation and handshake mechanism. To maintain interoperability with the existing 100BASE-T equipment, the auto-negotiation function also supports the reception of 100BASE-T compliant link integrity test pulses. 10BASE-T link pulse activity is referred to as the NLP sequence. equipment that fails to respond to the FLP burst sequence by returning only the NLP sequence is treated as the 100BASE-T compatible equipment. The first pulse in an FLP burst is defined as a clock pulse. Clock pulses within an FLP burst occur at intervals of 125 us. Data pulses occur in the middle of two adjacent clock pulses. positive pulse represents logic "1" and the absence of a pulse represents logic "0". An FLP burst consists of 17 clock pulses and 16 data pulses (if all data bits are 1). NLP waveform is simpler than the FLP waveform. NLP sends a positive pulse every 16 ms when no data frame needs to be transmitted. Figure 14-6 Waveform of a single FLP
Clock pulses T2 T3 T1
First bit on wire Data Encoding 1 D 0 T1: 100 ns 1 D 1 0 D 2 T2: 62.5 us 1 D 3 T3: 125 us
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-7
Figure 14-7 Consecutive FLP and NLP bursts

T5 T4
FLP bursts
NLPs T4: 2 ms T5: 16 ms
14.1.1.4 Flow Control

When the data processing/transferring capability of the equipment fails to handle the flow received at the port, congestion occurs on the line. To reduce the number of discarded packets due to buffer overflowing, proper flow control measures must be taken. The half-duplex Ethernet port applies the back-pressure mechanism to control the flow. fullduplex Ethernet port applies PAUSE frames to control the flow. Currently, the half-duplex Ethernet function is not widely applied. Hence, the flow control function realized by Ethernet service boards is used for the full-duplex Ethernet ports. The flow control function realized by Ethernet service boards is classified into two types: autonegotiation flow control and non-auto-negotiation flow control.
Auto-Negotiation Flow Control

When the Ethernet port works in the auto-negotiation mode, you can adopt the auto-negotiation flow control function. auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following: l Enable dissymmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames. l l Enable symmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames and process the received PAUSE frames. Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow control The port has the following abilities: Transmits and processes PAUSE frames. Transmits PAUSE frames but cannot process the received PAUSE frames. Processes the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames.
Non-Auto-Negotiation Flow Control

When the Ethernet port works in a fixed working mode, you can adopt the non-auto-negotiation flow control function. non-auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following: l
14-8
Send only
The port can transmit PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames. l Receive only The port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames in the case of congestion. l Send and receive The port can transmit PAUSE frames and process the received PAUSE frames.
Realization Principle
The realization principle of the flow control function is described as follows: 1. When congestion occurs in the receive queue of an Ethernet port (the data in the receive buffer exceeding a certain threshold) and the port is capable of sending PAUSE frames, the port sends a PAUSE frame to the opposite end. Pause-time value in the frame is N (0 < N 65535). If the Ethernet port at the opposite end is capable of processing PAUSE frames, this Ethernet port stops sending data within a specified period of time N (the unit is the time needed for sending 521 bits) after receiving the PAUSE frame. If the congestion at the receive port is cleared (the data in the receive buffer is below a certain threshold) but the pause-time does not end, the port sends a PAUSE frame whose pause-time is 0 to notify the opposite end to send data.
2.
3.
IEEE 802.3 defines the format of the PAUSE frame as follows: l l l l l Destination address: 01-80-C2-00-00-01 (multicast address) Source address: MAC address of the source port Type/Length: 88-08 (MAC control frame) MAC control code: 00-01 (PAUSE frame) MAC control parameter: pause-time (two bytes)
Figure 14-8 Structure of the PAUSE frame

Destination address Source address Type/Length MAC control opcode MAC control parameter (pause-time) 01-80-C2-00-00-01 XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX 88-08 00-01 XX-XX Reserved 6 octets 6 octets 2 octets 2 octets 2 octets
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-9
14.1.1.5 Encapsulation and Mapping Protocol

To ensure that Ethernet frames can be transparently transmitted over the optical transmission network, the Ethernet frames need to be encapsulated and mapped into VC containers at the access point. encapsulation and mapping protocols used by the Ethernet service board include the high-level data link control (HDLC), link access procedure - SDH (LAPS), and generic framing procedure (GFP).
HDLC
The HDLC is a general data link control procedure. When using the HDLC protocol, the system encapsulates data services into HDLC-like frames as information bits and maps the frames into SDH VC containers.
LAPS
The LAPS is also a data link control procedure. It is optimized based on the HDLC. LAPS complies with ITU-T X.86.
GFP
The GFP is the most widely applied general encapsulation and mapping protocol. It provides a general mechanism to adapt higher-layer client signal flows into the transport network and can map the variable-length payload into the byte-synchronized transport path. client signals can be protocol data units (PDU-oriented, such as IP/PPP and Ethernet), block code data (block-code oriented, such as Fiber Channel and ESCON), or common bit data streams. GFP protocol complies with ITU-T G.7041. GFP defines the following modes to adapt client signals: l Frame-mapped GFP (GFP-F) The GFP-F is a PDU-oriented processing mode. It encapsulates the entire PDU into the GFP payload area and makes no modification on the encapsulated data. It determines whether to add a detection area for the payload area, depending on requirements. l Transparent GFP (GFP-T) The GFP-T is a block-code (8B/10B code block) oriented processing mode. It extracts a single character from the received data block and maps the character into the fixed-length GFP frame.
14.1.1.6 Virtual Concatenation

The rate of the Ethernet service does not adapt to the rate of the standard VC container. Hence, if you directly map the Ethernet service data into a standard VC container, there is a great waste of the transmission bandwidth. To solve the problem, use the virtual concatenation technology to concatenate many standard VC containers to a large VC container that adapts to the rate of the Ethernet service. The concatenation is defined in ITU-T G.707 are contiguous concatenation and virtual concatenation. Both concatenation methods provide concatenated bandwidth of X times Container-N at the path termination. Contiguous concatenation concatenates the contiguous VC-4s in the same STM-N into an entire structure to transport. It maintains the contiguous bandwidth throughout the whole transport. Virtual concatenation concatenates many individual VC containers (VC-12 containers, VC-3
containers, or VC-4 containers) into a bit virtual structure to transport. virtual concatenation breaks the contiguous bandwidth into individual VCs, transports the individual VCs, and recombines these VCs to a contiguous bandwidth at the transmission termination point. In the case of virtual concatenation, transport of each VC container may occupy different paths and there may be a transport delay difference between VC containers. Hence, there are difficulties to restore the client signal. Virtual concatenation requires concatenation functionality only at the path termination equipment and it can flexibly allocate bandwidth. Hence, the virtual concatenation technology is widely used. Virtual concatenation is available in two types: virtual concatenation in a higher order path and virtual concatenation in a lower order path. A higher order virtual concatenation VC-4-Xv provides a payload of X Container-4s (VC-4s). payload is mapped individually into X independent VC-4s. Each VC-4 has its own POH. A lower order virtual concatenation VC-12Xv provides a payload of X Container-12s (VC-12s). payload is mapped individually into X independent VC-12s. Each VC-12 has its own POH. It is the same case with the virtual concatenation of VC-3s.
VC-4-Xv and VC-3-Xv

The virtual container that is formed by a VC-4-Xv/VC-3-Xv can be mapped into X individual VC-4/VC-3s that form the VC-4-Xv/VC-3-Xv. Each VC-4/VC-3 has its own POH. POH has the same specifications as the ordinary VC-4 POH. H4 byte in the POH is used for the virtual concatenation-specific multiframe indicator (MFI) and sequence indicator (SQ). MFI indicates the position of a frame in the multiframe. Each frame sent by the source carries the MFI information. sink combines the frames with the same MFI into the C-n-Xv.re are MFI-1 and MFI-2. MFI-1 is transmitted by bits 5-8 of the H4 byte and ranges from 0 to 15. MFI-2 is transmitted by the two frames of which the MFI-1 is "0" and "1" in the multiframe. Bits 1-4 of the H4 bytes of the two frames indicate the higher four bits and lower four bits of the MFI-2 respectively. Hence, the MFI-2 ranges from 0 to 255. That is, a multiframe consists of 4096 frames and the period is 512 ms. SQ indicates the position of a frame in the C-n-Xv. source end inserts the SQ information into the frame according to the payload allocation sequence. sink end determines the sequence to extract the payload from the frames that form C-n-Xv according to the SQ. SQ is transmitted by the two frames of which the MFI-1 is "14" and "15" in the multiframe. Bits 1-4 of the H4 bytes of the two frames indicate the higher four bits and lower four bits of the SQ respectively.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-11
Figure 14-9 VC-3-Xv/VC-4-Xv multiframe and sequence indicator

C-3-X/C-4-X 1 X C-3-Xv/C-4-Xv SQ = X-1 =0 SQ = 0 =0 MFI-1 = 0 X-1 MFI-2 = 0 =1 SQ = 0 =0 MFI-1 = 1 MFI-2 = 0
H
POH
POH
SQ = X-1 = 15 SQ = 0 MFI-1 = 15 = 0 MFI-2 = 0 X-1 SQ = 0 =0 MFI-1 = 0 = 15 MFI-2 = 1 SQ = X-1 = 15 SQ = 0 = 255 MFI-1 = 15 MFI-2 = 255 X-1 =0 SQ = 0 =0 MFI-1 = 0 MFI-2 = 0
H H
With the MFI and SQ, the sink end can correctly restore the position of each frame in the C-nXv to prevent the frame alignment problem due to the different propagation delays of the frames.
VC-12-Xv
The virtual container that is formed by a VC-12-Xv can be mapped into X individual VC-12s which form the VC-12-Xv. Each VC-12 has its own POH. POH has the same specifications as the ordinary VC-12 POH. Bit 2 of the K4 byte in the POH is used for the virtual concatenationspecific frame count and sequence indicator. Bit 2s of the K4 bytes in every 32 multiframes (one multiframe comprising four VC-12s) are extracted to form a 32-bit character string to express the frame count and sequence indicator. Bits 1-5 of the string express the frame count, whose value range is between 0 and 31. structure formed by 32 multiframes has 128 frames. Hence, the resulting overall multiframe is 4096 frames with the period of 512 ms. Bits 6-11 of the string express the sequence indicator. frame count/ sequence indicator in the VC-12-Xv has the same usage as the multiframe indicator/sequence indicator in the VC-4-Xv/VC-3-Xv.
14.1.1.7 Tag Attributes

When data frames enter or exit a port on an Ethernet board, the processing mode of the data frames is determined by the tag attributes of this port. The tags for ports on Ethernet boards are available in three types: tag aware, access, and hybrid.
POH
POH
POH
Multiframe (MF)
POH
Table 14-2 Processing mode of data frames at ports with different tags Direction Data Frame Type Processing Mode Tag Aware Ingress port Frames with VLAN tags Frames without VLAN tags Egress port Frames with VLAN tags Transparently transmits the frames. Discards the frames. Access Discards the frames. Hybrid Transparently transmits the frames.
Adds the VLAN tags that contain Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority and transparently transmits the frames. Strips the VLAN tags and transmits the frames. l If the VLAN IDs contained in the data frames are Default VLAN ID, strips the VLAN tag and transmits the data frames. l If the VLAN IDs contained in the data frames are not Default VLAN ID, transparently transmits the data frames.
Transparently transmits the frames.
NOTE
The tag setting is valid only if the following conditions are met: l The port type is PE or UNI. l The entry detection function is enabled. When the Ethernet switching board works in the Ethernet transparent transmission state and when the entry detection function is disabled, the ports transparently transmit the received data frames regardless of whether the data frames have the VLAN tags.
Based on the tag aware, access, and hybrid features, adhere to the following principles when setting the tag for a port: l l l If it is certain that the data packets transmitted from the interconnected equipment have the VLAN tags, set the local port to the tag aware mode. If it is certain that the data packets transmitted from the interconnected equipment do not have the VLAN tags, set the local port to the access mode. If it is uncertain whether the data packets transmitted from the interconnected equipment have the VLAN tags, set the local port to the hybrid mode.
14.1.1.8 Bridge
The bridge is the functional unit used to implement the interconnection between two or more LANs.
VB and LP
The various bridge (VB) is the unique concept for Huawei products. In the case of the Ethernet data boards that have the Layer 2 switching capability, the switching domain can be divided into multiple sub-switching domains. As a result, if no services are interconnected, different VBs cannot access each other. Each VB has an independent configuration mode and uses an independent VLAN. Different VBs can use the same VLAN. A VB can contain a number of logical ports (LPs). By configuring the mounting relation, you can mount multiple MAC ports and VCTRUNK ports to the same VB. Figure 14-10 shows the relation between VB, LP, external port, and VCTRUNK port. Figure 14-10 Relation between VB, LP, external port, and VCTRUNK port
Ethernet switching board

VB1 PORT1 PORT2 LP1 LP2 LP3 LP4 LP5 LP6 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK3
PORT3
PORT6
Transparent Bridge and Virtual Bridge

l l The services of different transparent bridges are isolated but the services of the same transparent bridge are not isolated. entire transparent bridge is a switching domain. The services of different virtual bridges are isolated and the services with different VLAN IDs in the same virtual bridge are also isolated. switching domain of the entire virtual bridge is divided into multiple sub-switching domains according to the VLAN IDs.
NOTE
As shown in Figure 14-11, the same logical port may belong to one or more sub-switching domains with different VLAN IDs. On the U2000, the same logical port can belong to multiple filtering tables for different VLAN IDs.
14-14
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 14-11 Transparent bridge and virtual bridge
PORT1 PORT2 PORT3 VLAN1 VLAN2 VLAN3 ... Pure bridge
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK3 VCTRUNK4 VCTRUNK5 VCTRUNK6
PORT1 PORT2 PORT3
VLAN1 VLAN2
VLAN3 Virtual bridge
Logical port
Table 14-3 Transparent bridge and virtual bridge Item VLAN filtering table Ingress filtering Transparent Bridge It need not be configured. The validity of VLAN tags is not checked. All the data frames that enter the bridge are considered as valid. Virtual Bridge It must be configured. The validity of VLAN tags is checked. If the VLAN ID in the VLAN tag is not the same as defined in the VLAN filtering table, the data frame is discarded. IVLb Queries the MAC address table to obtain the forwarding port according to the destination MAC address and VLAN ID of the data frame. Forward the broadcast frames to the forwarding ports defined in the VLAN filtering table.
MAC address learning mode Data frame forwarding mode
SVLa Queries the MAC address table to obtain the forwarding port according to the destination MAC address of the data frame. Forwards the broadcast data frames to all the ports of the bridge.
Broadcast range
NOTE
To forward a Layer 2 switching service, a bridge must learn the MAC address. A bridge learns the MAC address in one of the following two ways: shared VLAN learning (SVL) and independent VLAN learning (IVL). l a: When the bridge adopts the SVL learning mode, the entry in the MAC address table is created according to the source MAC address and source port of the data frame. entry is valid for all the VLANs. l b: When the bridge adopts the IVL learning mode, the entry in the MAC address table is created according to the source MAC address, VLAN ID, and source port of the data frame. entry is not valid for all the VLANs.
Types of Bridges
As listed in Table 14-4, the Ethernet boards support three types of bridges.
Table 14-4 Types of bridges supported by the Ethernet boards Type of Bridge IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge IEEE 802.1q Virtual Bridge IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge
1
Bridge Switch Mode SVL/Ingress Filter Disable IVL/Ingress Filter Enable SVL/Ingress Filter Disable IVL/Ingress Filter Enable
Bridge Learning Mode SVL IVL SVL IVL
Ingress Filtering Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge: This bridge does not check the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses of the data frames. IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge: This bridge supports isolation by using one layer of VLAN tags. This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs. IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge: This bridge supports data frames with two layers of VLAN tags. This bridge adopts the outer S-VLAN tags to isolate different VLANs and supports only the mounted ports whose attributes are C-Aware or S-Aware. This bridge supports the following switching modes: 1. This bridge does not check the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses of the data frames. This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and the SVLAN IDs of the data frames.
2.
MAC Address Table

The entries in the MAC address table indicate the corresponding relation between the MAC addresses and the ports. MAC address table contains the following entries: l Dynamic entry Indicates the entry that the bridge obtains by adopting the SVL/IVL learning mode. dynamic entry ages and is even lost after the Ethernet switching board is reset. l Static entry Indicates the entry corresponding to the MAC address and the port that the network administrator manually adds in the MAC address table on the U2000. dynamic entry does not age and is not lost after the Ethernet switching board is reset. l Blackhole entry Indicates the entry used to discard the data frame that contains the specified destination MAC address, and is also referred to as the MAC address disable entry. blackhole entry is
configured by the network administrator. This entry does not age and is not lost after the Ethernet switching board is reset.
NOTE
l If a routing entry is not updated within a specific period of time, that is, if the MAC address fails to be learnt because the new data frame from the MAC address is not received, this routing entry is automatically deleted. This mechanism is considered as aging, and this period of time is considered as the aging time. aging time of the MAC address table is five minutes by default and can be set by using the U2000. l A limited number of MAC addresses can be learnt at a time.
Hub/Spoke
Generally, the central station and non-central stations can access each other but the non-central stations cannot access each other in the case of convergence services. Hence, the ports mounted to the bridge need to be defined as Hub ports or Spoke ports. l l Hub port Hub ports can access each other. Hub ports and Spoke ports can also access each other. Spoke port Spoke ports cannot access each other. Hub ports and Spoke ports can access each other. The mounted ports are Hub ports by default.
14.1.2 Configuring the Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services

In the case of Ethernet over SDH, you need to configure the cross-connections of the Ethernet services. 14.1.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services This topic describes how to create the timeslot connections between the bound paths and the line board, thus to ensure that the Ethernet services are transmitted in specified timeslots over the transmission line. 14.1.2.2 Deleting the Cross-Connections of an Ethernet Service When the cross-connections of an Ethernet service are deleted, the corresponding crossconnection resources are released.
14.1.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services

This topic describes how to create the timeslot connections between the bound paths and the line board, thus to ensure that the Ethernet services are transmitted in specified timeslots over the transmission line. See 13.3.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services to create the crossconnections of the Ethernet services. If SNCP is configured for the Ethernet services, see 13.3.2 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services to create the cross-connections of the SNCP Ethernet services.
14.1.2.2 Deleting the Cross-Connections of an Ethernet Service

When the cross-connections of an Ethernet service are deleted, the corresponding crossconnection resources are released.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Query the data. 1. Click Query. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting This operation will query service at the NE and update service date at the NM. Are you sure to continue?. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, prompting Operation succeeded. Click Close.
2. 3.
Step 3 Select the cross-connection of the Ethernet service that needs to be deleted in CrossConnection. Step 4 Deactivate the service. 1. Click Deactivate. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting Are you sure to deactivate all selected services (only for activated services?). Click OK. Another Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting This services of the NE will be cleared by this operation. Are you sure to continue?. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, prompting Operation succeeded. Click Close. Click Delete. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting Are you sure to delete all the selected services (only for inactive services)?. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, prompting Operation succeeded. Click Close.
2. 3. 4. 1.
Step 5 Delete the service.
2. 3.
Step 6 Click Query. At this time, the cross-connection of the Ethernet service is already deleted. ----End
14.1.3 Configuring EPL Services

You can configure EPL services on a per-NE basis. 14.1.3.1 EPL Service Configuration Process This section describes the EPL service configuration process that consists of deploying a network, configuring source NEs, configuring sink NEs, configuring pass-through NEs, and verifying services.
14.1.3.2 Setting Port Attributes and Bound Paths for an Ethernet Board You need to set the port attributes and bound paths for an Ethernet board prior to creating Ethernet services. 14.1.3.3 Creating Ethernet Line Service To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the line service, perform certain operations to configure the related information, such as the service source and service sink. 14.1.3.4 Testing Ethernet Services You can enable an Ethernet board to send Ethernet test frames for the purpose of fault location. 14.1.3.5 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line Service When an Ethernet private line service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet private line service to release the corresponding resources.
14.1.3.1 EPL Service Configuration Process

This section describes the EPL service configuration process that consists of deploying a network, configuring source NEs, configuring sink NEs, configuring pass-through NEs, and verifying services. Figure 14-12 shows the process for configuring EPL services. Figure 14-12 EPL service configuration process
Required Optional
Deploying a Network
Configure source NE
Configure sink NE
Configure pass-through NE
Verify service
Creating and Configuring NEs
Setting External Ports Attributes of Ethernet Boards
Creating CrossConnection Between Ethernet and Line Boards
Test the Ethernet Services
Creating Fibers Setting Internal Ports Attributes of Ethernet Boards Setting Internal Ports Attributes of Ethernet Boards
Configuring Communication
Setting the NE Time
Setting Bound Paths of Ethernet Boards
Configuring Clocks
Configuring Protection
Creating EPL Services
Creating EPL Services
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-19

NOTE
l In the case of the EFT4 board for the RTN equipment, the EPL service is written to the board. Thus, Creating EPL Services is not needed for the source or sink NE. l In the landscape orientation of the configuration flow chart by using U2000, there are five main phases of EPL service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configuring source NEs, configuring sink NEs, configuring pass-through NEs, and verifying services. l The portrait orientation of the flow chart shows the relations between operation tasks in each phase.
14.1.3.2 Setting Port Attributes and Bound Paths for an Ethernet Board
You need to set the port attributes and bound paths for an Ethernet board prior to creating Ethernet services.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet board must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the external port of a board. For details, refer to 14.4.7.1 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board. Step 2 Configure the internal port of a board. For details, refer to 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports. ----End
14.1.3.3 Creating Ethernet Line Service

To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the line service, perform certain operations to configure the related information, such as the service source and service sink.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be added in the slot layout.
Precautions
l l This topic does not describe the method for creating the QinQ service. IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. The EFT4 board is an Ethernet transparent transmission board, and the PORTs of the EFT4 board correspond to the VCTRUNKs. Hence, you do not need to create the Ethernet line service.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New.
The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the attributes of the Ethernet line service.
Step 4 Optional: Set the port attributes of the source port and sink port.
NOTE
The result of setting the port attributes during the Ethernet line service configuration process is the same as the result of directly setting the Ethernet service port attributes.
Step 5 Optional: Set the bound path. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Configuration. The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click Optional: Repeat Step 5.4 to bind other VC paths. .
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-21
NOTE
6.
Click OK.
Parameters
Parameter Service Type Direction Value Range EPL, EVPL (QinQ) Unidirectional, Bidirectional Default Value EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL. l When setting this parameter to Unidirectional, create the service only from the service source to the service sink. That is, the service source is forwarded only to the sink port. l When setting this parameter to Bidirectional, create the service from the service source to the service sink and the service from the service sink to the service source. That is, when the service source is forwarded to the sink port, the service sink is forwarded to the source port. l Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.
14-22
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Source Port
Value Range A specific PORT or VCTRUNK
Default Value PORT1
Description l This parameter indicates the port where the service source resides. l When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, use a specific PORT as the source port.
Source VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
1-4095
l You can set this parameter to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of VLANs set in Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6). l When you set this parameter to null, all the services of the source port work as the service source. l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the source port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service source.
Sink Port
A specific PORT or VCTRUNK
PORT1
l This parameter indicates the port where the service sink resides. l Do not set the value of this parameter to the same as the value of Source Port. l When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, use a VCTRUNK as the sink port.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-23
Parameter Sink VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
Value Range 1-4095
Default Value -
Description l You can set this parameter to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of VLANs set in Source CVLAN (e.g. 1,3-6). l When you set this parameter to null, all the services of the sink port work as the service sink. l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the sink port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service sink.
Port Enabled TAG
Enabled, Disabled Access, Tag Aware, Hybrid
Tag Aware
When the source port or the sink port is set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to Enabled. l When all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set this parameter to Tag Aware. l When all of the accessed services are not frames with the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set this parameter to Access. l When the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set this parameter to Hybrid.
Configurable Ports
VCTRUNKs
VCTRUNK 1
This parameter specifies the VCTRUNK whose VC paths are to be configured.
14-24
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Available Bound Paths
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Adhere to the following principles to plan and set this parameter: l The capacity of VCTRUNKs should be determined by the actual bandwidth required by services. l Bind only the paths in a VC-4 for a VCTRUNK if possible. If the paths in several VC-4s need to be bound, the VC-4s that have the same transmission path take priority. l Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can have only VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths. Hence, when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths, select VC-3 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-3 paths are already bound. When a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-12 paths, select VC-12 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-12 paths are already bound. l Give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1 if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths because the VC-4-1s of the EFT4 board and EMS6 board support only VC-3 paths whereas the VC-4-2s support both VC-12 paths and VC-3 paths. l Generally, bidirectional paths are bound.
Activation Status
14.1.3.4 Testing Ethernet Services

You can enable an Ethernet board to send Ethernet test frames for the purpose of fault location.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet services must be created.
Context
l Test the Ethernet service as follows: As shown in Figure 14-13, when Ethernet services are unavailable between router A and router B, you can send test frames between NE1 and NE2 to determine whether a fault occurs. NE1 sends test frames to NE2, and NE2 sends response frames after it receives the
test frames. According to the response frames from NE2, NE1 determines whether a fault occurs. Figure 14-13 Ethernet test
NE1
Test Frame Answer Frame
NE2
NE3
Router A
Router B
This test does not affect the service.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Test from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the internal port that you want to test and set the test parameters.
NOTE
Set an NE to send test frames when you want to test whether a network is normal or not. The Send Mode and Frames to send parameters can be edited. When setting Send Mode, note the following: l If you select the Continue Mode, you can continuously send one test packet every 1s until you stop. l If you select the Burst Mode, you can set the number of frames you want to send. The sending duration is 50 ms. l If you select the Disabled mode, you stop sending test frames.
14.1.3.5 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line Service

When an Ethernet private line service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet private line service to release the corresponding resources.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet private line service must be configured and the service is not be used.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Step 3 Select the Ethernet private line service that needs to be deleted and then click Delete. Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Step 4 Click Query. Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. At this time, the Ethernet private line service is already deleted. ----End
14.1.4 Configuring Ethernet LAN Services

You can configure Ethernet LAN services on a per-NE basis by following the instructions below. 14.1.4.1 Ethernet LAN Service Configuration Process This section describes the process for Ethernet LAN service configuration process that consists of deploying a network, configure source NE, configure sink NE, configure pass-through NE and verify service. 14.1.4.2 Setting Port Attributes and Bound Paths for an Ethernet Board You need to set the port attributes and bound paths for an Ethernet board prior to creating Ethernet services. 14.1.4.3 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the LAN service, perform certain operations to create the bridge and set the attributes of the bridge and to configure the mounted ports of the bridge. 14.1.4.4 Creating the EVPLAN Services That Are Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge, you need to create the bridge, set the attributes of the bridge, select the ports that are mounted to the bridge, and select the operation type. 14.1.4.5 Creating the VLAN Filter Table You need to create the VLAN filter table for the bridge when you create the EVPLAN service. 14.1.4.6 Testing Ethernet Services You can enable an Ethernet board to send Ethernet test frames for the purpose of fault location. 14.1.4.7 Deleting an Ethernet LAN Service When an Ethernet LAN service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet LAN service to release the corresponding resources.
14.1.4.1 Ethernet LAN Service Configuration Process

This section describes the process for Ethernet LAN service configuration process that consists of deploying a network, configure source NE, configure sink NE, configure pass-through NE and verify service. Figure 14-14 shows the process for configuring Ethernet LAN services.
Figure 14-14 Ethernet LAN service configuration process

Required Optional
Deploying a Network
Configure source NE
Configure sink NE
Verify service
Configuring SDH Services
Checking the Connectivity of Ethernet Service Checking the Connectivity of Ethernet Port
Setting the NE Time
Configuring Clocks Creating EPLAN Services Configuring Orderwire Creating VALN Configuring Protection Configuring QOS Configuring QOS Creating VALN Creating EPLAN Services
Configuring LPT
Configuring LPT
Configuring LCAS
Configuring LCAS Configuring Ethernet Service OAM Configuring the Ethernet Port OAM
Configuring Ethernet Service OAM Configuring the Ethernet Port OAM
NOTE
l In the landscape orientation of the configuration flow chart by using U2000, there are five main phases of Ethernet LAN service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configure source NE, configure sink NE, configure pass-through NE and verify service. l The portrait orientation of the flow chart shows the relations between operation tasks in each phase.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the external port of a board. For details, refer to 14.4.7.1 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board. Step 2 Configure the internal port of a board. For details, refer to 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports. ----End
14.1.4.3 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service

To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the LAN service, perform certain operations to create the bridge and set the attributes of the bridge and to configure the mounted ports of the bridge.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout.
Precautions
l l l This task describes only how to create the 802.1d bridge and how to create the 802.1q bridge. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. The IDU 605 1F/2F supports the Ethernet switching board EMS4 (a logical board).
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the attributes of the bridge according to the bridge type. l Set the attributes of the 802.1q bridge.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-29
l Set the attributes of the 802.1d bridge.
Step 4 Configure the mounted ports of the bridge. 1. 2. 3.

14-30
Click Configure Mount. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. Select a port from the ports listed in Available Mounted Ports, and then click Optional: Repeat Step 4.2 to select other mounted ports.
4.
Click OK.
Step 5 Optional: If any VCTRUNK is mounted to the VB, configure the VC paths that are bound to the VCTRUNK. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Configuration. The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Service Direction of the bound paths. Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click Optional: Repeat Step 5.4 to bind other VC paths. .
NOTE
6.
Click OK.

Parameters
Parameter VB Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter is a string that describes the bridge. It is recommended that you set this string to a value that contains the specific purpose of the bridge. l When setting this parameter to 802.1q, create the 802.1q bridge. l When setting this parameter to 802.1d, create the 802.1d bridge. l Using the 802.1q bridge is a priority. If the conditions of the VLAN that is used by the user are not known and if the user does not require the isolation of the data among VLANs, you can also use the 802.1d bridge. l This task describes only how to create the 802.1d bridge and how to create the 802.1q bridge. Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (802.1q), SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (802.1d) IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (802.1q), SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (802.1d) l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. When the bridge uses the IVL mode, all the VLANs correspond to their respective MAC address tables. l If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN tag is checked at the ingress port. If the VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID of the port defined in the VLAN filtering table, the packet is discarded. If the ingress filter is disabled, the preceding described check is not conducted. Mount Port l Only the port that is selected as the mounted port of a bridge functions in the packet forwarding process of the bridge. l Set this parameter according to actual situations. Configurable Ports Mount each VCTRUNK of the port. This parameter specifies the VCTRUNK whose VC paths are to be configured.
Bridge Type
802.1q, 802.1d, 802.1ad (EMS6) 802.1q, 802.1d (EM4T, a logical board EMS4)
802.1q
14-32
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Adhere to the following principles to plan and set this parameter: l The capacity of VCTRUNKs should be determined by the actual bandwidth of the service needs. l Bind only the paths in a VC-4 if possible. If the paths of several VC-4s need to be bound, the VC-4s that have the same transmission path take priority. l Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can have only VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths. Hence, when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths, select VC-3 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-3 paths are already bound; when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-12 paths, select VC-12 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-12 paths are already bound. l As the VC-4-1s of the EFT4 board and EMS6 board support only VC-3 paths whereas the VC-4-2s support both VC-12 paths and VC-3 paths, give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1 if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths. l Generally, bidirectional paths are bound.
Activation Status
14.1.4.4 Creating the EVPLAN Services That Are Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge
To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge, you need to create the bridge, set the attributes of the bridge, select the ports that are mounted to the bridge, and select the operation type.
Prerequisite
Precautions
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-33
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the attributes of the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
Step 4 Configure service mounting relations. 1. 2. 3. Click Configure Mount. Set the parameters for configuring mounted services. Click Add Mount Port.
4. 5.
Repeat Step 4.2 to Step 4.3 to add the other mount ports. Click OK.
Step 5 Optional: If any VCTRUNK is mounted to the VB, configure the VC paths that are bound to the VCTRUNK. 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Configuration. The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. Select the required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click . 5.
14-34
Optional: Repeat Step 5.4 to bind other VC paths.

NOTE
The result of setting the port attributes during the configuration of the private network service is consistent with the result of directly setting the attributes of the Ethernet service port.
6.
Click OK.
----End
Parameters
Parameter VB Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter is a string that describes the bridge. It is recommended that you set this string to a value that contains the specific purpose of the bridge. l In this example, the IEEE 802.1d bridge and IEEE 802.1q bridge need not be created. Hence, do not set VB Type to 802.1d or 802.1q. l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. When the bridge uses the IVL mode, all the VLANs correspond to their respective MAC address tables. l If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN tag is checked at the ingress port. If the VLAN ID is not equal to the VLAN ID of the port defined in the VLAN filtering table, the packet is discarded. If the ingress filter is disabled, the preceding described check is not conducted.
VB Type
802.1q, 802.1d, 802.1ad
802.1q
Bridge Switch Mode
IVL/Ingress Filter Enable SVL/Ingress Filter Disable
IVL/Ingress Filter Enable
Parameter Operation Type
Value Range Add S-VLAN Base for Port Add S-VLAN Base for Port and CVLAN Mount Port Mount Port and Base for Port and SVLAN
Default Value Add S-VLAN Base for Port
Description For the meaning of each operation type, see 14.2.2.4 Application of the QinQ Technology in LAN Services.
VB Port Mount Port
This parameter specifies the ID of the logical port of the bridge. Select the external physical port or internal VCTRUNK port of the Ethernet switching board that is mounted to the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. This parameter is valid only when Operation Type is set to Add S-VLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN. This parameter specifies the mapping relation between the C-VLAN tag carried by the data frame and the S-VLAN tag to be added.
C-VLAN
1-4095
S-VLAN
1-4095
l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port, this parameter specifies that the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge need to be added with the S-VLAN tag. l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN, this parameter and C-VLAN specify the mapping relation between the S-VLAN tag to be added and the C-VLAN tag carried by the data frame that enters the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port, this parameter is invalid. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN, this parameter specifies the S-VLAN tag to be carried by the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
Configurable Ports
Mount each VCTRUNK of the port.
14-36
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Adhere to the following principles when planning and setting this parameter: l The capacity of VCTRUNKs should be determined by the actual bandwidth of the service needs. l Bind only the paths in a VC-4 if possible. If the paths of several VC-4s need to be bound, the VC-4s that have the same transmission path take priority. l Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can have only VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths. Hence, when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths, select VC-3 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-3 paths are already bound; when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-12 paths, select VC-12 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-12 paths are already bound. l The VC-4-1s of the EMS6 board support only VC-3 paths, whereas the VC-4-2s of the EMS6 board support both VC-12 paths and VC-3 paths. Hence, give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1 if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths. l Generally, bidirectional paths are bound.
14.1.4.5 Creating the VLAN Filter Table

You need to create the VLAN filter table for the bridge when you create the EVPLAN service.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The EVPLAN service must be created.
Precautions
The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. The IDU 605 1F/2F supports the Ethernet switching board EMS4 (a logical board).
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-37
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the bridge that is already created, and click the VLAN Filtering tab. Step 3 Create the VLAN filter table. 1. 2. 3. 4. Click New. The Create VLAN dialog box is displayed. Set VLAN ID (e.g:1,3-6). Select a port from the ports listed in Available forwarding ports, and then click Optional: Repeat Step 3.3 to select other forwarding ports. .
5.
Click OK.
----End
14-38
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameters
Parameter VLAN ID (e.g: 1,3-6) Value Range 1-4095 Default Value Description l You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l Set this parameter according to actual situations. selected forwarding ports This parameter indicates the ports that are mounted to a bridge. l The packets can be forwarded between the selected forwarding ports only. l The ports that are in selected forwarding ports can forward only the packet that carries the VLAN ID (e.g: 1,3-6) tag. These ports discard the packet that carries other VLAN tags. l The broadcast packet that is transmitted by the ports in selected forwarding ports is broadcast only to the ports included in selected forwarding ports.

Prerequisite
Context
l Test the Ethernet service as follows: As shown in Figure 14-15, when Ethernet services are unavailable between router A and router B, you can send test frames between NE1 and NE2 to determine whether a fault occurs. NE1 sends test frames to NE2, and NE2 sends response frames after it receives the test frames. According to the response frames from NE2, NE1 determines whether a fault occurs.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-39
Figure 14-15 Ethernet test
NE1
NE2
NE3
Router A
Router B
Procedure
NOTE
14.1.4.7 Deleting an Ethernet LAN Service

When an Ethernet LAN service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet LAN service to release the corresponding resources.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet LAN service must be configured and the service is not used.
Deleting an Ethernet LAN service involves the following tasks: 1.
14-40
Deleting the VLAN filtering table

2.
Deleting the VB mounting relation
Procedure
Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Step 3 Click the VLAN Filtering tab. Step 4 Select the VLAN filtering entries that need to be deleted. Then, click Delete. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Step 5 Click the Service Mount tab. Step 6 Select the Ethernet LAN service that needs to be deleted and then click Delete. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Step 7 Click Query. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. At this time, the Ethernet private line service is already deleted. ----End
14.1.5 Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services

You can configure EVPL (QinQ) services on a per-NE basis. 14.1.5.1 EVPL(QinQ) Service Configuration Process This section describes the process for EVPL(QinQ) service configuration process that consists of deploying a network, configure source NE, configure sink NE, configure pass-through NE and verify service. 14.1.5.2 Setting Port Attributes and Bound Paths for an Ethernet Board You need to set the port attributes and bound paths for an Ethernet board prior to creating Ethernet services. 14.1.5.3 Modifying the Type Field of QinQ Frames By default, the type field (that is, the TPID in an S-TAG) of QinQ frames processed by Ethernet switching boards is set to "0x8100". 14.1.5.4 Creating QinQ Line Services To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit QinQ line services, perform this task to configure the related information such as service source and service sink. 14.1.5.5 Testing Ethernet Services You can enable an Ethernet board to send Ethernet test frames for the purpose of fault location.
14.1.5.1 EVPL(QinQ) Service Configuration Process

This section describes the process for EVPL(QinQ) service configuration process that consists of deploying a network, configure source NE, configure sink NE, configure pass-through NE and verify service.
Figure 14-16 shows the process for configuring EVPL(QinQ) services. Figure 14-16 EVPL(QinQ) service configuration process
Required Optional
Deploying a Network
Configure source NE
Configure sink NE
Verify service
Setting the NE Time
Configuring Clocks
Creating CrossConnection Between Ethernet and Line Boards Creating EVPL(QinQ) Services
Creating CrossConnection Between Ethernet and Line Boards Creating EVPL(QinQ) Services
Configuring Protection
NOTE
l In the landscape orientation of the configuration flow chart by using U2000, there are five main phases of EVPL(QinQ) service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configure source NE, configure sink NE, configure pass-through NE and verify service. l The portrait orientation of the flow chart shows the relations between operation tasks in each phase.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the external port of a board. For details, refer to 14.4.7.1 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board.
Step 2 Configure the internal port of a board. For details, refer to 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports. ----End
14.1.5.3 Modifying the Type Field of QinQ Frames

Prerequisite
Precautions
Procedure
Parameters
14.1.5.4 Creating QinQ Line Services

To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit QinQ line services, perform this task to configure the related information such as service source and service sink.
Prerequisite
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select Display QinQ Shared Service. Step 3 Click New. The system displays the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box. Step 4 Set the attributes of the Ethernet line service.
NOTE
The result of configuring the port attributes during the Ethernet line service configuration process is the same as the result of directly configuring the Ethernet service port attributes.
14-44
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameters
Parameter Service Type Direction Value Range EPL, EVPL(QinQ) Unidirectional, Bidirectional Default Value EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the QinQ line service, set this parameter to EVPL(QinQ). l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, only the service from the service source to the service sink is created. l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, both the service from the service source to the service sink and the service from the service sink to the service source are created. l Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value. Operation Type Transparently transmit C-VLAN, Translate C-VLAN, Add S-VLAN, Transparently transmit S-VLAN, Translate S-VLAN, Strip S-VLAN (only for unidirectional services) A specific PORT or VCTRUNK Add S-VLAN l For the meanings of the values, see 14.2.2.3 Application of the QinQ Technology in Line Services. l Set this parameter according to actual situations.
Source Port
PORT1
l This parameter indicates the port where the service source resides. l When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific PORT as the source port.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-45
Parameter Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
Default Value -
Description l You can set this parameter to null, a number, or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of C-VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of C-VLANs set in Sink CVLAN (e.g. 1,3-6). l When you set this parameter to null, all the services of the source port work as the service source. l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the source port whose C-VLAN IDs are included in the set value range of this parameter work as the service source.
Source S-VLAN
1 to 4095
l This parameter must be set to a numerical value. l Only the services of the source port whose S-VLAN IDs are equal to the value of this parameter work as the service source.
Sink Port
PORT1
l This parameter indicates the port where the service sink resides. l Do not set the value of this parameter to the same as the value of Source Port. l When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific VCTRUNK as the sink port.
14-46
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
Default Value -
Description l You can set this parameter to null, a number, or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of VLANs set in Source CVLAN (e.g. 1,3-6). l When you set this parameter to null, all the services of the sink port work as the service sink. l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the sink port whose C-VLAN IDs are included in the set value range of this parameter work as the service sink.
Sink S-VLAN
1 to 4095
l This parameter must be set to a numerical value. l Only the services of the sink port whose S-VLAN IDs are equal to the value of this parameter work as the service sink.
C-VLAN Priority
AUTO, Priority0Priority7
AUTO
l This parameter specifies the priority of the newly added C-VLAN tag. l When this parameter is set to AUTO, the priority of the C-VLAN tag is 0. l When QoS operations do not need to be performed according to the C-VLAN priority, it is recommended that you use the default value.
S-VLAN Priority
AUTO
l This parameter is valid only when Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN. l This parameter specifies the priority of the newly added S-VLAN tag. l When this parameter is set to AUTO, the priority of the S-VLAN tag is 0. l When QoS operations do not need to be performed according to the S-VLAN priority, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Port Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
When the source port or the sink port is set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to Enabled.
14-47
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Prerequisite
Context
l Test the Ethernet service as follows: As shown in Figure 14-17, when Ethernet services are unavailable between router A and router B, you can send test frames between NE1 and NE2 to determine whether a fault occurs. NE1 sends test frames to NE2, and NE2 sends response frames after it receives the test frames. According to the response frames from NE2, NE1 determines whether a fault occurs. Figure 14-17 Ethernet test
NE1
NE2
NE3
Router A
Router B
Procedure
14-48
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
14.1.6 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point EPL Services)

This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point EPL service requirements. 14.1.6.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 14.1.6.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. 14.1.6.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the Ethernet transparent transmission services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 14.1.6.4 Configuring NE2 You can configure the point-to-point Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
14.1.6.1 Networking Diagram

The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. As shown in Figure 14-18, NE1 and NE2 adopt the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU 620. The new service requirements are as follows: l l l l The two branches of User A that are located at NE1 and NE2 need communicate with each other over Ethernet. A 10 Mbit/s bandwidth is required. The two branches of User B that are located at NE1 and NE2 need communicate with each other over Ethernet. A 20 Mbit/s bandwidth is required. The service of User A need be isolated from the service of User B. The Ethernet equipment of User A and User B provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports of which the working mode is auto-negotiation, and does not support VLAN.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-49

User A1 NE 1 NE2 User A2
User B1
User B2
14.1.6.2 Service Planning

According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. In the following example, NE1 and NE2 can use Ethernet transparent transmission boards to create point-to-point EPL services.

Slot 8 on NE1/NE2 houses the EFT4 board. Figure 14-19 IDU board configuration
EXT IF1A FAN FAN
Slot 20
EXT EFT4 EXT EXT PH1 SCC SCC
Ethernet Parameter Configuration

Figure 14-20 Configuring Ethernet services
NE1:8-EFT4
PORT1 User A1 PORT2 User B1 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:6-15 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:6-15
NE2:8-EFT4
PORT1 User A2 PORT2 User B2
SDH
14-50
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Table 14-5 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Parameter Board Port Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Maximum Frame Length Flow Control NE1 8-EFT4 PORT1 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled PORT2 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled NE2 8-EFT4 PORT1 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled PORT2 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled
Table 14-6 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports Parameter Board Port Encapsulation Mapping Protocol LCAS Enabled Bound Path NE1 8-EFT4 VCTRUNK1 GFP VCTRUNK2 GFP NE2 8-EFT4 VCTRUNK1 GFP VCTRUNK2 GFP
Enabled VC4-2: VC12-1VC12-5

Figure 14-21 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services
Station Timeslot NE1 5-IF1A-1 NE2 5-IF1A1-1
1#VC4
VC12:17-21 8-EFT4 8-EFT4 VC4-2:1-5 VC4-2:1-5 VC12:22-31 8-EFT4 8-EFT4 VC4-2:6-15 VC4-2:6-15 Add/Drop
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-51
The EPL service of User A is as follows: Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17-21 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 and NE2. Uses VC-12 timeslots 1-5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1-5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/drop services.
The EPL service of User B is as follows: Occupies VC-12 timeslots 22-31 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 and NE2. Uses VC-12 timeslots 6-15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 6-15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/ drop services.
14.1.6.3 Configuring NE1

You can configure the Ethernet transparent transmission services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The EFT4 board must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFT4 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 PORT2 Description l The basic attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 need to be set. l The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2. Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Enabled Auto-Negotiation In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled. The Ethernet equipment of users work in auto-negotiation mode. Hence, the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to Auto-Negotiation.
2.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports.

1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFT4 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal Port. Set the parameters of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port. a. b. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Value Range VCTRUN K1 GFP VCTRU NK2 Description l The mapping protocol needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. l In this example, Mapping Protocol is set to GFP.
2.
Paramete r Port Mapping Protocol
3.
Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNKs. a. b. Click the LCAS tab. Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Value Range VCTRU NK1 Enabled VCTRUN K2 Description Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. l In this example, the LCAS function is enabled. l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.
Paramete r Port Enabling LCAS
4.
Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs. a. b. c. d. Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 as the ports to be configured. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Service Direction of the bound paths. After setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed. Value Range VCTRUN K1 VCTRUN K2 Description In this example, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 need to be bound with VC paths.
14-53
Paramete r Configura ble Ports

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Paramete r Level Service Direction
Value Range VC12 Bidirectional
Description In this example, the bound path is at the VC-12 level. l If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Available Resources Available Timeslots
VC4-2 VC12-1 to VC12-5 VC12-6 to VC12-15
In this example, VC4-2 is the available resource. l VCTRUNK1 is bound with timeslots VC12-1 to VC12-5. l VCTRUNK2 is bound with timeslots VC12-6 to VC12-15.
Activation Status
Activated
Indicates that VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 are active.
Step 3 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Create. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK. l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows. Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 5-IF1A 17-21 In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-21.
14-54
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) Activate Immediately
Value Range 8-EFT4 VC4-2 1-5 Yes
Description In this example, the 8-EFT4 is the service sink. In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2. In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-5. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately.
l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK2 as follows. Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) Activate Immediately 5-IF1A 22-31 In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 22-31. In this example, the 8-EFT4 is the service sink. In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2. In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 6-15. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately.
8-EFT4 VC4-2 6-15
Yes
----End

You can configure the point-to-point Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
The procedures for configuring NE2 are the same as the procedures for configuring NE1. For details, see 14.1.6.3 Configuring NE1.
14.1.7 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Services)

This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the PORT-shared EVPL service requirements. 14.1.7.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 14.1.7.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. 14.1.7.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the PORT-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 14.1.7.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3 You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.

The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. As shown in Figure 14-22, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs that are configured with the IDU 620. 16xE1 services exist between NE1, NE2, and NE3. The new service requirements are as follows: l The headquarters C1 of User C are located at NE1 and the two branches of User C (C2 and C3) are located at NE2 and NE3. The services between C1 and C2 are transmitted in the VLAN of which the VLAN ID ranges from 100 to 110. The services between C1 and C3 are transmitted in the VLAN of which the VLAN ID ranges from 200 to 210. The services of C2 are isolated from the services of C3. The services of C2 and C3 require a 20 Mbit/s bandwidth respectively. The Ethernet equipment of C1, C2, and C3 provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports of which the working mode is auto-negotiation, and supports VLAN.
l l

User C2 User C1 VLAN100-110 VLAN200-210 NE3 User C3 NE 1 NE2
14-56
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. In the following example, NE1 needs to use Ethernet switching boards to create PORT-shared EVPL services. NE2 and NE3 can use Ethernet transparent transmission boards to create PORTshared EVPL services.

Slot 8 of NE1 houses the EMS6 board. Slot 8 on NE2/NE3 houses the EFT4 board. Figure 14-23 IDU board configuration (NE1)
EXT IF1A FAN FAN
Slot 20
EXT EMS6 EXT EXT PD1 SCC SCC

EXT FAN FAN
Slot 20

NE2:8-EFT4 NE1:8-EMS6
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-10
PORT1 User C2
PORT1 User C1
VC4-2:VC12:1-10 VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:11-20 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-10
NE3:8-EFT4
PORT1 User C3
SDH
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-57
Table 14-7 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Parameter Board Port Enabled/Disabled Working Mode Maximum Frame Length Flow Control TAG Entry Detection NE1 8-EMS6 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled Tag Aware Enabled NE2 8-EFT4 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled NE3 8-EFT4 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled -
Table 14-8 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports Parameter Board Port Encapsulation Mapping Protocol Enabling LCAS TAG Entry Detection Bound Path NE1 8-EMS6 VCTRUNK1 GFP VCTRUNK2 GFP NE2 8-EFT4 VCTRUNK1 GFP NE3 8-EFT4 VCTRUNK1 GFP
Enabled Tag Aware Enabled VC4-2: VC12-1VC12-10
Enabled Tag Aware Enabled VC4-2: VC12-11VC12-20
Table 14-9 Parameters of EPL services Parameter NE1 Private Line Service 1 Board Service Type
14-58
Private Line Service 2
8-EMS EPL
Parameter
NE1 Private Line Service 1 Private Line Service 2
Direction Source Port Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Port Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
Bidirectional PORT1 100-110 VCRTUNK1 100-110 PORT1 200-210 VCTRUNK2 200-210

Station Timeslot NE2 5-IF1A-1 NE1 5-IF1A1-1 7-IF1A1-1 NE3 5-IF1A1-1
1#VC4
VC12:17-26 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:1-10 VC4-2:1-10 Add/Drop
VC12:17-26 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:11-20 VC4-2:1-10
The EVPL service from C1 to C2 is as follows: Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17-26 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 and NE2. Uses VC-12 timeslots 1-10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1-10 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/ drop services.
The EVPL service from C1 to C3 is as follows: Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17-26 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 and NE3. Uses VC-12 timeslots 11-20 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1-20 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to add/drop services.

You can configure the PORT-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
The EMS6 board must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l Set the basic attributes of PORT1. l The services of user C1 use PORT1. Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Enabled AutoNegotiation In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled. The Ethernet equipment of users work in autonegotiation mode. Hence, the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to AutoNegotiation.
2.
3.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l The tag attributes of PORT1 need to be set. l The services of user C1 use PORT1. TAG Tag Aware l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that carry VLAN tags are received. l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded. Entry Detection Enabled In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal Port. Set the parameters of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port. a. b. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
2.
14-60
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Paramete r Port Mapping Protocol 3.
Value Range VCTRUN K1 GFP VCTRU NK2
Description l The encapsulation protocol needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. l In this example, Mapping Protocol is set to GFP.
Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNKs. a. b. Click the LCAS tab. Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Value Range VCTRU NK1 Enabled VCTRUN K2 Description Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. l In this example, the LCAS function is enabled. l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.
Paramete r Port Enabling LCAS
4.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port TAG Value Range VCTRUNK1 Tag Aware VCTRUNK2 Description TAG Attributes need to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that carry VLAN tags are received. l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded. Entry Detection Enabled In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes.
5.
Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs. a. b. c. Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be configured.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
d.
In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. After setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed. Value Range VCTRUN K1 VC12 Bidirectional VCTRUN K2 Description In this example, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 need to be bound with VC paths. In this example, the bound path is at the VC-12 level. l If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Paramete r Configura ble Ports Level Service Direction
Available Resources Available Timeslots
VC4-2 VC12-1 to VC12-10 VC12-11 to VC12-20
In this example, VC4-2 is the available resource. l VCTRUNK1 is bound with timeslots VC12-1 to VC12-10. l VCTRUNK1 is bound with timeslots VC12-11 to VC12-20. Indicates that VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 are active.
Activation Status
Activated
Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click New. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. l Set the parameters of the Ethernet private line services on PORT1 and VCTRUNK1 as follows. Parameter Service Direction Value Range Bidirectional Description l If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Port PORT1 In this example, PORT1 is the service source port.
14-62
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Source VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
Value Range 100-110 VCTRUNK1 100-110
Description The services whose VLAN IDs range from 100 to 110 are the source services. In this example, the VCTRUNK1 is the service sink port. The services whose VLAN IDs range from 100 to 110 are the sink services.
l Set the parameters of the Ethernet private line services on PORT1 and VCTRUNK2 as follows. Parameter Service Direction Value Range Bidirectional Description l If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Port Source VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) PORT1 200-210 VCTRUNK2 200-210 In this example, PORT1 is the service source port. The services whose VLAN IDs range from 200 to 210 are the source services. In this example, the VCTRUNK2 is the service sink port. The services whose VLAN IDs range from 200 to 210 are the sink services.
Step 4 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Create. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK. l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows. Parameter Level Value Range VC12 Description In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-63
Parameter Direction
Value Range Bidirectional
Description l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Activate Immediately
5-IF1A 17-26
8-EMS6 VC4-2 1-10
In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink. In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2. In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-10. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately.
Yes
l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK2 as follows. Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Sink VC4 7-IF1A 17-26 In this example, the 7-IF1A is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-26.
8-EMS6 VC4-2
In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink. In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-64
Parameter Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Activate Immediately
Value Range 11-20
Description In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 11-20. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately.
Yes
----End
14.1.7.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3

You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. The Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 are point-to-point EPL services, and therefore should be configured according to the configuration example of point-to-point EPL services. For details, see 14.1.6.3 Configuring NE1.
14.1.8 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services)

This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service requirements. 14.1.8.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 14.1.8.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. 14.1.8.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 14.1.8.4 Configuring NE2 You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.

The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. As shown in Figure 14-27, NE1 and NE2 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU 620. 16xE1 services exist between NE1 and NE2. The new service requirements are as follows: l The two branches of User D are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each other.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
l l
The two branches of User E are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each other. The services of User D need to be isolated from the services of User E. The traffic of User D and User E, however, is supplementary to each other, and thus can share the 20 Mbit/s bandwidth. The Ethernet equipment of User D and User E provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports of which the working mode is auto-negotiation, and does not support VLAN.

User D1 NE 1 NE2 User D2 12
User E1
User E2

According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. In the following example, NE1 and NE2 need to use Ethernet switching boards to create VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.

Slot 8 on NE1/NE2 houses the EMS6 board. Figure 14-28 IDU board configuration (NE1 and NE2)
EXT FAN FAN
Slot 20
EXT EMS6 EXT EXT PH1 SCC SCC
14-66
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

NE1:8-EMS6
PORT1 User D1 PORT2 User E1 EPL1
VCTRUNK1
NE2:8-EMS6
EPL1
VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-10
PORT1 User D2 PORT2 User E2
EPL2
VC4-2:VC12:1-10
EPL2
SDH
Table 14-10 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Parameter Board Port Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Maximum Frame Length Flow Control TAG Entry Detection Default VLAN ID VLAN Priority NE1 8-EMS6 PORT1 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled Access Enabled 100 0 PORT2 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled Access Enabled 200 0 NE2 8-EMS6 PORT1 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled Access Enabled 100 0 PORT2 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled Access Enabled 200 0
Table 14-11 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports Parameter Board Port Encapsulation Mapping Protocol Enabling LCAS
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NE1 8-EMS6 VCTRUNK1 GFP Enabled
NE2 8-EMS6 VCTRUNK1 GFP Enabled

14-67
Parameter TAG Entry Detection Bound Path
NE1 Tag Aware Enabled VC4-2: VC12-1-VC12-10
NE2 Tag Aware Enabled VC4-2: VC12-1-VC12-10
Table 14-12 Parameters of EPL services Parameter NE1 EPL Service 1 Board Service Type Direction Source Port Source CVLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Port Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) 8-EMS EPL Bidirectional PORT1 100 PORT2 200 EPL Service 2 NE2 EPL Service 1 8-EMS EPL Bidirectional PORT1 100 PORT2 200 EPL Service 2
VCRTUNK1 100
VCRTUNK1 200
VCTRUNK2 100
VCTRUNK2 200

Station Timeslot NE1 5-IF1A-1 NE2 5-IF1A1-1
1#VC4
VC12:17-26 8-EMS6 VC4-2:1-10 Add/Drop 8-EMS6 VC4-2:1-10
l l
The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services of User D and User E occupy VC-12 timeslots 17-26 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2. VC-12 timeslots 1-10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1-10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE2 are used to add/drop the services.
14-68

You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The EMS6 board must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 PORT2 Description l The basic attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 need to be set. l The services of user D1 use PORT1 and the services of user E1 use PORT2. Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Enabled Auto-Negotiation In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled. The Ethernet equipment of users work in auto-negotiation mode. Hence, the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to Auto-Negotiation.
2.
3.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 PORT2 Description l The tag attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 need to be set. l The services of user D1 use PORT1 and the services of user E1 use PORT2. TAG Access If TAG is set to Access: l The packets that carry VLAN tags are discarded. l The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are tagged with Default VLAN ID and are then received.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-69
Value Range 100 200
Description l In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 100 for PORT1. l In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 200 for PORT2.
Entry Detection
Enabled
In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal Port. Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port. a. b. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Value Range VCTRUNK 1 GFP Description l The encapsulation protocol of VCTRUNK1 needs to be set. l In this example, Mapping Protocol is set to GPF.
2.
Parameter Port Mapping Protocol
3.
Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNK. a. b. Click the LCAS tab. Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Value Range VCTRUN K1 Enabled Description In this example, Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1. l In this example, the LCAS function is enabled. l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.
Parameter Port Enabling LCAS
4.
14-70
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Parameter Port TAG
Value Range VCTRUNK1 Tag Aware
Description The tag attributes of VCTRUNK1 need to be set. l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that carry VLAN tags are received. l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded.
Entry Detection
Enabled
In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes.
5.
Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs. a. b. c. d. Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be bound. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. After setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed. Value Range VCTRUNK1 VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example, VCTRUNK1 needs to be bound with VC paths. In this example, the bound path is at the VC-12 level. l If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Available Resources Available Timeslots VC4-2 VC12-1 to VC12-10 In this example, VC4-2 is the available resource. l VCTRUNK1 is bound with timeslots VC12-1 to VC12-10. l VCTRUNK2 is bound with timeslots VC12-11 to VC12-20. Activation Status Activated Indicates that VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 are active.
Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-71
1. 2.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click New. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. l Set the parameters of the Ethernet private line services on PORT1 and VCTRUNK1 as follows. Parameter Service Direction Value Range Bidirectional Description l If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Port Source VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) PORT1 100 VCTRUNK1 100 In this example, PORT1 is the service source port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the source service. In this example, VCTRUNK1 is the service sink port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the sink service.
l Set the parameters of the Ethernet private line services on PORT2 and VCTRUNK1 as follows. Parameter Service Direction Value Range Bidirectional Description l If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Port Source VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) PORT2 200 VCTRUNK1 200 In this example, PORT2 is the service source port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the source service. In this example, VCTRUNK1 is the service sink port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the sink service.
14-72
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Step 4 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Create. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) Activate Immediately 5-IF1A 17-26 8-EMS6 VC4-2 1-10 Yes In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-26. In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink. In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2. In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-10. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately.
Parameter Level Direction
----End

You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. The procedures for configuring NE2 are the same as the procedures for configuring NE1. For details, see 14.1.8.3 Configuring NE1.
14.1.9 Configuration Example (802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services)

This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services. 14.1.9.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements.
14.1.9.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. 14.1.9.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the transparent bridge-based Ethernet LAN services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 14.1.9.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3 You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.

The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. As shown in Figure 14-31, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs that are configured with the IDU 620. 16xE1 services exist between NE1, NE2, and NE3. The new service requirements are as follows: l The three branches of User F, which are F1, F2, and F3, are located at NE1, NE2, and NE3. F1 need communicate with F2 and F3, and thus a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth is required. Communication is not required between F2 and F3. The Ethernet equipment of User F provides 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports, of which the working mode is auto-negotiation, and supports VLAN. The VLAN ID and the number of the VLANs are unknown and may be changed.

NE2 User F2
NE 1 User F1
NE3 User F3

According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs.
In the following example, the 802.1q VB is used to implement EPLAN services of which the user VLAN is not defined. NE1 needs to be configured with Ethernet switching boards. NE2 and NE3 need to be configured with Ethernet transparent transmission boards.

EXT IF1A FAN FAN
Slot 20

EXT FAN FAN
Slot 20

NE2:8-EFT4 NE1:8-EMS6
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-5
PORT1 User F2
PORT1 User F1
VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:6-10
NE3:8-EFT4
VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-5
VB1
PORT1 User F3
SDH
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-75
Table 14-13 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Parameter Port Enabled/Disabled Working Mode Maximum Frame Length Flow Control Entry Detection NE1 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled Disabled NE2 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled NE3 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled -
Table 14-14 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports Parameter Port Encapsulation Mapping Protocol Enabling LCAS Entry Detection Bound Path NE1 VCTRUNK1 GFP VCTRUNK2 GFP NE2 VCTRUNK1 GFP NE3 VCTRUNK1 GFP
Enabled Disabled VC4-2: VC12-1VC12-5
Enabled Disabled VC4-2: VC12-6VC12-10
Table 14-15 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services Parameter Board VB Name VB Type Bridge Switch Mode VB Mount Port Hub/Spoke PORT1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 Ethernet LAN services of NE1 8-EMS VB1 802.1d IVL/Ingress Filter Enable PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2 Hub Spoke Spoke
14-76
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

1#VC4
VC12:17-21 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:1-5 VC4-2:1-5 Add/Drop
VC12:17-21 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 8-EMS6 VC4-2:6-10 VC4-2:1-5 VC4-2:6-15
The Ethernet LAN service of User F occupies VC-12 timeslots 17-21 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2 and VC-12 timeslots 17-21 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE3. VC-12 timeslots 1-5 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1-5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/drop the Ethernet LAN service from NE1 to NE2. VC-12 timeslots 6-10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1-5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to add/drop the Ethernet LAN service from NE1 to NE3.

You can configure the transparent bridge-based Ethernet LAN services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l The basic attributes of PORT1 need to be set. l The services of user F1 use PORT1. Enabled/ Disabled
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2.
Enabled
In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled.
14-77
Value Range AutoNegotiation
Description The Ethernet equipment of users work in autonegotiation mode. Hence, the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to AutoNegotiation.
3.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l The tag attributes of PORT1 need to be set. l The services of user F1 use PORT1. Entry Detection Disabled If Entry Detection is set to Disabled, the VLAN IDs of the packets are not checked.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal Port. Set the parameters of VCTRCUNK1 and VCTRCUNK2. Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port. a. b. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Value Range VCTRUN K1 GFP VCTRU NK2 Description l The encapsulation protocol needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. l In this example, Mapping Protocol is set to GFP.
2.
Paramete r Port Mapping Protocol 3.
Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNKs. a. b. Click the LCAS tab. Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Value Range VCTRU NK1 VCTRUN K2 Description Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.
Paramete r Port
14-78
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Paramete r Enabling LCAS
Value Range Enabled
Description l In this example, the LCAS function is enabled. l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.
4.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port Entry Detection Value Range VCTRUNK1 Disabled VCTRUNK2 Description TAG Attributes need to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. If Entry Detection is set to Disabled, the VLAN IDs of the packets are not checked.
5.
Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs. a. b. c. d. Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be configured. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. After setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed. Value Range VCTRUN K1 VC12 Bidirectional VCTRUN K2 Description In this example, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 need to be bound with VC paths. In this example, the bound path is at the VC-12 level. l If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Available Resources VC4-2 In this example, VC4-2 is the available resource.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-79
Paramete r Available Timeslots
Value Range VC12-1 to VC12-5 VC12-6 to VC12-10
Description l VCTRUNK1 is bound with timeslots VC12-1 to VC12-5. l VCTRUNK2 is bound with timeslots VC12-6 to VC12-10.
Activation Status
Activated
Indicates that VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 are active.
Step 3 Create Ethernet LAN services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters as follows. Parameter VB Name VB Type Bridge Switch Mode Value Range VB1 802.1d SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (802.1d) Description In this example, VB Name is set to VB1. In this example, an IEEE 802.1d bridge is created. In this example, a transparent bridge is created, and the VLAN IDs of the packets over each port need not be checked.
3.
Click Configure Mount. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. Parameter selected forwarding ports Value Range PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2 Description PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 are connected to the bridge.
4. 1. 2.
Click OK. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Select the created bridge. Click the Service Mount tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Step 4 Modify the mounted port of bridge.
14-80
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Paramet er Mount Port
Value Range PORT1 VCTRUN K1 VCTRUN K2
Description l Select PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 as the mount ports. l Only the port that is selected as Mount Port of a bridge functions in the packet forwarding process of the bridge.
Hub/ Spoke
Hub
Spoke
Spoke
The Spoke ports cannot access each other. The Hub port and the Spoke port can access each other. The Hub ports can access each other. Indicates that the VCTRUNK is active.
Activatio n Status
Activated
Step 5 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Create. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK. l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows. Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Sink VC4 5-IF1A 17-21 In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-21.
8-EMS6 VC4-2
In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink. In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2.
14-81
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Activate Immediately
Value Range 1-5
Description In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-5. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately.
Yes
l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK2 as follows. Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Activate Immediately 7-IF1A 17-21 In this example, the 7-IF1A is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-21.
8-EMS6 VC4-2 6-10
Yes
----End

You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. The Ethernet service of NE2/NE3 is a point-to-point EPL service, and therefore should be configured according to the configuration example of point-to-point EPL services. For details, see 14.1.6.3 Configuring NE1.
14.1.10 Configuration Example (802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services)

This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services. 14.1.10.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 14.1.10.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. 14.1.10.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 14.1.10.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3 You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.

The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. As shown in Figure 14-36, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs that are configured with the IDU 620. 16xE1 services exist between NE1, NE2, and NE3. The new service requirements are as follows: l l l l The three branches of User G are located at NE1, NE2, and NE3 respectively, need form a LAN, and share a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth. The three branches of User H are located at NE1, NE2, and NE3 respectively, need form a LAN, and share a 20 Mbit/s bandwidth. The service of User G need be isolated from the service of User H. The Ethernet equipment of User G and User H provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports of which the working mode is auto-negotiation, and does not support VLAN.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-83

NE2 User G2
User G1 NE 1
User H2
User H1 NE3 User G3
User H3

According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. In the following example, NE1 needs to use Ethernet switching boards to create Ethernet LAN services. NE2 and NE3 can use Ethernet transparent transmission boards to create Ethernet LAN services.

EXT IF1A FAN FAN
Slot 20
14-84
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

EXT FAN FAN
Slot 20
Configuring Ethernet Services

Based on the networking diagram, you can plan the configuration diagram and parameters of the Ethernet services on the two VLANs that are implemented by using the 802.1q network bridge. Figure 14-39 Configuring Ethernet services
NE2:8-EFT4
VCTRUNK1
NE1:8-EMS6
VLAN 100
PORT1 User G1 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:6-10
VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:6-15
PORT1 User G2 PORT2 User H2
VLAN 200
PORT2 User H1
VCTRUNK3 VC4-2:VC12:11-20 VCTRUNK4 VC4-2:VC12:21-30 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:6-15
NE3:8-EFT4
PORT1 User G3 PORT2 User H3
VB1
SDH
Table 14-16 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Paramete r Board Port Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode NE1 8-EMS6 PORT1 Enabled AutoNegotiatio n PORT2 Enabled AutoNegotiatio n NE2 8-EFT4 PORT1 Enabled AutoNegotiatio n PORT2 Enabled AutoNegotiatio n NE3 8-EFT4 PORT1 Enabled AutoNegotiatio n PORT2 Enabled AutoNegotiatio n
14-85
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Paramete r Maximum Frame Length Flow Control TAG Entry Detection Default VLAN ID VLAN Priority
NE1 1522 1522
NE2 1522 1522
NE3 1522 1522
Disabled Access Enabled 100 0
Disabled Access Enabled 200 0
Disabled -
Disabled -
Disabled -
Disabled -
Table 14-17 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports Param eter Board Port Encaps ulation Mappin g Protoco l Enablin g LCAS TAG Entry Detecti on Default VLAN ID VLAN Priority NE1 8-EMS6 VCTR UNK1 GFP VCTR UNK2 GFP VCTR UNK3 GFP VCTR UNK4 GFP NE2 8-EFT4 VCTR UNK1 GFP VCTR UNK2 GFP NE3 8-EFT4 VCTR UNK1 GFP VCTR UNK2 GFP
Enable d Access Enable d 100
Enable d -
Enable d -
Enable d -
Enable d -
14-86
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Param eter Bound Path
NE1 VC4-2: VC121VC125 VC4-2: VC126VC1210 VC4-2: VC1211VC1220 VC4-2: VC1221VC1230
NE2 VC4-2: VC121VC125 VC4-2: VC126VC1215
NE3 VC4-2: VC121VC125 VC4-2: VC126VC1215
Table 14-18 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services Parameter Board VB Name VB Type Bridge Switch Mode Mount Port VLAN Filtering Table Filtering Table VLAN ID Forwarding Port Ethernet LAN services of NE1 8-EMS VB1 802.1q IVL/Ingress Filter Enable PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, VCTRUNK4 VLAN Filtering Table 1 100 PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2 VLAN Filtering Table 2 200 PORT2, VCTRUNK3, VCTRUNK4

1#VC4
VC12:17-21 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:1-5 VC4-2:1-5 VC12:22-31 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:11-20 VC4-2:6-15 Add/Drop
VC12:17-21 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:6-10 VC4-2:1-5 VC12:22-31 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:21-30 VC4-2:6-15
l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
The Ethernet LAN service of User G:

Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17-21 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2 and VC-12 timeslots 17-21 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE3. Uses VC-12 timeslots 1-5 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1-5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/drop services between NE1 and NE2. Uses VC-12 timeslots 6-10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1-5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to add/drop services between NE1 and NE3. l The Ethernet LAN service of User H: Occupies VC-12 timeslots 22-31 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2 and VC-12 timeslots 22-31 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE3. Uses VC-12 timeslots 11-20 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 6-15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/drop services between NE1 and NE2. Uses VC-12 timeslots 21-30 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 6-15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to add/drop services between NE1 and NE3.

You can configure the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 PORT2 Description l The basic attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 need to be set. l The services of user G1 use PORT1 and the services of user H1 use PORT2. Enabled/ Disabled Enabled In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled.
2.
14-88
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Value Range Auto-Negotiation
Description The Ethernet equipment of users work in auto-negotiation mode. Hence, the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to Auto-Negotiation.
3.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 PORT2 Description l The tag attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 need to be set. l The services of user G1 use PORT1 and the services of user H1 use PORT2. TAG Access l If TAG is set to Access, the packets that carry VLAN tags are discarded. l If TAG is set to Access, the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are tagged with Default VLAN ID and are then received. Default VLAN ID 100 200 l In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 100 for PORT1. l In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 200 for PORT2. Entry Detection Enabled In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal Port. Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port. a. b. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Value Range VCTRU NK1 VCTRU NK2 VCTR UNK3 VCTRU NK4 Description l The encapsulation protocol needs to be set for VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4.
14-89
2.
Param eter Port
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Param eter Mappi ng Protoc ol
Value Range GFP
Description l In this example, Mapping Protocol is set to GFP.
3.
Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNKs. a. b. Click the LCAS tab. Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Value Range VCTRU NK1 Enabled VCTRU NK2 VCTR UNK3 VCTRU NK4 Description Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4. l In this example, the LCAS function is enabled. l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.
Param eter Port
Enabli ng LCAS
4.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Param eter Port Value Range VCTRU NK1 Access VCTRU NK2 VCTR UNK3 VCTRU NK4 Description TAG Attributes need to be set for VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4. l If TAG is set to Access, the packets that carry VLAN tags are discarded. l If TAG is set to Access, the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are tagged with Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority and are then received.
TAG
14-90
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Param eter Entry Detecti on
Value Range Enabled
Description In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes.
5.
Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs. a. b. c. d. Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be configured. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. After setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed. Value Range VCTRU NK1 VCTRU NK2 VCTR UNK3 VCTRU NK4 Description In this example, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4 are used to bind VC paths. In this example, the bound path is at the VC-12 level. l If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Availa ble Resour ces VC4-2 In this example, VC4-2 is the available resource.
Param eter Config urable Ports Level Service Directi on
VC12 Bidirectional
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-91
Param eter Availa ble Timesl ots
Value Range VC12-1 to VC12-5 VC12-6 to VC12-1 0 VC1211 to VC1220 VC12-2 1 to VC12-3 0
Description l VCTRUNK1 is bound with timeslots VC12-1 to VC12-5. l VCTRUNK2 is bound with timeslots VC12-6 to VC12-10. l VCTRUNK3 is bound with timeslots VC12-11 to VC12-20. l VCTRUNK4 is bound with timeslots VC12-21 to VC12-30.
Activat ion Status
Activated
Indicates that VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4 are active.
Step 3 Create Ethernet LAN services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters as follows. Parameter VB Name VB Type Bridge Switch Mode Value Range VB1 802.1q IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (802.1q) Description In this example, VB Name is set to VB1. In this example, an IEEE 802.1q bridge is created. If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN tags are checked at the ingress port. If the VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID of the port defined in the VLAN filtering table, the packet is discarded.
3.
Click Configure Mount. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. Parameter selected forwarding ports Value Range PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, VCTRUNK4 Description PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4 are connected to the bridge.
4.
Click OK.
Step 4 Create a VLAN filtering table.

1. 2.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Select the created bridge. Click the VLAN Filtering tab. After setting the parameters, click OK. Set the parameters of VLAN filtering table 1 as follows. Parameter VLAN ID(e.g: 1,3-6) selected forwarding ports Value Range 100 PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2 Description PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 are connected to the bridge.
Set the parameters of VLAN filtering table 2 as follows. Parameter VLAN ID(e.g: 1,3-6) selected forwarding ports Value Range 200 PORT2, VCTRUNK3, VCTRUNK4 Description PORT2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4 are connected to the bridge.
Step 5 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Create. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows. Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source 5-IF1A In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-93
Parameter Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Activate Immediately
Value Range 17-21
Description In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-21.
8-EMS6 VC4-2 1-5
Yes
l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK2 as follows. Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Activate Immediately 7-IF1A 17-21 In this example, the 7-IF1A is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-21.
8-EMS6 VC4-2 6-10
Yes
l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK3 as follows.
14-94
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Level Direction
Value Range VC12 Bidirectional
Description In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Activate Immediately
5-IF1A 22-31
8-EMS6 VC4-2 11-20
Yes
l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK4 as follows. Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
7-IF1A 22-31
8-EMS6
In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink.

14-95
Parameter Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Activate Immediately
Value Range VC4-2 21-30
Description In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2. In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 21-30. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately.
Yes
----End

You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. The Ethernet service of NE2/NE3 is a point-to-point EPL service, and therefore should be configured according to the configuration example of point-to-point EPL services. For details, see 14.1.6.3 Configuring NE1.
14.1.11 Configuration Example (EVPL Services Based on QinQ)

This topic provides an example to describe how to configure QinQ line services.
Precautions
NOTE
For details on the services configured in this example, see the description of the EVPL service that is based on QinQ in 14.2.6.1 EVPL Services Based on QinQ.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the attributes of the ports of NE1 and NE4. For details, see 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports. Step 2 Set the attributes of the VCTRUNKs of NE1-NE4. For details, see 14.4.7.1 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board. Step 3 Configure a QinQ service from PORT1 to VCTRUNK1 of NE1. For details, see 14.1.5.4 Creating QinQ Line Services. Set the parameters as follows: l Set Direction to Bidirectional. l Set Operation Type to Add S-VLAN. l Set Source Port to PORT1. l Do not set Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6). l Set Sink Port to VCTRUNK1. l Do not set Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6).
l Set Sink S-VLAN to 100. Step 4 Configure a QinQ service from PORT2 to VCTRUNK1 of NE1. For details, see 14.1.5.4 Creating QinQ Line Services. Set the parameters as follows: l Set Direction to Bidirectional. l Set Operation Type to Add S-VLAN. l Set Source Port to PORT2. l Do not set Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6). l Set Sink Port to VCTRUNK1. l Do not set Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6). l Set Sink S-VLAN to 110. Step 5 Configure the QinQ services of NE4. For details, see Steps Step 3-Step 4. Step 6 Configure the QinQ service to which the traffic stream of customer a at NE2 corresponds. For details, see 14.1.5.4 Creating QinQ Line Services. Set the parameters as follows: l Set Direction to Bidirectional. l Set Operation Type to Transparently transmit S-VLAN. l Set Sink Port to VCTRUNK1. l Set Source S-VLAN to 100. l Set Sink Port to VCTRUNK2. l Set Sink S-VLAN to 100. Step 7 Configure the QinQ service to which the traffic stream of customer b at NE2 corresponds. For details, see 14.1.5.4 Creating QinQ Line Services. Set the parameters as follows: l Set Direction to Bidirectional. l Set Operation Type to Transparently transmit S-VLAN. l Set Sink Port to VCTRUNK1. l Set Source S-VLAN to 110. l Set Sink Port to VCTRUNK2. l Set Sink S-VLAN to 110. Step 8 Configure the QinQ service to which the traffic stream of customer a at NE3 corresponds. For details, see 14.1.5.4 Creating QinQ Line Services. Set the parameters as follows: l Set Direction to Bidirectional. l Set Operation Type to Translate S-VLAN. l Set Source Port to VCTRUNK2. l Set Source S-VLAN to 100. l Set Sink Port to VCTRUNK1.
l Set Sink S-VLAN to 200. Step 9 Configure the QinQ service to which the traffic stream of customer b at NE3 corresponds. For details, see 14.1.5.4 Creating QinQ Line Services. Set the parameters as follows: l Set Direction to Bidirectional. l Set Operation Type to Translate S-VLAN. l Set Source Port to VCTRUNK2. l Set Source S-VLAN to 110. l Set Sink Port to VCTRUNK1. l Set Sink S-VLAN to 210. Step 10 Create the cross-connection from the paths that are bound to the VCTRUNK to the corresponding timeslots on the line. ----End
14.1.12 Configuration Example (EVPLAN Services Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge)
This topic considers an example to describe how to configure the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
Precautions
NOTE
For details on the services configured in this example, refer to the example described in 14.2.6.2 EVPLAN Services Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge. The following configuration flow is based on the configuration of services on convergence node NE3.
Procedure
Step 1 Set Network Attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 of the Ethernet switching board of NE3 to CAware. For details, see 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports. Step 2 Set Network Attributes of VCTRUNNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the Ethernet switching board of NE3 to C-Aware. For details, see 14.4.7.1 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board. Step 3 Configure the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge for NE3. For details, see 14.1.4.4 Creating the EVPLAN Services That Are Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge. Set the parameters for the IEEE 802.1ad bridge as follows: l Set VB Name to VB1. l Set VB Type to 802.1ad. l Set Bridge Switch Mode to IVL\Ingress Filter Enable. l Bridge Learning Mode is set to IVL automatically. l Ingress Filter is set to Enabled automatically.
Set the parameters for service mounting as follows: Parameter Operation Type VB Port Mount Port C-VLAN S-VLAN Parameter Value Add S-VLAN Base for Port 1 PORT1 100 2 PORT2 200 Add S-VLAN Base for Port and CVLAN 3 VCTRUNK1 10 100 20 200 4 VCTRUNK2 30 100 40 200
Step 4 Create the VLAN filtering table. For details, see 14.1.4.5 Creating the VLAN Filter Table. Set the parameters for the VLAN filtering table of the VoIP services as follows: l Set VLAN ID to 100. l Select the corresponding forwarding ports, including PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Set the parameters for the VLAN filtering table of the HSI services as follows: l Set VLAN ID to 200. l Select the corresponding forwarding ports, including PORT2, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Step 5 Create the cross-connection from the paths that are bound to the VCTRUNK to the corresponding timeslots on the line. ----End
14.1.13 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave

The Hybrid microwave that the OptiX RTN 600 supports can transmit E1 services and Ethernet services at the same time. When E1 services are transmitted over the Hybrid microwave, you need to create the cross-connections. When Ethernet services are transmitted over the Hybrid microwave, you need not configure the encapsulation and mapping in the VCTRUNKs or the cross-connections between the VCTRUNKs and line timeslots. 14.1.13.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 14.1.13.2 Service Planning (Microwave Services) According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. 14.1.13.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In
the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. 14.1.13.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board) According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. 14.1.13.5 Configuring NE1 (Microwave Services) You can configure the microwave service data of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 14.1.13.6 Configuring NE1 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 14.1.13.7 Configuring NE2 (Microwave Services) You can configure the microwave service data of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 14.1.13.8 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 14.1.13.9 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board) You can configure the attributes and CoS of the Ethernet ports of the IFH2 board based on the parameters of the engineering plan so that Ethernet services can be accessed to the IFH2 board normally, thus meeting the requirement for CoS scheduling. 14.1.13.10 Configuring NE3 (Ethernet Services) You can configure the Ethernet service data of NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.

The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. In the network shown in Figure 14-41, NE1 and NE2 use the IDU 620 and NE3 uses the IDU 605. The service requirements are as follows: l The Ethernet equipment of user A, user B, and user C provides 100 Mbit/s auto-negotiative Ethernet electrical interfaces. The Ethernet equipment of user A does not support VLAN tags. The services of user A are frames that do not carry VLAN tags, namely, untagged framed. The Ethernet equipment of user B and user C supports VLAN tags. Hence, the services of user B and user C are frames that carry VLAN tags, namely, tagged frames. User A has two branches (user A1 and user A2), which are located at NE1 and NE2. There are 4xE1 services and Ethernet services between the two branches. The Ethernet services are Internet services, whose maximum bandwidth is 10 Mbit/s. The bandwidth of the Internet services can be allocated flexibly. After the user services are accessed, the default VLAN ID of 300 is added to the services. User B has two branches (user B1 and B2), which are located at NE1 and NE2. There are 2xE1 services and Ethernet services between the two branches. One part of the Ethernet services are voice over IP (VoIP) services, whose maximum bandwidth is 4 Mbit/s. The transmission of the VoIP services must be stable. The VLAN ID is 100. The other part of
14-100
the Ethernet services are Internet services, whose maximum bandwidth is 20 Mbit/s. The bandwidth of the Internet services can be allocated flexibly. The VLAN ID is 200. l l The radio link between NE1 and NE2 uses the 1+1 HSB configuration. User C has two branches, which are located at NE2 and NE3. There are 4xE1 services and Ethernet services between the two branches. One part of the Ethernet services are VoIP services, whose maximum bandwidth is 4 Mbit/s. The transmission of the VoIP services must be stable and the VLAN priority level is 7. The other part of the Ethernet services are Internet services, whose maximum bandwidth is 20 Mbit/s. The bandwidth of the Internet services can be allocated flexibly and the VLAN priority level is 1.

User A2 User A1 User C2 NE2 (IDU 620) NE1 (IDU 620) User B1 User B2 User C1 NE3 (IDU 605 1F)
14.1.13.2 Service Planning (Microwave Services)

According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. The engineering planning information includes all the information that is required for configuring the microwave services on NE1, NE2, and NE3.
NE Attributes
Parameter Equipment Type NE ID Extended ID
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NE1 IDU 620 101 9 (default value)
NE2 IDU 620 102 9 (default value)
NE3 IDU 605 1F 103 9 (default value)

14-101
Parameter NE IP
NE1 129.9.0.101
NE2 129.9.0.102
NE3 129.9.0.103
Planning a Radio Link

As described in the engineering requirements, there are two Hybrid radio links, which are the radio link between NE1 and NE2 and the radio link between NE2 and NE3. Figure 14-42 shows the link planning information. Figure 14-42 Link planning diagram
NE1 (IDU 620) H-polarization NE2 (IDU 620)
Tx Hi 14930 MHz 14510 MHz Tx Low
Tx Low 14532 MHz NE3 (IDU 605 1F)
14952 MHz V-polarization
Tx Hi
NOTE
NE1, NE2, and NE3 use the ODUs that operate on sub-band A of the 15 GHz frequency band with a T/R spacing of 420 MHz. Hence, fewer types of spare parts are required.
In addition, the networking diagram shows the capacity information of the two Hybrid radio links, as listed in Table 14-19. Table 14-19 Link capacity Radio Link Number of E1 Services Capacity of E1 Services (Mbit/s) 12 8 Assured Ethernet Service Capacity (Mbit/ s) 4 4 Maximum Ethernet Service Capacity (Mbit/s) 34 24
Link between NE1 and NE2 Link between NE2 and NE3
6 4
14-102
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
The Hybrid radio link can be planned properly according to the previous information and the actual engineering requirements. Table 14-20 provides the planning information of the Hybrid radio link in this example. Table 14-20 Information for planning a radio link Parameter TX High Station TX Low Station TX Frequency at the TX High Station (MHz) TX Frequency at the TX Low Station (MHz) T/R Spacing(MHz) TX Power(dBm) Channel Spacing(MHz) Link 1 NE1 NE2 14930 14510 420 10 (The TX power must be the same at both ends.) 14 Link 2 NE3 NE2 14952 14532 420 10 (The TX power must be the same at both ends.) 14 4 Enable Asymmetric QPSK 32QAM 102 Disabled 1+0 V (vertical polarization)
E1 Capacity of the Hybrid Network 6 AM Enable Status AM Mode Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity Radio Link ID ATPC Enable Status Link Protection Mode Polarization Directiona Enable Asymmetric QPSK 32QAM 101 Disabled 1+1 HSB H (horizontal polarization)
NOTE a: The planning information that is not related to the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization direction) is not provided in this example.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-103
Board Layout
Figure 14-43 Board layout of the IDU (NE1)
EXT IFH2 FAN FAN
Slot 20
EXT EXT EMS6 EXT PH1 SCC SCC
EXT IFH2 PXC PXC PXC PXC

EXT IFH2 FAN FAN
Slot 20
IFH2 EXT EXT EMS6 EXT PH1 SCC SCC
EXT IFH2 PXC PXC PXC PXC

PW48B
Slot 1
SCC
Slot 2
EOW
Slot 3
PH1
Slot 4
EMS4
Slot 5
IFH1
Slot 8
NOTE
The ODU that is connected to the IF board in slot n occupies logical slot 10+n. The logical slot of the ODU is not shown in the board layout diagram. In the case of the IDU 620, "n" ranges from five to eight whereas in the case of the IDU 605, "n" is 7 or 8.

Table 14-21 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection Parameter Protection Group ID Protection Type Working Slot Protection Slot Revertive Mode
14-104
NE1 1 HSB (default value) Slot 5 Slot 7 Revertive (default value)
NE2 1 HSB (default value) Slot 5 Slot 7 Revertive (default value)

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter WTR Time(s) Enable Reverse Switching
NE1 600 (default value) Enabled (default value)
NE2 600 (default value) Enabled (default value)
Timeslot Allocation
Station NE1 5-IFH2 NE2 5-IFH2 8-IFH2 E1: 1-4 4-PH1:7-10 Timeslot E1: 1-6 4-PH1:1-6 4-PH1:1-6 4-PH1:1-4 NE3 8-IFH1
Add/Drop
As shown in Figure 14-46, the timeslots are allocated for the services between the NEs as follows. l The timeslot allocation for the E1 services of NE1 is as follows: The services that are added or dropped over ports 1-6 of the PH1 board in slot 4 of NE1 occupy the 1-6 E1 timeslots on the radio link between the IFH2 board in slot 5 of NE1 and the IFH2 board in slot 5 of NE2. l The timeslot allocation for the E1 services of NE2 is as follows: The services are that added or dropped over ports 1-6 of the PH1 board in slot 4 of NE2 occupy the 1-6 E1 timeslots on the radio link between the IFH2 board in slot 5 of NE1 and the IFH2 board in slot 5 of NE2. The services are that added or dropped over ports 7-10 of the PH1 board in slot 4 of NE2 occupy the 1-4 E1 timeslots on the radio link between the IFH2 board in slot 8 of NE2 and the IFH1 board in slot 8 of NE3. l The timeslot allocation for the E1 services of NE3 is as follows: The services are that added or dropped over ports 1-4 of the PH1 board in slot 4 of NE3 occupy the 1-4 E1 timeslots on the radio link between the IFH2 board in slot 8 of NE2 and the IFH1 board in slot 8 of NE3.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-105
Clock Information
Figure 14-47 Clock synchronization scheme
NE2 NE1
BITS External clock source 1/Internal clock source 5-IFH2(SDH-1)/ 7-IFH2(SDH-1)/ Internal clock source
Direction of the main clock
Table 14-22 Clock information Parameter Clock Source First Clock Source Second Clock Source Third Clock Source NE1 5-IFH2(SDH-1) 7-IFH2(SDH-1) NE2 External clock source 1 Internal clock source
Internal clock source
Table 14-23 Orderwire information Parameter Telephone No. Call Waiting Time(s) Selected Orderwire Port Orderwire Occupied Bytes NE1 101 5 5-IFH2-1 E1 NE2 102 5 5-IFH2-1 E1 NE3 103 -
14.1.13.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)
According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In
the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs.
Configuration Information of Ethernet Parameters

Figure 14-48 Configuration information of Ethernet parameters
NE1: 5-IFH2 (main) NE1: NE1: 6-EMS6
PORT3 (main) User A1 User B1 PORT1
15-ODU (main)
PORT1
NE2: 5-IFH2 NE2: (main) 15-ODU (main)

PORT1
PORT3 (main)
NE2: 6-EMS6
PORT1
LAG
PORT2 PORT4 (slave) PORT1
LAG
PORT2
User A2 User B2
NE1: 17-ODU (standby)
NE2: 17-ODU (standby)
PORT4 (slave)
PORT1
NE1: 7-IFH2 (standby) Network cable IF cable
NE2: 7-IFH2 (standby)
Table 14-24 Parameters of external ports of the EMS6 board Parameter Board Port Enabled/Disabled Working Mode Maximum Frame Length Flow Control TAG NE1 6-EMS6 PORT1-PORT4 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled PORT1: Access (default VLAN ID: 300) PORT2-PORT4: Tag Aware Entry Detection Enabled NE2 6-EMS6 PORT1-PORT4 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled PORT1: Access (default VLAN ID: 300) PORT2-PORT4: Tag Aware Enabled
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-107
Table 14-25 Parameters of external ports of the IFH2 board Parameter Board Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Flow Control NE1 5-IFH2 Enabled AutoNegotiation Disabled 7-IFH2 Enabled AutoNegotiation Disabled NE2 5-IFH2 Enabled AutoNegotiation Disabled 7-IFH2 Enabled AutoNegotiation Disabled
Table 14-26 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE1) Parameter NE1 Private Line Service 1 (User A1) Board Service Type Service Direction Source Port Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Port Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) 6-EMS EPL Bidirectional PORT1 300 PORT3 300 EPL Bidirectional PORT2 100 PORT3 100 EPL Bidirectional PORT2 200 PORT3 200 Private Line Service 2 (User B1, VoIP Service) Private Line Service 3 (User B1, Internet Service)
Table 14-27 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE2) Parameter NE2 Private Line Service 1 (User A2) Board Service Type Service Direction Source Port 6-EMS EPL Bidirectional PORT1 EPL Bidirectional PORT2 EPL Bidirectional PORT2 Private Line Service 2 (User B2, VoIP Service) Private Line Service 3 (User B2, Internet Service)
14-108
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter
NE2 Private Line Service 1 (User A2) Private Line Service 2 (User B2, VoIP Service) 100 PORT3 100 Private Line Service 3 (User B2, Internet Service) 200 PORT3 200
Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Port Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
300 PORT3 300
Configuration Information of the QoS

Table 14-28 Flow configuration Paramet er NE1 User A1 User B1, VoIP Service User B1, Internet Service NE2 User A2 User B2, VoIP Service User B2, Internet Service
Board Flow Type Port VLAN ID Bound CAR Bound CoS
6-EMS PORT +VLAN Flow PORT1 300 1 3 PORT +VLAN Flow PORT2 100 1 PORT +VLAN Flow PORT2 200 2 2
6-EMS PORT +VLAN Flow PORT1 300 1 3 PORT +VLAN Flow PORT2 100 1 PORT +VLAN Flow PORT2 200 2 2
Table 14-29 Parameters of the CARa Parameter Board CAR ID Enabled/Disabled NE1 6-EMS 1 Enabled 2 Enabled NE2 6-EMS 1 Enabled 2 Enabled
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-109
Parameter
NE1 20480 0 40960 0
NE2 10240 0 20480 0 20480 0 40960 0
Committed Information Rate (kbit/ 10240 s) Committed Burst Size (kbyte) Peak Information Rate (kbit/s) Maximum Burst Size (kbyte) 0 20480 0
NOTE
a: You can limit the Ethernet service rate on a port of the EMS6 board, by performing the corresponding configuration of the CAR that is bound with the port.
Table 14-30 Parameters of the CoS Parameter Board CoS ID CoS Type CoS Priority NE1 6-EMS 1 simple 7 2 simple 3 3 simple 2 NE2 6-EMS 1 simple 7 2 simple 3 3 simple 2
Configuration Information of the Link Aggregation Group

Table 14-31 Parameters of the link aggregation group Parameter Board LAG No. LAG Name LAG Type Load Sharing Main Port Selected Slave Ports NE1 6-EMS 1 LAG_1 Manual Non-Sharing PORT3 PORT4 NE2 6-EMS 1 LAG_1 Manual Non-Sharing PORT3 PORT4
14.1.13.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)
According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In
the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. Figure 14-49 Configuration diagram of the Ethernet services between NE2 and NE3
NE2: 8-IFH2 NE2: 18-ODU
User C2 PORT1
NE3: 8-IFH1 NE3: 18-ODU
NE3: 5-EMS4
PORT1
User C1
Network cable IF cable
Table 14-32 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Parameter Board Port Enabled/Disabled Working Mode Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode NE2 8-IFH2 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation Enable Symmetric Flow Control NE3 5-EMS4 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation Disabled
Table 14-33 Parameters of the CoS of the IFH2 board (NE2) CoS Parameter User Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag User Priority 1 in the VLAN Tag CoS Priority 3 1
Table 14-34 Parameters of Ethernet services (NE3) Parameter Board VB Name VB Type
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Ethernet LAN Service 5-EMS4 VB1 802.1d

Parameter Bridge Switch Mode Mount Port
Ethernet LAN Service SVL/Ingress Filter Disable PORT1, IFUP1
14.1.13.5 Configuring NE1 (Microwave Services)

You can configure the microwave service data of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must be logged in to the NE. All the required boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Modify the NE ID. Set the parameters as follows: l New ID: 101 l New Extended ID: 9 Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE. Set the parameters as follows: l IP: 129.9.0.101 Step 3 Configure IF 1+1 protection. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Click Create. Then, the Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Parameter Protection Group ID Working Mode Value Range 1 HSB Description If Protection Group ID is set to 1, it indicates the first protection group of the NE. In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection.
14-112
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Revertive Mode
Value Range Revertive
Description l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state after the WTR time (when the former working channel is restored to normal) expires. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
WTR Time(s)
600
l After the working path is restored to normal and the normal state lasts for 600s, the switching restoration occurs. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Enable
l When the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
5-IFH2-1 7-IFH2-1
Step 4 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the 5-IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/ AM Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Value Range 14M Description l In this example, the spacing between radio links is 14 MHz. l This parameter needs to be set according to the values listed in service planning (microwave services). E1 Capacity 6 A maximum of 6xE1 services can be transmitted in Hybrid work mode. The value of this parameter cannot exceed the maximum number of E1 services permitted in Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity. An AM switching in one direction of the radio link does not cause an AM switching in the other direction of the radio link.
Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth
AM Mode
Asymmetric
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-113
Parameter AM Enable Status Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity
Value Range Enable QPSK
Description The radio link uses the corresponding modulation mode according to the channel conditions. l In this example, the lowest modulation mode that the AM function supports is QPSK. l The value of this parameter is determined by the link capacity and must ensure the reliable transmission of E1 services.
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
32QAM
l In this example, the highest modulation mode that the AM function supports is set to 32QAM. l The value of this parameter is determined by the link capacity and must ensure that the maximum capacity of Hybrid microwave services can be transmitted when the radio link is in good conditions.
NOTE
The 5-IFH2 and 7-IFH2 boards are configured as a 1+1 HSB protection group. The 5-IFH2 functions as the main IF board and the 7-IFH2 functions as the standby IF board. The system automatically sets the relevant parameters of the standby board (7-IFH2). Hence, you need not set the parameters manually.
Step 5 Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Set the information about the 5-IFH2. Then, click Apply. Set the information about the 15ODU on the radio link. Then, click Apply. Parameter Link ID Value Range 101 Description l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites. l In this example, the radio link ID is 101. ATPC Enable Status TX Frequency (MHz) T/R Spacing (MHz) TX Power (dBm) Disabled 14930.0 420.0 The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning. In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz. The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning.
10.0
14-114
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter TX Status
Value Range unmute
Description l When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 6 Create the cross-connections of services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Create. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Configure the crossconnections of the service. Click OK. Parameter Level Value Range VC12 Description l In this example, VC-12 data services are bound. l This parameter indicates the level of the crossconnections. Direction Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range (e.g.1,3-6) Sink Sink Port Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) 4-PH1 1-6 In this example, the 4-PH1 is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 1-6. In this example, the 5-IFH2 is the service sink. In this example, port 1 is the service sink port. In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-1. In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-6.
5-IFH2 1 VC4-1 1-6
Step 7 Configure the orderwire. Set the parameters as follows: l Phone 1: 101 l Orderwire Port: 5-IFH2-1
Step 8 Configure the clock source. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree. Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. Parameter Clock Source Value Range 5-IFH2-1(SDH) 7-IFH2-1(SDH) Description In this example, the 5-IFH2-1(SDH) is the clock source. In this example, the 7-IFH2-1(SDH) is the clock source.
3.
Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level of this clock source. Set Clock Source and Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest). Then, click Apply. Paramet er Clock Source Value Range 5-IFH2-1 (SDH) 7-IFH2-1 (SDH) Internal Clock Source 3 Description In this example, the 5-IFH2-1 (SDH), 7-IFH2-1(SDH), and internal clock source are set as the clock sources. l This parameter specifies the priority level of a clock source. l The priority level of the 5IFH2-1(SDH) clock source is 1. The priority level of the 7IFH2-1(SDH) clock source is 2. The priority level of the internal clock source is 3.
Clock Source Priority Sequence (1 is the highest)
----End
14.1.13.6 Configuring NE1 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)
You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must be logged in to the NE. The EMS6 board must be added. The IFH2 board must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports of the IFH2 board. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the port, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l The basic attributes of PORT1 need to be set. l The user services use PORT1. Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Enabled AutoNegotiation In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled. In this example, the port works in autonegotiation mode.
2.
3.
Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the port, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l The flow control mode of PORT1 need to be set. l The user services use PORT1. NonAutonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Autonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Disabled l In this example, the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Disabled l In this example, the auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet external ports of the EMS6 board. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the ports, click Apply.
2.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-117
Parameter Port
Value Range PORT1-PORT4
Description l The basic attributes of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set. l The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2. l PORT3 and PORT4 form an LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port.
Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode
Enabled AutoNegotiation
In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled. In this example, the port works in autonegotiation mode.
3.
Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the ports, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1-PORT4 Description l The flow control mode of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set. l The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2. l PORT3 and PORT4 form an LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port. NonAutonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Autonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Disabled l In this example, the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Disabled l In this example, the auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
4.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1-PORT4 Description l The tag attributes of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set. l The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2. l PORT3 and PORT4 form an LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port.
14-118
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter TAG
Value Range l In this example, TAG is set to Access for PORT1. l In this example, TAG is set to Tag Aware for PORT2PORT4.
Description If TAG is set to Access: l The packets that carry VLAN tags are discarded. l The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are tagged with Default VLAN ID and are then received. If TAG is set to Tag Aware: l The packets that carry VLAN tags are received. l The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded. In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 300 for PORT1. l In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Default VLAN ID Entry Detection
300 Enabled
Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services of the EMS6 board. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click New. Then, the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. Set the attributes of the three Ethernet private line services. Then, click OK. l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 1 as follows. Parameter Service Type Service Direction Value Range EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Port Source VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6) Sink Port PORT1 300 PORT3 In this example, PORT1 is the service source port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 300 is the source service. In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-119
Parameter Sink VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)
Value Range 300
Description The service that has the VLAN ID of 300 is the sink service.
l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 2 as follows. Parameter Service Type Service Direction Value Range EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Port Source VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6) PORT2 100 PORT3 100 In this example, PORT2 is the service source port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the source service. In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the sink service.
l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 3 as follows. Parameter Service Type Direction Value Range EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Port Source VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)
14-120
PORT2 200 PORT3 200
In this example, PORT2 is the service source port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the source service. In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the sink service.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Step 4 Configure the QoS of the EMS6 board. 1. Create the flow. a. b. c. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Click the Flow Configuration tab. Click New. The New Flow dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the three flows. Then, click OK.
l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user A1 as follows: Parameter Flow Type Value Range PORT+VLAN Flow Description When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. In this example, PORT1 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow. In this example, the source VLAN ID is 300.
Port VLAN ID
PORT1 300
l Set the parameters of the VoIP service of user B1 as follows. Parameter Flow Type Value Range PORT+VLAN Flow Description When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. In this example, PORT2 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow. In this example, the source VLAN ID is 100.
Port VLAN ID
PORT2 100
l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user B1 as follows. Parameter Flow Type Value Range PORT+VLAN Flow Description When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. In this example, PORT2 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow. In this example, the source VLAN ID is 200.
Port VLAN ID
PORT2 200
2.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Create the CAR.

a. b. c.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Click the CAR Configuration tab. Click New. The New CAR dialog box is displayed. Select the parameters of the two CARs. Then, click OK.
l Set the parameters of user A1 as follows. Parameter CAR ID Enabled/ Disabled Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) Value Range 1 Enabled 10240 Description In this example, CAR 1 is used to bind the flow to an associated CAR operation. In this example, CAR1 is enabled. l In this example, the CIR is 10240 kbit/s. l When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion. 0 In this example, the CBS is 0.
Committed Burst Size (kbyte) Peak Information Rate(kbit/s)
20480
l In this example, the PIR is 20480 kbit/s. l When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, these packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow, which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion.
Maximum Burst Size (kbyte)
In this example, the MBS is 0.
l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user B1 as follows. Parameter CAR ID Enabled/ Disabled Value Range 2 Enabled Description In this example, CAR 2 is used to bind the flow to an associated CAR operation. In this example, CAR 2 is enabled.
14-122
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Committed Information Rate(kbit/s)
Value Range 20480
Description l In this example, the CIR is 20480 kbit/s. l When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion.
In this example, the CBS is 0.
40960
Maximum Burst Size (kbyte) 3. Create the CoS. a. b. c.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Click the CoS Configuration tab. Click New. The New CoS dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the three CoSs. Then, click OK..
l Set the parameters of the VoIP service of user B1 as follows. Parameter CoS ID CoS Type Value Range 1 simple Description In this example, CoS 1 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation. If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue. The queue whose CoS priority is 7 is an SP queue.
CoS Priority
l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user B1 as follows.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-123
Parameter CoS ID CoS Type
Value Range 2 simple
Description In this example, CoS 2 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation. If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue. The queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are WRR queues. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6).
CoS Priority
l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user A1 as follows. Parameter CoS ID CoS Type Value Range 3 simple Description In this example, CoS 3 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation. If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue. The queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are WRR queues. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6).
CoS Priority
4.
Bind the CAR/CoS. a. b. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Click the Flow Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click OK. Value Range PORT1 PORT2 PORT2 Description In this example, PORT1 and PORT2 are the source ports of the Ethernet services associated with the flows. When Flow Type is set to PORT +VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. The source VLAN IDs of the ports are 300, 100, and 200.
Paramet er Port
Flow Type
PORT +VLAN Flow
PORT +VLAN Flow
PORT +VLAN Flow
VLAN ID
300
100
200
14-124
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Paramet er Bound CAR Bound CoS
Value Range 1 2
Description The flow is bound with the corresponding CAR, according to the service plan. The flow is bound with the corresponding CoS, according to the service plan.
Step 5 Create an LAG of the EMS6 board. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab. Click New. The Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Value Range 1 LAG_1 Manual Description In this example, LAG No. is set to 1. In this example, LAG Name is set to LAG_1. The user creates the LAG manually. The LACP is not enabled to add or delete a member port. The member ports may be in the UP or DOWN state. The equipment determines whether to perform the aggregation according to the status of the specific port. Only one member link of a link aggregation group carries traffic and the other member links are in the Standby state. In this case, a hot backup scheme is provided. In this example, PORT3 is the main port. In this example, PORT4 is the slave port.
2. 3.
Parameter LAG No. LAG Name LAG Type
Load Sharing
Non-Sharing
Main Port Selected Slave Ports
PORT3 PORT4
----End
14.1.13.7 Configuring NE2 (Microwave Services)

You can configure the microwave service data of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
You must be logged in to the NE. All the required boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Modify the NE ID. Set the parameters as follows: l New ID: 102 l New Extended ID: 9 Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE. Set the parameters as follows: l IP: 129.9.0.102 Step 3 Configure IF 1+1 protection. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Click Create. Then, the Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Value Range 1 HSB Description If Protection Group ID is set to 1, it indicates the first protection group of the NE. In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state after the WTR time (when the former working channel is restored to normal) expires. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. WTR Time(s) 600 l After the working path is restored to normal and the normal state lasts for 600s, the switching restoration occurs. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Enable Reverse Switching Enable l When the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Parameter Protection Group ID Working Mode
Revertive Mode
Revertive
Parameter Working Board Protection Board
Value Range 5-IFH2-1 7-IFH2-1
Description In the 1+1 HSB mode, the IF boards can be installed in slots 5-8. It is recommended that you install two IF boards in a pair in slots 5 and 7 (the IF board in slot 5 is the main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IF board in slot 6 is the main board).
Step 4 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the 5-IFH2 and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AM Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth Value Range 14M Description l In this example, the spacing between radio links is 14 MHz. l This parameter needs to be set according to the values listed in service planning (microwave services). E1 Capacity 6 A maximum of 6xE1 services can be transmitted in Hybrid work mode. The value of this parameter cannot exceed the maximum number of E1 services permitted in Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity. When this parameter is set to Asymmetric, an AM switching in one direction of the radio link does not cause an AM switching in the other direction of the radio link. The radio link uses the corresponding modulation mode according to the channel conditions. l In this example, the lowest modulation mode that the AM function supports is QPSK. l The value of this parameter is determined by the link capacity and must ensure the reliable transmission of E1 services. 32QAM l In this example, the highest modulation mode that the AM function supports is set to 32QAM. l The value of this parameter is determined by the link capacity and must ensure that the maximum capacity of Hybrid microwave services can be transmitted when the radio links are in good conditions.
AM Mode
Asymmetric
AM Enable Status Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity
Enable QPSK
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-127

NOTE
The 5-IFH2 and 7-IFH2 boards are configured as a 1+1 HSB protection group. The 5-IFH2 functions as the main IF board and the 7-IFH2 functions as the standby IF board. The system automatically sets the relevant parameters of the standby board (7-IFH2). Hence, you need not set the parameters manually.
3. 4.
In the NE Explorer, select the 8-IFH2 and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AM Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth Value Range 14M Description l In this example, the spacing between radio links is 14 MHz. l This parameter needs to be set according to the values listed in service planning (microwave services). E1 Capacity 4 A maximum of 4xE1 services can be transmitted in Hybrid work mode. The value of this parameter cannot exceed the maximum number of E1 services permitted in Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity. When this parameter is set to Asymmetric, an AM switching in one direction of the radio link does not cause an AM switching in the other direction of the radio link. l When this parameter is set to Enable, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation mode according to the channel conditions. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity QPSK l In this example, the lowest modulation mode that the AM function supports is QPSK. l The value of this parameter is determined by the link capacity and must ensure the reliable transmission of E1 services. 32QAM In this example, the available highest modulation mode that the AM function supports is set to 32QAM. l In this example, the highest modulation mode that the AM function supports is set to 32QAM. l The value of this parameter is determined by the link capacity and must ensure that the maximum capacity of Hybrid microwave services can be transmitted when the radio links are in good conditions.
AM Mode
Asymmetric
AM Enable Status
Enable
14-128
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Step 5 Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Set the information about the 5-IFH2 and 15-ODU on one radio link. Then, click Apply. Set the information about the 8-IFH2 and 18-ODU on the other radio link. Then, click Apply. l Set the parameters of the 5-IFH2 and 15-ODU as follows. Parameter Link ID Value Range 101 Description l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites. l In this example, the radio link ID is 101. ATPC Enable Status TX Frequency (MHz) T/R Spacing (MHz) TX Power (dBm) TX Status Disabled 14510.0 420.0 The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning. In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz. The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning. l When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
10.0 unmute
l Set the parameters of the 8-IFH2 and 18-ODU as follows: Parameter Link ID Value Range 102 Description l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites. l In this example, the radio link ID is 102. ATPC Enable Status TX Frequency (MHz) T/R Spacing (MHz) Disabled 14532.0 420.0 The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning. In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz.
14-129
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter TX Power (dBm) TX Status
Value Range 10.0 unmute
Description The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning. l When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 6 Create the cross-connections of services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Create. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK. l Configure the cross-connections of the E1 services of NE1 and NE2 as follows. Parameter Level Value Range VC12 Description l In this example, VC-12 data services are bound. l This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections. Direction Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Sink Port Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) 4-PH1 1-6 In this example, the 4-PH1 is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 1-6.
5-IFH2 1 VC4-1 1-6
In this example, the 5-IFH2 is the service sink. In this example, port 1 is the service sink port. In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-1. In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-6.
l Configure the cross-connections of the E1 services of NE2 and NE3 as follows.

Parameter Level
Value Range VC12
Description l In this example, VC-12 data services are bound. l This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections.
Direction
Bidirectional
l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Sink Port Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
4-PH1 7-10
In this example, the 4-PH1 is the service source. In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 7-10.
8-IFH2 1 VC4-1 1-4
In this example, the 8-IFH2 is the service sink. In this example, port 1 is the service sink port. In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-1. In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-4.
Step 7 Configure the orderwire. Set the parameters as follows: l Phone 1: 102 l Orderwire Port: 5-IFH2-1 Step 8 Configure the clock source. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree. Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Select the clock sources. Then, click OK. Parameter Clock Source Value Range External Clock Source 1 Description In this example, external clock source 1 is selected as the clock source.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-131
3.
Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level of this clock source. Set Clock Source and Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest). Then, click Apply. Parameter Clock Source Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest) Value Range External Clock Source 1 1 Internal Clock Source 2 Description In this example, external clock source 1 and the internal clock source are selected as the clock sources. l This parameter specifies the priority level of a clock source. l The priority level of external clock source 1 is 1. The priority level of the internal clock source is 2.
----End
14.1.13.8 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)
You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must be logged in to the NE. The EMS6 board must be added. The IFH2 board must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports of the IFH2 board. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the port, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l The basic attributes of PORT1 need to be set. l The user services use PORT1. Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Enabled AutoNegotiation In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled. In this example, the port works in autonegotiation mode.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2.
14-132
3.
Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the port, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l The flow control mode of PORT1 need to be set. l The user services use PORT1. NonAutonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Autonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Disabled l In this example, the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Disabled l In this example, the auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet external ports of the EMS6 board. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the ports, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1-PORT4 Description l The basic attributes of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set. l The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2. l PORT3 and PORT4 form an LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port. Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Enabled AutoNegotiation In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled. In this example, the port works in autonegotiation mode.
2.
3.
Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the ports, click Apply.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-133
Parameter Port
Value Range PORT1-PORT4
Description l The flow control mode of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set. l The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2. l PORT3 and PORT4 form an LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port.
NonAutonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Autonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode
Disabled
l In this example, the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Disabled
l In this example, the auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
4.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1-PORT4 Description l The tag attributes of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set. l The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2. l PORT3 and PORT4 form an LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port. TAG l In this example, TAG is set to Access for PORT1. l In this example, TAG is set to Tag Aware for PORT2PORT4. Default VLAN ID Entry Detection 300 Enabled If TAG is set to Access: l The packets that carry VLAN tags are discarded. l The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are tagged with Default VLAN ID and are then received. If TAG is set to Tag Aware: l The packets that carry VLAN tags are received. l The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded. In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 300 for PORT1. l In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
14-134
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services of the EMS6 board. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click New. Then, the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. Set the attributes of the three Ethernet private line services. Then, click OK. l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 1 as follows. Parameter Service Type Direction Value Range EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Port Source VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6) PORT1 300 PORT3 300 In this example, PORT1 is the service source port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 300 is the source service. In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 300 is the sink service.
l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 2 as follows. Parameter Service Type Direction Value Range EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Port Source VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6) Sink Port PORT2 100 PORT3 In this example, PORT2 is the service source port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the source service. In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-135
Parameter Sink VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)
Value Range 100
Description The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the sink service.
l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 3 as follows: Parameter Service Type Direction Value Range EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Source Port Source VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6) PORT2 200 PORT3 200 In this example, PORT2 is the service source port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the source service. In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the sink service.
Step 4 Configure the QoS of the EMS6 board. 1. Create the flow. a. b. c. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Click the Flow Configuration tab. Click New. The New Flow dialog box is displayed. Select the parameters of the eight flows. Then, click OK.
l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user A2 as follows: Parameter Flow Type Value Range PORT+VLAN Flow Description When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. In this example, PORT1 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow. In this example, the source VLAN ID is 300.
Port VLAN ID
PORT1 300
14-136
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
l Set the parameters of the VoIP service of user B2 as follows. Parameter Flow Type Value Range PORT+VLAN Flow Description When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. In this example, PORT2 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow. In this example, the source VLAN ID is 100.
Port VLAN ID
PORT2 100
l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user B2 as follows. Parameter Flow Type Value Range PORT+VLAN Flow Description When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. In this example, PORT2 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow. In this example, the source VLAN ID is 200.
Port VLAN ID 2. Create the CAR. a. b. c.
PORT2 200
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Click the CAR Configuration tab. Click New. The New CAR dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the two CARs. Then, click OK.
l Set the parameters of user A1 as follows. Parameter CAR ID Enabled/ Disabled Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) Value Range 1 Enabled 10240 Description In this example, CAR 1 is used to bind the flow to an associated CAR operation. In this example, CAR 1 is enabled. l In this example, the CIR is 10240 kbit/s. l When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion. 0 In this example, the CBS is 0.
Committed Burst Size (kbyte)

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-137
Parameter Peak Information Rate(kbit/s)
Value Range 20480
Description l In this example, the PIR is 20480 kbit/s. l When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, these packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow, which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion.
l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user B2 as follows. Parameter CAR ID Enabled/ Disabled Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) Value Range 2 Enabled 20480 Description In this example, CAR 2 is used to bind the flow to an associated CAR operation. In this example, CAR 2 is enabled. l In this example, the CIR is 20480 kbit/s. l When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion. 0 In this example, the CBS is 0.
40960

14-138
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3.
Create the CoS. a. b. c. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Click the CoS Configuration tab. Click New. The New CoS dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the three CoSs. Then, click OK.
l Set the parameters of the VoIP service of user B2 as follows. Parameter CoS ID CoS Type Value Range 1 simple Description In this example, CoS 1 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation. If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue. The queue whose CoS priority is 7 is an SP queue.
CoS Priority
l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user B2 as follows. Parameter CoS ID CoS Type Value Range 2 simple Description In this example, CoS 2 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation. If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue. The queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are WRR queues. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6).
CoS Priority
l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user A2 as follows. Parameter CoS ID CoS Type Value Range 3 simple Description In this example, CoS 3 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation. If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue. The queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are WRR queues. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6).
14-139
CoS Priority
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
4.
Bind the CAR/CoS. a. b. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Click the Flow Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click OK. Value Range PORT1 PORT2 PORT2 Description In this example, PORT1 and PORT2 are the source ports of the Ethernet services associated with the flows. When Flow Type is set to PORT +VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. The source VLAN IDs of the ports are 300, 100, and 200. The flow is bound with the corresponding CAR, according to the service plan. The flow is bound with the corresponding CoS, according to the service plan.
Paramet er Port
Flow Type
PORT +VLAN Flow
PORT +VLAN Flow
PORT +VLAN Flow
VLAN ID Bound CAR Bound CoS
300 1
100 -
200 2
Step 5 Create an LAG of the EMS6 board. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab. Click New. The Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Value Range 1 LAG_1 Manual Description In this example, LAG No. is set to 1. In this example, LAG Name is set to LAG_1. The user creates the LAG manually. The LACP is not enabled to add or delete a member port. The member ports may be in the UP or DOWN state. The equipment determines whether to perform the aggregation according to the status of the specific port.
2. 3.
Parameter LAG No. LAG Name LAG Type
14-140
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Load Sharing
Value Range Non-Sharing
Description Only one member link of a link aggregation group carries traffic and the other member links are in the Standby state. In this case, a hot backup scheme is provided. In this example, PORT3 is the main port. In this example, PORT4 is the slave port.
Main Port Selected Slave Ports
PORT3 PORT4
----End
14.1.13.9 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)
You can configure the attributes and CoS of the Ethernet ports of the IFH2 board based on the parameters of the engineering plan so that Ethernet services can be accessed to the IFH2 board normally, thus meeting the requirement for CoS scheduling.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must be logged in to the NE. The IFH2 board must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the Ethernet ports of the IFH2 board. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port. Set the basic attributes of the ports. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Value Range PORT1 Description l The basic attributes of PORT1 need to be set. l The user services use PORT1. Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode Enabled Auto-Negotiation Disabled In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled. In this example, the port works in auto-negotiation mode. l In this example, the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
14-141
2.
Parameter Port
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Value Range Enable Symmetric Flow Control
Description When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric Flow Control, PORT1 transmits and processes PAUSE frames.
Step 2 Configure the CoS of the IFH2 board. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Click the Flow Configuration tab. Set CoS Parameter and CoS Priority. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter CoS Parameter CoS Priority Value Range Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag 3 Priority 1 in the VLAN Tag 1 Description The data flows correspond to Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag and Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag, respectively. l The data flow of Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag has the CoS priority of 3. The data flow of Priority 1 in the VLAN Tag has the CoS priority of 1. l This parameter specifies the queue to which a packet should be scheduled.
----End
14.1.13.10 Configuring NE3 (Ethernet Services)

You can configure the Ethernet service data of NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports. 1. In the NE Explorer, select the 5-EMS4 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
2.
14-142
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Port
Value Range PORT1
Description l The basic attributes of PORT1 need to be set. l The services of user C use PORT1.
Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode
Enabled AutoNegotiation
In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled. The Ethernet equipment of users work in autonegotiation mode. Hence, the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to AutoNegotiation. l In this example, PHY Loopback is set to Non-Loopback. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Maximum Frame Length PHY Loopback
1522 Non-Loopback
3.
Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l The flow control of PORT1 needs to be set. l The services of user C use PORT1. NonAutonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Autonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Disabled l In this example, the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. Disabled l In this example, the auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. l In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
4.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l The tag attributes of PORT1 need to be set. l The services of user C use PORT1. TAG Tag Aware l The packets that carry VLAN tags are received. l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded.
Step 2 Create Ethernet LAN services.

1. 2.
In the NE Explorer, select the 5-EMS4 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters as follows: Parameter VB Name VB Type Bridge Switch Mode Value Range VB1 802.1d SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (802.1d) Description In this example, VB Name is set to VB1. In this example, an IEEE 802.1d bridge is created. In this example, a transparent bridge is created, and the VLAN IDs of the packets over each port need not be checked.
3.
Click Configure Mount. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. Parameter selected forwarding ports Value Range PORT1, IFUP1 Description PORT1 and IFUP1 are connected to the bridge.
4.
Click OK.
Step 3 Configure the QoS. 1. Configure the flow. a. b. c. In the NE Explorer, select the 5-EMS4 and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Flow Configuration tab. Click New. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK. Value Range Port Flow PORT1 Description The packets from the same port are classified as a type of flow. The packets from the PORT1 are classified as a type of flow.
Parameter Flow Type Port
2.
Configure the CoS. a. b. c. In the NE Explorer, select the 5-EMS4 and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Click the CoS Configuration tab. Click New. The New CoS dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK.
14-144
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter CoS ID
Value Range 1
Description In this example, CoS 1 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation. This parameter determines the queues to which the packets are scheduled according to the user priority level in the VLAN tag. Priority 1 in the VLAN Tag 1 In this example, the queue scheduling mode is set SP. Hence, the packets in the queue with priority level 1 in the VLAN tag are transmitted first.
CoS Type
VLAN Priority
CoS Parameter CoS Priority
Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag 3
3.
Bind the CAR/CoS. a. b. In the NE Explorer, select the 5-EMS4 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Click the Flow Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Value Range Port Flow PORT1 1 Description The packets from the same port are classified as a type of flow. The flow is bound with CoS 1.
Parameter Flow Type Port Bound CAR Bound CoS
----End
14.2 Configuring QinQ

The Ethernet switching processing board supports the line services that are based on QinQ (802.1q in 802.1q). The function complies with IEEE 802.1q and IEEE 802.1ad. 14.2.1 Feature Description QinQ provides a Layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) solution that is much cheaper and easier than provided by multi-protocol label switch (MPLS). By using the VLAN QinQ technology, the data packets carry two VLAN tags to distinguish different services. This changes the limitation that only one VLAN tag is used to mark the data packets, and increases the number of VLAN IDs. The inner VLAN is called the C-VLAN, representing the customer VLAN. The outer VLAN is called S-VLAN, representing the service provider VLAN. 14.2.2 Basic Concepts This topic describes the basic concepts that you need to be familiar with before you use the QinQ feature.
14.2.3 Availability The QinQ technology is applicable to the Ethernet private line service and the Ethernet LAN service. 14.2.4 Relation with Other Features The QinQ technology is applied to the Ethernet line service and LAN service of the Ethernet switching board. 14.2.5 Realization Principle The attributes of QinQ packets are closely related to the port attributes and service type. 14.2.6 Planning Guide Plan related parameters according to the specific application of the QinQ feature. 14.2.7 Configuration Guide This topic describes the configuration flow and the corresponding configuration tasks of the QinQ line service. An example is provided as additional information to help understand the configuration.

QinQ provides a Layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) solution that is much cheaper and easier than provided by multi-protocol label switch (MPLS). By using the VLAN QinQ technology, the data packets carry two VLAN tags to distinguish different services. This changes the limitation that only one VLAN tag is used to mark the data packets, and increases the number of VLAN IDs. The inner VLAN is called the C-VLAN, representing the customer VLAN. The outer VLAN is called S-VLAN, representing the service provider VLAN. The functions of the QinQ technology are as follows: l l l l With the application of the QinQ technology, the number of VLAN IDs can reach 4096 x 4096. This solves the problem that the number of VLAN IDs cannot meet the requirement. Operators can plan VLAN resources independently and flexibly, thus simplifying network configuration and maintenance. The QinQ technology, providing a cheaper and simpler L2 VPN solution, replaces the MPLS technology. The QinQ technology enables the expansion of Ethernet services from local area networks (LANs) to wide area networks (WANs).
The QinQ technology complies with the following standards: l l IEEE 802.1q IEEE 802.1ad

This topic describes the basic concepts that you need to be familiar with before you use the QinQ feature. 14.2.2.1 Frame Format The QinQ technology defines three types of Ethernet frames: Ethernet frame with only a CTAG, Ethernet frame with a C-TAG and an S-TAG, and Ethernet frame with only an S-TAG. 14.2.2.2 Network Attributes The network attribute of each port (PORT or VCTRUNK) can be set to UNI, C-aware, or Saware depending on how the port processes the C-TAG and S-TAG.
14.2.2.3 Application of the QinQ Technology in Line Services Introduction of the QinQ technology provides many new applications for line services. 14.2.2.4 Application of the QinQ Technology in LAN Services The use of the QinQ technology provides the application of the EVPLAN service that is based on the 802.1ad bridge.
14.2.2.1 Frame Format

The QinQ technology defines three types of Ethernet frames: Ethernet frame with only a CTAG, Ethernet frame with a C-TAG and an S-TAG, and Ethernet frame with only an S-TAG.
Ethernet Frame with Only a C-TAG

The Ethernet frame with only a C-TAG has the same format as the tagged frame defined in IEEE 802.1Q. Hence, the tagged frame defined in IEEE 802.1Q is an Ethernet frame that contains a C-VLAN tag. For details on the format of a tagged frame, see Format of the tagged frame. Figure 14-50 Format of the Ethernet frame with only a C-TAG
4 bytes Destination address Source address C-TAG Length/Type Data FCS (CRC-32)
TCI TPID 16 bits PCP 3 bits CFI 1 bit VID 12 bits
Ethernet Frame with a C-TAG and an S-TAG

In the case of an Ethernet frame that contains a C-TAG and an S-TAG, the S-TAG is added before the C-TAG. The differences between the S-TAG and the C-TAG are as follows: l The TPID is different. As defined in IEEE 802.1ad, the value of the TPID in the S-TAG is 0x88a8, whereas the value of the TPID in the C-TAG is 0x8100.
NOTE
The TPID in the S-TAG that is supported by the Ethernet switching board has the same value as the TPID in the C-TAG. The TPID value is 0x8100. The TPID value in the S-TAG can be modified. For details, see 14.2.7.3 Modifying the Type Field of QinQ Frames.
The drop eligible indicator (DEI) replaces the CFI. The DEI works with the PCP to indicate the priority of the S-TAG.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-147
Figure 14-51 Format of the Ethernet frame with a C-TAG and an S-TAG
4 bytes Destination address Source address S-TAG C-TAG Length/Type Data FCS (CRC-32)
TCI TPID 16 bits PCP 3 bits DEI 1 bit VID 12 bits
NOTE
Certain vendors use the Ethernet frames each of which contains a C-TAG and an S-TAG but whose type field is not set to 0x8100. To ensure that the OptiX RTN 600 can be interconnected with the equipment of the vendors, the Ethernet switching board of Huawei supports manual setting of the type field.
Ethernet Frame with Only an S-TAG

The Ethernet frame with only an S-TAG contains only an S-TAG and does not contain a CTAG. Figure 14-52 Format of the Ethernet frame with only an S-TAG
4 bytes Destination address Source address S-TAG Length/Type Data FCS (CRC-32)
TCI TPID 16 bits PCP 3 bits DEI 1 bit VID 12 bits
14.2.2.2 Network Attributes

The network attribute of each port (PORT or VCTRUNK) can be set to UNI, C-aware, or Saware depending on how the port processes the C-TAG and S-TAG.
UNI Port
A UNI port verifies and processes the outer tag of an Ethernet frame according to the TAG attributes of the port. UNI ports cannot be used in the case of QinQ services.
14-148
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
C-Aware Port
A C-aware port is in an equivalent position as a UNI port in a network. A C-aware port considers that an accessed packet does not contain an S-TAG. C-aware ports can be used in the case of QinQ services.
NOTE
l C-TAG frames and untagged frames can normally enter and exit C-aware ports. l When an S-TAG frame enters and exits a C-aware port, the port processes the S-TAG as a C-TAG. l When a frame that contains an S-TAG and a C-TAG enters and exits a C-aware port, the port processes the S-TAG as a C-TAG and does not process the inner C-TAG.
S-Aware Port
An S-aware port is in an equivalent position as a NNI port in a network. An S-aware port considers that an accessed packet contains an S-TAG. S-aware ports can be used in the case of QinQ services.
NOTE
l S-TAG frames or the frames that contain an S-TAG and a C-TAG can normally enter and exit S-aware ports. l When a C-TAG frame enters and exits an S-aware port, the port processes the C-TAG frame as an S-TAG frame. l When an untagged frame enters and exits an S-aware port, the port discards the frame. l When a frame that contains an S-TAG and a C-TAG enters and exits an S-aware port of an EMS6 board, the port processes only the S-TAG and does not process the inner C-TAG.
14.2.2.3 Application of the QinQ Technology in Line Services

Introduction of the QinQ technology provides many new applications for line services.
Line Services Between C-Aware Ports

The line services between C-aware ports have two applications. Table 14-35 Line services between C-aware ports Type of Packet (Type of Source Port) Data frames that contain a C-VLAN tag (C-aware port) Data frames that contain a C-VLAN tag or do not contain a C-VLAN tag (Caware port) Operation Type Direction Description
Transparently transmit C-VLAN
Unidirectional/ Bidirectional
Transparently transmits packets according to the CVLAN. Transparently transmits packets.
Transparently transmit C-VLAN
Unidirectional/ Bidirectional
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-149
Line Services Between a C-Aware Port and an S-Aware Port

The line services between a C-aware port and an S-aware port have three applications. Table 14-36 Line services between a C-aware port and an S-aware port Type of Packet (Type of Source Port) Data frames that contain a CVLAN tag (Caware port) Operation Type Direction Description
Add S-VLAN
Unidirectional
Transmits packets according to the C-VLAN and adds an S-VLAN tag to each packet. In the case of the service from a Caware port to an S-aware port, the port transmits the packets according to the C-VLAN and adds an SVLAN tag to each packet. In the case of the service from an Saware port to a C-aware port, the port transmits the packets according to the C-VLAN and strips the SVLAN tag from each packet.
Bidirectional
Data frames that contain a CVLAN tag or do not contain a CVLAN tag (Caware port)
Add S-VLAN
Unidirectional Bidirectional
Transmits packets and adds an SVLAN tag to each packet. In the case of the service from a Caware port to an S-aware port, the port adds an S-VLAN tag to each packet. In the case of the service from an Saware port to a C-aware port, the port strips the S-VLAN tag from each packet.
S-TAG or STAG + C-TAG (S-aware port)
Strip S-VLAN
Unidirectional
Transmits packets according to the S-VLAN and strips the S-VLAN tag from each packet.
NOTE
The priority of the S-VLAN tag added by the "Add S-VLAN" operation is 0 by default. The priority can be set.
Line Services Between S-Aware Ports

The line services between S-aware ports have two applications.
14-150
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Table 14-37 Line services between S-aware ports Type of Packet (Type of Source Port) S-TAG or STAG + C-TAG (S-aware port) Operation Type Direction Description
Transparently transmit SVLAN Translate SVLAN
Unidirectional/ Bidirectional Unidirectional/ Bidirectional
Transparently transmits packets according to the S-VLAN. Transmits packets according to the S-VLAN, which is translated.
14.2.2.4 Application of the QinQ Technology in LAN Services

The use of the QinQ technology provides the application of the EVPLAN service that is based on the 802.1ad bridge. The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports the data frame that has double VLAN tags. The outer VLAN tag (namely, S-VLAN tag) is used to isolate VLANs. The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports only the port whose network attribute is set to C-aware or S-aware. The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports the following two switching modes. For details, refer to Table 14-38. 1. The IEEE 802.1ad bridge does not check the contents of the VLAN tags in the data frames that enter the bridge but performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses of the data frames. The IEEE 802.1ad bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags in the data frames that enter the bridge and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and S-VLAN IDs of the data frames.
2.
Table 14-38 Characteristics of the IEEE 802.1ad bridge Bridge Type Bridge Switch Mode Bridge Learning Mode SVL IVL Ingress Filter
IEEE 802.1ad bridge
SVL/Ingress Filter Disable IVL/Ingress Filter Enable
Disabled Enabled
The C-aware ports are used to add and strip the S-VLAN tags. The S-aware ports are used to transparently transmit the S-VLAN tags. The ports that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1ad bridge support the following operation types: l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Add S-VLAN base for port

l l l
Add S-VLAN base for port and C-VLAN Mount port Mount port and base for port and S-VLAN
This topic describes the four operation types when Bridge Switch Mode of the IEEE 802.1ad bridge is set to IVL/Ingress Filter Enabled.
LAN Services That Enter and Exit the C-Aware Port

Table 14-39 lists the applications of the LAN services that enter and exit the C-aware port. Table 14-39 LAN services that enter and exit the IEEE 802.1ad bridge through the C-aware port Type of Data Frame Data frames that contain a CVLAN tag or do not contain a CVLAN tag Operation Type Add S-VLAN Base for Port Direction Ingress Description 1. When the data frames enter the bridge through the C-aware port, the data frames are added with the preset S-VLAN tag. 2. After the data frames enter the bridge, the data frames are forwarded in the bridge according to the S-VLAN filtering table. Egress When the data frames leave the bridge through the C-aware port, the S-VLAN tag is stripped. 1. The entry detection is performed for the data frames according to the C-VLAN tag. 2. The corresponding S-VLAN tags are added to the data frames according to the mapping relation between the C-VLAN tags and the S-VLAN tags of the data frames (a). If the mapping relation does not exist, the data frames are discarded. 3. After the data frames enter the bridge, the data frames are forwarded in the bridge according to the S-VLAN filtering table. Egress When the data frames leave the bridge through the C-aware port, the S-VLAN tag is stripped.
Data frames that contain a CVLAN tag
Add S-VLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN
Ingress
14-152
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
a:
l The same C-aware port supports the mapping of different C-VLAN tags to the same S-VLAN tag. For example, the data frames whose C-VLAN IDs are 1, 2, and 3 can be added with the same S-VLAN tag whose ID is 100. l The same C-aware port supports the mapping of different C-VLAN tags to different S-VLAN tags. For example, the data frames whose C-VLAN IDs are 1, 2, and 3 can be added with the S-VLAN tags whose IDs are 100, 200, and 300 respectively. l The same C-aware port does not support the mapping of the same C-VLAN tag to different S-VLAN tags at the same time. For example, the data frame whose C-VLAN ID is 1 cannot be added with the S-VLAN tags whose IDs are 100, 200, and 300 at the same time.
LAN Services That Enter and Exit the S-Aware Port

Table 14-40 lists the applications of the LAN services that enter and exit the S-aware port. Table 14-40 LAN services that enter and exit the IEEE 802.1ad bridge through the S-aware port Type of Data Frame Data frames that contain an SVLAN tagb Operation Type Mount Port Direction Ingress Description 1. The data frames that enter the bridge through the S-aware port are not filtered. 2. After the data frames enter the bridge, the data frames are forwarded in the bridge according to the S-VLAN filtering table. Egress When the data frames leave the bridge through the S-aware port, the data frames are transparently transmitted. 1. The entry filtering is performed according to the preset S-VLAN tag. The data frames that do not belong to the S-VLAN are discarded. 2. After the data frames enter the bridge, the data frames are forwarded in the bridge according to the S-VLAN filtering table. Egress When the data frames leave the bridge through the S-aware port, the data frames are transparently transmitted.
Mount Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN
Ingress
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-153

NOTE
b:
The data frame that enters the S-aware port must contain an S-VLAN tag. Otherwise, the port discards the data frame.
14.2.3 Availability
The QinQ technology is applicable to the Ethernet private line service and the Ethernet LAN service. Table 14-41 Availability of the QinQ feature Feature EVPL (QinQ) EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) Applicable Board EMS6 (all the versions) Applicable Equipment IDU 620

The QinQ technology is applied to the Ethernet line service and LAN service of the Ethernet switching board.
Relation with Other Features

QinQ is applied to the Layer 2 Switching, namely, the EVPLAN (802.1ad bridge) service.

The attributes of QinQ packets are closely related to the port attributes and service type.
Realization of QinQ in the Ethernet Line Service

This section, using the QinQ services illustrated in Figure 14-53 as an example, describes how data frames are processed on a QinQ network. Figure 14-53 EVPL (QinQ) Services
C-VLAN1
NE1
Service network A NE2 NE3 S-VLAN3 C-VLAN1 S-VLAN4 C-VLAN1 S-VLAN1 C-VLAN1 S-VLAN2 C-VLAN1 Service network B NE4 C-VLAN1
C-VLAN1 S-VLAN1 C-VLAN1 S-VLAN2 C-VLAN1
Frame of customer a Frame of customer b C-VLAN1
14-154
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
On the network, the data frames from NE1 to NE4 are processed as follows: 1. NE1 adds an S-TAG to each data frame from customer a and customer b that are connected to NE1, and forwards the frames to NE2. NE1 adds an S-VLAN1 tag to each data frame from customer a and an S-VLAN2 tag to each frame from customer b. Based on the S-VLAN tags, NE2 transparently transmits the data frames of customer a and customer b to NE3 of service provider B. Because service provider B plans different S-VLAN tags for customer a and customer b, NE3 translates the data frame that contains an S-VLAN1 tag into a data frame that contains an S-VLAN3 tag, translates the data frame that contains an S-VLAN2 tag into a data frame that contains an S-VLAN4 tag, and forwards the data frames to NE4. NE4 removes the S-VLAN3 tag and S-VLAN4 tag, and forwards the data frames to the Ethernet ports of customer a and customer b.
2. 3.
4.
The data frame process from NE4 to NE1 is reverse to the preceding process.
Realization of QinQ in the Ethernet LAN Service

This section, using the EVPLAN (802.1ad bridge) service illustrated in Figure 14-54 as an example, describes how data frames are processed on the 802.1ad bridge. Figure 14-54 Example of the EVPLAN (802.1ad bridge) service
NE1 VoIP NE3
PORT1 VCTRUNK1
Node B1
PORT1
Service C-VLAN 10 VoIP 20 HSI
HSI
PORT2
NE2
VCTRUNK2
Node B2
PORT1
Service C-VLAN VoIP 30 HSI 40

NE1 PORT1 Node B1
NE3:EMS6 S-VLAN 100 PORT1 VoIP S-VLAN 200 PORT2 HSI VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
NE2 PORT1
Node B2
802.1ad bridge PORT Strip S-VLAN Label C-VLAN(10/30) Data(VoIP) C-VLAN(20/40) Data(HSI) Add S-VLAN Label S-VLAN(100) S-VLAN(200) C-VLAN(10/30) Data(VoIP) C-VLAN(20/40) Data(HSI) VCTRUNK Strip S-VLAN Label C-VLAN(10/30) Data(VoIP) C-VLAN(20/40) Data(HSI)
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-155
As shown in Figure 14-54, the transmission network needs to carry the voice over IP (VoIP) service and the high speed Internet (HSI) service. The VoIP service and the HSI service of Node B1 and Node B2 that are connected to NE1 and NE2 respectively use different C-VLANs that have been planned. To mark and schedule the VoIP service and the HSI service in a unified manner on the aggregation node NE3, on the transmission network the planned S-VLAN tags are added to the two types of services from the user side. On the network, NE3 processes the data frames as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. The VoIP service and the HSI service of Node B1 and Node B2 are transparently transmitted to NE3 through NE1 and NE2 respectively. NE3 adds S-VLAN tag 100 to the VoIP service of Node B1, Node B2, and VoIP server (with the C-VLANs 10 and 30). NE3 adds S-VLAN tag 200 to the HSI service of Node B1, Node B2, and HSI server (with the C-VLANs 20 and 40). After these data frames carrying the S-VLAN tag enter the 802.1ad bridge, the Layer 2 switching is performed according to the Ethernet port specified in the S-VLAN filtering table. When the data frames carrying the S-VLAN tag leave the bridge from the corresponding port due to being forwarded, the S-VLAN tag is removed.

Plan related parameters according to the specific application of the QinQ feature. 14.2.6.1 EVPL Services Based on QinQ Plan related parameters according to the specific application of the QinQ technology in the EVPL service. 14.2.6.2 EVPLAN Services Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge Plan related parameters according to the application of the QinQ technology in the LAN services.
14.2.6.1 EVPL Services Based on QinQ

Plan related parameters according to the specific application of the QinQ technology in the EVPL service.
Prerequisite
You must have understood the specific applications of the QinQ feature.
Procedure
Step 1 Plan the network attributes of the ports according to the actual requirements. Adhere to the following principles when planning the network attributes of the ports: l If packets need to be forwarded according to C-VLAN tags or C-VLAN tags need to be translated, select the line services between C-aware ports. l If S-VLAN tags need to be added/stripped, select the line services between a C-aware port and an S-aware port. l If packets need to be forwarded according to S-VLAN tags or S-VLAN tags need to be translated, select the line services between S-aware ports.
Step 2 Select a QinQ operation type according to the actual requirements. Adhere to the following principles when planning the QinQ operation type: l Check whether operations are based on ports, based on ports + C-VLAN, or based on ports + S-VLAN. l Check whether unidirectional operations or bidirectional operations are required. Step 3 Allocate S-VLAN tags for customers. Adhere to the following principles when planning S-VLAN tags: l The S-VLAN tag allocated to each customer must be unique. l If a customer requires multiple S-VLAN tags, allocate a section of consecutive S-VLAN tags to the customer. For example, allocate 100-109 to customer a and 110-119 to customer b. ----End
Example
The following describes how to plan QinQ line services. The QinQ services illustrated in Figure 14-53 are provided as an example. The ports used in this example are shown in Figure 14-55. Figure 14-55 Ports used by the QinQ line services
PORT1
NE1
Service network A NE2 NE3 Service network B VCTRUNK1 NE4 PORT1
PORT2
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
PORT2
1.
Plan the network attributes of the ports. In the case of NE1 and NE4, plan the network attribute of the related PORTs as C-Aware and the network attribute of the related VCTRUNKs as S-Aware because NE1 and NE4 need to add/remove S-VLAN tags. In the case of NE2 and NE3, plan the network attribute of the related VCTRUNKs as SAware because NE2 and NE3 need to forward packets according to S-VLAN tags.
2.
Plan QinQ operation types. In the case of NE1 and NE4, select the bidirectional "Add S-VLAN" operation because NE1 and NE4 can forward all the packets based on ports and do not need to recognize the packet type. In the case of NE2, select the bidirectional "Transparently transmit S-VLAN" operation because NE2 needs to transparently transmit packets according to S-VLAN tags.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-157
In the case of NE3, select the bidirectional "Translate S-VLAN" operation because NE3 needs to translate S-VLAN tags according to S-VLAN tags and does not translate S-VLAN tags based on ports. 3. Plan S-VLAN tags. Plan S-VLAN tags on an overall basis. The S-VLAN tags allocated to customer a and customer b by service provider A are 100 and 110 respectively, and the S-VLAN tags allocated to customer a and customer b by service provider B are 200 and 210 respectively.
14.2.6.2 EVPLAN Services Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge

Plan related parameters according to the application of the QinQ technology in the LAN services.
Prerequisite
You must be familiar with the specific application of the QinQ feature.
Procedure
Step 1 Plan the network attributes of the ports that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1ad bridge according to the actual requirements. Adhere to the following principles when planning the network attributes of the ports: l If the packets that enter the port do not contain a VLAN tag or contain a C-VLAN tag, plan the network attribute of the port as C-Aware. l If the packets that enter the port contain an S-VLAN tag, plan the network attribute of the port as S-Aware. Step 2 Select a QinQ operation type according to the actual requirements. Adhere to the following principles when planning the QinQ operation type: l In the case of the C-aware port, select "Add S-VLAN Base for Port" or "Add S-VLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN". For details, refer to Table 14-39. l In the case of the S-aware port, select "Mount Port" or "Mount Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN". For details, refer to Table 14-40. Step 3 Allocate S-VLAN tags to customers or service types. Adhere to the following principles when planning S-VLAN tags: l The S-VLAN tag allocated to each customer or each service type must be unique. l If a customer or service type requires multiple S-VLAN tags, allocate a section of consecutive S-VLAN tags to the customer or service type. For example, allocate S-VLAN tags 100-109 to customer A or service type A (for example, VoIP services), and allocate S-VLAN tags 110-119 to customer B or service type B (for example, HSI services). ----End
Example
This topic considers the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) that are illustrated in Figure 14-54 as an example to describe the planning method.
1.
Plan the network attributes of the ports. Plan the network attributes of PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 as CAware because NE3 needs to add and strip S-VLAN tags. Plan the network attributes of the related PORTs as UNI because NE2 and NE3 need to transparently transmit the services.
2.
Plan QinQ operation types. Planning NE3 is more complicated than planning NE1 and NE2. Port PORT1 PORT2 VCTRUNK1 Accessed Service VoIP services HSI services VoIP services of node B1 (CVLAN 10) HSI services of node B1 (CVLAN 20) VCTRUNK2 VoIP services of node B2 (CVLAN 30) HSI services of node B2 (CVLAN 40) Add S-VLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN Planned Operation Type Add S-VLAN Base for Port Add S-VLAN Base for Port Add S-VLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN
In the case of NE1 and NE2, you need not plan QinQ operation types because NE1 and NE2 transparently transmit the Ethernet services. 3. Plan S-VLAN tags. Plan S-VLAN tags on an overall basis. The S-VLAN tag allocated to the VoIP services (CVLAN IDs being 10 and 30) is 100 and the S-VLAN tag allocated to the HSI services (CVLAN IDs being 20 and 40) is 200 on the transport network side.

This topic describes the configuration flow and the corresponding configuration tasks of the QinQ line service. An example is provided as additional information to help understand the configuration. 14.2.7.1 Configuration Flow (EVPL Services Based on QinQ) This topic describes the configuration flow of the EVPL service that is based on QinQ. 14.2.7.2 Configuration Flow (EVPLAN Services Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge) This topic describes the configuration flow of the EVPLAN service that is based on the 802.1ad bridge. 14.2.7.3 Modifying the Type Field of QinQ Frames By default, the type field (that is, the TPID in an S-TAG) of QinQ frames processed by Ethernet switching boards is set to "0x8100". 14.2.7.4 Creating QinQ Line Services To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit QinQ line services, perform this task to configure the related information such as service source and service sink.
14.2.7.5 Creating the EVPLAN Services That Are Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge, you need to create the bridge, set the attributes of the bridge, select the ports that are mounted to the bridge, and select the operation type.
14.2.7.1 Configuration Flow (EVPL Services Based on QinQ)

This topic describes the configuration flow of the EVPL service that is based on QinQ. Figure 14-56 Configuration flow for the QinQ line service
Start
Is the type field of QinQ frames processed by the interconnected equipment set to "0x8100"? No Modify the type field of QinQ frames
Yes
Configure the external port of the Ethernet board
Configure the internal port of the Ethernet board
4 Create QinQ line services 5
Create cross-connections for Ethernet services
End
Table 14-42 Description of the configuration flow of the QinQ line service Number 1 Description For the configuration flow, see 14.2.7.3 Modifying the Type Field of QinQ Frames.
14-160
Number 2 3 4 5
Description For the configuration flow, see 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports. For the configuration flow, see 14.4.7.1 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board. For the configuration flow, see 14.2.7.4 Creating QinQ Line Services. Create the cross-connection from the paths that are bound to the VCTRUNK to the corresponding timeslots on the line.
NOTE
To configure the QoS feature for the QinQ line service, see 14.7 Configuring QoS.
14.2.7.2 Configuration Flow (EVPLAN Services Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge)
This topic describes the configuration flow of the EVPLAN service that is based on the 802.1ad bridge.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-161
Figure 14-57 Configuration flow for the EVPLAN service that is based on the 802.1ad bridge
Start
Is the type field of QinQ frames processed by the interconnected equipment set to "0x8100"? No 1 Modify the type field of QinQ frames
Yes
2 Configure the external port of the Ethernet board 3 Configure the internal port of the Ethernet board 4 Create the EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridge 5 Create the VLAN filter table 6 Modify the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port mounted to a bridge 7
Create cross-connections for Ethernet services
End
Table 14-43 Description of the configuration flow of the EVPLAN service that is based on the 802.1ad bridge Number 1 Description For the configuration process, see 14.2.7.3 Modifying the Type Field of QinQ Frames.
14-162
Number 2 3 4 5 6
Description For the configuration process, see 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports. For the configuration process, see 14.4.7.1 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board. For the configuration process, see 14.2.7.5 Creating the EVPLAN Services That Are Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge. For the configuration process, see 14.1.4.5 Creating the VLAN Filter Table. For the configuration process, see 14.6.9 Modifying the Mounted Port of a Bridge. If the communication between ports needs to be isolated, you need to set the Hub/Spoke attribute to "Spoke". In this case, Step 6 is required.
Create the cross-connection from the paths that are bound to the VCTRUNK to the corresponding timeslots on the line.
NOTE
l To configure the Layer 2 switching feature for the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge, see 14.6 Configuring Layer 2 Switching. l To configure the QoS feature for the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge, see 14.7 Configuring QoS.
14.2.7.3 Modifying the Type Field of QinQ Frames

Prerequisite
Precautions
Procedure
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-163
Parameters
14.2.7.4 Creating QinQ Line Services

To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit QinQ line services, perform this task to configure the related information such as service source and service sink.
Prerequisite
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select Display QinQ Shared Service. Step 3 Click New. The system displays the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box. Step 4 Set the attributes of the Ethernet line service.
14-164
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
The result of configuring the port attributes during the Ethernet line service configuration process is the same as the result of directly configuring the Ethernet service port attributes.
Parameters
Parameter Service Type Value Range EPL, EVPL(QinQ) Default Value EPL Description When creating the QinQ line service, set this parameter to EVPL(QinQ).
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-165
Parameter Direction
Value Range Unidirectional, Bidirectional
Default Value Bidirectional
Description l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, only the service from the service source to the service sink is created. l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, both the service from the service source to the service sink and the service from the service sink to the service source are created. l Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Operation Type
Transparently transmit C-VLAN, Translate C-VLAN, Add S-VLAN, Transparently transmit S-VLAN, Translate S-VLAN, Strip S-VLAN (only for unidirectional services) A specific PORT or VCTRUNK
Add S-VLAN
l For the meanings of the values, see 14.2.2.3 Application of the QinQ Technology in Line Services. l Set this parameter according to actual situations.
Source Port
PORT1
l This parameter indicates the port where the service source resides. l When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific PORT as the source port.
Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
1 to 4095
l You can set this parameter to null, a number, or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of C-VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of C-VLANs set in Sink CVLAN (e.g. 1,3-6). l When you set this parameter to null, all the services of the source port work as the service source. l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the source port whose C-VLAN IDs are included in the set value range of this parameter work as the service source.
14-166
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Source S-VLAN
Default Value -
Description l This parameter must be set to a numerical value. l Only the services of the source port whose S-VLAN IDs are equal to the value of this parameter work as the service source.
Sink Port
PORT1
l This parameter indicates the port where the service sink resides. l Do not set the value of this parameter to the same as the value of Source Port. l When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use a specific VCTRUNK as the sink port.
Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
1 to 4095
l You can set this parameter to null, a number, or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of VLANs set in Source CVLAN (e.g. 1,3-6). l When you set this parameter to null, all the services of the sink port work as the service sink. l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the sink port whose C-VLAN IDs are included in the set value range of this parameter work as the service sink.
Sink S-VLAN
1 to 4095
l This parameter must be set to a numerical value. l Only the services of the sink port whose S-VLAN IDs are equal to the value of this parameter work as the service sink.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-167
Parameter C-VLAN Priority
Value Range AUTO, Priority0Priority7
Default Value AUTO
Description l This parameter specifies the priority of the newly added C-VLAN tag. l When this parameter is set to AUTO, the priority of the C-VLAN tag is 0. l When QoS operations do not need to be performed according to the C-VLAN priority, it is recommended that you use the default value.
S-VLAN Priority
AUTO
l This parameter is valid only when Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN. l This parameter specifies the priority of the newly added S-VLAN tag. l When this parameter is set to AUTO, the priority of the S-VLAN tag is 0. l When QoS operations do not need to be performed according to the S-VLAN priority, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Port Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
When the source port or the sink port is set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to Enabled.
14.2.7.5 Creating the EVPLAN Services That Are Based on the IEEE 802.1ad Bridge
To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge, you need to create the bridge, set the attributes of the bridge, select the ports that are mounted to the bridge, and select the operation type.
Prerequisite
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the attributes of the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
Step 4 Configure service mounting relations. 1. 2. 3. Click Configure Mount. Set the parameters for configuring mounted services. Click Add Mount Port.
4. 5.
Repeat Step 4.2 to Step 4.3 to add the other mount ports. Click OK.
Step 5 Optional: If any VCTRUNK is mounted to the VB, configure the VC paths that are bound to the VCTRUNK. 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Configuration. The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. Select the required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click . 5. Optional: Repeat Step 5.4 to bind other VC paths.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-169
NOTE
The result of setting the port attributes during the configuration of the private network service is consistent with the result of directly setting the attributes of the Ethernet service port.
6.
Click OK.
----End
Parameters
Parameter VB Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter is a string that describes the bridge. It is recommended that you set this string to a value that contains the specific purpose of the bridge. l In this example, the IEEE 802.1d bridge and IEEE 802.1q bridge need not be created. Hence, do not set VB Type to 802.1d or 802.1q. l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. When the bridge uses the IVL mode, all the VLANs correspond to their respective MAC address tables. l If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN tag is checked at the ingress port. If the VLAN ID is not equal to the VLAN ID of the port defined in the VLAN filtering table, the packet is discarded. If the ingress filter is disabled, the preceding described check is not conducted.
VB Type
802.1q, 802.1d, 802.1ad
802.1q
Bridge Switch Mode
IVL/Ingress Filter Enable SVL/Ingress Filter Disable
IVL/Ingress Filter Enable
Parameter Operation Type
Value Range Add S-VLAN Base for Port Add S-VLAN Base for Port and CVLAN Mount Port Mount Port and Base for Port and SVLAN
Default Value Add S-VLAN Base for Port
Description For the meaning of each operation type, see 14.2.2.4 Application of the QinQ Technology in LAN Services.
VB Port Mount Port
This parameter specifies the ID of the logical port of the bridge. Select the external physical port or internal VCTRUNK port of the Ethernet switching board that is mounted to the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. This parameter is valid only when Operation Type is set to Add S-VLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN. This parameter specifies the mapping relation between the C-VLAN tag carried by the data frame and the S-VLAN tag to be added.
C-VLAN
1-4095
S-VLAN
1-4095
l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port, this parameter specifies that the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge need to be added with the S-VLAN tag. l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN, this parameter and C-VLAN specify the mapping relation between the S-VLAN tag to be added and the C-VLAN tag carried by the data frame that enters the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port, this parameter is invalid. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN, this parameter specifies the S-VLAN tag to be carried by the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
Configurable Ports
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-171
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Adhere to the following principles when planning and setting this parameter: l The capacity of VCTRUNKs should be determined by the actual bandwidth of the service needs. l Bind only the paths in a VC-4 if possible. If the paths of several VC-4s need to be bound, the VC-4s that have the same transmission path take priority. l Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can have only VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths. Hence, when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths, select VC-3 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-3 paths are already bound; when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-12 paths, select VC-12 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-12 paths are already bound. l The VC-4-1s of the EMS6 board support only VC-3 paths, whereas the VC-4-2s of the EMS6 board support both VC-12 paths and VC-3 paths. Hence, give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1 if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths. l Generally, bidirectional paths are bound.
14.3 Configuring Features of Ethernet Ports

To effectively work with the data communication equipment at the client side, the Ethernet port supports the auto-negotiation function, Jumbo frames, and flow control function. 14.3.1 Feature Description When the external port (namely, PORT) of the Ethernet service board is interconnected with the data communication equipment on the client side, you need to set the major attributes of the external port so that the Ethernet services on the client side can be accessed normally. 14.3.2 Basic Concepts This topic describes the basic concepts that you need to be familiar with before you use the Ethernet port feature. 14.3.3 Availability The Ethernet port feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 14.3.4 Relation with Other Features The auto-negotiation function, Jumbo frames, and flow control function do not affect other features.
14.3.5 Realization Principle The auto-negotiation function and the flow control function comply with IEEE 802.3. 14.3.6 Planning Guide Before you plan Ethernet port features, obtain the information of the client-side equipment. 14.3.7 Configuration Guide This topic describes the configuration tasks relevant to the Ethernet port feature.

When the external port (namely, PORT) of the Ethernet service board is interconnected with the data communication equipment on the client side, you need to set the major attributes of the external port so that the Ethernet services on the client side can be accessed normally. The external port of the Ethernet service board is the external physical interface and is also called the user-side interface. The external port is used to access the Ethernet services on the user side. The features relevant to the external port of the Ethernet service board include the autonegotiation, Jumbo frame, and flow control.
Auto-Negotiation Function
The auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information of its supported working mode to the opposite end on the network and to receive the corresponding information that the opposite end may transfer. The external port of the Ethernet service board and the data communication equipment at the opposite end must work in the same duplex mode and operate at the same rate. If the working modes at the two ends do not match, the transmission efficiency is reduced and the data may even be lost.
Jumbo Frames
An Ethernet frame requires that the maximum size of the payload must not exceed 1500 bytes. This requirement severely affects the transmission efficiency of certain high-speed data services. To improve the transmission efficiency, the Jumbo frame technology is developed. A Jumbo frame adopts the structure of an ordinary Ethernet frame but does not have a requirement for the maximum size of the payload. To differentiate a Jumbo frame from an ordinary Ethernet frame, we define the type field of a Jumbo frame as "0x8870".
Flow Control Function

When the data processing/transferring capability of the equipment fails to handle the flow received at the port, congestion occurs on the line. To reduce the number of discarded packets due to buffer overflow, proper flow control measures must be taken.

This topic describes the basic concepts that you need to be familiar with before you use the Ethernet port feature. 14.3.2.1 Auto-Negotiation Function
The auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information of its supported working mode to the opposite end on the network and to receive the corresponding information that the opposite end may transfer. 14.3.2.2 Jumbo Frames The maximum length of the payload of an Ethernet frame must not exceed 1500 bytes. This requirement greatly affects the transmission efficiency of certain high-speed data services. To improve the transmission efficiency, the Jumbo frame technology emerged. 14.3.2.3 Flow Control Function When the equipment fails to handle the flow received at the port due to poor data processing/ transferring capability, congestion occurs on the line. To reduce the number of discarded packets caused by buffer overflow, proper flow control measures must be taken.
14.3.2.1 Auto-Negotiation Function

The auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information of its supported working mode to the opposite end on the network and to receive the corresponding information that the opposite end may transfer.
NOTE
The following sections describe the basic concepts related to the auto-negotiation function, including all the working modes. The working mode supported by each Ethernet port of the equipment may be different. For details, refer to 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports.
Auto-Negotiation Function of FE Electrical Ports

In the case of FE electrical ports, there are four common working modes: 10M half-duplex, 10M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and 100M full-duplex. If the working mode of an Ethernet port does not match that of its opposite port, the two ports cannot communicate. With the autonegotiation function, however, the two ports can communicate with each other. The autonegotiation function uses fast link pulses and normal link pulses to transfer the negotiation information of the working mode to enable the working mode of the local Ethernet port to match the working mode of the opposite end. Table 14-44 lists the auto-negotiation rules of FE electrical ports. Table 14-44 Auto-negotiation rules of FE electrical ports (when the local port adopts the autonegotiation mode) Working Mode of the Opposite Port Auto-negotiation 10M half-duplex 10M full-duplex 100M half-duplex 100M full-duplex Auto-Negotiation Result 100M full-duplex 10M half-duplex 10M half-duplex 100M half-duplex 100M half-duplex
14-174
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
From Table 14-44, it is evident that when the working mode of the opposite equipment is 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex, the auto-negotiation result cannot realize the matching between the working modes of both sides. As a result, certain packets are lost. Hence, when the working mode of the opposite equipment is 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex, set the working mode of the local equipment to 10M full-duplex or 100M fullduplex.
When the FE electrical ports on both sides are working in the auto-negotiation mode, the equipment on both sides can negotiate the flow control function through the auto-negotiation function.
Auto-Negotiation Function of GE Electrical Ports

In the case of GE electrical ports, there are five working modes: 10M half-duplex, 10M fullduplex, 100M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and 1000M full-duplex. The auto-negotiation function of GE electrical ports is similar to the auto-negotiation function of FE electrical ports. Table 14-45 lists the auto-negotiation rules of GE electrical ports.
Table 14-45 Auto-negotiation rules of GE electrical ports (when the local port adopts the autonegotiation mode) Working Mode of the Opposite Port Auto-negotiation (GE electrical port) Auto-negotiation (FE electrical port) 10M half-duplex 10M full-duplex 100M half-duplex 100M full-duplex 1000M full-duplex Auto-Negotiation Result 1000M full-duplex 100M full-duplex 10M half-duplex 10M half-duplex 100M half-duplex 100M half-duplex 1000M full-duplex
From Table 14-45, it is evident that when the working mode of the opposite equipment is 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex, the auto-negotiation result cannot realize the matching between the working modes of both sides. As a result, certain packets are lost. Hence, when the working mode of the opposite equipment is 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex, set the working mode of the local equipment to 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex. When the GE electrical ports on both sides are working in the auto-negotiation mode, the equipment on both sides can negotiate the flow control function through the auto-negotiation function.
Auto-Negotiation Function of GE Optical Ports

GE optical ports support only the 1000M full-duplex working mode. The auto-negotiation function of GE optical ports is used only for negotiating the flow control function.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-175

NOTE
If the GE optical port of the equipment on one side works in the 1000M full-duplex mode and the GE optical port of the equipment on the other side works in the auto-negotiation mode, a link error occurs due to an autonegotiation failure, and as a result, a LINK_ERR alarm is generated.
14.3.2.2 Jumbo Frames

The maximum length of the payload of an Ethernet frame must not exceed 1500 bytes. This requirement greatly affects the transmission efficiency of certain high-speed data services. To improve the transmission efficiency, the Jumbo frame technology emerged. A Jumbo frame adopts the structure of a common Ethernet frame but does not have the requirement for the maximum length of the payload. Furthermore, the type field of the Jumbo frame is defined as 0x8870 to differentiate a Jumbo frame from a common Ethernet frame. Both the EFT4 and EMS6 boards can receive and transmit the Jumbo frame whose length does not exceed 9600 bytes; however, the ways for these two boards to process the Jumbo frame are different. l The Ethernet port of the EFT4 board checks the type field in an Ethernet frame to determine whether the Ethernet frame is a Jumbo frame. If the Ethernet frame is a Jumbo frame, the maximum frame length is not restricted. The Ethernet port of the EMS6 board checks whether an Ethernet frame whose length exceeds 1536 bytes is a Jumbo frame. All the frames are restricted by the maximum frame length. VCTRUNKs 1-4 of the EFT4 board and VCTRUNKs 5-8 of the EMS6 board check whether an Ethernet frame is a Jumbo frame. If an Ethernet frame is not a Jumbo frame but its length exceeds the maximum frame length, the board discards the frame. VCTRUNKs 1-4 of the EMS6 board do not check Jumbo frames. The EMS6 board discards any frame whose length exceeds the maximum frame length. The maximum frame length (namely, the MTU), is a parameter of the Ethernet port. In the case of common Ethernet frames, the Ethernet service board discards the frame whose length exceeds the value of this parameter.
The default type field of a Jumbo frame is "0x8870".
14.3.2.3 Flow Control Function

When the equipment fails to handle the flow received at the port due to poor data processing/ transferring capability, congestion occurs on the line. To reduce the number of discarded packets caused by buffer overflow, proper flow control measures must be taken. The half-duplex Ethernet uses back pressure to control flow. The full-duplex Ethernet uses PAUSE frames to control flow. Currently, because the half-duplex Ethernet is seldom applied, the flow control function realized by the equipment is developed for only the full-duplex Ethernet. The full-duplex Ethernet flow control function realized by the equipment is classified into two types: auto-negotiation flow control and non-auto-negotiation flow control.
NOTE
The following sections describe the basic concepts related to the flow control function, including all the flow control modes. The flow control mode supported by each Ethernet port of the equipment may be different. For details, refer to 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports.
14-176
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Auto-Negotiation Flow Control

When the Ethernet port is working in the auto-negotiation mode, you can adopt the autonegotiation flow control function. The auto-negotiation flow control mode includes the following: l Asymmetric PAUSE toward the link partner In the case of congestion, the port can send PAUSE frames but cannot process received PAUSE frames. l l Symmetric PAUSE The port can send and process PAUSE frames. Both asymmetric and symmetric PAUSE The port has the following three capabilities: Sends and processes PAUSE frames. Sends but does not process PAUSE frames. Processes but does not send PAUSE frames. l Disabled The port does not send or process PAUSE frames.
Non-Auto-Negotiation Flow Control

When the Ethernet port is working in a fixed working mode, you can adopt the non-autonegotiation flow control function. The non-auto-negotiation flow control modes includes the following: l Send only In case of congestion, the port can send PAUSE frames but cannot process received PAUSE frames. l Receive only In case of congestion, the port can process received PAUSE frames but cannot send PAUSE frames. l l Send and receive The port can send PAUSE frames and can also process received PAUSE frames. Disabled The port does not send or process PAUSE frames.
14.3.3 Availability
The Ethernet port feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 14-46 Availability of the Ethernet port feature Feature Auto-negotiation Applicable Board EFT4 (all the versions) EMS6 (all the versions) Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Applicable Equipment IDU 610/620 IDU 620 IDU 605 1F/2F

14-177
Feature
Applicable Board IFH2 (all the versions)
Applicable Equipment IDU 620 IDU 610/620 IDU 620 IDU 610/620 IDU 620 IDU 605 1F/2F IDU 620
Jumbo frame
EFT4 (all the versions) EMS6 (all the versions)
Flow control
EFT4 (all the versions) EMS6 (all the versions) IFH2 (all the versions)

The auto-negotiation function, Jumbo frames, and flow control function do not affect other features.

The auto-negotiation function and the flow control function comply with IEEE 802.3. 14.3.5.1 Auto-Negotiation Function The auto-negotiation function uses fast link pulses and normal link pulses to transfer information of the working mode in such a manner that no packet or upper layer protocol overhead is added. 14.3.5.2 Flow Control Function The Ethernet board adopts PAUSE frames to realize the flow control function.
14.3.5.1 Auto-Negotiation Function

The auto-negotiation function uses fast link pulses and normal link pulses to transfer information of the working mode in such a manner that no packet or upper layer protocol overhead is added.
NOTE
The following describes the realization principle of the auto-negotiation function. The auto-negotiation function of FE electrical ports is provided as an example.
The fast link pulse (FLP) is called the 10BASE-T link integrity test pulse sequence. Each device must be capable of issuing FLP bursts at power up, on command from management, or due to user interaction. The FLP burst consists of a series of link integrity test pulses that form an alternating clock/data sequence. Extraction of the data bits from the FLP burst yields a link code word that identifies the working modes supported by the remote device, as well as certain information used for the handshake mechanism of the auto-negotiation function. To maintain interoperability with existing 10BASE-T devices, the auto-negotiation function also supports the reception of 10BASE-T compliant link integrity test pulses. 10BASE-T link pulse activity is referred to as the normal link pulse (NLP) sequence. A device that fails to respond to the FLP burst sequence by returning only the NLP sequence is treated as a 10BASE-T compatible device. The first pulse in an FLP burst is defined as a clock pulse. Clock pulses within an FLP burst are spaced at 125 us. Data pulses occur in the middle of two adjacent clock pulses. The presence of
a positive pulse represents a logic one and the absence of a pulse represents a logic zero. An FLP burst consists of 17 clock pulses and 16 data pulses (if all data bits are 1). The NLP waveform is simpler than the FLP waveform. The NLP sends a positive pulse every 16 ms when no data frame needs to be transmitted. Figure 14-58 Waveform of a single FLP
Clock pulses T2 T3 T1
First bit on wire Data Encoding 1 D 0 T1: 100 ns 1 D 1 0 D 2 T2: 62.5 us 1 D 3 T3: 125 us
Figure 14-59 Consecutive FLP bursts and NLPs

T5 T4
FLP bursts
NLPs T4: 2 ms T5: 16 ms
14.3.5.2 Flow Control Function

The Ethernet board adopts PAUSE frames to realize the flow control function. The realization principle of the flow control function is as follows: 1. When congestion occurs in the receive queue of an Ethernet port (the data in the receive buffer exceeding a certain threshold) and the port is capable of sending PAUSE frames, the port sends a PAUSE frame to the opposite end. The pause-time value in the frame is N (0<N65535). After receiving the PAUSE frame, and being capable of processing PAUSE frames, the Ethernet port at the opposite end stops sending data within a specified period of time N (whose unit is the time needed for sending 521 bits).
2.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3.
If the congestion at the receive port is cleared (the data in the receive buffer is below a certain threshold) but the pause-time does not end, the port sends a PAUSE frame whose pause-time is 0 to notify the opposite end to start sending data.
IEEE 802.3 defines the format of the PAUSE frame as follows: l l l l l Destination address: 01-80-C2-00-00-01 (multicast address) Source address: MAC address of the source port Type/Length: 88-08 (MAC control frame) MAC control opcode: 00-01 (PAUSE frame) MAC control parameter: pause-time (two bytes)
Figure 14-60 Structure of the PAUSE frame

Destination address Source address Type/Length MAC control opcode MAC control parameter (pause-time) 01-80-C2-00-00-01 XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX 88-08 00-01 XX-XX Reserved 6 octets 6 octets 2 octets 2 octets 2 octets

Before you plan Ethernet port features, obtain the information of the client-side equipment.
Procedure
Step 1 Plan the working mode of the Ethernet port. Ensure that the working modes of the Ethernet ports at the two ends should be the same. Step 2 Plan the parameter MTU. In the case of the EFT4 board, adhere to the following principles when planning the MTU of the Ethernet port: l The MTU must be greater than the length of the maximum frame among all the L2 data frames that are to be transmitted. l The value of the MTU ranges from 1518 to 1535 bytes. l The default value of the MTU is 1522 bytes, which is the sum of the length of the maximum basic frame and the length of the VLAN label. l The MTU is invalid for the Jumbo frame.
In the case of the EMS6 board, adhere to the following principles when planning the MTU of the Ethernet port: l The MTU should be greater than the length of the maximum frame among all L2 data frames to be transmitted. l The value of the MTU ranges from 1518 to 9600 bytes. l The default value of the MTU is 1522 bytes, which is the sum of the length of the maximum basic frame and the length of the VLAN label. l The MTU parameter restricts the maximum length of a Jumbo frame. Step 3 Plan the flow control parameters for the Ethernet port. Adhere to the following principles when planning the flow control parameters for the Ethernet port: l The flow control parameters are valid only for the full-duplex Ethernet. l The flow control parameters are valid only for the Ethernet transparent transmission service. l When the Ethernet port works in the auto-negotiation mode, use the auto-negotiation flow control parameter. l When the Ethernet port works in a fixed working mode, use the non-auto-negotiation flow control parameter. l The flow control parameters at both sides must match each other. The flow control function must not be enabled at one side and disabled at the other side. l It is recommended that you enable the flow control function for the Ethernet board and for the opposite equipment on the network with flow bursts. ----End

This topic describes the configuration tasks relevant to the Ethernet port feature. 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports When an NE uses the external ports (that is, PORTs) of the Ethernet boards to access Ethernet services, the attributes of the external ports need to be configured so that the external ports can work with the data communication equipment on the client side to provide the normal access to the Ethernet services. 14.3.7.2 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames By default, the type field of Jumbo frames processed by Ethernet boards is set to "0x8700".
14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports

When an NE uses the external ports (that is, PORTs) of the Ethernet boards to access Ethernet services, the attributes of the external ports need to be configured so that the external ports can work with the data communication equipment on the client side to provide the normal access to the Ethernet services.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet board must be included in the NE Panel.
Precautions
l The IDU 610 supports the Ethernet board EFT4. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet boards EFT4 and EMS6. Ethernet ports FE1-FE4 of an EFT4 board correspond to PORT1-PORT4 respectively. The EFT4 board does not support the setting of TAG attributes, network attributes, and advanced attributes. Ethernet ports FE1-FE4 of an EMS6 board correspond to PORT1-PORT4 respectively. Ports GE1 and GE2 of an EMS6 board correspond to PORT5 and PORT6 respectively. l The IDU 605 IF/2F supports the Ethernet board EMS4 (a logical board). Ethernet ports FE1-FE3 of an EMS4 board (a logical board) correspond to PORT1PORT3 respectively. Port FE4/GE1 of an EMS4 board corresponds to PORT4. Ethernet ports FE1-FE2 of an EM4T board correspond to PORT1-PORT2 respectively. Ports GE1 and GE2 of an EM4T board corresponds to PORT3 and PORT4 respectively. l The following procedures describe how to configure the external port of an EMS6 board. The EFT4 board does not support the configuration of the TAG attributes, network attributes, and advanced attributes. The Hybrid IF board (IFH2) provides the GE port for accessing Ethernet services and it supports certain Ethernet service access functions. The procedure for configuring the Ethernet port of the IFH2 board is similar to the procedure for configuring the external Ethernet port. The IFH2 board, however, supports the configuration of only the basic attributes and flow control function.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port.
NOTE
If you need to configure the attributes of the Ethernet port on the IFH2 board, select the IFH2 board in the NE Explorer.
Step 2 Set the basic attributes of the port. 1. 2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set the basic attributes of the port.
3. 1. 2.
Click Apply. Click the Flow Control tab. Set the flow control mode of the port.
Step 3 Set the flow control mode of the port.
14-182
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3. 1. 2.
Click Apply. Click the TAG Attributes tab. Set the TAG attributes of the port.
Step 4 Optional: Set the TAG attributes of the port.
3. 1. 2.
3. 1. 2.
Click Apply. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Set the advanced attributes of the port.
Step 6 Optional: Set the advanced attributes of the port.
3.
Click Apply.
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-183
Parameters
Parameter Enabled/Disabled Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled Description l In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled. In the case of other ports, set this parameter to Disabled. l If this parameter is set to Enabled for the port that does not access services, an ETH_LOS alarm may be generated. Working Mode 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation (EFT4) 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M FullDuplex, AutoNegotiation (EMS6) Auto-Negotiation, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex (IFH2) 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation (a logical board EMS4, PORT1-PORT3) 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M FullDuplex, AutoNegotiation (a logical board EMS4, PORT4) Auto-Negotiation l The Ethernet ports of different types support different working modes. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in the auto-negotiation mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to Auto-Negotiation. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in the full-duplex mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, or 1000M Full-Duplex depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in the half-duplex mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Half-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, or Auto-Negotiation depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l The GE optical interface on the EMS6 board supports the 1000M full-duplex mode only.
14-184
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Maximum Frame Length
Value Range 1518-1535 (EFT4) 1518-9600 (EMS6) 1522/1632 (a logical board EMS4)
Default Value 1522
Description The value of this parameter should be greater than the maximum length of a frame among all the data frames to be transported. In the case of the EFT4 board, this parameter is invalid for Jumbo frames. In the case of the EMS6 board, this parameter has a restriction on Jumbo frames. If Jumbo frames are not considered and the accessed services are ordinary Ethernet frames that use VLAN tags or do not have VLAN tags, it is recommended that you use the default value. If the access services include services that use double tags such as QinQ services, it is recommended that you set this parameter to 1526. In the case of the IDU 605 1F/2F, set Maximum Frame Length of all the ports on the logical EMS4 board to the same value.
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback
l When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet frame signals that are to be sent to the remote end are looped back. l In normal cases, use the default value.
PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback
l When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet physical signals that are to be sent to the remote end are looped back. l In normal cases, use the default value.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-185
Parameter NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode
Value Range Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only (EFT4 and EMS6) Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control (IFH2) Disabled, Enable (a logical board EMS4)
Description l This parameter is used when Working Mode is not set to Auto-Negotiation. l When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric Flow Control, the port can send PAUSE frames and process received PAUSE frames. l When this parameter is set to Send Only, the port can send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process received PAUSE frames. l When this parameter is set to Receive Only, the port can process received PAUSE frames but cannot send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion. l When this parameter is set to Enable for the logical EMS4 board, the port can send PAUSE frames and process received PAUSE frames. l The non-autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the local side must match the non-autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side.
14-186
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Value Range Disabled, Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control (EFT4 and EMS6) Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control (IFH2) Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control (a logical board EMS4)
Description l This parameter is used when Working Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation. l When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric Flow Control, the port can send and process PAUSE frames. l When this parameter is set to Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port can send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process received PAUSE frames. l When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port can perform as follows: Sends and processes PAUSE frames. Sends but does not process PAUSE frames. Processes but does not send PAUSE frames. l The autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the local side must match the autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side.
Entry Detection
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
TAG
Tag Aware
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-187
Default Value 1
Description l This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l For using this parameter, see Table 14-47. l Set this parameter according to actual situations.
VLAN Priority
0 to 7
Port Attributes
UNI, C-Aware, SAware
UNI
l When this parameter is set to UNI, the port processes data frames according to the tag attributes. l When this parameter is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the port does not process data frames according to the tag attributes but processes the data frames according to the way of processing QinQ services. l In the case of QinQ services, set this parameter to the default value because the NE automatically sets network attributes according to the operation type that is set when the QinQ services are created.
Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to restrict the traffic of broadcast packets according to the ratio of the broadcast packets to the total packets. When a broadcast storm may occur in the equipment on the opposite side, set this parameter to Enabled. The port discards the received broadcast packets when the ratio of the received broadcast packets to the total packets exceeds the value of this parameter. The value of this parameter should be greater than the ratio of the broadcast packets to the total packets when the broadcast storm does not occur. Generally, set this parameter to 30% or a greater value.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
10% to 100%
30%
14-188
Parameter Loop Detection
Value Range Disabled, Enabled
Description Sets whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists at the port. Sets whether to enable the loop port shutdown function. After the loop port shutdown function is enabled, the port is automatically shut down when a self-loop is detected. It is recommended that this parameter adopts the default value.
Loop Port Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Enabled
Table 14-47 Methods used by ports to process data frames Direction Type of Data Frame Tagged frame Untagged frame How to Process Tag aware The port receives the frame. The port discards the frame. Access The port discards the frame. The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame, and receives the frame. The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. Hybrida The port receives the frame. The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame, and receives the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is Default VLAN ID, the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is not Default VLAN ID, the port directly transmits the frame.
Ingress
Egress
Tagged frame
The port transmits the frame.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-189

NOTE
a: When the TAG attribute of a port on the EMS4 board (a logical board) that is supported by the IDU 605 1F/2F is set to Hybrid, the packet that is forwarded by this port remains the same as the packet that enters the bridge.
14.3.7.2 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames

By default, the type field of Jumbo frames processed by Ethernet boards is set to "0x8700".
Prerequisite
Precautions
The EMS6 board supports the modification of the type field of Jumbo frames.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Jumbo Frame from the Function Tree. Step 2 Modify the type field of Jumbo frames.
Parameters
Parameter Jumbo Frame Value Range 00 00 to FF FF Default Value 88 70 Description This parameter specifies the type field of Jumbo frames. Set this parameter according to the type field of the accessed Jumbo frames.
14.4 Configuring Encapsulation and Mapping of Ethernet Services

To transparently transmit Ethernet frames through the optical transmission network and the radio transmission network, it is necessary to encapsulate the Ethernet frames and map them into VC containers at the access point.
14-190
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14.4.1 Feature Description When an NE transmits Ethernet services to a microwave transmission network through an internal port (namely, VCTRUNK) of an Ethernet service board, you need to set the attributes of the internal port so that the Ethernet service board of the local NE can work with the Ethernet service board of the NE at the opposite end to realize the transmission of the Ethernet services on the microwave transmission network. 14.4.2 Basic Concepts This topic describes the basic concepts that you need to be familiar with before you use the Ethernet service encapsulation and mapping feature. 14.4.3 Availability The Ethernet encapsulation and mapping feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 14.4.4 Relation with Other Features The Ethernet service encapsulation, virtual concatenation, and LCAS technology do not have any impact on other features. 14.4.5 Realization Principle This topic describes the realization of the encapsulation and mapping protocols of the Ethernet service, the relevant virtual concatenation, and the LCAS technology. 14.4.6 Planning Guide Before you plan the Ethernet encapsulation and mapping features, obtain the information of the opposite equipment. 14.4.7 Configuring Guide

When an NE transmits Ethernet services to a microwave transmission network through an internal port (namely, VCTRUNK) of an Ethernet service board, you need to set the attributes of the internal port so that the Ethernet service board of the local NE can work with the Ethernet service board of the NE at the opposite end to realize the transmission of the Ethernet services on the microwave transmission network. The internal port of the Ethernet service board is the internal VCTRUNK interface and is also called the system-side interface in certain scenarios. The services are encapsulated and mapped at the internal port and are transmitted to the microwave transmission network, as shown in Figure 14-61. Figure 14-61 Internal port of the Ethernet service board
External port VCTRUNK port Backplane
Interface module
Service processing module
Encapsulation/ Mapping module
Interface conversion module
Crossconnect unit Crossconnect unit
Ethernet board
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-191
The features relevant to the external port of the Ethernet service board include the encapsulation and mapping protocol, virtual concatenation, and LCAS.
Encapsulation and Mapping Protocols

The Ethernet services are a type of packet services. The SDH optical transmission network and SDH/PDH microwave, however, realize transmission of data based on time division multiplexing. Hence, the Ethernet services can be transmitted on the transmission network only after transmission tunnels are established by using the encapsulation and mapping protocols.
Virtual Concatenation
The rate of the Ethernet service does not adapt to the rate of the standard VC container. Hence, if you directly map the Ethernet service data into a standard VC container, the transmission bandwidth is wasted to a great extent. To solve the problem, use the virtual concatenation technology to concatenate many standard VC containers to a large VC container that adapts to the rate of the Ethernet service.
LCAS
The LCAS is applied on the basis of virtual concatenation and can improve the performance of virtual concatenation. The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization is improved.

This topic describes the basic concepts that you need to be familiar with before you use the Ethernet service encapsulation and mapping feature. 14.4.2.1 Encapsulation and Mapping Protocols Ethernet service is a type of packet switching service but SDH optical transmission and SDH/ PDH microwave transmission are both based on the TDMA. Therefore, tunnels must be set up for the transmission of the Ethernet service on the transmission network. 14.4.2.2 Virtual Concatenation The rate of the Ethernet service does not adapt to the rate of the standard VC container. Hence, if you directly map the Ethernet service data into a standard VC container, a large amount of transmission bandwidth is wasted. To solve this problem, use the virtual concatenation technology to concatenate many standard VC containers to a large VC container that adapts to the rate of the Ethernet service. 14.4.2.3 LCAS The link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) is applied on the basis of virtual concatenation and can improve the performance of virtual concatenation. The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping the required services, to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.
14.4.2.1 Encapsulation and Mapping Protocols

Ethernet service is a type of packet switching service but SDH optical transmission and SDH/ PDH microwave transmission are both based on the TDMA. Therefore, tunnels must be set up for the transmission of the Ethernet service on the transmission network.
HDLC
The HDLC is a general data link control procedure. When using the HDLC protocol, the system encapsulates data services into HDLC-like frames as information bits and maps the frames to SDH VC containers.
LAPS
The LAPS is also a data link control procedure. It is developed based the HDLC. The LAPS complies with ITU-T X.86.
GFP
The GFP is the most widely applied general encapsulation and mapping protocol currently. It provides a general mechanism to adapt higher-layer client signal flows into the transport network and can map the variable-length payload into the byte-synchronized transport path. Client signals can be protocol data units (PDU-oriented, such as IP/PPP and Ethernet), block-code data (blockcode-oriented, such as FC and ESCON), or common bit streams. The GPF protocol complies with ITU-T G.7041. The GFP defines the following two modes to adapt to client signals: l Frame-mapping GFP (GFP-F) The GFP-F is a PDU-oriented processing mode. It encapsulates the entire PDU into the GFP payload area and does not modify the encapsulated data. According to requirements, it determines whether to add a detection area for the payload area. l Transparent GFP (GFP-T) The GFP-T is a block-code (8B/10B code block) oriented processing mode. It extracts a single character from the received data block and maps the character into the fixed-length GFP frame. All Ethernet boards of the OptiX RTN 600 use the GFP-F mode to perform encapsulation and mapping.

The rate of the Ethernet service does not adapt to the rate of the standard VC container. Hence, if you directly map the Ethernet service data into a standard VC container, a large amount of transmission bandwidth is wasted. To solve this problem, use the virtual concatenation technology to concatenate many standard VC containers to a large VC container that adapts to the rate of the Ethernet service. The concatenation is defined in ITU-T G.707. There are two concatenation methods: contiguous concatenation and virtual concatenation. Both methods provide concatenated bandwidth of X times Container-N at the path termination. Contiguous concatenation concatenates the contiguous C-4s in the same STM-N into an entire structure to be transported. It maintains the contiguous bandwidth throughout the whole transport. Virtual concatenation concatenates many individual VC containers (VC-12 containers, VC-3 containers, or VC-4 containers) into a bit virtual structure to be transported. The virtual concatenation breaks the contiguous bandwidth into individual VCs, transports the individual VCs, and recombines these VCs to a contiguous bandwidth at the end point of the transmission.
In the case of the virtual concatenation, each VC container may be transported in different paths and there may be a transport delay difference between VC containers. Hence, there are difficulties in restoring the client signal. Virtual concatenation only requires that the path termination equipment provides the concatenation function and it can allocate bandwidth flexibly. Hence, virtual concatenation is a widely applied concatenation technology. Virtual concatenation is available in two types, virtual concatenation in a higher order path and virtual concatenation in a lower order path. A higher order virtual concatenation VC-4-Xv provides a payload area of X Container-4 (VC-4). The payload is mapped individually into X independent VC-4s. Each VC-4 has its own POH. Similarly, a lower order virtual concatenation VC-12-Xv provides a payload area of X Container-12 (VC-12). The payload is mapped individually into X independent VC-12s. Each VC-12 has its own POH, as does the virtual concatenation of VC-3s. Physical channels formed by virtual concatenation are called VCTRUNKs and are also called internal ports of the Ethernet board. The Ethernet board does not support VC-4-Xv.
14.4.2.3 LCAS
The link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) is applied on the basis of virtual concatenation and can improve the performance of virtual concatenation. The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping the required services, to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved. The LCAS technology has the following advantages: l l The LCAS can dynamically adjust (add, delete, or modify) the service bandwidth without affecting the availability of the existing service. If there are failed physical channels in virtual concatenation, the LCAS shields these physical channels. Other physical channels in virtual concatenation can transfer services. Hence, this prevents a situation where the failure of a single physical channel causes interruption of services. After the failed physical channels are restored, they can transfer services.
14.4.3 Availability
The Ethernet encapsulation and mapping feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 14-48 Availability of the Ethernet encapsulation and mapping feature Feature Mapping protocol (GFP, HDLC, and LAPS) Virtual concatenation Applicable Board EFT4 EMS6 EFT4 EMS6 LCAS EFT4 EMS6 EFP6
Applicable Equipment IDU 610/620 IDU 620 IDU 610/620 IDU 620 IDU 610/620 IDU 620

The Ethernet service encapsulation, virtual concatenation, and LCAS technology do not have any impact on other features.

This topic describes the realization of the encapsulation and mapping protocols of the Ethernet service, the relevant virtual concatenation, and the LCAS technology. 14.4.5.1 Encapsulation and Mapping The HDLC/LAPS/GFP protocol encapsulates and maps Ethernet frames as PDUs. 14.4.5.2 Virtual Concatenation The virtual concatenation is realized by using byte H4 or K4 as the virtual concatenation-specific multiframe indicator and sequence indicator. 14.4.5.3 LCAS The LCAS realizes the capacity adjustment of the virtual container by exchanging the control information between both the source and the sink side.
14.4.5.1 Encapsulation and Mapping

The HDLC/LAPS/GFP protocol encapsulates and maps Ethernet frames as PDUs. Among the HDLC, LAPS, and GFP protocols, the GFP protocol is most widely applied. Hence, this topic takes the GFP protocol as an example to describe how Ethernet frames are encapsulated and mapped.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-195
Structure of the GFP Frame

Figure 14-62 Structure of the GFP frame
Octet transmission order 1 2 3 4 5
Core header
Payload area
4-65535
n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Octet transmission order
a) Frame size and transmission order
16-bit payload length indicator c-HEC (CRC-16) Core header Payload headers (4-64 bytes) Payload area Client payload information field
Optional payload FCS (CRC-32)
b) Field constituting a GFP client frame
A GFP frame consists of a core header and a payload area. The Idle frame does not have the payload area. The GFP core header includes the following fields:
Payload length indicator (PLI) The PLI field represents the number of octets in the GFP payload area. The minimum value of the PLI field in a GFP client frame is 4 octets. PLI values 0 to 3 are reserved for GFP control frame usage.
Core HEC (cHEC) The cHEC field protects the integrity of the contents of the core header by enabling both single-bit error correction and multi-bit error detection.
The GFP payload area includes the payload header, client payload information field, and payload frame check sequence. The payload header consists of the type, type HEC (tHEC), extension header field, and extension HEC (eHEC). The type field includes the following: l Payload type identifier (PTI) The PTI identifies the type of GFP client frame. Two kinds of client frames are currently defined, user data frames (PTI = 000) and client management frames (PTI = 100). l l Payload FCS indicator (PFI) The PFI indicates the presence (PFI = 1) or absence (PFI = 0) of the payload FCS field. Extension header identifier (EXI) The EXI indicates the presence or absence of the extension header. When EXI = 0, there is no extension header. This frame format applies to a logical point-to-point configuration. l User payload identifier (UPI) The UPI identifies the type of the client frame. Figure 14-63 GFP type field format
Octet transmission order 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Bit number 5 6 7 1 6 2 5 3 PTI PFI UPI 4 4 3 5 2 6 1 7 0 Bit number 8 Octet transmission order EXI
The tHEC field protects the integrity of the type field by enabling both single-bit error correction and multi-bit error detection. The extension header field and eHEC field are used to support special data link header technologies and are seldom used in actual situations.
Type of the GFP Frame

There are two types of GFP frame: GFP control frame and GFP client frame. Currently, the GFP control frame is available only in one type: the Idle frame. The Idle frame is a four-octet GFP control frame consisting of only a GFP core header. The Idle frame is intended for the GFP source adaptation process to facilitate the adaptation of the GFP octet stream to any given transport medium where the transport medium channel has a high capacity. Two types of GFP client frames are currently defined: client data frame and client management frame. GFP client data frames are used to transport data from the client signal. GFP client
management frames are used to transport information associated with the management of the client signal or GFP connection. The type field of the client data frames uses the following values: l l l l PTI = 100 PFI = Payload specific EXI = Payload specific UPI = See Table 14-49.
Table 14-49 UPI values of the client management frame UPI Value 0000 0000 1111 1111 0000 0001 0000 0010 0000 0011 through 1111 11110 Client signal fail (loss of client signal) Client signal fail (loss of character synchronization) Reserved for future use Usage Reserved
Ethernet Frame Encapsulation

The Ethernet board adopts the GFP-F adaptation mode to encapsulate Ethernet frames into the corresponding virtual container. The encapsulation process is as follows: 1. The Ethernet MAC octets from the destination address through the frame check sequence, inclusive, are placed in the GFP payload information field. Octet-alignment is maintained and bit identification within octets is maintained.
Ethernet MAC frame Octets 2 2 2 2 0-60 GFP frame PLI cHEC Type tHEC GFP extension header
Octets 7 1 6 6 2
4 1
Preamble Start of frame delimiter Destination Address (DA) Source Address (SA) Length/Type MAC client data Pad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GFP payload
Bits
Bits
2. 3.
Calculate other fields of the GFP client data frame over the content of the payload. Scramble the core header and the payload area to maintain DC balance of the transported data.
14-198
4.
Map GFP client data frames into virtual containers and insert the Idle frame to realize the rate adaptation between the variable-length PDUs and the defined virtual containers.
The decapsulation process is as follows: 1. 2. 3. Check for a correct cHEC, byte by byte in the payload of the virtual container. Once a correct cHEC is detected, a GFP frame is found. Check for subsequent GFP frames frame by frame according to the PLI in the GFP frame and discard Idle frames. Descramble the payload area in the found GFP frame and extract the Ethernet MAC octets from the destination address through the frame check sequence, inclusive.

The virtual concatenation is realized by using byte H4 or K4 as the virtual concatenation-specific multiframe indicator and sequence indicator.
VC-4-Xv and VC-3-Xv

The virtual container that is formed by a VC-4-Xv/VC-3-Xv can be mapped into X individual VC-4/VC-3s which form the VC-4-Xv/VC-3-Xv. Each VC-4/VC-3 has its own POH. The POH has the same specifications as the ordinary VC-4 POH. The H4 byte in the POH is used for the virtual concatenation-specific multiframe indicator (MFI) and sequence indicator (SQ). The MFI indicates the position of a frame in the multiframe. Each frame sent by the source carries the MFI information. The sink combines the frames with the same MFI into the C-n-Xv. There are MFI-1 and MFI-2. The MFI-1 uses H4, bit 5 to bit 8 and counts from 0 to 15. The MFI-2 uses H4, bit 1 to bit 4 in frame 0 (MFI-2 bits 1-4) and 1 (MFI-2 bits 5-8). Hence, the MFI-2 counts from 0 to 255. The resulting overall multiframe is 4096 frames (= 512 ms) long. The SQ indicates the position of a frame in the C-n-Xv. The source inserts the SQ information into the frame according to the payload allocation sequence. The sink decides the sequence to extract the payload from the frames that form C-n-Xv according to the SQ. The SQ is transported in bits 1 to 4 of the H4 bytes, using frame 14 (SQ bits 1-4) and 15 (SQ bits 5-8) of MFI-1.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-199
Figure 14-64 VC-3-Xv/VC-4-Xv multiframe and sequence indicator

C-3-X/C-4-X 1 X C-3-Xv/C-4-Xv SQ = X-1 =0 SQ = 0 =0 MFI-1 = 0 X-1 MFI-2 = 0 =1 SQ = 0 =0 MFI-1 = 1 MFI-2 = 0
H
POH
POH
SQ = X-1 = 15 SQ = 0 MFI-1 = 15 = 0 MFI-2 = 0 X-1 SQ = 0 =0 MFI-1 = 0 = 15 MFI-2 = 1 SQ = X-1 = 15 SQ = 0 = 255 MFI-1 = 15 MFI-2 = 255 X-1 =0 SQ = 0 =0 MFI-1 = 0 MFI-2 = 0
H H
With the MFI and SQ, the sink can correctly restore the position of each frame in the C-n-Xv to avoid the frame alignment problem due to the different propagation delays of the frames.
VC-12-Xv
The virtual container that is formed by a VC-12-Xv can be mapped into X individual VC-12s which form the VC-12-Xv. Each VC-12 has its own POH. The POH has the same specifications as the ordinary VC-12 POH. Bit 2 of the K4 byte in the POH is used for the virtual concatenationspecific frame count and sequence indicator. Bit 2s of the K4 bytes in every 32 multiframes (one multiframe comprising four VC-12s) are extracted to form a 32-bit character string to express the frame count and sequence indicator. Bits 1-5 of the string express the frame count, whose value range is between 0 and 31. The structure formed by 32 multiframes has 128 frames. Hence, the resulting overall multiframe is 1096 frames (= 512 ms) long. Bits 6-11 of the string express the sequence indicator. The frame count/sequence indicator in the VC-12-Xv has the same usage as the multiframe indicator/ sequence indicator in the VC-4-Xv/VC-3-Xv.
14.4.5.3 LCAS
The LCAS realizes the capacity adjustment of the virtual container by exchanging the control information between both the source and the sink side.
Control Information
Synchronization of changes in the capacity of the transmitter (So) and the receiver (Sk) is achieved by a control packet. Each control packet describes the state of the link during the next
POH
POH
POH
Multiframe (MF)
POH
control packet. Changes are sent in advance so that the receiver can switch to the new configuration as soon as it arrives. The control packet is transported in byte H4 (higher order path) or bit 2 of byte K4 (lower order path). The control packet includes the following: l MFI or frame count MFI is used for the VC-4-Xv/VC-3-Xv and the frame count is used for the VC-12-Xv. Both are used to indicate the position of a multiframe. For the usage, see 14.4.5.2 Virtual Concatenation. l SQ SQ is used to indicate the position of a frame in the C-n-Xv. For the usage, see 14.4.5.2 Virtual Concatenation. l GID The GID is used for identification of the VCG. The GID bit of all members of the same VCG has the same value. The VCG refers to a group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link. The members of a VCG are the virtual containers that form the VCG. The VCG is equivalent to the generally spoken VCTRUNK. l Control field (CTRL) The control field is used to transfer the link information from the source to the sink. It must provide the status of the individual member of the link. Table 14-50 LCAS CTRL words Command FIXED ADD NORM EOS IDLE DNU Remarks This is an indication that this end uses fixed bandwidth (non-LCAS mode). This member is about to be added to the group. Normal transmission End of sequence indication and normal transmission This member is not part of the group or about to be removed. Do not use (the payload). The sink side reported FAIL status.
CRC The CRC check is performed on every control packet after it has been received, and the contents rejected if the test fails.
Member status field (MST) It reports the member status from the sink to the source. There are two states, OK and FAIL.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-201
Re-sequence acknowledge (RS-Ack) bit When a change of the status of the members in a VCG is detected at the sink side, a notification to the source has to be performed by toggling (that is, change from '0' to '1' or from '1' to '0') the RS-Ack bit.
The forward control packets from the source to the sink include the MFI, SQ, GID, CTRL, and CRC. The backward control packets from the sink to the source include the MST, RS-Ack, and CRC.
Capacity Adjustment Process

Figure 14-65 Capacity adjustment process (addition of a member)
Source (EOS) Source (new) Ctrl=ADD MST=OK Ctrl=EOS RS-Ack Ctrl=NORM Sink (new) Source (EOS)
When a member is added to a VCTRUNK on the NMS, the LCAS capacity adjustment process is as follows: 1. The LCAS source assigns a sequence number (one larger than the currently highest sequence number) to the new member and sends a forward control packet with its CTRL word being ADD to the sink. The LCAS sink performs continuity check for the new member. If the link of the new member is normal, the sink sends a backward control packet in which MST = OK to the source. The LCAS source sends a forward control packet with its CTRL code being EOS to the sink for the new member, indicating that the SQ of the new member is the currently highest number in the VCG. The LCAS sink sends the RS-Ack to the source to acknowledge the change of the SQ. The LCAS source sends a forward control packet with its CTRL code being NORM to the sink for the member whose original state is EOS, indicating that the member is normally transmitted but is not the one with the highest SQ. Both the source and the sink use the new member to transport the payload.
2.
3.
4. 5.
6.
14-202
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 14-66 Capacity adjustment process (deletion of a member)

Source(SQ>removed member's SQ) Source(removed) Ctrl=IDLE MST=FAIL RS-Ack Ctrl=EOS/NORM RS-Ack Sink(removed) Sink(SQ>removed member's SQ)
When a member is deleted from a VCTRUNK on the NMS, the LCAS capacity adjustment process is as follows: 1. 2. The LCAS source sends a forward control packet with its CTRL code being IDLE to the sink for the deleted member. The LCAS sink sets the status of the member to FAIL and sends a backward control packet in which MST = FAIL to the source and also sends the RS-Ack to acknowledge the change of the SQ. The LCAS source reallocates SQs for all the members whose SQ is higher than that of the deleted member (SQ decremented successively by 1). It also sends a forward control packet with its CTRL code being EOS or NORM to the sink to indicate the change of the SQ. The LCAS sink sends the RS-Ack to the source to acknowledge the change of the SQ. Both the source and the sink do not use the deleted member to transport the payload.
3.
4. 5.
Figure 14-67 Capacity adjustment process (one member link restored after a failure)
Source (link error) MST=FAIL Ctrl=DNU Sink
...
MST=OK Ctrl=NORM
When a member link of a VCTRUNK is restored after a failure, the process of adjusting the LCAS capacity is as follows: 1. 2. 3. On detecting that a member link is faulty, the LCAS sink sends a backward control packet in which MST = FAIL to the source. The LCAS source sends a forward control packet with its CTRL code being DNU to the sink for the member, indicating that the member is temporarily unavailable. If the original status of the member is EOS, the LCAS source sends a forward control packet with its CTRL word being EOS to the sink for the member whose SQ is one lower than EOS. Both the source and the sink do not use the faulty link member to transport the payload.
4.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
5. 6. 7. 8.
On detecting that the member link is restored, the LCAS sink sends a backward control packet in which MST = OK to the source. The LCAS source sends a forward control packet with its CTRL code being NORM or EOS to the sink for the member, indicating that the member is restored and available. If the original status of the member is EOS, the LCAS source sends a forward control packet with its CTRL word being NORM to the sink for the member whose status is set to EOS. Both the source and the sink use the restored member to transport the payload.
NOTE
l The LCAS source can adopt the Huawei mode or the standard mode to send the two control packets MST and Rs-Ack. In the Huawei mode, the Rs-Ack is sent before the MST. In the standard mode, the MST is sent before the Rs-Ack. You can set the mode on the NMS. l The LCAS sink uses the trail signal fail (TSF) or the loss of multiframe (LOM) as a required condition to determine whether a link is faulty. It uses the trail signal degraded (TSD) as an optional condition. In the case of the VC-12, the TSD is the BIP_SD. In the case of the VC-3, the TSD is the B3_SD_VC3. You can enable or disable the TSD on the NMS. l When a member link is faulty, the LCAS performs a protection switching after a delay of time to prevent the situation where an NE simultaneously performs a protection switching such as SNCP and deletes the member. You can set the delay time on the NMS. l A VCG uses a member to transport payload some time after the member link is restored. You can set the WTR time on the NMS.

Before you plan the Ethernet encapsulation and mapping features, obtain the information of the opposite equipment.
Procedure
Step 1 Plan the Ethernet encapsulation and mapping protocol. Adhere to the following principles when planning the encapsulation and mapping of the Ethernet port: l Plan the same encapsulation and mapping protocol for both sides. It is recommended that you adopt the GFP protocol. l The parameters of the encapsulation and mapping protocol at both sides should be consistent. It is recommended that you adopt the default parameters of the protocol. Step 2 Plan VCTRUNKs. Adhere to the following principles when planning VCTRUNKs: l The capacity of VCTRUNKs should be determined by the actual bandwidth of the service needs. l Bind only the paths in a VC-4 if possible. If the paths of several VC-4s need to be bound, the VC-4s that have the same transmission path take priority. l As each VC-4 of the Ethernet board can bind only VC-3 or VC-12, give priority to the VC-4s whose paths are already bound with the VC-12 or VC-3. l As the VC-4-1 of the EFT4 board and EMS6 board can bind only VC-3 paths whereas the VC-4-2 can bind both VC-12 and VC-3 paths, give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1 if VC-3 paths are to be bound.
Step 3 Plan the LCAS. Adhere to the following principles when planning the LCAS: l The LCAS at both sides must be enabled or disabled. l If the LCAS is enabled at both sides, the used LCAS parameters at both sides must be consistent. l If the opposite equipment is the third-party equipment and does not support the Huawei mode, set the LCAS mode to the standard mode. Otherwise, set the mode to the Huawei mode at both sides. l It is recommended that you set the delay time to 2000 ms. l It is recommended that you set the WTR time to 300 seconds. l It is recommended that you disable the TSD. ----End
14.4.7 Configuring Guide

14.4.7.1 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board When an NE transmits Ethernet services to a line through an internal port (that is, VCTRUNK) of an Ethernet board, the attributes of the internal port need to be set. Thus, the Ethernet board works with the Ethernet board on the opposite side to realize the transmission of the Ethernet services in the network. 14.4.7.2 Configuring LCAS After you enable LCAS, an NE dynamically adjusts service bandwidth without affecting the usability of services.
14.4.7.1 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board

When an NE transmits Ethernet services to a line through an internal port (that is, VCTRUNK) of an Ethernet board, the attributes of the internal port need to be set. Thus, the Ethernet board works with the Ethernet board on the opposite side to realize the transmission of the Ethernet services in the network.
Prerequisite
Precautions
The IDU 610 supports the Ethernet board EFT4. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet boards EFT4 and EMS6. l l The EFT4 board supports VCTRUNKs 1-4, which are bound with PORTs 1-4 respectively. The EFT4 board does not support the setting of TAG attributes and network attributes. The EMS6 board supports VCTRUNKs 1-8. VCTRUNKs 1-8 determine the services to be transmitted depending on information of the created Ethernet services.
The following procedures describe how to configure the internal port of an EMS6 board. The EFT4 board does not support the configuration of the TAG attributes and network attributes.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Choose Internal Port. Step 2 Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port. 1. 2. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters.
3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Click Apply. Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration. The system displays the Bound Path Configuration dialog box. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the port to be configured. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click Optional: Repeat Step 3.5 and bind other VCTRUNKs. Click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed. .
Step 3 Set the VC paths to be bound with the port.
Step 4 Configure the LCAS function for the port. 1. 2. Click the LCAS tab. Set the Enabling LCAS parameter and other LCAS parameters.
14-206
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
3. 1. 2.
Click Apply. Click the TAG Attributes tab. Set the TAG attributes of the port.
Step 5 Optional: Set the TAG attributes of the port.
3. 1. 2.
3.
Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Parameter Mapping Protocol Scramble Value Range GFP, LAPS, HDLC Unscrambled, Scrambling Mode [X43+1], Scrambling Mode [X48+1] Default Value GFP Scrambling Mode [X43+1] Description It is recommended that you use the default value. l This parameter specifies the scrambling polynomial used by the mapping protocol. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-207
Parameter Set Inverse Value for CRC
Value Range Yes, No
Default Value Yes
Description l This parameter is valid only when Mapping Protocol is set to LAPS or HDLC. l When this parameter is set to Yes, the FCS is the result after you perform a negation operation for the CRC. l When this parameter is set to No, the FCS is the CRC.
Check Field Length
FCS32, FCS16, No
FCS32
l When this parameter is set to FCS32, a 32-bit FCS is used. l When this parameter is set to FCS16, a 16-bit FCS is used. l When the Ethernet board uses the GFP mapping protocol, this parameter can be set to FCS32, FCS16, or No. l When the Ethernet board uses the HDLC mapping protocol, this parameter can be set to FCS32 or FCS16. l When the Ethernet board uses the LAPS mapping protocol, this parameter can be set to FCS32 or FCS16. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
FCS Calculated Bit Sequence
Big endian, Little endian
l Big endian (GFP) l Little endian (LAPS or HDLC)
l When this parameter is set to Big endian, the least significant byte of the FCS is placed first and the most significant byte is placed last. l When this parameter is set to Little endian, the most significant byte of the FCS is placed first and the least significant byte is placed last. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Extension Header Option
No, Yes
No
l This parameter specifies whether the GFP payload header contains the extension header and eHEC. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Configurable Ports
VCTRUNKs
VCTRUNK 1
14-208
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Value Range -
Default Value -
Enabling LCAS
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether the LCAS function is enabled. l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-209
Parameter LCAS Mode
Value Range Huawei Mode, Standard Mode
Default Value Huawei Mode
Description l This parameter specifies the sequence in which the LCAS sink sends the MST control packet and Rs-Ack control packet. l When this parameter is set to Huawei Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the RsAck and then sends the MST. l When this parameter is set to Standard Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the MST and then sends the Rs-Ack. l If the equipment on the opposite side is the third-party equipment and does not support the Huawei mode, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Standard Mode. Otherwise, set this parameter to Huawei Mode.
Hold Off Time (ms)
0, any integer that ranges from 2000 to 10000 and has a step of 100
2000
l When a member link is faulty, the LCAS performs switching after a delay of time to prevent the situation where an NE simultaneously performs a protection switching such as SNCP and performs an LCAS switching. This parameter specifies the duration of the delay. l If the paths of the VCTRUNK are configured with protection, it is recommended that you set this parameter to 2000 ms. Otherwise, set this parameter to 0.
WTR Time(s)
0 to 720
300
l When the time after a member link is restored to normal reaches the set value of this parameter, the VCG uses the restored member link. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
TSD
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether the TSD is used as a condition for determining whether a member link is faulty. In the case of the VC-12, the TSD refers to the BIP_SD. In the case of the VC-3, the TSD refers to the B3_SD_VC3. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
14-210
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Entry Detection
Description l This parameter specifies whether to check the incoming packets from the port according to the TAG attributes. l Set this parameter according to actual situations.
TAG
Tag Aware
Default VLAN ID
1 to 4095
l This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l For using this parameter, see Table 14-51. l Set this parameter according to actual situations.
VLAN Priority
0 to 7
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-211
Parameter Port Attributes
Value Range UNI, C-Aware, SAware
Default Value UNI
Description l When this parameter is set to UNI, the port processes data frames according to the tag attributes. l When this parameter is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the port does not process data frames according to the tag attributes but processes the data frames according to the way of processing QinQ services. l In the case of QinQ services, set this parameter to the default value because the NE automatically sets network attributes according to the operation type that is set when the QinQ services are created.
Activation Status
NOTE
l The Mapping Protocol and protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at one end of a transmission line must be the same as the Mapping Protocol and protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at the other end of the transmission line. l The Enabling LCAS and LCAS protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at one end of a transmission line must be the same as the Enabling LCAS and LCAS protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at the other end of the transmission line. l The timeslots to which the paths bound with a VCTRUNK correspond must be the same at both ends of a transmission line.
Table 14-51 Methods used by ports to process data frames Direction Type of Data Frame Tagged frame Untagged frame How to Process Tag Aware The port receives the frame. The port discards the frame. Access The port discards the frame. The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame, and receives the frame. Hybrid The port receives the frame. The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame, and receives the frame.
Ingress
14-212
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Direction
Type of Data Frame Tagged frame
How to Process Tag Aware The port transmits the frame. Access The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. Hybrid l If the VLAN ID in the frame is Default VLAN ID, the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is not Default VLAN ID, the port directly transmits the frame.
Egress
14.4.7.2 Configuring LCAS

After you enable LCAS, an NE dynamically adjusts service bandwidth without affecting the usability of services.
Prerequisite
Context
l The configuration that complies with the LCAS protocol should meet the following two requirements: The configured services should be bidirectional services that adopt virtual concatenation. The networking topology should be of the point-to-point mode. l When configuring the LCAS function, you must set the LCAS parameters to the same values for the equipment at the two ends. The LCAS enable/disable attribute of the equipment at the two ends must be the same. The equipment at the two ends must be set to the same LCAS mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE in the NE explore, choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function tree. Step 2 Click the Create button below the right-side pane, configure the SDH services between the Ethernet board and the line board according to the requirement.
Step 3 Click OK. Step 4 Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to configure the SDH services between the Ethernet board and the line board on the sink NE. Step 5 In the Board Tree, select the Ethernet board to be configured with services. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface. Step 6 Select Internal Port, and the internal port configuration interface is displayed. Step 7 In the Internal Port page, select the Bound Path tab. Step 8 Click Configuration, and the bound path configuration dialog box is displayed. Step 9 Based on the service requirement, set each parameter of the bound path one by one.
Step 10 Click OK. Step 11 Select the LCAS tab, and the LCAS configuration interface is displayed. Step 12 Set the LCAS parameters. . Step 13 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, showing that the operation succeeded.
NOTE
The class of bound path configured for the Ethernet board on the source NE must be the same as that on the sink NE. Otherwise, the LCAS function fails to be configured.
----End
14.5 Configuring VLAN

The Ethernet switching processing board supports the virtual local area network (VLAN) function that complies with IEEE 802.1q. 14.5.1 Feature Description According to specific rules, a real network topology can be divided into several logical subnets, which are referred to as VLANs. The broadcast packets of a VLAN can be transmitted only within this VLAN. That is, one VLAN corresponds to a specific broadcast domain. The VLAN allows users to solve the broadcast flooding problem at low costs. In addition, the VLAN offers several revolutionary benefits.
14.5.2 Basic Concepts This topic decribes the basic concepts that you need to be familiar with before you use the VLAN feature. 14.5.3 Availability The VLAN feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 14.5.4 Relation with Other Features The port whose VLAN feature is enabled cannot transparently transmit Ethernet services. 14.5.5 Realization Principle Realization of the VLAN function is related to the port attribute and service type. 14.5.6 Planning Guide Plan related parameters according to the specific application of VLAN. 14.5.7 Configuration Guide This topic describes the configuration flow and the corresponding configuration tasks of the EVPL service that uses the VLAN feature. Two examples are provided as a supplement to the configuration. 14.5.8 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Service) This topic provides an example to describe how to configure the PORT-shared EVPL service 14.5.9 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Service) This topic provides an example to describe how to configure the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service.

According to specific rules, a real network topology can be divided into several logical subnets, which are referred to as VLANs. The broadcast packets of a VLAN can be transmitted only within this VLAN. That is, one VLAN corresponds to a specific broadcast domain. The VLAN allows users to solve the broadcast flooding problem at low costs. In addition, the VLAN offers several revolutionary benefits.
Improving Bandwidth Utilization

The generation of a large number of unnecessary broadcast packets is avoided because the broadcast packets are forwarded within the range of a specific VLAN rather than on the entire LAN. This improves the bandwidth utilization. In addition, because a VLAN is actually a small broadcast domain, if the routing of a packet is not discovered, the switch transmits this packet only to the ports that belong to this VLAN rather than to all ports of the switch. Hence, the packet forwarding is restricted to a specific VLAN, which also improves the network utilization.
Isolating Users and Improving Network Security

The packets of a VLAN are forwarded within the range of this VLAN, but not forwarded to the network equipment of other VLAN users. Hence, using VLANs can isolate different users and can protect the privacy of user information.
Realizing Virtual Workgroups

The final goal of using VLANs is to establish the virtual workgroup model, that is, to establish a dynamic organization environment. This enables the members of the same VLAN to communicate with each other as if they were in the same VLAN, even when they move to other
positions of the network. The broadcast packets are restricted to this VLAN without affecting the members of other VLANs. If the network location of one member is changed but the VLAN to which the member belongs is not changed, the configuration of this member can remain unchanged. If the physical location of one member is not changed but the VLAN to which the member belongs is changed, the network administrator needs to modify the configuration of this member. The virtual workgroup is a long-term goal, which requires support in other aspects.

This topic decribes the basic concepts that you need to be familiar with before you use the VLAN feature. 14.5.2.1 Frame Format To realize the VLAN function, IEEE 802.1q defines the Ethernet frame that contains the VLAN information, namely, the tagged frame. The tagged frame is also called the 802.1q frame. Compared with the common Ethernet frame, this type of frame is added with a 4-byte 802.1q header. 14.5.2.2 TAG Attribute Depending on the different methods for processing the tagged frame and the untagged frame, the TAG attribute of a switch port can be set to tag aware, access, and hybrid. 14.5.2.3 Application A VLAN allows new application scenarios for the Ethernet private line (EPL) service and the Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service.
14.5.2.1 Frame Format

To realize the VLAN function, IEEE 802.1q defines the Ethernet frame that contains the VLAN information, namely, the tagged frame. The tagged frame is also called the 802.1q frame. Compared with the common Ethernet frame, this type of frame is added with a 4-byte 802.1q header. Figure 14-68 Tagged frame format
Destination address Source address 4 bytes 802.1q header FCS (CRC-32)
Length/Type
Data
TCI TPID 16 bits PCP 3 bits CFI 1 bit VID 12 bits
The 4-byte 802.1q header is divided into two parts: tag protocol identifier (TPID) and tag control information (TCI). The TCI is divided into three parts: user_priority, canonical format indicator (CFI), and VLAN identifier (VID).
TPID The TPID is a 2-byte field, and it identifies an Ethernet frame as a tagged frame. The value is always 0x8100. When the network equipment that cannot identify the tagged frame receives the tagged frame, the equipment discards this frame.
PCP The priority code point (PCP) identifies the priority of an Ethernet frame. This field can be used to provide the requirement for the service quality.
CFI The CFI is a 1-bit filed, and it is used in certain physical networks that adopt the ring topology. This field is not processed in the Ethernet.
VID The VLAN ID is a 12-bit field, and it indicates the VLAN that the frame belongs to. Restricted to the field length, the value of the VID ranges from 1 to 4095.
14.5.2.2 TAG Attribute

Depending on the different methods for processing the tagged frame and the untagged frame, the TAG attribute of a switch port can be set to tag aware, access, and hybrid. Table 14-52 Data frame processing method of the switch port Direction Type of Frame Processing Method Tag Aware Ingress Tagged frame Untagged frame Receives the frame. Discards the frame. Access Discards the frame. Receives the frame after the untagged frame is added with the port VID (PVID). Transmits the frame after the PVID of the tagged frame is stripped. Hybrida Receives the frame. Receives the frame after the untagged frame is added with the PVID. Transmits the frame after the PVID of the tagged frame is stripped if the VID equals the PVID. Directly transmits the frame if the VID does not equal the PVID.
Egress
Tagged frame
Transmits the frame.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-217

NOTE
l The untagged frame cannot be transmitted through the port. l When the Ethernet switching board works in the Ethernet switching state, it can be considered as an Ethernet switch. In this case, the ports of the Ethernet switching board can be classified into two categories: the external port (PORT) and the internal port (VCTRUNK). Each port corresponds to a specific TAG attribute. l When the Ethernet switching board works in the Ethernet transparent transmission state, it does not check the TAG attribute. Hence, the port transparently transmits the tagged frame and the untagged frame.
CAUTION
a:
When the TAG attribute of a port on the EMS4 board (a logical board) that is supported by the IDU 605 1F/2F is set to Hybrid, the packet that is forwarded by this port remains the same as the packet that enters the bridge.
14.5.2.3 Application
A VLAN allows new application scenarios for the Ethernet private line (EPL) service and the Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service. In the case of the EPL service, after the VLAN is adopted, the Ethernet board can divide the flow by port and VLAN ID other than only by port, which allows the development of the EPL service to the Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service. In the case of the EPLAN service, after the VLAN is adopted, the Ethernet board can create the 802.1q bridge, which allows the development of the EPLAN service to the Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service. This topic only describes the application of the VLAN in the EPL service. For details about the 802.1q bridge, see 14.6.2.1 Bridge.
PORT-Shared EVPL Service

Figure 14-69 shows an example of the PORT-shared EVPL service. The service between the headquarters and branch A is transmitted over the VLANs whose VIDs are from 100 to 110, and the service between the headquarters and branch B is transmitted over the VLANs whose VIDs are from 200 to 210. If the Ethernet board at NE1 supports VLAN, use an Ethernet port whose port attribute is tag aware to access the services from the headquarters. Then, map the services of different VLANs into different VCTRUNKs. In this way, the services of different VLANs are isolated during transmission. Figure 14-69 PORT-shared EVPL service
VLAN100-110 VLAN200-210 PORT1 Headquaters NE1 VLAN100-110 VCTRUNK1 NE2 VLAN200-210 VCTRUNK2 NE3 Branch B Branch A
14-218
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Service

Figure 14-70 shows an example of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service. Department A and department B at NE1 need to transmit services to their respective departments at NE2. If the Ethernet board supports VLAN, use two Ethernet ports at NE1 whose port attributes are access and that have different PVIDs to access the services of department A and department B at NE1. Then, map the services into the same VCTRUNK. In this way, the services of different VLANs are transmitted over the same VCTRUNK. Because the services of the two departments can share the bandwidth, the bandwidth utilization is improved. Figure 14-70 VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service
PORT1 VLAN100 NE1 VLAN200 PORT2 VCTRUNK1
VLAN100
PORT1 NE2
VLAN200 PORT2 B
14.5.3 Availability
The VLAN feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 14-53 Availability of the VLAN Feature VLAN Applicable Board EMS6 (all the versions) Applicable Equipment IDU 620 IDU 605 1F/2F a
NOTE
a:
IDU 605 1F/2F supports the LAN service that is based on the VLAN, but does not support the Ethernet line service.

The port whose VLAN feature is enabled cannot transparently transmit Ethernet services.

Realization of the VLAN function is related to the port attribute and service type. When the VLAN function is enabled, the switch processes a data frame as follows: 1. Processes the data frame that is input into the switch through a port, according to the attribute of this port. For details, see Table 14-52.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
2.
Forwards this data frame according to the service type. l In the case of the line service, the switch forwards this data frame to the corresponding ports based on the service configuration. l In the case of the VLAN service, the switch forwards this data frame to the corresponding port based on the MAC address table. For details, see 14.6.5.1 Bridge.
3.
Processes the data frame that is output from this port on the switch, according to the attribute of this port. For details, see Table 14-52.

Plan related parameters according to the specific application of VLAN.
Prerequisite
You must learn about the specific application of VLAN.
Precautions
NOTE
This topic describes the planning based on the cases in 14.5.2.3 Application.
Procedure
Step 1 According to the actual requirements, plan the line service type. When planning the line service type, adhere to the following principles: l In the case of the point-to-point service, use the Ethernet transparent transmission service. l If the service of the same PORT needs to be divided by VLAN and if the service frame is the tagged frame, use the PORT-shared EVPL service. l If the services of different PORTs need to share one transmission channel and if the service frame is the untagged frame, use the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service. l In the case of other requirements that are not contained in the preceding description, use the QinQ service or Layer 2 switching service. Step 2 Optional: Plan the PORT-shared EVPL service. When planning the PORT-shared EVPL service, adhere to the following principles: l Set TAG of the PORT to Tag Aware. l Allocate the VLAN service of this PORT to different VCTRUNKs by VLAN ID. Step 3 Optional: Plan the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service. When planning the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service, adhere to the following principles: l Set TAG of the PORT to Access. l Because the PVIDs of different PORTs should be different, configure the PVIDs of PORTs by user. For example, if the PVIDs of the PORTs used by user A range from 100 to 199, the PVIDs of the PORTs used by user B should range from 200 to 299. l The services of different PORTs should share one VCTRUNK. ----End

This topic describes the configuration flow and the corresponding configuration tasks of the EVPL service that uses the VLAN feature. Two examples are provided as a supplement to the configuration. 14.5.7.1 Configuration Flow This topic describes the configuration flow of the EVPL service that uses the VLAN feature. 14.5.7.2 Creating Ethernet Line Service To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the line service, perform certain operations to configure the related information, such as the service source and service sink.
14.5.7.1 Configuration Flow

This topic describes the configuration flow of the EVPL service that uses the VLAN feature. Figure 14-71 Configuration flow of the EPL service that uses the VLAN feature (PORT-shared or VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service)
Start 1
Configure the Ethernet external port
Configure the Ethernet internal port
Create the Ethernet line service
4 Create the crossconnection of the Ethernet service End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-221
Table 14-54 Configuration flow of the EVPL service that uses the VLAN feature (PORT-shared EVPL service) Number 1 Description l Set the TAG attributes of the PORT as follows: Set TAG to Tag Aware. Set Ingress Check to Enabled. l For the configuration process, see 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports. 2 l Configure one VCTRUNK corresponding to each data stream that is from the service of the PORT. l Set the TAG attributes of the VCTRUNK as follows: Set TAG to Tag aware. Set Ingress Check to Enabled. l For the configuration process, see 14.4.7.1 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board. 3 l Configure the EVPL service from the PORT+VLAN to the specified VCTRUNK. l For the configuration process, see 14.5.7.2 Creating Ethernet Line Service. 4 Create the cross-connection from the paths that are bound to the VCTRUNK to the corresponding timeslots on the line.
Table 14-55 Configuration flow of the EVPL service that uses the VLAN feature (VCTRUNKshared EVPL service) Number 1 Description l Set the TAG attributes of the PORT as follows: Set TAG to Access. Set Default VLAN ID of PORTs to different values. Set Ingress Check to Enabled. l For the configuration process, see 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports. 2 l Configure a shared VCTRUNK. Set the TAG attributes of the VCTRUNK as follows: l Set TAG to Tag aware. l Set Ingress Check to Enabled. l For the configuration process, see 14.4.7.1 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board.
14-222
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Number 3
Description l Configure the EVPL service from the PORT to the specified VCTRUNK +VLAN. l For the configuration process, see 14.5.7.2 Creating Ethernet Line Service.
Create the cross-connection from the paths that are bound to the VCTRUNK to the corresponding timeslots on the line.
NOTE
If the QoS of the EVPL service needs to be set, see 14.7 Configuring QoS.
14.5.7.2 Creating Ethernet Line Service

To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the line service, perform certain operations to configure the related information, such as the service source and service sink.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be added in the slot layout.
Precautions
l l This topic does not describe the method for creating the QinQ service. IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. The EFT4 board is an Ethernet transparent transmission board, and the PORTs of the EFT4 board correspond to the VCTRUNKs. Hence, you do not need to create the Ethernet line service.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the attributes of the Ethernet line service.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-223
NOTE
Step 5 Optional: Set the bound path. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Configuration. The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click Optional: Repeat Step 5.4 to bind other VC paths. .
14-224
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
6.
Click OK.
Parameters
Parameter Service Type Direction Value Range EPL, EVPL (QinQ) Unidirectional, Bidirectional Default Value EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL. l When setting this parameter to Unidirectional, create the service only from the service source to the service sink. That is, the service source is forwarded only to the sink port. l When setting this parameter to Bidirectional, create the service from the service source to the service sink and the service from the service sink to the service source. That is, when the service source is forwarded to the sink port, the service sink is forwarded to the source port. l Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-225
Parameter Source Port
Value Range A specific PORT or VCTRUNK
Default Value PORT1
Description l This parameter indicates the port where the service source resides. l When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, use a specific PORT as the source port.
Source VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
1-4095
l You can set this parameter to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of VLANs set in Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6). l When you set this parameter to null, all the services of the source port work as the service source. l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the source port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service source.
Sink Port
PORT1
l This parameter indicates the port where the service sink resides. l Do not set the value of this parameter to the same as the value of Source Port. l When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, use a VCTRUNK as the sink port.
14-226
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Sink VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
Value Range 1-4095
Default Value -
Description l You can set this parameter to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of VLANs set in Source CVLAN (e.g. 1,3-6). l When you set this parameter to null, all the services of the sink port work as the service sink. l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the sink port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service sink.
Port Enabled TAG
Enabled, Disabled Access, Tag Aware, Hybrid
Tag Aware
When the source port or the sink port is set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to Enabled. l When all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set this parameter to Tag Aware. l When all of the accessed services are not frames with the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set this parameter to Access. l When the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set this parameter to Hybrid.
Configurable Ports
VCTRUNKs
VCTRUNK 1
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-227
Value Range -
Default Value -
Activation Status
14.5.8 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Service)

This topic provides an example to describe how to configure the PORT-shared EVPL service
Precautions
NOTE
l For details about the service configured in this example, refer to the description of the PORT-shared EVPL service in 14.5.2.3 Application. l Because NE2 and NE3 in this example are both configured with the point-to-point EVPL service, only the configuration of NE1 is described here.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the port attributes of PORT. See 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports.
Set TAG attributes of PORT1 as follows: l Set TAG to Tag Aware. l Set Ingress Check to Enabled. Step 2 Set the port attributes of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. See14.4.7.1 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board. Set the TAG attributes of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 as follows: l Set TAG to Tag Aware. l Set Ingress Check to Enabled. Step 3 Configure the EVPL service between PORT1 and VCTRUNK1. See14.5.7.2 Creating Ethernet Line Service. Set the parameters as follows: l Set Source Port to PORT1. l Set Source C-VLAN (e.g.1,3-6) to 100-110. l Set Sink Port to VCTRUNK1. l Set Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1,3-6) to 100-110. Step 4 Configure the EVPL service between PORT1 and VCTRUNK2. See 14.5.7.2 Creating Ethernet Line Service. Set the parameters as follows: l Set Source Port to PORT1. l Set Source C-VLAN (e.g.1,3-6) to 200-210. l Set Sink Port to VCTRUNK2. l Set Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1,3-6) to 200-210. Step 5 Create the cross-connection from the paths that are bound to the VCTRUNK to the corresponding timeslots on the line. ----End
14.5.9 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Service)

This topic provides an example to describe how to configure the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service.
Precautions
NOTE
l For details about the service configured in this example, refer to the description of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service in14.5.2.3 Application. l Because the service configuration of NE1 is the same as the service configuration of NE2 in this example, only the configuration of NE1 is described here.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the port attributes of PORT1. See 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports.
Set the TAG attributes of PORT1 as follows: l Set TAG to Access. l Set Default VLAN ID to 100. l Set Ingress Check to Enabled. Step 2 Set the port attributes of PORT2. See 14.3.7.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports. Set the TAG attributes of PORT2 as follows: l Set TAG to Access. l Set Default VLAN ID to 200. l Set Ingress Check to Enabled. Step 3 Configure the EVPL service between PORT1 and VCTRUNK1. See14.5.7.2 Creating Ethernet Line Service. Set the parameters as follows: l Set Source Port to PORT1. l Set Source C-VLAN (e.g.1,3-6) to 100. l Set Sink Port to VCTRUNK1. l Set Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1,3-6) to 100. Step 4 Configure the EVPL service between PORT2 and VCTRUNK1. See14.5.7.2 Creating Ethernet Line Service. Set the parameters as follows: l Set Source Port to PORT2. l Set Source C-VLAN (e.g.1,3-6) to 200. l Set Sink Port to VCTRUNK1. l Set Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1,3-6) to 200. Step 5 Create the cross-connection from the paths that are bound to the VCTRUNK to the corresponding timeslots on the line. ----End
14.6 Configuring Layer 2 Switching

To realize the EPLAN service, the Ethernet switching and processing board can create one bridge or multiple bridges. Each bridge can realize the Layer 2 switching of packets among mounted ports and relevant features. 14.6.1 Feature Description The Layer 2 switching refers to the packet switching among switch ports by using the 802.1d, 802.1q, or 802.1ad algorithm. This topic describes the bridge, and the features relevant to the Layer 2 switching, such as STP/RSTP, IGMP Snooping, and broadcast packet suppression, which is the core of the Layer 2 switching. 14.6.2 Basic Concepts This topic describes the basic concepts that you need to be familiar with before you use the Layer 2 switching feature.
14.6.3 Availability The Layer 2 switching feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 14.6.4 Relation with Other Features The Layer 2 switching has different relations with other features. 14.6.5 Realization Principle The bridge, STP/RSTP, and IGMP Snooping comply with the relevant IEEE standards. 14.6.6 Planning Guide Plan the relevant parameters of the Layer 2 switching service according to the actual situation of microwave links. 14.6.7 Configuration Guide This topic describes the configuration tasks relevant to the Layer 2 switching feature. 14.6.8 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the LAN service, perform certain operations to create the bridge and set the attributes of the bridge and to configure the mounted ports of the bridge. 14.6.9 Modifying the Mounted Port of a Bridge This operation enables the user to modify the mounted port of a bridge, the enabled state of the mounted port, and Hub/Spoke attribute of the port. 14.6.10 Creating the VLAN Filter Table You need to create the VLAN filter table for the bridge when you create the EVPLAN service. 14.6.11 Creating the Entry of a MAC Address Table Manually The bridge can obtain the dynamic entry of a MAC address table by using the SVL or IVL mode. In addition, you can manually add the entry of a MAC address table. The manually created entries of a MAC address table can be classified into two categories: unicast entry (that is, static entry) and disabled entry (that is, blacklist entry). 14.6.12 Modifying the Aging Time of the MAC Address Table Entry In the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a MAC address table entry is 5 minutes by default. 14.6.13 Querying the Actual Capacity of the MAC Address Table and the Dynamic Entry By querying the actual capacity of the MAC address table and the dynamic entry, you can learn about the MAC address learning situation of the bridge. 14.6.14 Configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol In the case of the Layer 2 service, if the loop is formed, enable the STP or RSTP for the bridge and set bridge parameters and port parameters. 14.6.15 Querying the Running Information About the Spanning Tree Protocol The running information about the spanning tree protocol includes the bridge running information and port running information. 14.6.16 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol If the bridge accesses a LAN where the IGMP multicast server exists, you can enable the IGMP Snooping protocol and configure the method for processing the unknown multicast packet. 14.6.17 Querying the Running Information About the IGMP Snooping Protocol The running information about the IGMP Snooping protocol includes the current multicast router port and multicast table item. 14.6.18 Modifying the Aging Time of the Multicast Table Item
In the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a multicast table item is 8 minutes by default. 14.6.19 Querying the Multicast Router Port The multicast router port refers to the port that transmits the IGMP query packet to routers. The Ethernet data board considers the port that receives the IGMP query packet as the router port. 14.6.20 Configuring the Static Multicast Table Item You can manually specify the static multicast table item that can be forwarded to the corresponding port in multicast mode. 14.6.21 Querying the Multicast Table Item You can query the multicast item that the IGMP Snooping protocol dynamically learns and the static multicast item that is manually created.

The Layer 2 switching refers to the packet switching among switch ports by using the 802.1d, 802.1q, or 802.1ad algorithm. This topic describes the bridge, and the features relevant to the Layer 2 switching, such as STP/RSTP, IGMP Snooping, and broadcast packet suppression, which is the core of the Layer 2 switching.
Bridge
A bridge refers to a functional unit that realizes the interconnection of two or more LANs. In the case of the Ethernet service boards that have the Layer 2 switching capability, the switching domain can be divided into multiple independent sub-switching domains. As a result, different bridges can access each other only when there are interconnected services. Each bridge is configured independently and uses VLANs independently. That is, different bridges can use the same VLAN.
STP/RSTP
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) applies to a loop network to realize path redundancy backup by using certain algorithms. STP prunes a loop network into a tree network without loops. This helps to avoid proliferation and infinite loop of packets on the loop network. The rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) is an update version of the STP. Compared with the STP, the RSTP can stabilize the network topology more rapidly.
IGMP Snooping
If the multicast router exists on the network, the bridge can start the IGMP Snooping to realize the multicast function with the cooperation of the router.
Broadcast Packet Suppression

To prevent broadcast storm from flooding, enable the broadcast packet suppression function for an Ethernet port to limit the traffic of the broadcast packets that enter the Layer 2 switch.

This topic describes the basic concepts that you need to be familiar with before you use the Layer 2 switching feature.
14-232
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14.6.2.1 Bridge A bridge refers to a functional unit that realizes the interconnection of two or more LANs. 14.6.2.2 STP/RSTP When the network topology of the Ethernet service forms loops, enable the STP or RSTP. 14.6.2.3 IGMP Snooping If the multicast router exists in the network, enable the IGMP Snooping for the bridge to realize the multicast function with the cooperation of the router. 14.6.2.4 Broadcast Packet Suppression You can enable the broadcast packet suppression function that is based on the Ethernet port to prevent spreading of the broadcast storm, through restricting the traffic of the broadcast packet that enters the Layer 2 switch.
14.6.2.1 Bridge
A bridge refers to a functional unit that realizes the interconnection of two or more LANs.
VB and LP
VB, which is originally put forward by Huawei, is short for various bridge. In the case of the Ethernet boards that have the Layer 2 switching capability, the switching domain can be divided into multiple independent sub-switching domains. A VB contains several logic ports (LPs). By configuring the mounting relation, you can mount multiple external ports and VCTRUNK ports to one VB. One external port or VCTRUNK port cannot be mounted to different LPs on one VB. Figure 14-72 lists the relations among the VB, LP, external port, and VCTRUNK port. Figure 14-72 Relations among the VB, LP, external port, and VCTRUNK port
Ethernet Switching Board
PORT3
Bridge Type
The Ethernet switching board supports three types of bridges: 802.1d bridge, 802.1q bridge, and 802.1ad bridge. As shown in Figure 14-73, the services on different 802.1d bridges are isolated, but the services of different VLANs on one bridge are not isolated. The services on different 802.1q bridges are isolated and the services of different VLANs on one bridge are also isolated.
Figure 14-73 802.1d bridge and 802.1q bridge

PORT1 PORT2 PORT3 VLAN1 VLAN2 VLAN3 ... 802.1d bridge
PORT1 PORT2 PORT3
VLAN1 VLAN2
VLAN3 802.1q bridge
Logical port
As shown in Figure 14-74, two conditions may occur for the 802.1ad bridge. l l When Bridge Switch Mode is set to SVL/Ingress Filter Disable, the services on different bridges are isolated but the services of different S-VLANs on one bridge are not isolated. When Bridge Switch Mode is set to IVL/Ingress Filter Enable, the services on different bridges are isolated and the services of different S-VLANs on one bridge are also isolated.
Figure 14-74 802.1ad Bridge

PORT1 PORT2 PORT3 S-VLAN1 S-VLAN2 S-VLAN3 ... 802.1ad bridge IVL/Ingress Filter Enable
PORT1 PORT2 PORT3
S-VLAN1 S-VLAN2
S-VLAN3 802.1ad bridge
Logic Port
SVL/Ingress Filter Disable
Table 14-56 Three Types of Bridges Supported by the Ethernet Switching Board 802.1d Bridge Bridge switch mode VLAN filtering table SVL/Ingress Filter Enable Not configured 802.1q Bridge IVL/Ingress Filter Enable Required 802.1ad Bridge SVL/Ingress Filter Disable Not configured IVL/Ingress Filter Enable Required
14-234
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
802.1d Bridge Ingress filtering Disabled: Does not check the VLAN tag.
802.1q Bridge Enabled: Checks the VLAN tag. If the VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID of the port defined in the VLAN filtering table, the packet is discarded. IVLb Obtains the packet forwarding port by querying the MAC address table, according to the destination MAC address and VLAN ID of the packet. Forwards the broadcast packet to the ports that are specified in the VLAN filtering table. UNI
802.1ad Bridge Disabled: Does not check the VLAN tag. Enabled: Checks the SVLAN tag. If the VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID of the port defined in the VLAN filtering table, the packet is discarded. IVLb Obtains the packet forwarding port by querying the MAC address table, according to the destination MAC address and VLAN ID of the packet. Forwards the broadcast packet to the ports that are specified in the S-VLAN filtering table. C-aware S-aware
Bridge learning mode Packet forwarding mode
SVLa Obtains the packet forwarding port by querying the MAC address table, according to the destination MAC address of the packet. Forwards the broadcast packet to all the ports on the bridge.
SVLa Obtains the packet forwarding port by querying the MAC address table, according to the destination MAC address of the packet. Forwards the broadcast packet to all the ports on the bridge.
Range of broadcasting
Mount port attribute
UNI
C-aware S-aware
NOTE
l a: When the bridge uses the shared VLAN learning (SVL) mode, it creates an entry according to the source MAC address and the source port of a packet. This entry is valid to all VLANs. l b: When the bridge uses the independent VLAN learning (IVL) mode, it creates an entry according to the source MAC address, VLAN ID, and source port of a packet. This entry is valid to only this VLAN. l For details about the 802.1ad bridge, see 14.2.2.4 Application of the QinQ Technology in LAN Services.
MAC Address Table

Entries of a MAC address table provide the mapping relations between MAC addresses and ports. The entries can be classified into the following categories:
Dynamic entry A dynamic entry is obtained by a bridge through the SVL/IVL mode. The dynamic entry ages, and is lost after the Ethernet switching board is reset.
Static entry A static entry, which corresponds to a specific MAC address and port, is manually added by the network administrator into the MAC address table on the NM. A static entry is also called a unicast entry. The static entry does not age, and is not lost after the Ethernet switching board is reset.
Blacklist entry A blacklist entry is used to discard the data frame that contains the specified destination MAC address, that is, the MAC disabled entry. A blacklist entry is also called a blackhole entry. The blackhole entry is configured by the network administrator. The blackhole entry does not age, and is not lost after the Ethernet switching board is reset.
NOTE
l If one routing entry is not updated in a certain period, that is, if no new packet from this MAC address is received to enable the re-learning of this MAC address, this routing entry is automatically deleted. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time. The aging time of a MAC address table is 5 minutes by default. You can set this value on the NM. l The number of entries in a MAC address table is limited. The MAC address capacity of each bridge in the case of the Ethernet switching board is 16K.
Hub/Spoke
In the case of the convergence service, the mutual access between the non-central stations and central stations is required but the access between non-central stations is not required. In this case, specify a mounted port as a Hub port or a Spoke port. l Hub port Hub ports can mutually access each other. Hub ports and Spoke ports can mutually access each other. l Spoke port Spoke ports cannot mutually access each other. Hub ports and Spoke ports can mutually access each other. A mounted port is a Hub port by default.
14.6.2.2 STP/RSTP
When the network topology of the Ethernet service forms loops, enable the STP or RSTP.
STP
The spanning tree protocol (STP) is used in the looped network. This protocol realizes the routing redundancy by adopting certain algorithms and releases the looped network into loop-free tree network, thus preventing the packets from increasing and cycling in an endless manner in the looped network. The STP meets the following requirements: l Configures any activated topology of any bridge to a single spanning tree, and releases the redundant data loop if there is any between two stations in the network topology.
14-236
Re-configures the spanning tree topology in the case of a bridge fault or an interrupted route, thus providing a certain protection, and prevents temporary data loops by automatically containing the bridges and ports of the bridges that are newly added into the LAN. Stabilizes the activated topology in a rapid manner. The finally activated topology can be predicted and repeated. In addition, the topology can be selected by managing the parameters of certain algorithms. Operations to the end stations are transparent. For example, the end stations are unaware of their attachment to a single LAN or a bridged LAN. A small part of the available bandwidth of the link is used to create or maintain the spanning tree, and the bandwidth does not increase with the expanding network size.
l l l l
The Ethernet switching board supports the STP, which complies with IEEE 802.1d.
RSTP
The rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) is an optimized version of STP. Compared to the STP, the RSTP can stabilize the network topology in a shorter time. The RSTP is compatible with the STP. These two topologies can be identified by the bridge that uses the RSTP for calculating the spanning tree. The Ethernet switching board supports the RSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1w.
14.6.2.3 IGMP Snooping

If the multicast router exists in the network, enable the IGMP Snooping for the bridge to realize the multicast function with the cooperation of the router.
Multicast Protocol
The multimedia network applications, such as video conference, E-learning, and video on demand (VOD) service, require that the information is transmitted from one source to multiple destinations, that is, transmitted in one-to-many transmission mode. Because the data traffic of the multimedia information is large, simulating the one-to-many transmission through one-toone mode occupies a large volume of bandwidth. In addition, information flooding is generated if the broadcast is used. Hence, the one-to-many multicast protocol is required. The IP multicast protocol is based on the IP protocol stack. The IP multicast protocol uses a Dtype IP address that is similar to the unicast address to indicate a group. When the packet is transmitted to all the IP hosts in a multicast group, the calling and access mode is similar to the calling and access mode of the unicast. The hosts in an IP multicast group can join or quit this multicast group at any time and at any location, with unlimited number of members. The multicast router does not store the member relations of all the hosts. The router stores the information only about whether any host in the physical subnetwork on the physical interface belongs to a specific multicast group. The host stores the information only about the multicast groups that it joins. The IP multicast protocol is classified into two categories: communication protocol among the multicast routers and the protocol among the multicast routers, hosts, and Layer 2 switches. l The communication protocol among multicast routers is used to obtain the multicast routing information. This type of protocol contains the protocol independent multicast-dense mode
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
(PIM-DM), protocol independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM), and distance vector multicast routing protocol (DVMRP). l The protocol among the multicast routers, hosts, and Layer 2 switches is used to forward the multicast packet according to the multicast routing information. This type of protocol contains the Internet group management protocol (IGMP), IGMP Snoop, IGMP Proxy. IGMP is a Layer 3 multicast protocol, and IGMP Snooping, IGMP Proxy are Layer 2 multicast protocols.
IGMP
The IGMP contained in the TCP/IP suite is used to manage members of the IP multicast group. It creates and maintains the member relations of the multicast group between the host and its adjacent multicast router. The host notifies the local router of joining a specific multicast group and of accepting the information from this multicast group through this protocol. The router periodically queries whether a member of a specific group in the LAN is activated through this protocol (that is, whether the member of a specific multicast group still exists in the network segment), and thus collects and maintains the member relations of groups that are connected to the router. By using this mechanism, the multicast router establishes a table, which contains the ports of the router and members of each specific group in the subnetworks corresponding to each port. When receiving the packet of a specific group, the router forwards the packet only to these ports that have the members of this group. The router uses the IP multicast address to forward multicast packets. Each multicast group corresponds to a specific IP multicast address. The IP multicast address is a D-type IP address, which ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
IGMP Snooping
When the multicast router is connected to the host by using the bridge, the switch broadcasts the multicast packet at Layer 2 if the bridge disables the Layer 2 multicast protocol. See Figure 14-75. When the multicast router is connected to the host by using the bridge, if the bridge enables the Layer 2 multicast protocol (such as IGMP Snooping), the bridge can establish the mapping relations between group members and switch ports and thus can forward the packet only to the ports that have group members. Figure 14-75 Transmission of the multicast packet (with IGMP Snooping disabled)
Internet/ Intranet Video stream
VOD server Multicast router Video stream Layer 2 Ethernet switch Video stream Video stream Video stream
Multicast group member
Non-multicast Non-multicast group member group member
14-238
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 14-76 Transmission of the multicast packet (with IGMP Snooping enabled)
Internet/ Intranet Video stream
VOD server Multicast router Layer 2 Ethernet switch Video stream Video stream
Multicast group member
Non-multicast Non-multicast group member group member
The IGMP Snooping creates and maintains the mapping relations between group members and switch ports by sensing the IGMP packet. After the IGMP Snooping is enabled, the bridge considers the port that receives the IGMP request as the router port. When detecting the response that is transmitted to the router port, the bridge adds the port that receives the response and the router port into a specific multicast group. When detecting that a certain port in a multicast group does not respond to the IGMP request for consecutive times and that the times exceed the threshold, the bridge deletes this port from the multicast group. After the IGMP Snooping is enabled, when receiving the multicast packet, the bridge queries the multicast table in which the source port is the router port. If a multicast group that matches the multicast address exists in the multicast table, the bridge forwards the packet to this multicast group. If no multicast group exists, the bridge discards the multicast packet or broadcasts the packet depending on the NM setting. Three versions of IGMP requests are available, and they are, V1, V2, and V3. The Ethernet switching board can process versions V1 and V2. The Ethernet switching board also supports the aging of the router port and multicast table item.
NOTE
l If a router port is not updated in a certain period (that is, no IGMP request from this port is received), all the multicast tables that are related to this router port are deleted. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time. The aging time of a router port is 5 minutes by default. You cannot set this value on the NM. l Similarly, the multicast table item (that is, multicast group) ages. The aging time is 8 minute by default. You can set this value on the NM.
14.6.2.4 Broadcast Packet Suppression

You can enable the broadcast packet suppression function that is based on the Ethernet port to prevent spreading of the broadcast storm, through restricting the traffic of the broadcast packet that enters the Layer 2 switch.
Based on the ratio of the number of broadcast packets to the total number of packets, the broadcast packet suppression function determines whether the system restricts the broadcast traffic. When the ratio of the number of broadcast packets to the total number of packets exceeds the value set by the user, the system discards the broadcast traffic to decrease the ratio of the broadcast packets so that the ratio is in a reasonable range. In this manner, the broadcast storm can be prevented and the network congestion is avoided, which ensures the normal operation of the network. PORTs of the Ethernet switching board support the broadcast packet suppression function.
14.6.3 Availability
The Layer 2 switching feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 14-57 Availability of Layer 2 Switching Feature Bridge (802.1q bridge and 802.1d bridge) Bridge (802.1ad bridge) IGMP Snooping STP/RSTP EMS6, EFP6 EM4T Broadcast packet suppression EMS6, EFP6 IDU 620 IDU 605 IDU 620 IDU 605 Applicable Board EMS6, EFP6 EM4T EMS6, EFP6 Applicable Equipment IDU 620 IDU 605 IDU 620

The Layer 2 switching has different relations with other features. l l l l l The port that is used by the bridge cannot be configured with the line service. The STP/RSTP is applicable only to the bridge. The IGMP Snooping is applicable only to the bridge. The broadcast packet suppression function is applicable only to the PORT on the bridge. The port on the bridge supports the QoS function.

The bridge, STP/RSTP, and IGMP Snooping comply with the relevant IEEE standards. 14.6.5.1 Bridge A bridge forwards a packet according to the entry of a MAC address table. 14.6.5.2 STP/RSTP The realization of the STP complies with IEEE 802.1d, and the realization of the RSTP complies with IEEE 802.1w. 14.6.5.3 IGMP Snooping
The IGMP Snooping establishes and creates the mapping relations between the group members and switch ports by sensing the IGMP packet. This ensures that the multicast packet is transmitted only to the ports that are connected to the multicast users.
14.6.5.1 Bridge
A bridge forwards a packet according to the entry of a MAC address table. A bridge forwards a packet as follows: 1. In the case of an 802.1q bridge, it checks the VLAN ID of a data frame that is received at the port. If the VLAN ID of this frame does not equal the VLAN ID of the port that is defined in the VLAN filter table, the bridge discards this frame. If the broadcast packet suppression function of the bridge port is enabled and the traffic of the broadcast packet exceeds the pre-set threshold value, the port discards the received broadcast frame. If the IGMP Snooping protocol of the bridge is enabled, the bridge processes the IGMP packet and multicast packet that are received at the port, according to the principle described in 14.6.5.3 IGMP Snooping. If the bridge receives the multicast packet but the IGMP Snooping protocol is disabled, it forwards the multicast packet among all the ports of the bridge or among all the mounted ports of the VLAN (excluding the source port). According to the learning mode, the bridge adds or updates the entry corresponding to the source MAC address of the data frame in the MAC address table, and thus establishes the mapping relation between the MAC address and the receive port. The bridge checks the MAC address table according to the destination MAC address of the data frame. l If the blacklist entry corresponding to the destination MAC address exists, the bridge discards this data frame. l If the dynamic entry or the static entry corresponding to the destination MAC address exists, the bridge forwards this data frame to the destination port indicated by the entry. l If no corresponding entry exists, the bridge forwards the packet among all the ports of the bridge or among all the mounted ports of the VLAN (excluding the source port), according to the bridge type (802.1d bridge or 802.1q bridge). 7. The bridge needs to determine whether the source port and the destination port are Hub or Spoke when forwarding the data frame. If the source port is the Hub port, the bridge forwards the packet to the Hub port and the Spoke port. If the source port is the Spoke port, the bridge forwards the packet to the Hub port.
NOTE
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If the STP or the RSTP of the bridge is enabled, only the port in the forwarding state can forward the data frame.
14.6.5.2 STP/RSTP
The realization of the STP complies with IEEE 802.1d, and the realization of the RSTP complies with IEEE 802.1w.
Basic Concepts
l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Bridge protocol data unit (BPDU)

The STP transmits the BPDU among pieces of equipment to determine the network topology. The BPDU contains adequate information that is required to implement the calculation of the spanning tree. The BPDU is classified into the following categories: Configuration BPDU (CBPDU) The CBPDU refers to a packet that is used to calculate the spanning tree and maintain the spanning tree topology. The CBPDU contains the root bridge ID, root path cost, designated bridge ID, designated port ID, and related timing information. Topology change Notification BPDU (TCN BPDU) The TCN BPDU refers to a packet that is used to notify the relevant equipment of the network topology change in the case of topology change. l Bridge ID The bridge ID is used to indicate a bridge. The bridge ID is 64-bit long. The most significant 16 bits indicate the priority of the bridge, and the least significant 48 bits indicate the MAC address of a certain bridge port. In the STP, the bridge ID also indicates the priority of the bridge. The smaller the value of the bridge ID, the higher the priority. l Port ID The port ID is used to indicate a port on the bridge. The port ID is 16-bit long. The most significant eight bits indicate the priority of the port, and the least significant eight bits indicate the port number. In the STP, the port ID also indicates the priority of the port. The smaller the value of the port ID, the higher the priority. l Root bridge In a network that enables the STP, only one root bridge exists. The root bridge is selected based on the running of the STP. The bridge with the smallest bridge ID is selected as the root bridge. When a network that enables the STP is stabilized, only the root bridge generates and transmits the CBPDU periodically. Other bridges only relay the CBPDU. This can ensure a stable network topology. If the network topology is changed, the root bridge may also change. l Root port The root port refers to a port on the bridge that transmits/receives frames to/from the root bridge. Each non-root bridge has only one root port. The root port is selected based on the running of the STP. The port of a bridge whose root path cost is the smallest is selected as the root port. If more than one port whose root path cost is the smallest exist, the port with the smallest port ID is selected as the root port. l Designated port The designated port refers to a port of a LAN that transmits/receives frames to/from the root bridge. Each LAN has only one designated port. The designated port is selected based on the running of the STP. The port that is connected to the LAN and whose root path cost is the smallest is selected as the designated port. If more than one port whose root path cost is the smallest exist and if these ports are on different bridges, the port whose bridge ID is the smallest is selected as the designated port. If more than one port whose root path cost is the smallest exist and if these ports are on the same bridge, the port with the smallest port ID is selected as the designated port. l Path cost The path cost is used to indicate the status of the network that is connected to the port. The higher the rate of the port, the smaller the path cost. l
14-242
Root path cost

The root path cost refers to the cost of the path from a certain port to the root bridge. That is, the sum of path cost of all the passed ports from this port to the root bridge. l Port state In a network that enables the STP, the port state can be any of the following states: Blocking A port in the blocking state receives and processes the BPDU and does not transmit the BPDU. When a port is in the blocking state, it does not learn the MAC address and does not forward the user packet. Listening It is a transitional state. A port in the listening state transmits, receives, and processes the BPDU. When a port is in the listening state, it neither learns the MAC address nor forwards the user packet. Learning It is a transitional state. A port in the learning state transmits, receives, and processes the BPDU. When a port is in the learning state, it learns the MAC address but does not forward the user packet. Forwarding A port in the forwarding state transmits, receives, and processes the BPDU. When a port is in the learning state, it learns the MAC address and forwards the user packet. Disabled A port in the disabled state does not forward frames, and does not implement the spanning tree algorithm and STP. l Timer Port timers are classified into the following categories: Hold timer The hold timer is used to measure the interval between two CBPDU transmissions. The timeout value is the Hold Time of the bridge. Message age timer The message age timer is used to measure the age of the CBPDU packet recorded by a port. When the age of the CBPDU packet stored by the bridge exceeds the Message Age parameter, the bridge discards the packet. The Message Age parameter determines the initialization age when the CBPDU packet is stored in the bridge. The Message Age parameter is 0 when the root bridge generates the packet. Each time the packet is forwarded to a port, a fixed increment value is added to the Message Age parameter. Forward delay timer The forward delay timer is used to measure the holding time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. When the listening state remains for a period that is the same as the value of the Forward Delay parameter, the port state is changed to learning. When the learning state remains for a period that is the same as the value of the Forward Delay parameter, the port state is changed to forwarding. Bridge timers are classified into the following categories: Hello timer The hello timer is used to measure the interval when the bridge transmits the CBPDU packet. The timeout value is the Bridge Hello Time of the bridge. Topology change notification timer
The topology change notification timer indicates the duration when the bridge periodically transmits the TCN. The timer is used to notify the designated bridge in the LAN that is attached to the root port of the bridge of any detected topology change. The timeout value is the Bridge Hello Time of the bridge. Topology change timer In the case of the root bridge, when receiving the TCN, the bridge transmits the TCN after the topology change is complete and the time period indicated by the topology change timer times out. The timeout value is the Topology Change Time of the bridge.
NOTE
The Max Age, Hello Time, and Forward Delay parameters that are used by different bridges are unified to the values of these three parameters that are used by the root bridge, by mutually transmitting the CBPDU.
STP Algorithm
The STP algorithm is conducted as follows: 1. In the initialization state, all the ports on all the bridges are in the listening state. In this case, each port generates the CBPDU, and the CBPDU considers the bridge where the port resides as the root bridge and the root path cost of the CBPDU is 0. Each port transmits the CBPDU periodically, and the period is the Hello Time of the bridge. The bridge compares the information about the CBPDU that is received at the port with the CBPDU information that is stored by that port. The bridge compares the information that is carried by the CBPDU as follows: (1) The bridge first compares the root bridge IDs. The smaller the ID, the better. (2) If the root bridge IDs are the same, the bridge compares the root path cost values. The smaller the root path cost, the better. (3) If the root path cost values are the same, the bridge compares the designated bridge IDs. The smaller the designated bridge ID, the better. (4) If the designated bridge IDs are the same, the bridge compares the designated port IDs. The smaller the designated port ID, the better. 3. If the information about the CBPDU that is received at the port is better, the bridge replaces the information about the CBPDU that is originally stored by the port. If the root bridge ID or the root path cost in the information about the CBPDU that replaces the information about the CBPDU originally stored by the port is smaller than the information originally stored by the port, the bridge needs to process this new CBPDU as follows: l The bridge stores the information about the CBPDU (including the root bridge ID, root path cost, message age, and corresponding timers). l The bridge updates the root bridge ID and root path cost (the root path cost of the bridge equals the sum of the root path cost of the port that stores the packet and the root path cost of the port that receives the CBPDU). l The designated port updates the designated root bridge and the root path cost at the same time (the root path cost of the designated port equals the sum of the root path cost of the bridge and the path cost of the port). l The designated port relays the CBPDU. If the information about the CBPDU that is received at the port is worse than the information about the CBPDU that is stored by the port, the port transmits the CBPDU that is stored as a response.
2.
4. 5. 6.
If the bridge maintains a root bridge ID that is the same as its bridge ID and if the root path cost is 0, the bridge is a root bridge. The root bridge sets the path cost of each port to 0. If the bridge is a non-root bridge, it considers the port that receives the best CBPDU information as the root port. If the bridge is a non-root bridge, it considers any of the following ports as the designated port: l The bridge ID and port ID of the port are the same as the designated bridge ID and port ID recorded by the port. l The root bridge ID recorded by the port is different from the root bridge ID of the bridge. l The root path cost of the port (sum of the root path cost of the bridge and the path cost of the port) is smaller than the root path cost recorded by the port. l The root path cost of the port is the same as the root path cost recorded by the port, but the bridge ID is smaller than the designated bridge ID of the port. l The root path cost of the port is the same as the root path cost recorded by the port, and the bridge ID is the same as the designated bridge ID of the port. The port ID, however, is smaller than the designated ID of the port.
7.
When the Forward Delay parameter set for the listening state timer of the port expires, the states of the root port and the designated port transition to learning. When the learning state remains for a period that is the same as the value of the Forward Delay parameter, the states of the root port and the designated port transition to forwarding. The states of these ports whose states are not changed to forwarding transition to blocking. If a trail becomes faulty, the root port on this trail no longer receives new CBPDUs, and therefore, the original CBPDU is discarded due to timeout. In this case, the calculation of the spanning tree is conducted again, and a new trail will be available to replace the faulty trail, thus restoring the connectivity of the network.
8.
Improvement in the RSTP

Compared with the STP, the RSTP is improved as follows: l Classification of port roles The port roles in the RSTP are classified into the following categories: root port, designated port, alternate port, and backup port. The alternate port refers to a port that is in the blocking state due to the learning of the BPDU transmitted by other bridges. The backup port refers to a port that is in the blocking state due to the learning of the BPDU transmitted by the bridge the port resides in. l Classification of port states The blocking, listening, and disabled states are combined into the discarding state in the RSTP. l Rapid transition of port states To support the rapid transition of port states, the RSTP defines the point-to-point attribute of a port and an edge port. Point-to-point attribute The point-to-point attribute of a port can be set to adaptive connection, shared media, or link connection. If the attribute of a port is set to adaptive connection, the bridge determines the actual point-to-point attribute of the port according to the actual working mode of the port. If the actual working mode of the port is full-duplex, the actual pointto-point attribute of the port is "true". If the actual working mode of the port is halfduplex, the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is "false". If the point-to-point
attribute of a port is set to shared media, the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is "false". If the point-to-point attribute of a port is set to link connection, the actual point-to-point attribute is "true". Only the port whose point-to-point attribute is "true" can transmit the rapid transition request and response. Edge port The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected only to the LAN. If a port is set to an edge port and if this port can receive the BPDU, the port is actually an edge port. If the port role of this edge port is a designated port, the port can realize the rapid state transition. The rapid transition among port states can be classified into the rapid port state transition of the root port, rapid port state transition of the designated port, and the rapid port state transition of the alternate port and backup port. Rapid port state transition of the root port A root port that does not function as a backup port recently (that is, in a recent period that is less than double times of the Hello Time) transition to the forwarding state without any delay, and this root port enables the designated port that functions as the root port recently (that is, in a recent period that is less than Forward Delay) to transition to the discarding state. Rapid port state transition of the designated port If an edge port is also a designated port, the port state transitions to the forwarding state without any delay. The designated port whose actual point-to-point attribute is "true" can realize the rapid transition among port states through rapid switching between the request process and response process. Rapid port state transition of the alternate port and the backup port The port state of the alternate port and the backup port transitions to the disabled state without any delay.
14.6.5.3 IGMP Snooping

The IGMP Snooping establishes and creates the mapping relations between the group members and switch ports by sensing the IGMP packet. This ensures that the multicast packet is transmitted only to the ports that are connected to the multicast users.
Basic Concepts
l l Router port The router port refers to a port that connects to a multicast router. Multicast member port The multicast member port refers to a port that connects to a multicast group member. The multicast group member refers to a host that joins a multicast group. l Multicast group The multicast group records the mapping relations among the router ports, MAC multicast addresses, and multicast group members. A multicast group is also called a multicast table item. l Maximum query response time When transmitting the IGMP specific query packet to the multicast member port, the 802.1q bridge starts the maximum query response timer. If the bridge does not receive the IGMP response packet within the maximum query response time, the bridge adds one to the no14-246 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
response times of the port. When the no-response times of the port exceeds the pre-set threshold, the bridge deletes the multicast member from the multicast group. l IGMP general query packet The IGMP general query packet refers to a packet that is transmitted by a multicast router to the multicast group members. The IGMP general query packet is used to query which multicast groups have members. l IGMP specific query packet The IGMP specific query packet refers to a packet that is transmitted by a multicast router to the multicast group members. The IGMP specific query packet is used to query whether specific multicast groups have members. l IGMP report packet The IGMP report packet refers to a report packet that is transmitted by a host to a multicast router. The IGMP report packet is used to apply for the joining of a multicast group or to respond to the IGMP query packet.
Processing Flow
The 802.1q bridge processes the IGMP Snooping as follows: 1. If receiving the IGMP general query packet or the IGMP specific query packet, the bridge processes this packet as follows: (1) The bridge checks whether the port that receives the packet is already learnt as the router port. (2) If this port is already learnt, the bridge re-sets the aging time of the router port. If this port is not learnt, the bridge records the port as the router port and starts the aging timer of the port. (3) If the received packet is the IGMP specific query packet and the port that receives this packet is already recorded as the router port, the bridge broadcasts this packet in the specific multicast group and starts the timer for the maximum query response time if the multicast group that is specified in this packet exists. Otherwise, the bridge broadcasts this packet in the VLAN domain of the 802.1q bridge. 2. If receiving the IGMP report packet, the bridge processes this packet as follows: (1) The bridge checks whether the multicast record is already learnt in the VLAN domain of the 802.1q bridge. (2) If this multicast record is not learnt and if the multicast group does not exist, the bridge creates the multicast group and establishes the mapping relations among the router ports, MAC multicast addresses, and multicast group members by considering this port as the multicast member port. If this multicast record is not learnt and this port is not contained in the multicast member ports of the multicast group, the multicast group adds this port as the multicast member port. If this multicast record is learnt, the bridge re-sets the counting of no-response times for this multicast member. 3. If receiving the multicast packet, the bridge processes this packet as follows: l The bridge queries the multicast table that uses the router port as the source port. l If a multicast group that matches the multicast address exists in the multicast table, the bridge forwards the packet to this multicast group. l If no multicast group exists, the bridge discards the multicast packet or broadcasts the packet in the VLAN range depending on the NM setting.
4.
The bridge processes the aging as follows. l If the maximum query response time times out, the bridge adds one to the no-response times of the multicast member. l If the no-response times of a multicast member exceeds the threshold, the bridge deletes this multicast member port. l If a multicast group does not have any multicast member port, the bridge deletes this multicast group.
The 802.1d bridge processes the IGMP Snooping similarly. The difference is as follows: The 802.1d learns the packet by using the SVL mode other than by using the IVL mode, and the 802.1d bridge broadcasts the packet without the restriction of the VLAN domain.
Version
Three versions of IGMP requests are available, and they are, V1, V2, and V3. The Ethernet switching board can process versions V1 and V2. V2 is compatible with V1. Compared with V1, V2 is improved as follows: l Supports the multicast group leave packet. This packet can efficiently decrease the delay generated in the process of deleting the multicast group. l Supports the specific query packet. This packet allows broadcasting the IGMP query packet in the specific multicast group.

Plan the relevant parameters of the Layer 2 switching service according to the actual situation of microwave links.
Prerequisite
You must learn the situation of the microwave links.
Procedure
Step 1 Plan the bridge. Adhere to the following principles when planning the bridge: l Using the 802.1q bridge is a priority. If the conditions of the VLAN that is used by the user are not known and if the user does not require the isolation of the data among VLANs, you can also use the 802.1d bridge. l If the Layer 2 switching services from several branch nodes are converged at a convergence node, set this convergence node to Hub and set these branch nodes to Spoke. In the case of the multipoint-to-multipoint Layer 2 switching service, set each node to Hub. Step 2 Plan the MAC address table. Adhere to the following principles when planning the MAC address table: l If the node that only receives data frames exists in the network, configure the corresponding VLAN unicast entry.
l If certain nodes are not allowed to transmit data frames, configure the corresponding MAC disabled entries for the bridge that accesses these nodes. l Set the aging time of the MAC address table to the same value as the aging time of the interconnected Ethernet equipment. It is recommended that you set the aging time of the MAC address table to 5 minutes (default value). Step 3 Plan the STP/RSTP. Adhere to the following principles when planning the STP/RSTP: l In the service networking process, it is recommended that you prevent the loop from forming in the case of the Layer 2 service and thus avoid enabling the STP or RSTP. l If the loop is already formed in the service networking, you must enable the STP or RSTP. The protocol type should be set according to the requirement of the interconnected Ethernet equipment. It is recommended that you use the RSTP. l The bridge priority, port priority, and port path cost should be set according to the requirement of the interconnected Ethernet equipment. Use the default values, unless otherwise specified. l The Max Age, Hello Time, and Forward Delay parameters should be set to the same values as these parameters of the interconnected Ethernet equipment. Use the default values, unless otherwise specified. Step 4 Plan the IGMP Snooping protocol. Adhere to the following principles when planning the IGMP Snooping protocol: l If the IGMP multicast router exists in the interconnected Ethernet network, enable the IGMP Snooping protocol according to the requirement of the router. Otherwise, do not enable the IGMP Snooping protocol. l Set the processing method for the unknown multicast packet and multicast aging time according to the requirement of the IGMP multicast router. It is recommended that you use the default values. ----End

This topic describes the configuration tasks relevant to the Layer 2 switching feature.
14.6.8 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service

To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the LAN service, perform certain operations to create the bridge and set the attributes of the bridge and to configure the mounted ports of the bridge.
Prerequisite
Precautions
l This task describes only how to create the 802.1d bridge and how to create the 802.1q bridge.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
l l
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the attributes of the bridge according to the bridge type. l Set the attributes of the 802.1q bridge.
l Set the attributes of the 802.1d bridge.
14-250
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Step 4 Configure the mounted ports of the bridge. 1. 2. 3. Click Configure Mount. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. Select a port from the ports listed in Available Mounted Ports, and then click Optional: Repeat Step 4.2 to select other mounted ports. .
4.
Click OK.
Step 5 Optional: If any VCTRUNK is mounted to the VB, configure the VC paths that are bound to the VCTRUNK. 1. 2.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Click Configuration. The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port.
3. 4. 5.
In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Service Direction of the bound paths. Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click Optional: Repeat Step 5.4 to bind other VC paths. .
NOTE
6.
Click OK.
Parameters
Parameter VB Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter is a string that describes the bridge. It is recommended that you set this string to a value that contains the specific purpose of the bridge. l When setting this parameter to 802.1q, create the 802.1q bridge. l When setting this parameter to 802.1d, create the 802.1d bridge. l Using the 802.1q bridge is a priority. If the conditions of the VLAN that is used by the user are not known and if the user does not require the isolation of the data among VLANs, you can also use the 802.1d bridge. l This task describes only how to create the 802.1d bridge and how to create the 802.1q bridge.
Bridge Type
802.1q, 802.1d, 802.1ad (EMS6) 802.1q, 802.1d (EM4T, a logical board EMS4)
802.1q
Parameter Bridge Switch Mode
Value Range IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (802.1q), SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (802.1d)
Default Value IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (802.1q), SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (802.1d)
Description l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. When the bridge uses the IVL mode, all the VLANs correspond to their respective MAC address tables. l If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN tag is checked at the ingress port. If the VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID of the port defined in the VLAN filtering table, the packet is discarded. If the ingress filter is disabled, the preceding described check is not conducted.
Mount Port
l Only the port that is selected as the mounted port of a bridge functions in the packet forwarding process of the bridge. l Set this parameter according to actual situations.
Configurable Ports
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-253
Value Range -
Default Value -
Description Adhere to the following principles to plan and set this parameter: l The capacity of VCTRUNKs should be determined by the actual bandwidth of the service needs. l Bind only the paths in a VC-4 if possible. If the paths of several VC-4s need to be bound, the VC-4s that have the same transmission path take priority. l Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can have only VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths. Hence, when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths, select VC-3 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-3 paths are already bound; when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-12 paths, select VC-12 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-12 paths are already bound. l As the VC-4-1s of the EFT4 board and EMS6 board support only VC-3 paths whereas the VC-4-2s support both VC-12 paths and VC-3 paths, give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1 if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths. l Generally, bidirectional paths are bound.
Activation Status
14.6.9 Modifying the Mounted Port of a Bridge

This operation enables the user to modify the mounted port of a bridge, the enabled state of the mounted port, and Hub/Spoke attribute of the port.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The Ethernet LAN service must be created.
14-254
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Precautions
CAUTION
Modifying the ports that are mounted to the bridge may interrupt the service.
CAUTION
Incorrect configuration of Hub/Spoke attribute interrupts the service. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. The IDU 605 1F/2F supports the Ethernet switching board EMS4 (a logical board).
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the bridge that is already created, and click the Service Mount tab. Step 3 Modify the mounted port of this bridge and the related attributes of the mounted port.
To change the port that is connected to the 802.1d/802.1q bridge, click the corresponding Mount Port. After selecting the corresponding option from the drop-down list, click Apply. To change the port that is connected to the 802.1ad bridge, click Configure Mount. After changing the settings in the dialog box that is displayed, click OK. ----End
Parameters
Parameter VB Port Mount Port Value Range 1 to 14 Unconnected, a specific PORT, a specific VCTRUNK, IFUP1 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the logical port of the bridge. l Only the port that is selected as the mounted port of a bridge functions in the packet forwarding process of the bridge. l Set this parameter according to actual situations. Enabled Set Port Enabled to Enabled. Otherwise, the port cannot forward the service.
14-255
Port Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Hub/Spoke
Value Range Hub, Spoke
Default Value Hub
Description l The Spoke ports cannot access each other. The Hub port and the Spoke port can access each other. The Hub ports can access each other. l Set this parameter according to actual situations.
TAG
Tag Aware
Working Mode
10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation (a logical board EMS4, PORT1PORT3) 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M FullDuplex, AutoNegotiation (a logical board EMS4, PORT4) 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M FullDuplex, AutoNegotiation (EMS6)
Auto-Negotiation
l The Ethernet ports of different types support different working modes. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in the auto-negotiation mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to Auto-Negotiation. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in the full-duplex mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, or 1000M Full-Duplex depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in the half-duplex mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Half-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, or Auto-Negotiation depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side.
Activation Status
14-256
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14.6.10 Creating the VLAN Filter Table

You need to create the VLAN filter table for the bridge when you create the EVPLAN service.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The EVPLAN service must be created.
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the bridge that is already created, and click the VLAN Filtering tab. Step 3 Create the VLAN filter table. 1. 2. 3. 4. Click New. The Create VLAN dialog box is displayed. Set VLAN ID (e.g:1,3-6). Select a port from the ports listed in Available forwarding ports, and then click Optional: Repeat Step 3.3 to select other forwarding ports. .
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-257
5.
Click OK.
----End
Parameters
Parameter VLAN ID (e.g: 1,3-6) Value Range 1-4095 Default Value Description l You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l Set this parameter according to actual situations. selected forwarding ports This parameter indicates the ports that are mounted to a bridge. l The packets can be forwarded between the selected forwarding ports only. l The ports that are in selected forwarding ports can forward only the packet that carries the VLAN ID (e.g: 1,3-6) tag. These ports discard the packet that carries other VLAN tags. l The broadcast packet that is transmitted by the ports in selected forwarding ports is broadcast only to the ports included in selected forwarding ports.
14.6.11 Creating the Entry of a MAC Address Table Manually

The bridge can obtain the dynamic entry of a MAC address table by using the SVL or IVL mode. In addition, you can manually add the entry of a MAC address table. The manually created entries of a MAC address table can be classified into two categories: unicast entry (that is, static entry) and disabled entry (that is, blacklist entry).
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The Ethernet LAN service must be created. The VLAN filter table must be created.
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Create the unicast entry manually. 1. 2. 3. Select the bridge that is already created, and click the VLAN Unicast tab. Click New. The Create VLAN Unicast dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the unicast entry.
4.
Click OK.
Step 3 Optional: Create the disabled entry manually. 1. 2. 3.

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Select the bridge that is already created, and click the Disable MAC Address tab. Click New. The Disable MAC Address Creation dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the disabled entry.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Parameters
Parameter VLAN ID (e.g. 1,3-6) VLAN ID Value Range 1-4095 Default Value Description l In the case of the 802.1d bridge and the 802.1ad bridge, this parameter is invalid if the SVL mode is used. The set entry applies to all the VLANs. l In the case of the 802.1q bridge and the 802.1ad bridge, the set entry applies only to the VLAN whose ID is equal to the set value of this parameter if the IVL mode is used. l Set this parameter according to actual situations. MAC Address Physical Port Each port that is mounted to a bridge Set this parameter according to actual situations. This parameter indicates the Ethernet port corresponding to a MAC address. Set this parameter according to actual situations.
14.6.12 Modifying the Aging Time of the MAC Address Table Entry
In the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a MAC address table entry is 5 minutes by default.
Prerequisite
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree. Step 2 Modify the aging time of the MAC address table entry. 1. 2. Double-click MAC Address Aging Time corresponding to this Ethernet switching board. The MAC Address Aging Time dialog box is displayed. Set the duration and unit of the aging time.
3.
Click OK.
Parameters
Parameter MAC Address Aging Time Value Range 1 Min to 120 Day Default Value 5 Min Description l If one entry is not updated in a certain period, that is, if no new packet from this MAC address is received to enable the re-learning of this MAC address, this entry is automatically deleted. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time. l If this parameter is set to a very large value, the bridge stores excessive MAC address table entries that are outdated, which exhausts the resources of the MAC address forwarding table. l If this parameter is set to a very small value, the bridge may delete the MAC address table entry that is needed, which reduces the forwarding efficiency. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
14.6.13 Querying the Actual Capacity of the MAC Address Table and the Dynamic Entry
By querying the actual capacity of the MAC address table and the dynamic entry, you can learn about the MAC address learning situation of the bridge.
Prerequisite
Precautions
The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6, which supports the querying of the VLAN MAC address table capacity and the self-learning MAC address. The IDU 605 IF/2F supports the Ethernet switching board EMS4 (a logical board), which supports the querying of the self-learning MAC address only.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Query the actual capacity of the MAC address table. 1. 2. 3. Select the bridge that is already created, and click the VLAN MAC Address Table Capacity tab. Click Query. View the actual capacity of the MAC address table.
Step 3 Query the actual capacity of the MAC address table. 1. 2. Select the bridge that is already created, and click the Self-learning MAC Address tab. Optional: Click First page, Previous, or Next to view the dynamic entries of the MAC address table by page.
----End
14.6.14 Configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol

In the case of the Layer 2 service, if the loop is formed, enable the STP or RSTP for the bridge and set bridge parameters and port parameters.
Prerequisite
Precautions
14-262
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Set the enabled status of the protocol. 1. 2. Click the Protocol Enable tab. Configure parameters of the enabled protocol.
3. 1. 2.
Click Apply. Click the Bridge Parameter tab. Set bridge parameters.
Step 3 Optional: Set bridge parameters.
3. 1. 2.
Click Apply. Click the Port Parameter tab. Set port parameters.
Step 4 Optional: Set port parameters.
3. 1. 2.
Click Apply. Click the Point to Point Attribute tab. Set the point-to-point attribute.
Step 5 Optional: If you are enabling the RSTP, set the point-to-point attribute of the Ethernet port.
3.
Click Apply.
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-263
Parameters
Parameter Protocol Enabled Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled Description l This parameter determines whether to enable the spanning tree protocol. l It is recommended that you do not enable the STP or RSTP in the service networking process, because this can prevent the Layer 2 service from forming the loop. l If the loop is already formed in the service networking, you must start the STP or RSTP. Protocol Type STP, RSTP RSTP l This parameter is valid only when Protocol Enabled is set to Enabled. l The protocol type should be set according to the requirement of the interconnected Ethernet equipment. Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value. Priority (Bridge Parameter) 0-61440 32768 l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicates the priority of the bridge. l The smaller the value of this parameter, the higher the priority and the higher the possibility that the bridge is selected as the root bridge. l If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge. Max Age (s) 6-40 20 l This parameter indicates the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. l The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU, which indicates that the network diameter is greater. When the value of this parameter is greater, it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced.
14-264
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Hello Time (s)
Value Range 1-10
Default Value 2
Description l This parameter indicates the interval of transmitting the CBPDU packet of the bridge. l The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.
Forward Delay (s)
4-30
15
l This parameter indicates the holding time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. l The greater the value, the longer the delay time of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.
TxHoldCout (per second) Priority (Port Parameters)
1-10
This parameter indicates the number of times the port transmits the CBPDU in every second. l The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. l The smaller the value of this parameter, the higher the priority.
0-240
128
Port Path Cost
1-65535
l This parameter indicates the status of the network that the port is connected to. l In the case of the bridges on both ends of the path, set this parameter to the same value.
Admin Edge Attribute
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter is valid only when the RSTP is used. l This parameter determines whether to set the port to an edge port. The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected only to the LAN. The edge port receives the BPDU and does not transmit the BPDU. l This parameter is set to Enabled only when the Ethernet port of the Ethernet board is directly connected to the data communication terminal equipment, such as a computer. In other cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-265
Parameter Protocol Enabled
Description l Specifies whether the STP/RSTP protocol is enabled for the port. l When this parameter is set to Disabled, the BPDU cannot be processed and transmitted. l It is recommended that this parameter adopts the default value.
Auto Edge Detection
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter is valid only when Admin Edge Attribute is set to Enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, if the bridge detects that this port is connected to the port of other bridges, the RSTP considers this port as a nonedge port. l If Admin Edge Attribute is set to Enabled, set this parameter to Enabled. In other cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Point-to-Point Attribute
Adaptive connection, Link connection, Shared media
Adaptive connection
l This parameter is valid only when the RSTP is used. l If this parameter is set to Adaptive connection, the bridge determines the actual point-to-point attribute of the port according to the actual working mode of the port. If the actual working mode of the port is full-duplex, the actual pointto-point attribute of the port is "true". If the actual working mode of the port is half-duplex, the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is "false". l If this parameter is set to Link connection, the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is "true". l If this parameter is set to Shared media, the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is "false". l Only the port whose point-to-point attribute is "true" can transmit the rapid transition request and response. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
14-266
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
l In the service networking process, it is recommended that you prevent the loop from forming in the case of the Layer 2 service and thus avoid enabling the STP or RSTP. l Because the RSTP and STP are complicated, it is recommended that you negotiate with the engineer in charge of maintaining the opposite Ethernet equipment and set the related parameters as instructed, before enabling the STP or RSTP.
14.6.15 Querying the Running Information About the Spanning Tree Protocol
The running information about the spanning tree protocol includes the bridge running information and port running information.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The Ethernet LAN service must be created. The STP or RSTP of the bridge must be enabled.
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree. Step 2 Query the bridge running information. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Click the Bridge Running Info tab. Click Query. View the bridge running information. Click the Port Running Info tab. Click Query. View the port running information.
Step 3 Query the port running information.
----End
14.6.16 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol

If the bridge accesses a LAN where the IGMP multicast server exists, you can enable the IGMP Snooping protocol and configure the method for processing the unknown multicast packet.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The Ethernet LAN service must be created. The VLAN filter table must be created.
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Protocol Enable tab. Step 3 Set the information related to the IGMP Snooping protocol.
Parameters
Parameter Protocol Enable Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled Description l This parameter determines whether to enable the IGMP Snooping protocol. l If the bridge accesses a LAN where the IGMP multicast server exists, you can enable the IGMP Snooping protocol according to the requirement.
14-268
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter The Discarded Tag of the Packet Excluded in the Multicast Group
Description l This parameter is valid only when Protocol Enabled is set to Enabled. l If the 802.1q bridge or the 802.1ad bridge receives a multicast packet whose multicast address has no mapping item in the multicast table (that is, this multicast packet is an unknown multicast packet), this parameter indicates the method for processing this packet. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, The unknown multicast packet is discarded. l When this parameter is set to Disabled, the unknown multicast packet is broadcast in the VLAN. l Set this parameter according to the requirement of the IGMP multicast server.
14.6.17 Querying the Running Information About the IGMP Snooping Protocol
The running information about the IGMP Snooping protocol includes the current multicast router port and multicast table item.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The Ethernet LAN service must be created. The IGMP Snooping protocol of the bridge must be enabled.
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree. Step 2 Query the information about the router port. 1. 2.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Click the Multicast Router Port Management tab. Click Query.

3. 1. 2. 3.
View the information about the router port. Click the Multicast Table Item tab. Click Query. View the information about the multicast table item.
Step 3 Query the information about the multicast table item.
----End
14.6.18 Modifying the Aging Time of the Multicast Table Item

In the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a multicast table item is 8 minutes by default.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The Ethernet LAN service must be created. The IGMP Snooping protocol of the bridge must be enabled.
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Multicast Aging Time tab. Step 3 Modify the aging time of the multicast table item.
14-270
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameters
Parameter Multicast Aging Time (Min) Value Range 1-120 Default Value 8 Description l When a table item is not updated in a certain period (that is, no IGMP request from this multicast address is received), this table item is automatically deleted. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time. l If this parameter is set to a very large value, the bridge stores excessive multicast table items that are outdated, which exhausts the resources of the multicast table. l If this parameter is set to a very small value, the bridge may delete the multicast table item that is needed, which reduces the forwarding efficiency.
14.6.19 Querying the Multicast Router Port

The multicast router port refers to the port that transmits the IGMP query packet to routers. The Ethernet data board considers the port that receives the IGMP query packet as the router port.
Prerequisite
l l l l You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. The Ethernet data board supports the IGMP Snooping protocol. The Ethernet LAN services must be created. The IGMP Snooping protocol must be enabled.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the Ethernet data board. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Multicast Router Port Management tab. Step 3 Click Query to query the multicast router ports. ----End
14.6.20 Configuring the Static Multicast Table Item

You can manually specify the static multicast table item that can be forwarded to the corresponding port in multicast mode.
Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet data board supports the IGMP Snooping protocol. The Ethernet LAN services must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the Ethernet data board. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Static Multicast Table tab. Click New to display the Create Static Multicast Item dialog box. Step 3 Configure the parameters of the static multicast item. Step 4 Click OK or Apply. ----End
14.6.21 Querying the Multicast Table Item

You can query the multicast item that the IGMP Snooping protocol dynamically learns and the static multicast item that is manually created.
Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. The Ethernet data board supports the IGMP Snooping protocol. The Ethernet LAN services must be created
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the Ethernet data board. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the Multicast Table Item tab. Step 3 Click Query. ----End
14.7 Configuring QoS

In legacy IP networks, all packets are processed according to the first in first out (FIFO) and best effort strategies. This method cannot meet the requirement of the new service for the bandwidth, delay, and delay jitter. Hence, the QoS technology is developed. 14.7.1 Feature Description QoS refers to the ability of the communication network to ensure the expected service quality in the aspects of bandwidth, delay, delay jitter, and packet loss ratio, and thus to ensure that the request and response from the user or the request and response from the application meet the expected service class.
14.7.2 Basic Concepts This topic describes the basic concepts that you need to be familiar with before you use the QoS feature. 14.7.3 Availability The QoS feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 14.7.4 Relation with Other Features In the case of the 605 1F/2F Ethernet port, the broadcast packet suppression function and the CAR function are mutually exclusive, and cannot be used at the same time. 14.7.5 Realization Principle This topic describes the flow of processing the QoS, and algorithms that are used for the CAR, traffic shaping, and egress queue scheduling. 14.7.6 Planning Guide Plan related parameters according to the specific application of the QoS feature. 14.7.7 Configuration Guide This topic describes the configuration tasks relevant to the QoS feature. 14.7.8 Configuring the Clock Sources This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned the clock synchronization scheme, thus ensuring that all the NEs in a network trace the same clock. 14.7.9 Configuring the Ethernet Clock Source Configure the Ethernet clock source of the IDU 605 1F/2F according to the planned clock synchronization strategy to ensure that all the NEs in the network trace the same clock.

QoS refers to the ability of the communication network to ensure the expected service quality in the aspects of bandwidth, delay, delay jitter, and packet loss ratio, and thus to ensure that the request and response from the user or the request and response from the application meet the expected service class. Newly emerging services have special requirements for transmission performances such as the bandwidth, delay, and delay jitter. The traditional network in the best effort service mode, however, does not provide complete service capabilities. The QoS technology is developed to solve this problem. To support voice, video, and data services that have different service requirements, a network must be able to differentiate communication types and thus provide relevant services. Figure 14-77 shows, when congestion occurs on a network, how packets are transmitted through an interface that does not support QoS. Figure 14-77 FIFO queue
Packets to be transmitted through the interface Queue FIFO Out-of-queue grooming Packets transmitted out of the interface
The urgency of packets decreases from left to right.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-273
All packets to be transmitted through this interface enter the tail of the FIFO queue according to the sequence of their arrival at the interface. The interface transmits these packets from the head of the queue. The packets are not differentiated during the transmission, and the quality of packet transmission is not guaranteed. Figure 14-77 uses the PQ to support QoS packet transmission. Figure 14-78 SP queue
Packets to be transmitted through the interface Queue Classification Queue 8 Queue 7 Queue 6 Priority Highest High Low Out-of-queue grooming Packets transmitted out of the interface
Queue 1 Lowest
After packets arrive at the interface, the packets are classified first and then enter the tail of a queue according to the classification. The interface transmits the packets in the queue with high priority first, and then transmits the packets in the queue with low priority. In this way, the packets with higher priority are always transmitted first and these packets have a short delay. In addition, the performance specifications of these packets, including the packet loss ratio and the delay jitter, can also be guaranteed. The Ethernet switching board provides the following QoS functions: flow classification, committed access rate (CAR), class of service (CoS), and traffic shaping. These functions comply with IEEE 802.1p, RFC 2697, RFC 2698, RFC 2309, RFC 2597, and RFC 2598.
...

This topic describes the basic concepts that you need to be familiar with before you use the QoS feature. 14.7.2.1 Flow Classification Flow refers to a collection of packets with the same characteristics. In the case of the Ethernet switching board, the flow refers to a packet collection that corresponds to the same QoS operations. Flow classification means, according to certain rules, classifying a packet into several flow types on which different QoS operations are performed. Flow classification is a prerequisite and basis for the QoS operations. 14.7.2.2 CAR CAR is a type of traffic policing technology. After the flow classification, the CAR assesses the rate of the traffic in a certain period (including the rate in the long term and in the short term). The CAR sets the packet whose rate does not exceed the specified rate to high priority and discards the packet whose rate exceeds the specified rate or downgrades this type of packet, thus restricting the traffic into the transmission network.
14.7.2.3 CoS By using the CoS, the packets in a flow can be scheduled to different queues of different priorities and can be processed according to the priority of each queue. This ensures that the packets of different priorities can be processed according to different QoS requirements. 14.7.2.4 Traffic Shaping The traffic shaping can restrict the traffic and burst of a connection in a network, and thus enables the packet to be transmitted at an even rate. The Ethernet switching board shapes the irregular traffic or the traffic that does not conform to the specified traffic characteristics based on the generic traffic shaping (GTS) technology.
14.7.2.1 Flow Classification

Flow refers to a collection of packets with the same characteristics. In the case of the Ethernet switching board, the flow refers to a packet collection that corresponds to the same QoS operations. Flow classification means, according to certain rules, classifying a packet into several flow types on which different QoS operations are performed. Flow classification is a prerequisite and basis for the QoS operations. The flow type is based on the associated Ethernet service type of the flow. The flow types that are supported by Ethernet switching board EMS6 are as follows: l Port flow The packets from a certain port are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the line service that uses this port as the service source. The Layer 2 switching service can also be classified as a port flow. l Port + VLAN flow The packets that are from a certain port with a specified VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the line service that uses this port + VLAN as the service source. l Port + S-VLAN flow The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified S-VLAN are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the EVPL service (based on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on the 802.1ad bridge) that uses this port + S-VLAN as the service source. l Port + C-VLAN + S-VLAN flow The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified C-VLAN + S-VLAN are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the EVPL service (based on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on the 802.1ad bridge) that uses this port + C-VLAN + S-VLAN as the service source.
NOTE
IDU 605 1F/2F supports only port flow.
14.7.2.2 CAR
CAR is a type of traffic policing technology. After the flow classification, the CAR assesses the rate of the traffic in a certain period (including the rate in the long term and in the short term). The CAR sets the packet whose rate does not exceed the specified rate to high priority and discards the packet whose rate exceeds the specified rate or downgrades this type of packet, thus restricting the traffic into the transmission network. The Ethernet switching board processes the flow whose CAR feature is enabled as follows:
When the rate of packets is not more than the set committed information rate (CIR), these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion. When the rate of packets exceeds the set peak information rate (PIR), the packets whose rate is higher than the PIR are directly discarded. When the rate of packets is higher than the CIR but is not higher than the PIR, the packets whose rate is higher than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are colored yellow, which enables these packets to be discarded first in case of network congestion. When the rate of packets that pass the restriction of the CAR is not higher than CIR in a certain period, certain packets can burst and these packets can be forwarded first even in case of network congestion. The maximum traffic of burst packets is determined by the committed burst size (CBS). The CBS contains two parts: fixed part and variable part. The fixed part is determined by the CIR and the variable part is set on the NM. When the rate of the packets that pass the restriction of the CAR is higher than the CIR but is not higher than the PIR, certain packets can burst and are marked yellow, which enables these packets to be discarded first in case of network congestion. The maximum traffic of burst packets is determined by the maximum burst size (MBS). The MBS contains two parts: fixed part and variable part. The fixed part is determined by the PIR and the variable part is set on the NM.
NOTE
l l
The CIR and PIR of IDU 605 1F/2F must be set to be the same and the CBS and PBS cannot be set.
14.7.2.3 CoS
By using the CoS, the packets in a flow can be scheduled to different queues of different priorities and can be processed according to the priority of each queue. This ensures that the packets of different priorities can be processed according to different QoS requirements. Each port on the Ethernet switching board EMS6 that is supported by the IDU 620 provides eight outgoing queues with the CoS priorities from 0 to 7. If the traffic shaping feature of all the queues is enabled or disabled, the queue with CoS priority 7 is a strict priority (SP) queue, and the other queues with CoS priorities 0 to 6 are weighted round robin (WRR) queues. The weight proportion of these WRR queues (with priorities from 0 to 6 respectively) is 1:2:4:8:16:32:64. If the traffic shaping feature of certain queues is enabled, according to the preset CIR, bandwidth is allocated first to the queue whose traffic shaping feature is enabled. By using the SP + WRR algorithm, the remaining bandwidth is allocated to the queues whose traffic shaping is disabled. The Ethernet port on the IFH2 board that is supported by the IDU 620 provides four outgoing queues. The corresponding CoS priorities are 0-3 respectively and the queue scheduling mode is SP. The higher the CoS priority, the higher the queue priority. The IFH2 board supports only the CoS type of VLAN priority. The data frames that do not carry the VLAN tag are scheduled to the queue with the lowest priority by default. The Ethernet port on the IDU 605 1F/2F provides four outgoing queues. The corresponding CoS priorities are 0-3 respectively. The higher the CoS priority, the higher the queue priority. The queue scheduling mode is SP or WRR (the weight proportion is 1:2:4:8). These two scheduling modes cannot be used at the same time. Table 14-58 lists the CoS types that are supported by the equipment.
14-276
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Table 14-58 CoS Type CoS Type Description IDU 620 EMS6 Simple If the CoS type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified outgoing queue. If the CoS type of a flow is set to VLAN priority, the packets in this flow are scheduled to a specified outgoing queue according to user priority in the VLAN tag. If the CoS type of a flow is set to differentiated services code point (DSCP), the packets in this flow are scheduled to a specified outgoing queue according to the DSCP in the IP tags of these packets. Supports IFH2 Does not support Does not support IDU 605 1F/2F
VLAN priority
Supports
Supports
Supports
DSCP
Supports
Does not support
Supports
NOTE
In the case of the simple type, the maximum number of CoSs supported by the EMS6 board is 8. In the case of the VLAN priority type, the maximum number of CoSs supported by the EMS6 board is 6. In the case of the DSCP type, the maximum number of CoSs supported by the EMS6 board is 6. The EMS4 board (a logical board) that is used on the IDU 605 1F/2F supports one board-level CoS.
14.7.2.4 Traffic Shaping

The traffic shaping can restrict the traffic and burst of a connection in a network, and thus enables the packet to be transmitted at an even rate. The Ethernet switching board shapes the irregular
traffic or the traffic that does not conform to the specified traffic characteristics based on the generic traffic shaping (GTS) technology. In the case of the port queue whose traffic shaping feature is enabled, the Ethernet switching board processes the packets as follows before they enter the queue: l l l When the rate of the packets is not more than the set CIR, these packets directly enter the egress queue. When the rate of the packets is more than the set PIR, these packets enter the buffer. When the buffer overflows, the packets are discarded. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR enter the buffer of the CIR. When the buffer overflows, these packets are marked yellow and enter the egress queue. In this case, these packets are discarded in the case of queue congestion. When the rate of the packets that pass the restriction of the traffic shaping in a certain period is not more than the CIR, certain burst packets enter the egress queue. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the CBS. The value of the CBS is determined by the CIR, and cannot be set. When the rate of the packets that pass the restriction of the traffic shaping in a certain period is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, certain burst packets enter the buffer of the CIR. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the MBS. The value of the MBS is determined by the PIR, and cannot be set.
As is evident from the preceding processing mechanism, the difference of the traffic shaping from the CAR is as follows: l l In the processing of the CAR, the packet that does not conform to the traffic characteristics is downgraded in priority or directly discarded. In the processing of the traffic shaping, the packet that does not conform to the traffic characteristics is stored in the buffer. The packet is downgraded in priority or directly discarded only when the buffer overflows.
14.7.3 Availability
The QoS feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 14-59 Availability of the QoS Feature Feature QoS Traffic classification Applicable Board EMS6, EFP6 EM4T CAR EMS6, EFP6 EM4T CoS EMS6, EFP6 EM4T IFH2
14-278 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Applicable Equipment IDU 620 IDU 605 IDU 620 IDU 605 IDU 620 IDU 605 IDU 620
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Feature Traffic shaping
Applicable Board EMS6, EFP6
Applicable Equipment IDU 620

In the case of the 605 1F/2F Ethernet port, the broadcast packet suppression function and the CAR function are mutually exclusive, and cannot be used at the same time.

This topic describes the flow of processing the QoS, and algorithms that are used for the CAR, traffic shaping, and egress queue scheduling. 14.7.5.1 CAR The CAR uses the dual token bucket three color marker algorithm. 14.7.5.2 Traffic Shaping The traffic shaping uses the dual token bucket three color marker algorithm that is similar to the algorithm used by the CAR. The buffer queue, however, is added before the token bucket in the algorithm used by the traffic shaping. 14.7.5.3 Egress Queue Scheduling An egress guarantees the scheduling priority, probability, and bandwidth by using the shaping and the CoS methods.
14.7.5.1 CAR
The CAR uses the dual token bucket three color marker algorithm.
Token Bucket Algorithm

Figure 14-79 shows the basic principle of the token bucket algorithm. Figure 14-79 Basic principle of the token bucket algorithm
Tokens are placed into the token bucket at a specified rate
...
Tokens
Packets that need to be sent from this port
Packets that leave this port
Classification
Token bucket
Packets are discarded or processed in another way
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-279
In this algorithm, the token bucket is a container that has a certain capacity for storing tokens. The tokens are placed into the bucket at a specified rate. When the number of tokens in the bucket exceeds the capacity of the bucket, the number of tokens no longer increases. A token indicates certain packet traffic. When the packets are transmitted, certain tokens are removed from the buckets according to the length of the packet. When the number of tokens that are stored in the token bucket cannot support the transmitting of the packets, these packets are discarded or processed in another way. When the token bucket is filled with tokens, the packets that are represented by these tokens can be transmitted, which allows the transmission of the burst data. Hence, the traffic of the burst packets is determined by the capacity of the bucket.
Dual Token Bucket Three Color Marker Algorithm

Figure 14-80 shows the basic principle of the dual token bucket three color marker algorithm that is used by the CAR. Figure 14-80 Basic principle of the algorithm that is used by the CAR
...
PIR
...
CIR
Classification
Tp
Tc
This algorithm uses two token buckets Tc and Tp, and marks colors for packets according to the situations when these packets pass the token bucket.
NOTE
In the case of the EMS6 board, the marked colors are only internal tags and do not change original priorities of packets.
The parameters of these two token buckets are as follows: l l The packet is placed into the Tc token bucket at the rate of CIR, and the capacity of the Tc token bucket equals the CBS. The packet is placed into the Tp token bucket at the rate of PIR, and the capacity of the Tp token bucket equals the MBS.
A packet is marked as follows: l If a packet obtains the Tc token, this packet is marked green. This kind of packet can pass the restriction of the CAR and is forwarded first even in the case of network congestion.
If a packet obtains the Tp token but does not obtain the Tc token, this packet is marked yellow. This kind of packet can pass the restriction of the CAR but is discarded first in the case of network congestion.
If a packet does not obtain the Tp token, this packet is marked red. This kind of packet is directly discarded.
14.7.5.2 Traffic Shaping

The traffic shaping uses the dual token bucket three color marker algorithm that is similar to the algorithm used by the CAR. The buffer queue, however, is added before the token bucket in the algorithm used by the traffic shaping. Figure 14-81 shows the basic principle of the dual token bucket three color marker algorithm that is used by the traffic shaping.
NOTE
In the case of the EMS6 board, the marked colors are only internal tags and do not change original priorities of packets.
Figure 14-81 Basic principle of the algorithm that is used by the traffic shaping
Tp buffer queue
Tp token bucket
This algorithm uses two token buckets Tc and Tp, and places packets into different queues according to the situations when these packets pass the token bucket. The parameters of these two token buckets are as follows: l l The packet is placed into the Tc token bucket at the rate of CIR, and the capacity of the Tc token bucket equals the CBS. The packet is placed into the Tp token bucket at the rate of PIR, and the capacity of the Tp token bucket equals the EBS.
...
PIR
Tc buffer queue
Tc token bucket
...
CIR
A packet is placed into a queue as follows: l l If a packet obtains the Tc token, this packet is directly placed into the egress queue. If a packet obtains the Tp token but does not obtain the Tc token, this packet is placed into the Tc buffer queue.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
When the Tc buffer queue overflows, the overflow packet is marked yellow and then enters the egress queue, which indicates that the packet is discarded first in the case of network congestion. l If a packet does not obtain the Tp token, this packet is placed into the Tp buffer queue. When the Tp buffer queue overflows, the overflow packet is directly discarded.
14.7.5.3 Egress Queue Scheduling

An egress guarantees the scheduling priority, probability, and bandwidth by using the shaping and the CoS methods.
Basic Concepts
Port available bandwidth: The system allocates bandwidth to a port. l For an external Ethernet port, the port available bandwidth is determined by the working mode of the port. For example, if the working mode of a port is 1000M full duplex, the available bandwidth of the port is 1000 Mbit/s. For a VCTRUNK port, the available bandwidth is determined by the total bandwidth of the virtual concatenation (VC) paths that is bound to the port virtual concatenation group (VCG).
SP Queue Scheduling Algorithm

Figure 14-82 illustrates the strict-priority (SP) queue scheduling algorithm. Figure 14-82 SP queue
Packets to be transmitted through the interface Queue Classification Queue 8 Queue 7 Queue 6 Priority Highest High Low Out-of-queue grooming Packets transmitted out of the interface
Queue 1 Lowest
The SP queue scheduling algorithm is designed for key service applications. A key service must be processed with the highest priority when congestion occurs so that the response delay can be shortened. This is an important feature for a key service. For example, a port provides eight outgoing queues, which are prioritized from 7 to 0 in a descending order. During the SP queue scheduling, packets are transmitted in a descending order of priority. When a queue with a higher priority is empty, the packets in the queue with a lower priority can be transmitted. In this way, if packets of key service are put into queues with high priority and packets of non-key services (such as E-mail service) into queues with lower priority, the packets
...
of key service can be sent first and the packets of non-key service are sent when the data of key service is not processed. The disadvantage of the SP scheduling algorithm is as follows: if there are packets existing in the queues with high priority when congestion occurs, packets in the queues with low priority cannot be transmitted all the time.
WRR Scheduling Algorithm

Figure 14-83 illustrates the weighted round robin (WRR) scheduling algorithm. Figure 14-83 WRR scheduling algorithm
Packets to be transmitted through the interface Queue Classification Queue 4 Queue 3 Queue 2 Queue 1 Weight 50 30 10 10 Out-of-queue grooming Packets transmitted out of the interface
The WRR scheduling algorithm divides each port into several outgoing queues and schedules the packets in these queues in turn. This ensures that each queue obtains a certain service period. For example, a port provides four queues. In a descending order of priority, the WRR configure the w3, w2, w1, and w0 weights for the four queues respectively. Each weight stands for the proportion of resources that the relevant queue can obtain from the total resources. If this port is a 100M port and the weights of its four queues are set to 50, 30, 10, and 10 (corresponding to w3, w2, w1, and w0 respectively) by the WRR scheduling algorithm, then a minimum of 10 Mbit/s bandwidth is guaranteed for the queue with the lowest priority. This prevents the disadvantage that in the SP queue scheduling, packets in the queues with lower priority may fail to obtain service for a long time. Another advantage of WRR scheduling is that, although scheduling of multiple queues is performed in the polling manner, time segment allocated to each queue is not fixed. That is, when a queue is empty, the packets of the next queue are scheduled immediately. In this way, the bandwidth resources can be fully utilized.
SP+WRR scheduling algorithm

As shown in Figure 14-84, by combining the advantages of the SP and WRR algorithms, the SP+WRR scheduling algorithm sets one of the outgoing queues as an SP queue. In this way, packets in this queue are always scheduled first, which ensures that the key services are processed first. The other outgoing queues adopt the WRR scheduling algorithm so that each queue can obtain a certain service time segment.
Figure 14-84 SP+WRR scheduling algorithm

Queues Packets that need to be sent from this port
Classification
Weight Strict priority 64 32 Egress scheduling Packets that leave this port
Queue 8 Queue 7 Queue 6
Queue 1
Queue where packets are arranged according to emergency level in a descending order from left to right
Use the port that supports eight outgoing queues as an example. l Queue 8 (whose CoS value is 7) uses the SP algorithm. When there are packets existing in this queue, these packets are transmitted first. When there is no packet existing in this queue, the packets in other queues can be transmitted. Service time segment is allocated to each queue of queues 1-7 (whose CoS values 0-6 respectively) according to the weight proportions 1:2:4:8:16:32:64, and at each time segment the packets in the corresponding queue are transmitted. If there is no packet existing in the queue that corresponds to a time segment, this time segment is neglected and the packets in the queue that corresponds to the next time segment are transmitted. For example, if the port that supports four queues is used as an example and the four queues are weighted as follows: 1:2:4:8, the WRR allocates the service time segments in the form of cyclic sequence with a period 432443414342434.
...
1
If the traffic shaping of some queues is enabled, according to the set CIR, the bandwidth is first allocated to the queue whose traffic shaping is enabled. By using the preceding algorithm, the remaining bandwidth is allocated to the queue whose traffic shaping is disabled. For example, the traffic shaping of queues 5 and 7 is enabled, the preset CIR of both queues is 10 Mbit/s, and the total port bandwidth is 25 Mbit/s. In this case, the service time segments are allocated to queue 5, queue 7, and the remaining queues according to the WRR algorithm in which the weight proportion is 10:10:5. When a service time segment corresponding to the collection of the remaining queues arrives, this service time segment is allocated to the remaining queues based on the SP + WRR algorithms. That is, this service time segment is first allocated to queue 8, and then is allocated to queues 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6 according to the weight proportion 1:2:4:8:32 of these queues. When congestion occurs on the outgoing queues, the packet that is colored yellow in the CAR or in the traffic shaping is first discarded.

Plan related parameters according to the specific application of the QoS feature.
14-284
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Prerequisite
l l You must know the type and specific situation of the Ethernet service that requires the QoS application. You must know the functions of the QoS feature.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the proper QoS function according to the requirement. Adhere to the following principles when selecting the QoS function: l First select the CAR. This can control the service traffic on the ingress side. l In the case of the important service that requires to improve the traffic fluctuation, select the traffic shaping function. l If differentiated services are required for different service types or different user classes, select the CoS function. Step 2 Optional: Plan the CAR. Adhere to the following principles when planning the CAR: l Bind a CAR to a flow. Do not bind a CAR to multiple flows. l The sum of CIRs of all the CARs that are associated with a particular PORT or VCTRUNK should not exceed the physical bandwidth of that particular PORT or VCTRUNK. Step 3 Optional: Plan the traffic shaping and CoS. Adhere to the following principles when planning the traffic shaping and CoS: l Allocate the service of low delay or the service of low delay commitment (such as the signaling data, VoIP data, and network management protocol packet) into the queues of strict priority. l Allocate the service that does not require low delay or that does not provide low delay commitment (such as the Internet service) into the WRR queue. l The sum of CIRs of all the queues that are associated with a particular PORT or VCTRUNK should not exceed the physical bandwidth of that particular PORT or VCTRUNK. l Plan the parameters of the traffic shaping according to the traffic characteristics, thus preventing the buffer from overflowing frequently. ----End

This topic describes the configuration tasks relevant to the QoS feature. 14.7.7.1 Creating a Flow In the case of the Ethernet switching board, a flow refers to the collection of packets on which the same QoS operation is performed. Creating a flow is the prerequisite for performing CAR and CoS operations. 14.7.7.2 Creating the CAR CAR is a type of traffic policing technologies. After the flow classification, the CAR assesses the rate of the traffic in a certain period (including in the long term and in the short term). The CAR sets the packet whose rate does not exceed the specified rate to high priority and discards
the packet whose rate exceeds the specified rate or downgrades this kind of packet, thus restricting the traffic into the transmission network. 14.7.7.3 Creating the CoS By using the CoS, the packets in a flow can be scheduled to different queues of different priorities and can be processed according to the priority of each queue. This ensures that the packets of different priorities can be processed according to different QoS requirements. 14.7.7.4 Binding the CAR/CoS To enable the CAR or CoS function, bind the corresponding flow to the created CAR/CoS. 14.7.7.5 Configuring the Traffic Shaping The traffic shaping can restrict the traffic and burst of a connection in a network, and thus enables the packets to be transmitted at an even rate. 14.7.7.6 Configuring the CoS of the IFH2 Board The IFH2 board supports scheduling packets into different queues according to the corresponding user priority levels in the VLAN tags. 14.7.7.7 Setting the Queue Scheduling Mode The IDU 605 1F/2F supports the setting of the board-level queue scheduling mode of the EMS4 board (a logical board). 14.7.7.8 Creating a Flow by Using a Template This topic describes how to create a flow by using a template. The use of a template improves the efficiency of creating a flow. 14.7.7.9 Modifying CAR Parameters The committed access rate (CAR) is the traffic policing technology that is used to check the traffic rate within a specific period (a long time or short time) after the flow classification. The CAR allocates the packets whose rates do not exceed the rate limit of the packets of higher priority, and discards or downgrades the packets whose rates exceed the rate limit. In this process, restriction of the service access to the transport network is realized. That is, you can adjust the rate limit by adjusting the parameters such as the committed information rate and the peak information rate. 14.7.7.10 Modifying CoS Parameters The class of service (CoS) schedules packets into different priority queues and processes the packets according to the priority levels of the specific queues. Modifying the CoS parameters may affect the priority of the egress packets.
14.7.7.1 Creating a Flow

In the case of the Ethernet switching board, a flow refers to the collection of packets on which the same QoS operation is performed. Creating a flow is the prerequisite for performing CAR and CoS operations.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The associated Ethernet service must be created.
14-286
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Context
This topic describes how to create a flow without a QoS template. For details of how to create a flow by using a QoS template, see14.7.7.8 Creating a Flow by Using a Template.
Precautions
The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. The IDU 605 1F/2F supports the Ethernet switching board EMS4 (a logical board), which supports the creation of port flow only.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Flow Configuration tab. Step 3 Click New. The New Flow dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the flow parameters.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-287
Parameters
Parameter Flow Type Value Range Port Flow, Port +VLAN Flow, Port +SVLAN Flow, Port+CVLAN +SVLAN Flow Default Value Port Flow Description Port flow: The packets from a certain port are classified as a type of flow. The Ethernet service associated with this flow type is the line service or Layer 2 switching service that uses this port as the service source. Port+VLAN flow: The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the line service that uses this port+VLAN as the service source. Port+SVLAN flow: The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified SVLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the EVPL service (based on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on the 802.1ad bridge) that uses this port + S-VLAN as the service source. Port+CVLAN+SVLAN flow: The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified CVLAN+SVLAN are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the EVPL service (based on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on the 802.1ad bridge) that uses this port + C-VLAN + S-VLAN as the service source. Port PORT1-PORT6, VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK8 (EMS6) PORT1-PORT4 (EMS4) VLAN ID 1-4095 1 PORT1 l When the associated service is the line service, set this parameter to the source port or sink port of the associated Ethernet service. l When the associated service is the Layer 2 switching service, set this parameter to a mounted port of the bridge. l This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is set to Port+VLAN Flow. l Set this parameter to the source VLAN of the associated Ethernet service. C-VLAN 1-4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is set to Port+SVLAN+CVLAN Flow. l Set this parameter to the source CVLAN of the associated Ethernet service.
14-288
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter S-VLAN
Value Range 1-4095
Default Value 1
Description l This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is set to Port+SVLAN Flow or set to Port+SVLAN+CVLAN Flow l Set this parameter to the source S-VLAN of the associated Ethernet service.
Postrequisite
After creating a flow, bind it to the corresponding CAR or CoS operation as required.
14.7.7.2 Creating the CAR

CAR is a type of traffic policing technologies. After the flow classification, the CAR assesses the rate of the traffic in a certain period (including in the long term and in the short term). The CAR sets the packet whose rate does not exceed the specified rate to high priority and discards the packet whose rate exceeds the specified rate or downgrades this kind of packet, thus restricting the traffic into the transmission network.
Prerequisite
Precautions
The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. The IDU 605 1F/2F supports the Ethernet switching board EMS4 (a logical board). In the case of the EMS4 board, the values of the CIR and PIR should be set the same and the setting of the CBS and MBS is not supported.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the CAR Configuration tab. Step 3 Click New. The New Car dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the CAR parameters.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-289
Parameters
Parameter CAR ID Value Range 1-65535 (EMS6) 1-1024 (a logical board EMS4) Enabled/Disabled Enabled, Disabled Disabled Default Value Description This parameter identifies a CAR operation, and is used to bind a flow to an associated CAR operation. This parameter determines whether to enable the CAR operation performed on the flow bound to the CAR. l When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion. l The value of this parameter should not be more than the PIR.
Committed Information Rate (kbit/s)
An integer ranging from 0 to 1048576, with a step of 64
14-290
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter Committed Burst Size (kbyte)a
Value Range 0-1024
Default Value 0
Description When the rate of the packets that pass the restriction of the CAR is not more than the CIR in a certain period, certain packets can burst and can pass the restriction of the CAR. These packets can be forwarded first even in the case of network congestion. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the CBS. Note that the CBS has an inherent size, and this parameter indicates the increment value only. The inherent size of the CBS is determined by the CIR. The greater the CIR, the greater the CBS. l When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, these packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow, which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion. l The value of this parameter should not be more than the bandwidth at the port.
Peak Information Rate (kbit/s)a
An integer ranging from 0 to 1048576, with a step of 64
Maximum Burst Size (kbyte)a
0-1024
When the rate of the packets that pass the restriction of the CAR is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, certain packets can burst and are marked yellow, which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the set MBS. Note that the MBS has an inherent size, and this parameter indicates the increment value only. The inherent size of the MBS is determined by the PIR. The greater the PIR, the greater the MBS.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-291
NOTE
a: In the case of the IDU 605 1F/2F, the values of the CIR and PIR should be set the same and the setting of the CBS and MBS is not supported.
Postrequisite
After creating the CAR, bind the flow to the corresponding CAR operation as required.
14.7.7.3 Creating the CoS

By using the CoS, the packets in a flow can be scheduled to different queues of different priorities and can be processed according to the priority of each queue. This ensures that the packets of different priorities can be processed according to different QoS requirements.
Prerequisite
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the CoS Configuration tab. Step 3 Click New. The New CoS dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the CoS parameters.
14-292
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameters
Parameter CoS ID Value Range 1-65535 Default Value 1 Description This parameter identifies a CoS operation, and is used to bind a flow to an associated CoS operation. In the case of the EMS4 board (logical board), only one CoS can be created. When the CoS is bound, this CoS operation is valid for all the ports on the board. CoS Type In the case of the EMS6 board: l simple l VLAN priority l DSCP l IPTOS In the case of the EMS4 board (a logical board), EM4T board: l VLAN priority l DSCP l If the CoS type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue. l If the CoS type of a flow is set to VLAN priority, the packets in this flow are scheduled to specified egress queues according to the user priorities specified in the VLAN tags of these packets. l If the CoS type of a flow is set to DSCP, the packets in this flow are scheduled to specified egress queues according to differentiated services code point (DSCP) in the IPv6 tags of these packets. l If the CoS type of a flow is set to IPTOS, the packets in this flow are scheduled to specified egress queues according to IP TOS in the IPv4 tags of these packets.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-293
Parameter CoS Priority
Value Range In the case of the EMS6 board: 0-7 In the case of the EMS4 board (a logical board): 0-3
Default Value 0
Description This parameter specified which queue a packet is scheduled to. In the case of the EMS6 board: l Each port on the EMS6 board supports eight egress queues, and the CoS priorities of these eight queues are from 0 to 7. l If the traffic shaping feature of all the queues is enabled or disabled, the queue whose CoS priority is 7 is an SP queue, and the other queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are WRR queues. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6). l If the traffic shaping feature of certain queues is enabled, the bandwidth is allocated first to the queue whose traffic shaping feature is enabled, according to the set CIR. The remaining bandwidth is allocated to the queues whose traffic shaping is disabled, according to the SP +WRR algorithm. In the case of the EMS4 board (a logical board): l The Ethernet port on the EMS4 board supports four egress queues, and the CoS priorities of these four queues are from 0 to 3. When the CoS priority is higher, the priority of the queue is higher. l When the WRR algorithm is used, the weighted proportion of the queues whose CoS priorities are from 0-3 is 1:2:4:8.
Postrequisite
After creating the CoS, bind the flow to the corresponding CoS operation as required.
14.7.7.4 Binding the CAR/CoS

To enable the CAR or CoS function, bind the corresponding flow to the created CAR/CoS.
Prerequisite
The flow and CAR/CoS must be created.
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management. Step 2 Click the Flow Configuration tab. Step 3 Bind the CAR/CoS.
Parameters
Parameter Bound CAR Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the CAR ID corresponding to a CAR operation. Different CAR IDs should be bound to different flows, even though the parameters of the CAR operations are the same. This parameter indicates the CoS ID corresponding to a CoS operation. In the case of the EMS6 board, different CoS IDs should be bound to different flows, even though the parameters of the CoS operations are the same. In the case of the EMS4 board (logical board), only one CoS can be created. When the CoS is bound, this CoS operation is valid for all the ports on the board.
Bound CoS
14.7.7.5 Configuring the Traffic Shaping

The traffic shaping can restrict the traffic and burst of a connection in a network, and thus enables the packets to be transmitted at an even rate.
Prerequisite
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 In Port List, select a port. Step 3 Set the traffic shaping information about the port queue.
Parameters
Parameter Port Enabled/Disabled Value Range A specific PORT or VCTRUNK Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled Description This parameter indicates the port whose traffic is shaped. l This parameter determines whether to enable the traffic shaping of an egress queue. l If the traffic shaping feature of certain queues is enabled, the bandwidth is allocated first to the queue whose traffic shaping feature is enabled, according to the set CIR. The remaining bandwidth is allocated to the queues whose traffic shaping is disabled, according to the SP +WRR algorithm. CIR (kbit/s) An integer ranging from 0 to 1048574, with a step of 64 0 l When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets directly enter the egress queue. l The value of this parameter should not be more than the PIR.
14-296
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter PIR (kbit/s)
Value Range An integer ranging from 0 to 1048574, with a step of 64
Default Value 0
Description l When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, the packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR enter the buffer of the CIR. When the buffer overflows, the packets are marked yellow and enter the egress queue, which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of queue congestion. l The value of this parameter should not be more than the bandwidth at the port.
14.7.7.6 Configuring the CoS of the IFH2 Board

The IFH2 board supports scheduling packets into different queues according to the corresponding user priority levels in the VLAN tags.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The IFH2 board must be added in the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the IFH2 board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set CoS Priority for User Priority 0 in the VLAN Tag to User Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-297
Parameters
Parameter CoS Parameter Value Range User Priority 0 in the VLAN Tag. User Priority 1 in the VLAN Tag, User Priority 2 in the VLAN Tag, User Priority 3 in the VLAN Tag, User Priority 4 in the VLAN Tag, User Priority 5 in the VLAN Tag, User Priority 6 in the VLAN Tag, User Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag 0-3 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the data flows. The IFH2 boards supports differentiating the data flows according to the user priority levels in the VLAN tags of packets.
CoS Priority
l This parameter specifies the queue to which a packet should be scheduled. l The IFH2 board supports four queues. The corresponding CoS priority levels that correspond to the four queues are 0-3 and the scheduling scheme is SP. The higher the CoS priority, the higher is the queue priority.
14.7.7.7 Setting the Queue Scheduling Mode

The IDU 605 1F/2F supports the setting of the board-level queue scheduling mode of the EMS4 board (a logical board).
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Board Shaping Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select a board-level Queue Scheduling Mode. Step 3 Click Apply. ----End
14-298
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameters
Parameter Queue Scheduling Mode Value Range WRR, SP Default Value SP Description l If this parameter is set to SP, the SP algorithm is used for the service grooming on egress ports on the EMS4 board (a logical board). The higher is the priority of the CoS corresponding to the queue, the higher is the priority of the queue. l If this parameter is set to WRR, the WRR algorithm is used for the service grooming on egress ports on the EMS4 board (a logical board). The weight proportion of the four queues is 1:2:4:8.
14.7.7.8 Creating a Flow by Using a Template

This topic describes how to create a flow by using a template. The use of a template improves the efficiency of creating a flow.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. A QoS template must be created.
Context
When you create a flow by using a template, the CAR is automatically bound with the flow.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Flow Configuration tab. Step 3 Click Quick New QoS. Step 4 In the dialog box that is displayed, specify parameters, such as Flow Type. Step 5 Select a QoS template that is created.
NOTE
After you modify the values of the parameters in the template and click Save Parameters, the new values are saved to the template.

14.7.7.9 Modifying CAR Parameters

The committed access rate (CAR) is the traffic policing technology that is used to check the traffic rate within a specific period (a long time or short time) after the flow classification. The CAR allocates the packets whose rates do not exceed the rate limit of the packets of higher priority, and discards or downgrades the packets whose rates exceed the rate limit. In this process, restriction of the service access to the transport network is realized. That is, you can adjust the rate limit by adjusting the parameters such as the committed information rate and the peak information rate.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The CAR must be configured.
Precautions
The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. The IDU 605 1F/2F supports the Ethernet switching board EMS4 (a logical board). In the case of the EMS4 board, the values of the CIR and PIR should be set the same and the setting of the CBS and MBS is not supported.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the CAR Configuration tab. Step 3 Click Query. Step 4 Select CAR ID that needs to be changed. Step 5 Modify the other parameters that need to be modified.
Parameters
For details, see 14.7.7.2 Creating the CAR.
14.7.7.10 Modifying CoS Parameters

The class of service (CoS) schedules packets into different priority queues and processes the packets according to the priority levels of the specific queues. Modifying the CoS parameters may affect the priority of the egress packets.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The CoS must be configured.
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the CoS Configuration tab. Step 3 Click Query. Step 4 Select the CoS ID that needs to be changed. Step 5 Select the CoS Parameter that needs to be changed. Step 6 Modify CoS Priority.
Parameters
For details, see 14.7.7.3 Creating the CoS.
14.7.8 Configuring the Clock Sources

This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned the clock synchronization scheme, thus ensuring that all the NEs in a network trace the same clock.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The PXC boards and input/output clock source boards must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Select the clock sources.
TIP
By pressing the Ctrl key, you can select multiple clock sources at one time.
Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 Optional: Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to add other clock sources. Step 6 Optional: Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level of this clock source. The clock priority levels are arranged in the descending order from the first row to the last row. The internal clock source is fixed with the lowest priority. Step 7 Optional: Set External Clock Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte for the external clock sources.

Parameters
Parameter Clock Source Value Range Default Value Description l External clock source 1 indicates the external clock source at the port of the PXC board in slot 1. External clock source 2 indicates the external clock source at the port of the PXC board in slot 3. l IFH2-1(SDH) indicates the microwave clock source. l IFH2-2(ETH) indicates the clock source of the synchronous Ethernet. l The internal clock source is fixed with the lowest priority and indicates that the NE works in the free-run mode. l Determine the clock sources and the corresponding clock source priority levels according to the clock synchronization schemes. External Clock Source Mode 2 Mbit/s, 2 MHz 2 Mbit/s l This parameter indicates the type of the external clock source signal. l Set this parameter depending on the external clock signal. Generally, the external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal. Synchronization Status Byte SA4-SA8 SA4 l This parameter is valid only when External Clock Source Mode is set to 2 Mbit/s. l This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the external clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. l This parameter need to be set only when the SSM or extended SSM is enabled. Generally, the external clock sources use the SA4 to pass the SSM.
14.7.9 Configuring the Ethernet Clock Source

Configure the Ethernet clock source of the IDU 605 1F/2F according to the planned clock synchronization strategy to ensure that all the NEs in the network trace the same clock.
Prerequisite
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
14-303
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set Use the clock source of the data port. Step 3 Click Apply. ----End
Parameters
Parameter Use the clock source of the data port Value Range Yes, No Default Value No Description When this parameter is set to Yes, the IDU 605 1F/2F traces the clock source that is recovered from the signal flow on the Ethernet PORT.
14-304
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
15
About This Chapter
Ethernet Feature(RTN 900)
Displays the Ethernet feature of OptiX RTN 900 NEs. 15.1 Configuring the QoS Policy For service of different types, configure different QoS policies to provide different QoS, and to ensure availability of important services in the case of network congestion. 15.2 Configuring an Ethernet Service On the U2000, you can configure an E-Lineor an E-AGGR service. The user side uses ports and the port+VLANs mode to access Ethernet services. The network side uses PWs, QinQ Links or physical ports to carry the accessed services. On the U2000, you can create a V-UNI group to perform QoS settings for several Ethernet services. 15.3 Configuring Port Mirroring You can configure port mirroring to analyze only packets for mirrored ports. In this way, you can monitor all mirrored ports. This helps you to manage the ports.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
15-1
15.1 Configuring the QoS Policy

For service of different types, configure different QoS policies to provide different QoS, and to ensure availability of important services in the case of network congestion. 15.1.1 Overview of the QoS The overview of the QoS describes in terms of the purposes, compliant standards and suggestions. 15.1.2 Basic Concepts Before configuring the quality of service (QoS) policy, familiar yourself with the basic concepts related to the QoS, and the QoS polices supported by the RTN equipment. 15.1.3 Application of the QoS The application of the QoS describes the tunnel-based QoS control and application of several QoS policies. 15.1.4 Configuring the DiffServ Domain As a node in the DiffServ domain, the RTN equipment can perform QoS control over the service traffic. For this purpose, first configure a DiffServ domain for the equipment. 15.1.5 Configuring the Port Policy The port policy should be configured to realize the QoS control over ports. 15.1.6 Creating the CAR Policy The CAR policy is used to control the each traffic classification in the V-UNI ingress policy. 15.1.7 Configuring the V-UNI Ingress Policy Configure the V-UNI ingress policy at the access side of the euqipment to perform the QoS control over the ingress traffic. 15.1.8 Configuring the ATM CoS Mapping Configure the mapping relation between the ATM service type and PHB service class to ensure the end-to-end QoS for ATM services. 15.1.9 Configuring the ATM Policy For ATM services, configure the ATM policy to perform the QoS control over the traffic.
15.1.1 Overview of the QoS

The overview of the QoS describes in terms of the purposes, compliant standards and suggestions.
Purpose of the QoS

Quality of service (QoS) indicates the performance of the data flow that travels through the network. The purpose of the QoS is to ensure the end-to-end service quality. The QoS cannot increase the bandwidth, but can reduce the delay and jitter in the network to the minimum by reasonably allocating and monitoring network resources. In this way, the quality of important services is ensured. The specifications used to measure the QoS are as follows. l
15-2
Service availability, which indicates the ensured normal running time of a service.
l l l
Delay, which indicates the period between transmission and receiving of data packets between two reference points. Jitter, which indicates the time interval difference for the receive side to receive a group of data packets transmitted on the same route. Packet loss rate, which indicates the maximum ratio of discarded data packets among the transmitted data packets in the network. Data packets are discarded mainly due to network congestion.

RFC1349 Type of Service in the Internet Protocol Suite RFC2474 Definition of the Differentiated Services Field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers RFC2475 An Architecture for Differentiated Services RFC2597 Assured Forwarding PHB Group RFC2598 An Expedited Forwarding PHB RFC2698 A Two Rate Three Color Marker RFC3086 Definition of Differentiated Services Per Domain Behaviors and Rules for their Specification RFC3140 Per Hop Behavior Identification Codes RFC3246 An Expedited Forwarding PHB (Per-Hop Behavior) RFC3247 Supplemental Information for the New Definition of the EF PHB (Expedited Forwarding Per-Hop Behavior) RFC3248 A Delay Bound alternative revision of RFC 2598 RFC3260 New Terminology and Clarifications for Diffserv RFC3270 Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) Support of Differentiated Services RFC3289 Management Information Base for the Differentiated Services Architecture RFC3290 An Informal Management Model for Diffserv Routers RFC3317 Differentiated Services Quality of Service Policy Information Base The ATM Forum Traffic Management Specification Version 4.1

Before configuring the quality of service (QoS) policy, familiar yourself with the basic concepts related to the QoS, and the QoS polices supported by the RTN equipment. 15.1.2.1 DiffServ As an end-to-end QoS control model, the DiffServ can be simply realized and easily extended. 15.1.2.2 HQoS When used as an edge DS node, the RTN equipment supports hierarchical QoS (HQoS).
15.1.2.1 DiffServ
As an end-to-end QoS control model, the DiffServ can be simply realized and easily extended. Figure 15-1 shows the application of the DiffServ model. Figure 15-1 Networking diagram for the DiffServ model
DS node
Non-DS node
DS node
DS node
Non-DS node
The DS (DiffServ) domain consists of a group of network nodes (DS nodes) that provide the same service policy and realize the same PHB (per-hop behavior). The DS nodes are classified into edge DS nodes and internal DS nodes. The edge DS nodes classify the traffic that enters the DS domain. For the service traffic of different types, different PHB service levels are marked. The internal DS nodes control the flow according to the PHB service level. As a node in the DS domain, the RTN equipment uses the following technologies to realize the end-to-end QoS control.
Flow Classification
The RTN equipment supports two flow classifying schemes, that is, simple flow classification and complex flow classification. l Simple flow classification The priorities of the accessed packets are mapped into the specified PHB service level. In this way, when crossing the DS domain, these packets can be provided with a uniform PHB service. The simple flow classification is mainly used for the internal nodes in a DS domain. The flow classifying rules of all nodes in a DS domain should be the same. The RTN equipment can access Ethernet, IP and MPLS packets, and supports the mutual mapping between the VLAN priority, IP DSCP, MPLS EXP and the PHB service level. l Complex flow classification The complex flow classification is mainly used for the edge nodes in a DS domain. The RTN equipment can perform the complex flow classification for Ethernet and IP packets, and thus provides more specific and more flexible flow classification for the user.
CAR Control
Committed access rate (CAR) is used at the access side of the RTN equipment to perform dualrate three-color management for the accessed traffic.
In normal cases, when the traffic is lower than the committed information rate (CIR), packets are marked green and normally pass. When the traffic is higher than the CIR and lower than the peak information rate (PIR), the packets that exceed the CIR are marked yellow and normally pass. When the traffic exceeds the PIR, the packets that exceed the PIR are marked red and are directly discarded. The RTN equipment supports two colorizing modes, that is, color-blind and color-aware. The difference between the two modes lies in that the current colors of packets should be considered in the case of the color-aware mode. The RTN equipment supports the configuration of processing methods for packets with different colors.
Congestion Management
When network congestion occurs or aggregates, specific packet discarding policies are used to ensure the QoS of services of higher priorities. Three common packet discarding policies are available. l l Tail drop policy When the queue is full, packets that arrive latterly are discarded. Random early detection (RED) policy In the case of the RED policy, when the queue reaches a certain length, packets are randomly discarded. In this way, overall synchronization caused by the TCP slow-start mechanism is prevented. l Weighted random early detection (WRED) policy In the case of the WRED, the queue length and priorities of packets (color) should be considered for packet discarding. The user can make the configuration that packets of higher discarding priorities, such as red packets and yellow packets, are discarded first, and these packets are more likely to be discarded. The RTN equipment supports the tail drop policy and the WRED policy. In addition, it supports the configuration of discarding starting point and discarding rate of the WRED.
Queue Scheduling
In the case of congestion, the RTN equipment provides the ensured QoS for services at the higher service level by using different queue scheduling schemes. The RTN uses two queue scheduling schemes, that is, priority queuing (PQ) and weighted fair queuing (WFQ). Table 15-1 lists the features and application of the two queue scheduling schemes.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
15-5
Table 15-1 Scheduling and application Schedu ling Mode PQ Basic Concept Scheduling Feature RTN Application
The PQ is a strict priority queue scheduling scheme. In the case of the PQ, packets in queues are scheduled strictly according to the queue priority. Only when the queues of higher priorities are empty, packets in queues of lower priorities are transmitted. In the case of the WFQ, queues are scheduled according to the weight allocated to each queue. Generally, more weights and bandwidth are allocated to queues of higher priorities, and less weights and bandwidth are allocated to queues of lower priorities.
This queue scheduling scheme ensures low delay for forwarding packets in queues of higher priorities. Packets in queues of lower priorities, however, may not be processed.
For queues of highest priorities, which carry CS7, CS6 or EF packets, use the PQ scheme to schedule queues.
WFQ
This scheduling scheme not only ensures low delay for forwarding packets in queues of higher priorities, but also ensures that packets in queues of lower priorities are effectively processed.
For queues of higher priorities, which carry AF4, AF3, AF2 and AF1 packets, use the WFQ scheme to schedule queues.
NOTE
For queues of the lowest priorities, which carry BE packets, the QoS is not ensured. In the case of congestion, the RTN equipment does not schedule queues that provide this service level (BE).
15.1.2.2 HQoS
When used as an edge DS node, the RTN equipment supports hierarchical QoS (HQoS). To increase the QoS control efficiency in the network, the HQoS control is always realized at edge nodes in the network and only simple QoS processing is performed at internal nodes in the network. As an edge DS node, the RTN equipment provides multi-layer QoS function points to realize the HQoS control function. Compared with the traditional QoS, the HQoS provided by the RTN equipment has the following advantages. l l l The hierarchical scheduling mechanism is used to realize the scheduling based on port, service, PW or QinQ link. In this way, the QoS control granularities are further divided. The hierarchical flow control mechanism is used to control the traffic based on port, service, PW or QinQ link. In this way, the service QoS can be fully controlled. The WFQ and WRED policies can be configured to increase the flexibility of the QoS control.
15-6
Figure 15-2 shows where the HQoS function points are and how the QoS processing is performed. Figure 15-2 HQoS function points and corresponding QoS processing
Acce s s s ide QoS function point Ne twork s ide
Port
V-UNI
PW/QinQ
Tunnel
Port
QoS ma na ge me nt
Apply port policy
Apply V-UNI ingrees policy Apply V-UNI egrees policy
Control V-UNI group bandwidth
Apply PW policy / Control PW bandwidth Apply QinQ policy
Control tunnel bandwidth
Apply port policy
Service flow
15.1.3 Application of the QoS

The application of the QoS describes the tunnel-based QoS control and application of several QoS policies. 15.1.3.1 Tunnel-Based QoS The RTN equipment can use the tunnel-based QoS control. 15.1.3.2 QoS Policy For the RTN equipment, the configurable QoS policies include the port policy, V-UNI ingress policy and ATM policy. This section briefly describes how the QoS policy is applied.
15.1.3.1 Tunnel-Based QoS

The RTN equipment can use the tunnel-based QoS control. At the ingress or egress of a network, the RTN equipment supports the pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) function. Different services are adapted to different PWs, and then the PWs are transmitted in the Tunnel. One tunnel can carry the PWs of the same destination.
15.1.3.2 QoS Policy

For the RTN equipment, the configurable QoS policies include the port policy, V-UNI ingress policy and ATM policy. This section briefly describes how the QoS policy is applied.
First the RTN equipment establishes the mapping relation between the service priority and PHB forwarding type. Then the RTN equipment can use the following QoS polices to realize the end-to-end QoS control. l l Establish the port QoS policy. Establish the V-UNI ingress policy. The V-UNI ingress policy is used to control the traffic based on services respectively in the ingress directions. l Establish the ATM policy. The ATM policy is used to control the ATM traffic. Table 15-2 Table for mapping relations between the RTN equipment and the supported QoS policies Port Policy V-UNI Ingres s Policy Not support ed Not support ed V-UNI Egress Policy Not support ed Not support ed PW Policy QINQ Policy ATM Policy WFQ Sched uling Policy Support ed Support ed WRED Policy
RTN 910 RTN 950
Support ed Support ed
Not support ed Not support ed
Not support ed Not support ed
Suppor ted Suppor ted
Support ed Support ed
15.1.4 Configuring the DiffServ Domain

As a node in the DiffServ domain, the RTN equipment can perform QoS control over the service traffic. For this purpose, first configure a DiffServ domain for the equipment. 15.1.4.1 Creating a DiffServ Domain To create a DiffServ domain, create mapping relations in the DiffServ domain, and configure ports that use the mapping relations. 15.1.4.2 Modifying a DiffServ Domain The RTN equipment supports modifying parameters of a created DiffServ domain. 15.1.4.3 Deleting a DiffServ Domain A DiffServ domain not used can be deleted.
15.1.4.1 Creating a DiffServ Domain

To create a DiffServ domain, create mapping relations in the DiffServ domain, and configure ports that use the mapping relations.
Prerequisite
l
15-8

You must complete the configuration of the control plane on the RTN equipment.
Context
As a node in the DiffServ domain, the RTN equipment supports creating the DiffServ domain according to the physical ports. Each RTN NE supports a maximum of eight DiffServ domains. By default, there is a DiffServ domain for the RTN equipment. Before any DiffServ domain is created, all ports belong to this default domain. To create a DiffServ domain, perform the following operations. l Create mapping relations in the DiffServ domain, which include the mapping relation between the priorities of user packets in both the ingress and egress directions, and the PHB service levels. Configure the physical ports that use the mapping relations, that is, add the physical ports to this domain.
Table 15-3 lists the service quality that corresponds to the PHB service level. Table 15-3 PHB service level and mapping PHB service quality PHB Service Level BE PHB Service Quality The focus is on the reachability. The quality of forwarding services is not required. BE is the default PHB service level. All DS nodes should support the BE PHB. The service traffic is allowed to exceed the specified range. For the traffic within the specified range, forwarding quality is ensured. For the traffic beyond the specified range, the forwarding quality is lowered and such traffic is not simply discarded. This PHB service level is applicable for transmission of multimedia services. Each AF level is further divided into three discarding priorities (color). For example, the AF1 level is further divided into the following discarding priorities. l AF11, green priority. Traffic with this priority can normally pass. l AF12, yellow priority. Packets with this priority are discarded in the case of congestion according to requirements. l AF13, red priority. Packets with this priority are discarded first. On any conditions, traffic sent by any DS node should be at the specified rate or higher. The forwarding effect in a virtual lease line is then simulated. In this way, the forwarding service of low packet loss ratio, low delay and high bandwidth is provided. This PHB service level is applicable to video services and VoIP services.
AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4
EF CS6 CS7
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
15-9
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > DiffServ Domain Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create. The Create DS Mapping Relation dialog box is displayed. Set the following parameters in the dialog box. l ID and name of the DS domain mapping relation, and mapping packet type. l Mapping relation between priorities of ingress and egress packets, and the PHB service level. (When no configuration is performed, the mapping relation recommended by the system is used.)
NOTE
Regarding the DSCP priority, if the DSCP value is not within the range specified in the Ingress Mapping Relation table, the PHB service level is BE.
l Ports that use the mapping relation.
15.1.4.2 Modifying a DiffServ Domain

The RTN equipment supports modifying parameters of a created DiffServ domain.
Prerequisite
Context
The default DiffServ cannot be modified or deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > DiffServ Domain Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the DiffServ domain to be modified. For a DiffServ domain, the following parameters can be modified.
l Modify the name of the domain mapping relation, and then click Apply. l In the Ingress Mapping Relation tab, modify the mapping relation, and then click Apply. l In the Egress Mapping Relation tab, modify the mapping relation, and then click Apply. l In the Apply Port tab, click Modify. In the displayed Config Ports dialog box, modify the applied port. Then, click OK. ----End
15.1.4.3 Deleting a DiffServ Domain

A DiffServ domain not used can be deleted.
Prerequisite
Context
l To delete a DiffServ domain, first delete the ports involved in the DiffServ domain, and then delete the mapping relations in the DiffServ domain. If the DiffServ domain contains any port, the mapping relations cannot be successfully deleted. The default DiffServ cannot be deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > DiffServ Domain Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the DiffServ domain to be deleted. Click Modify in the Apply Port tab. The Config Ports dialog box is displayed. Step 3 All ports chosen in this domain are deleted. Click OK. Step 4 Click Delete in the Ingress Mapping Relation tab. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, Click OK. ----End
15.1.5 Configuring the Port Policy

The port policy should be configured to realize the QoS control over ports. 15.1.5.1 Creating the Port Policy The traffic at the port can be controlled by configuring the port policy. 15.1.5.2 Modifying the Port Policy The created port policy can be modified. The port policy name, CAR parameter for different CoS, and packet discarding parameter can be modified. 15.1.5.3 Deleting the Port Policy Delete the port policy not required. If used by a port, this policy cannot be deleted.
15.1.5.1 Creating the Port Policy

The traffic at the port can be controlled by configuring the port policy.
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
NOTE
When a physical port is configured with both the port policy and UNI ingress policy, only the UNI ingress policy functions. Configuring one physical port with both the port policy and UNI ingress policy is not recommended.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Port Policy tab. Click New in the tab. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed. Set the following parameters in the dialog box. l Policy ID , Policy Name. Step 3 In the Create Port Policy dialog box, click OK. Step 4 Select the port policy created. Click the Applied Object tab, and then click Modify. Step 5 In the displayed Configure Port dialog box, select the port to be applied, and then click OK.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910/950 supports the port policy at the ML-PPP port.
----End
Related Operation
Use the copy function to fast create a new port policy based on the created port policy. The detailed operation is as follows: 1. 2. In the Port Policy tab, click Copy. In the displayed Duplicate QoS Policy dialog box, select the policy to be copied, and then enter the new policy name. Then, click OK. Modify the related parameters of the newly created policy, and then make the new policy meet the QoS requirement.
NOTE
l For the method of modifying the port policy, see 15.1.5.2 Modifying the Port Policy. l In the case of the copy function, the application policy of port can not be copied.
15.1.5.2 Modifying the Port Policy

The created port policy can be modified. The port policy name, CAR parameter for different CoS, and packet discarding parameter can be modified.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The policy is not applied.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Port Policy tab. In the tab, select the port policy to be modified. The following parameters can be modified. l Policy name. l Parameters of traffic classification bandwidth sharing. l CoS parameters. In the CoS Configuration tab, modify the traffic control parameters and packet discarding policy, and then click Apply. l Traffic classification rule. Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab. Select the traffic classification rule to be modified, and then click Traffic Classification Rule. In the Traffic Classification Configuration dialog box, modify the traffic classification rule, and then click OK. Click New. In the displayed Create Traffic Classification dialog box, configure the new ACL rule, and then click OK. Select the traffic classification rule to be deleted, and then click Delete. l Applied port. Click Applied Object tab, and then click Modify. In the displayed Configure Port dialog box, modify the applied port, and then click OK. ----End
15.1.5.3 Deleting the Port Policy

Delete the port policy not required. If used by a port, this policy cannot be deleted.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The policy to be deleted is not used.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Port Policy tab. In the tab, select the port policy to be deleted. Step 3 Click Delete. ----End
15.1.6 Creating the CAR Policy

The CAR policy is used to control the each traffic classification in the V-UNI ingress policy.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the CAR Policy tab. Step 3 Click New. The Create CAR Policy dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the Policy ID, Policy Name, CAR parameters and Coloration Mode. Step 5 Set the handing mode of the packet with different color. Step 6 Click OK. ----End
15.1.7 Configuring the V-UNI Ingress Policy

Configure the V-UNI ingress policy at the access side of the euqipment to perform the QoS control over the ingress traffic. 15.1.7.1 Creating the WFQ Scheduling Policy The WFQ scheduling policy is used to configure the weights for scheduling AF1 - AF4 queues. If no WFQ scheduling policy is available, the AF1-AF4 queues are scheduled according to the default template, that is, the 1:1:1:1 mode. 15.1.7.2 Creating the V-UNI Ingress Policy Create the V-UNI ingress policy to classify the accessed traffic, and to specify the parameters such as CoS. 15.1.7.3 Modifying the V-UNI Ingress Policy
Modify the V-UNI ingress policy that is successfully created. The policy name, CoS parameters and traffic classification parameters. 15.1.7.4 Querying the V-UNI Ingress Policy-Applied Object The created V-UNI ingress policy is applied to a certain service to perform the QoS control. The RTN equipment supports querying the V-UNI ingress policy-applied objects, including service ID and V-UNI ID. 15.1.7.5 Deleting the V-UNI Ingress Policy Delete the V-UNI ingress policy not required. If used by a service, this policy cannot be deleted.
15.1.7.1 Creating the WFQ Scheduling Policy

The WFQ scheduling policy is used to configure the weights for scheduling AF1 - AF4 queues. If no WFQ scheduling policy is available, the AF1-AF4 queues are scheduled according to the default template, that is, the 1:1:1:1 mode.
Prerequisite
Context
The default WFQ schedule policy (Policy ID: 1; Policy Name: WFQ Default Scheduling) cannot be created, modified or deleted. In the case of the OptiX RTN , the WFQ scheduling policy can be applied to the Port policy.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > WFQ Schedule Policy from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The Create WFQ Schedule Policy dialog box is displayed. Set the following parameters in the dialog box. l Policy ID and name. l AF scheduling weight.
NOTE
The total schedule weights of AF1-AF4 should not exceed 100.

15.1.7.2 Creating the V-UNI Ingress Policy

Create the V-UNI ingress policy to classify the accessed traffic, and to specify the parameters such as CoS.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy ManagementV-UNI Ingress Policy from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The Create V-UNI Ingress Policy dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the Policy ID and Policy Name. Step 4 Click New. Then, configure the following attributes in the displayed Create Traffic Classification dialog box. Step 5 Set Traffic Classification ID, ACL Action and Logical Relation Between Matched Rules.
NOTE
In the case of OptiX RTN , the default value of ACL Action is Permit and cannot be set. Logical Relation Between Matched Rules can be set to And or Or. And indicates that all the traffic classification rules must be followed. Or indicates that just one traffic classification rule need be followed. In the case of OptiX RTN , the default value of Logical Relation Between Matched Rules is Or and cannot be set.
Step 6 Click Add and configure the traffic classification rules. You can set more traffic classification rules.
NOTE
In the case of OptiX RTN , the match type of the traffic classification rule can be set to CVlan ID or SVlan ID.
Step 7 Click OK to exit the Create Traffic Classification dialog box. Step 8 Click OK to exit the Create V-UNI Ingress Policy dialog box. ----End
Related Operation
Use the copy function to fast create a new V-UNI Ingress policy based on the created V-UNI Ingress policy. The detailed operation is as follows: 1. 2. In the V-UNI Ingress Policy tab, click Copy. In the displayed Duplicate QoS Policy dialog box, select the policy to be copied, and then enter the new policy name. Then, click OK. Modify the related parameters of the newly created policy, and then make the new policy meet the QoS requirement.
NOTE
l For the method of modifying the V-UNI ingress policy, see 15.1.7.3 Modifying the V-UNI Ingress Policy. l In the case of the copy function, the application information of the policy can not be copied.
15-16
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
15.1.7.3 Modifying the V-UNI Ingress Policy

Modify the V-UNI ingress policy that is successfully created. The policy name, CoS parameters and traffic classification parameters.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The policy is not applied.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > V-UNI Ingress Policy from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the V-UNI ingress policy to be modified. Step 3 Modify the following parameters. l Policy name. l Applied WFQ scheduling policy. l Traffic classification bandwidth sharing. Step 4 Modify the CoS parameters. In the CoS Configuration tab, modify the CoS parameters. Then, click Apply. Step 5 Modify the traffic classification parameters. 1. 2. Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab. Add new traffic classification. Click New. In the displayed Create Traffic Classification dialog box, enter the new traffic classification parameters, and then click OK. 3. Create the traffic classification parameters. l Select the traffic classification to be modified. l Modify ACL action, CAR parameters, and then click Apply. l Modify traffic classification rule. Click Traffic Classification Rule. In the displayed Traffic Classification Configuration dialog box, add, modify or delete the traffic classification rule, and then click OK. l Modify the processing mode of the colorized packets. Click Colorize. In the displayed Advanced Attributes dialog box, modify the processing mode of the colorized packets, and then click OK. ----End
15.1.7.4 Querying the V-UNI Ingress Policy-Applied Object

The created V-UNI ingress policy is applied to a certain service to perform the QoS control. The RTN equipment supports querying the V-UNI ingress policy-applied objects, including service ID and V-UNI ID.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. You must use the V-UNI ingress policy to a service.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > V-UNI Ingress Policy from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the V-UNI ingress policy for the query. Step 3 Click the Applied Object tab and click Query. Information on the service that uses this policy is displayed. ----End
15.1.7.5 Deleting the V-UNI Ingress Policy

Delete the V-UNI ingress policy not required. If used by a service, this policy cannot be deleted.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > V-UNI Ingress Policy from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the V-UNI ingress policy to be deleted. Step 3 Click Delete. ----End
15.1.8 Configuring the ATM CoS Mapping

Configure the mapping relation between the ATM service type and PHB service class to ensure the end-to-end QoS for ATM services.
Prerequisite
Context
The OptiX RTN equipment supports the flexible mapping between the ATM service type and PHB service class. Table 15-4 lists the default ATM CoS mapping relation.
15-18
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Table 15-4 Mapping relation between the ATM service type and PHB service class Service Type CBR RT-VBR NRT-VBR UBR+ UBR PHB Service Class EF AF31 AF21 AF11 BE
NOTE
The default ATM CoS mapping cannot be modified or deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM CoS Mapping Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create. The Create ATM CoS Mapping Relation dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the following parameters in the dialog box. l Mapping Relation ID l Mapping Relation Name l Mapping between the service type and CoS level
15.1.9 Configuring the ATM Policy

For ATM services, configure the ATM policy to perform the QoS control over the traffic.
15.1.9.1 Creating the ATM Policy Create the ATM policy to configure the service type and bandwidth for the ATM traffic. 15.1.9.2 Modifying the ATM Policy Modify the ATM policy that is successfully created. The policy name, ATM service type and traffic parameter can be modified. 15.1.9.3 Querying the ATM Policy-Applied Object The created ATM policy is applied to a certain service to perform the QoS control. The RTN equipment supports querying the ATM policy-applied objects, including the service ID, service name, link ID and direction. 15.1.9.4 Deleting the ATM Policy Delete the ATM policy not required. If used by a service, this policy cannot be deleted.
15.1.9.1 Creating the ATM Policy

Create the ATM policy to configure the service type and bandwidth for the ATM traffic.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The Create ATM Policy dialog box is displayed. Set the following parameters in the dialog box. l Policy ID and name l Service type l Traffic parameter l UPC/NPC
15-20
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
The service encapsulated in AAL5 is sliced into cells. Enable Traffic Frame Discarding Flag determines whether to discard cells or to discard the complete AAL5 frames for the cells. When Enable Traffic Frame Discarding Flag is set to Enabled, the RTN equipment will discards the complete AAL5 frames for the cells.
15.1.9.2 Modifying the ATM Policy

Modify the ATM policy that is successfully created. The policy name, ATM service type and traffic parameter can be modified.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The policy is not applied.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the ATM Policy tab and select the ATM policy to be modified. The following parameters can be modified. l Policy name. l Service type. l ATM traffic parameter. l Frame discarding label. l UPC/NPC. Step 3 Click Apply. ----End
15.1.9.3 Querying the ATM Policy-Applied Object

The created ATM policy is applied to a certain service to perform the QoS control. The RTN equipment supports querying the ATM policy-applied objects, including the service ID, service name, link ID and direction.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. You must use the ATM policy for a service.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the ATM Policy tab and select the ATM policy for the query. Step 3 Click the Applied Object tab and click Query. Information on the service that uses this policy is displayed. ----End
15.1.9.4 Deleting the ATM Policy

Delete the ATM policy not required. If used by a service, this policy cannot be deleted.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the ATM Policy tab and select the ATM policy to be deleted. Step 3 Click Delete. ----End
15.2 Configuring an Ethernet Service

On the U2000, you can configure an E-Lineor an E-AGGR service. The user side uses ports and the port+VLANs mode to access Ethernet services. The network side uses PWs, QinQ Links or physical ports to carry the accessed services. On the U2000, you can create a V-UNI group to perform QoS settings for several Ethernet services. 15.2.1 Basic Concepts Before configuring the Ethernet service, familiar yourself with the E-Line serviceand E-AGGR service, and application scenarios of these services. 15.2.2 Configuring an E-Line Service(RTN 900 V100R001) On the U2000, you can configure an E-Line service to provide a point-to-point Ethernet service. The equipment transports packets of certain user-side ports or packets of specific VLANs in a port to physical ports, a PW or a QinQ Link at the network side. In this way, user data packets can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. Configuration of an E-Line service includes creation, modification and deletion of the E-Line service. 15.2.3 Configuring an E-Line Service (RTN 900 V100R002) On the U2000, you can configure an E-Line service to provide a point-to-point Ethernet service. The equipment transports packets of certain user-side ports or packets of specific VLANs in a port to physical ports, a QinQ Link at the network side. In this way, user data packets can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. Configuration of an E-Line service includes creation, modification and deletion of the E-Line service. 15.2.4 Configuring an E-LAN Service On the U2000, the user can configure the multipoint-to-multipoint E-LAN service. The configuration of the E-LAN service includes the service creation, modification and deletion.
15.2.5 Configuring an E-AGGR Service On the U2000, the user can configure the multipoint-to-point E-AGGR service. The equipment can aggregate the Ethernet data packets accessed from multiple ports to the sink node. The configuration of the E-AGGR service includes the service creation, modification and deletion.

Before configuring the Ethernet service, familiar yourself with the E-Line serviceand E-AGGR service, and application scenarios of these services. 15.2.1.1 E-Line Service In the topology, the EPL service is a point-to-point service. The equipment transmits the packets of a specific port or of specific VLANs of a specific port at the user side to a PW at the network side. In this way, the user data can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. 15.2.1.2 E-LAN Service In topology, the E-LAN service is a multipoint-to-multipoint service. The equipment forwards the packets of a specific port or of specific VLANs of a specific port at the user side to multiple ports at the network side. In this way, the user data can be transparently transmitted in a multipoint-to-multipoint manner. 15.2.1.3 E-AGGR Service In topology, the E-AGGR service is a multipoint-to-point service. The OptiX RTN equipment can aggregate the services accessed from multiple ports to one UNI port or aggregate the services accessed from multiple ports to an NNI port. In addition, the OptiX RTN equipment can aggregate the services carried by PWs of multiple NNI ports to one UNI port.
15.2.1.1 E-Line Service

In the topology, the EPL service is a point-to-point service. The equipment transmits the packets of a specific port or of specific VLANs of a specific port at the user side to a PW at the network side. In this way, the user data can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. According to the service transmission mode, the E-Line service can be classified into the following types: l l l l UNI-UNI E-Line service UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a QinQ link
UNI-UNI E-Line Service

Figure 15-3 shows the networking diagram for the UNI-UNI E-Line service. In City 1, Company A and Company B, connected to the RTN equipment, need communication between each other. The communication requirement can be met by creating a UNI-UNI E-Line service. In this case, the equipment equals a Layer 2 switch, which only exchanges data of Company A and Company B. In the uplink direction of the user side at the two ends, complex traffic classification can be performed for data packets, and different QoS policies can be used according to the traffic classification.
Figure 15-3 UNI-UNI E-Line service

PE UNI
PE A Company
PE Switching Network
B Company City1
UNI PE
UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by Ports

Figure 15-4 shows the networking diagram for the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports. In City 1 and City 2, Company A has branches, which need communication. The communication requirement can be met by creating a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports. In this case, each branch of Company A can exclusively use the UNI. Each physical port involved in the E-Line service network can be exclusively used by the E-Line service. In City 1, if small branches in Company A need service isolation, services at the same UNI can be differentiated through "port + VLANs". For a single station, in the uplink direction of the user side, complex traffic classification can be performed for data packets, and different QoS policies can be used according to the traffic classification. Figure 15-4 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports
Switching Network
A Company
A Company
City1 UNI NNI NNI UNI
City2
UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a PW

Figure 15-5 shows the networking diagram for the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW. In City 1 and City 2, Company A and Company B have branches. Communication between branches of the same company is needed, but services between the two companies need to be isolated. In this case, the communication between branches of Company A and Company B can be realized by creating a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW. Services between the two companies are isolated because different services are carried by different PWs.
Hence, the company service accessed at the user side is encapsulated into a PW, and then is carried by the Tunnel. Different E-Line services of different companies are carried by different PWs, and then are transmitted to the same NNI. As a result, the number of NNIs is saved, and the bandwidth utilization is increased. In the uplink direction of the user side, the hierarchical QoS can be performed for data packets. Figure 15-5 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW
NE 1
A Company
Package Switching Network
NE2
A Company
B Company B Company
City1
UNI
NNI
NNI
UNI
City2
Tunnel PW
UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a QinQ Link

In the case of the QinQ link carrying, the packets with the C-VLAN in the user-side network are added with an S-VLAN header of the transport network. The packets then travel through the transport network with two VLANs. In this way, a simple L2-VPN tunnel is provided for the user. Figure 15-6 shows the networking diagram for the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a QinQ link. Both Company A and Company B have branches in City 1 and City 2. Branches of each company need to communicate with each other. The traffic from the two companies must be isolated. The internal VLANs of Company A range from 1 to 100 and the internal VLANs of Company B range from 1 to 200. In this case, you can configure a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a QinQ link to meet the communication requirements. As different services are carried by QinQ links of different values, traffic of different companies is isolated and the VLAN resources of the packet switch network (PSN) are also saved. In this case, different packets accessed at the user side from different companies are added with different VLANs, and then carried by the same link at the network side. As the E-Line services of different companies are added with one VLAN and transported to the same port, the network-side port resources are saved and the bandwidth utilization is increased. Also as only a small number of VLANs in the PSN are used, the VLAN resources of the network are saved. To realize the QoS for the service carried by a QinQ link, configure the QinQ policy.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
15-25
Figure 15-6 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a QinQ link

The internal network of A Company VLAN = 1-100 A VLAN tag (VLAN = 30) is added to the packet of A Company NE 1 Packet Switching Network NE2 The internal network of A Company VLAN = 1-100
A Company
City1
B Company
The internal network of B Company A VLAN tag (VLAN = 40) VLAN = 1-200 is added to the packet of B Company
A Company
City2
B Company
QinQ Link
The internal network of B Company VLAN = 1-200
NNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a QinQ Link

An NNI-NNI E-Line service is exchanged and forwarded by means of statically configured SVLAN tag. In the case of an end-to-end E-Line service, you need to configure tags on a per-NE basis. Currently, only one-layer VLANs are supported. A QinQ link is used to encapsulate or strip off an S-VLAN on an edge port and to exchange an S-VLAN on the intermediate node. A QinQ link adds a layer of VLAN to an accessed packet on a port in the QinQ encapsulation mode. In this case, multiple packets with different VLANs on the user-side network are encapsulated to an VLAN for transmission. This saves the VLAN resources on the network.
15-26
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 15-7 NNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a QinQ link

E-LINE A
C-VLAN1 S-VLAN1 S-VLAN3 C-VLAN1
UserA
UserC
UserB
C-VLAN2
S-VLAN2
S-VLAN4
C-VLAN2
UserD
E-LINE B RTN NE
15.2.1.2 E-LAN Service

In topology, the E-LAN service is a multipoint-to-multipoint service. The equipment forwards the packets of a specific port or of specific VLANs of a specific port at the user side to multiple ports at the network side. In this way, the user data can be transparently transmitted in a multipoint-to-multipoint manner. The EPLAN services can be accessed from a minimum of two nodes. Hence, the services of different users need not share the bandwidth. That is, in the case of EPLAN services, a bandwidth is exclusively occupied by the service of a user and the services of different users are isolated. In addition, the extra security scheme are not required. There is more than one node. Hence, the nodes need to learn the MAC addresses and forward data according to MAC addresses. Therefore, Layer 2 switching is involved. The user side networks respectively access the carrier networks through the FE. Each user side network has its own VLAN label. The user side networks require access between each other. The user side networks can communicate with each other through the configuration of the ELAN service.
15.2.1.3 E-AGGR Service

In topology, the E-AGGR service is a multipoint-to-point service. The OptiX RTN equipment can aggregate the services accessed from multiple ports to one UNI port or aggregate the services accessed from multiple ports to an NNI port. In addition, the OptiX RTN equipment can aggregate the services carried by PWs of multiple NNI ports to one UNI port. Figure 15-8 shows the networking diagram for the E-AGGR service. One operator wants to construct a 3G network. Services of each Node B are aggregated and transmitted to the RNC. At each station, the service of Node B that is connected to the station is aggregated to the PW at the network side. The Tunnel that aggregates the Node B service with multiple stations is aggregated again at the station that connects the RNC, and then the service is transmitted to the RNC.
Figure 15-8 E-AGGR service
FE FE NE 1
MPLS Tunnel 1
NE 3 GE
RNC
MPLS Tunnel 2
FE
NE 2 FE Node B
15.2.2 Configuring an E-Line Service(RTN 900 V100R001)

On the U2000, you can configure an E-Line service to provide a point-to-point Ethernet service. The equipment transports packets of certain user-side ports or packets of specific VLANs in a port to physical ports, a PW or a QinQ Link at the network side. In this way, user data packets can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. Configuration of an E-Line service includes creation, modification and deletion of the E-Line service. 15.2.2.1 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Service The E-Line service includes the UNI-UNI E-Line service, UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports, UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW and UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link. 15.2.2.2 Creating a UNI-UNI E-Line Service A UNI-UNI E-Line service indicates that users can be interconnected through equipment. The Ethernet data packets do not pass the network side, but are transparently transmitted at the user side. 15.2.2.3 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a Port The service is accessed at the user side, and transported to one port at the network side for carrying. In this way, user data can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. In this way, this port is exclusively used. 15.2.2.4 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a PW
The service is accessed at the user side, and transported to one PW at the network side for carrying. In this way, user data can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. For such a application, create a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW. 15.2.2.5 Creating a QinQ Link The QinQ link indicates that a VLAN is added on the accessed packets by using the QinQ encapsulation mode. In this way, multiple VLAN packets from the user-side network are encapsulated into a VLAN in the transport network for transport. The VLAN resources in the transport network are saved. The E-Line service can be carried by the QinQ link at the network side. 15.2.2.6 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the QinQ Link The services accessed on the user side are carried by the QinQ link on the network side. Multiple VLANs of the user network are encapsulated in the QinQ mode into one VLAN in the transport network. In this way, the VLAN resources in the transport network are saved. 15.2.2.7 Modifying an E-Line Service For an E-Line service, some attributes can be modified, such as the service name, MTU, userside VLAN and QoS-related parameters. For the PW and QinQ Link that carries the service, only QoS-related parameters can be modified, such as the overall bandwidth and applied policy template. 15.2.2.8 Deleting an E-Line Service When a user-to-network E-Line service carried by a PW is deleted, the PW is also deleted.
15.2.2.1 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Service

The E-Line service includes the UNI-UNI E-Line service, UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports, UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW and UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link.
UNI-UNI E-Line service

The complete process of configuring a UNI-UNI E-Line service is shown in following table. Table 15-5 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI E-Line service Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configure the QoS Policy 3. Configure the user-side Interface 4. Configure the UNI-UNI E-Line Service Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, and create fibers. The QoS policy is used for traffic management of the E-Line service. The Ethernet interface accesses services from NodeB.
To configure the UNI-UNI E-Line service, you need to specify the service ID, service name and service VLan.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
15-29
UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by Ports

The complete process of configuring a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports is shown in following table. Table 15-6 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI E-Line service carried by a port Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configure the QoS Policy 3. Configure the Interface 4. Configure the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, and create fibers. The QoS policy is used for traffic management of the E-Line service. The Ethernet interface accesses services from NodeB. To configure the UNI-NNI E-Line service, you need to specify the service ID, service name and service VLan.
UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by PWs

The complete process of configuring a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by PWs is shown in following table. Table 15-7 Tasks for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by PWs Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configure the LSR ID 3. Configure the network-side interface Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, and create fibers. Configure the LSR ID of the NE and start of global label space. Set the general attributes and Layer 3 attributes (tunnel enable status and IP address) for interfaces to carry the tunnel carrying.
15-30
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Task 4. Configure the control plane
Remarks Set the protocol parameters related to the control plane to create the tunnel. l To create a static MPLS tunnel to transmit the E-Line service, the parameters related to the control plane need not be set. l To create a dynamic MPLS tunnel to transmit the E-Line service, you need to set the following protocol parameters: 1. Set the IGP-ISIS protocol parameters. 2. Set the MPLS-RSVP protocol parameters. To create a dynamic PW to transmit the service, you need to set the parameters related to the MPLS-LDP protocol and the IGP-ISIS protocol.
5. Configure the Tunnel
A tunnel transmits the service. l If an static MPLS tunnel is required, configure an MPLS tunnel in the per-NE or per-trail mode. Specify the tunnel ID, set signaling type to static, name the service, and specify the ingress node, egress node, and transit node. l If a dynamic MPLS Tunnel is required, name the service, set signaling type to dynamic, and specify the source node and sink node for the tunnel.
6. Configure the QoS Policy 7. Configure the user-side Interface 8. Configure the UNI-NNI E-Line service
The QoS policy is used for traffic management of the E-Line service. The Ethernet interface accesses services from NodeB.
1. Create an E-Line service: Specify the service ID, name the service, and set service VLan. 2. Configure a PW: Set the PW type, label, and tunnel type. 3. Configure QoS: Set the QoS of UNI and PW.
UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by QinQ Link

The complete process of configuring a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link is shown in following table. Table 15-8 Tasks for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configure the QoS Policy
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, and create fibers. The E-Line policy is used for traffic management of the E-Line service.
15-31
Task 3. Configure the Interface 4. Configure QinQ Link
Remarks The Ethernet interface accesses services from NodeB. Create the QinQ link, and set the ID, board, port, S-VlAN, and QoS information of the QinQ link. The QinQ link encapsulates multiple VLAN packets to a VLAN on the network side for transmission. This saves the VLAN resources on the network.
5. Configure the UNI-NNI E-Line service
Set the service ID, name, VLAN, and QinQ link ID.
15.2.2.2 Creating a UNI-UNI E-Line Service

A UNI-UNI E-Line service indicates that users can be interconnected through equipment. The Ethernet data packets do not pass the network side, but are transparently transmitted at the user side.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. If a port need be exclusively used, disable the DCN function of the port that carries the service. For details, see 2.14.4.4 Enabling the Port DCN.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set parameters in the dialog box.
NOTE
When BPDU is set to Transparently Transmitted, you cannot set MTU(byte) and VLANs. The transparently transmitted service does not support configuring the alarm performance, OAM and QoS. For Direction, select UNI-UNI. For VLANs, you can set several VLANs. Separate consecutive VLANs with "-", and inconsecutive VLANs with ",". For example, "1,3,5,8-10".
Step 4 Optional: Click Configure QoS. The Configure QoS dialog box displayed. Step 5 Optional: Click the UNI tab in the Configure QoS dialog box. Set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color for ports. Click OK. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. ----End
15.2.2.3 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a Port

The service is accessed at the user side, and transported to one port at the network side for carrying. In this way, user data can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. In this way, this port is exclusively used.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set parameters in the dialog box.
NOTE
l When BPDU is set to Transparently Transmitted, you cannot set MTU(byte) and VLANs. The transparently transmitted service does not support configuring the alarm performance, OAM and QoS. l For Direction, select UNI-NNI. l For Bearer Type, select Port. l For VLANs, you can set several VLANs. Separate consecutive VLANs with "-", and inconsecutive VLANs with ",". For example, "1,3,5,8-10".
Step 4 Optional: Click Configure QoS. The Configure QoS dialog box displayed. Step 5 Optional: Click the UNI tab in the Configure QoS dialog box. Set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color for ports. Click OK. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. ----End
15.2.2.4 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a PW

The service is accessed at the user side, and transported to one PW at the network side for carrying. In this way, user data can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. For such a application, create a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of the MPLS tunnel that carries PWs. If a port need be exclusively used, disable the DCN function of the port at the UNI side. For details, see 2.14.4.4 Enabling the Port DCN.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set parameters in the dialog box.
NOTE
l When BPDU is set to Transparently Transmitted, you cannot set VLANs. The transparently transmitted service does not support configuring the alarm performance, OAM and QoS. l For Direction, select UNI-NNI. l For Bearer Type, select PW. l For VLANs, you can set several VLANs. Separate consecutive VLANs with "-", and inconsecutive VLANs with ",". For example, "1,3,5,8-10".
Step 4 Click Configure PW. The Configure PW dialog box is displayed. In the dialog box, set PWrelated parameters.
NOTE
For PW ID, select the PW ID set in Step 3.
Step 5 Click OK and close the Configure PW dialog box. Step 6 Click Configure QoS. The Configure QoS dialog box displayed. Step 7 In the UNItab, set Policy, Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color for the ingress direction. Step 8 Click the PW tab. Set EXP in the ingress direction and LSP Mode in the egress direction. Click OK. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Step 9 Click OK to finish the creation. ----End
15.2.2.5 Creating a QinQ Link

The QinQ link indicates that a VLAN is added on the accessed packets by using the QinQ encapsulation mode. In this way, multiple VLAN packets from the user-side network are encapsulated into a VLAN in the transport network for transport. The VLAN resources in the transport network are saved. The E-Line service can be carried by the QinQ link at the network side.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Layer 2 attributes of the port on the QinQ link must be set and the encapsulation mode must be the QinQ mode.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. The New QinQ Link window is displayed. Step 3 Set QinQ Link ID, Board, Port and S-Vlan ID. Step 4 Click OK. ----End
15.2.2.6 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the QinQ Link

The services accessed on the user side are carried by the QinQ link on the network side. Multiple VLANs of the user network are encapsulated in the QinQ mode into one VLAN in the transport network. In this way, the VLAN resources in the transport network are saved.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The QinQ link must be created for the network-side ports.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set each parameter in the dialog box.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
15-35

NOTE
l When BPDU is set to Transparently Transmitted, you cannot set MTU(byte) and VLANs. The transparently transmitted service does not support configuring the alarm performance, OAM and QoS. l Set Direction to UNI-NNI. l Set Bearer Type to QinQ Link. l Select a created QinQ link in QinQ Link ID.
Step 4 Optional: Click Configure QoS. The Configure QoS dialog box displayed. Step 5 Optional: Click the UNI tab in the Configure QoS dialog box. Set Policy, Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color for ports. Click OK. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. ----End
15.2.2.7 Modifying an E-Line Service

For an E-Line service, some attributes can be modified, such as the service name, MTU, userside VLAN and QoS-related parameters. For the PW and QinQ Link that carries the service, only QoS-related parameters can be modified, such as the overall bandwidth and applied policy template.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
If you modify the E-Line service, the E-Line service may be interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from Function Tree. Step 2 Select the E-Line service to be modified. The Service Name and MTU can be modified. After the modification is complete, click Apply.
NOTE
After the service transmitted in a PW is created, the MTU value of the service cannot be changed. After the service transmitted through a port or in the QinQ is created, however, the MTU value of the service can be changed. The reason is as follows: In the case of the service transmitted in a PW, the MTU value needs to be negotiated when the PW is created and cannot be changed after creation.
Step 3 Click the UNI tab. In the tab, you can modify VLANS of ports. After the modification is complete, click Apply. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation, click OK.
Step 4 Click the QoS tab. The QoS-related parameters for the UNI port, PW and QinQ Link can be modified. After the modification is complete, click Apply. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation, click OK. ----End
15.2.2.8 Deleting an E-Line Service

When a user-to-network E-Line service carried by a PW is deleted, the PW is also deleted.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
If you delete the E-Line service, the E-Line service is interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the E-Line service to be deleted and click Delete. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the E-Line service is successfully deleted. Click Close. ----End
15.2.3 Configuring an E-Line Service (RTN 900 V100R002)

On the U2000, you can configure an E-Line service to provide a point-to-point Ethernet service. The equipment transports packets of certain user-side ports or packets of specific VLANs in a port to physical ports, a QinQ Link at the network side. In this way, user data packets can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. Configuration of an E-Line service includes creation, modification and deletion of the E-Line service. 15.2.3.1 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Service The E-Line service includes the UNI-UNI E-Line service, UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports, NNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link and UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link. 15.2.3.2 Creating a UNI-UNI E-Line Service A UNI-UNI E-Line service indicates that users can be interconnected through equipment. The Ethernet data packets do not pass the network side, but are transparently transmitted at the user side. 15.2.3.3 Creating a QinQ Link The QinQ link indicates that a VLAN is added on the accessed packets by using the QinQ encapsulation mode. In this way, multiple VLAN packets from the user-side network are
encapsulated into a VLAN in the transport network for transport. The VLAN resources in the transport network are saved. The E-Line service can be carried by the QinQ link at the network side. 15.2.3.4 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the QinQ Link The services accessed on the user side are carried by the QinQ link on the network side. Multiple VLANs of the user network are encapsulated in the QinQ mode into one VLAN in the transport network. In this way, the VLAN resources in the transport network are saved. 15.2.3.5 Modifying an E-Line Service For an E-Line service, some attributes can be modified, such as the service name, and user-side VLAN. 15.2.3.6 Deleting an E-Line Service You can delete the existing E-Line services that are not applicable.
15.2.3.1 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Service

The E-Line service includes the UNI-UNI E-Line service, UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports, NNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link and UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link.
UNI-UNI E-Line service

The complete process of configuring a UNI-UNI E-Line service is shown in following table. Table 15-9 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI E-Line service Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configure the QoS Policy 3. Configure the user-side Interface 4. Configure the UNI-UNI E-Line Service Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, and create fibers. The QoS policy is used for traffic management of the E-Line service. The Ethernet interface accesses services from NodeB.
To configure the UNI-UNI E-Line service, you need to specify the service ID, service name and service VLan.
UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by QinQ Link

The complete process of configuring a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link is shown in following table.
15-38
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Table 15-10 Tasks for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configure the QoS Policy 3. Configure the Interface 4. Configure QinQ Link Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, and create fibers. The E-Line policy is used for traffic management of the E-Line service. The Ethernet interface accesses services from NodeB. Create the QinQ link, and set the ID, board, port, S-VlAN, and QoS information of the QinQ link. The QinQ link encapsulates multiple VLAN packets to a VLAN on the network side for transmission. This saves the VLAN resources on the network. 5. Configure the UNI-NNI E-Line service Set the service ID, name, VLAN, and QinQ link ID.
15.2.3.2 Creating a UNI-UNI E-Line Service

A UNI-UNI E-Line service indicates that users can be interconnected through equipment. The Ethernet data packets do not pass the network side, but are transparently transmitted at the user side.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set parameters for the source and sink in the dialog box.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
15-39
NOTE
l For Direction, select UNI-UNI. l For Source VLAN and Sink VLAN, you can set several VLANs. Separate consecutive VLANs with "-", and inconsecutive VLANs with ",". For example, "1,3,5,8-10".

Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The New QinQ Link window is displayed. Step 3 Set QinQ Link ID, Board, Port and S-Vlan ID. Step 4 Click OK. ----End
15-40
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
15.2.3.4 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the QinQ Link

The services accessed on the user side are carried by the QinQ link on the network side. Multiple VLANs of the user network are encapsulated in the QinQ mode into one VLAN in the transport network. In this way, the VLAN resources in the transport network are saved.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The QinQ link must be created for the network-side ports.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set parameters for the source and sink in the dialog box.
NOTE
l Set Direction to UNI-NNI. l Set Bearer Type to QinQ Link. l Select a created QinQ link in QinQ Link ID.
Step 4 Click OK. Click OK in the dialog box displayed. ----End
15.2.3.5 Modifying an E-Line Service

For an E-Line service, some attributes can be modified, such as the service name, and user-side VLAN.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
If you modify the E-Line service, the E-Line service may be interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from Function Tree. Step 2 Select the E-Line service to be modified. The Service Name, MTU(byte) can be modified. After the modification is complete, click Apply.
Step 3 Click the tabs such as UNI. In these tabs, you can modify the parameters such as VLANs, EXP of ports. After the modification is complete, click Apply. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation, click OK. ----End
15.2.3.6 Deleting an E-Line Service

You can delete the existing E-Line services that are not applicable.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
If you delete the E-Line service, the E-Line service is interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the E-Line service to be deleted and click Delete. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the E-Line service is successfully deleted. Click Close. ----End
15.2.4 Configuring an E-LAN Service

On the U2000, the user can configure the multipoint-to-multipoint E-LAN service. The configuration of the E-LAN service includes the service creation, modification and deletion. 15.2.4.1 Configuration Flow for E-LAN Service The configuration flow of the E-LAN service include creating network, configuring the QoS policy, configuring interfaces, configuring the control plane, configuring MPLS tunnel and configuring E-LAN service. 15.2.4.2 Creating a QinQ Link The QinQ link indicates that a VLAN is added on the accessed packets by using the QinQ encapsulation mode. In this way, multiple VLAN packets from the user-side network are encapsulated into a VLAN in the transport network for transport. The VLAN resources in the transport network are saved. The E-Line service can be carried by the QinQ link at the network side. 15.2.4.3 Creating an E-LAN Service On the U2000, the E-LAN service can be created. Multiple types of E-LAN services can be realized by configuring the UNI and NNI ports. The NNI port or QinQ link can carry the service by using the port.
15.2.4.4 Managing the Blacklist Managing the blacklist can prevent the illegal packets from the network side or user side from attacking the equipment. Hence, the equipment can run stably in the network. Managing the blacklist includes querying the blacklist, creating the blacklist, and deleting the blacklist. 15.2.4.5 Setting the Broadcast Storm Suppression The broadcast storm suppression function can restrain the broadcast traffic on the port that carries the ELAN service. Hence, the bandwidth resource of the equipment can be properly used. Setting the broadcast storm suppression function includes enabling the broadcast storm suppression and setting the broadcast suppression threshold. 15.2.4.6 Modifying E-LAN Service The attributes of the E-LAN service can be partially modified, including the service name, and UNI and NNI ports used at the service access point. 15.2.4.7 Deleting E-LAN Service If you delete the E-LAN service, the E-LAN service is interrupted. Exercise caution when you perform this operation.
15.2.4.1 Configuration Flow for E-LAN Service

The configuration flow of the E-LAN service include creating network, configuring the QoS policy, configuring interfaces, configuring the control plane, configuring MPLS tunnel and configuring E-LAN service. Figure 15-9 shows the flow for configuring an E-LAN service.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
15-43
Figure 15-9 Flow diagram for configuring the E-LAN service

Required Optional
Start
Creating Network
Configuring the QoS Policy Configuring Interfaces
Configuring E-LAN Service Creating a V-UNI Group End
Configuring the Control Plane Configuring an MPLS Tunnel Configuring E-LAN Service Creating a V-UNI Group End
Configuring QinQ Link Configuring E-LAN Service Creating a V-UNI Group End
The columns in the figure shows the three sub processes. From left to right, the sub systems indicate the NNI carried by ports, NNI carried by PWs, and NNI carried by QinQ Link respectively.
Before configuring the E-LAN service, you should complete configuring network (including 1 Creating NEs, Links, and Topology Subnets, Configuring Inband DCN, Configuring the NE Time, 3 Configuring Clocks, and Configuring the Equipment-Level Protection), 15.1 Configuring the QoS Policy, and 8.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces. Perform the following operations according to the NNI bearer type. l l In the case that the operations mentioned above are completed, when the port is set to Bearer Type, the E-LAN service can be configured. When the PW is set to Bearer Type, the MPLS tunnel need be configured. See the following contents according to the MPLS tunnel type. When the static MPLS tunnel is used, the MPLS tunnel can be configured on a per-NE basis or by using the trail function. See Creating a Static MPLS Tunnel by Using the Trail Function and 21.2.2 Creating an MPLS Tunnel. When the static MPLS tunnel is used, 20 Configuring the Control Plane can be skipped.
When the dynamic MPLS tunnel is used, see Creating a Dynamic MPLS Tunnel by Using the Trail Function. l If the network side is carried by the QinQ Link, 15.2.4.2 Creating a QinQ Link need be complete.
When configuring the E-LAN service, see 15.2.4 Configuring an E-LAN Service.

Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The New QinQ Link window is displayed. Step 3 Set QinQ Link ID, Board, Port and S-Vlan ID. Step 4 Click OK. ----End
15.2.4.3 Creating an E-LAN Service

On the U2000, the E-LAN service can be created. Multiple types of E-LAN services can be realized by configuring the UNI and NNI ports. The NNI port or QinQ link can carry the service by using the port.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the correct configuration of the port attributes. If the port need be exclusively used, disable the DCN function of the port that carries the service. For the operation steps, see 2.14.4.4 Enabling the Port DCN. If the service need be carried by a QinQ link, you must configure a QinQ link first.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
15-45
CAUTION
l The ML-PPP line should not carry any E-LAN service. l On the network side, the E-LAN service does not support the LMSP, FRR, MPLS APS, and LAG protection.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New to display the New E-LAN Service dialog box. Then, set Service ID, Service Name.
NOTE
l Self-Learning MAC Address is set to enabled. When Self-Learning MAC Address is set to enabled, the bridge supports the MAC address self-learning, the forwarding table items are generated through the MAC address self-learning. You can also manually configure the static MAC address forwarding table items. l MAC Address Learning Mode is set to IVL. IVL indicates the independent VLAN learning. The forwarding tables for different VLANs are independent from each other. It is acceptable that the MAC address forwarding tables for different VLANs have the same MAC address. l Tag Type can be set to C-Awared, S-Awared or Tag Transparent. C-Awared corresponds to the accessed service packets with one C-VLAN. S-Awared corresponds to the accessed service packets with one C-VLAN and one S-VLAN. Tag Transparent corresponds to the accessed service packets without any VLAN.
Step 3 Click OK to display the dialog box, which indicates that the operation is successful. Then, click Close. Step 4 Click the UNI tab. Then, click Configuration to display the Configure Port dialog box. Step 5 In the Available Ports list, select the port. Then, click Ports list. to add the port to the Selected
Step 6 In the Selected Ports list, set VLANs/CVLAN of the port, and then click OK. Step 7 Click the NNI tab. l l If configuring the NNI interface carried by the port, click the Port tab. See Step 4 to Step 6 to add and configure the NNI port. Then, click OK. If configuring the NNI interface carried by the QinQ link, click the QinQ Link tab. 1. 2. 3. Click Add. The QinQ Link Management window is displayed. Select a QinQ link ID and click OK. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close,
NOTE
The services carried by the QinQ link can not support to create MP.
Step 8 Click the Split Horizon Group tab. Then, click New to display the New Split Horizon Group dialog box.
Step 9 Configure the split horizon group id, and add the interface that need be added into the split horizon group to the Selected Interfaces pane. Click OK to display the dialog box, which indicates that the operation is successful. Then, click Close. Step 10 Click the MAC Address Learning Parameters tab. Set Aging Ability, Aging Time(min), Address Table Specified Capacity, Address Detection Upper Threshold(%) and Address Detection Lower Threshold(%).
NOTE
Address Detection Upper Threshold(%) and Address Detection Upper Threshold(%) indicate the upper threshold and lower threshold of the self-learning capacity. If the upper threshold is crossed, the equipment reports an alarm. If the lower threshold is crossed, the alarm is cleared.
Step 11 Click Apply. The dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Step 12 Click the Unknown Frame Processing tab. Set the processing modes for the unicast frames and multicast frames. The default value is broadcast. Step 13 Click Apply. The dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Step 14 Optional: Click the Static MAC Address tab. Manually bind the VLAN ID, MAC Address and Egress Interface.
NOTE
Set the VLAN ID only when MAC Address Learning Mode is set IVL.
Step 15 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab. Set the OAM-related parameters.
NOTE
Before setting OAM-related parameters, configure the MD.
----End
15.2.4.4 Managing the Blacklist

Managing the blacklist can prevent the illegal packets from the network side or user side from attacking the equipment. Hence, the equipment can run stably in the network. Managing the blacklist includes querying the blacklist, creating the blacklist, and deleting the blacklist.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of E-LAN services.
Context
After the MAC address blacklist is created on a port that carries the ELAN service, if the destination MAC or source MAC information carried by a packet enters this port is consistent with a random MAC address created in the blacklist, this packet is discarded.
NOTE
The MAC address that is added to the static route should not be added to the MAC address of the blacklist.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
15-47
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the Disabled MAC Address tab page, select Query to query the added MAC address of the blacklist. Step 3 Click New and the Create Disabled MAC Address dialog box is displayed. Set VLAN ID and MAC Address.
Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 Optional: In the interface, select the information of a MAC address, and then click Delete. Hence, the MAC address information is deleted from the blacklist. ----End
15.2.4.5 Setting the Broadcast Storm Suppression

The broadcast storm suppression function can restrain the broadcast traffic on the port that carries the ELAN service. Hence, the bandwidth resource of the equipment can be properly used. Setting the broadcast storm suppression function includes enabling the broadcast storm suppression and setting the broadcast suppression threshold.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of E-LAN services.
Context
The broadcast suppression is enabled on a port that carries the ELAN service. In this case, when the packets that enter this port are unknown unicast packets, unknown multicast packets, or broadcast packets, if the traffic exceeds the broadcast suppression threshold set for the port, the packets that exceeds the bandwidth are discarded.
NOTE
Currently, the equipment supports the broadcast suppression function for the UNI only. The broadcast suppression function for the NNI is not supported.
15-48
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the UNI tab page, select the corresponding port. Double-click the Enabled Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter field, and then select Enabled. Step 3 Double-click the Broadcast Suppression Threshold parameter field, and then set the threshold value. Step 4 Click Apply. ----End
15.2.4.6 Modifying E-LAN Service

The attributes of the E-LAN service can be partially modified, including the service name, and UNI and NNI ports used at the service access point.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
If you modify the E-AN service, the E-LAN service may be interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the E-LAN service to be modified. The service name can be modified. After the modification is complete, click Apply. Step 3 Click the UNI tab. Select the port to be modified. Click Configuration. After the attributes are modified, click OK to return to the UNI tab. Then, click Apply. Step 4 Click Port in the NNI tab. Click Configuration. After the attributes are modified, click OK to return to the NNItab. Click Apply. ----End
15.2.4.7 Deleting E-LAN Service

If you delete the E-LAN service, the E-LAN service is interrupted. Exercise caution when you perform this operation.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
If you delete the E-LAN service, the E-LAN service is interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the E-LAN service to be deleted and click Delete. A prompt dialog box is displayed. Click OK. ----End
15.2.5 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

On the U2000, the user can configure the multipoint-to-point E-AGGR service. The equipment can aggregate the Ethernet data packets accessed from multiple ports to the sink node. The configuration of the E-AGGR service includes the service creation, modification and deletion. 15.2.5.1 Configuration Flow for the E-AGGR Service Configuring an E-AGGR service contains creating the network, and configuring the QoS policy, interfaces, control plane, MPLS tunnel, and E-AGGR service. 15.2.5.2 Creating an E-AGGR Service On the U2000, the creation of an E-AGGR service can be complete in one interface. The equipment supports the multipoint-to-point service aggregation, and supports the service aggregation from the NNI carried by multiple PWs to one UNI port. 15.2.5.3 Modifying an E-AGGR Service The E-AGGR service supports the modification of some attributes, such as the service name, access port at the user side, VLAN table at the user side, and QoS policy template at the service access point. 15.2.5.4 Deleting an E-AGGR Service When the E-AGGR service is configured, the PW that carries the service, VLAN switching table items, and QoS and OAM parameters of the service, are configured at the same time. When the E-AGGR service is deleted, the PW that carries the service, VLAN switching table items, and related QoS and OAM parameters, are deleted at the same time.
15.2.5.1 Configuration Flow for the E-AGGR Service

Configuring an E-AGGR service contains creating the network, and configuring the QoS policy, interfaces, control plane, MPLS tunnel, and E-AGGR service. Figure 15-10 shows the flow for configuring an E-AGGR service.
15-50
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 15-10 Configuration flow for the E-AGGR service

Required Optional
Start
Creating Network
Configuring the QoS Policy Configuring Interfaces
Configuring a UNIs-UNI E-AGGR Service for NEs
Configuring a UNIs-NNI E-AGGR Service for NEs
Configuring the Control Plane Configuring an MPLS Tunnel
Creating a V-UNI Group End
Configuring a NNIs-UNI E-AGGR Service for NEs
Configuring a UNIs-NNI E-AGGR Service for NEs
Configuring a NNIs-UNI E-AGGR Service for NEs
The columns in the figure shows the three sub processes, which are for the configuration of a UNI-UNI E-AGGR service, the configuration of an E-AGGR service carried by ports on the NNI side, and the configuration of an E-AGGR service carried by PWs on the NNI side from the left to right. Before configuring the UNI-UNI E-AGGR service, you should complete configuring network (including 1 Creating NEs, Links, and Topology Subnets, Configuring Inband DCN, Configuring the NE Time, 3 Configuring Clocks, and Configuring the Equipment-Level Protection), 15.1 Configuring the QoS Policy, Configuring Interfaces, 20 Configuring the Control Plane, and 21 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel. When configuring the E-AGGR service, see 15.2.5 Configuring an E-AGGR Service. When the MPLS tunnel is configured, see the following contents according to the MPLS tunnel type. l When the static MPLS tunnel is used, the MPLS tunnel can be configured on a per-NE basis or by using the trail function. See Creating a Static MPLS Tunnel by Using the Trail Function and 21.2.2 Creating an MPLS Tunnel. When the dynamic MPLS tunnel is used, see Creating a Dynamic MPLS Tunnel by Using the Trail Function.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
15-51
15.2.5.2 Creating an E-AGGR Service

On the U2000, the creation of an E-AGGR service can be complete in one interface. The equipment supports the multipoint-to-point service aggregation, and supports the service aggregation from the NNI carried by multiple PWs to one UNI port.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the correct configuration of port attributes. You must complete the creation of the MPLS tunnel that carries the PW. If a port need be exclusively used, disable the DCN function of the port that carries the service. For detail, see 2.14.4.4 Enabling the Port DCN.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New to display the New E-AGGR Service dialog box. Then, configure Service ID, Service Name and MTU(byte). Step 3 Click the UNI tab. Then, click Configuration to display the Configure Port dialog box. Step 4 In the Available Port list, select the desired port and click Selected Port list.
NOTE
to add the port to the
The port of the E-AGGR service does not support the S-Aware attribute.
Step 5 In the Selected Port list, configure Location and VLANs of the port, and then click OK.
NOTE
Location can be set to the source end or the sink end. Multiple source ends can be set, but only one sink end can be set. Otherwise, the E-AGGR service cannot be correctly configured.
Step 6 Click the NNI tab. l l To configure the NNI interface carried by the port, click the Port tab. When adding and setting the port at the NNI side, see Step 3 and Step 5. Then, click OK. To configure the NNI interface carried by the PW, click the PW tab. Click New to set related parameters of the PW. Then, click OK.
NOTE
l For PW Signaling Type, select Dynamic or Static. Dynamic indicates that the LDP signaling is used to create a PW. l For PW Type, select Ethernet or Ethernet Tagged Mode.
Step 7 Select VLAN Forwarding Table Item. Click New to display the New VLAN Forwarding Table Item window to set the forwarding attributes. Then, click OK.
NOTE
The service is forwarded based on VLAN, and thus the forwarding attributes should be set in VLAN Forwarding Table Item from each source interface to sink interface.
15-52
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Step 8 Optional: Click Configure QoS. Set the parameters of the QoS. l l Click the UNI tab to set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color. Click the PW tab to set EXP and LSP Mode.
Step 9 Click OK to display the confirmation dialog box. Then, close the dialog box. ----End
15.2.5.3 Modifying an E-AGGR Service

The E-AGGR service supports the modification of some attributes, such as the service name, access port at the user side, VLAN table at the user side, and QoS policy template at the service access point.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
If you modify the E-AGGR service, the E-AGGR service may be interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the E-AGGR service to modify the service name and MTU. After the modification, click Apply. Step 3 Click the UNI tab to select the port to be modified. Click Configuration. After the modification of attributes, click OK to return to the UNI tab. Then, click Apply. Step 4 Select the Port tab from the NNI tab. Click Configuration. After the modification of attributes, click OK to return to the NNI tab. Then, click Apply. Step 5 Click the QoS tab to modify the UNI port and QoS parameters of the PW. After the modification, click Apply. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation, click OK. ----End
15.2.5.4 Deleting an E-AGGR Service

When the E-AGGR service is configured, the PW that carries the service, VLAN switching table items, and QoS and OAM parameters of the service, are configured at the same time. When the E-AGGR service is deleted, the PW that carries the service, VLAN switching table items, and related QoS and OAM parameters, are deleted at the same time.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
If you delete the E-AGGR service, the E-AGGR service is interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the E-AGGR service to be deleted and click Delete. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the EAGGR service is successfully deleted. Click Close. ----End
15.3 Configuring Port Mirroring

You can configure port mirroring to analyze only packets for mirrored ports. In this way, you can monitor all mirrored ports. This helps you to manage the ports.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The mirror listener port should contain no Ethernet service, and has not be aggregated.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Port Mirroring from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. Step 3 In the window is displayed, set Mirror Name, Direction, Mirror Listener Port and Listened Port. Step 4 Click OK. ----End
15-54
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
16 Configuring Cross-Polarization Interference Cancellation
16
About This Chapter
Configuring Cross-Polarization Interference Cancellation
Cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) is a technology used together with cochannel dual-polarization (CCDP). The application of the two technologies doubles the wireless link capacity over the same channel. 16.1 Feature Description This topic considers the application of the XPIC as an example to describe the XPIC feature. 16.2 Availability The XPIC feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 16.3 Realization Principle The IF boards of XPIC receive signals in the horizontal and vertical directions. The signals in the two directions are then processed and the original signals are recovered. 16.4 Creating an XPIC Workgroup When two IF boards that form an XPIC workgroup are installed on an IDU, you can create an XPIC workgroup to ensure that the XPIC workgroup is configured with the same work mode, transmission frequency, TX power, and ATPC attributes.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
16-1
16.1 Feature Description

This topic considers the application of the XPIC as an example to describe the XPIC feature. The application of the XPIC technology enables using the same channel bandwidth to transmit service signals whose capacity is two times the capacity of application without XPIC. The transmission of 2xSTM-1 signals in one direction of the radio link is considered as an example. When the XPIC technology is not used, the adjacent channel alternate polarization (ACAP) technology should be used in channel configuration. Thus, the bandwidth of two RF channels should be used to transmit these 2xSTM-1 signals. See Figure 16-1. When the XPIC technology is used, the bandwidth of one RF channel can transmit 2xSTM-1 signals by using the CCDP channel configuration mode. See Figure 16-2. Figure 16-1 Channel configuration in ACAP mode (without the application of the XPIC technology)
Site A IDU Service Service ODU 2 ODU 1 f1 H V f2 f2 f2 ODU 2 Service Site B ODU 1 IDU Service
f1
f1
Figure 16-2 Channel configuration in CCDP mode (with the application of the XPIC technology)
Site A IDU Service Service ODU 2 ODU 1 f1 H V f1 f1 ODU 2 Site B ODU 1 IDU Service Service
f1
f1
16.2 Availability
The XPIC feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 16-1 Availability of the XPIC feature Applicable Board IFX (all the versions)
16-2
Applicable Equipment RTN 620

Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Applicable Board IFU2 EM6T/F IFX2
16.3 Realization Principle

The IF boards of XPIC receive signals in the horizontal and vertical directions. The signals in the two directions are then processed and the original signals are recovered. Figure 16-3 Realization principle of XPIC
Horizontal polarization
XPIC module of IF board

A/D Filter Decision Coefficient control Filter
Modem horizontal
Cross interference Cross interference
Filter
XPIC module of IFX

Coefficient control
Modem vertical
A/D
Filter
Decision
Vertical polarization
The realization principle is as follows: 1. 2. The transmitter transmits two signals with the same frequency over a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave. Due to XPD of the antenna and channel degradation, cross-polarization interference exists in the signals received by the ODU and also in the IF signals transmitted from the ODU to the IF boards of XPIC. The XPIC module on the XPIC board receives the IF signal from the ODU and also the IF signal from the other IF board of XPIC, and processes the IF signals, for example, A/D conversion. The XPIC module on the XPIC board controls the coefficient of the feed forward equalizer filters (FFF) of the two IF signals by using the decision feedback equalizer (DFE). As a result, after filtering and combination, the interference is cancelled in the two IF signals.
3.
4.
16.4 Creating an XPIC Workgroup

When two IF boards that form an XPIC workgroup are installed on an IDU, you can create an XPIC workgroup to ensure that the XPIC workgroup is configured with the same work mode, transmission frequency, TX power, and ATPC attributes.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be created. The XPIC Enabled parameter must be set to Enabled for the IF boards.
Context
l Relation with the 1+1 Protection Configuration: The two IF boards in an XPIC working group cannot be configured into one 1+1 protection group, but the two IF boards in different XPIC working groups can be configured into one 1+1 protection group. Therefore, the four IF boards in two XPIC working groups can form two 1+1 protection groups. Relation with the N+1 Protection: Each member of an XPIC working group can work as the working channel or the protection channel of the N+1 protection. Relation with the ATPC Feature: The transmit power of the two ODUs that are in an XPIC working group should be the same if possible. Hence, each of the ATPC parameters (ATPC enable status, ATPC upper threshold, ATPC lower threshold, and ATPC adjustment) should be set to the same value for the IFX boards that are in an XPIC working group.
l l
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the XPIC tab. Step 3 Click New. Step 4 In the dialog displayed box, Set the parameters for the XPIC workgroup. For RTN 600 NEs:
16-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
l When CCDP is applied to the STM-1 microwave links, the IFX/IFX2 boards must be installed and the XPIC function must be enabled. l An XPIC working group must be configured to ensure that the XPIC working group is configured with the same working mode, transmission frequency, transmit power, and ATPC attributes. l When the used ODUs support two T/R spacings, ensure that the two ODUs of an XPIC working group adopt the same T/R spacing.
Postrequisite
Generally, you do not need to configure the IF/ODU information after you configure an XPIC workgroup. You, however, need to set the T/R spacing used by the ODU in the IF/ODU Configuration tab page if the used ODU supports two T/R spacings.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
16-5
17 Configuring Automatic Transmit Power Control Function
17
Configuring Automatic Transmit Power Control Function
About This Chapter

The automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function is an important function of the radio transmission system. The ATPC function reduces the interference from a transmitter to adjacent systems and also reduces the residual bit error rate. 17.1 Feature Description The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range. 17.2 Availability The ATPC feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 17.3 Realization Principle The ATPC function uses the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame to realize. 17.4 Configuring the ATPC Function To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
17-1

The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range.
Functions and Performance of ATPC

When the ATPC function is enabled, the following two cases are possible: l If the RSL at the receive end is lower than the preset ATPC lower threshold, the receiver notifies the transmitter to increase the transmit power according to the preset ATPC adjustment step at the transmit end until the RSL is higher than the ATPC lower threshold. If the RSL at the receive end is higher than the preset ATPC upper threshold, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease the transmit power according to the preset ATPC adjustment step at the transmit end until the RSL is lower than the ATPC upper threshold.
Table 17-1 provides the ATPC performance of the OptiX RTN 600. Table 17-1 ATPC performance ATPC Control Range Lower Threshold (dBm) -6 (SP ODU series) Rated minimum transmit power (HP/ SPA/LP ODU series) Upper Threshold (dBm) Rated maximum transmit power + 1.5 dB (SP ODU series) Rated maximum transmit power (HP/ SPA/LP ODU series) Value Range of the ATPC Adjustment Step (dB) 1 to 5 ATPC Adjustment Speed (dB/s)
10 (when the adjustment step is set to 1 dB) 20 (when the adjustment step is set to 2 dB) 30 (when the adjustment step is set to a value, which ranges from 3 dB to 5 dB)
Automatic ATPC Threshold Setting

The functions of the automatic ATPC threshold setting are as follows: l When the automatic ATPC threshold setting is enabled, the ATPC lower threshold and the ATPC upper threshold that are manually set do not take effect. The equipment uses the preset ATPC lower threshold and ATPC upper threshold according to the IF work mode. When the automatic ATPC threshold setting is disabled, the ATPC lower threshold and the ATPC upper threshold that are manually set are used.
17-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
17.2 Availability
The ATPC feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 17-2 Availability of the ATPC feature Applicable Board IF1A/IF1B (all the versions) IF0A/IF0B (all the versions) IFX (all the versions) IFH2 (all the versions) RTN 620 Applicable Equipment RTN 605 RTN 610/620
Table 17-3 Availability of the ATPC feature Applicable Board IF1 IFU2 IFX2 RTN 910/950 Applicable Equipment

The ATPC function uses the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame to realize.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
17-3
Figure 17-1 ATPC realization principle

Transmitter Receiver RSL out of ATPC adjustment range
Microwave frame (ATPC overhead indicates to adjust the transmit power) Adjust the ODU power once according to the ATPC adjustment step Microwave frame (ATPC overhead indicates to adjust the transmit power) Adjust the ODU power once according to the ATPC adjustment step
Microwave frame (ATPC overhead indicates not to adjust the transmit power)
RSL within ATPC adjustment range
Does not adjust the ODU power
The realization principle is as follows: 1. 2. The receiver detects the RSL. After the ATPC function is enabled, when the RSL is lower than the lower ATPC threshold or higher than the upper ATPC threshold, the receiver sets the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame to be sent to the transmitter, to indicate an increase or decrease in the transmit power.
NOTE
To prevent continuous adjustment to ODU power at the transmit end from occupying a large number of resources, the receiver does not set the ATPC overhead in each microwave frame to indicate an increase or decrease in the transmit power. Instead, the receiver sets the ATPC overhead every several microwave frames.
3. 4.
The transmitter detects the ATPC overhead in the received microwave frame. When the transmitter detects that the ATPC overhead in a microwave frame indicates an increase or decrease in the transmit power, the transmitter increases or decreases the transmit power of the ODU according to the preset ATPC adjustment step. When the receiver detects that the RSL is within the ATPC adjustment range, the receiver sets the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame again to make the ATPC overhead indicate not to adjust the transmit power.
5.
17-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
6.
When the transmitter does not detect the ATPC overhead that indicates an increase or decrease in the transmit power, the transmitter does not change the transmit power of the ODU.
17.4 Configuring the ATPC Function

To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The related IF board must be added.
Precautions
l l In the case of the IF boards that are configured with the 1+1 protection, set only the ATPC attributes of the main IF board. The following procedure describes the configuration of ATPC parameters in the IF interface configuration dialog box of the IF board. You can also set ATPC parameters in the following configuration dialog boxes: Create an XPIC working group IF/ODU configuration l l In the IF/ODU configuration dialog box, the ATPC adjustment thresholds cannot be modified. The transmit power of the two ODUs that are in an XPIC working group should be the same if possible. Hence, each of the ATPC parameters (ATPC enable status, ATPC upper threshold, ATPC lower threshold, and ATPC adjustment) should be set to the same value for the IF boards that are in an XPIC working group. In the case of the Hybrid microwave, the AM switching is controlled through detection of the change in the ATPC information and returned microwave message.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 and RTN 900 V100R002 NEs. 1. 2. 3. Select the IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the ATPC Attributes tab. Set the ATPC attributes.
NOTE
The IF0 board of the RTN 605 does not support the ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status.
4.
Click Apply.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
17-5
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 V1R1 NEs, see Configuring the IF Attributes of Microwave Interfaces to take the details of configuration. ----End
Parameters
Parameter ATPC Enable Status Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range. l In the case of areas where fast fading is severe, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm) -20 to -75 -45 l When the ATPC function is enabled, if the RSL at the receive end is higher than the preset ATPC upper threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease the transmit power according to the preset ATPC adjustment step at the transmit end until the RSL is lower than the ATPC upper threshold. l Generally, ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm) should be 20 dB to 30 dB higher than ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm), and must not be less than 15 dB. If the difference between the upper threshold and the lower threshold is big, the number of ATPC adjustments is reduced and the system load is also reduced. If the difference between the upper threshold and the lower threshold is small, the transmit power is adjusted in a timely manner and the interference to adjacent systems is reduced.
17-6
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm)
Value Range -35 to -90
Default Value -70
Description l When the ATPC function is enabled, if the RSL at the receive end is lower than the preset ATPC lower threshold, the receiver notifies the transmitter to increase the transmit power according to the preset ATPC adjustment step at the transmit end until the RSL is higher than the ATPC lower threshold. l Generally, set this parameter to a value of 10 dB or greater than the receiver sensitivity to prevent sudden fast fading because sudden fast fading makes the RSL value lower than the receiver sensitivity.
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
l The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range. l When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board. l When the function is disabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are used. l The IF0 board of the RTN 605 does not support the ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
17-7

NOTE
l Set ATPC parameters consistent at the two sides of a hop of microwave link. l During commissioning, set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. l It is recommended that you disable the ATPC function for areas where fast fading is severe. l To prevent that the RSL is lower than the receiver sensitivity caused by sudden fast fading, set the ATPC lower threshold 10 dB or more higher than the receiver sensitivity. l Generally, the ATPC upper threshold should be 20 dB to 30 dB higher than the ATPC lower threshold, and must not be less than 15 dB. If the difference between the upper threshold and the lower threshold is big, the number of ATPC adjustments can be reduced and the system load can also be reduced. If the difference between the upper threshold and the lower threshold is small, the transmit power can be adjusted in a timely manner and the interference to adjacent systems can be reduced. l It is recommended that you set the ATPC adjustment step to 5 dB. l In the case of hybrid radio links, the automatic ATPC threshold is recommended. In the case of SDH/PDH radio links, the automatic ATPC threshold is recommended or you can make adjustment according to multipath fading situation.
17-8
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
18 Configuring Hybrid Microwave
18
Configuring Hybrid Microwave
About This Chapter

The Hybrid microwave refers to the microwave that transmits E1 services and Ethernet services. 18.1 Feature Description This topic describes the application of the Hybrid microwave feature. 18.2 Basic Concepts This topic describes the basic concepts you need to be familiar with before you use the Hybrid microwave feature. 18.3 Availability The Hybrid microwave feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 18.4 Realization Principle This topic describes the principle of the AM switching of the hybrid microwave. 18.5 Configuration Guide This topic describes how to configure hybrid microwave.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
18-1

This topic describes the application of the Hybrid microwave feature. Figure 18-1 shows the functional block diagram of the Hybrid microwave feature. E1 services and Ethernet services are multiplexed into Hybrid microwave frames at the local MUX unit. Then, the Hybrid frames are transmitted to the opposite end by the transmitter after being modulated by the MODEM unit. After the receiver at the opposite end receives the signals, the MODEM unit at the opposite end demodulates the signals into Hybrid microwave frames, which are finally separated into E1 services and Ethernet services by the DEMUX unit. Figure 18-1 Application of the Hybrid microwave feature
Ethernet E1 OH Ethernet E1 OH
E1 MUX Ethernet Microwave frame MODEM Transmitter Receiver MODEM Microwave frame DMUX
E1
Ethernet
OH: Overheads of the Hybrid microwave frame
The Hybrid microwave feature of the OptiX RTN realizes optimization for service reliability and service capacity by using technologies such as combined transmission of E1 services and Ethernet services, adaptive modulation (AM), and Ethernet QoS control.
18.2 Basic Concepts

This topic describes the basic concepts you need to be familiar with before you use the Hybrid microwave feature. 18.2.1 Service Transmission Mode In the case of the Hybrid microwave, different Hybrid microwave frames are defined for different work modes. The accessed E1 services and Ethernet services are multiplexed into one Hybrid microwave frame. 18.2.2 AM The Hybrid microwave supports the AM technology. With the application of the AM technology, the Hybrid microwave uses the high-efficiency modulation scheme when the channel is of better quality. Hence, more user services can be transmitted and thus the transmission efficiency and spectrum utilization are improved. When the quality of the channel is degraded, the Hybrid microwave uses the low-efficiency modulation scheme, in which only the services of a high priority are transmitted. Hence, the anti-interference capability of links is enhanced and availability of the links on which the high-priority services are transmitted is ensured. 18.2.3 Working Mode When the AM function is enabled for the Hybrid microwave, the Hybrid microwave can select the best working mode from the working modes that are already set by the user according to the
condition of the channel. When the AM function is disabled, the Hybrid microwave uses the working mode that is set by the user. 18.2.4 QoS Control for Ethernet Services The Hybrid microwave provides various functions to ensure that Ethernet services can meet the requirements of variable transmission bandwidth due to the application of the AM technology, and thus to ensure the QoS of services.
18.2.1 Service Transmission Mode

In the case of the Hybrid microwave, different Hybrid microwave frames are defined for different work modes. The accessed E1 services and Ethernet services are multiplexed into one Hybrid microwave frame. The characteristics of the Hybrid microwave frame are as follows: l l l The Hybrid microwave frame is transmitted at a fixed interval. The Hybrid microwave frame remains the frame length unchanged in the case of a certain modulation scheme or bandwidth. The E1 services that are multiplexed into the Hybrid microwave frame use a certain proportion of the bandwidth of this Hybrid microwave frame. That is, the bandwidth used by these E1 services in the Hybrid microwave frame is equal to the total bandwidth of these E1 services. Hence, characteristics of these E1 services transmitted over Hybrid microwave frames are the same as the characteristics of the E1 services transmitted over PDH microwave, and the TDM feature of the E1 services is not affected in the case of Hybrid microwave transmission. The Ethernet services that are multiplexed into the Hybrid microwave frame use the remaining bandwidth of this Hybrid microwave frame. This does not affect the Ethernet services because the Ethernet frames undergo certain encapsulation and adaptation processes. See Figure 18-2.
Figure 18-2 Multiplexing E1 services and Ethernet services into the Hybrid microwave frame
T
OH E1 E1 Ethernet
Features of Hybrid Microwave Service Access

l In the case of E1 services: The equipment accesses E1 services through the E1 service interface board, SDH/PDH service interface board, microwave IF board, and the E1 service interface unit in the other directions. In the case of Ethernet services: The equipment accesses Ethernet services through the FE interface or GE interface of the Ethernet board, the GE interface of the IF board, or through the Ethernet interface of the equipment.
18.2.2 AM
The Hybrid microwave supports the AM technology. With the application of the AM technology, the Hybrid microwave uses the high-efficiency modulation scheme when the channel is of better quality. Hence, more user services can be transmitted and thus the transmission efficiency and
spectrum utilization are improved. When the quality of the channel is degraded, the Hybrid microwave uses the low-efficiency modulation scheme, in which only the services of a high priority are transmitted. Hence, the anti-interference capability of links is enhanced and availability of the links on which the high-priority services are transmitted is ensured. E1 services are of the highest priority in the AM-based Hybrid microwave transmission. Ethernet services are classified into flows of different priorities based on the CoS technology. When the Hybrid microwave uses the lowest-efficiency modulation scheme, the equipment transmits E1 services only (if the service bandwidth is higher than the total bandwidth of the E1 services, the Ethernet services of a high priority can be transmitted). When the Hybrid microwave uses other modulation schemes, the increased bandwidth can be used to transmit Ethernet services. In this case, availability of the links on which the E1 services and Ethernet services of a high priority are transmitted can be ensured and the capacity for transmitting Ethernet services increases. Figure 18-3 shows the working principle of the Hybrid microwave that uses the AM technology. Figure 18-3 Working principle of the Hybrid microwave
256QAM QPSK 16QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM Channel capability E1 services Ethernet services
Figure 18-3 shows the transmission mode of the Hybrid microwave. The orange column represents E1 services, and the blue column represents Ethernet services. When an Ethernet service is nearer the edge of the column, the priority of this Ethernet service is lower. As shown in Figure 18-3, the E1 services use a constant bandwidth irrespective of the real-time condition of the channel. Hence, the availability of E1 services is ensured. The bandwidth of the Ethernet services is variable depending on the condition of the channel. When the quality of the channel is degraded, the Ethernet services of a low priority are discarded.
NOTE
When only the Ethernet services are transmitted over the Hybrid microwave, the bandwidth originally used by the E1 services as shown in Figure 18-3 is allocated to the Ethernet services of a high priority.
The features of the AM function are as follows: 1. The AM function switches the modulation scheme step by step. The highest-efficiency modulation scheme and lowest-efficiency modulation scheme can be configured.
18-4
2. 3.
The AM function retains the transmit frequency, receive frequency, and channel spacing when switching the modulation scheme. AM Mode is Asymmetric, an AM switching in one direction of the radio link does not trigger the AM switching in the other direction of the radio link.
18.2.3 Working Mode

When the AM function is enabled for the Hybrid microwave, the Hybrid microwave can select the best working mode from the working modes that are already set by the user according to the condition of the channel. When the AM function is disabled, the Hybrid microwave uses the working mode that is set by the user.
Radio Work Mode

Table 18-1 Radio work modes in the case of hybrid microwave frames Channel Spacing (MHz)a, b 7 7 7 7 7 7 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 56 56
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Modulation Scheme QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM
Service Capacity (Mbit/s) 10 20 25 32 38 44 20 42 51 66 78 90 42 84 105 133 158 183 84 168
Maximum Number of E1s in servicec 5 10 12 15 18 21 10 20 24 31 37 43 20 40 50 64 75 75 40 75

18-5
56 56 56 56 40d
32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 64QAM
208 265 313 363 -
75 75 75 75 75
NOTE
1. The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band. 2. The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported. 3. The E1 services consume the corresponding bandwidth of the service capacity. After the E1 service capacity is deducted from the service capacity, the remaining bandwidth of the service capacity can be used for the Ethernet services. 4. This modes are the super PDH modes that do not support the transmission of Ethernet services.
18.2.4 QoS Control for Ethernet Services

The Hybrid microwave provides various functions to ensure that Ethernet services can meet the requirements of variable transmission bandwidth due to the application of the AM technology, and thus to ensure the QoS of services. The AM function of the Hybrid microwave is related to the QoS processing for services. In the case of an AM switching, services should be processed according to different QoS levels and services of higher priority should lose any packet.
QoS Control of the OptiX RTN 620

In the case of the QoS control implemented by the OptiX RTN 620, two cases are available. When only the IFH2 board is used, the QoS control of the IDU 620 supports the following functions: l l Flow classification that complies with IEEE 802.1p. Four-level priority SP queue scheduling
When the EMS6 and IFH2 boards are used, the QoS control of the OptiX RTN 620 supports the following functions in addition to the functions that are supported when only the IFH2 board is used: l Flow classification The following flow classification modes are supported. Flow classification based on PORT Flow classification based on PORT+CVLAN Flow classification based on PORT+SVLAN Flow classification based on PORT+CVLAN+SVLAN l l
18-6
CAR based on the flow CoS based on the flow

Traffic shaping based on PORT
When the bandwidth on the air interface of the OptiX RTN 620 changes, the EMS6 is informed of this change through the in-band packet so that the EMS6 can control the bandwidth on the port.
NOTE
For details about the Ethernet QoS, see 14.7 Configuring QoS.
QoS Control of the OptiX RTN 605

The QoS control of the OptiX RTN 605 is realized through the internal logic unit of the equipment. The QoS control of the OptiX RTN 605 supports the following functions: l l l l Flow classification based on PORT CAR based on the flow CoS based on the flow The CoS can be classified based on the VLAN priority or DSCP. Egress queue scheduling based on SP and WRR
QoS Control of the RTN 900

For details about the Ethernet QoS, see 15.1 Configuring the QoS Policy.
18.3 Availability
The Hybrid microwave feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 18-2 Availability of the Hybrid microwave feature Applicable Board IFH2 Applicable Equipment RTN 605 RTN 620
Table 18-3 Availability of the Hybrid microwave feature Applicable Board IFU2 IFX2 Applicable Equipment RTN 910/950

This topic describes the principle of the AM switching of the hybrid microwave. The AM engine is the core for controlling the AM switching.
On the one hand, the AM engine communicates with the remote AM engine through the information channel that is provided by the radio link so that the transmit end is informed of the quality of the signals at the receive end. On the other hand, the AM engine determines the attributes of the modulation scheme that is switched to, based on the real-time quality of the link. When the switching of modulation scheme is required, the AM engine sends the AM switching indication signal to the Tx path.
AM Working Principle (Before the Switching)

1. The switching unit grooms services at different priority levels to the IF port on an IF board, and the multiplexing unit multiplexes the services to microwave frames. E1 services and Ethernet services are multiplexed to hybrid microwave frames by the multiplexing unit.
NOTE
In hybrid microwave, E1 services have the highest priority.
2. 3.
The hybrid microwave frames are transmitted to the opposite end over the Tx path after being modulated by the IF unit. The opposite end receives the IF signals from the Rx path. In addition, the opposite end checks the quality of the received signals based on the received signal to noise ratio (SNR). In the current working modulation scheme, the opposite end determines that the quality of the received signals is degraded if the value of the received SNR is lower than the threshold. Then, the opposite end sends signal quality indication signal to the AM engine. The AM engine at the opposite end sends the hybrid microwave frame to the local end after the switching indication signal is placed into the overhead of the hybrid microwave frame. The IF unit at the local end processes the received IF signals and sends the AM switching indication signal to the AM engine at the local end. The AM engine at the local end sends the switching indication signal to the service signal processing unit and IF signal modulation unit. Hence, the service signal transmission unit and IF signal modulation unit perform the switching of service frames and modulation schemes after N frames. See Figure 18-4.
4. 5. 6.
Figure 18-4 AM switching (before the switching)
IF Module
MUX Unit Microwave frame Tx Path
IF Module
Rx Path INDI
Microwave frame
MUX Unit
INDI AM Engine SNR MUX Unit INDI Rx Path
SNR
AM Messages
AM Engine INDI Microwave frame Tx Path MUX Unit
Microwave frame
High Priority Service Low Priority Service
SNR: signal to noise ratio INDI: Modulation scheme indication signal
18-8
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
AM Working Principle (After the Switching)

1. When an IF module detects that the SNR is higher than the modulation mode threshold for triggering service switching, the IF module notifies the opposite end to switch the modulation mode. The opposite packet switching unit performs QoS processing on services based on the bandwidth change of the services, and then grooms the corresponding services to the IF port. According to the QoS processing result, the opposite packet switching unit discards lowpriority services and grooms high-priority services to the IF port. The bandwidth of microwave frames decreases, as shown in Figure 18-5. When the IF module detects that the SNR is higher than the modulation mode threshold for triggering service switching, the IF module notifies the opposite end to switch the modulation mode in the same manner.
2.
Figure 18-5 AM switching (after the switching)
IF Module
MUX Unit Microwave frame Tx Path
IF Module
Rx Path INDI
Microwave frame
MUX Unit
INDI AM Engine SNR MUX Unit INDI Rx Path
SNR
AM Messages
AM Engine INDI MUX Unit
Microwave frame
Tx Path
Microwave frame
High Priority Service Low Priority Service
SNR: signal to noise ratio INDI: Modulation scheme indication signal
3.
The change of modulation schemes implemented through the AM function is based on the frame boundary of the signal. The Rx path of the receive end sends the signal indicating the receive mode change of the current frame to the MUX unit when detecting the change of the modulation scheme. Hence, the MUX unit receives and processes service signals according to the new modulation scheme.
18.5 Configuration Guide

This topic describes how to configure hybrid microwave. For details on how to configure the hybrid microwave service of RTN 900 NEs, see Configuring the Hybrid/AM Attribute. For details on how to configure the hybrid microwave service of RTN 600 NEs, see Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid MicrowaveConfiguring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
18-9

NOTE
The procedure of configuring hybrid microwave of the RTN 900 is similar to the procedure of the RTN 600. Hence, the details are not described here.
18-10
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
19 Configuring the MSTP
19
About This Chapter
Configuring the MSTP
The MSTP is one of the spanning tree protocols. It is compatible with the spanning tree protocol (STP) and rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP), and it also fixes the defects of the STP and RSTP. 19.1 Overview of the MSTP This section describes the MSTP, in terms of the aim and compliant standard and protocol. 19.2 Basic Concepts This section describes related concepts of the MSTP. 19.3 MSTP Application In the case of the Ethernet user network where loops exist, the MSTP generates the tree topology according to VLAN IDs of the Ethernet packets. Thus, the broadcast storm is avoided and the network traffic is balanced according to the VLAN IDs of the Ethernet packets. 19.4 Configuring a Port Group When both the RTN equipment and the user network need run the MSTP, configure the ports as one port group. As a network bridge (switch), where the MSTP protocol is running, the port group is involved in calculation of the spanning tree of the user network. 19.5 Configuring Bridge Parameters The bridge parameters include the bridge parameters and port parameters. The bridge parameters define the parameters of the port group as the MST bridge, and the port parameters define the role of each port in the MSTP protocol. 19.6 Configuring CIST and MSTI Parameters Configure the bridge priority of the port group to specify the root of the spanning tree. Configure the MSTI port parameters to specify the MSTI priority and active/standby protection of the root bridges. 19.7 Querying the CIST Running Information Query the CIST running information to know the operation status of the MSTP protocol on the port group. 19.8 Configuring Protocol Transfer for Ports When a network has a switch where the STP protocol is running, the ports of the RTN equipment connected to the switch are automatically switched to the STP-compatible mode. When such a
switch becomes absent in the network, these ports still work in the STP-compatible mode. In this case, manually configure the port to recover the running of the MSTP protocol on the port.
19-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
19.1 Overview of the MSTP

This section describes the MSTP, in terms of the aim and compliant standard and protocol.
Overview of the STP/RSTP/MSTP

The MSTP is one of the spanning tree protocols. It is compatible with the spanning tree protocol (STP) and rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP), and it also fixes the defects of the STP and RSTP. For the Ethernet network with physical loops, IEEE puts forward the STP protocol (IEEE 802.1D, 1998 Edition) to prevent the generation of the network storm. In addition, IEEE puts forward the RSTP protocol (IEEE 802.1w-2001) to fix the defects of the STP, which result in slow convergence rate. The STP/RSTP aims to divide a bridged LAN into a single spanning tree on the logical topology. Thus, the network storm can be avoided. See Figure 19-1. Figure 19-1 STP/RSTP
Switch A Switch B Switch A Switch B
Switch C
Switch D
Switch C
Switch D
Switch E
Switch F
Switch E
Switch F Root: Switch F
Limitations of the STP/RSTP

During the fast development of the VLAN technology (IEEE 802.1Q), the limitations of the STP/RSTP gradually emerge. The STP/RSTP protocol divides the network topology into a single spanning tree, and thus the following problems occur: l l When the link is congested, it cannot bear any traffic. Thus, the bandwidth is wasted. When the network structure is dissymmetrical, a portion of the VLAN packets may not be forwarded.
As shown in Figure 19-2, Host B and Host C belong to VLAN 2. The VLAN tag with 2 as the VID is added to the Ethernet frames sent by Host B and Host C after the frames enter the switch. Host A and Host D belong to VLAN 3. The VLAN tag with 3 as the VID is added to the Ethernet frames sent by Host A and Host D after the frames enter the switch. As shown in Figure 19-2,
the corresponding VLAN packets can only pass through links marked with VLAN 2 or VLAN 3. Packets of VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 cannot pass through other links. After the STP/RSTP protocol is enabled, the network topology is divided into a single spanning tree, which congests other ports. The link between Switch C and Switch D is congested, and other links cannot forward packets of VLAN 2. Thus, communication between Host B and Host C is unavailable. Figure 19-2 Limitations of the STP/RSTP
Host A Switch A Switch B Host B
VLAN 3 Switch C VLAN 2 VLAN 3 VLAN 3 VLAN 2
VLAN 2 Switch D
Host C
Switch E
Switch F
Host D Ethernet link Spanning tree Root switch
Improvement of the MSTP

The MSTP fixes the defects of the STP and RSTP. The convergence rate of the MSTP is fast. In addition, traffic of different VLANs passes through corresponding trails, which provides a well load balancing mechanism. The MSTP divides a switching network into different regions, each of which is called an MST region. Within each region, there are multiple spanning trees, which are independent from each other. Each spanning tree is a multiple spanning tree instance (MSTI). The MSTP sets the VLAN mapping table, which specifies the mapping relation between VLAN and MSTI.
NOTE
Each VLAN corresponds to one MSTI. In other words, the data in the same VLAN can only be transmitted on one MSTI. One MSTI, however, may correspond to multiple VLANs.
19-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
The network shown in Figure 19-2 can be considered as an MST region when MSTP is used. Thus, Figure 19-3 shows the result. It is computed that two spanning trees are generated for VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 respectively. l l MSTI 1 takes Switch B as the root switch to forward packets of VLAN 2. MSTI 2 takes Switch F as the root switch to forward packets of VLAN 3.
In this way, all VLAN packets can be properly forwarded. In addition, different VLAN packets are forwarded through different paths. Thus, the load is balanced. Figure 19-3 MSTI in an MST region
Host A Switch A Switch B Host B
VLAN 3 Switch C VLAN 2 VLAN 3 VLAN 3 VLAN 2
VLAN 2 Switch D
Host C
Switch E
Switch F
Host D
Switch A
Switch B (Root)
Switch A
Switch B
VLAN 2 Switch C VLAN 2 VLAN 3 VLAN 2 Switch D
VLAN 3 Switch C VLAN 2 VLAN 3 VLAN 3
VLAN 2 Switch D
Switch E
Switch F
Switch E MSTI 2 -> VLAN 3
Switch F (Root)
MSTI 1 -> VLAN 2
Compliant Standard and Protocol

The MSTP complies with IEEE 802.1s, Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks - Amendment 3: Multiple Spanning Trees.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
19-5
19.2 Basic Concepts

This section describes related concepts of the MSTP. In this section, examples in Figure 19-4 and Figure 19-5 show the related concepts of the MSTP. Figure 19-4 Example of the MSTP
A0 A0 VLAN1 -> MSTI 1 VLAN2 -> MSTI 2 Other VLAN ->MSTI 0
D0
B0
VLAN1 -> MSTI 1 VLAN2 -> MSTI 2 VLAN3 -> MSTI 2 Other VLAN ->MSTI 0
C0 A0
VLAN1 -> MSTI 1 VLAN2 -> MSTI 2 Other VLAN ->MSTI 0
VLAN1--> MSTI 1 Other VLAN-->MSTI 0
CST
19-6
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 19-5 Example of the MST region
D0
Switch A
MSTI 1 Root: Switch B MSTI 2 Root: Switch D
Switch D
Switch B
MSTI 0 (IST) Root: Switch A
VLAN 1 VLAN 2 VLAN 3 Switch C
-> MSTI 1 -> MSTI 2 -> MSTI 2
Other VLAN -> MSTI 0
MST Region
The MST region consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and network sections among them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MST region attributes belong to the same MST region. The attributes for the same MST region are as follows: l l l Same region name Same revision level Same mapping relation between the VLAN ID to MSTI
Within a LAN, there can be multiple MST regions, which are physically and directly or indirectly connected to each other. For example, as shown in Figure 19-4, there are four MST regions, A0, B0, C0 and D0.
MSTI
Within an MST region, there can be multiple spanning trees, which are independent from each other and correspond to different VLANs. Each spanning tree is an MSTI. For example, in the MST region D0, there are three MSTIs, MSTI 0, MSTI 1 and MSTI 2. See Figure 19-5.
CIST
The common and internal spanning tree (CIST), computed by using the RSTP algorithm, is a single spanning tree connecting all the switches within a switching network. In the CIST, the common spanning tree (CST) is the portion connected to each MST region. In the CIST, the portion in each MST region is the internal spanning tree (IST) of each MST region.
CST
The CST, a spanning tree connected to all MST regions in a switching network, is the portion responsible for connecting each MST region in the CIST. If each MST region is considered as a switch, the CST is a spanning tree for the switch. For example, as shown in Figure 19-4, the dashed lines indicate the CST of the network.
IST
The IST, a spanning tree in each MST region, is a section of the CIST in an MST region. Normally, it is considered as the MSTI 0. For example, the MSTI 0 is shown in Figure 19-5. When a packet with a VLAN tag is transmitted in an MST region, if the VLAN ID has no corresponding MSTI, the packet is transmitted in the IST.
VLAN Mapping Table

The VLAN mapping table is an attribute of the MST region. It describes the mapping relation between the VLAN and MSTI in this MST region.
Regional Root
The regional root consists of the CIST regional root and MSTI regional root. l l The CIST regional root is the root of the IST. For example, as shown in Figure 19-5, Switch A is the CIST regional root of the MST region D0. The MSTI regional root is the root of each MSTI. For example, as shown in Figure 19-5, Switch B is the MSTI regional root of the MSTI 1, and Switch D is the MSTI regional root of the MSTI 2.
CIST Root
The CIST root is the root switch of the CIST.
19.3 MSTP Application

In the case of the Ethernet user network where loops exist, the MSTP generates the tree topology according to VLAN IDs of the Ethernet packets. Thus, the broadcast storm is avoided and the network traffic is balanced according to the VLAN IDs of the Ethernet packets. At the client side, the RTN equipment supports the MSTP. At the network side, it does not support the MSTP, but it can transparently transmit the MST bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). There are three application scenarios of the MSTP. l When multiple ports of the RTN equipment are connected to the same user network, these ports should enable the MSTP protocol with the user network to avoid loops. These ports connected to the user network should be first divided into a port group, which equals a network bridge (switch) where the MSTP protocol is running. One CE equipment of the user is connected to two RTN NEs. Then, the channel switching is performed by using the MSTP protocol. In this way, the two RTN NEs only transparently transmit the BPDU packets, but they are not involved in the topology computation of the MSTP protocol.
19-8
When the user network requires that the STP be enabled across networks of different carriers, the RTN equipment only transparently transmits the BPDU packets without the involvement of the MSTP computation.
19.4 Configuring a Port Group

When both the RTN equipment and the user network need run the MSTP, configure the ports as one port group. As a network bridge (switch), where the MSTP protocol is running, the port group is involved in calculation of the spanning tree of the user network.
Prerequisite
Precautions
NOTE
l The sum of Ethernet ports enabled MSTP on one RTN equipment do not exceed one hundred. l If an Ethernet port service is configured, this port can not be added to the port group.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Port Group Parameters tab. Click Create to display the Create Port Group dialog box. Step 3 Set Protocol Type and Enable Protocol for the port group as required. Step 4 Click Board and select the boards, to which the ports to be added to the port group belong, from the drop-down list. Step 5 Select the ports to be added to the port group from Available Port List. Click the ports to Selected Port List. to add
Step 6 When all ports to be added to the port group are added to Selected Port List, click OK. and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Step 7 Click Close. The created port group is then listed in the port group list. ----End
19.5 Configuring Bridge Parameters

The bridge parameters include the bridge parameters and port parameters. The bridge parameters define the parameters of the port group as the MST bridge, and the port parameters define the role of each port in the MSTP protocol.
Prerequisite
You must complete the creation of a port group.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Bridge Parameters tab, and select the port group. Configure MST Domain Name and Redaction Level. Click Apply. Step 3 If the mapping relation of the VLAN of the port group and MSTI need be modified, doubleclick Mapping List of the port group to display the Mapping List dialog box. In the Mapping List dialog box, set the mapping relation of the VLAN ID and MSTI ID. Then, click Apply.
NOTE
Two means are available for setting the mapping relation between the VLAN ID and MSTI ID. l Click the Set Mapping List tab, and enter the VLAN ID in the text box behind the MSTI ID. By default, all VLAN IDs are mapped to MSTI 0. l Click the Set Mapping Model tab, and enter the mapping module value (1-48) in the text box. Then, the equipment distributes VLAN IDs (1-4094) equally to the MSTI whose mapping module ranges from 1 to the mapping module value (1-16). Two VLAN IDs (0, 4095) always map with MSTI 0.
Step 4 Select the port group and click the Bridge Parameters tab. Then, set MST Domain Max Hop Count, Network Diameter, Hello Time, Max Age and Forward Delay for the port group. Click Apply when the settings are completed. Step 5 Select the port group and click the Port Parameter tab. Then, set Enable Edge Attribute, Point-to-Point Attribute and Max Transmit Packet Count for each member port in the port group. Click Apply when the settings are completed. ----End
19.6 Configuring CIST and MSTI Parameters

Configure the bridge priority of the port group to specify the root of the spanning tree. Configure the MSTI port parameters to specify the MSTI priority and active/standby protection of the root bridges.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of a port group.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the CIST Parameters tab, and select the port group to be configured in Port Group. Step 3 Each MSTI list of the port group is displayed in the upper pane. Double-click Bridge Priority for the MSTI to modify the bridge priority of the MSTI. Click Apply when the setting is completed.
Step 4 Each member port list of the port group is displayed in the lower pane. Double-click Priority and Path Cost for Port to modify the port priority and path cost of the member port. Click Apply when the setting is completed. ----End
19.7 Querying the CIST Running Information

Query the CIST running information to know the operation status of the MSTP protocol on the port group.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the CIST Running Information tab. The upper pane lists information on the bridge status of the port group, which works as a bridge where the MSTP is running. The lower pane lists information on the status of each port in the port group. ----End
19.8 Configuring Protocol Transfer for Ports

When a network has a switch where the STP protocol is running, the ports of the RTN equipment connected to the switch are automatically switched to the STP-compatible mode. When such a switch becomes absent in the network, these ports still work in the STP-compatible mode. In this case, manually configure the port to recover the running of the MSTP protocol on the port.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of a port group.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Port Group Parameters tab, and click the port group that contains the ports requiring protocol transfer in the upper pane. Step 3 Click the ports requiring protocol transfer in the lower pane. Click Protocol Transfer. ----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
19-11
20 Configuring the Control Plane
20
About This Chapter
Configuring the Control Plane
The control plane, responsible for the call control and connection control, consists of a group of communication entities. The control plane creates, releases, monitors and maintains the connection through signaling, and it automatically recovers the connection upon failure. 20.1 Basic Concepts This section describes the related protocols of the control plane and application scenarios of these protocols when the control plane is configured. 20.2 Configuring the IGP-ISIS Protocol If the dynamic MPLS tunnel is required, the IGP-ISIS protocol must be configured. The IGPISIS protocol is used to discover the network topology. Through the IGP-ISIS protocol, each NE can obtain the information of the adjacent NE. When the IGP-ISIS protocol is used with the RSVP-TE protocol, the creation of the MPLS tunnel is complete. The IGP-ISIS protocol configuration includes the configuration of node and port attributes, query and configuration of route importing information, and query of the TE link information. 20.3 Configuring the MPLS-LDP Protocol If the dynamic PW need be configured, the MPLS-LDP protocol must be configured. The MPLSLDP is used to create the dynamic PW and to distribute the PW label. The NE can only obtain the information of the adjacent NE through the IGP-ISIS protocol. In the case of a single service, the NEs at the two ends can known each other by configuring the MPLS-LDP peer entity of the MPLS-LDP protocol. On the U2000, the MPLS-LDP peer entities can be created and the MPLSLDP protocol can be configured. 20.4 Configuring the MPLS-RSVP Protocol The MPLS-RSVP protocol is used to create dynamic MPLS tunnel and to distribute the tunnel label. On the U2000, the parameters of the MPLS-RSVP protocol can be queried. This protocol does not need special configuration, and thus the user can configure each parameter according to requirements. 20.5 Configuring the OSPF Protocol On the network, the OSPF protocol transfers the link state information and computes routes to obtain the routing information according to the link state information. Through the OSPF protocol, each NE can obtain the information of the adjacent NE. When the OSPF protocol is used with the RSVP-TE protocol, the creation of the MPLS tunnel is complete. The OSPF
protocol configuration includes the configuration of node and port attributes, query and configuration of route importing information, and query of the TE link information. 20.6 Configuring the MP-BGP MP-BGP means that the BGP runs in the interior of the autonomous system. In an L3VPN, route switching between the PE equipment is realized through the MP-BGP. 20.7 Configuring Static Routes The static routes are selected according to the preset route options in the network. On the U2000, the static routes can be queried and created. 20.8 Configuring the Address Parse On the U2000, the IP address and MAC address of the ARP table items can be created and queried.
20-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
20.1 Basic Concepts

This section describes the related protocols of the control plane and application scenarios of these protocols when the control plane is configured. 20.1.1 IGP-ISIS Protocol The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) routing protocol, a link state protocol, belongs to the internal gateway protocol and is applicable to the internal of the autonomous system. The equipment uses the IS-IS routing protocol, which is used with the label distribution protocols RSVP-TE and LDP to realize the dynamic creation of the MPLS LSP. 20.1.2 MPLS-LDP Protocol The multi-protocol label switch label distribution protocol (MPLS-LDP) is used for the label switched routers (LSR) to distribute labels in the network. 20.1.3 MPLS-RSVP Protocol Multi-protocol label switch resource reservation protocol (MPLS-RSVP) supports the distribution of MPLS labels. In addition, when transmitting the label binding message, it carries the resource reservation information, used as a signaling protocol to create, delete or modify the tunnel in the MPLS network. 20.1.4 ARP Protocol Address resolution protocol (ARP) is used to map the IP address (alias: logical address) at the network layer into the MAC address (alias: physical address) at the data link layer.
20.1.1 IGP-ISIS Protocol

The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) routing protocol, a link state protocol, belongs to the internal gateway protocol and is applicable to the internal of the autonomous system. The equipment uses the IS-IS routing protocol, which is used with the label distribution protocols RSVP-TE and LDP to realize the dynamic creation of the MPLS LSP. The IS-IS routing protocol used by the equipment creates and synchronizes the link state database (LSD) through routing protocol packets, such as link state PDUs. Based on the LSDB and path cost, the equipment uses the optimized shortest path first (SPF) algorithm to generate the routing table, and uses the IS-IS TE of the IS-IS routing protocol to generate the traffic engineering database (TEDB). The TEDB and routing table are the bases of creating the MPLS LSP. The TEDB computes the route that the MPLS LSP travels through. The routing table forwards the RSVP-TE and LDP protocol packets to realize label distribution. In this way, the MPLS LSP is dynamically created. Three features of the IS-IS routing protocol are supported by the equipment, that is, three types of IS-IS routing protocol packets, optimized SPF algorithm, path cost, and IS-IS traffic engineering (IS-IS TE).
Three Types of IS-IS Routing Protocol Packets

The IS-IS routing protocol belongs to the network player of the OSI protocol model. The IS-IS routing protocol runs directly at the data link layer. When the IS-IS routing protocol is processed, the decapsulation of the network layer is absent. With the preceding feature, the IS-IS routing protocol is more applicable to the RTN transport network using the MPLS packet switching technology.
The IS-IS routing protocol packets use the uniform encapsulation format. The length of the packets is changeable and the extensibility is strong. The complexity of the protocol is decreased, because the types of the protocol packets are few. Thus, the running is more reliable and efficient. The equipment realizes the following three types of IS-IS routing protocol packets: l Hello packets Hello packets are used to construct and maintain neighbor relation between network nodes. Hence, Hello packets are also called IS-to-IS hello (IIH) PDUs. l Link state PDUs Link state PDUs are used to exchange the link state information. In a network running the IS-IS routing protocol, each network node generates a link state PDU, which contains all the link state information of this network node. To generate its own LSDB, each network node collects all the link state PDUs within the local domain and between domains. l SNP packets Sequence number PDUs (SNP) describe the link state PDUs in all or part of the LSDB. The SNP is used to synchronize and maintain the LSDB of each network node in the RTN network.
Optimized SPF Algorithm

The IS-IS routing protocol realized by the equipment uses the optimized SPF algorithm for route computation and update. When the topology is changed, the resources (network bandwidth, processing capability of network nodes, and memory) for updating the new route are few, and thus the convergence rate of the entire network is improved.
Path Cost
The equipment supports the manual setting of path cost, and controls the route that the MPLS LSP travels through when it is dynamically created.
IS-IS TE
When the MPLS constructs the LSP, the traffic engineering information of all the links in the local domain should be known. The IS-IS TE realized by the equipment supports the construction of the MPLS LSP. The equipment obtains the traffic engineering information (link utilization and path cost) of all the links in the network through the IS-IS routing protocol. It constructs and synchronizes the TEDB, and uses the constrained shortest path first (CSPF) algorithm used by the TEDB to compute the route that the MPLS LSP travels through.
20.1.2 MPLS-LDP Protocol

The multi-protocol label switch label distribution protocol (MPLS-LDP) is used for the label switched routers (LSR) to distribute labels in the network.
MPLS-LDP Peer Entities

The MPLS-LDP peer entities refer to two NEs, where LDP session exists, use the MPLS-LDP to exchange labels mapping relation.
20-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
MPLS-LDP Session
The MPLS-LDP session is used to exchange label mapping and releasing messages between different equipment. The MPLS-LDP session consists the following two types: l l Local MPLS-LDP session, in which the two NEs used to set up the session is directly connected. Remote MPLS-LDP session, in which the two NEs used to set up the session is not directly connected.
MPLS-LDP Message Types

The MPLS-LDP protocol mainly uses the following four types of messages: l l l l Discovery message, which is used to notify and maintain the existence of the equipment in the network. Session message, which is used to set up, maintain and end the session between MPLSLDP peer entities. Advertisement message, which is used to create, change and delete the label mapping. Notification message, which is used to provide the constructive message and error notification.
Working Mode of the MPLS-LDP

The label distribution process has two modes. The main difference between the two modes is whether the label mapping is released in the upstream request mode or downstream unsolicited distribution mode. The two label releasing modes are as follows: l Upstream request mode, in which the equipment in the upstream sends the label request message to the equipment in the downstream. The equipment in the downstream returns the bound labels to the equipment in the upstream through label mapping message. When the equipment in the downstream returns the label mapping message is determined by the label control mode used by the equipment. If the ordered mode is used, only when the equipment receives the label mapping message returned by the equipment in the downstream, it sends the label mapping information to the upstream. If the independent mode is used, the equipment immediately sends the label mapping message to the upstream, regardless of whether it receives the label mapping message returned by the equipment in the downstream. l Downstream unsolicited distribution mode, in which the equipment in the downstream take the initiative to release the label mapping message to the equipment in the upstream after the MPLS-LDP session is successfully set up. The equipment in the upstream saves the label mapping information, and manages the received label mapping information according to the route table information.
Basic Operation of the MPLS-LDP

In sequence, the MPLS-LDP operation consists of the following four phases: l Development phase: In this phase, the equipment that expects to set up a session periodically sends Hello message to the adjacent equipment to notify the adjacent node of the local peer relation. In this process, the equipment can automatically discover its LDP peer entity without manual configuration.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
l l l
Session set-up and maintenance: After the peer relation is set up, the equipment begins to set up the session. PW set-up and maintenance: The set-up of the PW is based on the MPLS-LDP protocol. Session cancellation: A life state timer is set up for each session. When each LDP PDU is received, this timer is refreshed. If the timer times out before a new LDP PDU is received, the equipment takes that the session is interrupted and the peer relation is invalid. The equipment shuts down the corresponding connection at the transmission layer to end the session.
20.1.3 MPLS-RSVP Protocol

Multi-protocol label switch resource reservation protocol (MPLS-RSVP) supports the distribution of MPLS labels. In addition, when transmitting the label binding message, it carries the resource reservation information, used as a signaling protocol to create, delete or modify the tunnel in the MPLS network.
Basic Concepts of the MPLS-RSVP

The MPLS-RSVP is a notification mechanism of the resource reservation in the network, which realizes the bandwidth reservation on the control plane. As a label distribution protocol, it is used to set up the LSP in the MPLS network. For details of the MPLS-RSVP extension, refer to RFC3209.
Resource Reservation Style

The LSP set up by using the MPLS-RSVP is of a certain reservation style. When the RSVP session is set up, the receive end determines which reservation style to be used, and thus determines which LSP to be used. l Fixed-filter (FF) style: When this style is used, resources are reserved for each transmit end individually. Thus, transmit ends in the same session cannot share the resources with each other. Shared-explicit (SE) style: When this style is used, resources are reserved for all transmit ends in the same session. Thus, transmit ends can share the resources.
MPLS-RSVP Message Type

The MPLS-RSVP uses the following message types: l l Path message: The transmit end sends this type of message in the transmission direction of data packets. In addition, the path state is saved on all the nodes along the trail. Resv message: The receive end sends this type of message in the reverse transmission direction of data packets. In addition, the resource reservation is requested, and the reservation state is created and maintained on all the nodes along the trail.
Tunnel Created by Using the MPLS-RSVP

As shown in Figure 20-1, the creation process of the LSP tunnel by using the MPLS-RSVP is listed as follows: l The ingress equipment generates the Path message, which is transmitted in the direction of the egress equipment.
20-6
After the egress equipment receives the Path message, the Resv message is generated and then is returned to the ingress equipment. In addition, the Resv message reserves resources on the equipment along the trail. When the ingress equipment receives the Resv message, the LSP is successfully created. The LSP created by using the MPLS-RSVP has the resource reservation function. The equipment along the trail can distribute some resources to the LSP to ensure the services on the LSP.
Figure 20-1 LSP tunnel created by using the MPLS-RSVP

Ingress
Path Resv Path Resv
Egress
Sender
Receiver
Parameters of the MPLS-RSVP State Timer

The parameters of the MPLS-RSVP state timer include the refreshing period of the Path or Resv message, multiple of the path state block (PSB) timeout and reservation state block (RSB) timeout. In the case of the creation of the LSP, the transmit end adds the LABEL_REQUEST object to the Path message. When the receive end receives the Path message with the LABEL_REQUEST object, it distributes one label and adds the label to the LABEL object of the Resv message. The LABEL_REQUEST object is saved in the PSB of the upstream node, and the LABEL object is saved in the RSB of the downstream node. When the message indicating that the number of message refreshing times exceeds the multiple of the PSB or RSB timeout is not continuously received, the corresponding state in the PSB or RSB is deleted. Assume that there is a resource reservation request, which does not pass the access control on some nodes. In some cases, this request is not supposed to be immediately deleted, but it cannot stop other requests from using its reserved resources. In this case, the node enters the blockade state, and the blockade state block (BSB) is generated on the node of the downstream. When the message indicating that the number of the message refreshing times exceeds the multiple of the PSB or RSB timeout is continuously received, the corresponding state in the BSB is deleted.
20.1.4 ARP Protocol

Address resolution protocol (ARP) is used to map the IP address (alias: logical address) at the network layer into the MAC address (alias: physical address) at the data link layer.
ARP Frame Format

Figure 20-2 shows the ARP frame format.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
20-7
Figure 20-2 ARP frame format

Destination MAC address Source MAC address Frame type ARP request/answer
2
IP address at the transmit end
MAC address type
IP MAC protocol addres type s length
IP address length
OP
MAC address at the transmit end
Destination MAC address
Destination IP address
l l l l l l l l l l l l
Destination MAC address: six bytes. When an ARP request is sent, the destination MAC address is the broadcast MAC address, that is, 0xFF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF. Source MAC address: six bytes. Frame type: two bytes. The value of this field is 0x0806. MAC address type: two bytes. It defines the address type in the network that runs the ARP. Value 1 indicates the Ethernet address. IP protocol type: two bytes. It defines the protocol type. Value 0x0800 indicates the IP address. MAC address length: one byte. It defines the length of the physical address expressed in bytes. In the case of an ARP request or answer, the value of this field is 6. IP address length: one byte. It defines the length of the logical address expressed in bytes. In the case of an ARP request or answer, the value of this field is 4. OP: two bytes. It defines the ARP packet type. Value 1 indicates the ARP request and value 2 indicates the ARP answer. MAC address at the transmit end: six bytes. It defines the MAC address of the transmit station. IP address at the transmit end: four bytes. It defines the IP address of the transmit station. Destination MAC address: six bytes. It defines the destination MAC address. In the case of an ARP request packet, the value of this field is all-zero. Destination IP address: four bytes. It defines the destination IP address.
Static ARP
Static ARP means that there is a fixed mapping relation between the IP address and the MAC address, and thus you cannot adjust this relation dynamically on the equipment or the router. For the static ARP, you need to manually create a table that is stored on each equipment in the network. The static ARP table is used in the following scenarios: l When a packet is transmitted to a destination address beyond the local network segment, this packet is bound with a specific network interface card (NIC) in order to be forwarded through this gateway.
20-8
To filter out certain illegal IP addresses, you can bind these addresses with an MAC address that does not exist to realize the filtering.
Dynamic ARP
Dynamic ARP means that the mapping relation between the IP address and the MAC address is constantly refreshed and adjusted through address learning. Changing the NIC or moving the host to another network usually changes the physical address. The corresponding MAC address can be obtained in a timely manner based on the dynamic ARP address resolution.
ARP Principle
When a host or other network equipment needs to transmit data to another host or equipment, IP data packets must be encapsulated into frames to be transmitted in the physical network. During the transmission, the destination MAC address must be available. When the equipment on the transmit station wants to obtain the MAC address of another equipment in the network, the transmit station searches for the MAC address corresponding to the IP address in the ARP table. If the ARP table is available, the transmit station obtains the MAC address from the ARP table directly. Otherwise, the ARP function is enabled. As shown in Figure 20-3, host A sends data to host B to obtain the MAC address of host B. To obtain the MAC address of the station whose IP address is 10.1.1.2, host A broadcasts an ARP request packet in the network. The packet carries the information about the MAC address and IP address of the transmit station, and the IP address of the destination station. All the equipment in the network receives and handles the ARP request packet. Only host B on the destination station, however, can identify the IP address and return an ARP answer packet. According to the MAC address of the transmit station in the request packet, host B sends the ARP answer packet to the request station in unicast mode. After receiving the ARP answer packet, host A obtains the MAC address of host B. Figure 20-3 ARP address resolution
Host A IP: 10.1.1.1 MAC: A-A-A
Transmit station: A-A-B;10.1.1.2 Destination station: A-A-A;10.1.1.1
Host B IP: 10.1.1.2 MAC: A-A-B
ARP answer packet
ARP request packet
Transmit station: A-A-A;10.1.1.1 Destination station: 10.1.1.2
Host C IP: 10.1.1.3 MAC:A-A-C
Host D IP: 10.1.1.4 MAC:A-A-D
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
20-9
20.2 Configuring the IGP-ISIS Protocol

If the dynamic MPLS tunnel is required, the IGP-ISIS protocol must be configured. The IGPISIS protocol is used to discover the network topology. Through the IGP-ISIS protocol, each NE can obtain the information of the adjacent NE. When the IGP-ISIS protocol is used with the RSVP-TE protocol, the creation of the MPLS tunnel is complete. The IGP-ISIS protocol configuration includes the configuration of node and port attributes, query and configuration of route importing information, and query of the TE link information. 20.2.1 Setting Node Attributes On the U2000, the parameters of nodes managed by the IGP-ISIS protocol can be queried and set. 20.2.2 Setting Port Attributes On the U2000, the parameters of ports managed by the IGP-ISIS protocol can be queried and set. 20.2.3 Configuring Parameters of Route Importing On the U2000, the parameters of route importing can be queried and set. 20.2.4 Querying the Link TE Information On the U2000, the parameters of the link TE can be queried.
20.2.1 Setting Node Attributes

On the U2000, the parameters of nodes managed by the IGP-ISIS protocol can be queried and set.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-ISIS Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Node Configuration tab.
NOTE
Currently, the equipment supports only one IS-IS instance.
Step 3 Optional: Select the ISIS Instance, you can modify the parameter of nodes managed by the IGPISIS protocol. Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setting of parameters. Step 5 Click Query to query the parameters of a node. ----End
20-10
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
20.2.2 Setting Port Attributes

On the U2000, the parameters of ports managed by the IGP-ISIS protocol can be queried and set.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Enable Tunnel of the layer 3 attributes must be set to Enabled.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-ISIS Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Port Configuration tab. Step 3 Optional: Select the port, you can modify the parameter of ports managed by the IGP-ISIS protocol. Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setting of port parameters. Step 5 Click Query to query the parameters of each port. ----End
20.2.3 Configuring Parameters of Route Importing

On the U2000, the parameters of route importing can be queried and set.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-ISIS Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Route Import tab. Step 3 Click Import to display the Route Import dialog box, and then set parameters of the imported routes.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setting of parameters of the imported routes. Then, click OK. Step 5 Click Query to query the parameters of the imported routes.
CAUTION
When modifying the parameters of the imported routes, click Delete to delete the original settings, and then click Import to re-set. This operation, however, interrupts the services. Thus, exercise caution when performing this operation. ----End
20.2.4 Querying the Link TE Information

On the U2000, the parameters of the link TE can be queried.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-ISIS Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Link TE Info tab. Step 3 Click Query to query the information on the parameters of the link TE. ----End
20.3 Configuring the MPLS-LDP Protocol

If the dynamic PW need be configured, the MPLS-LDP protocol must be configured. The MPLSLDP is used to create the dynamic PW and to distribute the PW label. The NE can only obtain the information of the adjacent NE through the IGP-ISIS protocol. In the case of a single service, the NEs at the two ends can known each other by configuring the MPLS-LDP peer entity of the MPLS-LDP protocol. On the U2000, the MPLS-LDP peer entities can be created and the MPLSLDP protocol can be configured. 20.3.1 Creating MPLS-LDP Peer Entities On the U2000, the LDP peer entities can be created. Thus, the MPLS-LDP session is available between NEs, and the NEs can obtain the label mapping messages of each other. 20.3.2 Configuring the MPLS-LDP Protocol On the U2000, the parameters of the MPLS-LDP protocol can be set.
20.3.1 Creating MPLS-LDP Peer Entities

On the U2000, the LDP peer entities can be created. Thus, the MPLS-LDP session is available between NEs, and the NEs can obtain the label mapping messages of each other.
Prerequisite
Context
For the local session and remote session, you only need to create bidirectional LDP peers between the source equipment and sink equipment. That is, you need to create peers from the source to the sink, and from the sink to source.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > MPLS-LDP Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create to display the Create LDP Peer Entity dialog box. Step 3 For the Local LSR ID and Opposite IP fields, enter LSR ID of the opposite NE. Then, click Apply. Step 4 After the setting is complete, click OK. Step 5 Click Query to query the parameters of the MPLS-LDP peer entities.
NOTE
Click Delete to delete the MPLS-LDP peer entities.
----End
20.3.2 Configuring the MPLS-LDP Protocol

On the U2000, the parameters of the MPLS-LDP protocol can be set.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > MPLS-LDP Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the parameters of the MPLS-LDP protocol. Step 3 Click Apply to complete the setting of the parameters of the MPLS-LDP protocol. Step 4 Click Query to query the parameters of the MPLS-LDP protocol. ----End
20.4 Configuring the MPLS-RSVP Protocol

The MPLS-RSVP protocol is used to create dynamic MPLS tunnel and to distribute the tunnel label. On the U2000, the parameters of the MPLS-RSVP protocol can be queried. This protocol does not need special configuration, and thus the user can configure each parameter according to requirements.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > MPLS-RSVP Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the parameters of the MPLS-RSVP protocol. Step 3 Click Apply to complete the setting of the parameters of the MPLS-RSVP protocol. Step 4 Click Query to query the parameters of the MPLS-RSVP protocol. ----End
20.5 Configuring the OSPF Protocol

On the network, the OSPF protocol transfers the link state information and computes routes to obtain the routing information according to the link state information. Through the OSPF protocol, each NE can obtain the information of the adjacent NE. When the OSPF protocol is used with the RSVP-TE protocol, the creation of the MPLS tunnel is complete. The OSPF protocol configuration includes the configuration of node and port attributes, query and configuration of route importing information, and query of the TE link information. 20.5.1 Setting Node Attributes On the U2000, the OSPF Instance can be added. 20.5.2 Setting Port Attributes On the U2000, the parameters of ports managed by the OSPF protocol can be queried and set. 20.5.3 Configuring Parameters of Route Importing On the U2000, the parameters of route importing can be queried and set. 20.5.4 Querying the Link TE Information On the U2000, the parameters of the link TE can be queried.
20.5.1 Setting Node Attributes

On the U2000, the OSPF Instance can be added.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-OSPF Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Node Configuration tab. Step 3 Click New. Set the parameters of the node in the Create IGP-OSPF Protocol Instance dialog box displayed.
20-14
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
20.5.2 Setting Port Attributes

On the U2000, the parameters of ports managed by the OSPF protocol can be queried and set.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Enable Tunnel of the layer 3 attributes must be set to Enabled.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-OSPF Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Port Configuration tab. Step 3 Click New. Add ports managed by the OSPF protocol in the Config IGP-OSPF Protocol Interface dialog box displayed.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
20-15

NOTE
The OSPF protocol port can be an Ethernet interface, Ethernet virtual interface, or MP group.
20.5.3 Configuring Parameters of Route Importing

On the U2000, the parameters of route importing can be queried and set.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-OSPF Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Route Import tab. Step 3 Click Import to display the Route Import dialog box, and then set parameters of the imported routes.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setting of parameters of the imported routes. Then, click OK. Step 5 Click Query to query the parameters of the imported routes.
CAUTION
When modifying the parameters of the imported routes, click Delete to delete the original settings, and then click Import to re-set. This operation, however, interrupts the services. Thus, exercise caution when performing this operation. ----End
20.5.4 Querying the Link TE Information

On the U2000, the parameters of the link TE can be queried.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-OSPF Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Link TE Info tab. Step 3 Click Query to query the information on the parameters of the link TE. ----End
20.6 Configuring the MP-BGP

MP-BGP means that the BGP runs in the interior of the autonomous system. In an L3VPN, route switching between the PE equipment is realized through the MP-BGP.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > MP-BGP Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the MP-BGP Configuration tab. Click New and the Create MP-BGP Protocol Instance dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set MP-BGP Protocol Instance and AS Number. Step 4 Click OK and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click the Peer Configuration tab. Click New, and the Create Peer dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Configure the peer of the MP-BGP protocol instance. You can select the MP-BGP Protocol Instance that is already configured, and set the Remote IP Address and the Remote AS Number that corresponds to the MP-BGP protocol instance. Step 7 Click OK and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ----End
20.7 Configuring Static Routes

The static routes are selected according to the preset route options in the network. On the U2000, the static routes can be queried and created.
Prerequisite
l l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the setting of the basic attributes and Layer 3 attributes of the port.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > Static Route Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create to create the static routes, and then click Apply.
NOTE
l When selecting boards or ports, select those that have Layer 3 attributes. l When the static route is configured, the port IP address and the next hop IP address must be in the same network section. l When the last digit of the IP address of the destination is not 0, the subnet mask is 255.255.255.255. For example, if the IP address is 193.168.3.2, the mask of the destination node is 255.255.255.255. l When the last digit of the IP address of the destination is 0, the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0 or 255.255.255.255. For example, if the IP address is 193.168.3.0, the mask of the destination node is 255.255.255.255 or 255.255.255.0.
Step 3 After the setting is complete, click OK. Step 4 Click Query to query the parameters of the static routes.
NOTE
Click Delete to delete the original static routes.
----End
20.8 Configuring the Address Parse

On the U2000, the IP address and MAC address of the ARP table items can be created and queried.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE, and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > Address Parse from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create and the Add Address Parse dialogue box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the IP address and MAC address of the ARP table items separately, and then click Apply.
20-18
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
CAUTION
When configuring the MAC address of the ARP table items, the first digit of the address must be of an even number. Step 4 After the setting is complete, click OK.
CAUTION
The configuration of the address resolution refers to the creation of the static ARP table items. To delete the dynamic ARP table items, click Clear. This operation, however, clears all the contents in the ARP table items, and interrupts the services. Thus, exercise caution when performing this operation.
NOTE
Click Delete to delete the contents of the ARP table items.
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
20-19
21 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel
21
About This Chapter
Configuring an MPLS Tunnel
In a PSN network, the MPLS tunnel carries PWs where various services are encapsulated. In this way, data packets can be transparently transmitted among NEs. One MPLS tunnel can carry several PWs. Before configuring a service, first configure a MPLS tunnel that carries the service. On the U2000, you can use the trail function or per-NE configuration scheme to configure an MPLS tunnel. 21.1 Basic Concepts Before configuring the MPLS tunnel, familiar yourself with the MPLS and MPLS tunnel, and application scenarios of the MPLS tunnel. 21.2 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel The per-NE configuration scheme can be used to create an MPLS tunnel. At each node involved in the tunnel, set the tunnel-related parameters. The per-NE configuration scheme can be used to create a unicast MPLS tunnel. On the U2000, the user can create or delete a unicast MPLS tunnel. 21.3 Querying the Tunnel Label Information On the NE, the label for each tunnel is unique. By querying the tunnel label information, you can learn the usage of tunnel labels. Thus, you can avoid the conflict of labels when creating a static tunnel.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
21-1
21.1 Basic Concepts

Before configuring the MPLS tunnel, familiar yourself with the MPLS and MPLS tunnel, and application scenarios of the MPLS tunnel. 21.1.1 MPLS and MPLS Tunnel As a transmission technology, the multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) can realize transparent transmission of data packets among users. The MPLS tunnel is the tunnel defined in the MPLS protocol. Independent from the service, the MPLS tunnel realizes the end-to-end transmission and carries the PWs related to the service. 21.1.2 Application of the MPLS Tunnel As the carrier of PWs in the network, the MPLS Tunnel provides the service tunnel to transmit service packets. The MPLS Tunnel can carry various services, such as IP packets, C-VLAN and MPLS packets, and ATM packets. The MPLS Tunnel is mainly used for transparent transmission of point-to-point data service packets and Tunnel protection group.
21.1.1 MPLS and MPLS Tunnel

As a transmission technology, the multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) can realize transparent transmission of data packets among users. The MPLS tunnel is the tunnel defined in the MPLS protocol. Independent from the service, the MPLS tunnel realizes the end-to-end transmission and carries the PWs related to the service. Figure 21-1 shows how the MPLS tunnel is used as the service transmission channel. Figure 21-1 MPLS tunnel in the MPLS network
IMA E1 FE ATM STM-1
Ingress node
Transit node MPLS tunnel
Egress node
IMA E1 FE ATM STM-1
PW
The MPLS tunnel only provides an end-to-end channel, and does not care which service is encapsulated in the PW it carries. Data packets are first encapsulated in the PW, which is stuck with an MPLS label and sent to the MPLS tunnel for transmission. At the sink end, data packets are recovered and retain the original service features. In the tunnel, the intermediate nodes are called Transit nodes. Hence, a tunnel contains the Ingress node, Egress node and Transit nodes.
21.1.2 Application of the MPLS Tunnel

As the carrier of PWs in the network, the MPLS Tunnel provides the service tunnel to transmit service packets. The MPLS Tunnel can carry various services, such as IP packets, C-VLAN and MPLS packets, and ATM packets. The MPLS Tunnel is mainly used for transparent transmission of point-to-point data service packets and Tunnel protection group.
Transparent Transmission of Point-to-Point Data Packets

Commonly, the MPLS tunnel is used to provide a point-to-point service channel for services such as the E-Line service. In this way, provider edges (PEs) in a PSN network can transparently transmit services. Figure 21-2 shows how point-to-point data packets are transparently transmitted. Figure 21-2 Transparent transmission of point-to-point data packets
Node B
PE
MPLS tunnel Node B PE MPLS tunnel PE RNC
MPLS tunnel
PE
Node B
An edge node in one network accesses the services from Node B, and transports the services to the RNC connected to another PE. For such transport, one point-to-point MPLS tunnel can be used. On the U2000, two schemes can be used to create such a unicast tunnel. l Configuration on a per-NE basis: Configure the ingress port and the IP address of the next hop at each NE involved in the MPLS tunnel. In this way, one unicast MPLS tunnel is created. Configuration by trail: This configuration is classified into static configuration and dynamic configuration. Static configuration: Specify the source and sink NEs for the MPLS tunnel, and each NE involved in the tunnel. In this way, one unicast MPLS tunnel is created. Dynamic configuration: Only specify the source and sink NEs of the MPLS tunnel. The equipment then creates a unicast MPLS tunnel through signaling.
Tunnel Protection Group

The MPLS tunnels of the same type are created in one tunnel protection group. In this way, 1 +1 or 1:1 protection is provided to these MPLS tunnels. If the working MPLS tunnel fails, the Tunnel protection group ensures that services can still normally run.
By using the U2000, the user can configure 1+1 or 1:1 protection for MPLS tunnels that carry important services. Figure 21-3 shows the protection principle for unicast tunnels. Figure 21-3 Protection principle for unicast tunnels
CE CE Working tunnel
Ingress node
Protection tunnel
Egress node
Configuration of source protection group
Configuration of sink protection group
21.2 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

The per-NE configuration scheme can be used to create an MPLS tunnel. At each node involved in the tunnel, set the tunnel-related parameters. The per-NE configuration scheme can be used to create a unicast MPLS tunnel. On the U2000, the user can create or delete a unicast MPLS tunnel. 21.2.1 Configuring Basic Attributes of the MPLS In the Basic Configuration interface, you can set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space and Start of Multicast Label Space. 21.2.2 Creating an MPLS Tunnel You can create an end-to-end unicast MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis. To create such a tunnel, create a tunnel at each node involved in the tunnel. 21.2.3 Deleting an MPLS Tunnel To delete an MPLS tunnel using the single-station scheme, delete the MPLS tunnel at each node involved in the tunnel.
21.2.1 Configuring Basic Attributes of the MPLS

In the Basic Configuration interface, you can set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space and Start of Multicast Label Space.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space and Start of Multicast Label Space.
CAUTION
If there are services on the NE, modifying LSR ID may result in NE reset and service interruption. ----End
21.2.2 Creating an MPLS Tunnel

You can create an end-to-end unicast MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis. To create such a tunnel, create a tunnel at each node involved in the tunnel.
Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the correct configuration of the port attributes. You must complete the correct setting of the LSR ID for each NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the source NE of the tunnel in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Static Tunnel tab and click New. The New Unicast Tunnel dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Select New Reverse Tunnel to set parameters for the forward and reverse tunnels.
NOTE
When Node Type is set to Egress, Bandwidth(kbit/s) must be consistent with the tunnel bandwidth in the Ingress direction and cannot be set. For Next Hop Address, select the IP address of the interface of the next node, or the LSR ID of the next node.
Step 4 Click OK to finish creation of the static tunnel. Step 5 Follow Steps 1 - 4 to create static tunnels for Transit nodes and the Egress node. Step 6 Optional: Select the created tunnel. Double-click the Vlan ID filed, and differentiate different tunnels by adding a VLAN ID.
NOTE
If the created tunnel is carried by VLAN sub-interfaces, Vlan ID cannot be set for the tunnel.
----End
21.2.3 Deleting an MPLS Tunnel

To delete an MPLS tunnel using the single-station scheme, delete the MPLS tunnel at each node involved in the tunnel.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the source NE of the tunnel in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Static Tunnel tab. Select the tunnel to be deleted from the static MPLS tunnel list. Step 3 Click Delete. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. Step 4 Follow Steps 1 - 3 to delete static tunnels for Transit nodes and the Egress node. ----End
21.3 Querying the Tunnel Label Information

On the NE, the label for each tunnel is unique. By querying the tunnel label information, you can learn the usage of tunnel labels. Thus, you can avoid the conflict of labels when creating a static tunnel.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of an MPLS tunnel.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > MPLS Label Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the Tunnel Label tab, click Query to view the tunnel label information. ----End
21-6
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
22 Configuring an IP Tunnel
22
About This Chapter
Configuring an IP Tunnel
When the services that cross an IP network need to be created, the OptiX RTN equipment supports carrying PWs over the IP tunnel. In this way, services can be transparently transmitted in an IP network. 22.1 IP Tunnel IP tunnel can be used to carry the ATM PWE3 service or the CES service. 22.2 Configuring a UDP PW Port Use the UDP port ID to encapsulate PW so that the service carried by the PW can be transmitted transparently through the third-part IP network. The UDP PW can only be carried on an IP tunnel, but not on a GRE tunnel. 22.3 Creating IP Tunnels you can transmit the client services by connecting an IP tunnel to the DSLAM. 22.4 Deleting IP Tunnels To release ports for other services, you can delete redundant IP tunnels.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
22-1
22.1 IP Tunnel
IP tunnel can be used to carry the ATM PWE3 service or the CES service. If ATM or CES emulation service that travels through an IP network is required, the RTN equipment can use the IP tunnel to carry the service. This complies with RFC 4023 as shown in Figure 22-1. In the case of the IP tunnel, the situation is similar to that where "IP header" replaces the MPLS external label (MPLS tunnel label) to establish a tunnel in the IP network. An ATM emulation service can be provided between NE A and NE B, even though the IP network between NE A and NE B does not support the MPLS. Figure 22-1 ATM PWE3 over IP tunnel
ATM switch RTN Router Router RTN ATM switch
IP network NE A ATM E1/STM-1 ATM PWE3 PW Label IP Ethernet ATM PWE3 PW Label IP Ethernet NE B ATM E1/STM-1
22.2 Configuring a UDP PW Port

Use the UDP port ID to encapsulate PW so that the service carried by the PW can be transmitted transparently through the third-part IP network. The UDP PW can only be carried on an IP tunnel, but not on a GRE tunnel.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > IP/GRE Tunnel Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Configure the parameters related to the port of UDP PW. Click Apply.
----End
22-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
22.3 Creating IP Tunnels

you can transmit the client services by connecting an IP tunnel to the DSLAM.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The static route must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > IP/GRE Tunnel Management > IP Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New and the Create IP Tunnel dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set parameters. Step 4 Click OK. A prompt appears indicating that the operation was successful. Click Close. Step 5 Optional: Select the created tunnel. Double-click the Vlan ID filed, and differentiate different tunnels by adding a VLAN ID.
NOTE
22.4 Deleting IP Tunnels

To release ports for other services, you can delete redundant IP tunnels.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE. Choose Configuration > IP Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select an IP tunnel and click Delete. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. A dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 3 Click Close. ----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
22-3
23 Configuring a GRE Tunnel
23
About This Chapter
Configuring a GRE Tunnel
When the services that cross an IP network need to be created, the OptiX RTN equipment supports carrying ATM PWE3 services over generic routing encapsulation (GRE) tunnels. In this way, services can be transparently transmitted in an IP network. 23.1 GRE Tunnel GRE tunnel can be used to carry the PWE3 service or the CES service. 23.2 Creating GRE Tunnels you can transmit the client services by connecting an GRE tunnel to the digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM). 23.3 Deleting GRE Tunnels To release ports for other services, you can delete redundant GRE tunnels.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
23-1
23.1 GRE Tunnel

GRE tunnel can be used to carry the PWE3 service or the CES service. If ATM or CES emulation service that travels through an IP network is required, the RTN equipment can use the GRE tunnel to carry the service. This complies with RFC 4023 as shown in Figure 23-1. In the case of the GRE tunnel, the situation is similar to that where "GRE encapsulation + IP header" replaces the MPLS external label (MPLS tunnel label) to establish a tunnel in the IP network. An ATM emulation service can be provided between NE A and NE B, even though the IP network between NE A and NE B does not support the MPLS. Figure 23-1 ATM PWE3 over GRE tunnel
ATM switch RTN Router Router RTN ATM switch
IP network NE A ATM E1/STM-1 ATM PWE3 PW Label GRE IP Ethernet ATM PWE3 PW Label GRE IP Ethernet NE B ATM E1/STM-1
23.2 Creating GRE Tunnels

you can transmit the client services by connecting an GRE tunnel to the digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM).
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The static route must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE. Choose Configuration > IP/GRE Tunnel Management > GRE Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New and the Create GRE Tunnel dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
When Loopback Port is set to Used, Source Board and Source Port, is unavailable.
Step 3 Set parameters. Step 4 Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 5 Optional: Select the created tunnel. Double-click the Vlan ID filed, and differentiate different tunnels by adding a VLAN ID.
NOTE
23.3 Deleting GRE Tunnels

To release ports for other services, you can delete redundant GRE tunnels.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE. Choose Configuration > GRE Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select a GRE tunnel and click Delete. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. A dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 3 Click Close. ----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
23-3
24 Configuring an MPLS PW
24
About This Chapter
Configuring an MPLS PW
PWs should exist with services. When create or delete a services, create or delete the PW. The U2000 provides a specific function to manage PWs. With this function, you can query reference information of a PW, set QoS parameters and OAM parameters of a PW, modify and delete a PW. 24.1 Querying an MPLS PW When you create a service on the U2000, a PW is created. The PWs not bundled with services, however, are not displayed. Hence, you need to query these PWs in the PW Management interface. In the PW Management interface, you can query all PWs created on the equipment, and parameters such as PW type, QoS parameters, OAM parameters and bearer tunnel. 24.2 Querying QoS-Related Parameters of an MPLS PW The PW supports querying the QoS parameters. 24.3 Querying the PW Label Information In an PSN, the label for each PW is unique. By querying the PW label information, you can learn the usage of PW labels. Thus, you can avoid the conflict of labels when creating a PW.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
24-1
24.1 Querying an MPLS PW

When you create a service on the U2000, a PW is created. The PWs not bundled with services, however, are not displayed. Hence, you need to query these PWs in the PW Management interface. In the PW Management interface, you can query all PWs created on the equipment, and parameters such as PW type, QoS parameters, OAM parameters and bearer tunnel.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of an MPLS PW during creating of a service.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. All MPLS PWs created on the NE are displayed. Step 3 Click the Advanced Attributes tab to view the advanced attributes of the MPLS PW. ----End
24.2 Querying QoS-Related Parameters of an MPLS PW

The PW supports querying the QoS parameters.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of an MPLS PW when creating a service.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. All MPLS PWs created on the NE are displayed in the upper pane. Step 3 In the QoS information below, query the QoS parameters. ----End
24.3 Querying the PW Label Information

In an PSN, the label for each PW is unique. By querying the PW label information, you can learn the usage of PW labels. Thus, you can avoid the conflict of labels when creating a PW.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > MPLS Label Management from the Function Tree, and then click the PW Label tab. Step 2 Click Query to view the PW label information. ----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
24-3
25 Configuring CES Services
25
About This Chapter
Configuring CES Services
The CES service is a type of technology that carries layer 2 services. In the packet switched network (PSN), the CES service tries to emulate basic behaviors and characteristics of the lowrate TDM service, SONET and SDH services. The CES service configuration contains fast configuration and configuration on a per-NE basis. In the fast configuration mode, you need to specify the source and sink nodes in the trail configuration user interface, and then you can fast configurate a complete CES service. In the configuration on a per-NE basis mode, you need to configure the CES service seperately on the source node and sink node, and then you can configure an entire CES service. 25.1 CES Service Type Circuit emulation service (CES) applies the PWE3 emulation technology. For a CES service, the PWE3 packet headers contain the frame format information, alarm information, signaling information, and synchronous timing information of the TDM service flow. After encapsulated by the protocol, the PW packets are transported over the MPLS tunnel, IP Tunnel, GRE Tunnel in the PSN network. When reaching the PW egress, the PW packets are decapsulated to rebuild the TDM circuit-switching service flow. 25.2 Configuration Flow of CES Services This section describes the operation tasks for configuring CES services, and relations among these tasks. When configuring or managing CES services, follow the configuration flows. 25.3 Configuring a CES Service When configuring a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to configure the attributes of the source node and sink node of each station one by one. The efficiency of configuring the service on a per-NE basis is low. It is recommended to use the trail function to configure the services.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
25-1
25.1 CES Service Type

Circuit emulation service (CES) applies the PWE3 emulation technology. For a CES service, the PWE3 packet headers contain the frame format information, alarm information, signaling information, and synchronous timing information of the TDM service flow. After encapsulated by the protocol, the PW packets are transported over the MPLS tunnel, IP Tunnel, GRE Tunnel in the PSN network. When reaching the PW egress, the PW packets are decapsulated to rebuild the TDM circuit-switching service flow.
Application Mode
The CES service allows a metropolitan Ethernet network (MEN) carrier to provide TDM services to customers that have only the TDM equipment. This enlarges the service range and the number of users of the MEN carriers, and provides a way to transform the traditional circuit network to the wideband data network. The CES service mainly applies to the wireless service and the enterprise private line service. The application scenarios include UNI-NNI and UNI-UNI, as shown in Figure 25-1. l UNI-NNI CES service: The RTN equipment accesses the TDM services of customers by using the TDM interface. The CES PW can be created between the RTN equipments to emulate the end-to-end TDM service. To customers, the CES services are similar to actual TDM services. UNI-UNI CES service: The RTN equipment accesses the TDM services by using a single point.
NOTE
Now only the point-to-point service is supported. That is, the service of one E1 interface mapping to one PW is supported. But converged services of several TDM interfaces mapping to one PW are not supported.
25-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 25-1 CES service networking sample
UNI-UNI
BTS UNI-NNI BSC PE
PE BTS TDM Link cSTM Link PW Tunnel PE
BTS
Emulation Mode
The RTN equipment supports two types of CES services: structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network (CESoPSN) and structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP). In the CESoPSN mode: l l The RTN equipment senses frame structures, frame alignment modes and timeslots in the TDM circuit. The RTN equipment processes the overhead and extracts the payload in TDM frames. Then, the RTN equipment delivers the timeslot of each channel to the packet payload according to certain sequence. As a result, the service in each channel in the packet is fixed and visible. Each Ethernet frame that carries the CES service loads TDM frames of a fixed number. Usually the loading time is 0.125 to 5 ms.
In the SAToP mode:

l l l
The equipment regards TDM signals as constant rate bit flows, instead of sensing structures in the TDM signals. The entire bandwidth of TDM signals is emulated. The overhead and payload in the TDM signal are transparently transmitted. The Ethernet frame carries the CES service. Usually the loading time is 1 ms.
In the CESoPSN mode, for the free 64 kbit/s timeslot in TDM E1 signal, the RTN equipment provides the compression function to save the transmission bandwidth. The timeslot number ranges from 0 to 31. The timeslot number of 0 indicates a reserved timeslot for transmitting signaling.
Service Clock
The TDM service has high requirements for the clock synchronization. The RTN equipment provides two solutions to the CES service clock synchronization. See Table 25-1. Table 25-1 CES service clock type Synchroni zation Solution External Clock Synchroniza tion PRC Access Position PE equipment Whether the Clock is Transmitted in Carrying Ethernet No Description
Introduces the PRC/GPS clock to the PE equipment, and uses this clock as the transmit clock of the CES port service (retiming). The CE system clock synchronizes the PE service clock. This realizes the synchronization of all PEs and CEs, and ensures that transmit clocks of TDM services on all CEs and PEs are synchronous, and indirectly realizes the transfer of the TDM service clock. See Figure 25-2.
Figure 25-2 External Clock synchronization of CES service clock

PRC/GPS PRC/GPS
CES CE TDM+Clock PE PE TDM+Clock CE
25-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
25.2 Configuration Flow of CES Services

This section describes the operation tasks for configuring CES services, and relations among these tasks. When configuring or managing CES services, follow the configuration flows. Configure and manage UNI-NNI CES services by following the configuration flow shown in Figure 25-4. Figure 25-3 UNI-UNI CES service configuration flow
Required Start Optional Creating a Network
Configure inferface
Configure UNI-UNI CES Service End
Table 25-2 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI CES service Task Creating Network Configuring the Interface Configuring the UNI-UNI CES Service Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, and create fibers. Use the E1 board to access the CES service from the BTS. To configure the UNI-UNI CES service, you need to specify the service ID and service name, select the source board and the sink board.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
25-5
Figure 25-4 UNI-NNI CES service configuration flow
Required Optional
Start
Creating a Network
Configure inferface
Configure Control Plan
Configure Tunnel
Configure UNI-NNI CES Service End
Table 25-3 Tasks for configuring the UNIs-NNI CES service Task Creating Network Configuring the LSR ID Configuring the Network-Side Interface Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, and create fibers. Configure the LSR ID of the NE and start of global label space. Set the general attributes and Layer 3 attributes (tunnel enable status and IP address) for interfaces to carry the tunnel carrying.
25-6
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Task Configuring the Control Plane
Remarks Set the protocol parameters related to the control plane to create the tunnel. l To create a static MPLS tunnel to transmit the ATM service, the parameters related to the control plane need not be set. l To create a dynamic MPLS tunnel to transmit the ATM service, you need to set the following protocol parameters: 1. Set the IGP-ISIS protocol parameters. 2. Set the MPLS-RSVP protocol parameters. To create a dynamic PW to transmit the service, you need to set the parameters related to the MPLS-LDP protocol.
Configuring the Tunnel
A tunnel transmits the service. l If an static MPLS tunnel is required, configure an MPLS tunnel in the perNE or per-trail mode. Specify the tunnel ID, set signaling type to static, name the service, and specify the ingress node, egress node, and transit node. l If a dynamic MPLS Tunnel is required, name the service, set signaling type to dynamic, and specify the source node and sink node for the tunnel.
Configuring the Service Interface Configuring the UNIs-NNI CES service
Use the E1 board to access the CES service from the BTS. 1. Create a CES service: Set the service ID and specify a service name. 2. Setting the source: Select the board and the specific channel. 3. Configure a PW: Set the PW type, PW label, and tunnel type. 4. Set advanced attributes: Set the jitter buffer time, packet loading time, and clock mode.
25.3 Configuring a CES Service

When configuring a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to configure the attributes of the source node and sink node of each station one by one. The efficiency of configuring the service on a per-NE basis is low. It is recommended to use the trail function to configure the services. 25.3.1 Creating a UNI-UNI CES Service
If you create a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to create relevant attributes of the service separately on the source and sink nodes of the service. 25.3.2 Creating a UNI-NNI CES Service If you create a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to create relevant attributes of the service separately on the source and sink nodes of the service. After the CES service is created, the corresponding PW is automatically created. 25.3.3 Deleting a CES Service When you delete a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to delete relevant attributes of the service separately on the source and sink nodes of the service. After the CES service is deleted, the corresponding PW is automatically deleted.
25.3.1 Creating a UNI-UNI CES Service

If you create a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to create relevant attributes of the service separately on the source and sink nodes of the service.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The ports must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New, and the Create CES Service dialog box is displayed. In this dialog box, configure the UNI-UNI service.
NOTE
l In the case of the UNI-UNI service, PW do not need to be set.
Step 3 Set attributes related to the UNI-UNI service. 1. Configure the parameters of the service.
NOTE
Note the following when setting the parameters: Mode: UNI-UNI.
2.
Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
----End
25.3.2 Creating a UNI-NNI CES Service

If you create a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to create relevant attributes of the service separately on the source and sink nodes of the service. After the CES service is created, the corresponding PW is automatically created.
Prerequisite
l
25-8

The tunnel must be created. For configuration method, see 21.2.2 Creating an MPLS Tunnel.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New, and the Create CES Service dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
In the case of the UNI-NNI service, set PW.
Step 3 Set attributes related to the UNI-NNI service. 1. Configure the parameters of the service.
NOTE
Note the following when setting the parameters: l Mode: UNI-NNI. l In the case of PW Signaling Type, if you select Static, you need to set PW Ingress Label/ Source Port and PW Engress Label/Sink Port. If you select Dynamic, the system automatically allocates PW Ingress Label/Source Port and PW Engress Label/Sink Port. l PW Ingress Label/Source Port: the label that indicates a service is encapsulated into a PW. l PW Engress Label/Sink Port: the label that indicates the service is decapsulated from the PW. l Tunnel: Select the tunnel to carry the services.
2.
Click QoS tab.
3.
Set the parameters of QoS.

NOTE
Note the following when setting the parameters: EXP: Set the Ingress value only. 7 indicates the highest priority.
4. 5.
Click OK. Click Advanced Attributes tab.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
25-9
6.
Configure parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab.

NOTE
Note the following when setting the parameters: Generally, Packet Loading Time(us) for carrying the CES service packets is 1 ms. The value of Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) must be greater than the value of Packet Loading Time(us) on the opposite end.
7. 8.
Click OK. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
----End
25.3.3 Deleting a CES Service

When you delete a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to delete relevant attributes of the service separately on the source and sink nodes of the service. After the CES service is deleted, the corresponding PW is automatically deleted.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the service that you want to delete. Click Delete, and the Prompt dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Confirm the deletion, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Step 4 Click Close. ----End
25-10
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
26 Configuring an ATM Service
26
About This Chapter
Configuring an ATM Service
You can configure an ATM service per trail or per NE. In the case of the per-trail configuration, to configure a complete ATM service is to specify the source and sink nodes in the Trail Management interface. In the case of the per-NE configuration, to configure a complete ATM service is to configure an ATM service at each NE involved in the service trail. 26.1 Basic Concepts Before using the U2000 to configure and manage ATM services, make yourself familiar with the basic concepts related to the ATM service. The information facilitates the operations related to ATM services. 26.2 ATM Service Configuration Flow This section describes the operation tasks for configuring the ATM service, and relations among these tasks. When configuring and managing the ATM services, follow the configuration flow. The application scenarios of the ATM service include the UNI-UNI and UNIs-NNI services. 26.3 Configuring an IMA Group When the RTN equipment accesses IMA services, configure an ATM IMA group at the access node. 26.4 Configuring the ATM Service You can configure an ATM PWE3 service path for transmitting ATM signals on a per-NE basis. When the ATM service is configured on a per-NE basis, the service attributes should be configured at the source end and sink end separately. In this way, a complete ATM service is configured. The configuration of the ATM services on a per-NE basis is of low efficiency, and thus the configuration on an end-to-end basis is recommended.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
26-1
26.1 Basic Concepts

Before using the U2000 to configure and manage ATM services, make yourself familiar with the basic concepts related to the ATM service. The information facilitates the operations related to ATM services. 26.1.1 IMA The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology, demultiplexes an ATM cell flow to multiple low-speed links, which are then multiplexed at the far end so that the cell flow is restored to its original form. In this way, the multiplexing of multiple low-speed links becomes flexible and easy. 26.1.2 Application of the IMA The ATM IMA service is mainly used to interconnect the wireless base station to the equipment at the transmission access side. 26.1.3 ATM Service Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is a technology used to transport packets in cells with ensured QoS. ATM meets the requirements of real-time services and non-real-time services. The OptiX RTN equipment supports both the UNIs-NNI ATM service and UNI-UNI ATM service. 26.1.4 ATM Traffic The ATM communicates through virtual connections, which are uniquely identified by the VPI/ VCI in the cell header. During data transmission, you need to control the traffic of each virtual connection to ensure the quality of service (QoS).
26.1.1 IMA
The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology, demultiplexes an ATM cell flow to multiple low-speed links, which are then multiplexed at the far end so that the cell flow is restored to its original form. In this way, the multiplexing of multiple low-speed links becomes flexible and easy. This functionality applies to E1 interconnections between ATM networks, and does not have special requirements for service types. See Figure 26-1. Figure 26-1 ATM IMA group
Physical Link#0 Physical Link#1 Single ATM Cell Stream from ATM Layer Physical Link#2
IMA Virtual Link
Single ATM Cell Stream from ATM Layer
26-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
26.1.2 Application of the IMA

The ATM IMA service is mainly used to interconnect the wireless base station to the equipment at the transmission access side. The ATM IMA service has the following two scenarios. l l As shown in Figure 26-2, the ATM service on Node B is directly interconnected to the RTN equipment at the access side through the E1 links. As shown in Figure 26-3, the ATM service on Node B is accessed to the SDH equipment through the E1 links, and then the ATM service is aggregated to the STM-1 link. At last, the IMA protocols are interconnected on the RTN equipment at the access side.
Figure 26-2 IMA networking diagram 1

IMA 1
IMA 2 Node B RTN
E1 Link
Figure 26-3 IMA networking diagram 2
Node B PTN SDH
Node B SDH
E1 Link
Node B
cSTM-1 Link
The ATM IMA service has the following scenarios. As shown in Figure 26-4, the ATM service on Node B is directly interconnected to the RTN equipment through the E1 links.
Figure 26-4 IMA networking diagram

IMA 1
IMA 2 Node B RTN
E1 Link
26.1.3 ATM Service

Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is a technology used to transport packets in cells with ensured QoS. ATM meets the requirements of real-time services and non-real-time services. The OptiX RTN equipment supports both the UNIs-NNI ATM service and UNI-UNI ATM service. ATM services mainly apply to wireless services. The application scenarios include UNIs-NNI and UNI-UNI. l UNIs-NNI ATM service: The RTN equipment accesses the ATM services of customers by using the IMA link respectively. You can create the ATM PW between the RTN equipment to emulate end-to-end ATM services. At the source end, the ATM cells are encapsulated in the PW. Then, data packets are transparently transmitted in the MPLS network. At the sink end, the ATM services are decapsulated and forwarded to the connected customer network. To customers, the UNIs-NNI ATM services are similar to actual ATM services. UNI-UNI ATM services: The RTN equipment switches and transmits the ATM services at a single point.
The ATM UNIs-NNI service supports the convergence of multiple ATM connections into a PW for transmission. As shown in Figure 26-5, three ATM connections are encapsulated into a PW. Figure 26-5 ATM connection convergence sample
26-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
26.1.4 ATM Traffic

The ATM communicates through virtual connections, which are uniquely identified by the VPI/ VCI in the cell header. During data transmission, you need to control the traffic of each virtual connection to ensure the quality of service (QoS).
ATM Traffic Modes

As shown in Table 26-1, the RTN equipment supports four traffic modes. During traffic control, you need to set different traffic parameters according to different service types. Table 26-1 ATM service type and traffic Application Type Constant bit rate (CBR) service Application Instance Voice services, video services of a constant bit rate, and circuit emulation services Traffic Parameter PCR, CDVT Remarks The CBR supports the strict requirements for CTD and CDV, but does not support services with variable delay. The UBR does not require a strict delay and the delay variation. Besides, it does not provide a special QoS or ensure the output. There are UBR+ services on many NodeBs. The UBR+ services are configured with the MCR. When the service rate does not exceed the configured MCR, the normal service transmission is ensured. The features of the UBR+ service other than the MCR are the same as the features of the UBR service.
Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service
LAN emulation, IP over ATM, and nonspecial traffic services
PCR, CDVT
UBR+
LAN emulation, IP over ATM, and nonspecial traffic services
PCR, CDVT
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
26-5
Application Type Real time variable bit rate (rtVBR) service
Application Instance Audio services, and video services of a variable bit rate
Traffic Parameter PCR, SCR, CDVT, MBS
Remarks The rtVBR supports time-sensitive service applications and have restrictions on the delay and delay variation. The nrtVBR does not have restrictions on the delay and delay variation but supports application of services with the variable rate and burst traffic features.
Non real time variable bit rate (nrtVBR) service
Data packet transmission, terminal meeting, and file transmission
PCR, SCR, MBS
The meanings of the traffic parameters in the table are as follows: l l l Peak cell rate (PCR): It defines the maximum cell rate at which cells are transmitted to a network. Sustainable cell rate (SCR): It defines the maximum sustainable average cell rate at which cells are transmitted to a network. Cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT): When multiple connected cells are converged, at the convergence egress, the transmission of a connected cell may be delayed because of the insertion of other connected cells. Similarly, the transmission delay may also be caused by the insertion of physical layer overheads and OAM cells. In other words. the cells do not evenly arrive at the receive station. The arrival intervals of consecutive cells are different in different periods. The maximum tolerance of this difference is called CDVT. Maximum burst size (MBS): It limits the maximum cell burst amount within the maximum rate permitted.
Users require each service type to provide a certain QoS and comply with a certain traffic protocol, which is realized by traffic control. During transmission, only user cells complying with the protocol can be successfully transmitted. Cells that do not comply with the protocol are labelled or discarded according to different situations.
Basic Principle of Traffic Control

In general, the control of ATM services combines the preventive control and reactive control methods. Preventive control is the main method, but when congestion occurs, the network can take measures to clear the congestion. In point of effect, the ATM traffic control can be classified into two parts as follows: l l Traffic parameter control: preventive control Congestion control: reactive control
26-6
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Traffic Parameter Control

The function of traffic parameter control is used to set up proper connections and to control the connected cell flow according to the traffic parameters. If the control of these parameters fails, traffic congestion may occur. The traffic parameter control includes the following methods: l l Usage parameter control (UPC)/network parameter control (NPC) Traffic shaping
UPC/NPC UPC/NPC monitors and controls the traffic to judge whether cell violation occurs according to the negotiated parameters. If cell violation occurs, corresponding measures will be taken to prevent network resources from being invaded viciously or unintentionally. This ensures that one link never violates the traffic control. UPC is an act of connection monitoring at the UNI (dedicated or public), and NPC is an act of connection monitoring at the NNI (dedicated or public). According to different traffic types. the UPC includes the following measures: l l Allow cells to pass through: The cells are considered protocol-abiding by the UPC. Label cells: This operation is performed on the cell loss priority (CLP). The UPC labels only cells whose CLP values are 0 by changing the CLP values to 1. In this case, these cells are in conflict with the traffic convention. If the bandwidth is sufficient, these cells are allowed to pass through. If the bandwidth is insufficient, however, these labeled cells are discarded. Discard cells: The cells violate the protocol and thus cannot be transmitted continuously.
Traffic Shaping Traffic shaping is a method of changing the traffic feature of a cell flow to realize a higher network efficiency and ensure the QoS index. Traffic shaping helps the cell flow to be transmitted more evenly, maximize the efficiency, and eases the network burden.
Congestion Control
Traffic parameter control is based on the connection and cells, but congestion control relates to different service types. If a network requires discarding cells, a better solution of congestion is to discard packets rather than cells. When an NE discards cells, it also discards a part of the packet. As a result, the upper layer protocol, such as the TCP/IP protocol, is retransmitted, and thus congestion or even collapse occurs.
26.2 ATM Service Configuration Flow

This section describes the operation tasks for configuring the ATM service, and relations among these tasks. When configuring and managing the ATM services, follow the configuration flow. The application scenarios of the ATM service include the UNI-UNI and UNIs-NNI services.
UNI-UNI ATM service

Figure 26-6 shows the configuration flow of the UNI-UNI ATM service. For details of each step, see the related section.
Figure 26-6 Configuration flow of the UNI-UNI ATM service
Required Optional
Start
Creating Network
Configure the ATM Policy
Configure the ATM Interface Configure the UNIUNI ATM Service End
Table 26-2 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI ATM service Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configure the ATM Policy Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, create fibers, and configure the clock. The ATM policy is used for traffic management of the ATM service. The ATM interface accesses services from NodeB. 4. Configure the UNI-UNI ATM Service To configure the UNI-UNI ATM service, you need to specify the service ID and service name, select the connection type, and configure the connection.
UNIs-NNI ATM service

Figure 26-7 shows the configuration flow of the UNIs-NNI ATM service. For details of each step, see the related section.
26-8
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 26-7 Configuration flow of the UNIs-NNI ATM service
Required Optional
Start
Creating Network
Configure the network-side interface
Configure the LSR ID
Configure the control plane
Configure the Tunnel
Configure the ATM Policy
Configure the ATM Interface
Configure the UNIsNNI ATM service
End
Table 26-3 Tasks for configuring the UNIs-NNI ATM service Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configure the LSR ID Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, create fibers, and configure the clock. Configure the LSR ID of the NE and start of global label space.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
26-9
Task 3. Configure the network-side interface 20 Configuring the Control Plane4. Configure the control plane
Remarks Set the general attributes and Layer 3 attributes (tunnel enable status and IP address) for interfaces to carry the tunnel carrying. Set the protocol parameters related to the control plane to create the tunnel. l To create a static MPLS tunnel to transmit the ATM service, the parameters related to the control plane need not be set. l To create a dynamic MPLS tunnel to transmit the ATM service, you need to set the following protocol parameters: 1. Set the IGP-ISIS protocol parameters. For details, see 20.2 Configuring the IGP-ISIS Protocol. 2. Set the MPLS-RSVP protocol parameters. For details, see 20.4 Configuring the MPLS-RSVP Protocol. To create a dynamic PW to transmit the service, you need to set the parameters related to the IGP-ISIS protocol and the MPLS-LDP protocol.
5. Configure the Tunnel
A tunnel transmits the service. l If an static MPLS tunnel is required, configure an MPLS tunnel in the per-NE or per-trail mode. Specify the tunnel ID, set signaling type to static, name the service, and specify the ingress node, egress node, and transit node. l If a dynamic MPLS Tunnel is required, name the service, set signaling type to dynamic, and specify the source node and sink node for the tunnel.
6. Configure the ATM Policy 7. Configure the ATM Interface 8. Configure the UNIs-NNI ATM service
The ATM policy is used for traffic management of the ATM service. The ATM interface accesses services from NodeB. 1. Create an ATM service: Specify the service ID, name the service, and select the service type and connection type. 2. Configure the connection: Set the source information, PW ID, sink information, and policy. 3. Configure a PW: Set the PW type, label, and tunnel type. 4. Configure CoS mapping: Set the CoS policy for the PW.
26-10
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Table 26-4 ATM Interface Support ed Board Type Leve l Configuration Method
E1
1. In General attributes for the PDH interface, set the port mode to Layer 2. For details, see 8.2.1 Setting General Attributes of PDH Interfaces. 2. In Advanced Attributes for the PDH interface, set the Frame Format and Frame Mode. For details, see 8.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of PDH Interfaces. 3. Configuring bound channels in an ATM IMA Group, for details, see 26.3.1 Configuring Bound Channels in an ATM IMA Group in the . 4. Set attributes of the ATM IMA group. In particular, specify the IMA Transmit Frame Length, set the IMA Symmetry Mode, and enable the IMA protocol. For details, see 26.3.2 Configuring Attributes of an ATM IMA Group in the . 5. Set attributes of the ATM interface. In particular, set the interface type, maximum VPI, and maximum VCI. For details, see 26.3.3 Configuring ATM Interface Attributes in the .
E1 board (For example: )
64K times lots
1. In General attributes for the PDH interface, set the port mode to Layer 1. For details, see 8.2.1 Setting General Attributes of PDH Interfaces. 2. In Advanced Attributes for the PDH interface, set the Frame Format and Frame Mode. For details, see 8.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of PDH Interfaces. 3. Create a serial port and specify the timeslots used by the service. Set the port mode to Layer 2 and the encapsulation type is ATM. For details, see 8.5.1 Creating Serial Interfaces. 4. Configuring bound channels in an ATM IMA Group, for details, see 26.3.1 Configuring Bound Channels in an ATM IMA Group in the . 5. Set attributes of the ATM IMA group. In particular, specify the IMA Transmit Frame Length, set the IMA Symmetry Mode, and enable the IMA protocol. For details, see 26.3.2 Configuring Attributes of an ATM IMA Group in the . 6. Set attributes of the ATM interface. In particular, set the interface type, maximum VPI, and maximum VCI. For details, see 26.3.3 Configuring ATM Interface Attributes in the .
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
26-11
Support ed Board Type
Leve l
Configuration Method
VC1 2
1. Configuring bound channels in an ATM IMA Group, for details, see 26.3.1 Configuring Bound Channels in an ATM IMA Group in the . 2. Set attributes of the ATM IMA group. In particular, specify the IMA Transmit Frame Length, set the IMA Symmetry Mode, and enable the IMA protocol. For details, see 26.3.2 Configuring Attributes of an ATM IMA Group in the .
Channeli zed STM-1 board (For example: CD1)
3. Set attributes of the ATM interface. In particular, set the interface type, maximum VPI, and maximum VCI. For details, see 26.3.3 Configuring ATM Interface Attributes in the . 64K times lots 1. Create a serial port and specify the timeslots used by the service. Set the port mode to Layer 2 and the encapsulation type is ATM. For details, see 8.5.1 Creating Serial Interfaces. 2. Configuring bound channels in an ATM IMA Group, for details, see 26.3.1 Configuring Bound Channels in an ATM IMA Group in the . 3. Set attributes of the ATM IMA group. In particular, specify the IMA Transmit Frame Length, set the IMA Symmetry Mode, and enable the IMA protocol. For details, see 26.3.2 Configuring Attributes of an ATM IMA Group in the . 4. Set attributes of the ATM interface. In particular, set the interface type, maximum VPI, and maximum VCI. For details, see 26.3.3 Configuring ATM Interface Attributes in the .
26.3 Configuring an IMA Group

When the RTN equipment accesses IMA services, configure an ATM IMA group at the access node.
Context
Figure 26-8 shows the flow for configuring an IMA group.
26-12
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 26-8 IMA group configuration flow

Start
Configure bound paths for an ATM IMA group
Configure IMA group attributes
Configure ATM interface attributes
Query the IMA group states
Query the states of the link of an IMA group
Reset an IMA group
Modify an IMA group
Delete an IMA group
End
Required
Optional
26.3.1 Configuring Bound Channels in an ATM IMA Group When the RTN equipment accesses IMA services, configure bound channels in an ATM IMA group at the access node. One ATM IMA group corresponds to one ATM trunk port. Bind channels with the ATM trunk port and then enable the IMA group. The ATM trunk port can be bound with one or several E1 or Fractional E1 ports. 26.3.2 Configuring Attributes of an ATM IMA Group After configuring the channels bound with the IMA group, enable the IMA protocol and configure attributes of the IMA group to make the IMA group meet the service requirements. 26.3.3 Configuring ATM Interface Attributes This section describes methods of configuring the ATM interface parameters. 26.3.4 Querying IMA Group States In the case of routine maintenance and troubleshooting, the operator need query information on states of an IMA group to check whether the IMA group is normal. 26.3.5 Querying IMA Link States In the case of routine maintenance and troubleshooting, the operator need query information on states of an IMA link to check whether the IMA link is normal. 26.3.6 Resetting an IMA Group In the case of deployment and troubleshooting, the operator can reset an IMA group to re-enable the IMA group protocol.
26.3.7 Modifying an IMA Group When attributes of an IMA group displayed on the U2000 are not consistent with those in the network, modify attributes of this IMA group. If any service is configured and activated at the ATM Trunk port for an IMA group, modification of the IMA group may interrupt services. 26.3.8 Deleting an IMA Group Delete the redundant or idle IMA groups to release the resources. If any service is configured and activated at the ATM Trunk port for an IMA group, deleting the IMA group may interrupt the services.
26.3.1 Configuring Bound Channels in an ATM IMA Group

When the RTN equipment accesses IMA services, configure bound channels in an ATM IMA group at the access node. One ATM IMA group corresponds to one ATM trunk port. Bind channels with the ATM trunk port and then enable the IMA group. The ATM trunk port can be bound with one or several E1 or Fractional E1 ports.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. When the MLPPP or CES services is configured or the DCN is enabled on the VCTRUNK, the VCTRUNK resources are occupied and thus the IMA group cannot be created. When an E1or Fractional E1 port is bound with an IMA group, Port Mode should be set to Layer 2.
Context
NOTE
Only the E1 ports on the same processing board can be bound.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Binding tab and click Configuration. The Bound Path dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Configure boards and VCTRUNK ports in Available Boards and Configurable Ports respectively. Step 4 Select E1, Fractional E1 for Level. Step 5 Select a port in Available Resources. Click to bind the port to the VCTRUNK. Click
to cancel binding of the port to the VCTRUNK.
26-14
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
CAUTION
The VCTRUNK that is first added into the IMA group should be deleted at last. The ports that are bound to the same VCTRUNK must have the same E1 frame mode or VC12 frame mode. When the member links of an IMA group are at the serial ports of the 64K level, there are the following restrictions: l One serial port should be bound with a minimum of three 64K timeslots. l The number of bound 64K timeslots should be the same for different serial ports. l In one E1, only one serial port can be used as a member link of an IMA group. Step 6 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeds. Click Close. ----End
26.3.2 Configuring Attributes of an ATM IMA Group

After configuring the channels bound with the IMA group, enable the IMA protocol and configure attributes of the IMA group to make the IMA group meet the service requirements.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Click the NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IMA Group Management tab, enable the IMA protocol, and configure attributes of the IMA group. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeds. Click Close.
NOTE
Take the following precautions when setting parameters. l You can enable or disable the IMA Protocol Enable Status of the IMA group only after configuring the bound path of the corresponding VCTRUNK of the IMA group. l IMA Transmit Frame Length: The optional values are 32, 64, 128 and 256. l When IMA Symmetry Mode be set to Symmetric Mode and Symmetric Operation, Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links should be consistent with Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links. l Maximum Delay Between Links: This parameter indicates the maximum delay variance among different links in one IMA group. The value ranges from 1 ms to 120 ms, with 1 ms spacing. l If the IMA protocol is enabled, only Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links, Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links and Maximum Delay Between Links can be set. l You can modify the IMA Protocol Version, IMA Transmit Frame Length and IMA Symmetry Mode only after you disable the IMA Protocol Enable Status.
----End
26.3.3 Configuring ATM Interface Attributes

This section describes methods of configuring the ATM interface parameters.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree. Click the ATM Interface Management tab. Step 2 Optional: Click Query to query the current attributes of each interface. Step 3 Set relevant attributes of the interfaces bound with the IMA group as required. Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End
26.3.4 Querying IMA Group States

In the case of routine maintenance and troubleshooting, the operator need query information on states of an IMA group to check whether the IMA group is normal.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. You must complete the configuration of an IMA group.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IMA Group States tab and select the IMA group for query. Click Query. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeds. Click Close. ----End
26.3.5 Querying IMA Link States

In the case of routine maintenance and troubleshooting, the operator need query information on states of an IMA link to check whether the IMA link is normal.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. You must complete the configuration of an IMA link.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the IMA Link States tab and select the IMA link for query. Click Query. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeds. Click Close. ----End
26.3.6 Resetting an IMA Group

In the case of deployment and troubleshooting, the operator can reset an IMA group to re-enable the IMA group protocol.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of the IMA group.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IMA Group Management tab and select the IMA group. Click Reset. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeds. Click Close. ----End
26.3.7 Modifying an IMA Group

When attributes of an IMA group displayed on the U2000 are not consistent with those in the network, modify attributes of this IMA group. If any service is configured and activated at the ATM Trunk port for an IMA group, modification of the IMA group may interrupt services.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
If any service is configured and activated at the ATM Trunk port for the IMA group, modification of the IMA group may interrupt services. Exercise caution for this.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IMA Group Management tab and modify related attributes of the IMA group. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeds. Click Close. ----End
26.3.8 Deleting an IMA Group

Delete the redundant or idle IMA groups to release the resources. If any service is configured and activated at the ATM Trunk port for an IMA group, deleting the IMA group may interrupt the services.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The IMA Protocol Enable Status of the IMA group must be Disabled.
Context
CAUTION
If any service is configured and activated at the ATM Trunk port for the IMA group, deleting the IMA group may interrupt the services. Exercise caution for this.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Banding tab and select an IMA group. Click Delete. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation may interrupt the services. Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. ----End
26.4 Configuring the ATM Service

You can configure an ATM PWE3 service path for transmitting ATM signals on a per-NE basis. When the ATM service is configured on a per-NE basis, the service attributes should be configured at the source end and sink end separately. In this way, a complete ATM service is configured. The configuration of the ATM services on a per-NE basis is of low efficiency, and thus the configuration on an end-to-end basis is recommended. 26.4.1 Creating ATM Services This section describes how to create an ATM PWE3 service channel that transports ATM signals on a per-NE basis. The per-NE basis means that, to configure a complete ATM service, you need to separately configure the service attributes at the source and sink ends of the service first. 26.4.2 Modifying ATM Services If the configuration information on an ATM service on the U2000 is inconsistent with that in the network, modify the ATM service on a per-NE basis. 26.4.3 Deleting ATM Services If any ATM service channels are redundant, delete the ATM service channels to release resources. To delete an ATM service on a per-NE basis, delete the ATM service specified at the source NE and sink NE.
26.4.1 Creating ATM Services

This section describes how to create an ATM PWE3 service channel that transports ATM signals on a per-NE basis. The per-NE basis means that, to configure a complete ATM service, you need to separately configure the service attributes at the source and sink ends of the service first.
Prerequisite
l l l l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the configuration of the control plane. For configuration method, see 20 Configuring the Control Plane. If IMA services are accessed, you must complete the configuration of an IMA group. For configuration method, see Configuring the IMA. You must complete the configuration of the ATM policy. For configuration method, see 15.1.9.1 Creating the ATM Policy. You must complete the creation of a tunnel. For configuration method, see 21.2.2 Creating an MPLS Tunnel.
Context
The OptiX RTN equipment can access services at the E1/VC-12 level or 64K timeslot level. When the OptiX RTN equipment accesses the services at the E1/VC-12 level, all the available timeslots of the E1/VC-12 channels are used to transport services. When the OptiX RTN equipment accesses the services at the 64K timeslot level, one E1/VC-12 channel can be used to transport both the ATM services and CES services (certain timeslots allocated for ATM services and others for CES services). In this manner, the E1/VC-12 channels are used flexibly.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The New ATM Service window is displayed. In the window, configure a UNIsNNI or UNI-UNI service.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
26-19
NOTE
l For the UNIs-NNI service, set the attributes in the Connection, PW and CoS Mapping tabs. l For the UNI-UNI service, set only the attributes in the Connection tab.
Step 3 To create a UNI-UNI service, go to Step 4. To create a UNIs-NNI service, go to Step 5. Step 4 Optional: Create a UNI-UNI service. 1. Set ATM-related general attributes.
NOTE
Select UNI-UNI for the service type. For the connection type, select the following. l PVP: Only the VPI value of the ATM connection can be modified. l PVC: The VPI and VCI values of the ATM connection can be modified.
2.
Click the Connection tab and click Add. In the window displayed, set connection attributes.
NOTE
The Sink VPI value ranges from 0 to (2MaxVPIbits-1). The Sink VCI value ranges from 32 to (2MaxVCIbits-1).
3.
Click OK.
Step 5 Optional: Create a UNIs-NNI service.

1.
Set ATM-related general attributes.

NOTE
Select UNIs-NNI for the service type. For the connection type, select the following. l PVP: Only the VPI value of the ATM connection can be modified. l PVC: The VPI and VCI values of the ATM connection can be modified.
2. 3.
Click the Connection tab and click Add. In the window displayed, set connection attributes. Click the PW tab and click Add. The Configure PW window is displayed. In the window, set attributes of the PW.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Click the General Attributes tab and set the general attributes of PW. Optional: Click the QoS tab and set the QoS attribute of PW. Optional: Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the advanced attributes of PW. Click the CoS Mapping tab and click Add to configure the CoS mapping table.
NOTE
You can configure the CoS mapping only after configuring the parameters in the PW tab.
8.
Click OK.
Step 6 In the New ATM Service window, click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. ----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
26-21
26.4.2 Modifying ATM Services

If the configuration information on an ATM service on the U2000 is inconsistent with that in the network, modify the ATM service on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
This operation causes service interruption. Exercise caution when you perform this operation.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select a created service and click the Connection tab. In the tab, click Configure Connection to modify connection attributes of the service. Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation affects services. Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Step 3 Click the PW tab. In the tab, modify PW attributes of the service. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation affects services. Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
NOTE
You can modify parameters only in the QoS and Advanced Attributes tabs of the PW, but not the parameters in the General Attributes tab.
Step 4 Select a created service and click the CoS Mapping tab. Modify the CoS mapping attributes of the service. Click OK. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation affects services. Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. ----End
26.4.3 Deleting ATM Services

If any ATM service channels are redundant, delete the ATM service channels to release resources. To delete an ATM service on a per-NE basis, delete the ATM service specified at the source NE and sink NE.
Prerequisite
26-22
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Context
CAUTION
This operation causes service interruption. Exercise caution when you perform this operation.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Select a created service and click the Connection tab. In the tab, click Delete. A dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation affects services. Click OK. A dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close. ----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
26-23
27 Configuring the BFD
27
About This Chapter
Configuring the BFD
The BFD is a protocol that uses the UDP packets to quickly detect the link status. The detection time can reach Milliseconds. 27.1 Overview of the BFD Similar to a simple Hello protocol, the BFD is adopted to detect faults on the route layer. 27.2 Basic Concepts This section describes the basic BFD-related concepts such as session, single-hop detection and diagnosis word. 27.3 Creating a BFD Session The BFD session is the main part of the configuration, management and check. Before the BFD check, you need to create a BFD session to test the link state. 27.4 Configuring Parameters of the BFD Session After creating the BFD session, configure parameters for the BFD session. 27.5 Querying the BFD Session Information Query the BFD session information as required. 27.6 Deleting a BFD Session In the case of many BFD sessions, delete some BFD sessions to release resources.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
27-1
27.1 Overview of the BFD

Similar to a simple Hello protocol, the BFD is adopted to detect faults on the route layer.
Objective and Benefit

The BFD can fast detect the communication failure between the two adjacent systems. In other words, a pair of systems periodically sends detection packets on the channel on which session between the two systems is created. If a system does not receive any detection packet from the opposite end in a specific time, the system regards that a failure occurs in some part of the bidirectional channel to the adjacent system. In this way, when a fault occurs, a substitute channel can be created quickly or the services are quickly switched to another link. The BFD is similar to the neighbor check of many protocols in many aspects, but the BFD takes a shorter detection time. The BFD sends the user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. The BFD has the following functions: l l l Performs fault detection that brings light load and lasts for a short time for the channel where the BFD session is set up. Adopts a uniform mechanism to detect faults for any medium and any protocol layer in a real-time manner. Reduces the lost data.

The BFD complies with IETF: draft-ietf-bfd-base-04, IETF: draft-ietf-bfd-v4v6-1hop-04 and IETF: draft-ietf-bfd-multihop-04.
27.2 Basic Concepts

This section describes the basic BFD-related concepts such as session, single-hop detection and diagnosis word.
Session
Before performing the BFD detection, set up the peer session at both ends of the channel. After the session is set up, each end transmits the BFD control packets to the opposite end at the negotiated rate.
Single-Hop Detection
The single-hop detection quickly detects and monitors the connectivity of the link of direct connection. Single-hop detection is applicable to the scenario where the link between BFD peers does not traverse the third-party equipment.
Diagnosis Word
The diagnosis word indicates the cause of the state change of the latest session in the local BFD system.
27.3 Creating a BFD Session

The BFD session is the main part of the configuration, management and check. Before the BFD check, you need to create a BFD session to test the link state.
Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The port where the BFD session can be created must be a Ethernet port configured with Layer 3 attributes. In the case of a Lay 3 port, you must enable the MPLS. The Port enable tunnel.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > BFD management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The Create BFD dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the parameters related to the BFD session.
NOTE
Take the following precautions when setting these parameters. If Session Type is set to Single-Hop, select Board and Port, that is, select a port on a board that transmits the BFD packets.
27.4 Configuring Parameters of the BFD Session

After creating the BFD session, configure parameters for the BFD session.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The BFD session must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > BFD management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select a BFD session, and configure parameters for the BFD session. It is recommended that you set the following parameters: l Admin Status: Up l Local Send Interval of Packets: 1000 l Local Receive Interval of Packets: 1000
l Local Detection Multiple of Packets: 3 Step 3 Click Apply. ----End
27.5 Querying the BFD Session Information

Query the BFD session information as required.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > BFD management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select a BFD session and click Query. Check the BFD session information.
NOTE
If Admin Status is set to Down, Session Status is displayed only as Down.
----End
27.6 Deleting a BFD Session

In the case of many BFD sessions, delete some BFD sessions to release resources.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > BFD management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select a BFD session and click Delete. Step 3 A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. Click OK. ----End
27-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
28 Configuring the IGMP Snooping
28
Configuring the IGMP Snooping
About This Chapter

The IGMP Snooping enhances the capability of managing the multicast of the Layer 2 switching services. The IGMP Snooping avoids the broadcast of the service flow on the Layer 2 equipment, and thus increases the resource utilization of the equipment and links. 28.1 Overview of the IGMP Snooping This section describes the IGMP Snooping, in terms of the aim, compliant standard and protocol, and related concepts. 28.2 Basic Concepts This section describes the basic concepts of the IGMP Snooping, which is used for understanding and applying the IGMP Snooping. The basic concepts covers the enabling of the IGMP snooping protocol, router port, member port, aging time of the router port, maximum non-response times for multicast group members, multicast strategy, and quick deletion of member port. 28.3 Application of the IGMP Snooping The IGMP Snooping enhances the resource utilization through multicast forwarding, enhances the security of the U2000 through restriction on user access, and enhances the network reliability through quick response to the link change. 28.4 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Parameters Parameters related to the IGMP Snooping include Enabled Protocol, Router Port Aging Time (min), Maximum times of No Response from Multicast Members and Maximum Number of Multicast Groups. Configure these parameters for the IGMP Snooping to work normally. After configuring the IGMP Snooping parameters for multicast services that are created, you can set some ports for the multicast service as quick leave ports. The multicast user on each quick leave port can then switch the multicast service channels quickly. 28.5 Configuring the Router Management The user manually creates the router port, through which the equipment responds to the packets of the router for querying the IGMP Snooping. The router port is not aged automatically, and thus always exists unless manually deleted. 28.6 Configuring the Route Member Port Management To define the multicast scope, configure the route member ports. The static multicast member ports are not aged automatically, and thus always exist unless manually deleted.
28.7 Configuring the Packet Statistics Set the status of the protocol packet statistics to start, stop or clear the packet statistics. The packet statistics data indicates the running status of multicast services.
28-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
28.1 Overview of the IGMP Snooping

This section describes the IGMP Snooping, in terms of the aim, compliant standard and protocol, and related concepts.

The IGMP protocol applies to the router and host, such as the switch, hub, or DSLAM. It is used to manage the addition and deletion of group members. The RTN equipment with the IGMP Snooping enabled dynamically learns the router port, multicast group and group members through snooping of the IGMP protocol packets between the multicast management router and host. Thus, the multicast packets are prevent from being broadcast in the Layer 2 switch. The equipment can transmit the multicast services, such as the IPTV or conference call, through the IGMP Snooping. The IGMP Snooping has a strong capability of managing the multicast services, such as dynamic response to IGMP Join/Leave requests of customers. Thus, it is applied to the equipment at the edge/access and convergence layers. Figure 28-1 shows the networking diagram of the multicast services with the IGMP protocol. The networking diagram consists of the multicast service source, multicast management router, RTN equipment, and hosts In the actual networking, the RTN equipment and multicast management router, and the multicast management router and the service source may be connected through complex networks respectively. Figure 28-1 Application of the IGMP Snooping-Supported Equipment in the Network
Multicast management router
Host (Non-multicast member)
Host Host (Multicast member)(Multicast member)
Host (Non-multicast member)
Physical connection Flow direction of the multicast service
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
28-3
The advantages of the application of the IGMP Snooping are as follows: l l l The network bandwidth can be saved. Signals are forwarded based on the VLAN. Hence, the information security is increased. Quick response is made to the link fault. Hence, the reliability is enhanced.

The IGMP complies with RFC 4541, Considerations for Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) and Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Snooping Switches
28.2 Basic Concepts

This section describes the basic concepts of the IGMP Snooping, which is used for understanding and applying the IGMP Snooping. The basic concepts covers the enabling of the IGMP snooping protocol, router port, member port, aging time of the router port, maximum non-response times for multicast group members, multicast strategy, and quick deletion of member port.
Enabling of the IGMP Snooping Protocol

After the IGMP Snooping protocol is enabled, the equipment begins to perform the multicast group learning and aging. Then, the multicast services are multicast in corresponding multicast groups. If the IGMP Snooping is disabled, the equipment does not perform the multicast group learning and aging. In addition, the equipment deletes all the learned dynamic multicast groups.
Router Port
The router port refers to the port that faces the multicast router. The E-LAN service of the RTN equipment takes the port that receives the IGMP query packets as the router port. The router port consists of the following two types: l Dynamic router port, which relies on the protocol packets exchanged between the router and host, and can be dynamically maintained. Each of this port can enable a router port aging timer. When the timer times out, this router port is invalid. Static router port, which is specified by users by using configuration commands, cannot be aged.
Member Port
The multicast member port refers to the port that faces the host of the member. The switch transmits the multicast packets from this port. The multicast group member port, referred to as member port for short, consists of the following two types: l Dynamic member port, which can receive the IGMP report packets. This port, relies on the protocol packets exchanged between the router and host, can be dynamically maintained. Each of this port can enable a member port aging timer. When the timer times out, that is, when the times of not receiving the IGMP report packets exceed certain times, this member port becomes invalid.
28-4
Static member port, which is specified by users by using configuration commands, cannot be aged.
Aging Time of the Router Port

The IGMP protocol requires that the router periodically transmit the IGMP query packets, which are used to obtain the information indicating whether the host is added to the multicast group. After the E-LAN service of the RTN equipment learns the router port in a broadcast domain, the aging timer should be enabled for this port. When the aging timer of the router port times out but this port does not receive any query packet, the IGMP Snooping sub-system takes that this port is invalid, and then the sub-system ages this port. If this port receives the query packet, including the query packet of the specified group, before the aging timer times out, the aging timer of the router port should be re-set.
Maximum Non-Response Times for Multicast Group Members

The equipment should learn the deletion information on the multicast members in a timely manner. Otherwise, the equipment continuously transmits service packets to the multicast group members deleted from the multicast group, which consumes the resources of the RTN equipment and downstream equipment. Thus, when the response packet of the first member in the multicast group is received, the response packet is unicast to the router port instead of being multicast in the multicast group. In this way, the RTN equipment can snoops whether the query packet is responded on each group member. When the equipment receives the IGMP response packet sent by a port for the first time, the equipment first adds the port to the corresponding multicast group, and then enables the count of the query non-response times for this multicast member. When the query packet is sent to a multicast member and the response packet is not received within the required response period, the count of the query non-response times for this multicast member is started. When the count value reaches a threshold, the equipment considers that the multicast member leaves the multicast group, and thus deletes the multicast member. In this case, the equipment connected to this port cannot receive the multicast services. If the member receives the response packet within the aging time, re-set the count value.
Multicast Strategy
The RTN equipment determines the member relation in this network section according to the received IGMP group member report packet. The range of the multicast groups can be restrained through the ACL. By default, the ACL is not set. Thus, the host can be added to any multicast groups.
Quick Deletion of the Member Port

When only one multicast service receive end is connected to the multicast member port, the quick deletion function can be set on this port. In other words, when the member port receives the deletion packet, it immediately deletes the member port, and it stops forwarding the query packet for a specified group. During the channel switching, the multicast service management equipment that should be connected to the terminal of the IPTV service such as the set top box has this function. If the port with the enabled quick deletion function connects to multiple multicast receive members, when a member is deleted from the multicast group, the RTN equipment cuts the multicast services. In this way, other members cannot continue to receive the multicast services.
Thus, when this function is used, you should make sure that only one multicast service receive end is connected to this port.
28.3 Application of the IGMP Snooping

The IGMP Snooping enhances the resource utilization through multicast forwarding, enhances the security of the U2000 through restriction on user access, and enhances the network reliability through quick response to the link change.
Multicast Forwarding
The IGMP Snooping is configured on RTN-1 and RTN-2. When the multicast packets reach RTN-1 or RTN-2, the packets are distributed at the port, which has the group member host in the downstream. Figure 28-2 Multicast forwarding
Internet /Intranet Source
Host 1
Host 2
Host3
Host 4
Host 5
Group member
Group member
Group member
Multicast packets
Restriction on the User Access

Illegal users are prevent from using multicast services by configuring the attributes of the multicast strategy, static multicast group, static router port and unknown multicast service
forwarding. As shown in Figure 28-2, the multicast group strategy is configured on RTN-1 and RTN-2. In this way, the range of the group addresses that can be accessed by users through the access control list (ACL) is set. Thus, the multicast packets that can be received by the user host can be controlled.
Quick Response to the Link Change

When the topology of the network where the RTN equipment resides changes, the switching equipment in the downstream of the RTN equipment should set up new forwarding table items in minutes after receiving the subsequent multicast query packet. As a result, the multicast services are interrupted for a long time. The IGMP Snooping notifies the change of the response spanning tree topology and fast transmits the query packets for the router. In this way, the switching equipment in the downstream can fast learn the multicast information and decrease the service interruption time.
28.4 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Parameters

Parameters related to the IGMP Snooping include Enabled Protocol, Router Port Aging Time (min), Maximum times of No Response from Multicast Members and Maximum Number of Multicast Groups. Configure these parameters for the IGMP Snooping to work normally. After configuring the IGMP Snooping parameters for multicast services that are created, you can set some ports for the multicast service as quick leave ports. The multicast user on each quick leave port can then switch the multicast service channels quickly.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The E-LAN service is already created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Protocol Configuration tab to configure the required parameters. Click Apply.
NOTE
When setting parameters, note the following: l Enabled Protocol: Enable or disable the IGMP Snooping function. l Router Port Aging Time(min): The value ranges from 1 to 120, and defaults to 8. Set this parameter when the IGMP Snooping function is enabled. l Maximum times of No Response from Multicast Members: The value ranges from 1 to 4, and defaults to 3. Set this parameter when the IGMP Snooping function is enabled. l Maximum Number of Multicast Groups: The value range depends on the maximum specification of the equipment. Set this parameter when the IGMP Snooping function is enabled. l Maximum Number of Multicast Groups Member: The value range depends on the maximum specification of the equipment. Set this parameter when the IGMP Snooping function is enabled.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
28-7
Step 3 Select the multicast service that requires setting of the quickly delete member port. The lower pane lists the multicast service. Step 4 Configure the parameters related to the quickly delete member port for the multicast service. The parameters include VLAN ID, Port Type and Port. Double-click the parameters to modify them.
NOTE
To set a port for a multicast service as a quickly delete member port, the port should have only one multicast service user. Otherwise, different users on the port affect each other when receiving multicast services.
28.5 Configuring the Router Management

The user manually creates the router port, through which the equipment responds to the packets of the router for querying the IGMP Snooping. The router port is not aged automatically, and thus always exists unless manually deleted.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete creation of the E-LAN service.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Router Management tab. Click New to display the Create Router Port dialog box. In the dialog box, set the required parameters and select the multicast router ports to be added.
NOTE
When setting parameters, note the following: l Service ID: Select the ID of the service that belongs to the router port. In other words, Service ID is the ID of the E-LAN service. l VLAN ID: Set the VLAN ID according to the application. The VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4094. l Available Port: Select the corresponding port. The added ports must belong to the VLAN of the service.
28.6 Configuring the Route Member Port Management

To define the multicast scope, configure the route member ports. The static multicast member ports are not aged automatically, and thus always exist unless manually deleted.
Prerequisite
E-LAN service is created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Route Member Port Management tab, and then click New to display the Create Member Port dialog box. Step 3 Set parameters in the dialog box.
NOTE
When setting parameters, note the following: l Service ID: Select the ID of the service that belongs to the router interface. In other words, Service ID is the ID of the E-LAN service. l VLAN ID: Set the VLAN ID according to the application. The VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4094. l Multicast MAC Address: The value ranges from 01-00-5E-00-01-00 to 01-00-5E-7F-FF-FF. l Available Port: Select the corresponding port. The added ports must belong to the VLAN of the service.
28.7 Configuring the Packet Statistics

Set the status of the protocol packet statistics to start, stop or clear the packet statistics. The packet statistics data indicates the running status of multicast services.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The route member port is configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Packet Statistics tab, and set parameters for the IGMP protocol packet statistics. Then, click Apply.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
28-9

NOTE
When setting parameters, note the following: l Service ID is the ID of the E-LAN service. l The VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4094. l Port Type: The port type is V-UNI or V-NNI. This parameter cannot be set. l Port: Select the corresponding port. l Packet Statistic Status: The status is Stop, Start or Clear. The default status is Stop. l IGMPv1 Query Packet Count: This parameter is of the query result, and thus cannot be set. l IGMPv2 Query Packet Count: This parameter is of the query result, and thus cannot be set. l IGMPv3 Query Packet Count: This parameter is of the query result, and thus cannot be set. l IGMP Leaving Packet Count: This parameter is of the query result, and thus cannot be set. l IGMPv1 Member Report Packet Count: This parameter is of the query result, and thus cannot be set. l IGMPv2 Member Report Packet Count: This parameter is of the query result, and thus cannot be set. l IGMPv3 Member Report Packet Count: This parameter is of the query result, and thus cannot be set. l Unrecognized or Unprocessed Packet Count: This parameter is of the query result, and thus cannot be set. l Discarded Incorrect Packet Count: This parameter is of the query result, and thus cannot be set.
Step 3 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. ----End
28-10
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29 OAM Management
29
About This Chapter
29.2 Configuring the MPLS OAM You can configure the MPLS OAM.
OAM Management
Operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) is a network monitoring tool. Based on the feedback of OAM, network administrators can find and locate network faults in time. 29.1 Configuring ETH OAM Ethernet OAM detects and monitors the connectivity and performance of the trails of services by using outband packets. Therefore, services are not affected.
29.3 Configuring the PW OAM This section describes how to configure the PW OAM. 29.4 Configuring ATM OAM How to use the U2000 to configure ATM OAM is described.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29-1
29 OAM Management
29.1 Configuring ETH OAM

Ethernet OAM detects and monitors the connectivity and performance of the trails of services by using outband packets. Therefore, services are not affected. 29.1.1 Feature Introduction Ethernet OAM enhances the Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance to strongly support the service continuity verification, service deployment commissioning and network fault locating. The Ethernet board provides complete Ethernet OAM solutions according to the standards that are defined in the IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah protocols. 29.1.2 Basic Concept This topic describes certain basic concepts required for the application of Ethernet OAM features. 29.1.3 Availability The ETH-OAM feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 29.1.4 Function Implementation Ethernet OAM realizes different OAM operations through different OAM packets. 29.1.5 Using the IEEE 802.1ag OAM By using the IEEE 802.1ag OAM, you can maintain Ethernet services in an end-to-end manner. 29.1.6 Using the IEEE 802.3ah OAM By using the IEEE 802.1ag OAM, you can maintain the Ethernet link in a point-to-point manner.
29.1.1 Feature Introduction

Ethernet OAM enhances the Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance to strongly support the service continuity verification, service deployment commissioning and network fault locating. The Ethernet board provides complete Ethernet OAM solutions according to the standards that are defined in the IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah protocols. As a protocol based on the MAC layer, Ethernet OAM checks Ethernet links by transmitting OAM protocol packets. Compared with the transmission medium, this protocol is independent. The OAM packets are processed only at the MAC layer, having no impact at other layers in the Ethernet. Moreover, as a low-rate protocol, the Ethernet OAM protocol occupies low bandwidth. Thus, this protocol does not affect services carried on the link. Compared with the traditional Ethernet maintenance and fault location, the features of Ethernet OAM are as follows: l l As a low rate protocol, the Ethernet OAM protocol uses very little network bandwidth. Hence, this function does not affect services transmitted by the link. You can perform the OAM on the services that are encapsulated in different formats by using the Ethernet OAM, which is irrelevant to the Ethernet encapsulation formats. You can perform the OAM, however, on only the services of the same encapsulation format by using traditional test frames. The current frame test method is based on only the encapsulation format where the data of the same type is contained. Thus, this test method is not applicable to other encapsulation formats (such as GFP encapsulation format and HDLC encapsulation format) where the data of different types is contained.
29-2
29 OAM Management
l l l
The current port loopback function focuses on all packets at the port. Thus, the loopback cannot be performed for a specific service selectively. Ethernet OAM can detect hardware faults. Ethernet OAM can detect and locate faults automatically.
The OptiX RTN equipment provides the Ethernet OAM solution based on the IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah protocols, as shown in Figure 29-1. Figure 29-1 Ethernet OAM solution
IEEE 802.3ah IEEE 802.1ag IEEE 802.3ah
Transmission Network
Client-side Ethernet Equipment RTN Equipment
IEEE 802.1ag OAM focuses on the maintenance of end-to-end Ethernet links. Based on services, IEEE 802.1ag OAM realizes the end-to-end check by detecting each maintenance domain successively. That is, it performs segmental management on each network segment that is involved in the same service in the network. IEEE 802.3ah OAM focuses on the point-to-point Ethernet link maintenance between two sets of directly-connected equipment in Ethernet in the first mile (EFM). IEEE 802.3ah OAM does not focus on the specific service. It maintains the Ethernet point-to-point link by performing OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, fault check, remote loopback and selfloop check.
29.1.2 Basic Concept

This topic describes certain basic concepts required for the application of Ethernet OAM features. 29.1.2.1 IEEE 802.1ag OAM Management IEEE 802.1ag OAM focuses on the maintenance of the end-to-end Ethernet links. By defining the maintenance domain (MD), maintenance association (MA), and maintenance point (MP), IEEE 802.1ag OAM can manage service flows by segment and by layer. 29.1.2.2 IEEE 802.1ag OAM Operation The Ethernet board supports the IEEE 802.1ag Ethernet OAM operations as follows: continuity check (CC), link trace (LT), loopback (LB), ping, alarm indication signal (AIS) activation, and performance check.
29 OAM Management
29.1.2.3 IEEE 802.3ah OAM Operations The Ethernet board supports the IEEE 802.3ah Ethernet OAM operations as follows: OAM autodiscovery, link event notification, error frame monitoring, remote loopback, and self-loop test.
29.1.2.1 IEEE 802.1ag OAM Management

IEEE 802.1ag OAM focuses on the maintenance of the end-to-end Ethernet links. By defining the maintenance domain (MD), maintenance association (MA), and maintenance point (MP), IEEE 802.1ag OAM can manage service flows by segment and by layer. As a protocol based on the MAC layer, the Ethernet service OAM detects Ethernet links by transmitting OAM packets. The OAM packets are processed at only the MAC layer. The Ethernet service OAM defines the following concepts. l l Maintenance domain (MD): The MD is a network that requires the OAM. Maintenance association (MA): The MA can be considered as a service-related domain, which consists of many maintenance end points (MEPs) and Maintenance intermediate points (MIPs). Maintenance point (MP): The MP include MEPs and MIPs. Maintenance end point (MEP): The MEP is the transmitting and terminating points of all OAM packets. It is relevant to services. In a network, the MA and MEP ID can uniquely determine an MEP. Maintenance intermediate point (MIP): For the non-standard protocol, the MIP can respond to and forward LB and LT packets, but can only forward CC packets. For the standard protocol, the MIP can forward CC and LB packets, but respond to and forward LT packets.
Maintenance Domain
In a network, the network segments focused on by users, service providers and operators are different. Thus, the management should be based on network segment to perform maintenance on network segments where a service passes through in the network. At the same time, different service traffics need be managed separately. IEEE 802.1ag OAM realizes the Ethernet maintenance by performing the end-to-end check based on the maintenance domain. For OAM, maintenance domain is the collection of all maintenance points (MP) in a service application. The MPs include the maintenance association end points (MEP) and maintenance association intermediate points (MIP). For the management segment to be maintained, establish MEPs at two ends and set the range of the maintenance domain. Moreover, establish MIPs at other positions in this management segment. Perform the operations on these maintenance points, including MEPs and MIPs. Based on relations and responses among these maintenance points, the state of the whole management segment is under control. In this way, the fault detection and location are realized.
Maintenance Association
An MA is a part of an MD. An MD can be divided into one MA or multiple MAs. In the network of a carrier, a VLAN is corresponding to a service instance. On the equipment, a VLAN is corresponding to an MA or multiple MAs. By dividing MAs, you can check the connectivity of the network that transmits a certain service instance and detect faults of the network.
29 OAM Management
The level of an MA is the same as the level of the MD to which the MA belongs.
Maintenance Point
The maintenance point (MP) refers to function entity of IEEE 802.1ag OAM, including the maintenance end point (MEP) and maintenance intermediate point (MIP). Each maintenance point has a maintenance point identification (MPID), and this ID is unique in the entire network. The information of each maintenance point is recorded in the MAC address table, maintenance point table and route table. The key contents contained in the MP configuration information are the service type, service ID and VLAN tag. In the case of nonstandard MP, once a maintenance point is created successfully, it transmits the protocol packets where the MP information is contained to the entire network periodically in the form of broadcasting. After receiving these protocol packets, other maintenance points record the information for backup. l Maintenance association End Points The MEP defines the start position of the maintenance domain. The MEP is the transmitting and terminating points of all OAM packets. It is relevant to services. In a network, the MA and MEP ID can uniquely determine an MEP. As shown in Figure 29-2, the MEP is always marked by an arrow. The direction of arrow indicates the direction of the MEP. An MEP has following features. It must allow all service packets to pass through the point, neglecting their directions. It must check all OAM message packets that pass through the MEP in the direction of the arrow. It allows the OAM message packets whose levels are higher than the level of this MEP layer to pass through the point directly without further check. It terminates all message packets whose levels are lower than or equals to the level of this MEP layer. It must check all OAM message packets that pass through this MEP in the reverse direction of the arrow. It allows the OAM message packets whose levels are higher than the level of this MEP layer to pass through the point directly without further check. It processes the OAM message packets that belong to this MEP layer. It terminates all message packets whose levels are lower than the level of this MEP layer. It generates the OAM message packets whose level is equal to the MEP level at this layer, and transmits these packets in the specified direction. l Maintenance association Intermediate Points As shown in Figure 29-2, the MIP is always marked by an ellipse. Moreover, the MIP has no direction. An MIP should have following features. It must allow all service packets to pass through this MIP. It must check all OAM message packets that pass through this MIP. It must allow the OAM message packets whose levels are higher than the level of this MEP layer to pass through the MIP.
29 OAM Management
According to some special operational codes or destination MAC addresses, choose one of the following processing methods. Transparent transmission Transparent transmission and processing Extract and process all OAM message packets that belong to this MIP layer According to some special operational codes, discard all OAM message packets whose level is lower than the level of this MIP layer.
NOTE
Only the MEP can initiate the OAM operations, while the MIP cannot initiate any OAM operation or send any OAM packet.
Layered Management
IEEE 802.1ag OAM adds the management level fields to OAM protocol packets. In this way, the layered management is realized. The higher management domain can cross the lower management domain, but the lower management domain cannot cross the higher management domain. Based on such layered management, the maintenance of a service traffic can be realized segmentally. Moreover, the management of different service traffics can be realized as well. Figure 29-2shows the logical diagram of the maintenance domain layer relation. Figure 29-2 Logical diagram of maintenance domain layers
CE a Operator A Provider Bridges b c Operator B Provider Bridges d e CE f
Customer ME Level Service Provider ME Level Operator ME Level
Physical ME Level Bridge with Bridge Ports Maintenance End Ports Maintenance Intermediate Points AIS Convergence Function Logical path of CFM Messages Maintenance Entities
Currently, the protocol supports the eight-layer division from layer 0 to layer 7. Eight maintenance entities (ME) levels correspond to the user, supplier or operator accordingly. l l
29-6
ME levels for the user: 7, 6, 5 ME levels for the supplier: 4, 3

29 OAM Management
ME levels for the operator: 2, 1, 0
Layer levels from the higher to the lower: user ME level > Supplier ME level > Operator ME level. The dashed lines in the diagram show the logic channels where IEEE 802.1ag OAM packets pass through. Methods for maintenance points at different layers to process OAM protocol packets are as follows. l l l For the OAM protocol packets whose level is higher, the maintenance point processes them transparently. For the OAM protocol packets whose level is lower, the maintenance point discards them directly. For the OAM protocol packets whose level is the same, the maintenance point gives response or ends the packets accordingly to messages types of the OAM protocol packets.
29.1.2.2 IEEE 802.1ag OAM Operation

The Ethernet board supports the IEEE 802.1ag Ethernet OAM operations as follows: continuity check (CC), link trace (LT), loopback (LB), ping, alarm indication signal (AIS) activation, and performance check.
Continuity Check
The connectivity between maintenance end points (MEPs) are detected through continuity check messages (CCMs) that are transmitted between MEPs periodically. This detection is named as continuity check (CC). You can check the link status in one direction by performing the CC. The application scenario is as follows: The link status is checked in real time. l l After receiving the CCM packets from the source MEP, the sink MEP directly enables the CC function that focuses on this source MEP. If the sink MEP fails to receive the CCM packets from the source MEP within a check period, the non-standard MP reports the EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS alarm automatically until the link is recovered, and the standard MP reports the ETH_CFM_LOS alarm. That is, the sink MEP does not clear the alarm until it receives the CCM packets from the sink MEP.
Loopback Test
The loopback (LB) can be used to test the state of any MP link from the source MEP to the maintenance domain. The application scenario is as follows: The location or check is performed on one end. l The loopback (LB) can be used to test the state of any node link from the source to the maintenance domain. For the non-standard MP, as the sink MP can be the MIP, the loopback can be used to locate the faults. Compared with the continuity test, the loopback test is not a continuous test. Thus, you need start the test manually each time.
Link Trace Test

Compared with the LB test, the link trace (LT) test provides enhanced fault locating capability. That is, the faulty network segment can be located the first time in the LT test.
29 OAM Management
The application scenario is as follows: The fault is located on site.
PING
OAM ping test provides the online test. By using this function, you can simulate the packet loss ratio and delay period of a service, which are caused by bit errors. Besides the continuity test, the OAM-Ping test further manages the performance of the Ethernet link at the MAC layer. The application scenario is as follows: The service performance is checked in real time. l The OMA_Ping test provides a method to test the in-service packet loss ratio and hold-off time that result from bit errors. Compared with the continuity test, the OAM_Ping test provides more detailed and accurate OAM information. In this case, the OAM not only ensures the service continuity, but also detects the packet loss and service delay to a greater extent.
AIS Activation
The alarm indication signal (AIS) is used to report errors to a superstratum node during Ethernet OAM. When the AIS is active, errors can be reported. If the AIS is inactive, errors cannot be reported.
Performance Check
After the connectivity between the MPs of the processing boards of Ethernet services is checked, the performance check realizes the on-line test of the packet loss ratio and delay time of the services.
29.1.2.3 IEEE 802.3ah OAM Operations

The Ethernet board supports the IEEE 802.3ah Ethernet OAM operations as follows: OAM autodiscovery, link event notification, error frame monitoring, remote loopback, and self-loop test.
OAM Auto-Discovery
By exchanging the information OAM protocol data unit (OAMPDU) periodically, the equipment at local end is informed that the opposite end supports the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol. The application scenario is as follows: OAM auto-discovery is a prerequisite to realize the link performance monitoring and remote loopback. The following functions are available at the port only when the OAM auto-discovery succeeds: link performance monitoring and loopback. If the OAM auto-discovery fails, the ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL alarm is reported.
Link Performance Monitoring

Link performance monitoring is used to monitor the bit error performance (error frames or error signals). When the local end detects that the bit errors cross the threshold, the bit error event is transmitted to the opposite end over the specified OAMPDU. In this case, the opposite end reports the alarm accordingly. To perform performance statistics from different aspects, the link performance monitoring is classified into bit error frame event monitoring, error frame second event monitoring, error frame period event monitoring.
29 OAM Management
Triggering condition of error frame events: Within a period of the error frame monitor window, the number of actually received error frames is larger than the configured threshold value.
NOTE
The period of the error frame monitor window indicates the time period for each error frame statistics.
Triggering condition of error frame second events: Within the specific seconds, the detected error frame seconds is larger than defined threshold value.
NOTE
When the error frame number is larger than 0 within a second, this second is called an error frame second.
Triggering condition of error frame period events: Among the received frames of a specific amount, the number of error frames is larger than defined threshold value. The link performance monitoring function is used to precisely analyze and monitor the link performance within a specific range. According to actual requirements, you can configure window values and threshold values of three link performance events respectively on the U2000. In this case, whether the link performance degrades to the threshold can be detected.
Application scenarios are as follows: l l
Remote Loopback
The OAM entity at the local end transmits the loopback control OAMPDU packets to the remote OAM for applying for the loopback. According to loopback data analysis, the fault locating and link performance test are performed. The IDU 620 do not support responding the remote loopback, the IDU 605 support responding the remote loopback. The application scenario is as follows: The loopback is a method to locate the faults and test the performance. Compare the number of transmitted packets with that of received packets in loopback. The result can be used to detect link performance and link faults in this link bidirectionally from the loopback initiation end to the loopback response end.
Self-Loop Test
After the self-loop test function is enabled on an Ethernet service processing board, you can detect the self-loop that occurs when the fiber in the transmit direction of a port is connected to the same port in the receive direction, and the intra-board loopback between two connected port on the same board. The application scenario is as follows: When the self-loop function is enabled at all ports on the equipment, the ring network that is available during the networking can be detected. Moreover, the ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP alarm is reported.
29.1.3 Availability
The ETH-OAM feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29-9
29 OAM Management
Table 29-1 Availability of the ETH-OAM Feature Applicable Board EMS6 EFP6 EM4T RTN 605 Applicable Equipment RTN 620
Table 29-2 Availability of the ETH-OAM Feature Applicable Board IFU2 IFX2 EM4T EM4F EM6T EM6F CSHA CSHB CSHC RTN 910 RTN 910/950 Applicable Equipment
29.1.4 Function Implementation

Ethernet OAM realizes different OAM operations through different OAM packets. 29.1.4.1 802.1ag OAM When the IEEE 802.1ag OAM protocol is used, OAM operations are realized through the exchange of OAMPDUs between MPs. 29.1.4.2 802.3ah OAM When the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol is used, OAM operations are realized through the exchange of OAMPDUs between the equipment at both ends of a link.
29.1.4.1 802.1ag OAM

When the IEEE 802.1ag OAM protocol is used, OAM operations are realized through the exchange of OAMPDUs between MPs. Figure 29-3 shows the IEEE 802.1ag OAMPDU.
29-10
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29 OAM Management
Figure 29-3 IEEE 802.1ag OAMPDU

OAM Mac Destination Address
OAM Mac Source Address Ether Type(VLAN) Ether Type(OAM) Type Length Service-ID VLAN Tag VER OAM Type
OAM Date
Frame Check Sequence
l l l l l
OAM Mac destination address: Indicates the MAC address of the destination MP. OAM Mac source address: Indicates the MAC address of the source MP. Ether type (VLAN): Indicates the Ethernet data type, such as 0x8100. VLAN tag: Indicates the VLAN value of the service traffic. Ether Type (OAM): Indicates the packet type of the ETH-OAM protocol. The standard IEEE The packet type of 802.1ag OAM protocol is 0x8902. The non-standard (Huawei, Draft 3.0)IEEE The packet type of 802.1ag OAM protocol is 0x8809. OAM type: Indicates that the MP differs and responds to various OAM operations according to types of OAM packets. OAM For mapping relation between values and OMA packet types, refer to Table 29-3. Table 29-3 Mapping relation between values and OMA packet types (non-standard MP) OAM Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OAMPDU Loopback message (LBM) Link trace message (LTM) Continuity check message (CCM) MAC query Loopback return (LBR) Link trace reply (LTR) MacAck MacBroadcast
Usage Loopback test Link trace test Continuity test MAC address query Loopback test Link trace test MAC address confirmation notification MAC address broadcast
29-11
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29 OAM Management
Continuity Check
The source MEP constructs the continuity check message (CCM) packets and transmits them periodically. After receiving the CCM packets from the source MEP, the sink MEP directly enables the CC function that focuses on this source MEP. If the sink MEP fails to receive the CCM packets from the source MEP within a check period, it reports the alarm automatically until the link is recovered. That is, the sink MEP does not clear the alarm until it receives the CCM packets from the sink MEP. As shown inFigure 29-4, the CC function of the MEP1 is enabled. The MEP1 transmits the CCM packets externally. After receiving the first CCM packet, the MEP2, MEP3 and MEP4 in the same maintenance domain start the timer respectively to receive all CCM packets from the MEP1 periodically. Once the link is faulty, the sink MEP fails to receive the CCM packets within a check period. In this case, the sink MEP reports the EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS alarm. The alarm is not cleared until the link is recovered. Figure 29-4 Continuity check diagram
MEP1
VB
MEP2 MEP4 VB VB MEP3
When the CC function is enabled at MEP1, MEP2, MEP3 and MEP4 at the same time, each MEP is both the source end and sink end for the CC function. In this way, the bidirectional continuity test is realized.
NOTE
Only the MEP can enable the continuity check and be the receive respond end for the check.
Loopback Test
Based on the bidirectional service, the loopback is a test performed manually at a time. The source MEP constructs the loopback message (LBM) packets and adds the destination MP (MIP or MEP) IDs to the packets. When the packets are transmitted, the timer is started. After receiving the LBM packets, the sink MP constructs the loopback return (LBR) packets and transmits them back to the source MEP. In this case, the loopback succeeds. If the source MEP timer expires and fails to receive the LBR from the sink MP, the loopback fails. As shown in Figure 29-5, the MEP1 transmits the LBM packets to the sink MEP2. After receiving the packets, the MIP2 and MIP3 in the same maintenance domain detect that the sink
29 OAM Management
MPIDs contained in the packets are different from those of them. In this case, the MIP2 and MIP3 transparently transmit the packets. After receiving the packets, the sink MEP2 transmits the LBR packets back to the source MEP1. At this moment, the loopback is complete. Figure 29-5 Loopback test diagram
MEP1
MIP2 LBM LBR
MIP3
MEP4
NOTE
For the non-standard IEEE 802.1ag OAM, only the MEP can initiate the loopback test, while both the MEP and MIP can be the receive end in the test.
Link Trace Test

The source MEP constructs the link trace message (LTM) packets and adds the ID of the sink MEP to the packets for transmission. At the same time, the timer is started. All MIPs that belong to this maintenance domain in the link continuously transmit the packets to the sink MEP. At the same time, a link trace replay (LTR) packet is transmitted back to the source MEP. After the sink MEP receives the LTM packets, the packet transmission is complete. Then the sink MEP transmits LTR packets back to the sink. In this case, the link trace test is successful. If the source MEP timer expires and fails to receive the LTR from the sink MEP, the loopback fails. Additionally, the parameter hop is added to the packet that is transmitted back. The hop is used to indicate the MP ID of the returned maintenance point in the link during the link trace test. If the first MP passed through the LTM is on the same board with the source MP, the hop starts from 0 and accumulates in the sequence. Otherwise, the hop starts from 1. The function of the link trace test is similar to the function of the loopback test. The difference lies in the response to the LBM frames. In the loopback test, only the sink MP responds to the LBM frames. In the link trace test, all MPs in the link respond to the LTM frames. According to these response messages, all MIPs that are involved from the source MEP to the destination MEP can be recognized, as shown in Figure 29-6.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29-13
29 OAM Management
Figure 29-6 Link trace test diagram
MEP1
1
MIP2
MIP3
MEP4 LTR
4
LTM LTR LTM LTR
LTM
1. 2. 3. 4.
The source MEP1 transmits the LTM packets to the destination MEP4. After receiving the LTM packets, the MIP2 transmits the LTR packets to the source MEP1 and forwards the LTM packets at the same time. After receiving the LTM packets, the MIP3 transmits the LTR packets to the source MEP1 and forwards the LTM packets at the same time. After receiving the LTM packets, the destination MEP4 concludes the LTM packets and transmits the LTR packets to the source MEP1.
NOTE
Only the MEP can initiate the link trace test and be the termination of the test.
OAM_Ping Test
The OAM_Ping test includes: l MPID-Ping: In the case that both the Ethernet service processing boards of Huawei equipment at two ends support the IEEE 802.1ag OAM protocol, the ping test is initiated from the maintenance point on the local Ethernet service processing board to that on the opposite board. IP-Ping: In the case that both the equipment at two ends supports the ARP protocol and ICMP protocol, only the Huawei equipment can initiate the ping test. Moreover, the Huawei equipment does not respond to the ping test of the opposite end.
The transmit end in OAM_Ping acquires the IP address of the maintenance point first, and then constructs the ARP packets and ICMP packets for transmission. The maintenance point that receives the ARP packets or ICMP packets analyzes the packets and then transmits the response packets back to the transmit end. After receiving the response packets, the OAM_Ping transmit end reports the test results of the OAM_Ping according to the information contained in the response packets. The results include the packet loss ratio and delay information.
29.1.4.2 802.3ah OAM

When the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol is used, OAM operations are realized through the exchange of OAMPDUs between the equipment at both ends of a link. Figure 29-7 shows IEEE 802.3ah OAMPDUs.
29 OAM Management
Figure 29-7 IEEE 802.3ah OAMPDU
Octets 6 6 2 1 2 1 42-1496 4
MAC Destination Address MAC Source Address Type Subtype Flags Field Code Data/Pad Field Frame Check Sequence
l l l l l
Mac Destination Address: Indicates the low-speed protocol multicast address whose value is fixed to 0x01-80-C2-00-00-02. Mac Source Address: Indicates the MAC address of the port. Type: Indicates the low-speed protocol type whose value is fixed to 0x8809. Subtype: Indicates that the specified type of the low-speed protocol is IEEE 802.3ah OAM, which is fixed to 0x03. Flags Filed: Includes some important state information such as link fault, dying gasp, critical event. The realization of the fault locating depends on the state information mentioned previously. Code: Identifies the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol packets of different types. The main packet types are information OAMPDU, event notification OAMPDU and loopback control OAMPDU. They are corresponding to OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring and remote loopback respectively. For the mapping relation between code values and OAM packet types, see Table 29-4. Table 29-4 Mapping relation between code values and OAM packet types Code 0x00 0x01 OAMPDU Information Event notification Usage Exchanges the OAM information at the local end and opposite end. Notifies the opposite equipment that bit error performance events occur on the link.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29-15
29 OAM Management
Code 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05-0x FD 0xFE
OAMPDU Variable request Variable response Loopback control Reserved Organization specific
Usage Applies for one or multiple specific MIB information. Responds to one or multiple specific MIB information. Enables or disables the remote OAM loopback. Reserved. Indicates the selective extended OAMPDU function used by different equipment manufacturers. Reserved.
0xFF l
Reserved
Data/Pad Field: Indicates the OAMPDU data whose fields can be extended, with a length range from 42 bytes to 1496 types. When the OAMPDU packet length is less than the minimum 64 bytes, the extended bytes are contained in the field. Frame check sequence
Auto-Discovery
As shown in Figure 29-8, the Code filed of the OAMPDU is 0x00. This indicates that the OAMPDU is the information OAMPDU and used for OAM auto-discovery.
29-16
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29 OAM Management
Figure 29-8 Packet format of the information OAMPDU

Octets 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 4 Fields Information Type Information Length OAM Version Revision State OAM Configuration OAMPDU Configuration OUI Vendor Specific Information Fixed Values 0x01 0x10 0x01
Octets 6 6 2 1 2 1
Fields Destination Address Source Address Length/Type Subtype Flags Code
Fixed Values 01-80-c2-00-00-02
88-09 0x03
LOCAL INFORMATION TLV
0x00
42-1496 Data/Pad 4 FCS
INFORMATION OAMPDU
1 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 4
Information Type Information Length OAM Version Revision State OAM Configuration OAMPDU Configuration OUI Vendor Specific Information
0x02 0x10 0x01
REMOTE INFORMATION TLV

1 1 1 2 Information Type Information Length OUI Organization Specific Value 0xFE
ORGANIZATION SPECIFIC INFORMATION TLV
The Data field of the information OAMPDU includes local information type-length-value (TLV) domain and remote information type-length-value (TLV) domain. A OAM configuration byte is contained in the TLV domain. When the link is normal, successful OAM auto-discovery depends on information of bit digits in the OAM configuration bytes. Also, the information of bit digits decides what functions are performed after OAM auto-discovery succeeds. Table 29-5 lists details of OAM configuration bytes.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29-17
29 OAM Management
Table 29-5 Details of OAM configuration bytes Bit Digit 7 to 5 Name Reserved Description Sets reserved bits to 0 when the OAMPDU is transmitted and ignores these bits in receiving. l Sets the value to 1, which indicates that the data terminal equipment (DTE) supports the transmission of the variable response OAMPDU. l Sets the value to 0, which indicates that the DTE does not support the transmission of the variable response OAMPDU. 3 Link Events l Sets the value to 1, which indicates that the DTE supports the monitoring on bit error performance (error frames or error signals) of links. When bit errors cross the threshold, the bit error event is transmitted to the opposite end over the specified OAMPDU. l Sets the value to 0, which indicates that the DTE does not support the monitoring on bit error performance of links.
Variable Retrieval
29-18
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29 OAM Management
Bit Digit 2
Name OAM Remote Loopback Support
Description l Sets the value to 1, which indicates that the DTE supports the loopback request of the remote end. When the loopback command is issued at the remote end, the local end transmits all packets back to the remote end for loopback, excluding OAMPDU packets. l Sets the value to 0, which indicates that the DTE does not support the remote loopback.
Unidirectional Support
l Sets the value to 1, which indicates that the local end can transmit the OAMPDU packets to the local end when the fault occurs in the receive direction. l Sets the value to 0, which indicates that the local end cannot transmit the OAMPDU packets to the local end when the route is faulty in the receive direction.
OAM Mode
l Sets the value to 1, which indicates that the OAM mode of the DTE is set to Active. l Sets the value to 0, which indicates that the OAM mode of the DTE is set to Passive. When the local end works in the passive mode, some OAM functions cannot be enabled. For details, see Table 29-6.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29-19
29 OAM Management
Table 29-6 Mapping relation between OAM working modes and OAM functions OAM Capability OAM Mode Active Mode Initiates OAM autodiscovery process Reacts to OAM autodiscovery process Required to send information OAMPDUs. Permitted to send event notification OAMPDUs Permitted to send variable request OAMPDUs Permitted to send variable response OAMPDUs Permitted to send loopback control OAMPDUs Reacts to loopback control OAMPDUs Permitted to send organization specific OAMPDUs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Passive Mode No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes
When the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol is enabled for the port on the Ethernet service processing board, the information OAMPDU is broadcast periodically. At the same time, the information OAMPDU from the opposite port is received and processed. In this way, two peer ends exchange the OAM information (including OAM configuration information and OAM state information) to establish the OAM connection between two ends.
Link Performance Monitoring

As shown in Figure 29-9 the Code filed of the OAMPDU is 0x01. This indicates that the OAMPDU is the event notification OAMPDU and used for notifying the bit error performance event mutually.
29-20
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29 OAM Management
Figure 29-9 Packet format of event notification OAMPDU

Octets 2 1 1 2 8 8 8 8 4 Fields Sequence Number SEQUENCE NUMBER Event Type Event Length Event Time Stamp Errored Svmbol Window Errored Svmbol Threshol Errored Svmbol Error Running Total Event Running Total Fixed Values
0x01 0x28
Octets 6 6 2 1 2 1
Fields Destination Address Source Address Length/Type Subtype Flags Code
Fixed Values 01-80-c2-00-00-02
88-09 0x03
ERRORED SYMBOL PERIOD EVENT 1 Event Type 0x02 1 Event Length 0x1A 2 Event Time Stamp 2 Errored Frame Window 4 Errored Frame Threshol 4 Errored Frames 8 Error Running Total 4 Event Running Total 1 1 2 4 4 4 8 4 ERRORED FRAME ENENT Event Type 0x03 Event Length 0x1 Event Time Stamp C Errored Frame Window Errored Frame Threshol Errored Frames Error Running Total Event Running Total
0x01
42-1496 Data/Pad 4 FCS
ENENT NOTIFICATION OAMPDU
ERRORED FRAME PERIOD EVENT 1 Event Type 0x04 1 Event Length 0x12 2 Event Time Stamp 2 Err.Fr.Sec.Sum.Window 2 Err.Fr.Sec.Sum.Threshol 2 Err.Fr.Sec.Summary 4 Error Running Total 4 Event Running Total ERRORED FRAME SECONDS SUMMARY 1 Event Type 0xF 1 Event Length E 3 OUI x Organization Specific Value ORGANIZATION SPECIFIC EVENT
To perform performance statistics from different aspects, the link performance monitoring is classified into bit error event monitoring, error frame second event monitoring, error frame period event monitoring. l Triggering condition of error frame events: Within a period of the error frame monitor window, the number of actually received error frames is larger than the configured threshold value.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29-21
29 OAM Management
l l
Triggering condition of error frame second events: Within the specific seconds, the detected error frame seconds is larger than defined threshold value. Triggering condition of error frame period events: Among the received frames of a specific amount, the number of error frames is larger than defined threshold value.
When the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol is enabled at a port, the protocol queries the RMON statistic count of the hardware chip periodically to acquire the information such as the number of accurate packets and the number of error packets. You can find out whether the preceding three performance events occur or not according to corresponding processing of these information. In the case that a performance event occurs, the opposite end is informed of this event over the event notification OAMPDU. After receiving the notification, the opposite equipment reports the ETHOAM_RMT_SD alarm for maintenance personnel to perform troubleshooting.
Remote Loopback
As shown in Figure 29-10, the code filed of the OAMPDU is 0x04. This indicates that the OAMPDU is the loopback control OAMPDU and used for the loopback test. Figure 29-10 Packet format of the loopback control OAMPDU
Octets 6 6 2 1 2 1 1+41 4 Fields Destination Address Source Address Length/Type Subtype Flags Code Data/Pad FCS 0x04 88-09 0x03 Octets 1 Fields Remote Loopback Command Fixed Values 0x01 Fixed Values 01-80-c2-00-00-02
ENABLE REMOTE LOOPBACK COMMAND

1 Remote Loopback Command 0x02
LOOPBACK CONTROL OAMPDU
DISABLE REMOTE LOOPBACK COMMAND
The loopback transmit end transmits the loopback control OAMPDU packets to the opposite end first. After receiving the packets, the opposite end checks whether it can respond to the remote loopback first. If it can respond to the remote loopback, the opposite end starts remote loopback and transmits a response packet back to the end that initiates the loopback at the same time. After receiving the response packets from the response end, the transmit end analyzes the packets to confirm that the opposite end is in the response loopback state. Then the transmit end starts the loopback. In this way, the whole process of loopback initiation is complete.
Self-Loop Test
The self-loop test is a function developed by Huawei on the basis of IEEE 802.3ah protocol.
29 OAM Management
The self-loop test packets are constructed as the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol packets, with a packet type of protocol reservation type 6. The first eight significant reserved bits in the flag fields are used to carry the ID of the transmit port. When the self-loop test is enabled at a port, the specified self-loop check packets are transmitted from the port. One packet is transmitted each second. When a port receives the self-loop check packets, it compares the source MAC address carried in the packets with its own MAC address. If the former MAC address is the same with the later, it indicates that the local port and the opposite port are located in the same Ethernet service processing board. At this moment, further compare IDs of two ports. If the IDs are the same, they are the same port actually. In this case, this indicates the port self-loop. If the IDs are different, it indicates the intra-board port self-loop.
29.1.5 Using the IEEE 802.1ag OAM

By using the IEEE 802.1ag OAM, you can maintain Ethernet services in an end-to-end manner. 29.1.5.1 Creating MDs A maintenance domain (MD) defines the scope and level of the Ethernet OAM. The MDs of different levels and scopes can provide differentiated OAM services to users. 29.1.5.2 Creating MAs A maintenance domain (MD) can be divided into several independent maintenance associations (MA). By creating MAs, operators can associate specific Ethernet services with the MAs for easy Ethernet OAM operation. 29.1.5.3 Creating MPs The functions of the IEEE 802.1ag OAM can be used only after MPs are created. 29.1.5.4 Performing a Continuity Check After the continuity check (CC) test, the unidirectional link status can be checked automatically and periodically. After the CC test is started at the source, if the link is fault, the source equipment reports the EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS(Huawei MP) or ETH_CFM_LOS(Standard MP) alarm. 29.1.5.5 Performing a Loopback Check During a loopback (LB) check, you can check the bidirectional connectivity between the source MEP and any MP in the same traffic stream. 29.1.5.6 Performing a Link Trace Check Based on the loopback (LB) test, the link trace (LT) test further improves the capability to locate faults. That is, the faulty network segment can be located through only one test. 29.1.5.7 Activating the AIS(RTN 600) After the maintenance point (MP) where the AIS is active detects a fault, the MP transmits the AIS packet to superstratum MP for the notification of the fault. 29.1.5.8 Performing a Ping Test(RTN 600) By using Layer 3 ARP and ICMP packets, the ping test checks the connectivity between the processing board of an Ethernet service and the data communications equipment, such as a switch and router, the packet loss ratio of a service, and the delay time. 29.1.5.9 Performing Performance Detection(RTN 600) After the connectivity between the MPs of the processing boards of Ethernet services is checked, the performance detection realizes the on-line test of the packet loss ratio and delay time of the services.
29 OAM Management
29.1.5.1 Creating MDs

A maintenance domain (MD) defines the scope and level of the Ethernet OAM. The MDs of different levels and scopes can provide differentiated OAM services to users.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The board that supports the creation of the MD must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 NEs: 1. 2. In the NE Explorer interface, select an NE, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAMfrom the Function Tree. In the right-hand pane, click OAM Configuration to display the OAM Configuration dialog box.
NOTE
In this user interface, you can maintain or delete OAM MDs.
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 NEs: 1. In the NE Explorer interface, select an NE, and choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Managementfrom the Function Tree.
Step 3 Click New and select Create MD from the drop-down list. Step 4 In the New Maintenance Domain dialog box displayed, configure the corresponding parameters. Step 5 ClickApply. Step 6 Click Close. ----End
29 OAM Management
29.1.5.2 Creating MAs

A maintenance domain (MD) can be divided into several independent maintenance associations (MA). By creating MAs, operators can associate specific Ethernet services with the MAs for easy Ethernet OAM operation.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Ethernet services must be already created. The MD must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 NEs: 1. 2. In the NE Explorer interface, select an NE, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAMfrom the Function Tree. Click OAM Configuration in the right window to display the OAM Configuration dialog box.
NOTE
In this user interface, you can create or delete OAM maintenance Association (MAs).
3.
Click New, select Create MA from the drop-down list.
4.
In the dialog box of New Maintenance Association displayed, configure the OAM parameters.
5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
ClickApply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation was successful. Click Close. In the NE Explorer, click NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Managementfrom the Function Tree. Click New. Select New Maintenance Association to display the New Maintenance Association dialog box. Set the parameters. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation was successful. Click Close.
----End
29 OAM Management
29.1.5.3 Creating MPs

The functions of the IEEE 802.1ag OAM can be used only after MPs are created.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet service must be created and activated. The MA and MD must be created before creating a stadard MP.
Precaution
In an OAM test, all maintenance points that are involved in the operating of the same service flow must be in the same maintenance domain. In an existing maintenance domain involved in the same service flow, creating a maintenance point of the same level or a higher level may damage the existing maintenance domain. As a result, the OAM test fails.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 NEs: 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree. Click New and the Create MP dialog box is displayed. Complete the information.
NOTE
l VLAN ID: Leave this field blank for PORT services. For PORT+VLAN services, set the VLAN ID of the services to be monitored. l Service Direction: Only MEPs have the directions.
3.
Optional: Click Advanced. In the dialog box displayed, set the corresponding parameters and click OK.
NOTE
If an MEP is created, you can choose whether to perform the following configuration. l Activate the CC and configure the sending period of the CC test. l Set the timeout time for the LB or LT test.
4.
Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close to finish the operation.
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 NEs: Creating a MEP Maintenance Point
NOTE
29 OAM Management
Ethernet OAM detects the connectivity of an channel based on the maintenance end points (MEP) at two ends of the channel. MEP is the source and sink of all the Ethernet OAM packets and it is the end point that forms the maintenance association (MA). After an MEP is successfully created, users can check the connectivity of a segment within an MA.
1. 2. 3.
In the NE Explorer, click NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click New. Select New MEP Point to display the New MEP Maintenance Point dialog box. Set the parameters.
NOTE
l Direction: Ingress indicates that packets are transported to the network side. Egress indicates that packets are transported to the user side. l CC Status: When it is set as Active, the link can be checked in a real-time manner.
4. 5.
Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation was successful. Click Close.
Step 3 In the case of RTN 900 NEs: Adding a Remote MEP of the MA
NOTE
This section describes how to add a remote maintenance end point (MEP) of the maintenance association (MA). When processing OAM packets, the remote MEP checks whether the OAM packets are transmitted by the MEP in the same MA.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
In the NE Explorer, click NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click OAM and choose Manage Remote MEP Point from the drop-down menu. The Manage Remote Maintenance Point dialog box is displayed. Click New and the Add Maintenance Association Remote Maintenance Point dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
----End
29.1.5.4 Performing a Continuity Check

After the continuity check (CC) test, the unidirectional link status can be checked automatically and periodically. After the CC test is started at the source, if the link is fault, the source equipment reports the EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS(Huawei MP) or ETH_CFM_LOS(Standard MP) alarm.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The MEP maintenance point must be created. Only the MEP can have the CC test enabled and work as the receiving and responding end in the test.
29 OAM Management
Context
l During the CC check, the source MEP constructs and transmits CC frames periodically. The destination MEP receives the CC frames and starts the CC check. If the destination MEP does not receive the CC frames from the source within a specified period of time (for example, 3.5 times the transmit period), the standard MP automatically reports the ETH_CFM_LOS alarm and the Huawei MP automatically reports the EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOC alarm.
Performing a CC check does not affect the service.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 NEs: 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, click an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree. Select the node that you want to monitor, click OAM Operation and select Activate CC. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
TIP
l Alternatively, you can select a node, right-click, and then choose Activate CC from the shortcut menu to start the CC test. l You can select a node, right-click, and then choose Inactivate CC from the shortcut menu to stop the CC test.
NOTE
Before you perform the check, set an appropriate CCM Sending Period (ms) as required.
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 NEs: 1. 2. 3. 4. In the NE Explorer, click NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Select Maintenance Domain, and select Maintenance Association. Select MEP Point. Click OAM and choose Activate CC from the drop-down menu, The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
----End
29.1.5.5 Performing a Loopback Check

During a loopback (LB) check, you can check the bidirectional connectivity between the source MEP and any MP in the same traffic stream.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The source and sink MEPs, and MIPs in the same maintenance domain must be created.
29 OAM Management
Only MEPs can initiate the LB test, and the MEP can work as the receive end in the test. For the non-standard protocol, the MIP also can work as the receive end in the test. The CC function must be enabled before the LB test can be performed on a standard MP.
Context
During the LB check, the source MEP constructs and transmits the LBM frames and starts the timer. If the destination MP receives the LBM frames, it sends the LBR frames back to the source MEP. This indicates that the loopback is successful. If the source MEP timer times out, it indicates that the loopback fails.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 NEs: 1. 2. 3. 4. In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree. Select the node that you want to monitor, click OAM Operation and select Start LB. The LB Test dialog box is displayed. Enter the LB test source maintenance point ID and sink maintenance point ID. Click Start LB and the check result is displayed.
TIP
Alternatively, you can select a node, right-click, and then choose Start LB from the shortcut menu to start the LB test.
NOTE
Before you perform the check, set an appropriate LB Timeout(ms) as required.
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 NEs: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. In the NE Explorer, click NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Select Maintenance Domain, and select Maintenance Association. Select MEP Point. Click OAM and choose Start LB from the drop-down menu. The LB Test dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters. Click Start Test. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. View the test result.
----End
29.1.5.6 Performing a Link Trace Check

Based on the loopback (LB) test, the link trace (LT) test further improves the capability to locate faults. That is, the faulty network segment can be located through only one test.
29 OAM Management
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The source and sink MEPs, and MIPs in the same maintenance domain must be created. Only MEPs can initiate the LT test and work as the termination point in the test. In the case of a standard MP, you must activate CC before LT check.
Context
l During the LT check, the source MEP constructs and transmits LTM frames and starts the timer. All the MPs that receive the LTM frames send the LTR frame response. According to the LTR frame response, you can verify all the MIPs that pass from the source MEP to the destination MEP.
Performing an LT check does not affect the service.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 NEs: 1. 2. 3. 4. In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree. Select the node that you want to monitor, click OAM Operation and select Start LT. The LT Test dialog box is displayed. Enter the LT test source maintenance point ID and sink maintenance point ID. Click Start LT and the check result is displayed.
TIP
Alternatively, you can select a node, right-click, and then choose Start LT from the shortcut menu to start the LT test.
NOTE
Before you perform the check, set an appropriate LT Timeout(ms) as required.
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 NEs: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In the NE Explorer, click NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Select Maintenance Domain, and select Maintenance Association. Select MEP Point. Click OAM and choose Start LT from the drop-down menu. The LT Test dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters. Click Start Test. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
29-30
29 OAM Management
6.
Click Close. View the test result.
----End
29.1.5.7 Activating the AIS(RTN 600)

After the maintenance point (MP) where the AIS is active detects a fault, the MP transmits the AIS packet to superstratum MP for the notification of the fault.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The source and sink MEPs and MIP must be created in the same maintenance domain (MD).
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the Ethernet board, choose the Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the function tree. Step 2 Select the node to be monitored. Double-click AIS Active State and then select Active or Deactive, or right-click the AIS Active State and then choose Active or Deactive from the shortcut menu. Step 3 Click Apply. ----End
29.1.5.8 Performing a Ping Test(RTN 600)

By using Layer 3 ARP and ICMP packets, the ping test checks the connectivity between the processing board of an Ethernet service and the data communications equipment, such as a switch and router, the packet loss ratio of a service, and the delay time.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The OAM maintenance node of a service must be created for an Ethernet board. The type of the maintenance node is MEP. The MEP where the ping test is initiated must be created on an external physical port. The tag attribute of the external physical port where the MEP resides must be Access.
Context
l l l The ping test can be initiated only from the Ethernet service processing board to the interconnected data communication equipment. The ping test is performed in the direction from the board to which the MEP belongs to the interconnected data communication equipment of the board. A legal IP address is allocated to the MEP, and the IP addresses of the MEP and the interconnected data communication equipment must be in the same network segment. By default, the IP address of an MP is 0.0.0.0. The IP address of an MP cannot be any of the following:
29 OAM Management
Zero address: 0.*.*.* Local loopback address: 127.*.*.* Multicast address: 224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255 Reserved address: 240.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255 Network address: *.*.*.0 Broadcast address: *.*.*.255 l Performing a ping test does not affect the service.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Click Query to query OAM information from the NE. Step 3 Select a node, click OAM Operation and select Start Ping. The Ping Test window is displayed.
TIP
To display the Ping Test window, you can also right-click a node and choose Start Ping from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 Set Send Mode. l Burst Mode, you need to set Frame Length, Timeout, and Ping Attempts. l If you select Continue Mode, you need to set Frame Length, and Timeout. Step 5 In the IP Address Configuration area, set Destination IP Address and Local IP Address.
NOTE
l The value entered in Local IP Address is the IP address of the local maintenance point. l Set legal IP addresses for Local IP Address and Destination IP Address and make sure that the two IP addresses in the same network segment.
Step 6 Click Start Ping and view the returned result in the Detail pane. ----End
29.1.5.9 Performing Performance Detection(RTN 600)

After the connectivity between the MPs of the processing boards of Ethernet services is checked, the performance detection realizes the on-line test of the packet loss ratio and delay time of the services.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The source and sink MEPs, and MIPs in the same maintenance domain must be created.
Context
l l
29-32
The source maintenance point that initiates a performance test must be an MEP. The sink maintenance point that responds to the performance test can be an MEP or MIP. Performing performance detection does not affect the service.
29 OAM Management
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Click Query to query OAM information from the NE. Step 3 Select a node, click OAM Operation and select Performance Detect. The Performance Detect window is displayed.
TIP
To display the Performance Detect window, you can also right-click a node and choose Performance Detect from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 Set Send Mode. l Burst Mode, you need to set Frame Length, Timeout, and Detect Attempts. l If you select Continue Mode, you need to set Frame Length, and Timeout. Step 5 In the Maintenance Point area, set Source MP ID and Destination MP ID. Step 6 Click Start Detect and view the returned result in the Detail pane. ----End
29.1.6 Using the IEEE 802.3ah OAM

By using the IEEE 802.1ag OAM, you can maintain the Ethernet link in a point-to-point manner. 29.1.6.1 Enabling the Auto-Discovery Function of OAM The IEEE 802.3ah OAM is realized based on the OAM auto-discovery. After the OAM autodiscovery succeeds, the equipment automatically monitors the fault and performance of the link. 29.1.6.2 Enabling the Link Event Notification After the link event notification is enabled on the local equipment, if the OAM detects a link fault and link performance event, the opposite equipment is informed. 29.1.6.3 Modifying the Parameters of the OAM Error Frame Monitoring Threshold The threshold for the OAM error frame monitoring is a standard for the OAM to detect the link performance. Usually, the default value is used. You can modify the value according to the situation of the link. 29.1.6.4 Performing the Remote Loopback After the Ethernet port on the local equipment sends data to the port on the interconnected equipment, the local end can request the opposite end to return the data. 29.1.6.5 Enabling the Self-Loop Detection (RTN 600) After enabling the self-loop detection on an Ethernet port, you can check the loopback of the port and the loopback between the port and other Ethernet ports on the board.
29.1.6.1 Enabling the Auto-Discovery Function of OAM

The IEEE 802.3ah OAM is realized based on the OAM auto-discovery. After the OAM autodiscovery succeeds, the equipment automatically monitors the fault and performance of the link.
Prerequisite
29 OAM Management
Context
The OAM auto-discovery is realized through the auto-negotiation between the local equipment and the opposite equipment. If the negotiation fails, the local equipment reports an alarm. After the OAM auto-discovery succeeds, the link performance is performed according to the error frame threshold. You can set the error frame threshold on the U2000. l The OAM mode includes the active mode and the passive mode. For two interconnected systems, the OAM mode of one system must be the active mode. Otherwise, the OAM auto-discovery fails. if the OAM modes of the two systems are both active modes, a link fault occurs, or one system fails to receive the OAM protocol message, an alarm is reported, indicating that the OAM auto-discovery fails.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 NEs, select an Ethernet board in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree. Click . Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 NEs, click the NE in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click .
Step 3 Click the OAM Parameter tab, Set OAM Working Mode. In the Enable OAM Protocol dropdown list, select Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click the Remote OAM Parameter tab. Click Query. ----End
29.1.6.2 Enabling the Link Event Notification

After the link event notification is enabled on the local equipment, if the OAM detects a link fault and link performance event, the opposite equipment is informed.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Make sure that the OAM auto-discovery succeeds.
29 OAM Management
Context
When the OAM auto-discovery succeeds at the two ends, the link fault detection and performance detection are automatically started. l l To report the detected link fault event to the opposite equipment, Remote Alarm Support for Link Event must be set to Enabled for the local equipment. To report the detected link fault event to the opposite equipment, the following operations must be performed for the local equipment. Set Remote Alarm Support for Link Event to Enabled. Set Error Frame Period Window (Frame) and Error Frame Monitor Threshold. l After Remote Alarm Support for Link Event is set to Enabled at the opposite port, if the opposite end detects link performance degradation, you can query the ETHOAM_RMT_SD alarm , which is reported on the local end, by using the U2000. Based on the alarm, you can determine the type of the link performance event. After Remote Alarm Support for Link Event is set to Enabled at the opposite port, if the opposite equipment detects a link fault event or encounters a fault that makes the equipment fail to be restored (such as a power failure), you can query the ET_RMT_CRIT_FAULT alarm, which is reported at the local end, by using the U2000. Based on the alarm, you can determine the fault type.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 NEs, select an Ethernet board in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM. Click .
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 NEs, click NE in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management. Click .
Step 3 Click the OAM Parameter tab. Set Remote Alarm Support for Link Event to Enabled.
29.1.6.3 Modifying the Parameters of the OAM Error Frame Monitoring Threshold
The threshold for the OAM error frame monitoring is a standard for the OAM to detect the link performance. Usually, the default value is used. You can modify the value according to the situation of the link.
Prerequisite
29 OAM Management
The IEEE 802.3ah OAM function must be enabled on the remote equipment.
Context
After the OAM auto-discovery succeeds, set Error Frame Period Window (Frame) and Error Frame Monitor Threshold, and set Remote Alarm Support for Link Event to Enabled for the local equipment. If the local equipment detects a link event in the receive direction, it informs the opposite equipment of the link event. If the remote alarm for the link event is also supported on the opposite end, the opposite equipment can also inform the local equipment of the link event that is detected on the side of the opposite end. Then, the ETHOAM_RMT_SD alarm is reported on the local end, prompting the maintenance personnel to handle the link event.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 NEs: 1. In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.
2. 3. 4.
Select a port and set the error frame monitoring parameters. Click Apply. A prompt appears indicating that the operation was successful. Click Close.
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 NEs: 1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab. Select a port and set the OAM parameters of the port.
NOTE
2.
l Error Frame Monitor Window: If the number of error frames on the link crosses the error frame monitor threshold in the specified error frame monitor time window, the performance event is reported. l Error Frame Period Window: If the number of error frames on the link crosses the error frame period monitor threshold in the error frame period monitor window, the performance event is reported. l Error Frame Second Window: If the number of error frame seconds on the link crosses the error frame second monitor threshold in the specified error frame second monitor time window, the performance event is reported. l Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Window: In a specified number of signals, if the number of error signals on the link crosses the defined threshold, the performance event is reported.
3.
Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation was successful. Click Close.
----End
29-36
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29 OAM Management
29.1.6.4 Performing the Remote Loopback

After the Ethernet port on the local equipment sends data to the port on the interconnected equipment, the local end can request the opposite end to return the data.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Make sure that the OAM auto-discovery succeeds. For the equipment where the loopback is initiated, OAM Working Mode must be set to Active. The equipment that responds to the loopback must have the capability of supporting the remote loopback.
Context
l l The IDU 620 do not support responding the remote loopback, and the IDU 605 support responding the remote loopback. If a port is capable of responding to loopbacks, it enters the Respond Loopback of Remote state and reports the loopback responding alarm when receiving the command of enabling the remote loopback function sent from the opposite OAM port. In this case, the equipment that initiates the loopback enters the initiate loopback at local state and reports the loopback initiating alarm. After the remote loopback function is enabled, normally, service packets, except the OAMPDU, are looped back at the remote end. After using the remote loopback function to complete the fault locating and the link performance detection, you should disable the remote loopback function at the end where the loopback is initiated and then restore the services. At this time, the alarm is automatically cleared.
l l
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 NEs: 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM. Click . Click OAM Parametertab. Select the port that needs to initiate a loopback, and choose Enable Remote Loopback from the drop-down list of OAM. Click Apply.
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 NEs: 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management. Click the Remote OAM Parameter tab. Select a port and click Query. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
----End
29 OAM Management
29.1.6.5 Enabling the Self-Loop Detection (RTN 600)

After enabling the self-loop detection on an Ethernet port, you can check the loopback of the port and the loopback between the port and other Ethernet ports on the board.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. All the external physical ports of the Ethernet service processing board are enabled.
Context
When the self-loop detection is enabled for an external physical port, if the self-loop situation occurs at the port, the ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP alarm is reported.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface. Click Step 2 Configure the external physical port. 1. 2. Select External Port. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Set Loop Detection to Enabled. .
3.
Click Apply.
----End
29.2 Configuring the MPLS OAM

You can configure the MPLS OAM. 29.2.1 Overview of the MPLS OAM Based on the MPLS OAM mechanism, you can effectively detect, confirm, and locate internal defects from the network of the MPLS layer. The equipment uses the OAM detection state to trigger the protection switching. As a result, fast fault detection and service protection can be realized. Thus, a carrier-class quality of service (QoS) in a packet transport network can be ensured. 29.2.2 Basic Concepts The basic concepts of MPLS OAM include CV/FFD, Ping and Traceroute. 29.2.3 Application of the MPLS OAM MPLS OAM provides end-to-end detection methods in the MPLS network.
29 OAM Management
29.2.4 Enabling the MPLS OAM of a Tunnel You need to enable the OAM function of the corresponding tunnel before performing the MPLS OAM operation. 29.2.5 Setting the MPLS OAM Parameters of a Tunnel Based on different MPLS OAM parameters, the MPLS OAM operation results are different. You need to set the MPLS OAM parameters before performing the MPLS OAM operation. 29.2.6 Starting the CV/FFD for a Tunnel You can test the unidirectional connectivity of a tunnel by performing a connectivity verification (CV)/fast failure detection (FFD). 29.2.7 Performing an LSP Ping Test You can check whether a label switch path (LSP) is successfully created by performing an LSP ping test. 29.2.8 Performing an LSP Traceroute Test You can locate the place where a fault occurs by performing an LSP traceroute test.
29.2.1 Overview of the MPLS OAM

Based on the MPLS OAM mechanism, you can effectively detect, confirm, and locate internal defects from the network of the MPLS layer. The equipment uses the OAM detection state to trigger the protection switching. As a result, fast fault detection and service protection can be realized. Thus, a carrier-class quality of service (QoS) in a packet transport network can be ensured.

The MPLS is a key carrying technology of the extended next generation network (NGN). This technology provides a QoS-ensured multi-service capability and introduces a unique network layer, which may cause some faults. Therefore, an MPLS network must have the OAM capability. The MPLS supports many layer 3 and layer 2 protocols, such as the IP, ATM, and Ethernet protocols. By providing an OAM mechanism independent of any upper layer or lower layer, the MPLS OAM supports the following features: l l l Provide the query based on requirements and the consecutive detection so that at any moment you can learn whether the monitored LSP has defects. Detect, analyze, and locate any defect that occurs, and notify the U2000 of the relevant information. Trigger a protection switching immediately after a defect or fault occurs on a link.

The MPLS OAM complies ITU-T Y.1711 and ITU-T Y.1731. l l ITU-T Y.1711 Operation & Maintenance mechanism for MPLS networks ITU-T Y.1731 OAM functions and mechanisms for Ethernet based networks

The basic concepts of MPLS OAM include CV/FFD, Ping and Traceroute.
29 OAM Management
CV/FFD
You can check the connectivity of a label switch path (LSP) by performing a connectivity verification (CV) or fast failure detection (FFD). The process of a CV is consistent with that of an FFD. The difference lies in that the CV transmits CV packets at the frequency of 1 frame per second and the frequency cannot be set, but the FFD transmits FFD packets at a frequency that can be self-defined. Figure 29-11 shows the process of a CV and an FFD. Figure 29-11 Connectivity check of the MPLS OAM
Transit LSR
CV/FFD CV/FFD
Ingress LSR
Egress LSR
BDI
BDI
Transit LSR
1. 2.
The ingress node transmits CV or FFD packets, and the transit node transparently transmits packets. The packets reach the egress node through the detected LSP. The egress node compares the received information fields, such as packet type, frequency, and TTSI, with the fields recorded in the local to check the correctness of the packets. It also performs statistics to the numbers of correct packets and incorrect packets during the detection period, which is 3s for a CV and three times as long as the transmission period for an FFD. In this way, the connectivity of an LSP is monitored in real time. When detecting a defect of the LSP, the egress node analyzes the defect type, and then transmits the backward defect indication (BDI) packets that carry the defect information to the ingress node through a reverse channel so that the ingress node can learn the defect status in time. If a protection group is correctly configured, the corresponding protection switching is also triggered.
3.
When configuring basic detection functions of the OAM, you can bind a reverse channel for the detected LSP. The reverse channel is an LSP that has opposite ingress and egress nodes to the detected LSP, or is a non-MPLS path that can connect to the ingress and egress nodes of the detected LSP. The reverse channel that carries BDI packets can be one of the following types: l l Dedicated reverse LSP: Each forward LSP has a corresponding reverse LSP. This method is relatively stable but may waste resources. Shared reverse LSP: Many forward LSPs share a reverse LSP. All LSPs return BDI packets through this reverse LSP. This method saves resources, but a congestion may occur on the reverse LSP when many forward LSPs have defects at the same time.
At present, only the dedicated reverse LSP is supported.
29-40
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29 OAM Management
Ping/Traceroute
In MPLS, if the LSP fails to forward data, the MPLS control plane responsible for constructing the tunnel cannot detect this fault. Thus, the network maintenance is difficult. The MPLS Ping/ Traceroute provides a mechanism for detecting the LSP faults and locating the invalid nodes in a timely manner. The MPLS Ping/Traceroute uses the MPLS Echo Request and MPLS Echo Reply to detect the usability of the LSP. The MPLS Echo Request carries the information of the forwarding equivalence class (FEC) for detection, which is transmitted along the LSP with other packets belonging to this FEC. In this way, the LSP is checked. l The MPLS Ping and Echo Request messages should reach the Egress node of the tunnel. Then, the control plane of the Egress node determines whether this node is the Egress of this FEC. Whether the LSP is successfully created can be checked by the MPLS Ping. The MPLS Traceroute and Echo Request messages should be transmitted to each Transit node. The control plane of the Transit node determines whether the local node is an intermediate node on this path. The location of the network fault can be determined through the Traceroute function.
29.2.3 Application of the MPLS OAM

MPLS OAM provides end-to-end detection methods in the MPLS network. MPLS OAM is mainly applied to the LSP of the core layer in the network. See Figure 29-12. Figure 29-12 Application scenarios of MPLS OAM
CE
CE
Access layer
Core layer OptiX RTN 950
Custom layer
LSP
OptiX RTN 910
Table 29-7 lists different application scenarios of the CV/FFD, Ping and Traceroute. Table 29-7 Application scenarios of MPLS OAM detection methods OAM Type CV/FFD Usage Unidirectional connectivity check
Application Scenario Real-time detection of the tunnel state

29-41
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29 OAM Management
OAM Type Ping Traceroute
Usage Unidirectional connectivity check Fault location
Application Scenario Fault location or detection at a single end Tunnel route detection
29.2.4 Enabling the MPLS OAM of a Tunnel

You need to enable the OAM function of the corresponding tunnel before performing the MPLS OAM operation.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. An MPLS tunnel must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the OAM Parameters tab. In the OAM Status area, click Enabled. Step 3 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 4 Click Close. ----End
29.2.5 Setting the MPLS OAM Parameters of a Tunnel

Based on different MPLS OAM parameters, the MPLS OAM operation results are different. You need to set the MPLS OAM parameters before performing the MPLS OAM operation.
Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. An MPLS tunnel must be created. You must enable the Tunnel OAM function.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the tunnel, click the OAM Parameters tab and set the parameters.
29-42
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
29 OAM Management
Note the following during parameter settings: l Detection Packet Period: When the Detection Packet Type is set to CV, the Detection Packet Period is 1 s and cannot be set. When the Detection Packet Type is set to FFD, the Detection Packet Period can be set. l Reverse Tunnel: Send the BDI packets that carry the defect information to the ingress node so that the ingress node can learn the defect status in time. l When the Tunnel Type is set to Egress, you can set the SD Threshold and SF Threshold. The SD Threshold is smaller than or equal to the SF Threshold.
Step 3 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Step 4 Click Close. ----End
29.2.6 Starting the CV/FFD for a Tunnel

You can test the unidirectional connectivity of a tunnel by performing a connectivity verification (CV)/fast failure detection (FFD).
Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. An MPLS tunnel must be created. You must enable the MPLS OAM function.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the OAM Parameters tab and select a tunnel. Click OAM Operation and choose Start CV/FFD from the drop-down menu. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
NOTE
When the Node Type of the tunnel is Ingress, the CV/FFD can be enabled.

29 OAM Management
29.2.7 Performing an LSP Ping Test

You can check whether a label switch path (LSP) is successfully created by performing an LSP ping test.
Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. An MPLS tunnel must be created. In the case of a static MPLS tunnel, enable the IS-IS protocol at both the source and sink ports of the MPLS tunnel, for details, see 20.2.2 Setting Port Attributes. Also, you can start a ping test at the local end and configure a static route on the opposite NE.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the OAM Parameters tab and select a tunnel. Click OAM Operation and choose Ping Test from the drop-down menu. The Ping Test dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
When the Node Type of the tunnel is Ingress, you can perform the ping test.
29-44
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29 OAM Management
Step 3 Set the parameters. Step 4 Click Start Test. View the ping test result. ----End
29.2.8 Performing an LSP Traceroute Test

You can locate the place where a fault occurs by performing an LSP traceroute test.
Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. An MPLS tunnel must be created. In the case of a static MPLS tunnel, enable the IS-IS protocol at both the source and sink ports of the MPLS tunnel. Also, you can start a ping test at the local end and configure a static route on the opposite NE.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the OAM Parameters tab and select a tunnel. Click OAM Operation and choose Traceroute Test from the drop-down menu. The Traceroute Test dialog box is displayed.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29-45
29 OAM Management
NOTE
To support the traceroute test, the Tunnel Type of the tunnel must be Ingress.
Step 3 Set the parameters. Step 4 Click Start Test and view the traceroute test result. ----End
29.3 Configuring the PW OAM

This section describes how to configure the PW OAM. 29.3.1 Overview of the PW OAM As an mechanism for maintaining and managing PWs, PW OAM detects the connectivity of PWs by using ping packets. 29.3.2 Basic Concepts The basic concept of the PW OAM is Ping. 29.3.3 Application of the PW OAM The PW OAM provides end-to-end detection at the PW layer. 29.3.4 Performing the PW Ping Test By performing the PW Ping test, you can check whether the PW runs normally.
29.3.1 Overview of the PW OAM

As an mechanism for maintaining and managing PWs, PW OAM detects the connectivity of PWs by using ping packets.

The OptiX RTN equipment encapsulates service packets into PWs and then transmits the services over a tunnel. On the RTN, there are two layers, that is, tunnel layer and PW layer. The MPLS tunnels can be maintained and managed by MPLS OAM. The PWs can be maintained and managed by PW OAM. Currently, the OptiX RTN equipment can detect the connectivity of a PW by using the PW packets and can report the detection result to the U2000. The local equipment encapsulates the ping packets into PWs and then transmits the packets over a tunnel. When receiving the over-tunnel packets, the opposite equipment decapsulates the packets, processes the packets, and responds to the packets. Then, the opposite equipment transmits the response packets back to the local equipment. In this manner, the local equipment determines the connectivity of the PW according to whether it can receive the response packets from the opposite equipment.

The PW OAM complies with the RFC 4379 Detecting MPLS Data Plane Failures.

The basic concept of the PW OAM is Ping.
29 OAM Management
Ping
PW Ping is a tool for manually checking the connection status of virtual circuits, which is similar to the LSP Ping. When the PW fails to forward data, the control plane that is responsible to create the PW cannot detect this fault. This makes the network maintenance difficult. PW Ping provides the mechanism of detecting faults of PWs to users. During the PW forwarding, the Ping packets are encapsulated into the PW at the ingress and are transmitted along the virtual circuit. Thus, the PW is checked.
29.3.3 Application of the PW OAM

The PW OAM provides end-to-end detection at the PW layer. The main detection method of the PW OAM is PW Ping, as shown in Figure 29-13. Between NE1 and NE2, a CES service that is carried by a PW exists. NE1 initiates the PW Ping test. You can view the test result and check the running status of the PW. Figure 29-13 Application scenario of the PW OAM
TDM E1 NodeB NE1
CES PW PW ping NE2
TDM E1 RNC
29.3.4 Performing the PW Ping Test

By performing the PW Ping test, you can check whether the PW runs normally.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The PW that carries services must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Right-click a PW and choose PW Ping Test from the shortcut menu. The Ping Test dialog box is displayed.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29-47
29 OAM Management
Step 3 Configure corresponding parameters.

NOTE
A PW can only initialize a Ping test at a time. The value of Packet length ranges from 64 to 1400. If the value is not within the range, the Ping fails.
Step 4 Click Start Test. View the Ping test result. ----End
29.4 Configuring ATM OAM

How to use the U2000 to configure ATM OAM is described. 29.4.1 Overview of the ATM OAM The ATM OAM is an end-to-end OAM function for services. It can detect the quality of an ATM link that transits multiple NEs. 29.4.2 Basic Concepts This section describes basic concepts about the ATM OAM. 29.4.3 Application of the ATM OAM ATM OAM includes two detection methods: CC and LB.
29 OAM Management
29.4.4 Setting Segment End Attribute You need to set the segment end attribute of the connection before performing ATM OAM maintenance. The segment end attributes determines how the port handles the OAM cell. 29.4.5 Setting the CC Activation Status You can perform continuity check (CC) on the ATM service to check the continuity of the service for troubleshooting. 29.4.6 Setting Remote Loopback Test You can perform remote loopback (LB) check on the ATM connection without interrupting the service. In this way, you can check the connectivity of the connection for troubleshooting. 29.4.7 Setting Local Loopback ID You must set the local loopback ID (LLID) for an NE before performing the loopback (LB) test on it.
29.4.1 Overview of the ATM OAM

The ATM OAM is an end-to-end OAM function for services. It can detect the quality of an ATM link that transits multiple NEs.
Objective and Benefits

As an OAM function based on the ATM layer, the ATM OAM supports the following functions: l l l Verify the connectivity of ATM services. Detect faults. Locate faults.

The ATM OAM complies with the ITU-T I.610 recommendations-B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions.

This section describes basic concepts about the ATM OAM. You can use the ATM OAM function to detect an ATM link by inserting OAM cells with standard cell structure into the user cell flow. In an ATM network, the OAM function is classified into five layers. See Table 29-8. Table 29-8 Classification of the OAM function layers Layer F1: regenerator section layer F2: digital section layer F3: transmission channel layer Description Physical layer OAM: The physical layer OAM flow depends on the transmission mechanism of a specific transmission system. An ATM network contains the following three types of transmission mechanisms: 1. SDH-based transmission system 2. Cell-based transmission system 3. PDH-based transmission system
29-49
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29 OAM Management
Layer F4: virtual path (VP) layer F5: virtual channel (VC) layer
Description ATM OAM: The ATM OAM is based on the VP/VC and independent of the transmission system.
At the ATM layer, the operation flows of F4 and F5 are defined. The F4 flow is an OAM cell flow in the virtual path connect (VPC) and provides the operation management and maintenance functions of the VP level. The F5 flow is an OAM cell flow in the virtual channel connect (VCC) and provides the operation management and maintenance functions of the VC level. After the OAM is activated at the F4 and F5, the specific OAM cell is inserted into user cells. As a result, the functions of continuity check (CC) and loopback (LB) check without service interruption are realized. The ATM OAM defines the following concepts: l l l l Endpoint: Only the OAM cells at the end can be terminated. Segment point: Only the OAM cells at the segment can be terminated. Segment and Endpoint: The OAM cells at the segment and end can be terminated. Non segment and Endpoint: The OAM cells are not terminated.
29.4.3 Application of the ATM OAM

ATM OAM includes two detection methods: CC and LB. As ATM OAM provides end-to-end detection methods for specific services. In the case of the UNIs-NNI ATM service, you can check the service connectivity between the UNI and the NNI. In the case of the UNI-UNI ATM service, you can check the service connectivity between the two UNIs.
CC
After the CC detection function at the source end and sink end is enabled, the source end regularly forms and sends CC cells. If the sink end fails to receive CC cells from the source end within seconds, it automatically reports the LOC alarm and inserts the corresponding AIS cells to the downstream.
LB
Perform the remote loopback (LB) detection. The source end forms and sends LB cells and enable the timer for timing. If the sink end receives the LB cells, it sends the cells back to the source end. If the source end detects the returned LB cells within the given time, the loopback succeeds; otherwise, the loopback fails. Table 29-9 lists different application scenarios of the CC and LB.
29-50
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29 OAM Management
Table 29-9 Application scenarios of ATM OAM detection methods OAM Type CC LB Usage Unidirectional connectivity check Bidirectional connectivity check Application Scenario Real-time detection of the link state Fault location or detection at a single end
29.4.4 Setting Segment End Attribute

You need to set the segment end attribute of the connection before performing ATM OAM maintenance. The segment end attributes determines how the port handles the OAM cell.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The ATM service must be created and activated.
Context
The segment end attribute of ATM CPs (Connection Points) contains Segment point and Non segment and Endpoint. The ways that the port handles the OAM cell in different segment end attributes are described as follows: l l l l If the segment end attribute is set to Endpoint, only the OAM cell at the end can be terminated. If the segment end attribute is set to Segment point, only the OAM cell at the segment can be terminated. If the segment end attribute is set to Segment and Endpoint, the OAM cells at the segment and end can be terminated. If the segment end attribute is set to Non segment and Endpoint, the OAM cell is not terminated.
CAUTION
You cannot set OAM segment endpoint or activate CC at the protection connection to which 1 +1 source or 1+1 sink protection group is applied. You cannot set segment end attribute at the connection that is added to a protection group.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explore, select the NE and choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management. Step 2 Set the Segment and End Attribute of the connection point.
29 OAM Management
29.4.5 Setting the CC Activation Status

You can perform continuity check (CC) on the ATM service to check the continuity of the service for troubleshooting.
Prerequisite
Context
After you activate the CC check at the source and sink ends of a service, the source ends periodically builds and sends a CC cell. If the sink end does not receive the CC cell from the source in 3-4 seconds, it automatically reports a CCLOS alarm and inserts an e-to-e_VP_AIS alarm to the downstream. seconds, it automatically reports LOC alarm and inserts the corresponding AIS cells to the downstream.
NOTE
When activating the CC, you need to activate the source and sink ends almost at the same time in a short period. You are recommended to activate the sink first and then the source. Otherwise, the NE may report timeout.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explore, select the NE and choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management. Click the CC Activation Status tab. Step 2 Set the CC Activate Flag of the port and the Segment and End Attribute of the CC cell.
NOTE
l Segment and End Attribute sets the segment end attribute of the CC cell. It corresponds to the segment end attribute of the port. The CC cell terminates at the port of the same segment attribute. l After the CC Activate Flag is activated, the CC check is started.
29-52
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
29 OAM Management
29.4.6 Setting Remote Loopback Test

You can perform remote loopback (LB) check on the ATM connection without interrupting the service. In this way, you can check the connectivity of the connection for troubleshooting.
Prerequisite
Segment end attribute must be set.
Context
During the remote loopback check, the source end builds a LB cell, sends the cell and starts the timer. If the sink end receives the LB cell, it sends the cell back to the source. If the source end detects the returned LB cell in a specified time, the loopback is successful. Otherwise, the loopback fails.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explore, select the NE and choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management. Click the Remote Loopback Test tab. Step 2 Set the Loopback PointLoopback Point NE and Segment and End Attribute.
Step 3 Click Test to start the remote loopback test. Step 4 Click Test Result to view the test result. ----End
29.4.7 Setting Local Loopback ID

You must set the local loopback ID (LLID) for an NE before performing the loopback (LB) test on it.
Prerequisite
29 OAM Management
Context
The LB test recognizes an NE by LLID, so the LLID must be unique in the network. After the LLID is set for an NE, the LLID value is sent to all the boards to keep consistency of LLID values on all the boards.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explore, select the NE and choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management. Click the LLID tab. Step 2 Set the Country Code, Network Code, and NE Code. Step 3 Click Apply and then click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
29-54
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
30 Configuring Link State Pass Through
30
Configuring Link State Pass Through
About This Chapter

The link state pass through (LPT) is used to detect the faults that occur at the service access node and in the intermediate transmission network. The LPT notifies the equipment at two ends in the transmission network of starting the backup network at the earliest time for communication, thus making sure the normal transmission of the important data. 30.1 Feature Description LPT is a service-based protection scheme, supporting the Ethernet line service of the point-topoint and point-to-multipoint. 30.2 Availability The LPT feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 30.3 Realization Principle LPT is realized by transmitting different packets that varies according to different types of faults. 30.4 LPT Configuration When enabling the LPT function for an Ethernet service, you need to configure the LPT port and the related information.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
30-1

LPT is a service-based protection scheme, supporting the Ethernet line service of the point-topoint and point-to-multipoint. The link state pass through (LPT) is used to detect and report the faults that occur at the service access node and in the intermediate transmission network. The LPT notifies the equipment at two ends in the transmission network of starting the backup network at the earliest time for communication, thus making sure the normal transmission of the important data.
LPT Application
As a link-based protection scheme, the LPT passes through states of the point-to-point link and point-to-multipoint link. In this way, the LPT makes sure the network level protection for the transmission of point-to-point private line services and for the transmission of the point-tomultipoint convergence services. l The following description is based on the point-to-point networking. Figure 30-1 shows the point-to-point networking.
Figure 30-1 Point-to-Point LPT networking diagram
Backup network
Service Network Router A Access NE1 Node Link 1 Working Link Protection Link
NE2
Access Node Link 2
Router B
In normal situations, data of router A and router B is exchanged over the network service equipment. In the diagram preceding, the network equipment refers to the Huawei OptiX RTN equipment, namely NE1 and NE2. When faults occur at the link between router A and router B, the communication between router A and router B is interrupted. For the important user, however, even when such fault occurs, the important data must be transmitted normally. Thus, the system must be able to detect and report faults at the earliest time and then start the backup network to make sure the communication.
When the LPT function is enabled, the OptiX equipment detects and reports the faults at the service access node and in the intermediate network. Then the data communication equipment such as routers switches to the backup network at the earliest time for communication, thus making sure the normal transmission of the important data. l The following description is based on the point-to-multipoint networking. Figure 30-2 shows the point-to-multipoint networking.
Figure 30-2 Point-to-Multipoint LPT networking diagram
Backup network
Port1 Port3 Service network NE2
Port2
Router B
Port1 Router A NE1
Port2 Port1
Port2 Port3 NE3 Backup network Router C
Protection link Working link
Router D
Normally, the data among router A, router B, router C and router D is transmitted through a server network. When the link between router A and NE1 becomes faulty, router A fails to communicate with router B, router C and router D. When the link fault occurs, the important data of VIP users must still be normally transmitted. Hence, the system should detect and notify the fault in time, and start the backup network to retain communication.
LPT Capability
When the LPT function is enabled, the notification interval is less than two seconds after the fault occurs.
LPT Bearer Mode

To meet a condition that the LPT frame can pass through different Layer 2 networks, the LPT is defined at Layer 2.5. In this case, the LPT can be carried by the medium access control (MAC) frame and generic framing procedure (GFP) management frame.
The LPT bearer mode varies with the different LPT packets. When the bearer mode of the received LPT packets is not consistent with that of the equipment at the receive end, the LPT packet is discarded.
30.2 Availability
The LPT feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 30-1 Availability of the LPT feature(RTN600) Feature Point-to-point LPT feature Point-to-multipoint LPT feature Applicable Board SL61EFT4VER.B SL61EMS6VER.B, EFP6 SL61EMS6VER.B, EFP6 Applicable Equipment RTN 610/620 RTN 620 RTN 620
Table 30-2 Availability of the LPT feature(RTN900) Applicable Board EM6T EM4F CSHA CSHB CSHC RTN 910 Applicable Equipment RTN 910/950

LPT is realized by transmitting different packets that varies according to different types of faults. 30.3.1 Point-to-Point Service(RTN 600) In the case of a point-to-point service, the LPT function is realized differently in the following two scenarios: the access point is faulty and the transmission network is faulty. 30.3.2 Point-to-Multipoint Service(RTN 600) In the case of a point-to-multipoint service, the LPT function is realized differently in the following two scenarios: the access point is faulty and the transmission network is faulty.
30.3.1 Point-to-Point Service(RTN 600)

In the case of a point-to-point service, the LPT function is realized differently in the following two scenarios: the access point is faulty and the transmission network is faulty.
Point-to-Point LPT Service Network Fault

l Fault locating
Access Node 1 Service Equipment A Broken Service Network Broken Service Equipment B Access Node 2
Both service equipment A and B detect that the service network is unavailable and then transmit the Broken packets to the opposite ends respectively. At the same time, equipment A and B cut the connection to local users.
NOTE
l If the service network fault is bidirectional, service equipment A and B can detect the fault in the service network. As a result, either of the two sets of the equipment can cut the connection between the local end and the user, and transmit the Broken packets to the opposite end at the same time. l If the service network fault is unidirectional, for example, if the link in the direction from service equipment A to B is faulty, only service equipment A can detect the service network fault. In this case, service equipment A cuts the connection between the local end and access node 1 and transmits the Broken packets to equipment B in the direction from equipment A to B over the service network where no fault occurs. After receiving the Broken packets, service equipment B cuts the connection between the local end and access node 2. In this way, the fault in the service network is detected. l According to different transmission modes, the Broken packets can be transmitted through specific GFP management frames or MAC frames.
Link restoration
Service Equipment A Non_ Broken Non_ Broken Service Equipment B
Access Node 1
Service Network
Access Node 2
Both service equipment A and B detects that the service network is recovered, and then notify the opposite end that the link is recovered by transmitting the Non_Broken packets respectively. At the same time, equipment A and B recover the connection with local users.
Service Equipment A Service Equipment B
Access Node 1
Service Network
Access Node 2
Service equipment A and B recovers the local link when any of the following condition is satisfied. 1. Equipment A and B receive the Non_Broken packets transmitted by the opposite ends respectively. 2. Timeout occurs for waiting the Broken frame.
Point-to-Point LPT Access Node Link Fault

l Fault locating
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
30-5
Disconnect the link and report the LPT_RFI alarm Service Equipment B Access Node 2
Report the link fault alarm Access Node 1 Service Equipment A
Service Network Broken
1.
Service equipment A detects that the link at the access node is faulty, and then reports the alarm of the fault that occurs at the local end. At the same time, equipment A transmits the Broken control frame to equipment B. After receiving the Broken control frame, service equipment B disconnects the local end and reports the LPT_RFI alarm at the same time. Link restoration
Clear the link fault alarm Service Network Service Equipment A Non_Broken Service Equipment B Recover the link Access Node 2
2. l
Access Node 1
1. 2.
Service equipment A detects that the link at the access node is recovered, and then transmits the Non_Broken control frame to service equipment B. After receiving the Non_Broken control frame, service equipment B recovers the connection at the local end.
30.3.2 Point-to-Multipoint Service(RTN 600)

In the case of a point-to-multipoint service, the LPT function is realized differently in the following two scenarios: the access point is faulty and the transmission network is faulty.
Context
The point-to-multipoint LPT function processes faults in unidirectional service network and bidirectional service network by using the same means.
Point-to-Multipoint LPT Service Network Fault

l Fault locating
Disconnect the link and report the LPT_RFI alarm Broken Service Equipment B Access Node 1
Disconnect the link and report the LPT_RFI alarm Convergence Node Service Equipment A
Broken
Disconnect the link and report the LPT_RFI alarm Service Access Equipment Node 2 C
30-6
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
The bidirectional fault occurs in the service network between service equipment A and B. In this case, equipment A and B cut the local connections respectively and report the LPT_RFI alarms. At the same time, equipment A transmits the Broken packets to equipment C. In this case, service equipment C cuts the local connection and reports the LPT_RFI alarm. l Link restoration
Recover the link and clear the LPT_RFI alarm Service Access Equipment Node 1 B Recover the link and clear the LPT_RFI alarm Service Access Equipment Node 2 C
Recover the link and clear the LPT_RFI alarm Convergence Node Service Equipment A
Non_Broken
Non_Broken
The bidirectional fault is cleared in the service network between service equipment A and B. In this case, equipment A and B recovers the local connections respectively and report the clearance of the LPT_RFI alarms. At the same time, equipment A transmits the Non-Broken packets to equipment C. In this case, service equipment C recovers the connection to the local end and then reports the clearance of the LPT_RFI alarm.
Point-to-Multipoint LPT Access Node Link Fault at the Convergence Node Side
l Fault locating
Disconnect the link and report the LPT_RFI alarm Report the link fault alarm Convergence Node Broken Service Equipment A Broken Service Equipment B Access Node 1
Disconnect the link and report the LPT_RFI alarm Service Access Equipment Node 2 C
Service Equipment A that connects to the convergence node detects that the link at the access node is faulty, and then reports the alarm of the fault that occurs at the local end. At the same time, service equipment A transmits Broken packets to service equipment B and C. After receiving the packets, equipment B and C disconnect the local end. In this case, equipment B and C report the LPT_RFI alarms. l Link restoration
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
30-7
Recover the link
Non_Broken Clear the link fault alarm Service Convergence Equipment Node A Non_Broken
Service Equipment B
Access Node 1
Service Equipment C
Recover the link
Access Node 2
Service Equipment A that connects to the convergence node detects the link restoration at the access nod, and then reports the clearance of the local fault alarm. At the same time, service equipment A transmits Non-Broken packets to service equipment B and C. After receiving the packets, equipment B and C recover the connections to the local end. In this case, equipment B and C report the clearance of LPT_RFI alarms.
Point-to-Multipoint LPT Access Node Link Fault at the Access Node Side
l Scenario 1 Fault locating
Disconnect the link and report the LPT_RFI alarm Convergence Node Service Equipment B Report the link fault alarm Access Node 1
Broken Service Equipment A Broken
Service Equipment C
Report the link fault alarm Access Node 2
1.
Service equipment B that connects to access node 1 detects that the link at the access node is faulty, and then reports the alarm of the local access node fault. At the same time, equipment B transmits the Broken packets to service equipment A. After receiving the packets, equipment A reports the LPT_RFI alarm and transmits the Broken packets to equipment C at the same time. In this case, service equipment C disconnects the local end and reports the LPT_RFI alarm.
2. 3.
Link restoration
Service Equipment B Clear the link fault alarm Access Node 1
Convergence Node
Recover the link
Non_Broken Service Equipment A Non_Broken
Service Equipment C
Recover the link
Access Node 2
30-8
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
1.
Service equipment B that connects to access node 1 detects that the link at the access node is restored, and then reports the clearance of the local fault alarm. At the same time, equipment B transmits the Non-Broken packets to service equipment A. After receiving the packets, equipment A recovers the connection to the local end and then reports the clearance of the LPT_RFI alarm. At the same time, equipment A transmits the Broken packets to equipment C. In this case, service equipment C recovers the connection to the local end and then reports the clearance of the LPT_RFI alarm.
2.
3. l
Scenario 2 Fault locating

Disconnect the link and report the LPT_RFI alarm Convergence Node Service Equipment A Broken Service Equipment B Access Node 1 Report the link fault alarm Access Node 2
Service Equipment C
Access Node 3
Service equipment C that connects to access node 2 detects that the link at the access node is faulty, and then reports the alarm of the fault that occurs at the local end. At the same time, equipment C transmits the Broken packets to service equipment A. In this case, service equipment A disconnects the local end and reports the LPT_RFI alarm.
Disconnect the link and report the LPT_RFI alarm Broken Convergenc e Node Service Equipment A Broken_Ack Service Equipment C Disconnect the link and report the LPT_RFI alarm Service Equipment B Access Node 1
Access Node 2
Access Node 3
After receiving the Broken packets where the response confirmation frame is contained, service equipment A transmits the Broken packets to service equipment B. After receiving the Broken_Ack packets, service equipment C disconnects the access node 3 and reports the LPT_RFI alarm. After recovering the Broken packets from equipment A, service equipment B disconnects the local end and reports the LPT_RFI alarm. Link restoration
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
30-9

Recover the link and clear the LPT_RFI alarm Convergence Node
Service Equipment B Service Equipment A Non_Broken Service Equipment C Recover the link
Access Node 1
Access Node 2
Access Node 3
Service Equipment C that connects to the access node 2 detects the link at the access node is restored, and then reports the clearance of the fault alarm at the local end. At the same time, service equipment C transmits Non-Broken packets to service equipment A. After receiving the packets, equipment A recovers the local connection and reports the clearance of the LPT_RFI alarm.
Recover the link and clear the LPT_RFI alarm Access Node 1
Non_Broken Convergence Node Service Equipment A Non_Broken_Ack
Service Equipment B
Service Equipment C Recover the link and clear the LPT_RFI alarm
Access Node 2
Access Node 3
After receiving the Non_Broken packets where the response confirmation frame is contained, service equipment A transmits the Non_Broken packets to service equipment B. After receiving the Non_Broken_Ack packets, service equipment C recovers the connection to access node 3 and reports the clearance of the LPT_RFI alarm. After recovering the Non_Broken packets from equipment A, service equipment B disconnects the local end and reports the clearance of the LPT_RFI alarm.
30.4 LPT Configuration

When enabling the LPT function for an Ethernet service, you need to configure the LPT port and the related information.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet data board supports the LPT function. The port-based Ethernet private line service must be created and activated. The data service is configured as the pure transparent service.
Precautions
NOTE
l Point-to-point LPT and point-to-multipoint LPT are mutually exclusive. On one board, you can select only one configuration mode to realize the LPT function. l The data service of the point-to-point LPT is configured as the pure transparent service.
CAUTION
Before configuring the point-to-multipoint LPT function, make sure that the following two conditions are met. Otherwise, the services may be interrupted. l l The data services are displayed in the tree topology. The data service topology is consistent with that of the LPT.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 NEs. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the Function Tree. Optional: Configuring Point-to-Point LPT. a. b. Click Query. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Select a PORT and a VCTRUNK port, and then set the following parameters. For parameters of the point-to-point LPT, see Table 30-3.
NOTE
If LPT is enabled, you can set Port-Type Port Hold-Off Time(ms) and VCTRUNK Port Hold-Off Time(ms) as required.
c. d. e. 3.
Click Apply and a prompt appears telling you the operation was successful. Click Close. Repeat Steps 1 through 2 to configure point-to-point LPT for the opposite NE.
Optional: Configuring Point-to-Multipoint LPT. a. b. c. Click PtoMP LPT. In the LPT Management window, click New. In the Create LPT window, select Port from the Convergence Point pane, and set Hold-Off Time(ms).
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
30-11
NOTE
If the port at the convergence point is a VCTRUNK port, you need to set Bearer Mode.
d.
In the Access Point pane, select an appropriate Port and click . Doubleclick Bearer Mode and select an appropriate bearer mode from the drop-down list.For parameters of the point-to-multipoint LPT, see Table 30-4.
NOTE
l If the port at the convergence point is not a VCTRUNK port, do not set Bearer Mode. l If you want to modify Bearer Mode, you can modify it in the Modify LPT window.
e. f. 1. 2. 3.
Click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. Repeat Steps 1 and Steps 3 to configure point-to-multipoint LPT for other NEs.
Step 2 In the case of RTN 900 NEs. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > LPT Management from the Function Tree. Click New. The dialog box is displayed. In the dialog box, set related parameters.
NOTE
l One port should belong to only one LPT group. l Multiple ports can be selected as access ports. l You can select multiple IF boards to configure a LPT group.
4.
Click Apply.
----End
30-12
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Parameter
Table 30-3 Parameter of the Point-to-Point LPT(RTN600) Field Port Value For example: PORT1 For example: VCTRU NK1 Positive, Reverse Default Description The external port of board.
VCTRUNK Port
The VCTRUNK port where EPL services are transparently transmitted. The direction of the EPL services that are transparently transmitted. The direction is Positive if the source port is a PORT port and the sink port is a VCTRUNK port. The direction is Reverse if the source port is a VCTRUNK port and the sink port is a PORT port.
Direction
LPT Bearer Mode
Yes, No GFP (HUAW EI), Ethernet 0 to 10000
No GFP(HUAWEI)
Sets whether to use LPT. This parameter is valid only when the LPT occurs. The bearer mode of LPT frames.
Port-Type Port Hold-Off Time (ms)
100
This parameter is valid only when the LPT occurs. When the LPT switching is enabled, the port informs the opposite end after the hold-off time.
VCTRUNK Port Hold-Off Time (ms)
0 to 10000
100
This parameter is valid only when the LPT occurs. When the LPT switching is enabled, the port informs the opposite end after the hold-off time.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
30-13
Table 30-4 Parameter of the Point-to-Multipoint LPT(RTN600) Field Convergence Point Port Value PORT1 to PORT6, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8 GFP (HUAWEI), Ethernet Default PORT1 Description The port where the convergence point resides. The bearer mode of the port where the access point resides. This parameter can be edited only when it is supported by a board. Hold-Off Time (ms) 0 to 10000 0 If LPT switching is enabled, the port notifies the opposite end after the holdoff time. The port where the access point resides. The bearer mode of the port where the access point resides. This parameter can be edited only when it is supported by a board.
Bearer Mode
GFP (HUAWEI)
Access Point
Port
PORT1 to PORT6, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8 GFP (HUAWEI), Ethernet
Bearer Mode
GFP (HUAWEI)
Table 30-5 Parameter of the LPT(RTN900) Field Board Value For example: 7EM4F-EM4F Default Description Sets the convergence board and access board to configure the LPT.
30-14
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Field Port
Value For example: 1 (PORT-1)
Default -
Description Sets the convergence port and access port to configure the LPT.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
30-15
31 Configuring Remote Monitoring Feature
31
Configuring Remote Monitoring Feature
About This Chapter

The remote monitoring (RMON) feature is used to monitor the data traffic on a network segment or on an entire network. Currently, the RMON standard is one of the most widely applied network management standards. 31.1 Feature Description The RMON feature is based on the management information base (MIB) in the architecture of the simple network management protocol (SNMP). Through the RMON function, you can monitor the performance of the Ethernet port as you monitor the performance of the SDH/PDH port. 31.2 Basic Concepts This topic describes the basic concepts that you need to be familiar with before you use the RMON feature. 31.3 Availability The RMON feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 31.4 Realization Principle The RMON agent is embedded in an Ethernet board. The Web LCT server or U2000 server functions as the NMS. The NMS exchanges data information with the agent through basic SNMP commands. Thus, the statistical network data is collected. 31.5 Configuration Guide The RMON function need not be configured and can be directly used.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
31-1

The RMON feature is based on the management information base (MIB) in the architecture of the simple network management protocol (SNMP). Through the RMON function, you can monitor the performance of the Ethernet port as you monitor the performance of the SDH/PDH port. In the case of the Ethernet port of the transmission product, the port performance needs to be measured and the port data needs to be managed. Therefore, the RMON should provide the following functions: l l l l Storage of statistical data at the agent end; offline operations on the network management station (NMS) History data storage This facilitates fault diagnosis. Error detection and reporting Multiple management stations
To implement the preceding functions, the RMON defines a series of statistical formats and functions to realize the data exchange between the control stations and detection stations that comply with the RMON standards, and thus to implement management on the Ethernet port. The RMON provides flexible detection modes and control mechanisms to meet the requirements of different networks. Furthermore, the RMON provides the function of error diagnosis of the entire network, and the functions of planning and receiving of the performance events. The RMON complies with RFC 1757 and RFC 2819.
31.2 Basic Concepts

This topic describes the basic concepts that you need to be familiar with before you use the RMON feature. 31.2.1 SNMP Currently, the SNMP is the most widely used network management protocol in the network. The SNMP is used to ensure transport of the management information between any two nodes in the network. This facilitates the network administrator to retrieve information, modify information, locate a fault, diagnose a fault, plan capacity, and generate a report on any node in the network. 31.2.2 RMON Management Groups The Ethernet board provides the following RMON management groups specified in IETF RFC2819: statistics group, history group, alarm group, and history control group. 31.2.3 List of RMON Alarm Entries and RMON Performance Entries The RMON alarm entries and RMON performance entries supported by the Ethernet service processing board comply with RFC2819.
31.2.1 SNMP
Currently, the SNMP is the most widely used network management protocol in the network. The SNMP is used to ensure transport of the management information between any two nodes
in the network. This facilitates the network administrator to retrieve information, modify information, locate a fault, diagnose a fault, plan capacity, and generate a report on any node in the network.
Architecture of the SNMP

The SNMP is divided into the network management station (NMS) and the agent. l NMS The NMS is a workstation where the client program runs. When the RMON function is used, the Web LCT or U2000 server functions as the NMS. l Agent The agent is the server software that runs on the network equipment. When the RMON function is used, the agent is embedded in the Ethernet board. The NMS can send the GetRequest, GetNextRequest, or SetRequest packet to the agent. After receiving such a request packet, the agent reads or writes the packet according to the type of the packet, generates the Response packet, and sends the Response packet to the NMS. When an exception occurs in the equipment or the state of the equipment changes (for example, the equipment restarts), the agent sends the Trap packet to the NMS and reports the event to the NMS. The transmission of SNMP packets is based on the connectionless transport layer UDP. Hence, the OptiX RTN 600 can be connected to a wide variety of equipment without a block.
MIB
In SNMP packets, managed variables are used to describe the managed objects in the equipment. The SNMP uses the architecture naming solution to uniquely identify each managed object in the equipment. The overall architecture is like a tree. The nodes on the tree indicate the managed objects. Each node can be uniquely identified by a path starting from the root. The MIB is used to describe the architecture of the tree and is the collection of the definitions of the standard variables of the monitored network equipment. The RMON is a common MIB defined according to IETF RFC2819.
31.2.2 RMON Management Groups

The Ethernet board provides the following RMON management groups specified in IETF RFC2819: statistics group, history group, alarm group, and history control group.
Statistics Group
The statistics group counts the absolute performance values from the time the statistics group is created until the current time. The Ethernet board supports port-based statistics groups. In the case of a board, you can create a statistics group for only one port. The sampling interval of a statistics group can be set. The value range of the sampling interval is from 1 second to 100 seconds.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
31-3
Alarm Group
The alarm group monitors the specified alarm objects (for example, the performance data of ports). When the value of the monitored data crosses the configured threshold, an alarm event is generated. The Ethernet board supports port-based alarm groups. You can create only one alarm group for a board. The number of alarm entries in an alarm group must not exceed ten. You can set the following items to which the alarm object corresponds: monitored object, sampling interval, report mode (report in case of upper threshold-crossing, report in case of lower thresholdcrossing, report all), upper threshold, and lower threshold.
History Control Group

The history control group specifies the methods of monitoring history performance data. The Ethernet board periodically collects the required statistical network information and temporarily stores the information in the board according to the attributes of the history control group. The history control group has the following attributes: l History table type You can set the history table type to 30-second, 30-minute, custom period 1, or custom period 2. In the case of a custom period, you need to manually set the required sampling interval. l Monitored object This specifies the port on which performance data is collected. You can set monitored objects for each history table type. l Number of items This specifies the number of history performance data entries that are stored in the Ethernet board. Because the history performance data is stored in the wrap mode, the stored data is the latest history performance data. For example, if the number of items is set to 10, the Ethernet board stores the latest ten history performance data entries. You can set the number of items for each history table type. The number of items can be set to 50 at most.
History Group
The history group specifies the methods of querying history performance data. The Ethernet board filters the history performance data stored in the board according to the attributes of the history group and returns the history performance data that meets the filtering conditions. The history group has the following attributes: l History table type This specifies the sampling period to which the history performance data corresponds. You can set the history table type to 30-second, 30-minute, custom period 1, or custom period 2. l l Monitored object This specifies the port to which the history performance data corresponds. Performance entry This specifies the performance entries to which the history performance data corresponds. The list of performance entries is the same as the list of performance entries that can be added into a statistics group.
Query conditions This specifies the relative time to which the history performance data corresponds. 1 represents the oldest item. You can query a maximum of ten entries at a time.
31.2.3 List of RMON Alarm Entries and RMON Performance Entries

The RMON alarm entries and RMON performance entries supported by the Ethernet service processing board comply with RFC2819. Table 31-1 List of RMON alarm entries Alarm Name DropEvent UndersizePkts OversizePkts Fragments Jabbers FCSErrors Description The total number of events in which packets are dropped crosses a threshold. The number of undersized packets crosses a threshold. The number of oversized packets crosses a threshold. The number of fragments crosses a threshold. The number of jabbers crosses a threshold. The number of the packets with FCS errors crosses a threshold.
Table 31-2 List of RMON performance entries Category of Performance Entries Basic performance Name of a Performance Entry
Packets received (64 octets in length) (packets/second) Packets received (65-127 octets in length) (packets/second) Packets received (128-255 octets in length) (packets/second) Packets received (256-511 octets in length) (packets/second) Packets received (512-1023 octets in length) (packets/second) Packets received (1024-1518 octets in length) (packets/second) Drop events (times/second) Multicast packets received (packets/second) Broadcast packets received (packets/second) Undersized packets received (packets/second) Oversized packets received (packets/second)
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
31-5
Category of Performance Entries
Name of a Performance Entry
Fragments (packets/second) Jabbers (packets/second) Octets received (bytes/second) Packets received (packets/second) Extended performance Packets transmitted (64 octets in length) (packets/second) Packets transmitted (65-127 octets in length) (packets/second) Packets transmitted (128-255 octets in length) (packets/second) Packets transmitted (256-511 octets in length) (packets/second) Packets transmitted (512-1023 octets in length) (packets/second) Packets transmitted (1024-1518 octets in length) (packets/second) Unicast packets received (packets/second) Unicast packets transmitted (packets/second) Multicast packets transmitted (packets/second) Broadcast packets transmitted (packets/second) Pause frames received (frames/second) Pause frames transmitted (frames/second) FCS errors (frames/second) Packets received and transmitted (64 octets in length) (packets/ second) Packets received and transmitted (65-127 octets in length) (packets/ second) Packets received and transmitted (128-255 octets in length) (packets/ second) Packets received and transmitted (256-511 octets in length) (packets/ second) Packets received and transmitted (512-1023 octets in length) (packets/second) Packets received and transmitted (1024-1518 octets in length) (packets/second) Good full frame speed received (bytes/second) Good full frame speed transmitted (bytes/second)
31-6
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Category of Performance Entries
Name of a Performance Entry
Good full frame octets received (bytes/second) Good full frame octets transmitted (bytes/second) Control frames received (frames/second) Packets transmitted (packets/second) Octets transmitted (bytes/second) VCG performance Octets received (bytes/second) Octets transmitted (bytes/second) Packets received (packets/second) Packets transmitted (packets/second) Good packets received (packets/second) Good packets transmitted (packets/second) Full frame speed received (bytes/second) Full frame speed transmitted (bytes/second)
NOTE
The PORTs of the EMS6 board, EFT4 board, and IFH2 board support basic performance entries and extended performance entries. The VCTRUNKs of the EMS6 board support VCG performance entries. The VCTRUNKs of the EFT4 board do not support RMON performance entries. The IDU 605 1F/2F PORT and IFUP support basic performance and extended performance.
31.3 Availability
The RMON feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 31-3 Availability of the RMON Feature Applicable Board EFT4 EMS6 EFP6 IFH2 RTN 620 RTN 605 Applicable Equipment RTN 610/620 RTN 620
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
31-7
Table 31-4 Availability of the RMON Feature Applicable Board EM6T EM6F EM4T EM4F IFU2 IFX2 CSHA CSHB CSHC RTN 910 RTN 910/950 Applicable Equipment
NOTE
l The EFT4 board supports the RMON of PORTs only. l The EMS6 board supports the RMON of PORTs and VCTRUNK. l The IFH2 board supports the RMON of PORTs only. l The RTN 605 board supports the RMON of PORTs and IFUP.

The RMON agent is embedded in an Ethernet board. The Web LCT server or U2000 server functions as the NMS. The NMS exchanges data information with the agent through basic SNMP commands. Thus, the statistical network data is collected.
Statistics Group
The processing flow is as follows: 1. 2. 3. A maintenance engineer clicks Resetting begins. The NMS sends the corresponding request packet to the RMON agent. The RMON agent embedded in the Ethernet board resets the corresponding current performance counting register and returns the corresponding response packet to the NMS according to the information of the statistics group in the request packet. The NMS sends a request packet to the RMON agent at sampling intervals. The RMON agent returns the value of the current performance counting register through the response packet. The maintenance engineer clicks Stop. The NMS stops sending the corresponding request packet to the RMON agent.
4.
5. 6.
31-8
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
l If the maintenance engineer clicks Start, the RMON agent does not reset the performance counting register. l If the maintenance engineer does not select Display Accumulated Value, the NMS obtains the performance value of a sampling interval by performing a subtraction operation between the sampled value returned at the end of the sampling interval and the sampled value returned at the end of the previous sampling interval.
Alarm Group
The processing flow is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The maintenance engineer clicks Apply. The NMS sends the corresponding request packet to the RMON agent. The RMON agent embedded in the Ethernet board monitors the corresponding alarm object according to the information of the alarm group in the request packet. When the alarm object crosses the configured threshold in the corresponding direction, the RMON agent sends the corresponding trap packet to the NMS. The NMS generates the corresponding RMON alarm according to the information in the packet.
History Control Group

The processing flow is as follows: 1. 2. 3. The maintenance engineer clicks Apply. The NMS sends the corresponding request packet to the RMON agent. The RMON agent embedded in the Ethernet board periodically counts the performance value of the monitored object and stores the performance value in the corresponding history performance register according to the information of the history control group in the request packet.
History Group
The processing flow is as follows: 1. 2. 3. The maintenance engineer clicks Query. The NMS sends the corresponding request packet to the RMON agent. The RMON agent embedded in the Ethernet board queries the history performance registers that meet the requirements and returns the performance values in the registers to the NMS through the response packet according to the information of the history group in the request packet.

The RMON function need not be configured and can be directly used. 31.5.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of an Ethernet Port After you configure an RMON statistics group for an Ethernet port, you can browse the realtime statistical performance data of the port. 31.5.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for an Ethernet Port
After you configure an RMON alarm group for an Ethernet port, you can monitor whether the performance value of the port crosses the configured thresholds in the long term. 31.5.3 Configuring a History Control Group When configuring a history control group for an Ethernet port, you configure how the history performance data of the port is monitored. The Ethernet board monitors the history performance data of each port at the default sampling interval of 30 minutes. An Ethernet board stores 50 history performance data items. 31.5.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the History Group of an Ethernet Port After you configure an RMON history group for an Ethernet port, you can browse the statistical history performance data of the port. 31.5.5 Setting Performance Monitoring Status for an Ethernet Port By setting status and period of the RMON performance monitoring, the performance data can be periodically collected.
31.5.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of an Ethernet Port
After you configure an RMON statistics group for an Ethernet port, you can browse the realtime statistical performance data of the port.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet board must be included in the slot layout. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Statistics Group tab. Step 3 Set the required parameters for the statistics group. Step 4 Click Resetting begins.
NOTE
If you click Start, the register of the statistics group is not reset to clear the existing data.
----End
31.5.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for an Ethernet Port

After you configure an RMON alarm group for an Ethernet port, you can monitor whether the performance value of the port crosses the configured thresholds in the long term.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet board must be included in the slot layout. Applies to OptiX RTN 600 NEs.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Alarm Group tab. Step 3 Set the required parameters for the alarm group. Step 4 Click Apply. ----End
31.5.3 Configuring a History Control Group

When configuring a history control group for an Ethernet port, you configure how the history performance data of the port is monitored. The Ethernet board monitors the history performance data of each port at the default sampling interval of 30 minutes. An Ethernet board stores 50 history performance data items.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of RTN 600 NEs: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Click the History Control Group tab. Set the required parameters for the history control group. Click Apply. Click the NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History Control Group from the Function Tree. Set the required parameters for the history control group. Click Query.
----End
31.5.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the History Group of an Ethernet Port
After you configure an RMON history group for an Ethernet port, you can browse the statistical history performance data of the port.
Prerequisite
The monitored objects and the corresponding history table type must be set in the History Control Group tab.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the History Group tab. Step 3 Set the required parameters for the history group. Step 4 Click Query. ----End
31.5.5 Setting Performance Monitoring Status for an Ethernet Port

By setting status and period of the RMON performance monitoring, the performance data can be periodically collected.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the RMON Setting tab. Step 3 Select ports in the upper pane, click Query. Step 4 Select the object from Object, set the monitor status, and enable or disable each collecting period.
NOTE
Enable or disable the collecting period in the Object interface only after you enable the collecting period in the RMON history control group interface.
Step 5 Select the performance event in Event and set the enable status for each monitor period. Step 6 Click Apply. Click Close in the dialog box displayed. ----End
31-12
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
32 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet
32
Configuring Synchronous Ethernet
About This Chapter

The synchronous Ethernet technology realizes the transfer of the clock signal through the Ethernet interface so that the clock frequencies of the equipment are synchronous. 32.1 Feature Description The synchronous Ethernet is a clock frequency synchronization technology of the Ethernet physical layer. The synchronous Ethernet can directly extract the clock signal from the serial bit stream on the Ethernet line and transmit data by using the clock signal to realize the transfer of the clock signal. 32.2 Availability The synchronous Ethernet feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. 32.3 Realization Principle The realization of the synchronous Ethernet feature complies with ITU-T G.8261. 32.4 Configuration Guide By default, the NEs consider that all the Ethernet links provide the clock signal. Hence, you need only to configure the clock source for the NEs that require the synchronous Ethernet clock.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
32-1

The synchronous Ethernet is a clock frequency synchronization technology of the Ethernet physical layer. The synchronous Ethernet can directly extract the clock signal from the serial bit stream on the Ethernet line and transmit data by using the clock signal to realize the transfer of the clock signal.
Application of the Synchronous Ethernet

The OptiX RTN 600 radio transmission system provides the mobile communication network with backhaul links. Currently, the synchronous Ethernet links are used to transfer the clock signal in the wireless access network so that the reliable transfer of the clock signal is ensured. As shown in Figure 32-1, the synchronous Ethernet provided by the microwave transmission equipment realizes the transfer of the timing information between the RNC equipment and node B. Figure 32-1 Application of the synchronous Ethernet in the wireless access network
NE2 FE Node B FE/GE NE1
FE
RNC
Ethernet clock signal Node B Ethernet link
Performance of the Synchronous Ethernet

The synchronous Ethernet complies with ITU-T G.8261. The clock signal recovered by the synchronous Ethernet meets the requirement of 50 ppb frequency accuracy.
32.2 Availability
The synchronous Ethernet feature requires the support of the applicable equipment and boards. Table 32-1 Availability of the synchronous Ethernet feature Applicable Board IFH2 32-2
Applicable Equipment RTN 620 RTN 605
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Applicable Board EM6T EM6F CSHA CSHB CSHC
RTN 910

The realization of the synchronous Ethernet feature complies with ITU-T G.8261. As shown in Figure 32-2, the microwave equipment performs the following operations to realize the synchronous Ethernet function: 1. 2. The data sub-system extracts the clock information (namely, recovery clock) from the packets that the upstream Ethernet port receives. The data sub-system sends the Ethernet recovery clock to the clock processing module. Then, the clock processing module locks the Ethernet recovery clock to the local system clock and provides the system synchronous clock. The system synchronous clock provides a reference clock for the other modules of the system and the services (for example, microwave services or node B that is interconnected with the downstream Ethernet port) so that the system is synchronized with the Ethernet.
3.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
32-3
Figure 32-2 Realization principle of the synchronous Ethernet

Microwave services Orderwire NMS ...
CPU sub-system
IF sub-system
Orderwire and auxiliary interface module
Other modules
System synchronous clock
Local system clock Clock processing module
Ethernet recovered clock Ethernet services Data sub-system

By default, the NEs consider that all the Ethernet links provide the clock signal. Hence, you need only to configure the clock source for the NEs that require the synchronous Ethernet clock. l l In the case of the IDU 620, see 14.7.8 Configuring the Clock Sources to configure the Ethernet clock source. In the case of the IDU 605 1F/2F, see 14.7.9 Configuring the Ethernet Clock Source to configure the Ethernet clock source.
32-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
33 Modifying the Configuration Data
33
Modifying the Configuration Data
About This Chapter

When you need to adjust the existing configuration data related to topologies and services, you can modify the configuration data. 33.1 Modifying NE Attributes You can modify the existing NE configuration data that needs adjustment. 33.2 Modifying the Board Configuration Data You can modify the existing board configuration data that needs adjustment. 33.3 Modifying the Fiber Configuration Data You can modify the existing fiber configuration data that needs adjustment. 33.4 Modifying the Service Configuration Data You can modify the existing service configuration data that needs adjustment.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
33-1
33.1 Modifying NE Attributes

You can modify the existing NE configuration data that needs adjustment. 33.1.1 Modifying the NE ID The ECC protocol uses the NE ID as the unique identifier of an NE. Hence, you need to assign a unique NE ID to each NE when planning a network. If an NE ID conflicts with another NE ID, it causes an ECC route conflict and the U2000 cannot manage certain NEs. During the commissioning or expansion process, when you need to adjust the original network planning and change NE IDs, you can use the U2000 to change NE IDs. 33.1.2 Modifying the NE Name You can modify the NE name as required. This operation does not affect the running of the NE. 33.1.3 Deleting NEs If you have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the U2000. Deleting an NE removes all information of the NE from the U2000 but does not affect the running of the equipment. 33.1.4 Modifying GNE Parameters During the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or modify the communication address. 33.1.5 Changing the GNE for NEs When the GNE that the non-gateway NE belongs to is changed and this non-gateway NE does not belong to another GNE, you need to change the GNE to maintain the communication between the NEs and the U2000. When the number of NEs managed by a certain GNE exceeds a certain number (It is recommended that the number of non-gateway NEs that a GNE manages be no more than 50 or 60 at most.), change the GNE for certain NEs so that the communication between the U2000 and the NEs is not affected.

The ECC protocol uses the NE ID as the unique identifier of an NE. Hence, you need to assign a unique NE ID to each NE when planning a network. If an NE ID conflicts with another NE ID, it causes an ECC route conflict and the U2000 cannot manage certain NEs. During the commissioning or expansion process, when you need to adjust the original network planning and change NE IDs, you can use the U2000 to change NE IDs.
Prerequisite
Precautions
CAUTION
Modifying the NE ID may interrupt NE communication and reset the NE.
33-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Modify NE ID, and the Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Enter the New ID and the New Extended ID. Click OK. Step 4 Click OK in the Warning dialog box. ----End
33.1.2 Modifying the NE Name

You can modify the NE name as required. This operation does not affect the running of the NE.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the NE Attribute dialog box, enter a new NE name in Name. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
NOTE
An NE name consists of up to 64 characters, including letters, symbols, and numerals, except the following special characters | : * ? " < >.
33.1.3 Deleting NEs

If you have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the U2000. Deleting an NE removes all information of the NE from the U2000 but does not affect the running of the equipment.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NM maintainer" authority or higher.
Context
When the NE is not logged in, you can delete the NE on the U2000.
CAUTION
If an NE is deleted, the links related to the NE are also deleted. When a GNE is deleted, if no standby GNE is provided for the NEs that were originally managed by the deleted GNE, the communication between those NEs and the U2000 is interrupted.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
33-3
Procedure
l Delete a single or RTN NE. 1. 2. l 1. Right-click the NE on the Main Topology and choose Delete > Delete Device from the shortcut menu. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click Yes. The NE icon is deleted from the Main Topology. Choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the main menu. The Configuration Data Management window is displayed. . The Configuration Data In the left-hand pane, select multiple NEs and click Management List pane displays the configuration data of all the selected NEs. Select the NEs to be deleted, right-click and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. The Delete the NE dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
Delete NEs in batches.
2. 3. 4. ----End
33.1.4 Modifying GNE Parameters

During the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or modify the communication address.
Prerequisite
Precautions
CAUTION
This is a potential service affecting operation. Specifically, it may interrupt the communication between a GNE and the U2000, and the communication between the GNE and the non-gateway NEs that are managed by the GNE.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. Click the GNE tab. Step 2 Select the GNE to be modified, right-click and choose Modify GNE from the shortcut menu. Step 3 In the Modify GNE dialog box displayed, set Gateway Type . l When Gateway Type is set to IP Gateway, modify IP Address.
33-4
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
When Gateway Type is set to OSI Gateway, modify NSAP Address.
NOTE
l It is not recommended to modify the Port No.. l Make sure that the IP address of the GNE is in the same network segment as the IP address of the U2000. When the U2000 server and the GNE are in different network segments, you need to set the network port attributes of the router through which the U2000 server and the GNE are connected. In this way, the U2000 can log in to the GNE.
Step 4 Click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close. ----End
33.1.5 Changing the GNE for NEs

When the GNE that the non-gateway NE belongs to is changed and this non-gateway NE does not belong to another GNE, you need to change the GNE to maintain the communication between the NEs and the U2000. When the number of NEs managed by a certain GNE exceeds a certain number (It is recommended that the number of non-gateway NEs that a GNE manages be no more than 50 or 60 at most.), change the GNE for certain NEs so that the communication between the U2000 and the NEs is not affected.
Prerequisite
Precautions
CAUTION
This operation may interrupt the NE communication.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. Step 2 Click the NE tab. Step 3 Select an NE. Double-click the Primary GNE1 field and select a GNE from the drop-down list.
Step 4 Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. Step 5 Click Refresh. Test the modification with reference to Checking the Network Communication Status. ----End
33.2 Modifying the Board Configuration Data

You can modify the existing board configuration data that needs adjustment. 33.2.1 Adding Boards When manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the NE Panel. You can either add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do not exist on the actual equipment. 33.2.2 Deleting Boards To modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boards from the NE Panel. 33.2.3 Modifying Board Configuration Parameters You can modify the existing board configuration data that needs adjustment.
33.2.1 Adding Boards

When manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the NE Panel. You can either add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do not exist on the actual equipment.
Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The NE must be created. There must be idle slot on the NE Panel.
Context
The physical boards are the actual boards inserted in the shelf. A logical board refers to a board that is created on the U2000. After a logical board is created, you can configure the relevant services. If the corresponding physical board is online, the configured services can be available.
NOTE
The NE panel is able to indicate the mapping relation between slots that house processing boards and interface boards. When you click a processing board that is paired with an interface board in the NE panel, the ID of the slot that houses the mapping interface board is displayed in orange.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the NE Panel. For the RTN equipment, double-click the icon of the NE.
NOTE
Currently, the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800 T32 equipments can be managed individually as an NE, and can also be managed in an optical NE. For the two equipments, you can double-click the NE On the Main Topology, the NE Panel is displayed.
Step 2 Right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from the drop-down list. ----End
33.2.2 Deleting Boards

To modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boards from the NE Panel.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. The services and protection groups must be deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the NE Panel. For the RTN equipment, double-click the icon of the NE. Step 2 Right-click the board you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
Certain boards, such as AUX boards, cannot be deleted. The boards that can be deleted vary with different types of equipment. For details, see the Hardware Description of each type of the equipment.
Step 3 Click OK in the Delete Board dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK to delete the board. ----End
33.2.3 Modifying Board Configuration Parameters

You can modify the existing board configuration data that needs adjustment.
Prerequisite
To modify different configuration parameters of different boards, you may need to operate as NM users with different authorities. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. must be available at least.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose a proper item from the Function Tree. Board Type SDH board Parameters Multiplex section shared attribute, laser enabling/ disabling, optical interface loopback, hardware REG enabling Tributary loopback, service load indication Port enabling, working mode, maximum frame length, MAC loopback, PHY loopback, TAG, entry test Application Scenario See Configuring SDH Boards.
PDH board Ethernet board
See Configuring PDH Boards. See Configuring Ethernet Boards.
Step 2 In the right-hand pane, modify the existing parameter settings and click Apply. ----End
33.3 Modifying the Fiber Configuration Data

You can modify the existing fiber configuration data that needs adjustment. 33.3.1 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information You can modify the name, attenuation, length, and type of a fiber/cable according to its connection status and physical features. 33.3.2 Deleting Fibers When adjusting the network if you need to delete the NEs or change the links between NEs, you need to delete the fiber connections between the NEs. 33.3.3 Deleting DCN Communication Cables In certain scenarios such as network adjustment, you can delete an unwanted DCN communication cable that is created previously.
33.3.1 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information

You can modify the name, attenuation, length, and type of a fiber/cable according to its connection status and physical features.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > Fiber/Cable Management from the main menu. The information of all fiber/cable is displayed in the pane on the right. Step 2 Modifying the fiber/cable information. l In the Name column, right-click the value for a fiber/cable and choose Modify Fiber/ Cable from the shortcut menu. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, enter a proper name for the fiber/cable and click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. In the Length(km) column, right-click the value for a fiber/cable and choose Modify Fiber/ Cable from the shortcut menu. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, enter the actual length for the fiber/cable and click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. Modify the attenuation of a fiber. 1. 2. l In the Attenuation column, right-click the value for a fiber and choose Modify Fiber/ Cable from the shortcut menu. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the actual loss and click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. In the Type column, right-click the value for a fiber and choose Modify Fiber/ Cable from the shortcut menu. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, select the actual type of the fiber from the drop-down list and click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
Modify the type of the fiber. 1. 2.
----End
33.3.2 Deleting Fibers

When adjusting the network if you need to delete the NEs or change the links between NEs, you need to delete the fiber connections between the NEs.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > Fiber/Cable Management from the main menu. Step 2 Select the fiber you want to delete, right-click and choose Delete Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu. The Warning dialog box is displayed. Click OK to delete the fiber/cable.
CAUTION
The deletion of the fiber/cable will delete the related protection subnets, trails and user-defined information. Exercise caution before you delete the fiber/cable. You can export the script of the entire network first to avoid deletion by mistake. Step 3 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. ----End
33.3.3 Deleting DCN Communication Cables

In certain scenarios such as network adjustment, you can delete an unwanted DCN communication cable that is created previously.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 On the Main Topology, select a cable, right-click and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. Step 2 In the Delete Link dialog box displayed, click OK. ----End
33.4 Modifying the Service Configuration Data

You can modify the existing service configuration data that needs adjustment. 33.4.1 Modifying SDH Services To modify an SDH service, you can use the modification function of the U2000, or delete the service and then create the cross-connection again. 33.4.2 Deleting SDH Services You can delete an existing SDH service. 33.4.3 Deleting EPL Services You can delete an existing EPL service. 33.4.4 Deleting EVPL Services You can delete an existing EVPL service. 33.4.5 Deleting EPLAN Services
You can delete an existing EPLAN service. 33.4.6 Converting a Normal Service to an SNCP Service The SNCP service features the dual fed function and is used to protect cross-subnet services. When configuring RTN services on a per-NE basis, you can perform this operation to convert a configured normal service to an SNCP service. 33.4.7 Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal Service The SNCP service features the dual fed function and is used to protect cross-subnet services. When configuring RTN services on a per-NE basis, you can perform this operation to convert a configured SNCP service to a normal service.
33.4.1 Modifying SDH Services

To modify an SDH service, you can use the modification function of the U2000, or delete the service and then create the cross-connection again.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
Performing this operation interrupts the service that you modify.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select a cross-connection and choose Display > Expand to Unidirectional. Step 3 Optional: If the service to be modified is active, you should deactivate the service. Select the service that you want to modify, and click Deactivate.
CAUTION
Deactivation will interrupt services. Step 4 Click OK in the Confirm dialog box is displayed twice. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation was successful. Step 5 Click Close. Step 6 After the cross-connection is deactivated, modify the SDH service in the mode in Step 7 or Step 8.

NOTE
l By using the mode in Step 7, you can modify the source or sink of a service, but the source and sink must be on the same board before and after the modification. l If the modification requirement cannot be met in the mode in Step 7 (for example, a pass-through service needs to be configured to the local through modification), you can delete the original service and create the cross-connection again in the mode in Step 8, to achieve the modification.
Step 7 Optional: To modify the SDH service, choose Modify from the shortcut menu. 1. 2. Select the service that you want to modify, right-click, and choose Modify from the shortcut menu. The Modify SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Modify Source VC4 or Sink VC4, Source Timeslot Range, and Sink Timeslot Range.
NOTE
In this mode, you can modify only Source VC4 or Sink VC4. The source VC4 and sink VC4 cannot be modified at the same time.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close. Select the service that is modified, and click Activate. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Step 8 Optional: To modify the SDH service, delete the service and then create the service again. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the service that you want to modify, and click Delete. Click OK and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close. The service is deleted. Create the service again as required. For details, see Creating SDH Services.
----End
33.4.2 Deleting SDH Services

You can delete an existing SDH service.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query to query existing services. Step 3 Optional: If the service to be deleted is active, you should deactivate the service. Select the service that you want to delete and click Deactivate.
33-12
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
CAUTION
Deactivation will interrupt services. Step 4 Select the desired service and click Delete. Step 5 In the Confirm dialog box displayed, click OK. Step 6 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close. ----End
33.4.3 Deleting EPL Services

You can delete an existing EPL service.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The EPL service must be created.
Context
CAUTION
Deleting EPL services interrupts services.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the desired EPL service and click Delete. Step 3 In the Warning dialog box displayed, click Yes. Step 4 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close. ----End
33.4.4 Deleting EVPL Services

You can delete an existing EVPL service.
Prerequisite
l l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The EVPL service must be created.
Context
CAUTION
Deleting EVPL services interrupts services.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the desired EVPL service and click Delete. Step 3 In the Warning dialog box displayed, click Yes. Step 4 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close. ----End
33.4.5 Deleting EPLAN Services

You can delete an existing EPLAN service.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The EPLAN service must be created
Context
CAUTION
Deleting EPLAN services interrupts services.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the desired EPLAN service and click Delete. Step 3 In the Hint dialog box displayed, click Yes. Step 4 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close. ----End
33.4.6 Converting a Normal Service to an SNCP Service

The SNCP service features the dual fed function and is used to protect cross-subnet services. When configuring RTN services on a per-NE basis, you can perform this operation to convert a configured normal service to an SNCP service.
Prerequisite
The normal service must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Click Query to query the cross-connection services from the NE. Step 3 Click Display and choose Expand from the drop-down list, to display every service. Step 4 Right-click a non-SNCP service and choose Convert to SNCP from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Configure the protection service and click OK. ----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
33-15
33.4.7 Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal Service

The SNCP service features the dual fed function and is used to protect cross-subnet services. When configuring RTN services on a per-NE basis, you can perform this operation to convert a configured SNCP service to a normal service.
Prerequisite
The SNCP service must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Click Query to query the cross-connection services from the NE. Step 3 Right-click an SNCP service and choose SNCP Working Service Change to Normal Service from the shortcut menu. The protection service is then deleted.
NOTE
To convert the service in the protection path into a normal service, right-click the SNCP service and choose SNCP Protection Service Change to Normal Service from the shortcut menu. The working service is then deleted.
----End
33-16
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
34 Common Maintenance Operations
34
Common Maintenance Operations
About This Chapter

To ensure that the transmission equipment can be normally running for long, you need to periodically maintain the transmission equipment or perform some simple operations of troubleshooting on existing problems. 34.1 Checking the Network Communication Status On some occasions, the U2000 cannot manage some NEs during the running of the network. By checking the communication status of the network, you can learn the communication status between the U2000 and NEs. 34.2 Turning On and Off a Laser You can turn off or turn on a laser when necessary. For example, if an optical port does not carry services, you can turn off the laser to prevent hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage. You can turn on the laser when the optical port needs to carry services. 34.3 Setting a Scheduled Task The U2000 can automatically executing certain tasks in a scheduled time without manual intervention. You can set and modify these scheduled tasks as required. 34.4 Checking Networkwide Maintenance Status By checking the networkwide maintenance status, network maintenance personnel can learn the running status of a network in a timely manner, to avoid impact on services due to misconfiguration. 34.5 Checking Protection Switching Status During the equipment maintenance or in other cases that require you to check the protection switching status, you can check the protection switching status, to help to locate the fault and learn the current network running status. 34.6 Resetting Boards You can reset a board by using the U2000 by following the instructions below. 34.7 Performing a Loopback The loopback is a common and effective way to locate equipment faults. By using the U2000 you can set a loopback for equipment. 34.8 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown
You can enable the automatic laser shut down function. In the event of a fiber cut, the laser at an optical port is automatically off, to prevent hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage. 34.9 Disabling Service-Affecting Settings Automatically Loopback and laser shutdown are useful NE maintenance functions. Performing these functions may interrupt services at the port and may also interrupt the communication between the NE and the U2000. Hence, you can set automatic disabling before performing loopback or laser shutdown so that the NE automatically cancels the loopback or laser shutdown. 34.10 Performing a PRBS Test You can perform a PRBS test on a path to check the quality of the path. The test result is displayed in the coordinates pane. 34.11 Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol Faults In the case of an Ethernet service fault, you can diagnose the Ethernet protocol and then restart the protocol state machine by restoring the protocol, to remove the protocol faults. 34.12 Checking the Network Communication Status On some occasions, the U2000 cannot manage some NEs during the running of the network. By checking the communication status of the network, you can learn the communication status between the U2000 and NEs.
34-2
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)

Prerequisite
Context
Procedure
----End
34.2 Turning On and Off a Laser

You can turn off or turn on a laser when necessary. For example, if an optical port does not carry services, you can turn off the laser to prevent hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage. You can turn on the laser when the optical port needs to carry services.
Prerequisite
l l
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The related board must be created.
Context
CAUTION
If you turn off a laser, services may be interrupted or you may fail to log in to certain NEs.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click By Board/Port (channel) and select Port from the drop-down list. Step 3 Double-click Laser Switch and set the laser status of each port to Open or Close as required. Step 4 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
NOTE
If you set Laser Switch to Close, you need to click OK in the Confirm dialog box. In the Prompt dialog box, click OK.
----End
34.3 Setting a Scheduled Task

The U2000 can automatically executing certain tasks in a scheduled time without manual intervention. You can set and modify these scheduled tasks as required.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NM maintainer" authority or higher.
If a large number of performance data need to be collected, this may cause communication congestion and thus the communication between the U2000 and NEs stops. Hence, observe the following rules to collect the performance data: l l When creating a single performance data collection task, the number of NEs related to the same GNE does not exceed 5. Run the performance data collection task when network traffic is low.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > Task Schedule > Task Management from the main menu. Step 2 Optional: Create a scheduled task. 1. 2. 3.
34-4
Click New and the New Task is displayed. Enter a task name and select the task type of the scheduled task and the run type. Then, click Next. Set the Time Setting or the Period Setting. Click Next.
4. 5.
Follow the task creation wizard to set the parameters of the scheduled task and click Next for several times until the Finish button is displayed. Click Finish. A scheduled task is successfully created.
Step 3 Optional: Double-click a scheduled task to modify the parameters of the task. Step 4 Optional: Right-click a scheduled task and choose Timely Suspend/Resume to set the suspend time or the resume time for the task. Step 5 Optional: Right-click a scheduled task and choose Run At Once to start executing the task.
NOTE
Run At Once means to immediately execute the task, no matter the scheduled time comes or not. Resume means to start the scheduled task. The task is executed at the scheduled time.
----End
34.4 Checking Networkwide Maintenance Status

By checking the networkwide maintenance status, network maintenance personnel can learn the running status of a network in a timely manner, to avoid impact on services due to misconfiguration.
To check the networkwide maintenance status, check the following: l l l l l l l Which ports are looped back. Which lasers are off. Which paths are in Non-loaded state. Which alarms are suppressed. Which alarms are inserted. Which alarms are reversed. Which ports have disabled DCCs.
34.4.1 Checking Path Loopback Status You can view all optical or electrical ports for which you configure loopback in the network and view the loopback status. You can also cancel the loopback, to avoid impact on services due to a loopback that should not be performed. 34.4.2 Checking Port Laser Status You can view all lasers that are in the off state in the network and modify their status, to avoid impact on services due to misconfiguration. 34.4.3 Checking Path Loading Status You can view all paths that are set to the non-loaded state in the network and modify the loading status, to avoid impact on services due to misconfiguration. 34.4.4 Checking Path Alarm Reversion Status You can view all paths for which you configure alarm reversion in the network and modify the alarm reversion status, to avoid impact on services due to misconfiguration. 34.4.5 Checking Path Alarm Suppression Status
You can view all alarms for which you configure alarm suppression in the network. You can also restore the suppression status of an alarm to the default value, so that the alarm monitoring of the service is not affected by improper settings. 34.4.6 Checking the DCC Enabling Status You can view all ports where DCC is in the shutdown state in the network, and you can modify the DCC enabling status for the ports.
34.4.1 Checking Path Loopback Status

You can view all optical or electrical ports for which you configure loopback in the network and view the loopback status. You can also cancel the loopback, to avoid impact on services due to a loopback that should not be performed.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Click the networkwide maintenance status icon Maintenance Status dialog box is displayed. on the toolbar, and the Networkwide
Step 2 Choose Loopback Status, select the NEs from the Object Tree and click loopback status for a path from U2000. Step 3 Click Query, view the loopback status from the NE.
NOTE
, view the
If the queried information is null, it indicates that no path is set to loopback.
Step 4 Optional: Select a loopback status and then click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
CAUTION
Setting a loopback may interrupt services. Exercise caution when you perform this operation.
NOTE
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher to set loopback for a path.
----End
34.4.2 Checking Port Laser Status

You can view all lasers that are in the off state in the network and modify their status, to avoid impact on services due to misconfiguration.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher to set the laser status for an optical port.
Procedure
Step 2 Choose Laser Status, select the NEs from the Object Tree and click status for an optical port from U2000. Step 3 Click Query, view the laser status from the NE.
NOTE
, view the laser
If the queried information is null, it indicates that the laser of the equipment is not shut down.
Step 4 Optional: Set the laser status and then click Apply. If you want to enable the laser, in the OK dialog box displayed, click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
WARNING
Enabling a laser is a dangerous operation. Misoperation may cause injuries to human eyes. Exercise caution when you perform this operation.
CAUTION
Close the Laser will interrupt the service. ----End
34.4.3 Checking Path Loading Status

You can view all paths that are set to the non-loaded state in the network and modify the loading status, to avoid impact on services due to misconfiguration.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 2 Choose Maintenance Status > Path Loading and view the loading status for a path.
NOTE
If the queried information is null, it indicates that no path is set to Non-Loaded.
Step 3 Optional: Set the loading status and then click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
CAUTION
Set the path to be Non-Loaded will interrupt the service.
NOTE
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher to set the loading status for a path.
----End
34.4.4 Checking Path Alarm Reversion Status

You can view all paths for which you configure alarm reversion in the network and modify the alarm reversion status, to avoid impact on services due to misconfiguration.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. Applies to the MSTP, WDM, NA WDM, RTN, PTN, submarine equipment.
Procedure
Step 2 Choose Alarm Reversion, select one or more NEs from the Object Tree and click view the alarm reversion status for a path.
NOTE
If the queried information is null, it indicates that the alarm reversion is not set for any port.
Step 3 Optional: Set the alarm reversion status and then click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
NOTE
l If the alarm reversion is set for a port, the alarm status of this port is opposite to the actual status. That is, when an alarm exists, the status is displayed as normal. This setting helps filter out negligible alarms. When alarm suppression is set for a LOS alarm of the port, you cannot set alarm reversion at the same time. l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher to set the alarm reversion status for a path.
----End
34.4.5 Checking Path Alarm Suppression Status

You can view all alarms for which you configure alarm suppression in the network. You can also restore the suppression status of an alarm to the default value, so that the alarm monitoring of the service is not affected by improper settings.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. Applies to the MSTP, WDM, NA WDM, RTN, PTN, submarine equipment.
Procedure
Step 2 Choose Alarm Suppression, select one or more NEs from the Object Tree and click view the alarm suppression status for a path.
NOTE
If the queried information is null, it indicates that the alarm suppression is not set for any path.
Step 3 Optional: To restore the suppression status to the default value, right-click and choose Default from the shortcut menu. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
34-9

NOTE
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher to set the alarm suppression status for a path.
----End
34.4.6 Checking the DCC Enabling Status

You can view all ports where DCC is in the shutdown state in the network, and you can modify the DCC enabling status for the ports.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 2 Choose Maintenance Status > DCC Enabling Status and view the DCC enabling status for the ports where DCC is in the shutdown state. Step 3 Optional: Select a port for which you want to modify its DCC enabling status, right-click and choose Enabled from the shortcut menu to modify its status to Enabled. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
NOTE
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher to modify the DCC enabling status for a port.
----End
34.5 Checking Protection Switching Status

During the equipment maintenance or in other cases that require you to check the protection switching status, you can check the protection switching status, to help to locate the fault and learn the current network running status. 34.5.1 Checking the SNCP Service Switching Status By checking the SNCP service switching status, a network maintenance engineer can detect faults in the NE or in the fibers of the SNCP protection subnet, in a timely manner. The engineer can also locate the faulty point by checking the switching status of each NE in the protection subnet. 34.5.2 Checking Linear MSP Switching Status To detect faults in NEs or in the fibers of a linear MSP protection subnet, the maintenance engineers can check the switching status of the linear MSP. The engineers can then locate the point where the fault is generated, according to the switching status of each NE in the protection subnet. 34.5.3 Checking 1+1 Board Switching Status
If board 1+1 protection switching is triggered, it indicates that the protected board has failed. The network maintenance engineers can check 1+1 board switching status to detect the faults that caused the failure. 34.5.4 Checking the Switching Status of 1+1 Intermediate Frequency Protection If 1+1 intermediate frequency switching takes place, it indicates that the protection intermediate frequency board becomes faulty. By checking the switching status of 1+1 intermediate frequency protection, you can know the fault timely and thus prevent it from affecting services. 34.5.5 Check the Switching Status of the N+1 Protection After configuring the N+1 protection, you can query the switching status of the protection on the U2000. 34.5.6 Checking GNE Switching Status If the active GNE of an NE fails, and the NE has a standby GNE, the NE automatically communicates with the U2000 through the standby GNE. To detect the GNE communication failure in time, you need to check the GNE switching status to ensure that the NEs communicate correctly with the U2000 through the GNE. 34.5.7 Checking the Clock Switching Status Clock failure may interrupt services. To detect failure of the clock source in time, you need to check the clock switching status.
34.5.1 Checking the SNCP Service Switching Status

By checking the SNCP service switching status, a network maintenance engineer can detect faults in the NE or in the fibers of the SNCP protection subnet, in a timely manner. The engineer can also locate the faulty point by checking the switching status of each NE in the protection subnet.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. The SNCP service must be configured.
Context
Lockout switching means regardless of the status of the working and protection channels, the services are locked in the working channel.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree. All SNCP groups are displayed. Step 2 Select an SNCP group, click Function and choose Query Switching Status from the drop-down list. ----End
34.5.2 Checking Linear MSP Switching Status

To detect faults in NEs or in the fibers of a linear MSP protection subnet, the maintenance engineers can check the switching status of the linear MSP. The engineers can then locate the
point where the fault is generated, according to the switching status of each NE in the protection subnet.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. The MSP protection group must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the pane on the right, select an MSP protection group. The Status of each node in the protection group is displayed in the pane on the right. Step 3 Click Query and select Query Switching Status to query the switching status of the nodes. ----End
34.5.3 Checking 1+1 Board Switching Status

If board 1+1 protection switching is triggered, it indicates that the protected board has failed. The network maintenance engineers can check 1+1 board switching status to detect the faults that caused the failure.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. The protection board must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query to query the 1+1 board switching status. Step 3 Click Close. ----End
34.5.4 Checking the Switching Status of 1+1 Intermediate Frequency Protection

If 1+1 intermediate frequency switching takes place, it indicates that the protection intermediate frequency board becomes faulty. By checking the switching status of 1+1 intermediate frequency protection, you can know the fault timely and thus prevent it from affecting services.
Prerequisite
l l
34-12
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. The 1+1 Intermediate Frequency Protection must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select a protection group, and click Query. Step 3 View the Switching Status of NE and Switching Status of Channel. ----End
34.5.5 Check the Switching Status of the N+1 Protection

After configuring the N+1 protection, you can query the switching status of the protection on the U2000.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. The N+1 protection group must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE to be queried. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > N+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the IF N+1 protection group and click Query. In Slot Mapping Relation, view Switching Status.
NOTE
l The conditions that trigger the switching are as follows: l SF: R_LOS, R_LOC, R_LOF, MS_AIS and B2_EXC alarms, removal of the board, and cold reset of the board. l SD: B2_SD alarm. l The switching statuses are as follows: lockout, forced switching, SD switching, SF switching, manual switching, wait to restore, exercise switching, non-revertive request and normal.
----End
34.5.6 Checking GNE Switching Status

If the active GNE of an NE fails, and the NE has a standby GNE, the NE automatically communicates with the U2000 through the standby GNE. To detect the GNE communication failure in time, you need to check the GNE switching status to ensure that the NEs communicate correctly with the U2000 through the GNE.
Prerequisite
The active and standby GNEs must be created for an NE. You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. Step 2 Click the NE tab. Step 3 Click Refresh to query the GNE switching status. ----End
34.5.7 Checking the Clock Switching Status

Clock failure may interrupt services. To detect failure of the clock source in time, you need to check the clock switching status.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. The reference clock source must be set.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Clock Source Switching tab, and click Query to query the current switching status of the current clock source.
Step 3 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. ----End
34.6 Resetting Boards

You can reset a board by using the U2000 by following the instructions below. 34.6.1 Reset Reset is a protection scheme for applications and data files on the equipment. When a board is not running properly, you can reset the board so that it returns to the normal state. Reset is of two types: warm reset and cold reset. A cold reset takes more time than a warm reset. After a board is reset, the data on the board is not lost, but the resetting process may interrupt services. 34.6.2 Resetting the SCC Board You can reset the SCC board by using the U2000. Resetting the SCC is a maintenance method used in the case of an improper SCC working status. 34.6.3 Resetting a Non-SCC Board
You can reset a non-SCC board by using the U2000. Resetting a board is a maintenance method used in the case of an improper board working status. 34.6.4 Resetting a Board You can reset a board by using the U2000. Resetting a board is a maintenance method used in the case of an improper board working status.
34.6.1 Reset
Reset is a protection scheme for applications and data files on the equipment. When a board is not running properly, you can reset the board so that it returns to the normal state. Reset is of two types: warm reset and cold reset. A cold reset takes more time than a warm reset. After a board is reset, the data on the board is not lost, but the resetting process may interrupt services. l l Performing a warm reset restores the applications and data to the normal state. Warm reset usually does not affect services. Performing a cold reset restores the applications and data to the normal state before a CPU power failure. Cold reset usually affects services.
34.6.2 Resetting the SCC Board

You can reset the SCC board by using the U2000. Resetting the SCC is a maintenance method used in the case of an improper SCC working status.
Prerequisite
When the SCC is being reset, network communication is interrupted temporarily until the SCC returns to the normal state. This may affect service switching. You can reset the SCC in the following three ways: l l l Performing a reset to the SCC by using the U2000. Performing a reset to the SCC by removing and inserting it. Performing a reset to the SCC by pushing the Reset button on the SCC.
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click an NE on the Main Topology and the slot layout is displayed. Step 2 Right-click the SCC and choose SCC Reset from the shortcut menu. Step 3 In the Warning dialog box displayed, click OK. Step 4 Click Close in the dialog box displayed. ----End
34.6.3 Resetting a Non-SCC Board

You can reset a non-SCC board by using the U2000. Resetting a board is a maintenance method used in the case of an improper board working status.
Prerequisite
Performing a warm reset usually does not affect services, but performing a cold reset usually affects running services. You can reset a non-SCC board in the following two ways: l l Performing a warm or cold reset to the board by using the U2000. Performing a cold reset to the board by removing and inserting it.
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click an NE on the Main Topology and the slot layout is displayed. Step 2 Right-click a non-SCC board and choose Cold Reset or Warm Reset from the shortcut menu. Step 3 In the Warning dialog box displayed, click OK. Step 4 Click Close in the prompt dialog box. ----End
34.6.4 Resetting a Board

You can reset a board by using the U2000. Resetting a board is a maintenance method used in the case of an improper board working status.
Prerequisite
Context
Performing a cold reset usually affects services. You can reset a board in the following two ways: l l Performing a warm or cold reset to the board by using the U2000. Performing a cold reset to the board by removing and inserting it.
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click an NE on the Main Topology and the Slot Layout is displayed. Step 2 Right-click a non-SCC board and choose Cold Reset or Warm Reset from the shortcut menu. Click OK in the Warning dialog box to confirm the reset. Step 3 Click Close in the prompt dialog box. ----End
34.7 Performing a Loopback

The loopback is a common and effective way to locate equipment faults. By using the U2000 you can set a loopback for equipment.
The support for loopback functions depends on equipment types. For details, refer to the specific equipment manuals. A loopback can be performed for different objects. 34.7.1 Setting a Loopback for an SDH Interface You can set a loopback for an SDH interface by using the U2000. The SDH interface loopback is a common fault location method used to test and maintain the SDH board. The SDH interface loopback is used to test the fiber connections and interfaces on the SDH board, and is also used to test the SDH service processing module and the cross-connect board. 34.7.2 Setting a Loopback for a PDH Interface You can set a loopback for a PDH interface by using the U2000. The PDH interface loopback is a common fault location method used to test and maintain the PDH board. The PDH interface loopback is used to test the fiber connections and interfaces on the PDH board, and is also used to test the PDH service processing module and the cross-connect board. 34.7.3 Setting a Loopback for an Ethernet Interface You can set a loopback for an Ethernet interface by using the U2000. The Ethernet interface loopback is a common fault location method used to test and maintain the Ethernet board. The Ethernet interface loopback is used to test the fiber connections on the Ethernet board, physical and MAC layers of the Ethernet interface, and SDH layer (that is, the line). 34.7.4 Setting a Loopback for an IF Interface You can to set loopback for an intermediate frequency (IF) interface by using the U2000. The IF interface loopback is a commonly used way of fault location during the test and maintenance of the IF boards. By performing loopback for an IF interface, the system can determine whether the IF interface and the fibers (cables) connected to the IF board are normal and whether the IF board service processing module and the cross-connect board are normal. 34.7.5 Setting a Loopback for an ODU Interface You can set a loopback for an ODU interface by using the U2000. The ODU interface loopback is a common fault location method used to test and maintain the ODU board. The ODU interface loopback is used to test the radio frequency (RF) link and interfaces on the ODU board, as well as to test the ODU service processing module and the cross-connect board. 34.7.6 Setting a Loopback for a Digital Interface This section describes how to set the loopback for the digital interface on the U2000. The digital interface loopback is a commonly used way of fault location during the test and maintenance of the IF boards. By performing the loopback at a digital interface, the system can determine whether the IF interface and the fibers/cables connected to the IF board are normal and whether the IF board service processing module and the cross-connect board are normal. 34.7.7 Setting a Loopback for a VC4 Path You can set a loopback for a VC4 path by using the U2000. The VC4 path loopback is a common fault location method used to test and maintain the SDH board. The VC4 path loopback is used to test the fiber connections and interfaces on the SDH board, and is also used to test the SDH service processing module and the cross-connect board. 34.7.8 Setting a Loopback for a VC3 Path The VC3 path loopback is a common fault location method to test and maintain the board. The VC3 path loopback is used to test the fiber connections and SDH interfaces on the board, and is also used to test the SDH service processing module and the cross-connect board.
34.7.1 Setting a Loopback for an SDH Interface

You can set a loopback for an SDH interface by using the U2000. The SDH interface loopback is a common fault location method used to test and maintain the SDH board. The SDH interface
loopback is used to test the fiber connections and interfaces on the SDH board, and is also used to test the SDH service processing module and the cross-connect board.
Prerequisite
Context
The SDH interface loopback can be set to an outloop or an inloop. l When an outloop is used, the SDH signal received by the NE is returned at the SDH interface. See Figure 34-1. An outloop is used to test the fibers connections and interfaces on the SDH board. Figure 34-1 Outloop
When an inloop is used, the SDH signal transmitted by the NE is returned to the crossconnect board at the SDH interface. See Figure 34-2. An inloop is used to test the SDH service processing module and the cross-connect board. Figure 34-2 Inloop
CAUTION
As a loopback interrupts services, it is only used for fault location and must be released after the fault is removed.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select By function and select Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback. Step 3 Select an SDH interface from the list and double-click Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback to choose a loopback mode. Step 4 Click Apply and the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click OK and the Prompt dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 7 Click Close.
NOTE
If you select the Non Loopback mode, click Apply. A prompt directly is displayed indicating that the operation is successful because Non Loopback does not affect services.
----End
34.7.2 Setting a Loopback for a PDH Interface

You can set a loopback for a PDH interface by using the U2000. The PDH interface loopback is a common fault location method used to test and maintain the PDH board. The PDH interface loopback is used to test the fiber connections and interfaces on the PDH board, and is also used to test the PDH service processing module and the cross-connect board.
Prerequisite
Context
The PDH interface loopback can be set to an outloop or an inloop. l When an outloop is used, the PDH signal received by the NE is returned at the PDH interface. See Figure 34-3. An outloop is used to test the fibers connections and interfaces on the PDH board. Figure 34-3 Outloop
When an inloop is used, the PDH signal transmitted by the NE is returned to the crossconnect board at the PDH interface. See Figure 34-4. An inloop is used to test the PDH service processing module and the cross-connect board.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
34-19
Figure 34-4 Inloop
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select By function and select Tributary Loopback. Step 3 Select a PDH interface from the list and double-click Tributary Loopback to choose the loopback mode. Step 4 Click Apply and the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 6 Click Close.
NOTE
----End
34.7.3 Setting a Loopback for an Ethernet Interface

You can set a loopback for an Ethernet interface by using the U2000. The Ethernet interface loopback is a common fault location method used to test and maintain the Ethernet board. The Ethernet interface loopback is used to test the fiber connections on the Ethernet board, physical and MAC layers of the Ethernet interface, and SDH layer (that is, the line).
Prerequisite
You can perform an inloop for an Ethernet interface by using the U2000.
When an inloop is used, the Ethernet signal transmitted by the NE is returned to the SDH layer at the Ethernet interface. See Figure 34-5. The physical layer inloop is used to test the MAC layer and the SDH layer. The MAC layer inloop is used to test the SDH layer. Figure 34-5 Inloop
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select External Port and click the Basic Attributes tab. Step 3 Select an Ethernet interface from the list and double-click MAC Loopback or PHY Loopback to choose the loopback mode. Step 4 Click Apply and the U2000 prompts that this operation may interrupt the service. Step 5 Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. ----End
34.7.4 Setting a Loopback for an IF Interface

You can to set loopback for an intermediate frequency (IF) interface by using the U2000. The IF interface loopback is a commonly used way of fault location during the test and maintenance of the IF boards. By performing loopback for an IF interface, the system can determine whether the IF interface and the fibers (cables) connected to the IF board are normal and whether the IF board service processing module and the cross-connect board are normal.
Context
IF interface loopback can be set to an outloop or an inloop. l When an outloop is used, the IF service received by NE is returned at the IF interface. See Figure 34-6. An outloop can be used to test the IF interface and the fibers or cables connected to the IF interface.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Figure 34-6 Outloop
When an inloop is used, the IF service transmitted by NE is returned to the cross-connect board at the IF interface. See Figure 34-7. An inloop can be used to test the IF board service processing module and the cross-connect board. Figure 34-7 Inloop
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an IF board and choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select By Function and select IF Port Loopback. Step 3 Select an IF interface from the list and double-click IF Port Loopback to select a loopback mode. Step 4 Click Apply and the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 6 Click Close.
34-22
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
NOTE
----End
34.7.5 Setting a Loopback for an ODU Interface

You can set a loopback for an ODU interface by using the U2000. The ODU interface loopback is a common fault location method used to test and maintain the ODU board. The ODU interface loopback is used to test the radio frequency (RF) link and interfaces on the ODU board, as well as to test the ODU service processing module and the cross-connect board.
Context
The ODU interface loopback can be set to an outloop or an inloop. l When an outloop is used, the RF service received by an NE is returned at the ODU interface. See Figure 34-8. An outloop can be used to test the ODU interface and the RF link connected to the ODU board. Figure 34-8 Outloop
When an inloop is used, the RF service transmitted by NE is returned to the cross-connect board at the ODU interface. See Figure 34-9. An inloop can be used to test the ODU service processing module and the cross-connect board. Figure 34-9 Inloop
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
34-23
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > ODU Interface. Step 2 Select By Function. Select RF Loopback. Step 3 Select an RF interface from the list and double-click RF Loopback to select a loopback mode. Step 4 Click Apply and the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 6 Click Close.
NOTE
----End
34.7.6 Setting a Loopback for a Digital Interface

This section describes how to set the loopback for the digital interface on the U2000. The digital interface loopback is a commonly used way of fault location during the test and maintenance of the IF boards. By performing the loopback at a digital interface, the system can determine whether the IF interface and the fibers/cables connected to the IF board are normal and whether the IF board service processing module and the cross-connect board are normal.
Context
The digital interface loopback includes the outloop and inloop. l When an outloop is used, the IF service received by the NE is returned at the IF interface. See Figure 34-10. An outloop can be used to test the IF interface and the fibers/cables connected to the IF interface. Figure 34-10 Outloop
34-24
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
When an inloop is used, the IF service transmitted by the NE is returned to the cross-connect board at the IF interface. See Figure 34-11. An inloop can be used to test the IF board service processing module and the cross-connect board. Figure 34-11 Inloop
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an IF board and choose Configuration > Digital Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select By Function. Select VC4 Loopback. Step 3 Choose an digital interface from the list and double-click VC4 Loopback to select the loopback mode. Step 4 Click Apply and the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 6 Click Close.
NOTE
----End
34.7.7 Setting a Loopback for a VC4 Path

You can set a loopback for a VC4 path by using the U2000. The VC4 path loopback is a common fault location method used to test and maintain the SDH board. The VC4 path loopback is used to test the fiber connections and interfaces on the SDH board, and is also used to test the SDH service processing module and the cross-connect board.
Prerequisite
The VC4 path loopback can be set to an outloop or an inloop. l When an outloop is used, the VC4 signal received by the NE is returned over the VC4 path. In Figure 34-12, an outloop is set for the first VC4 path on the line board. An outloop is used to test the fibers connections and interfaces on the SDH board. Figure 34-12 Outloop
When an inloop is used, the VC4 signal transmitted by the NE is returned to the crossconnect board over the VC4 path. In Figure 34-13, an inloop is set for the first VC4 path on the line board. An inloop is used to test the SDH service processing module and the cross-connect board. Figure 34-13 Inloop
CAUTION
Procedure
NOTE
For the intermediate frequency board: In the NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > Digital Interface from the Function Tree.
34-26
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
Step 2 Select By function and select VC4 Loopback. Step 3 Select an SDH interface from the list and double-click VC4 Loopback to choose the loopback mode. Step 4 Click Apply and the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 6 Click Close.
NOTE
----End
34.7.8 Setting a Loopback for a VC3 Path

The VC3 path loopback is a common fault location method to test and maintain the board. The VC3 path loopback is used to test the fiber connections and SDH interfaces on the board, and is also used to test the SDH service processing module and the cross-connect board.
Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The related bound path must be configured.
Context
The VC3 path loopback can be set to an outloop or an inloop. l When an outloop is used, the VC3 signal received by the NE is returned over the VC3 path. In Figure 34-14, an outloop is set for the first VC3 path in the first VC4 path on the STM-1 line board. An outloop is used to test the fibers connections and interfaces on the SDH board. Figure 34-14 Outloop
When an inloop is used, the VC3 signal transmitted by the NE is returned over the VC3 path. In Figure 34-15, an inloop is set for the first VC3 path in the first VC4 path on the STM-1 line board. An inloop is used to test the SDH service processing module and the cross-connect board.
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
34-27
Figure 34-15 Inloop
CAUTION
Procedure
NOTE
For the intermediate frequency board: In the NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > Digital Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select By function and select VC3 Loopback. Step 3 Select an SDH interface from the list and double-click VC3 Loopback to choose the loopback mode. Step 4 Click Apply and the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 6 Click Close.
NOTE
----End
34.8 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown

You can enable the automatic laser shut down function. In the event of a fiber cut, the laser at an optical port is automatically off, to prevent hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage.
Prerequisite
The optical interface board must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click a board and choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set Auto ShutDown to Enabled. Set the On Period (ms), Off Period (ms) and Continuously On-Test Period (ms).
34.9 Disabling Service-Affecting Settings Automatically

Loopback and laser shutdown are useful NE maintenance functions. Performing these functions may interrupt services at the port and may also interrupt the communication between the NE and the U2000. Hence, you can set automatic disabling before performing loopback or laser shutdown so that the NE automatically cancels the loopback or laser shutdown.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher..
If a port is the only way for an NE to communicate with the U2000, performing a loopback or laser shutdown at the port results in the loss of communication. Before performing a loopback or laser shutdown, you must set automatic disabling for this NE. Otherwise, after the communication is lost, you cannot use the U2000 to log in to the NE to disable the loopback or laser shutdown.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function from the main menu. Step 2 Select an NE and click the double-right-arrow button (red). Step 3 Select a value in the Auto Disabling and Auto Disabling Time(min). Step 4 Click Apply. ----End
34.10 Performing a PRBS Test

You can perform a PRBS test on a path to check the quality of the path. The test result is displayed in the coordinates pane.
Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. A service must be configured for the port for which you want to perform a PRBS test. The opposite port must be looped back before you perform a PRBS test.
Precaution
CAUTION
Performing a PRBS test interrupts services.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select a channel or a port and set Duration and Measured in Time in the Set Test Parameters area. Step 3 Optional: Select Accumulating Mode. The test result is displayed in the coordinates pane in an accumulative manner. Step 4 Click Start to Test. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that this operation may interrupt the service. Step 5 Click Yes to start the PRBS test. After the test is complete, view the test result in the coordinates pane. ----End
Postrequisite
You need to release loopback on the opposite port after the test is complete.
34.11 Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol Faults

In the case of an Ethernet service fault, you can diagnose the Ethernet protocol and then restart the protocol state machine by restoring the protocol, to remove the protocol faults.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Protocol Fault Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Protocol Type tab and click Diagnosis.
The user interface of the U2000 displays the diagnosis result. ----End

Prerequisite
Context
Procedure
----End
Issue 02 (2010-09-24)
34-31

Operation Guide For RTN Ne Management: Imanager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Guide For RTN Ne Management: Imanager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Guide For RTN Ne Management: Imanager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01

Operation Guide for RTN NE Management

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-09-24) Based on Product Version V100R002C01

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-08-16) Based on Product Version V100R002C01

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4 Configuring PTP Clock.............................................................................................................4-1

6 Configuring Environment Monitor Interfaces.....................................................................6-1

7 Configuring Interfaces (RTN 600)...........................................................................................7-1

8 Configuring Interfaces (RTN 900)...........................................................................................8-1

9 Configuring Radio Links..........................................................................................................9-1

10 Configuring Board 1+1 Protection......................................................................................10-1

11 Configuring the IF 1+1 Protection...................................................................................... 11-1

12 Configuring Network Level Protection.............................................................................12-1

13 Configuring SDH/PDH Services.........................................................................................13-1

14 Ethernet Feature(RTN 600)...................................................................................................14-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15 Ethernet Feature(RTN 900)...................................................................................................15-1

16 Configuring Cross-Polarization Interference Cancellation...........................................16-1

17 Configuring Automatic Transmit Power Control Function...........................................17-1

18 Configuring Hybrid Microwave.........................................................................................18-1

19 Configuring the MSTP..........................................................................................................19-1

20 Configuring the Control Plane............................................................................................20-1

21 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.............................................................................................21-1

23 Configuring a GRE Tunnel..................................................................................................23-1

24 Configuring an MPLS PW....................................................................................................24-1

25 Configuring CES Services....................................................................................................25-1

26 Configuring an ATM Service...............................................................................................26-1

27 Configuring the BFD.............................................................................................................27-1

28 Configuring the IGMP Snooping.......................................................................................28-1

30 Configuring Link State Pass Through...............................................................................30-1

31 Configuring Remote Monitoring Feature.........................................................................31-1

32 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet....................................................................................32-1

33 Modifying the Configuration Data.....................................................................................33-1

34 Common Maintenance Operations.....................................................................................34-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 Creating NEs, Links, and Topology Subnets

Creating NEs, Links, and Topology Subnets

About This Chapter

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 Creating NEs, Links, and Topology Subnets

1.1 Creating NEs

1.1.1 Creating NEs in Batches

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 Creating NEs, Links, and Topology Subnets

l The default NE user is root. l The default password is password.